Stan GIFT OF Professor G.R.Noyes Of? Ann's F SCHLA Andrews Prac Badois's -Key Barbauli lation of stu Eunyan, Illusti Cabinet press Chouque Youi Collot's : Commen Frenc_ ^, , v . J .. iiv . Corinne, OU 1'Italie. By Mme. DE STAEL. An entirely new edition from new stereotype plates. 12mo. Contan's Choix de Poesies. 12mo. De Fivas's Elementary French Reader. 16mo. Classic French Reader. 12rao. j~AU~ 04. <, STANDARD FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. De FlVas's New Grammar of French Grammars, comprising the sub- stance of all the most approved French Grammars extant, but more especially of the Standard Work, " Grammaire des Grammaires," sanctioned by the French Academy and the University of Paris. With numerous Exercises and Examples, illustrative of every rule, 12mo. De Peyrac. French Children at Home An Introduction to u Com- ment on Parle a Paris " ; or, French as Spoken in Paris. 12mo. Dictionaries. See JEWETT, MASSON, MEADOWS, SPIERS AND SCRENNE, and SURENNE. Tolemaque. After the edition of CHARLES LE BRUN. 12mo. - Edited by SURENNE. 18mo. Gerard, George. See CABINET DES FEES. Havet's French Manual. A New Method of acquiring a Conversational Knowledge of the French Language. 12mo. Henaequin, Alfred, Practical Lessons in Idiomatic French. Janet et SCS Amis. Par K. C. H. Dessins de K. C. H. et de R. E. 4to. Handsomely bound and illustrated. Jewett's Spiers's French Dictionary. 8vo. - School edition. 12mo. Le Brun. See FENELON'S T616maque. Marcel. Rational Method, following Nature Step by Step, to Learn How to Read, Hear, Speak, and Write French. By CLAUDE MARCEL. First Book. First American from the second Paris edition. 12mo. See BARBAULD. Marceleau (J. H. C. Lajoie de)- Dictees Corrig6es of Orthographi- cal Exercises, accompanied with Grammatical and Logical Analysis, divided into Two Parts, in Connection with the French Grammar for the Use of Schools. 12mo. Masson, Gustave. A Compendious Dictionary of the French Lan- guage. French-English English-French. Followed by a List of the Principal Diverging Derivations, and preceded by Chronological and Historical Tables. 12mo. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE FRENCH LANGUAGE: WITH THE LESSONS DIVIDED INTO SECTIONS OF A PROPER LENGTH FOR DAILY TASKS, AND NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS, ADDITIONS, AND IMPROVEMENTS, SUITABLE FOR THIS COUNTRY BY V. VALUE. J : V TO WHICH ARE ADDED VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, HIS GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, A NEW INDEX, AND SHORT MODELS OF COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. NEW YOKE: D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 1, 3, AND 5 BOND STEEET. 1883. Entered, according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by D. APPLETON & COMPANY, In tie Clerk's Office of the District Court of.the United States foi tho Southern District of New York. GIFT OF oocAe NOTICE. A KEY to the Exercises of this Grammar is pnb- linhcd in a seuarate volume. PREFACE. n undertaking to edit an improved edition of OLLENDORFF'S FRENWI GRAMMAR, I may be allowed to state my personal familiarity and experience with the system which I have practically taught for many years. However, as the Method is called a New Method; if it deserves that title, its active principle must differ from that of the old mode of tuition, and consequently any one, let him be ever so talented, who, without being well acquainted with its modus operandi, would attempt to correct, improve, or compose a work based on that princi- ple, would be as likely to fail, as an experienced stage-driver would be, if he were to endeavor to take the management of a steam or loco- motive engine. It is then incumbent on me to show that I am fully acquainted with the fundamental principle of that New Method. In 1832, before the publication of Ollendorff's or Manesca's System, I published a pamphlet entitled " Experience Consulted; or V. Value's System for teaching Modern Languages." At page 3 of the introduc tion, is this passage : " We will merely notice that the principle which furnishes the stu- dent with the means, from the first lesson, of forming his own sentences, or, in other words, of making an immediate and continued use of the wordt he learns, so as to speak, will appear new to the public, although it has here been acted upon for many years." At page 5, will be found : " Since the means ought always to be made subservient to the end mview, and since immediate is in direct opposition to postponed use, we must reverse the practice usually adopted, and consequently furnish the student with words susceptible of inter-combinations, instead of teaching him such as, not being combinable together, cannot be incor- porated into the same sentence, and must, of course, render his efforts entirely fruitless." This is what Ollendorff has practically carried out; and, as I have long used his system, its details are perfectly familiar to me. The difference in the extent of the lessons cannot have escaped the cotice of teachers and scholars who have piactically used the wors, fhe 1st, 2d, and 3d are of a proper length for one recitation, 3veo 884191 IV PREFACE. with an ordinary capacity ; but from the 4th they begin to assume a size that makes it difficult to learn one, at a single lesson. True, a part only of a lesson may be assigned as a task, but the teacher must then daily ascertain the extent of the lesson, in order to portion it according to the capacity of his class. With a private scholar, even with a private class, that may be done -without much inconvenience ; but the case is different when applied to classes in schools, where more regularity and uniformity are required, and where, the scholars having to pass quickly from one study to another, have no time allowed for measuring the fractional part they ought to have for the next reci- tation. With the view of remedying this serious objection, the equali- zation of the lessons was thought expedient. To divide each long lesson into two, three, or four small ones, woulJ in a great measure have destroyed the unity which characterizes each particular and successive lesson in the book. This was thought objec- tionable ; and hence the idea of dividing each lesson, according to its length, into two, three, or four sections, so as to obtain the equaliza- tion of the parts without destroying the unity of the whole. It is what has been accomplished, and which is now presented to the American public. One of the strongest proofs that can be adduced of the superiority of the principle here followed is that, in spite of the numerous faults, inaccuracies, defects, omissions, and errors with which the former book is teeming, scholars learn, and learn well. The half of those errors would destroy the reputation of any other grammar or method, was not the fundamental principle so self-efficient. Those defects are like grades on a railroad: they may partially impede the way, but the moving power of the engine easily overcomes them. We will notice a few of them. At page 24, we find : This or that ox. This or that hay. [ Ce bceuf. Ce foin. As the three words this or that are translated by ee alone, it is very natural that the student should, in the fourteenth line of the 13th Exercise, translate "Has the peasant this or that ox?" by "Le paysan a-t-il ce bceuf?" and nothing more; and the answer, " He has neither this nor that," by " II n'a ni ce," without adding anything else. This is one of those results that experience alone can teaclv and record ; and which no reasoning a priori could suggest. At the same time it- shows how carefully we must weigh and analyse the expres- sions offered to the learner. For, in this instance, the error came not from any fault of his ; but solely from the combination of the thre words this or that being carelessly translated by ce. To obviate the difficulty, say : this, that ce ; this, that ox ce boeuf. And. then, when he comes to : this or that ox, he cannot possibly translate by ce bcevj alone, but he will use Ce boeuf-ci ou celui-l-\, &c Some may conMdei PREFACE. y this as a trifle. So it is ; but the teacher's or author's business is to give right directions. Below will be found a few of Ollfcndorff'a defects. 1 The e grave has purposely been placed on the e of stige, privilege, &c., to conform to the pronunciation; although, from mere hatit or whim, those words usually have an acute accent, (siege.) Seme have found fault, because the feminine was not introduced before the 5*h Lesson ; but experience proves it to be one of the hap- piest innovations in the Method. The mannsr here adopted, of forming the subjunctive present from the third person plural of the indicative present, and of placing thftt third person plural at the bead of the tense, will have a tendency to make the acquisition of the tense much more easy. For instance : Boivent, boive, boives, boive, being pronouncei in the same way, may be considered as a single word, already known to the student, (since it is the third person plural of the indicative present,) and the first and second persons plural being similar to those of the imperfect, the pupil has in fact nothing new to learn. He actually knows the tense before he comes to it. A great portion of the difficulties attending the subjunctive, arise from the manner of presenting that mood, in the conjugations intended to teach French to the Americans. It is one of the most inaccurate and deficient parts of all grammars. From its nature, the subjunctive being subser- 1 V page 22, we find personne and ne separated by a hyphen (-) wrong. 30. Porte-feuille, no directions anywhere how to form the plural of compound nouns of this class. 73. "What, nominative, que: it should be qu'ett-ce qui? (No trifle.) 73. Obs. B . wrong. 60. To, with whom, for, to whose house : chtz qui. 00. Soldier in 71st Exercise, the French given only at 160. UU. Do and AM, for all persons and tenses, should be for the present tense. 112. Obs. A. wrong, because the preposition does not belong to the ge- cond, but to the first verb. The list there given by Ollendorff is transferred to the Synopsis, because the verbs not being introduced in the exercises, uselessly encumber the lesson. 18, 119. Kales on the past participles, not fuily explained. The worJ object, applied both to le, les, and en, show that the author was not aware of their difference in French. 118, 141. How long. No explanation, so that the pupil is constantly at n loss. 169. Je, me, (separated.) "Wrong; they should ile connected. t83. Rule on the future and note bel-nv, wrong. 199. Obs. E. defective WG. 5th and 6th line of Exercise : Has he already kept something from you? wrongly translated by A-t-il d&ja garde quelque chose ('t vous ? jf/15 Obs. A. not correct. 273. Obs. A. wrong. 325. Obs. A. wrong iW II .vVn faut beaucoup, a knotty point uselessly presented to the ^talent, who can already tra.is.ate in several ways tr-eque unit- thero ask? 1, &c &c VI P IEF ACE. vient to, or governed by an antecedent, can separately have uo specitit meaning, and ought consequently never to be used by itself. Now, as in grammars, the subjunctive is mostly given by itself, independently of the governing expression, it follows that the English translation attached to it, is calculated to lead into numerous errors. Let ua select a few examples. In the verb, to have, avoir ; to know, savoir ; to go, aller ; the subjunctive present Is in ail grammars, and in Ollen- dorff's also, given thus: que faie, that I may have; que je sache, that 1 v.ay know; que faille, that I may go; and as the English is the prototype of the French, the student must necessarily connect the idea of the French subjunctive with that I may, and with no other English. Hence the phrases, William says that I may have his dic- tionary ; She says that I may know my lesson ; He thinks that I may go ; having each the English that I may, which is intimately linked in the student's mind with the French subjunctive, must inevitably lead him to use that mood, and translate by, Guillaume dit que faie son dictionnaire ; Elle dit que je sache ma Ie9on ; II croit que faille. And such translations would hardly be understood by the very authors of the grammars, if unconnected with the English, Now, such modes of expression abound in English : what an inexhaustible source of mis- takes ! ! But this is not all ; it is only one side of the medal ; let ua see the reverse. The French subjunctive being connected exclusively with that I may, will never be thought of, when this prototype does not constitute a part of the English phrase: consequently, I must have; unless I know ; he wishes me to go ; cannot by the student be translated by the French subjunctive mood ; for they do not remind him of hia English prototype, that I may, which alone can recall the idea of the French subjunctive. Here, then, is another source of innumerable errors. What a sad dilemma is then presented to the student ! Both the presence and the absence of his prototype mislead his steps. He is in an intricate labyrinth, and there is no Ariadne to furnish him with a clew to escape. The unpleasant dilemma in which the student is involved, is avoided by always presenting the subjunctive mood, as I do, in connexion with the expression by which it is governed. All those defects and many others nave oeen rectified. The Gram- matical Synopsis will be found to contain many useful explanations, the result of experience. The Preterit, Conditionnel, Imperative, Sub- junctive, the Reflected Verbs, the Negations, are new and important articles. It was thought preferable to transfer into the Synopsis many of the rules and directions given in the body of Ollendorff's work, so as to have under the same head everything relating to the subject if trcate of. V. VALUE. CONTENTS. Preface . . Pago iii System of Pronunciation . ix Directions for using the Method xxiii Explanation of the Signs used in th,'s book . . ... xx\v Lessons 1 to 86 25-456 Grammatical Synopsis . . 457 Recueil fcpistolaire .... ... . . . 539 Index . . 547 Idiomatical Expressions .... 575 Directions for using V. VALUE'S SYSTEM OF FRENCH PRO- NUNCIATION, by which an accurate knowledge, of the scund* of that Language may le acquired in a few Lessons AFTER HEADING THE DEFINITION OF VOWELS. Teacher. Please to pronounce the English word, add. Student pronounces it. T. What is the sound of the letter a in that word? S. gives it, if he can. If he does not give it correctly, the teacher J jes it, and tells him to dwell on the sound ; as, aaaa-d, and finally Ida . . . alone, so as to abstract the sound of the vowel a. When done T. This is the sound of the French letter a, marked 1 on the lt column, aaa, a. S. repeats the prolonged sound. T. Whenever you wish to ascertain the French sound, marked 1 (one), you must recur to the English word add, and you cannot miss it. S. repeats the word, prolongs the sound aaa, and abstracts it, a. T. The sound of d (with a circumflex accent), marked I 2 (one two, to show that it is the second sound of the same letter a), is found in the word far . .faaa-r . . . a. Pronounce the word, dwell upon the vowel Bound, and abstract it. S. tries to do it. If he does not succeed, the teacher must go through the same process as for the a of add. When done T. In what English word do you find the French sound marked 1 (one) ? S. gives it. T. What is the sound ? S. gives it. T. How is it represented ? S. By the letter a, in add. T. In what word do you find I 2 (one two) ? S. gives it. T. What is the sound? S. gives it. T. How is it represented ? S. By the letter d, with a circumflex T. What is the last sound in the word take ? S. tries to give it. If he cannot, the teacher will do it, and tell him to dwell on the sound e e e ta-ke-e e e. This is in fact the sound heard at the end of every English consonant sounded. The name of this letter (k) is kay ; but its sound in bank, for instance, is not bankay, but bank e e, ending with a prolonged mute sound, which is exactly the sound of the French mute e. It is a very important sound with them; it is marked 2 (little two), to indicate its faintness. The cough sound, as I have called it (marked 2), is that heard in the French words peu, deux. If, in coughing, both teacher and pupil get that sound, it will be secured ; but if they do not. then the teachei 7 FRENCH PRONUNCIATION must make him pronounce either deux or pen, and make him refer thi sound to the word he pronounces best, and retain the word as a model. The letter u, marked 6, represents the sound heard immediatelj after s, in swe*i, as it is usually pronounced by Americans. However, some say sooeet. With those, the teacher must devise some ^ay tn make them pronounce the u properly. The French nasal sounds are not difficult to acquire ; for the Ameri- cans have many words in which they give to an, in, on, un, the same Bound as the French do ; but, in general, they end it by dwelling separately on the n, while the French never do. With the latter it is a simple or a vowel sound ; with the former, a compound one. For instance, the English combination in is pronounced ee-n, having nothing of a nasal nature at the beginning, but ending with the full nasal sound of n, thus presenting two distinct parts, while the French in has but one sound, as heard in the ain of faint, or &i of pent. So that, to pronounce the French nasal sound properly, ycu must retain throughout the sound you begin with, and not dwell separately on then. UN DIVIDING AND MARKING WORDS. There are, at pages xv, xvi, xvii, xviii, words given to be divided into syllables, and to be marked. W T hen the pupil has learned as far aa the words to be divided, (page xv, a very important one,) let him, on some paper or a slate, divide the first word thus : fi-ni, saying men- tally, the first syllable must be FI, in order to end in a vowel sound, ana because the N being followed by the vowel, i must go with it ; the second syllable is ni. The vowel sound of the first is i, like the e in be, marked 4, which is to be put under fi. The vowel sound of the second is also 4 ; so that the word divided and marked will assume this form : S-ni. The second, me-ne", &c. 44 2 3 Let the pupil take but one line here at a time ; then proceed with the rules at xv and xvi, dividing and marking the few words they contain as examples, until he comes to the paragraph (page xvi) of words to be divided and marked, then he must take one line of them, with the one at page xv. When, in going through the other rules, at xvi and xvii, he comes to the paragraph of words (p. xvii) to be divided, let him take one line there also, with those at xv, xvi, &c. This gradual progress by line is essential ; for, the words to be divided and marked, although intended to exemplify the rules under particular heads, sontain rules belonging to other sections, which the student is thua enabled to reach just in time to divide and mark them correctly. I have said, one line at a time ; but, although the progress must be v aiual, it must vary according to the aptness of the class or scholar ; ur, in some instances, two lines will hardly be enough; while, IB o.hrs, three words would be too much. The teacher must be guided by circumstances. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, BY V. VALUE TABLE I. Vowel Sounds. VOWELS are simple sounds, which can be lengthened without thange in the position of the organs that produce them. Tiie French Other combination!! 1 a sounds as a in add si, ea. "2 .'i as a in far ea. 2 e, as at end of tak. 2 as the cough sound \ eu, ceu. 2* i"M as u in bwd f 1 eu, oeu, eu, oeu, OB. 3 * (acute) as a in gate ( ai, ei, (er, ez, final. > ' 82 ( * (grave) 1 I e (circumflex) / as e in S et f" 1 ai, ai, ei. 4 i as in be i, y (t grec). 5 as o in no 6, au, eau, eo, eo. 6* n as o in nor 6, au, eau, eo, eo. 6 a as in street u, u, (eu, in avoir.) 7 ou as oo in good oil, ou: 8 fin, en as an in want am, em, en, aon. 9 in as ain in faint f im, in, aim, ain, ein, yr^, L yn (EN, final.) 10 on as on in wont om, eon. 11 un as un in grant urn, eun. TABLE II. Two Irregular Diphthongs. \ 2. 01 sounds like wa in water or (ou-f-a) (7-f-l 2 ) ol. 13. oin sounds like wat'n in quaint or (ou-f-in) (7+9). They are irregular, because in those combinations the i and the c change their primitive sounds. As in regular diphthongs each vowel retains its proper sound, they offer no difficulty. * There is in pert, deux, fieureux, vasux, &c., a sound of French eu, txu, that fia to representation in English, except the guttural eound heard in coughing ; heugh ! Ikjuzk! (if so spelt.) It is between the u of budge and the final e of the mmt Hford. In French it is not guttural, and not difficult to sound. t Holes vri 1 be gives to determine the sound of these combinations. 11 Xll FR EC ( H Every French sound 4iaving r a representative in &$ English won), ii is evident that the mer4 recoflekiipn b? ithe 'English, word secures thi pronunciation of the- French sound, and secures it effectually ; for the scholar is expected tc be correct in the utterance of his own language (See Appendix, Note I.) TABLE III. French Consonants differing in Sound from the English 14. $ (with a cedilla) like * before a, o, u sa, so, su. 15 eh, m French words, like sh in s/iow. 16, gn sounds like the gn of mignonette. 17- il, ill (when liquid), sounds like Hi, of brLYzant. 18. j (and g, which is ALWAYS soft before e, i, and y), lute z, in azure 19. qu like k, gu like g at the end of %. 20. s like 2, when single and between two vowels, rose, nose. 21. th sounds ALWAYS like t alone. ?,2. ti, when in English they sound like sh (as in r il-Jon, parent, &c.), sound in French lik'e the English word see. TABLE IV. Consonant Letters. Consonants have no sound without the help of a vowel. Such is the definition ; yet, in the word abstract, the b, the s, the t, and the r, &c., are each sounded, and sounded respectively as b in tube ; as s in base ; as t in rate ; and as r in glare ; or else, as if connected with the faint or mute French e, or e at the end of take. So that, any consonant sounded by itself, or at the end of a word, is supposed to be connected with the mute or faint e. Each consonant, in French, as in English, has a SOUND differing from its NAME. This distinction is important. Although the French names will be found in this table, yet the student is invited, particu- larly at first, to use the English names, bee, cee, dee, &c., or else the final sound of the English consonants, b, c, d, f, g, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, p, qu, r, s, t, v, x, z. b (bay), as in English at the end of mob. 1 12 2 2 22 3 3 2 4 5 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ba, ba, be, beu, beu, be, be, bi, bo, bo, bu, bou, ban, bin, bon, bun. ooi, bo?n. *c (say)y hard before a, o, u, as the English k in ban&. ca, ca co, cc, cu, cou, can, con, cue, coi, coin c (say), soft, always before e, i, y, like 5 in so. ce, ceu, ceu, ce, ce, ci, cy, cin. c (say), hard, as k before a consonant or at the end yf a word. Aa, clti, ere, creu, creu, cle, cle, cti, oc, cdo, ctu, clou, cran, crin, cloi, cloin. |f (with a cedilla), only before a, o, u, like s in so, instead of k. ^a, 9a, ce, ceu, ce, ce, ci, 90. cu, 9ou, 9?, >, cin, 9on, 9un, 901, gain. *c. ii: iscond and its compounds, sounds like g t. \rd eegon, eccadairs, &e. III. /KENCH PRONUNCIATION. Xllj *eA (say, ash), like sh in show, cha, cha, che, cheu, cheu, che\ che, chi, oho, chu, cliou, clian, chin, hon, chun choi, choin. d 'd.-y), as in English at the end of larf. Note. When final, it sounds like t, if united to the following initial vowel ; as yrctnd ami, pro- nounced gran tami da, da, de, &c. ( as in English in proof. Note. In neuf (9) it sounds /(eff), \ like v, if joined with the following vowel; as neuf j.k (pay, ash), j hovimes, pronounced, neu-vom ph, does not fa, fa. y (zhay,) hard, ALWAYS before a, o, u, or a consonant, like g hard in the English word ba# garde, fagot, figure, gloire. Note. When final, like k, if joined to the following vowel; as, rang honorable pronounced, ran-konorable. ga, ga, go, go, gu, gou, gan, gon, gun goi, goin. *g (zhay), ALWAYS soft before e, i, y, like z in azure gea, gea, ge, geu, geu, ge", ge, gi, geo, geo, geou, gean gin, gecn, geun geoi, geoin. *gn (zhay, enn), like gn in mignonette. Note. If g and n are separated, they sound as in English in magna, maa-na. *gu, like g hard. The u is usually silent. k (ash). This letter, at the beginning of words, is called either muU or aspirated ; but it is never sounded. The word aspirated usually leads the English student to think that the h in French must have the same guttural sound as in English ; but that is not the case. When aspirated in French the h, without being pronounced, pre- vents the elision or cutting off of the preceding vowel. For instance, the h being aspirated in the French word heros (hero), you must write le heros (the hero), and pronounce le iro in two words. On the contrary, when the h is mute, you write Phonme (tbe man) and pronounce Vom, in one word. But in both cases the h is entirely silent ha, ha, he, lieu, &c. *j (zhee), always soft, like z in azure, joujou ja, ja, je, jeu, &c. k (kah), as k in English at the end of pacA; ka, ka, ke, &c. eh (say, ash), when followed by a consonant, like k, as in English Christ. Note. It is usually in words of foreign origin. I (ell), as in English, when not liquid, as in until. La, la, le, &c. *l (ell mouilld), liquid, always written il, ill, sounds like the Hi of tl English word brilliant. Examples : Ail, aille, paille, veille, fillo, juillet, oeil. Ilia, ilia, ille, illeu, illeu, ills', ille, illo, illo, ill'.', illou, illan, illan, illin, illon, illun, illoi, illoin. r (.:mm), ) as in English, when not combined with the preceding vow /sound, as in clam, din ma, me, mo, &c. See Table 111. Xv FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. P (P av )> as * n English in pump. Note. Silent after m, when they ore in the same syllable, as prompt, temps. Pa, pa, &c. g (ku), as in English like k. qu (ku-u), like the English k, not the English qu, as quxnd, Jean; qui> kee, not kwee. Do not mark qu 6, and t 4, but qui (4) ; qua, qua, que, queu, queu, qu6, que, qui, quo, quo, qu, quou, quan, quin quon, qu'un, quoi, quoin. r (air), as in English in roar strongly articulated ra, ra, re, &c. s (sss), hard, like s in so. 1st. At the beginning of words, as sage. 2d. When final and pronounced, as atlas, moeurs. 3d. When doubled, as passer, possession. 4th. Single and preceded by another consonant; as ccnservcr, absolu, observation. Note. Although the English s fre- quently sounds like a z, after the letter b, as in absolve, observe, &c., it does not in French; sa, sa, se, &c. *a (ess), soft or like 2, Tfhen single and between two vowels, as plawant, rose. Note. When final, if joined to the following vowel, it sounda like z ; as Us ont, eelzon,f &c. ; asa, ase, aseu, ase, ase", asi, iso, iso, isu, isou, esan, esin, eson, asun, usoi, u&oin. t (tay), as in English in fa. ta, ta, te, teu, teu, &c. *ti (tay ee). Note. When the ti, in English, sounds like sh, as hi nation, patient, minutice, the French ti sounds like see in English. Examples: Natfon, parent, minute, tia, tia, tie, &c. *th (tay, ash), like the English initial t. Examples : Th&lie, f Ae&tre, tha, tha, the, theu, theu, the", the, &c. v (vay), as in English at the end of drive va, va, ve, veu, &c. w (do:ble vay), as v, or as the vowel ou (7th.) k ks gt t (eeks), like k, ks, gz, s, z ; as excepter, extreme, exercice, Bruzelles z (Brussels), siadbme. r (zed), as in phi?. Examples : Zone, azur, amazone. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. This is a very important exercise, and one which should be daily practised for a considerable time, and now and then renewed. In dividing the words, attend to the combination of letters in Table? I., II., III. For instance, in the word hautement, the combination av, Seing at No. 5 in Table L, take them together and mark them 5 2 . la hva, the combination ua not being in the table, separate them into a lint a, and mark them 6 and 1. So with oi, which being in Tab'e li. * See Table III. j Aud Hcmetin.os before m, as enthousiajrae, mesmeriame FRENCH PRONUNCIATION. XV te marked 12, whilst io must be separated, because that combination is not in the tables. Ai, in the table ; ia, not in, &c. The apostrophe (') is used to connect two words into one, and takofl the place of a vowel suppressed before another. L'eau sounds just like lo; qu'avez-vous ? like Jcahvayvoo. The END OP ANT SYLLABLE must be a vowel sound. This is an all- important direction. Note. A vowel sound may (as is the case with an, en, in, on, oin, &c.) end with a consonant letter. A consonant, when final or sounded by itself, is supposed to form e. compound syllable with the mute or faint e. So chef is separated inU che-fe ; avec into a-ve-ke ; fil into fi-le ; ver into ve-re ; porte into po-r-te. Hence each consonant is marked 2 from the faint . m or n, mm or nn, followed by a vowel, goes with it ; if not, it goea with the preceding. Image separates into i-ma-ge, and not as in Eng- lish (im-age). Note, h aftern is always null. Inherent separates into i-nhd-rent, (the h being mute, is null in inherent ;) inhumain, becomea i-nhu-main ; inhumaine, i-nhu-mai-ne. Divide and mark : Fini, mend, promend, amene, ananas. Homme becomes ho-mme ; donnd, do-nn4 ; comme, commune, commere, connu, Boxume, pomme*, adonna, ronde, campagne, enfant, son, mon, pardon, parfum, instrument, commun, commence, innocent, incui, inhabit^, continental, inharmonieux, immobility. A final consonant having no vowel connected with it, ought, from ita definition, to be silent. It is so in French. Hence it is united to the last syllable, or to a monosyllable ; as, avant becomes a-vant the final t being silent goes with van, so as to make vant; four letters, although but three (van) are pronounced. In the French word port the four letters are taken, although only por are pronounced ; but porte becomes por-te, because the last e causes the t to sound. Divide and mark: Comment, dents, prudent, prudente, camp, temps, nid, pied. (4+3.) RULE. Final consonants are silent, except c, /, Z, and r preceded by a, i, o, u. Sac, avec, lac, vif, actif, sel, miel, fil, car, par, finir, cor, lour, aTiteur. See Appendix, Note 2. RULES ON FRENCH E. Letters and Combiriations, marked 2 (little two), and pronounced like the e a) the end of take* Any sound marked 2 (little two) is in French called mute or fauit ; t (without accent) is mute or faint, in the following cases. Rule 1st. e.~ 2 at the end of words, as ce, de, traite, pere, donnc fc . ire. This is the only vowel sound that is slighted or srop:*sse to hold, to keep ; venir, to come, and their compounds. Examples : JQ vi-en- irai, I shall come; je tiens, I hold; elle convient, she agrees. en everywhere else, except in the termination ent of the third person plural, (see Rule 5 on e mute, page xiv.) always=8: entends, senti- ment, en. Remarks on ths letter Y. When the letter y in any word is preceded by a vowel, it .s equiva- lent to , i. The first i unites with the foregoing vowel, and must be marked accordingly. The second i sounds separately, or unites with what follows. Examples : ayant, ai-i-ant ; citoyen, ci-toi-i-en ; pays, pai-is. The diaeresis () separates two letters, which otherwise would sound together. Thus, in Saul, (the apostle's name,) aw=5 2 ; but in tho name of the Hebrew king Saul, with the diaeresis, a and u are sepa- rated, and pronounced Sa-u-1. (1, 6, 2 .) Of the liquid sounds, AIL, EIL, IL, EUIL, CEIL, OUIL, AILS, EILS, &c. Note. The sound of Hi in the English word brilliant is similar to the French liquid il, ill. When il or il* final is liquid, the preceding vowel is pronounced separately with its open sound, viz: a = l 2 , e=3 2 , eu=2 2 , O2=2 2 , and then follows the liquid sound of il or ils=17. Examples: ail, a-il; re* veil, rd-ve-il; seuil, seu-il; fenouil, fe-nou-il. Note. ceil is pro- nounced like euil. (2*, 17.) Those vowels, a, e, i, &c., have a long sound, because the il final u supposed to be followed by e mute. AILL, BILL, ILL, EUILL, (BILL, OUILL. When followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel a, e, i. &o<, sonnls as it does with the final il, as explained above. Examples; f fc-ilt-e, ve-ill-e, fi-ill-e, feu-ill-e, fou-ill-e. U'An not follow< d by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel Is slosa KS FRENCH PRONUNCIAT ON. viz: o=l, *-3, ew=2, #=2. Examples: ma-ill-et, ve-ill-er, pi-i& a-ge, feu-ill-et, fou-ill-ant, ceillet, oe-ill-et. (2, 17, 3 2 .) CUEIL, GUEIL, when final. In these combinations the u serves only to make the c ai_d the hard : the e represents the long sound of eu marked 2 2 , and the letters il hava the liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-il, o-r-gue-il. CUEILL, GUKILL, not final. When followed by a mite syllable, the preceding vowel sounds as it Aces with the final cueil, gueil, as explained above. Example, je rc- oue-ill-e. When not followed by a mute syllable, the preceding vowel is short or Uose ; that is, e sounds like eu marked 2, and the letters ill have their usual liquid sound = 17. Examples: re-cue-ill-ant, o-r-gue-ill-eux. Stress of the voice. The stress of the voice is placed on every vowel preceding a mute syllable. The faint or mute e is the only slighted sound, all the other vowels receive a full and distinct utterance. Entre ; en, distinct ; tre, faint entreprise ; en, full ; tre, faint ; pri, full ; se, faint. In communication, every syllable is distinct, and tiio stress of the voice rests on the last. APPENDIX. NOTE 1, (page xii.) In this I differ totally from Mr. Charles Picot, who in his excellent system of pronunciation says (page 6) : " The English words at, father, &c., are merely given as means of comparison and association, to enable the pupil to proceed from what he knows to what he is to learn, and must be dispensed with as soon as the sounds are well mastered." Far from discarding those words, I strongly recommend the scholar to retain them carefully as unerring guides. If they are useful at first, they must ever be so, and would it not be ungrateful to throw aside those that befriended us in the beginning of our career ? Ti easure them up, therefore. NOTE 2, (page xv.) In French, final consonants are not generally pronounced ; for, not being followed by a vowel, they ought naturally to be silent. Hence the French words port and grand are pronounced as if written vor and FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, XXI but tLe / and the d are pronounced as in English, when spelled La French with a final e, as porte, grande. The above observation will sufficiently explain why the final conso- uants are silent in the following Table, exhibiting tlie sixteen vowel sounds and two diphthongs, as reprefttmt(jd at the end of words. No. 1. as, at, ats 12 at, ats. 8 es, (in words of two syllables and more,) snl * 2. eux, cut, oeud, ceuds, ceufs. 2*. with this vowel, the next consonant sounds, as boeu/, leu/, seuZ; but the second consonant is silent; leurs, soeurs, cajurs. 8. aie, ed, eds, 6e, e"es, 4s, er, et (conjunction), ez. 8 3 . ais, ait, et, es, ect, ets (and es in monosyllables), aient,* oientj 4. id, ie, is, it, ies, ys. i?.nt.* 6. aud, aut, aux, op, os, ot, ots, auds, auts, eaur. 5*. with this vowel, the consonant which immediately follows sounds. Examples : fol, Jacob, soc, cor ; but the second con- sonant is silent : socs, cors, mort, port. 6. ue, ues, ut, iits, ud (and in the verb avoir, eus, eut, cue, cues), uenL* 7. oue, cues, oud, ouds, oup, oups, ous, out, outs, oux. ouent* 8. amp, amps, ant, ants, ems, emps, ent, ents, ans, ens. 9. ins, int, ingt, ingts, ains, aint, ainc, aincs, eins, eint, eints, (en, w.)t 10. ons, ont, ond, onds, amb, ombs, ompt, one, ones. 11, uns, urns. 12 oie, oies, ois, oit, oid, oids, oix, oient.* 13. oing, oins, oint, oints, oings. NOTE 3, (Page xvi.) The reason why es is marked 2 and pronounced like the faint e, may be stated as follows. In English, THE book, THE friend, MY pen, &c., are expressions used in the singular number. Now, as THE and MY undergo no change in the plural number, should book, friend, and pen, be spelt and pronounced as before, there could be no distinction between the singular and the plural. To render that distinction sensible, an s is added to the end of each noun, (for the eye,) and is articulated to apprise the ear that the (dea of plurality is intended. In French, on the contrary, the articles :n the singular, le, la, being changed into Ies for the plural, mon, ma, Third person plural of verbs. *, oifnt, old orthography, third person plural of imperfect and conditional J (in *nd ens) final, and in the verbs temr. venir, and their compound*. Xi; FRENCH PRONUNCIATION into mes, &c., when those words les, mes, &c., are heard, the}' at once i-ntimate to the ear that the plural is meant, hence the alteration of the noun becomes useless ; and although the s is added, (for the eye, ; it is not pronounced, and of course final es is marked little *. NOTE 4, (page xvi.) The e mute or faint, marked little 2 , after a consonant, has the effect of lengthening and altering the sound of the preceding vowel or syl- lable, in English, as may be seen below. hat, on account of the faint e that follows, becomes hate ; met decomes mete; bit becomes bite; hop becomes hope ; tub becomes tube. In French the e mute always lengthens the preceding syllable, but it alters the vowel sound, when it is after a consonant, only in fcur instances, instead of doing it in every case, as in English. mal (marked 1) becomes male (marked I 2 ). heureux (2, 2), heureuse (2, 2 2 ); ce'de' (3, 3;, cede c3 J , 2 , ; haut (5), haute (5 2 , ? ). Hence the following rule : Silent E lengthens the preceding syllable, and when the vowel has two Bounds, that vowel takes the sound marked with double figures ; 2 2 , 3 2 , 5 2 , and likewise I 2 when there is a circumflex on the a ; not other- wise. "When the faint e comes immediately after a vowel, no consonant intervening, as ie, ue, e"e, cue, &c., it lengthens that vowel without altering its sound. NOTE 5, (pages xvii and xviii.) The r is sounded only in a few words of two or more syllables Amer(l, 3 2 , 2 ), bitter; cuiller, cu-i-11-e-r (6, 4, 17, 3 2 2 ), spoon; enfer, hell: fier, pioud; hier, yesterday; hiver, winter; magisier, country BchArJ. master; c "iccr, ether, f rater, Alaer, Jupiter, Lucifer, S DIRECTIONS HOW TO USE THIS METHOD An there is now a System of Pronunciation with this Method, let &c Brat ten or twelve lessons be devoted to acquiring a complete know- ledge of that important branch of a modern language. If that is thoroughly done, the teacher will have no further trouble with the pronunciation, for the pupils will be able to read correctly by them- selves. Each lesson now consists of one, two, three, &c., separate vocabu- laries, each followed by exercises, English at first, but French and English at the Twelfth Lesson; that is, when the student's ear begins to become a little familiar with French sounds. The first vocabulary must be read by the pupils, each taking a lino and pronouncing aloud both the English and French, the latter being divided into syllables, and distinctly uttered under the direction of the teacher, who ought, as they proceed, to ask questions respecting the pronunciation. This done, the students are directed: 1st, to learn for the next recitation, the English and French vocabularies, so as to be able to give the French when the English is mentioned, or the English when the French is given out ; and, 2dly, to write down the translation of the first exercise, to be handed to the teacher, who, directing them to close their books, will, while correcting the errors, give out the English of every question and answer, to be put in French by the students. The correction and translation ended, let the next vocabulary bo read, or rather syllabled, slowly and distinctly, and explained by the teacher, if need be, and so on, the vocabularies being learned and the exercises translated. As this method is simple and gradual enough for every capacity, should there be pupils too young to write the translations, let them prepare the exercises and recite them to the teacher, who will do well to make them spell out a number of words at each recitation. (23) EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. THE irregular verbs are designated by a (*) star. The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, placed after verbs, denote that they arc 'ar, and indicate the conjugation to which they respectively bekng. Idiomatical expressions are marked thus : f . The verbs taking etre (to be) as auxiliary, are marked thus ; . 1 to 164, refer to paragraphs in t\ie Synopsis, (from p. 457 tc 638.} Dir. 1, means first Direction, &c., (p. 457 to 4GO.) R. 1, means first Rule, &c., (from p. 460 to 461.) Obs. or Ob. 7, means Observation 7th, &c. 24 1 , 24 2 , means 24th Vocabulary, first Section ; second Section 24 3 , N. 2 ; 24th Vocabulary, Note 2. 28 2 , Ob. G5 ; 28th Vocabulary, Observation G5th. \ 24 A. 2, mean the 2d article or rule of 24th paragraph. 24-2, 490 3, means the article marked 3, at p. 490. Pa. or p. 419, means page 419; 405, 6, 7, mean 1C5, 106, Soc Pronun. S^c System of Pronunciation. OLLENDORFF'S FllENCH METHOD. FIRST LESSON, 1st. Premiere Lejon, Ire. VOCABULARY. [ave you f Ves, Sir, I have L TAe. TAc Aa. Have you the hat ? Yes, Sir, I have the bat. The bread. The sugar. The broom. The paper. The soap. My. My hat. Your. Your bread Have you my hat ? Yes, Sir, I have your hat. Have you your bread ? I have my bread. Which or what f Which hat have you ? I have my hat. Which bread have you ? I have your bread. My exercise. VOCABULAIRH l Avez-vous ? 2 Oui, Monsieur, j'ai. Je, which becomes j' before a or silent h. (See Pronunciation.! Le. Le chapeau. Avez-vous le chapeau ? Oui, Monsieur, j'ai le chapeau. Le pain. Le sucre. Le balai. Le papier. Le savon. Mon. Mon chapeau. Votre. Votre pain. Avez-vous mon chapeau ? Oui, Monsieur, j'ai votro chapeau. Avez-vous votre pain ? J'ai mon pain. Que.l ? (before a noun.) Quel chapeau avez-voua f J'ai mon chapeau. Quel pain avez-vous ? J'ai votre pain. Mon exercice. FIRST EXERCISE. 1st. PREMIER EXERCICE. ler. Which exercise have you, Sir "? I have the first exercise. Have on the bread ? Yes. Sir, I have the bread. Have you your broad 1 For the manner of teaching the lesson, sec Manner of ueing the Method When the verb is interrogative the French always put a hyphen (.) be the veib and the nominative pronoun. &c _ ( p ronun , I have. I have it. | J'ai. Je 1'ai. 06*. 2. Objective pronouns are usually placed before the verb, iu French. Instead of: 1 have it, the French say: I it have. Je Z'ai. Have you my hat ? Avez-vous mon chapeau ? Yes, Sir, I have it Oui, Monsieur, je 1'ai. Good. Bad. Bon. Mauvais. Pretty. Ugly. Joli. Vilain. Old. Fine, handsome. Vieux. Be'au. My cloth. My fine cloth. Mon drap. Mon beau drap. The salt. The good salt. Le sel. Le bon sel. 1 Pupils desirous of making rapid progress may compose a great many phrases, in addition to those given in the exercises ; but they must pro- nounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make separate iiiatsof such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, as they meet with ui the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words more eadily, when required to refer to them in writing tneir lessons. 2 When no daily salutations are found in some of the lessons, the teacho/ n.av introduce some, or else use the preceding enes. SKCOND LESSON. 27 The shoe. The )ld shoe. My wood Your pretty wood. Your stocking The ugly stocking. The thread. Your bad thread. The dog. The horse. Not. (See negations in Synopsis.) I have. I have not. I have not the bread. No, Sir. No, Miss. H.ave you my old hat ? No, Sir, I have it not. vVhich cloth have you ? L have the fine cloth. What dog have you ? I have my old dog. Of. The thread stocking. Le souliet Mon bois. Votre bas, Lefil. Le chien. Le vie ax soulier. Votre joli bois Lo vilain bas. Votre mauvais fil. Le cheval. Ne (before), pas 'after the verb). J'ai. Je n'ai pas. (See Promnv Je n'ai pas le pain. Non, Monsieur. Non, Mademoiselle. Avez-vous mon vieux chaptnu f Non, Monsieur, je ne 1'ai pas Quel drap avez-vous ? J'ai le beau drap. Quel chien avez-vous ? J'ai mon vieux chien. De. Le bas de fil. Obs. 3. As no noun can in French, as it is in English, be used as ; idjective to another noun : the preposition, de, is always put between the name of the thing and the name of the substance of which it is Trade which latter, in French, is always placed last. The paper hat, [the hat of paper.] The gun. The velvet. The wooden gun, [the gun of wood.] The velvet shoe. Which gun have you ? I have the wooden gun. Which stocking have you ? I have my thread stocking. Have you my velvet shoe No, Miss, I have it not. Yes, Miss, I have it. Le chapeau de papier. Le fusil. Le velours. Le fusil de bois. Le soulier de velours. Quel fusil Hvez-vous ? J'ai le fusil de bois. Quel bas avez-vous ? J'ai mon bas de fil. Avez-vous mon soulier de velours '< Non, Mademoiselle, je ne 1'ai pas Oui, Mademoiselle, je 1'ai. SECOND EXERCISE, 2d. SE OND EXERCICE, 2d. Good day, Miss. Good day, Sir.^ Good day, Madam. How do you do, Sir? Very well; thank you, Miss. How do you do, Ma- dam ? Very well, Sir, thank you. Have you my fine horse ? Yes, Sir, I have it. Have you my old shoe ? No, Miss. I have it not. Which dog have you ? I have your pretty dog. Have you my bad paper? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you the good velvet cloth 1 Yes. Sir, I* have it.- -Have you my ugly gun? No, Sir, 1 have il not. Which gun have you ? I have your fine gun. Wh?ch stock- i ve you? I have the thread stocking. Have you mv threa.1 28 THIRD LESSON stocking? 1 have not your thread stocking. Have you my wooclei gun ? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you ths old bread ? I have not the old bread. Which shoe have jou? I have the fine veivei shoe. Which velvet shoe ? Your velvet shce. Which soap have you? I have my old soap. Which sugar have you? I have your good sugar. Which salt have you? I have the bad salt. WhicL exercise have you? I have my second exercise. Have you tae first exercise ? No, Madam, I have it not. Which hat have you 1 I have my bad paper hat. Have you my ugly wooden shoe? No Sir. I have it not. What vocabulary have you ? I h^v the second Have you the first? Yes, I have it. THIRD LESSON, 3d.Troisicme Legon, 3me. VOCABULARY. fSomething, anything. Have you anything ? I have something. Nothing, not anything. VOCABULAIRE, Quelque chose. Avez-vous quelque chose ? J'ai quelque chose. Ne (before), rien (after the verb; Obs. 4. Quelque chose (something, any thing), >3 never used with a nega lion. Not .... any thing, as well as nothing, must be translated by nt 'before, and) rien (after the verb), and not by tie . . . pas quelque chose. I have not anything. I have nothing. The wine. My money or silver. The gold. ) Je n'ai rien. (Not: je n'ai > quelqut chose.) Le vin. Mon argent. L'or. (Pronun.) 06s. 5. Le, the, becomes V b^ f ore a vowel or silent h. The string. The ribbon. The golden ribbon. The button. The coffee. The cheese. The coat. My coat. The silver candlestick. Are you hungry ? I am hungry. I am not hungry. Are you thirsty ? I am thirsty. I am not thirsty. Any thing or something good. Have you anything good ? Nothing or not anything bad. I have not anything 'nothing) good Le cordon. Le rub an. Le ruban d'or. Le bouton. Le cafe. Le fromcgc L'habit. (Pronun.) Mon hat it. Le chandelier d' argent. t Avez-vous faim ? t J'ai faim. t Je n'ai pas faim. t Avez-vous soif? t J'ai soif t Je n'ai pas soif. Quelque c*n,se de Jon. Avez-vous quelque chose de boii t Ne rien de mauvais. Je n'ai rien dr bon. THIRI LESSON. 21? Obe. 6. li'hat < is q-jifll before a noun, as : Quel kuton avez-vous ? but v i>efore a verb.) What ? What have you ? | Que ? Qu'avezvous? Obs. 7. Quelque chose and ne rien require dc when they are before an adjective ; and so does '^hat 1 Examples : What have you good ? I have the good coffee. Have you anything pretty ? I have nothing pretty Are you sleepy ? I am sleepy. 1 am not sleepy. Qw'avez-vous de bon? J'ai le bon cafe. Avez-vous quelque chose dc joH ? Je 7i'ai rien de joli. t Avez-vous sonimeil ? t J'ai sommeil. t Je n'ai pas sommeil. THIRD EXEE.OISE, 3d. TSOISIEME EXERCICE, Sme. What have you? 1 have the third exercise. Have 7011 your second exercise, Miss? Yes, Sir, I have it. Good evening. Ma dam, how do yea do ?- Very well, Sir, thank you. Good morning, Miss. Good morning, Sir. Have you my good wine ? I have it. Have you the geld ? I have it not. Have you the money? I have it. Have you the gold ribbon ? No, Sir, I have it not. Have you your silver candlestick ? Yes, Sir, I have it. What have you ? I have the good cheese. I have my cloth coat. Have you my silvei button? I have it not. Which button have you? I have your good gold button. Which string have you? I have the gold string. Have you anything ? I have something. What have you ? I have the good bread. I h?ve the good sugar. Have you anything good 1 I have nothing good. Have you anything handsome ? I have no thing handsome. I have something ugly. What have you ugly? I have the ugly dog. Have you anything pretty? I have nothing pretty. I have something old What have you old ? I have the old cheese. Are you hungry? I am hungry. Are you thirsty ? I am not thirsty. Are you sleepy? I am not sleepy. What have you beautiful ? I have your beautiful dog. What have you bad ? I have nothing bad. Which paper have you? I have your good paper. Have you the fine horse ? Yes, Sir, I have it. Which shoo have you? I have my old velvet shoe. Which stocking have you ? I have got yor.r fine thread stocking. Obs. 8. Always translate 1 have or F have got, by : J'ai. I have not or I have not got, by : Je n'oipas, 1 &c. Salutations journalifreg. To day. Aujourd'hui. 1 N. B, Flie use of *he word, got, is condemned by grammarians, but, W it is constantly introduced in common practice, it is perhaps expedient tc FOURTH LESSOR. FOURTH LESSON, 4th. Quatrieme Le$on } 4me VOCABULARY. 1st Section. This , that, (with a noun.) This , that book. Of the (before a consonant). Of the dog. Of the tailor. Of the baker. Of the neighbor. TJtat or the one. The neighbor's, or that of the neigh bor. The baker's, or that of the baker. The dog's, or that of the dog. Or. Have you my book or the neigh- bor's ? I have the neighbor's. Have you my bread or that of the baker ? I have yours. I have not the baker's. Mine or my own. Of mine or of my own. Yours or your own. Of yours or of your own. VOCABULAIEE. Ire Section. Ce (before a consonant, $ 34.) Ce livre. Du genitif) avant une consonne Du chien. Du taiiieur. I Du boulanger. Du voisin. Celui. ($ 35.) Celui du voisin. (French way to express thepos case.) Celui du boulanger. Celui du chien. Ou. Avez-vous mon livre ou celui do voisin ? J'ai celui du voisin. Avez-vous mon pain ou celui du boulanger ? J'ai le votre. Je n'ai pas celui du boulanger. Le mien. Du mien. Le votre. Du votre. Obs. 9. Votre, your, has no circumflex accent. Le votre, yours, naa one. Notre, our, has no accent. Le nntre, ours, has one. Of ours or of cur own. j Du notre. F MJRTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. QUATRIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Have you that book ? No, Sir, I have it not. Which book have you got ? I have that of the neighbor. Have you my bread or the baker's? I have not yours; I have the baker's. Have you the neighbor's horse? No, Sir, I have it not. Which horse have you got? I have that of the baker. Have you the pretty gold string of my dog? I have it not. Which string have you? I have my s?i- insert it now and then. When entirely omitted, pupils, after learning a Considerable time, are frequently at a loss how to translate : Have you get my hat ? thinking that they do not know the French o. got ; while tuej A'ould not hesitate to translate : Have you my hat f &c. FOURTH LESSON rr string. Have you my geld button or the tailor's? I have no! yours ; I have the tailor's. Which coffee have you ? 1 have the neighbor's. Are you sleepy ? I am not sleepy ; I arn hungry. Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty. Which stocking have you? I have my own or mine. Have you your thread stocking or minel i have not yours; I have mine. Which shoe have you? I have the neighbor's wooden shoe. What have you ? I have nothing. Have you anything good ? I htve nothing good. Have you any- thing bid ? I have not got anything bad. Are you hungry or tiiirsty I I am hungry. Which exercise have you got ? I have the fourth. Have you your neighbor's exercise ? No, Sir, I have got mine. Have you our velvet ? I have it not. Have yoi our coffee 1 1 have not ours; I have the baker's. Have you the neighbor's golden candlestick? No, Sir, I have got ours. How do you do to-day 1 To-day ? Yes, to-day. Veiy well, thank you. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. Are you warm I I an warm. I am not warm. Are you cold ? I am not cold. Are you afraid ? I am afraid. I am not afraid. The, (before a vo we or h mute). (See Gbs. 5, p 28.) Man. Friend. The friend. The man. Of the, (before a vowel or h mute). Of the friend. That, or the one, of the friend. Of the man. That, or the one, of the man ; the man's. Of the gold or silver. VOCABULAIBE. 2Je Section, t Avez-vous chaud ? t J'ai chaud. t Je n'ai pas chaud. t Avez-voua froid ? t Je n'ai pas froid. t Avez-vous peur ? t J'ai peur. t Je n'ai pas peur. L', (avant une voyelle 3U an h muci f ( Vcyez Obs. 5, p. 8.; Homme. Ami. L'ami. L'homme. De 1' , (avant une vc ye lie ou h muett De 1'ami. Celui de 1'ami. De Phomme. Celui de 1'hornme. ' De Tor ou de 1'argent. The stick. The coal. My brother's, or Your friend's, or Our gold thimble The wooden one, Fbo leather. The thimble. My brother, that of my brother, that of your friend. , or the silver one. The leather one. Of the leather. Le baton. Le do. Le charbon. Mon here Celui de mon frere. Celui de votre am/. Notre de" d'or, ou ce ui d'argent. Celui de bois. Celui de cui. Le cuir. Du cuir. 32 FIFTH LESSOII. FOUBTH EXERCISE. 2a Sec. QICATIIIEME EXERCICE. 2de Seo Have you my stick, or that of my friend ? I have that of yarn friend. Have you your thimble, or the tailor's? I have mine 01 my own. Have you my brother's coat or yours 1 ? I have youi brother's. Have you your dog or the man's? I have the man's. Have you your friend's money ? I have it not. Are you cold? I am cold. Are you afraid ? I am not afraid. Are you warm ? I are: let warm. Have you my coat, or the tailor's ? I have the tailor's Have you my gold candlestick, or that of the neighbor? I hav yours. Have you your paper or mine ? I have mine. Have yoii your cheese or the bakers? I have my own. Which cloth have you ? ! I have that of the tailor. Have you the old wood of my brother? I have not got it. Which soap have you got? 1 have my brother's good soap. Have you my wooden gun or that of my brother ? I have yours. Have you your friend's shoe ? Yes, Sir ; 1 have the velvet shoe of my friend. What have you pretty? I have my friend's pretty dog. Have you my handsome or my ugly stick? I have your ugly stick. Have you the second exercise of your good friend ? No; I have the third. Which soap have you? I have ours. Have you your friend's bread? No; I have ours. Have you the man's? No; I have it not. Have you the silver button ? No ; I have the golden one, or that of gold. Have you the first or the second section to-day ? I have the second section. Pretty well, well enough. } Assez bien. Oft* 10. Good day, good morning, good afternoon, good evening '.and good night, before bed-time), are expressed in French by : bon jour or feoj FIFTH LESSON, 5th. Cinquieme Lc^on, 5me. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. \ VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section The merchant. \ Le marchand. Of the shoemaker. j Du cordonmer. Ths boy. The merchant's boy. \ Le garcon. Le gnrcon du marchrad The pencil. The chocolate. Tnc penknife The boy's penknife. Have you the merchant's stick, or yours ? Neither. Nor. i have neither the merchant's stick Le crayon. Le chocolat. Le canif. Le canif du garcon. Avez-vous le baton du marchand, ou le votre? Ne . . . ?ii. .... . Jc n'ai ni le baton du maichand a c mien. FIFTH LE3SOA. 33 Have ju the shoemaker's leather ? Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am neither hungry nor thirsty. Are you warm or cold ? I am neither warm no; cold. Have you the bread or the wine ? I have neither the wine nor the bread. I have neither my thread nor that of the tailor. I have neither yours nor mine. My boy's thimble, [the thimble of . . .] Your brother's penknife. That of mine. That of ours. Miss Rose's velvet. My baker's b*cad, or that of yours. Avez-vous le cuir du cordonmer \ t Avez-vous faim ou soif ? t Je n.'ai ni faim ni soif., t Avez-vous chaud ou froid ? t Je n'ai ni chaud ni froid. Avez-vous le pain ou le \in ? Je n'ai ni le vin ni le pain. Je n'ai ni mon fil ni celui du taillsu? Je n'ai ni le votre ni le m en. Le de de mon garcon. Le canif de votre frere. Celui du mien. Celui du notro. Le velours de Mademoiselle Rose. Le pain de mon boulanger, ou celui du votre. FIFTH EXERCISE.. 1st Sec. CINQUIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. How do you do ttMay? Pretty well, thank you. How are you this evening, Miss Charlotte ? Very well, thank you. Good even- ing, Sir. Are you hungry or thirsty? I am neither hungry nor thirsty. Have you my shoe or the shoemaker's? I have neither yours nor the shoemaker's. Have you your pencil or the boy's? I have neither mine nor the boy's. Which pencil have you? I have that of the merchant. Have you my chocolate or the merchant's'? 1 have neither yours nor the merchant's; I have my own. Which penknife have you? I have my brother's penknife. Have you Miss Rose's velvet? No, Madam, I have it not. Are you warm, or cold ? I am neither warm nor cold ; I am sleepy. Are you afraid? I am not afraid. What have you? I have Miss Charlotte's fine ribbon. The velvet ribbon? No, the golden ribbon. Havo you anything, Sir? I have something. What have you ? I have something fine. What have you fine? I have the shoemaker's fine dog. Have you my gun or .yours? I have neither yours nor mine. Which gun have you? I have my friend's. Have you my velvet ribbon or my brother's? I have neither yours nor youi brother's, but ours. Which string have you ? T have my neigh- bor's thread string. Have you the book of the tailor or that of tho boy? I have neither the tailor's nor the b<" y's. This morning. This evening. Ce matin. Ce soir. Are you well, Misa Clara ? t Vousportez-vousbitn.Mlle.Claraf Not very well. Pas tres-bien FIFTH L3SSUN. VOCABULARY 2d Section. VOCABULAIRE. 2dc Sectioa. > t Qu'avez-vous ? i S Je n'ai rien. What have you ? (ails you ?) What is the matter with you ? I have nothing; or Nothing is the matter with me. Is anything the matter with you ? No. Nothing, or Not anything. Obs. 11. When the verb is understood, nothing, or not anything, w translated not by : ne . . , rien. but by : rien alone ; and no, nothing, by : non, rien t Avez-vous quelque chose ? Non, rien. Have you anything very pretty ? Mo, nothing. Have you anything ugly, or old ? No, not anything. The parasol. The dictionary. The Frenchman. The carpenter. The hammer. The nail. The golden nail ; The shawl. The umbrella. The cotton. Of the Frenchman Of the carpenter. The iron. The iron nail, that of silver. Avez-vous quelque chose de treb- joli ? Non, rien. Avez-vous quelqtje chose de vih'n ou de vieux ? Non, rien. Le parasol. Le dictionnaire. Le Franc.ais. Le charpentier. Le marteau. Le clou. Le chale. Le parapluie. Le coton. Du Fran9ais. Du charpentier. Le fer. Le clou de fer. Le clou d'or ; celui d' argent. FIFTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. CINQUIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Are you well this morning? Yes, Sir, pretty well, thank you. How do you do, Miss Clara? Not very well, Madam. Are yot wqll, Mr. Robert? Yes, Sir, this evening I am very well. Have you the fifth exercise? Yes. I have it. Have you my dictionary or my book ? I have neither your dictionary nor your book. Have you your parasol or mine ? I have neither yours nor mine ; I have Clara's. Which shawl have you? I have the neighbor's. Have you the iron or the silver nail? I have neither the iron nor the sil- ver nail; I have the gold one. i-Have you my hammer or the car- penter's ? I have neither yours nor the carpenter's ; I have ours. Which naii have you ? I have the iron nail. Which hammer have you ? I have the wooden hammer of the carpenter.^-Havo you anything very fine ? I have something very fine. What hav you? This fine shawl. Have you the Frenchman's pretty umbrella * No, I have not the pretty one, I have the old one. The old urn hrelia? Yes, the old one. Have you the cotton, or the thread stock mg ? I have neither the cotton nor the thread stocking. Have yon me book of the Frenchman or that of the merchant? I have nei- ther the Frenchman's nor the merchant's. Which book have >ou! SIXTH LESSON. 35 I have ours. What is the matter with you ? Nothing. Is anything the matter with you. Mr. Robert? No, Miss, nothing. Are you afraid ? No, I am not afraid. Nothing ails me. Have you the cot- ton, the cloth, or the shawl 1 I have neither the cotton, nor the cloth, nor the shawl. What have you 1 ? I have Webster's Dictionary i nm glad to hear it. I am glad of it. And j'ou, Sir, how are you ? J'en suis bien aise. Et vous, Monsieur, comment vo\if portez-vous ? SIXTH LESSON, 6th. Sixieme Le^n, 6me. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. \ VOCABULAIBB. Ire Sectioa. The beef, or ox. The biscuit. Le bceuf. Le biscuit. Of the captain. Of the cook. The mutton. The knife. Du capitaine, Du cuisiniei Le motion. Le cot lean. Have 1 1 Have I it ? You have. You have got it. You have not. You have not got it. iTou have nothing, (not got anything). Am I afraid ? You are afraid. Am 1 ashamed ? You are not ashamed. Are you ashamed ? I am ashamed. Have I anything ugly ? You have not got anything ugly. What have I got ? > What is the matter with me ? (ails me?) > The fine ono. The ugly one. I Which, meaning which one ? Ai-je? L'ai-je? Vous avez. Vous Vavez Vous n'avez pas. ^ous ne Vavez pas. Vous n'avez rien. t Ai-je peur ? t Vous avez peur. t Ai-je honte ? t Vous n'avez pas hontc. t Avez-vous honte ? t J'ai honte. Ai-je quelque chose de vilai i Vous n'avez rien de vilain. Qu'ai-je ? Le beau. Le vilaiu. Lequel ? Obs 12. Which is translated by; quel, with a noun, by : lequel, with out the noun. Quel parasol ? Lequel I t Ai-je peur ou honte ? t Vous n'avez ni peur ni honte t Vous n'avez ni faim ni soif. Which parasol ? Which one ? Am I afraid or ashamed ? You are neither afraid nor ashamed. Tou are neither hungry nor thirsty. SIXTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. SIXIEME EXERCICB. Ire Sec- Good evening, Miss ; are you well ? Very well, thank you. 1 %m glad to hear it. And you, Mr. Louis, how do you do? Ncl wry well to-day. Are you well, this evening, Madam ? Pretty veil, thank you. I am glad of it. I have neither the baker's dog 36 SIXTH LESSOH. nor that of my friend. Are you ashamed 1 I am not ashamed Are you afraid or ashamed? I am neither afraid nor usharr.ed. Have you my knife ? Which one ? The fine one. Have you my beef or the cook's? I have neither yours nor the cook's. Whicb (lequel) have you ? I have that of the captain. Have I your bis cuit? You have it not. Am I hungry or thirsty ? You are neither hungry nor thirsty. Am I warm or cold 1 ? You are neither warn) nor cold. Am I afraid? You are not afraid, t You are neither afraid nor ashamed.-f-Have I anything good ? You have nothing good. What have I? You have nothing. Which pencil have I? You have that of the Frenchman. Have I your thimble or that of the tailor? You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. Which one have I ? You have your friend's. Which umbrella have 1 1 You have mine. Have I the baker's good bread ? You Jiave it not. Which dictionary have I ? You have your own. Have you my iron gun? I have it not. Have I it? You have it. Have I youi mutton or the cook's? You have neither mine nor the cook's. Have I your knife? You have it not. Have you it? I have it. Which biscuit have I ? You have that of the captain. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. Am I hungry ? You are hungry. You are not hungry. Am I wrong ? You are wrong. You are not wrong. Am I right ? You are not right. You are right. The butter. The grocer. Our groc3r. The grocer's butter or that ^f the cook. Have I the boy's penknife ? You have it not, (not got it.) Have I Miss Clara's ? You have neither Miss Clara's nor the boy's. W'nich one have I / Von have the grocer's. Have 1 the cook's butter ? You have it not. You have nothing. Nave I anything bad or old ? You have neither anything bad -nor old (nothing^ VOCABTJLAIRE. 2de Section. t Ai-je faim ? t Vous avez faim. 1 Vous n'avez pas fa;m. t Ai-je tort ? t Vous avez tort. t Vous n'avez pas tort. t Ai-je raison ? t Vous n'avez pas raison. t Vous avez raison. Le beurre. L J epicier. Notre epicier. Le beurre de 1' epicier ou cclui du cuisinier. Ai-je le canif du gar that, because, that, (a true pronoun in this case) must have an antecedent to agree with. (Mind the construction, and see $ 35.) Have 1 this one or that one ? You have this one. you have not that one. Has the man this or that glove ? (Mind the French construction.) Ai-je celui-ci ou celui-la ? Vous avez celui-ci, vous n'avez paa celui-la. L'homme a-t-il ce gant-ci ou clui la? EiaiiTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. HUITIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Good evening, Miss Clara, how do you do? I am not very well Sir, thank you. And you, Sir, are you well? Pretty well, thanl you. 1 hope your brother is better. Yes, Sir, brother (mon f.) is better Which inkstand has the stranger? He has that of the sailor.- Has the sailor my looking-glass? He has it not: I have tt Have you this pistol or that one ?- I have this on> Have you EIGHTH LESSOR the inkslarid of my neighbor or that of yours ? 1 have neither that of your neighbor nor that of mine. Which one have you ? I have the stranger's. Which glove have you got ? Which one ? Yes, which one. I have the sailor's. You have the sailor's glove 1 Yes, I have it. Have you his mattress ? I have it not. Which Docket-book has the sailor ? He has his own. Who has my good handkerchief 1 ? This stranger has it. Has he got it 1 ? Yes, he has it. What has he ? He has my pretty handkerchief. Have I Miss Victoria's handkerchief or pencil-case ? You have neither this nor that.-f What have I ? You Iiave not anything. Who has that pis- tol ? The stranger's friend has it. What has your servant ? He has the farmer's old tree. Has he that grocer's old handkerchief? He has not that of the grocer; he has the sailor's. Has that ox ;he hay of tnis horse ? No, it has its own. Which ox has the farmer 1 ? He has that of our neighbor. Have I your inkstand or his 1 ? You have neither mine nor his ; you have your brother's. Has the foreigner my bird or his own '? He has got that of the captain. Have you this tree ? I have it not. Are you hungry or thirsty? I am neither hungry nor thirsty; I am sleepy. Has the old sailor this bird or that one ? He has not this; he has that. Has our ser- vant this broom or that one ? He has the ugly one. Has your cook this or that chicken ? He has neither this nor that ; he has his own. Am I right or wrong ? You are not wrong. Who is right ? No- body. Have I this or that penknife ? or that. No ; nobody has either this Take a seat and sit down. I thank you. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. The note, the billet, the ticket. The garret, the attic, the granary. His corn, his grain, its grain. This copybook. That copybook. Big, bulky, thick, coarse, large. Tho? big tree. Your coarse cloth thick paper. But. But not. He has not this one, but he has that. He has this one, but not that one. [ have that one, but not this one. Have you this or that note ? (Mind the construction in French^ i have not this one, but that one. Prenez un siege et asseyoz vous. Je vous remercie. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Le billet. Le grenier. Son grain. Ce cahier-ci. Ce eo/uer-la. Gros. Ce gros arbre-la. Votre gros drap gros papier. Mais. Mais non. Mais non pa*. II n'a pas celui-ci, mais il a celui-la II a celui-ci, mais non celui-M. J'ai celui-la, mais non pas celui-ci, Avez-vous cc billet- ci ou celui-lil ? fmaia j'ai eelui Je n'ai pas celui-ci, < la. \ moie oelui h \ EIGHTH LESSON. . have thU one, but not that one. Has my friend my dog or his ? fie has mine, but I have his. That or which, (relative pronoun.) I fave I the copybook that you have ? (Have I the copybook you have ?; ! have not the note which your bro- tiier has. (the note your, &c.) That which, the one which. 1 [ have not that which you have. I have not that which he has. clave I the glove which you have ? Vou have not that which I have. f niais je n ai pas celui J'ai celui-ci, < la. \mais non celui-la. Mon ami a-t-il mon chienou le sien 1 II a le mien, mais j'ai le gjen. Que, (never understood in French, as it is frequently in English.) Ai-je le cahier que vous avez ? Je n'ai pas le billet quo votre frere ii Celui que. ($$ 35, 36.) Je n'ai pas celui que vous avez. Je n'ai pas celui qu'il a. Ai-je le gant que vous avez ? Vous n'avez pas celui que j'a ; .. EIGHTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. HUITIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Good evening, Madam, you are well, I hope? Perfectly well, Sir, I thank you. I am glad to hear it. And you, Sir, how do you do ? Not very well ; but take a seat and sit down. Thank you, 1 have a seat. Have you the corn of your granary or that of mine I have neither that of your granary nor that of mine ; but I have that of our merchant. Have you the grocer's? No, I have it not. Who has my glove ? That servant has it. What has this servant ? He has the old farmer's big tree. Has the farmer this or that ox (mind the French construction.} He has neither this nor that ; but he haa the one which the boy has not. Which boy? The big one or the good one ? The big one. Have you that young horse's com ? I have it not; our servant has it. Has your brother my note or his : He has neither yours nor his own ; but he has that of the big sailor. Have you the copybook ? Which copybook ? The big copybook. The big copybook ? No, I have it not ; but Charles has it What have you got ? I have my copybook, yours, his, or hers, and the grocer's.-^Have you the chest which I have ? I have not that which you have. Which handkerchief have you? I have the one which your brother has not. Which inkstand has our friend's bro- ther ? He has that which the farmer's boy has not. What copy- book have you ? I have the big one which you have not. W hat horse has the shoemaker ? He has that which our brother's farmer Uas not. What has the grocer ? He has the bag of rice which I 1 Translate : the one, by celui, except when the one is 01 apposition >* Uw ether. (Less.' 15.i *4r NINTH LESSON. have not Which waistcoat have you? I have that wh ch my young friend has not got. Are you cold or hungry ? I am neither cold nor hungry ; but Jean (John) is afraid. Is he afraid ? Yes, he is afraid of that big ox- Who is sleepy ? I am not sleepy, bui I am thirsty. Have you the iron or the wooden ship 1 I have neither this nor that ; but I have that which the big captain has not T am very sorry to hear h, tor for n.) | J'eu suis bien fache. NINTH LESSON, 9th. Neuvieme Le$on, 9me. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. VOCABULAIBE. Ire Section. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. Formation du Pluriel. As the plural of nouns, in French, is shown by the preceding article 01 attending word, we will, in the first place, give tne plural of those different expressions. Singular. Masculine. The. Of the. Singulier. Masculin. Le. Du (for: dele., \ Plural for both genders. The. Of the. Pluriel pour lea deux genres. Les. Des (for : de les.) 01>s. 21. Des, (contraction of: de les , preposition and article plural,) is not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of: de, which, being a preposition, ia invariable; but that of : du, (contraction of: de le, preposition and article singular.) My, of my. Your, of your. His, her, of his. Our,. of our. Their, of their. WhirJi ? Which one ? This , that. Mon, Votre, Son, Notre, Leur, Quel ? Lequel ? Ce, cet. de mon. de votre. de son. de notre. de leur. My, of my. Mes, de mes. Your, of your. Vos, de vos. His, her, of her. Ses, de ses. Our, of our. Nos, de nos Their, of their. Leurs, de leurs. Which ? Quels ? Which ones ? Lesquels 1 These , those. Ces. General Rule for the formation of the Plural. The plural number, is in English, is formed by adding an s to the lar. But, in French, this rule is not only applicable to nouns, but also articles, adjectives, and pronouns. The books. Of the book. The sticks. Of the sticks. Les livres. Du livre. Les batons. Des batons. Of the copybooks. Des cahier*. f The good books. Les bons livres. j Of the books. Des livres. 1 The good sticks, Les bons batone= ! The copybooks. Les cahiers. : The pretty copy Les jolis cahiera I books. NINTH LESSON. 43 The good friends. Lea bcms amis. Our pretty shawls. Nos jolis chales. My penknives. Mes canifs. Small Petit. Petits. Which large fans have I ? iTou have my large fans. Who has the merchant's shawls ? Nobody has his shawls, but some one has his pretty parasols and ribbons. Which cnes ? The small ones. Have you my leather shoes ? have not your leather shoes, but your cloth coats. Of the friends. Des amis. Of our shawls. De nos chiles. Of his pen knives De ses canifa. Great, large. Grand. Graaua Quels grands dventails ai-je ? Vous avez mes grands eventails Qui a les chales du marchand ? Personne n'a ses chales, rnais quelqu'un a ses jolis parasols et ses rubans. Lesquels ? Les petits. Avez-vous mes souliers de cuir ? Je n'ai pas vos souliers de cuir, maia vos habits de drap. NINTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. NEUVIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Good evening, Miss, I hope you are well ? Perfectly well. Sir, I thank you. I am glad to hear it. How is your father ? He la well, I hope. No, Sir, not very well. I im sorry to hear it. But take a seat and sit down. Thank you Have you my gloves 1 Yes, Sir, I have your gloves. Have you the stranger's gloves ? No, Sir, I have not his gloves. Have I your looking-glasses? You have our looking-glasses. What has the little sailor? He has the pretty parasols. Has he my sticks or my guns? He has neithei your sticks nor your guns. Who has the tailor's good waistcoats? Nobody has his vests ; but somebody has his silver buttons. Has the Frenchman's boy our good umbrellas? He has not our good umbrellas, but our parasols. Has the shoemaker the shoes of the strangers? He has not their shoes. Has he their bags? Which bags ? Their leather bags. No, he has neither their shoes nor their leather I ags ; but he has the velvet shoes of the merchants. Wha ias the captain ? He has his go'xl sailors. Which brooms has our servant ? He has the brooms 01 our grocer. Of the young or of the old grocer? Of the old one. Has this man those large fans . He has not those large fans. Has he your copybook or your friend's? He has neither mine nor my friend's; he has his own. Have you three of the exercises? Of which exercises? Of the exercises of V. Value. Yes, I have three of his exercises. Has your brother the wine which I have or that which you have ? He has neither that which you have nor that which I have. Which wine Las he ? He has that of his grocer. Have you the bag which my server \ has ? I have not the bag which your servant has. Have you the chicken which my cook has or that which the peasant has? I have neither that which your cook has nor that which the peasant lids. Is ihe peasant cold or warm * He is neither cold nor warm 40 NINTH LESSOR VOCABULARY. 2d Section. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section, Exceptions to the General Rule to form the Plural. 1st EXCEPTION. Nouns ending in s, x, or z, admit of no variation in tht plural ; because those terminations are considered as plural ones. The stockings. Les has. My mattresses. Mes matelas. The French. Les Fran$ais, Their woods, forests. Leurs bete. The Englishman. L' Anglais. The English. Les Anglais. Our choice. Notre choix. Our choices. Nos choix. The nose. Le ncz. The noses. Les nez. 2d EXCEPTION.- -Nouns ending in au, eu, and some in ott, 1 take x instead Ois. The hats. Les chapeaux. The birds. Les oiseaux. The place. Le lieu. The places. Les lieux. This fire. Ce feu-ci. Those fires. Ces feux-la. That jewel. Ce bijou-la. These jewels. Ces bijoux -ci. The cabbages. Les choux. Your toys. Vos joujoux. 1 3d EXCEPTION. Nouns ending in aZ, 2 or ai'Z, 3 change those terminations into aux. As: The horses. Les chevaux. I General, gener&iS. General, generaux The work, labor. Le travail. I The works, labors.Les travaux. Obs. 22. There are a few more exceptions in the formation of the p!urai if nouns and adjectives, which will be separately noted as they occur. The ships.* | Les bailments or batimens. 06s. 23. According to some grammarians, nouns of more than one syua ole, (polysyllables,) ending in the singular in nt, drop t in the plural, but nouns of one syllable 'monosyllables) having this ending, never do. The gloves. | Les gants. 1 The other nouns ending in ou, that take x in the plural, are : le caillou. the pebble; le ge*iou, the knee ; le hibou, the owl. All 'others that have this termination n)w follow the general rule, taking s in the plural ; as, /* clou, the nail, plul les clous, the nails ; le verrou, the bolt, plur. les verrous. the bolts, &c. 2 Of the nouns ending in al, several follow the general rule, simply taking a in the plural, particularly the following : le bal, the ball ; le cal, the callo sity ; le pal, the pale ; le regal, the treat ; le carnaval, the carnival, &c. 3 The nouns ending in ail, which make their plural in aux, are particularly ihe following: le bail, the lease; le sous-bail, the under-lease ; le coratl, the coral ; Z' email, the enamel ; le soupirail, the air-hole ; le travail, ths work ; le vantail, the leaf of a folding-door ;, le ventail, the ventail. Ai! others having this termination follow the general rule, i. e. take s in the plural, as, Vattirail, the train; le detail, particulars; Veventail, the fan; le gouvtrnail, the rudder : leportail, the portal ; le serail, the seraglio ; &c NINTH LES80W. flie eye. The scissors L'osil. Les ciseaux. Which horses have you ? I have the fine horses of your good neighbors. Have I his small gloves ? You have not his small gloves, but you have his large hats. Which gloves have I ? You have the pretty gloves of your brothers. Have you the large hammers of the carpenters ? I have not their large hammers, but their large nails. Haa your brother my wooden guns ? He has not your wooden guns. Which ones has he ? Have you the Frenchmen's fine um- brellas ? I have not their fine umbreUes, but I have their fine sticks. The oxen. Of my gardens. Of your woods or i^rests. Have you the trees of my gardens ? I have not the trees of your gardens. Of my pretty gardens. Of my fine horses. Les yeux. Les porte feurilrc ' The eyes. The pocket- books. Quels chevaux avez-TOus ? J'ai les beaux chevaux ue vos bons voisins. Ai-je ses petits gants ? Vous n'avez pas ses petits gants, mais vous avez ses grands chapeaux. Quels gants ai-je ? Vous avez IBS jolis gants de vo& freres. Avez-vous les grands marteaux des charpentiers ? Je n'ai pas leurs grands marteaux, mais j'ai leurs grands clous. Votre frere a-t-il mes fusils de bois t II n'a pas vos fusils de bois. Lesquels a-t-il ? Avez-vous les beaux parapluieb des Fran$ais ? Je n'ai pas leurs beaux parapluies. mais j'ai leurs beaux batons. Les boeufs. (in the plural, f silent.) De mes jardins. De vos bois. Avez-vous les arbres de mes jardins ? Je n'ai pas les arbres de vos jardhis De mes jolis jardins. De mes beaux chevaux. NINTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. NEUVIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Are you well, Miss Gertrude ? Yes, Sir, I e.m very well, thank you. And you, Sir, how do you do ? Not very well, thank you, Miss. Indeed ! I am sorry to hear it. Take off your shawl and hat, and sit down. Thank you, thank you. With pleasure, I will. Have I your pretty pocket-books? You have not my pretty pocket-books. } Which pocket-books have I ? You have the small pocket-books of your friends. Has the foreigner our good pistols? Ho has not our good pistols, but our old sticks. Who has our ships ? The fo- icigner has our ships. Who has our fine horses? Nobody has oui fine horses; but somebody has our fine oxen. Has your neighboi J)e choice of those trees ? Our neighbor has not the choice of those fees; but the great general has it. Who has the old jewels of Mrs 140.) For the formation of the plural of compound words. 8 TENTH LESSON. Lc Noir? Her brother has her jewels. Has the little boy his M>va or his birds? He has his birds, but little John (le petit} has his play- things. Has the farmer got the horses' hay ? He has not their hay, but their corn. Has that tailor my fine gold buttons? He has not your fine gold buttons; but our old silver strings. Has our friend our bij pencils ? He has not our big pencils, but he has the ugly dogs of the generals. Has little John the choice of those toys ? No, he has not the choice of those toys : but little Robert has it Who has the merchant's fine inkstands? Nobody has his fine inkstands ; but I have his large copybooks. Who has their coarse handkerchiefs ? The captain's sailor has their coarse handkerchiefs Have you the grocer's coal ? No, I have it not. Have I got it ? You have it not. Who has his coal? The servants of the generals. What have you? I have something bad. What have you bad? I have the bad chocolate. The grocer's bad chocolate ? No, the old sailor's. Has your friend the small knives of our merchants? He has not their small knives, but their golden candlesticks. Have you the big cabbages or the little ones? I have neither the big cabbages nor the little ones. Which have you ? I have the farm- er's good cabbages. Have you the choice of the cabbages ? No, I have it not; but my brother has it. Which choice has he ? He has the first. Who has the second choice ? I have it not. What fan have you? What fui have I? Yes, what fan have you? I hav not yours, but mine A sore throat. A cold. A bad cold. A headache. Mai de gorge. Un rhume. Uu mauvais rhume Mai de tete. TENTH LESSON, 10th. Dixieme Le$on, lOme. . 1st Section. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Those. Those of the generals. Ceux. Ceux des generaux. Have you my dictionaries or those of Avez-vous mes dictionnaires ou ceux the general ? du general ? I have not yours, I have those of the Je n'ai pas les votres, j'ai ceux tlu general. Those which. IIse you the handkerchiefs which I have ? I have not tho.e (which) you have. The Cioak. Our cloaks. Ceux que. ($ 36.) Avez-vous les mouchoirs que j'ai ? Je n'ai pas ceux que vous avez. Le manteau. Nos manteaux. This seat. These seats, j Ce siege. Ces sieges. Has the tailor this gentleman'' s \ Le tailleur a-t-il le manteau de cloak ? Monsieur ? TENTH LESSEN. The gentlemen. Ladies. Young ladies. (Used when speaking to them.) Have you my silver knives ? No, I have mine. Les Messicuis. Mesdames. Mesuemoiselleu. Avez-vous mes coutcaux d'argent? Non, j'ai les miens. Obs. 24. As mine refers to a plural noun, it must be translated by a pronoun. Then use : les miens, which is plural, and not the singular i Mine my own. Of mine. You:s, your own. Of yours. His or hers (his or hex own.) Of his. Ours, our own. Of our own. Theirs, their own Of theirs. These substantives. Those nouns. The article. The articles. Which adjective ? Which adjectives ? This verb. Those verbs. The pronoun, pronouns personal, namely, or viz : I, you, he, it, &c. Also. The catalogue. Singulier. Pl^riel. Le mien. Les miens. des niietib. Le votre. Les votres. des votres. Le sien. Les siens. des siens. Le notre. Les notres. des notres. Le leur. Les leurs. des leurs. Ces substantifs-ci. .Ces noms-la. L'article. Les articles. Quel adjectif? Quels adjectifsf Ce verbe-ci. Ces verbes-la. Lepronom. Les pronoms personnels, savoir : Je, vous, il, le, et cetera. Aussi. Le catalogue. TENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. DIXIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Good day, Miss, you are well, I hope ? Very well, Sir, I thank you And you, how do you do? Not very well, this morning. Indeed ! I am very sorry for it. What is the matter with you ? i have a bad cold and a sore throat. How is the general ? (M. le general ?) He is pretty well. And his brother? He is pretty well also. Take a seat and sit down. Have you these or those nouns? I have neither these nor those nouns. Which ones have you? 1 have those which little Robert has namely, (savoir:) handker- chief, n.kstand, cloak, dictionary, fan, penknife, &c. Have you: the eye ? Yes, I have : Vail. Have you the plural of ceil? I have it, and he has got it, also. Has Charles the catalogue of the verbs which you have ? He has the catalogue of those which I have and that of your?, also. Have you the French of : to give? I have it not; but I have that of, He is better, and that of the places. Have you the horses of the French or those of the English? I have those of the English, but not those of the French. Which oxen have you ? I have thbse of the foreigners. Have jou the fans which I have 1 1 httve not those which you have, but those which your brothei aas. Has your brother his biscuits or mine ? He has his own and mine also. Has he got yours or those of the young geneial? He bos neither ours nor those of the young general. W r hich horses bap 5 50 TENTH LESSCN. your friend's grocer? He has those which the stranger has not Has your farmer my copybooks or theirs? He has neither ours noj theirs, but he has those of the captain. Have I your vests or those of the tailors ? You have not theirs, you have mine. Have 1 the large cloaks? No, you have not got the large cloaks. Which ink- stands have I ? You have not ours, but those of our neighbors. Have you the birds of the sailors ? I have not their birds, but their fine sticks. Which jewels has this ugly boy ? He has mine. Have I my shoes or those of the shoemakers ? You have not yours, but .heirs. fWhich paper has the man ? He has ours. Has he our coffee ? He has it not. Have you our big coats, or those of trjje strangers? I have not anything. Has your brother this or that lawyer ? He has that one. Have I these or those books ? You have not anything. I hope you are better ? Much better, at your service. The toothache. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. This word. Those words. Have you these words or those ? Have you these or those words ? These (plural of: this one.) Those (plural of: that one.) I have neither these nor those. Has he these or those ? He has these ; he has not those. You have neither these nor those. Y"ou have neither the one nor the other. Vou have neither the former nor the latter. Obs. 25 The English phrases : the former or the latter ; the one and tht other, are generally expressed by : celui-ci, ceux-ci ; celui-ld, ceux-ld ; but in an inverted order : celui-ci, referring to the latter or nearest object ; and telui-la, to the former or more distant one. J'espere que vousvousportezmieux Beaucoup mieux, a votre service. Mai aux dents. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Ce mot-ci. Ces mots-la. Avez-vous ces mots-ci ou ceujf-la? Ceux-ci. (pluriel de : celui-ci.) Ceux-ld. (pluriel de : celui-ld.) Je n'ai ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. A-t-il ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? II a ceux-ci ; il n'a pas ceux-la. Vous n'avez ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la. Have you my guns or yours ? I have neither yours nor mine. I have neither the former nor the latter. Have you not ? < Jave you nothing ? (not anything.) Nobody, (no one, not anyone) (ob- jective.) You have nobody. hare you not ? (or not gof ?) [ Avez-vous nios fusils ou les votrcr f ) Je n'ai ni les votres ni les miens. ( Je n'ai ni ceux-la, ni ceux ci N'avez-vous pas ? N'avez-vous ricn ? Ne . . . . personne. (Regime } Vous n'avez persor.nt. Que n'avez-vous j>aa ? TENTH LESSON. 51 Ha* he ? Has he not ? Hay he anything ? Has he nothing ? Has he any one ? Has he nobody ? What has he not ? [las not the man got ? Has not the dog got anything ? Have you my penknife ? Yes, Sir, I have got it. Have you not (got) my penknife ? Xo, Sir, I have it not. ilavr you not got it, Miss ? Yes, I have it. Obs. 26. When the question is affirmatively by: Si fait, instead of: as usual. Has he nothing ? No, nothing. Yes, he has something. Have you not your money ? Yes, I have it. No, I have it not. Has not the scholar his book ? Yes. he has it. The scholar, pupil, student. - A-t-il? N'a-t-il past A-t-il quelque chose ? N'a-t-il rienl A-t-il quelqu'un ? N'a-t-il personnel Que' n'a-t-il pas ? L'homme n'a-t-il pas ? Le chien n'a-t-il rien ? Avez-vous mon canif ? Oui, Monsieur, je 1'ai. N'avez-vous pas mon canif? Non, Monsieur, je ne 1'ai pas. Ne 1'avez-vous pas, Mademoiselle f Si fait, je 1'ai. asked negatively, the French answer Oui. The negative answer remains N'a-t-il rien ? Non, rien. Si fait, il a quelque chose. N'avez-vous pas votre argent ? - i A-t-il-mes beaux verres ? II les a. ($ 51, &c.) II ne les a pas. Les ai-je ? Vous les avez. Vous ne les avez poa Ne les avez-vous pas ? Si fait, je les ai. Ne l'a-t-il pas ? Si fait, il 1'a. Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mre vice* pistole ts ? TENTH LESSON. them not. Yes, ho has them. Has he not got them ? Have I it not ? Have I them not ? Yes, you have it. You have them. Have I nobody ? Yes, you have somebody. Elave I nothing ugly ? Yes, you have something ugly. Have I neither your gold nor your silver thimble ? Yes, you have them. Wnat have I not? You have not the scissors of silver. Am I neither hungry nor thirsty ? This lawyer. The minister. Has not this lawyer got ? Has our cook got nothing ? Has their neighbor nobody ? What has not the doctor got ? Is not the dog hungry or thirsty ? Is Carnot neither sleepy nor afraid ? Is he not right ? Yes, he is. Is not that minister wrong ? No ; that minister is right. Which lawyer has the stranger ? He has the minister's brother. II ne les a pas. Si fait, il les a. Ne les a-t-il pas ? Ne Pai-je pas ? Ne les ai-je pfts 1 Si fait, vous 1'avez vous les a vex. N'ai-je personne ? Si fait, vous avez quelqu'un. N'ai-je rien de vilain ? Si fait, vous avez quclque choec de vilain. N'ai-je ni votre d< d'or ni ceioi d' argent ' Si fait, vous ies avez. Que n' ai-je pas ? Vous n'avez pas Ies ciseauxd' ardent N'ai-je ni faim ni soif ? Get avocat. Le ministre. Get avocat n'a-t-il pas ? Notre cuisinicr n'a-t-il rien ? Leur voisin n'a-t-il persomie ? Le medecin que n'a-t-il pas ? Le chien n'a-t-il pas faim ou soif? Carnot n'a-t-il ni sommeil ni peur ? N'a-t-il pas raison ? Si fait. Ce ministre-la n'a-t-il pas tort ? Non ; ce ministre-la a raison. Quel avocat 1'etranger a-t-il ? II a le frere du ministre. TENTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. DIXIEME EXERCICE. 3me Sec. Mile. Charlotte, I wish you a good morning. How do you do ? Thank you, Sir, I am very well, but very cold.- Is it cold? Yes, it is very cold. I am sorry for it. How is your young friend? I hope he is better this morning. Yes, Sir, he is better. And how is Ma- dame ? Madame is perfectly well. Mile. Anne is well I hope? No, not very well And her brother has a bad cold. Take a seat and sit down. Thank yoii Is it warm to-day? No, it is not vvarm. Have you my fine glasses? I have them. Have you not the fine horses of the English? I have them not. Who has them ? The old minister has. (Dir. 1st.) Which sticks have you? I have those ol the foreigners. Who has our small combs? My boys have them. Which knives has the lawyer's servant? He has those of vour friends. Which (ones) has he not? He has not ours. Have 1 not your good guns? No, you have not got them j but the old general has them. What has the farmer got? He has the grocer's bag of rice. Has not the pretty young man Miss Clara's beantifiri 54 ELEVENTH LESSON. handkerchiefs? He has them not, I have them. Have you them 1 Yes, I have them. I have also her velvet shawl, her gold pencil- case, her silver inkstand, her small copybooks, her two large dic- tionaries cf Frencn; her fans, and the toys of her friend Auguste. Who has tne fine cloaks of the generals'? The minister's servant has them. Has the scholar the words which you have ? He has Ihem not. Has not the scholar got good dictionaries? Yes, he has good dictionaries of French. Which playthings has the grocer- o little boy ? He has little Henry's playthings. Have you the nouns, adjectives, and pronouns of the (la) ninth les&on? I have thoso cf the ninth vocabulary and those of the exercises. Has ti.e lawyer or the minister the choice of the farmer's cabbages ? The lawyer has it. Has he not also the choice of the grocer's cheese 1 ? Yes, he has. Who has the choice of the merchant's wine ? The minister, the lawyer, or the generals'? Neither the minister, the lawyer, nor the generals, but the grocer. Are you not ashamed? No, I am not. Is the scholar ashamed-? Yes, he is. Is he right or wrong? He is not wrong, he is right. Is not the tailor ashamed of his coats? Yes, he is ashamed of his coats. Who is not cold ? I am not. Who has nothing ugly? Their brother's friend has nothing ugly.- Has the youth Anne's handkerchiefs? Which handkerchiefs? The small ones. No, he has them not; but he has those of her brother. Who has the cook's mutton? Nobody has it; but the carpenters dog has. (Dir. 1st.) Has the stranger got the farmer's fine mutton T He has it not. Have you my pretty pistols or those of my brothers 1 I have neither yours nor your brothers', but my own. Who has these or those nails? Nobody has either these or those. I am glad to hear it. I Je suis bien aise de 1'apprendre. I am glad to see you. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. I am sorry to hear that you have the toothache. Oat of doors. Pleasant, agreeable. Je suis fache d'apprendre que voua avez mal aux dents. Dehors. Agr cable. ELEVENTH LESSON, llth. Onzieme Le$on, llmt. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. They. have. They have got. They have not. They have nothing. They have it. They have it not. They have them. They have not got them. VOCABULAIKE. Ire Section. Us. ont. 11s ont. Us n'ont pas. Us n'ont i icn. Us 1'ont. . lie ne Tout pan Us lea ont. Tls ne les ont pas. Germans. TheTurl's. i Les Allemands. Les Turca. FLEVFNTH LESSON. 55 The Germans have. The Turks have not Have they ? Have they not ? The Italians. The Spaniards. Of the Italians. Those Spaniards. Have the Spaniards ? hae not the Italians got ? iflave they got anything ? Have they nothing? Tlave they got it ? Have they them ? \\ hat have they ? The fine ones. They have the Spaniard's fine dogs. VVhat have they not ? They have not the general's paper. ARTICLE PARTITIVE OR INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUN. Some or any. ($4, 25.) Of some, of any, from some, any. Some or any wine. Bread. Some or any butter. Milk. Some or any books. Buttons. Some or any knives. Men. This steel. Some or any steel. Some or any gold. Silver. Borne or any. friends. Birds. Have you any wine ? I have (some wine). Has that man any cloth ? He has some cloth, or, He has. Has the scholar any copybooks ? He has (some copybooks). Have they any steel ? Th<3 English have steel. No, or not any (be f ore a noun.) I have no wine. He has no steel. Vou have no cloaks. Have they no friends ? Les Allemands ont. Lb* Turcs n'ont pas. Om-ils ? N'ont-ils pas ? Les Italiens. Les Espagnols. Des Italiens. Ces Espagnols-la, Les Espagnols ont-ils ? (Obs. 14 p. 38.) Les Italiens n'ont-ils pas ? Ont-ils quelque chose ? N'ont-ils rien ? L'ont-ils ? Les ont-ils ? Qu'ont-ils ? Les beaux. Us ont les beaux chiensdel'Espa^nol Que n'ont-ils pas ? Us n'ont pas le papier du general. ARTICLE PARTITIF. Sii.gulier. mas. Pluriel, m. et f Des. De, (not de de*., Du pain. Du lait. Des boutons. Des hommes. De 1'acier. De 1' argent. Des oiseaux. J'ai du vin. Du. de V. De, (not de du.) Du vin. Du beurre. Des livres. Des couteaux. Get acier. De 1'or. Des amis. Avez-vous du vin ? (Ire Direction.) Get homme a-t-il du drap ? II a du drap. L'ecolier a*t-il des cahiers t II a des cahiers. Ont-ils de 1'acier ? Les Anglais ont de 1'acier. Ne pas'de ($ 26.) Je n'ai pas de vin. II n'a pas d'acier. Vous n'avez pas de rnanteaux. N'ont-ils pas d'amis ? Obs. 27. Mind that the noun after a negation, takes, not : du, nor dn> 5>ut merely de or d'. (Or, you put de before the noun that follows a ncgu Hon.) IB anything the matter with them ? What is the matter with them f (ails them ?) Nothing is the matter with them. is the matter with the Italians ? t Ont-ils quelque chose ? t Qu'ont-ils ? t Us n'ont rien. t Qu'ont les Italiens ELEVENTH I.ESSC*. ELEVENTH EXEBCISE. 1st Sec. OKZIfiME ExERClCB. IfG SeO Good day, Miss Amanda. I am glad to see you. You are well> 1 hope? Vsry well, thank you: but my father is not well. Indeed I am sorry to hear it. What is the matter with him ? He has o bad cold. I am sorry to hear that he has a bad cold. Has he r e sore throat too ? No, but he has a pain in his head. Is the genera! well ? No, but he is much better. I am glad to hsar it. Is it cold ">! vrarm to-day out of doors? It is neither warm nor cold; ba$ pleasant. I am pleased at it Sit down. With pleasure. Tako this seat. Thank you. Which ships have the Germing? The Germans have no ships. Have the sailors our fine matti3sses? They have them not. Have the cooks got them ? They have them.-- Has the captain your big copybooks ? He has no copybooks. Have 1 them ? You have them not ; but I have. Has the Italian the boys' steel inkstand ? He has it not. Have the Turks any steel guns ? They have no steel guns. Have not the Spaniards got them? Yes, They have them. Has not the Spaniard the pretty umbrellas of the Germans'? Yes, he has them. Has he them? Yes, indeed, ho has them. Have not the two big Italians our pretty thread gloves? They have not. (Dir. 1st.) Who has? The Turks have them, and they have also our big paper fans. The pretty ones or the old ones 1 The pretty ones. Have not the tailors our cloth waistcoats or those of your friends? They have neither the latter nor the former; but they have those of the general, of the lawyer, and of little John. Which coats have they ? They have the velvet coats which the Turks have not. Which dogs have you ? I have those which no- body has. Have I the handkerchiefs that nobody has? Yes, indeed, you have those which nobody has. Have you not any wood ? Yes, I have some wood. Has not your small brother got some soap ? No, he has no soap. Have I not some mutton ? No, you have no mutton, but you have some birds and chickens. Have I no beef * No, you have no beef. Who has beef? Nobody has beef. Hava your friends any money ? They have money. Have they no milk ? They have no milk, but they have butter. Have I no wood ? No, you have no wood, but you have some coals, (sing. in. Fr.) Have the old merchants any cloth ? They have no cloth, but they have cotter thread, ribbons, and stockings. i wish you a good evening (I bid you.) liow have you been ? i have been pretty well, f hove not been very well. Je vous souhaite le bonsoir. Comment vous etes-vous porttf ? Je me suis assez bien porte. Je ne me sui pas tres-biei ptjrt4 ELEVENTH LESSON. 57 VOCABULARY. 2d Section. Some or any (before an adjective). Some or any good cheese. Some or any fine velvet. Some or any excellent wine. Some or any excellent coffee. Some or any very pretty glasses. Some or any large tans. Seme or any old wine. Some or any excellent cabbages. No or not. ant/ .... Have you any good butter ? [ have no good butter, but some ex- cellent cheese. Has not this man some good book? ? He lias not any good hooks. Have the young merchants pretty gloves and pocket-books ? They have neither pretty gloves nor pocket-books, but fine jewels. The cltrk. These clerks. Our bookseller. Their shoe-dealer. Those cloth-merchants, (drapers.) The milkman butter-man. This wood (coal) merchant. The painter. The picture. Some coals. What has the baker? What have the cloth-merchants ? They have excellent cierks. Are the Americais afraid ? 1 he Americans are not afraid. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. De, (not du nor des.) ($ 26.) De bon fro mage. De and d' ; De beau velours. the adjectives D'excellent vin. coming betort D'excellent cafe. the nouns. De tres-jolis verres. Repeat it bef De grands eventails. - every noun. Duvinvieux. > Xfc and efc; Ithe nouns be- ing before the adjective. Ne . . . . pas de , . Avez vous de boi. jeurre ? Je n'ai pas de bon beurre, mais d'excellent fromage. Get homme n'a-t-il pas de bons livres ? II n'a pas de bons livres. Les jeunes marchands ont-ils de jolis gants et de jolis porte-feuilles ? Us n'ont ni de jolis gants ni de johs porte-feuilles, mais de beaux bijoux. 1 Le commis. Ces com mis. Notre marchand de livres. Leur marchand de souliers. Ces marchands de drap. Le marchand de lait tie beurre. Ce marchand de bois de charbon. Le peintre. Le tableau. Du charbon, (always sing, in Fr.) 'Le boulanger qu'a-t-il ? (14 et 15 Obs. p. 38.) . Qu'a le boulanger ? Qu'ont les marchands de drap ? Us ont d'excellents commis. Les Amencains ont-ils peur ? Les Americains n'ofit pas peur ELEVENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. ONZI&ME EXEBOICE. 2de Sec you a good evening, Mr. Charles. How have you been r I have been pretty well ; and you, Miss, how have you been ? 1 have not been well. I am sorry to hear it. What kind of wealhoi is it out of doors? The weather is fine enough, (preltv fineV but 58 ELEVENTH LESSOW. sold. Is it very cold? Not very cold, but pleasant. 1 hope, ErniLe, that you are well ? Thank you. but I am not well, I hive a sore throat. And your friend Robert, how is he to-day? He 13 better, much better. I am very glad to hear that he is better. Which exercise have the scholars to-day ? They have the eleventh, tho tenth, and the ninth. Which ones has the young clerk 1 ? He has the fifth, first and second section. Have the English any silver '* They have no silver, but they have excellent iron. ($25.) Has the grocer any good coffee ? He has no good coffee, but some excellent ivine. Has the bookseller no old dictionaries? Yes, he ha?, those of Boyer and Chambaud. Has he those which your brothers have? No, he has not those which they have. Has the milk-man no milk ? Yes, he has some milk. Have the French any good gloves? They have excellent gloves. Have they no birds? No, they have no birds, but they have pretty jewels. Who has excellent chocolate ? The Spaniards have excellent chocolate. Have they not some finu horses? Yes, they have some very fine horses. Have not the Germans got large dogs? Yes, they have large dogs and oxen. 1 Have the Americans large oxen ? No, they have little oxen and horses. 1 Has your friend's brother got some pretty little fans? Yes, he has some pretty little fans, shawls, and ribbons. 1 What has he not? He has neither my shoes, nor yours, nor theirs. Who has those of the French? They have them and ours also. Are not the coal-merchants ashamed? No, but they are afraid. Is the clerk, the lawyer, or the minister wrong? No, they are not wrong; but right. Have the wine-merchants anything good ? No, they have nothing good. Have not the Americans something beautiful? Yes, they have the electric telegraph, (telegraphe electrique.) Has the painter any umbrellas? He has no umbrellas, but he has beautiful pictures. Has he the pictures of the French, or those of the Italians? Who? the painter? Yes, the painter, He haa neither the latter nor the former. As usual. Better than usual. Not BO well as usual. Comme a 1'ordinaire. Mieux qu'a 1'ordinaire. Pas .si bien qu'a 1'ordinaire. Is he not better.? Yes, he is a little I N'est-il pas micux ? Si fait, oi better. I Pardonnez-moi, il eg un peu iniet* . Ote. 28. Pardonnez-moi, is as frequently used as . Si fait, by 'h French. (Olt. 26.) I present n*y respects to you. j J'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer. 1 Repeat the article and adiective : (et de grands bceuis.) TWELFTH LESSON. TWELFTH LESSON, 12th. Douzieme I2me. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. ome of it, any of it, of it, some. Some or any of them, of them, some. Have you any wine ? I have some of it of it some I have. Have you any coals ? Have you no coals ? I have none, not any I have not. Have you not any ? Yes, I have. Have you any good steel ? I have some good ... or I have. Have I good cloth and velvet ? You have not any good. You have not Has the grocer any sugar and salt ? He has sugar, but no salt. He has (some). He has not (any). Has he good sugar and soap ? He has (some good). He has not. Have I any bread and butter ? Have I no bread and butter ? You have some bread, hut no butter. You have neither bread nor butter. You have some. You have none. Have you any shoes and stockings ? I have shoes ; I have no stockings. 1 have (some good). I have not (any good). Has the farmer got good horses ? He has (some good ones). He has not. Has he any pretty knives and scis- sors ? Has he no small penknives ? Y cs, he has (some small ones). He has not. Have I no gold pencil-leases ? Yes, you have. Who has any ? Who has none ? The clerk has some. 1 he man has none. VVh3 has no clerk ? The lawyer has none. TWELFTH EXERCISE. 1st feec. Je vous souhaite le bonjour, Mr. Carnot, j'espere que vous portez mieix aujourd'hui. Merci, Madame, je me porte beaucoiv.) VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. En, (before the verb.) ft 1, $ 25.) Avez-vous du vin ? J'en ai. (Ire direction.) Avez-vous du charbon ? N'avez-vous pas de charbon ? (? "X .} Je n'en ai pas. N'en avez-vous pas ? Si fait, j'en 01. Avez-vous de bon acier ? J'en ai de bon. Ai-je de bon drap et de bon velours T Vois n'en avez pas de bon. (Ire dir.l L'epicier a-t-il du sucre et du sel ? II a du sucre ; mais pas de sel. II en a. II n'en a pas. A-t-il de bon si ere et de bon savor f II en a de bon. II n'en a pas de boA. Ai-je du pain et du beurre ? N'ai-je pas de pain et de beurre ? Vous avez du pain, mais pas de beurre. Vous n'avez ni pain ni beurre. Vous en avez. Vous n'en avez pas. Avez-vous des souliers et des bas ? J'ai des souliers : je n'ai pas de baa J'en ai de bons. Je n'en ai pas de bons. Le fermier a-t-il dc bons chevaux ? II en a de bons. II n'en a pas de bons. A-t-il de jolis couteaux et de jolis ciseaux ? N' a-t-il pas de petits canifs ? II en a de petits. II n'en a pas. N'ai-je pas de porte-crayons d'oi Si fait, vous en avez. Qui en a ? Qui n'en a paa ? Le commis en a. L'homme n'en a pas. Qui n'a pas de commis ? L'avocat n'en a pas. DOUZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. GO fWEUTH LESSON. niieux. Mai^ vous, M. Napoleon, comment vous etes-vous p<>i(ef Je ne me suis pas bien porte ? comme a 1'ordinaire. Je suis bien fache de 1'apprendre. Asseyez-vous. Prenez ce siege. Avez-vous assez chaua? Oui, je vous remercie, je n'ai pas froid. Avez-voue ?nai ie gorge ? Non, mais mal de tete. Votre ami se porte-t-i! mieux qu ? a 1'ordinaire ? Oui, beaucoup mieux. Je suis bier, aise d'apprendre qu'il se porte mieux. Fait-il froid ? Non, il fait agie- able. Mr. Charles, avez-vous mon petit canif ? Non, M., je ne 1'ai pas. Qui Pa? Votre ami Jules (Julius) 1'a. Non, Jules n'a pas ie mien, il a le votre. Le mien? Non, je 1'ai. Pardonnez-moi. Jules Pa. Les Espagnols n'ont-ils pas de beaux chevaux ? User. ont de beaux. Le domestique de Pavocat qu'a-t-il? II a le vieux chapeau du jeune Francais. Le commis de Pepicier n'a-t il paa mon joli petit chien ? Non, M. il n'a pas de chien. Son frere ne Pa-t-il pas? Pardonnez-moi, il Pa. Avez-vous peur de ce chien-ci 1 Oui, j'en ai peur. Avez-vous peur de celui-la? Non, je n'en ai pas peur. L'adolescent n'a-t-il pas peur de ce boeuf-la ? Pardonnez- moi, il en a peur. Have you any coal? I have. (Istdir.) Have you any wood? I have not. Have you any good beef? I have (some good). Any young mutton ? I have not. Have you no good cloth ? No, I have none. No good paper? Yes, I have. Have I the silver ribbon? No, you have it not. Which have I ? The velvet one. Have 1 the grocer's rice ? You have it not. Have I any rice ? You have (some.) Has the lawyer any thread handkerchiefs ? He has none. Who has any? Miss Rose has some very pretty ones. Has the clerk any money ? He has none. What has he ? He has not anything. Who ? The clerk. Has the lawyer's servant any old cheese ? JHe has some. Have not the Spaniards the scholar's dic- tionary? Yes, they have it. Have they our books? No, they have them not. Who has them ? Your good friend, the minister, has them. Has the American any gold ? He has some. Have the tailors our vests? No, they have them not. Have they any vests? They have some. Have the French the pictures' 2 Which pictures ? Those of the young painter. No, the French have them not ; but the Italians have. What have they ? The young painter's pictures. Has not the milkman some fine oxen ? Yes, he has some fine ones. What leather has the shoemaker? He has some excel- lent. Haa the big general any jewels"? He ^as not any. Who na* playthings? The buitermc, 1 "- * sen has. TWELFTH LESSON. 61 VorvBULAaY. 2d Section. 1 'he hatier. Thisjoiner. The apothecary. These apothecaries. Have our friends any old cloaks ? They have some old ones:. (1st dir.) They have not (any old 1 . Have .hey not (any old ones 1 ? Ves, they have (some old ones). ilavs they good or bad books ? They have some good ones. whit have they good ? Thay have good books. Have you any good ones also ? Have you no pretty ones? Has the hatter any hats ? H;is he any ugly ones ? Has he neither ugly nor old ones ? /eo, he has tld ones. Have the joiners any hammers ? They have (1st dir.,) and the halters also. Have not the carpenters got some ? Ves, they have, and so have the doc- tors. Are the Spaniards cold ? No, they are not; they have fire. Have the Italians any ? Are the Turks afraid of the Ger- mans ? No, they are not afraid of them. Are they not afraid of the Russians ? Yes, they are. (1st dir.) Are they neither warm, sleepy, hun- gry, nor thirsty ? No, they are neither warm, sleepy, hungry nor thirsty, but wrong. Are not the hatters ashamed of their velvet hats ? N^o, they are not (ashamed of them). The Russian's apothecary. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Le chapelier. Ce menuister. L' ' apothicaire. Ces apothtcairts. Nos amis ont-ils de vieux mautoauxl Ils en ont de vieux. Us n'en ont pas de vieux. N'en ont-ils pas de vieux ? Si fait, ils en ont de vieux. Ont-ils de bons ou de mauvais livrca 1 Ils en ont de bons. Qu'ont-ils de bon ? Ils ont de bon livres, En avez-vous de bons aussi ? N'en avez-vous pas t e jolis ? Le chapelier a-t-il des chapeaux ? En a-t-il de vilains ? N'en a-t-il ni de vilains ni de vieux I Si fait, il en a de vieux. Les menuisiers ont-ils des marteaux < Ils en ont, ct les chapeliers aussi. Les charpentiers n'en ont-ils pas ? Si fait, ils en ont et les medecin* aussi. Les Espagnols ont-ils froid ? Non, ils n'ont pas froid ; ilsontdu feu Les Italiens en ont-ils ? Les Turcs ont-ils peur des Alle mands ? II n'en ont pas peur. N'ont-ils pas peur des Russes ? Si fait, ils en ont peur. N'ont-ils ni chaud, ni sommeil, n faim, ni soif ? Non, ils n'ont ni chaud, ni sommeil ni faim, ni soif, mais ils ont tort. Les chapeliers n'ont-ils pas honte dt leurs chapeaux de velours ? Non, ils n'en ont pas honte. L' apothicaire du Russe. TWELFTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. DOUZIEMB EXERCICE. 2de Sec. M. Lamartine, j'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer. Comment YOUP portez-vous ce matin, et comment vous etes-vous porte ? Bien : et vous, Mr., j'espere que vous vous portez mieux aujourd'hui. Un peu Dite'.ix, a votre service. Quel temps fait-il? Fait-il chaud ou froid'! Q ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mais agreable. Comment so porte notre 62 TWELFTH LESSON. ministie? I] ne se porte pas bien. Qu 'a-t-il? 11 aim mauvau rhume et nial d(3 gorge. A-t-il aussi mal aux dents'? Non, il n'a pas mal aux dents. J'en suis bien aise. Le bon com mis a-t-il les eventails de nos marchands? II n'a pas d'eventails, mais il a leurs gants de cuir. Avez-vous du grain du fermier? Oui, j'en ai, Auguste a-t-ii froid ou faim ? II n'a ni froid ni faim, mais il a chaud, Le marchand a-t-il quelque chose de joli ? II n'a rien de joli. N'a-t-il rien de beau ? Non, il n'a rien de joli ni de beau. Qu'ai-je? Vous avez de bon chocolat. Avez-vous le bois du menuisier? Je ne Pai pas, mais j'ai son marteau. Lequel; le grand ou le petit ? Pai le grand. N'avez-vous pas le petit? Si fait, ou pardonriez-moi, je Pai. J'ai celui que vous n'avez pas. Quels exercices ai-je ? Vous avez ceux de Mr. Charles, ceux de Mr. Robert, ceux de ce Mon- sieur-la, (gentleman) et les miens. Avez-vous le dixieme, le on/i- eme, ou le douzieme ? Je n'ai pas ceux-la, mais le huitieme, et le neuvieme. Lequel ont les Italiens ? Us ont le septieme. Has the captain any good sailors? He has some good ones.- Have the sailors any fine mattresses'? They have not (1st dii.) Have the painters any very old pictures ? No, they have no old pictures ; but the booksellers have. Have not the minister and the lawyer got some also? This one has some, that one has none. Who has beautiful shawls, ribbons, and handkerchiefs ? Messrs. Routilliers and Cowell have some. Has the apothecary's clerk my penknife or his? He has his own penknife, but not yours. Who has biscuits? The young baker of our big neighbour has. Who has beautiful ribbons? The French have. Have not the carpenters some gold and silver nails? No, they have iron nails; but the joiners have gold, silver, and steel nails? What is the mailer with their brothers? They are wrong and ashamed. What is the mat- ter with the foreigners? Which? These or those? Those. Those vire afraid of the general's dogs. And these ? These ? Nothing is the matter with them. They are neither cold nor warm, hungry nor thirsty. Have you Miss Clara's shawl and gloves ? No, I have them not. Who has them ? I have some, but not hers. Who has any of the grocer's rice ? The lawyer, the general, the apothecary, and the joiner have some of it. Have the painters fine pictures and gardens ? They have. Have not his joiner and his carpentor got some beautiful old wood ? The former has, but not the latter. Have the hatters good and bad hats? They have good and bad ones. Who has no pocket-book ? The milk and butter men have none. Have you none ? I have none. Has^our little clerk got any ? No, he has none. Who has any ? The booksellers have wine leather ones. Has the apothecary anything pretty ? He has TWELFTH LESSON act anything pretty, but he has something good. Who has you* birds'? The farmer has them. Has he their grain 1 He has i' also. How are they at home ? All well Everybody is well. Almost all are sick. VOCABULARY. 3d Section. Fresh. Tliis fresh butter. Fresh bread, A dry goods store. A journal, daily paper, gazette. To-day's paper, the paper of to-day. A or an (article indefiai, $ 3). In, into. In a or an. Of a. A horse. One horse. Of a horse. Have you a book ? I have a book. Have you a glass ? I have no glass. Comment SE pi- seaux ? Combien en a-t-il ? (pas ds nom.) Combien en a-t-il ? Ol :-.. 30. aay . How much ? How many ? How many friends have you ? How many has he ? Only, but, (with a noun.) Only, but, (without a noun). Before. After. Only one (of them). But two. I have but one friend. I have but one but two or three. How many horses has your brother ? He has but one but two young ones. Much, many, a good deal of, very much, many, a great many, (with nouns.) Much, many, &,c. (without a noun.) Much fresh butter (a great deal of). Mach gold. Many words. Has he many cabbages ? He has (many) not (many). Have they neither much iron nor steel ? Too much. Too many, (with and without noun). Have you too many words ? t have (too many). I have not. (Dir. 1.) He has neither too much of this one n"r of that. Das he many things ? He has too many by far (a great deal too much). Of it, of them, being usually omitted, when there is no no'in Combien en (avant le verbe.} Combien d'amis avez-vous? Combien en a-t-il ? Ne (avant) que, (apres le verbo.^ N'en .... que .... Avant. Apres. iV'ett . . . qu'un. N'en . . . que deux Je n'ai qu'un ami. Je n'en ai qu'un que deux ou troie Combien de chevaux a votre frcre ? II n'en a qu'un que deux jeunes. Beaucoup de . . . . (avec les noms.; (Dir. 7,) En .... beaLfoup (sans nom). Beaucoup de beurre frais. Beaucoup d'or. Beaucoup de mots A-t-il beaucoup de choux ? II en a beaucoup -II n'en a pas beau coup. N'ont-ils ni beaucoup de fer, n- beaucoup d'acier ? Trop de (avec). En .... trap fsana nom.) Avez-vous trop de mots ? J'en ai trop. Je n'tn ai pas trop. II n'a ni trop de celui-ci ni de celui- la. A-t-il beaucoup de chases ? II en fi beaucoup trop. THIRTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. TREIZIEME EXERCICE, Ire Sec. Comment ! (How! ) Vous avez mal de gorge ? Oui, j'ai un tree uiuuvais mal de gorge Avez-vous un rhume aussi? Non ? je n'ai &a* do rhume. J ; espere que votre jeune frere se porte lieu Od> 1 Cardinal numbers Two Of.-ux, fee. answer the question: Combien* How many I t)G THIRTEENTH LESSON il se pone tres-blen. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Persoime n'est malade. Mr. j'ai 1'honneur de vous saluer et j'espere fjue vous vous portez mieux. Je me porte beaucoup mieux, je vous remercie. Faif-il chaud? II ne fait pas froid. Asseyez-vous, pre nez ce siege-ci. Non merci. Votre cuisinier se porte-t-11 mieux '' II se porte bi^n. J'en suis bien aise. How many friends have you? I have two good friends. Ha\u yon eight good trunks ? I have nine. Has our servant three brooms ' He has only one good one. Has the captain two fine ships ? H.T has only one. How many sailors has he 1 ? He has too many; he nas thirteen. How many hammers have the carpenter and joiner They have many. Have they too many ? They have not. (Dir. 1 .) Have not the shoemakers many shoes'? Yes, they have many, bu r?ot too many. Has not the young man an old copy-book? Yes, he has. Has the clerk ten fans'? No. he has but seven ; but he fat- ten handkerchiefs, nine inkstands, eight combs, and many pencils. How much money have the Spaniards ? They have not much. Have they not many fine horses ? Yes, they have. Has your neigh bor much coffee ? He has some. How many bags has he 1 He has only six or seven. Who has too much grain 1 ? Nobody has. What has he got in his hat? He has some journals. How man} has he? He has three or four. Has he but three or four? No, he has but three or four. How many good generals have the Americans? They have & great many. What have the Russians ? They have much salt ; but not too much. Have the farmers much fresh butter ? They have some old, but none fresh. Have you brothers? I have but one. What have the apothecaries got in their stores? They have main things. Have they too many ? Yes, too many by far. Has the dn goods me r chant any satin, cotton and thread ? He has neither satin cotton, nor thread. What has he got? He has many things. Har- he anything pretty 1 ? Yes, he has. (Dir. 1.) Has the scholar a copybook ? No, he has none. Oh ! yes, he has one in his trunk. What has the grocer got in this and in that bag? In this he hai> some clothes. In that, he has cabbages, grain, and fresh cheese. Has he biscuits? He has. Is the man atraid? No, he is nc afraid. Are not the generals cold and hungry? No, but. they ar warm and thirsty. Who is ashamed? The minister's little boy s* ashamed. He is wrong. Who has the electric telegraph? Th< Americans have it. Has the youth any pretty sticks? He has nt pretty sticks, but some beautiful birds. What chickens has CHI cook ? He has some pretty chickens. How many has he? He ha- six Has the hatter any hats? He has a good many. Has ihi ioiner much wood 1 * He .\a. , ti ente, The thirty-first. ifundred,'ent. The hundred and first. The last. These last exercises. His last dollar. Le troisieme. Les trtisiemea. Le quatrieme. Les quatriemej, Le cinquieme. Les cinquiemes. Le neuvieme. Les neuviemes. Le onzicme. Les onziemes. Le vingt et uni- Les vingt et unj erne, ernes. Le vingt-deux- Les vingt-de;iy< ieme. iemes. Le irente et unieme. l Le cent-unieme. Les cent-unicmci Le dernier. Les derniers. Ces derniers exercices. Son derniei dollar. Notre dernier papier ou journal. Le premier et le dernier jour du mois. C'est bon. Ce n'est pas bon. Est-ce son cahier ? C'est le sien. Let the pupil try to compose Uur last paper or journal. The first and last day of the month. That is right. That's not right. [3 this, is that, or is it his copy-book ? ft is, this is, that is his. N. B. No French exercise is given here, one on the words of daily salutations. FOURTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. QUATORZIEME EXERCICE, 2de Sec. Monday, April fourteenth, 1849. { Lundi ' ^ aforze f Avri1 ' mil huit cen ' ( quarante-neur. How many exercises have we, to-day ? We hare but one. Have WK but one ? No, we have but one. What day of the month is it ? it is the fourteenth. Is it the fourteenth, indeed ? Yes, it is (the 14th). Have you the paper of to-day? To-day's paper? No; but the clerk has it. Has he but one ? No, he has three. Is this the last journal ? Yes, it is. Is not to-day the fourteenth ? No, it is only the thirteenth. Indeed! yes, indeed! That's right. That's ver} well. How many stockings has the merchant ? He has bur lew ; but he has many shawls, gloves and ribbons. Have you any other biscuits? I have no other. How many servants has that gen- leman? He has but three; but these foreigners have five. Has :he general much merit ? He has. Has W. Irving's last work mucb merit? Yes, it has. How many arms has this man ? He has one. flow many feet has the captain? He has but one. How many haa 1 Let the learner write the date, before his task. Ex. Lindi, seizt Avril, mil huit cent quarante-neuf. Monday, April 16th, 1849. Days of the week Jours de la Semaine Sunday, Dimanche ; Monda? T -tindi ; Tuesday, Mardi ; Wednesday, Mercredi ; Thursday, leidi; Fii Jay, Vendredi ; Saturday, Samedi. For the names of the months. ($ 143.) a FIFTEENTH LESSON. the general? He has two. What heart has your boy? He ha& a good heart. Have you no other servant ? Yes, I have another. Has your friend no other birds? Yes, he has. How many'? He has six others. Have the Spaniards and Italians many trues in their gardens'? No, they have but few; but the lawyer of merit has a great many in his. Which volume have you ? I have the first. Have you the second volume of my work? I have it. Have you the third or fourth xercise? I have neither the former nor the latter. Have the boys the fifth or sixth volume? They have the fifth, but we have the sixth. Which volume has your friend? He has the twenty-first. Is not to-day the eleventh of this month ? The eleventh of the month? No. It is the twelfth. The twelfth! indeed ! Has the youth much money? No. but he has our gold. Who has cou- rage ? The baker's little friend. Have we the nails and hammers of the joiner, or those of the carpenter? We have neither those of the joiner nor of the carpenter, but those of the grocer. Is this your copy-book ? Yes, it is mine. Is not this Miss Anne's velvet bon- net ? Yes, it is hers. Has your clerk or mine got the good two dollar note? Mine has it not. What has he? He has the fiv~ dollar one. Has the minister this or that work? He has but thik one. Who has the other 1 ? Nobody has it. "t has no merit. Whom have we to-day ? We have our young friends and those of the farmer. Have the Russians (les Russes) pepper? They have but little pep- per, but a good deal of salt. Have the Turks much wine ? They have not much wine, but a good deal of coffee. Who has a good deal of milk ? The Germans have a good deal. Have you no other gun ? I have no other. Have we any other cheese ? We have some other. Have I no other pistol ? You have another. FIFTEENTH LESSON, 15th. Quinzieme Legon, iome VOCABULARY. 1st Section. The tome (volume). The last tome. Have you the first or second tome of my work ? Both, or both the one a'nd the othtr. I have both. Have you their gold or silver ? { have neither (the one nor the ether). 77ie one and the other, (plural.) tio? your brother my gloves or his ? ifc has (bo' J C your' and his. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Le tome. Le dernier tome. Avez-vous le premier ou le deuxuunt: tome de mon ouvrage ? L'un et 1'autre. J'ail'unet 1'autre. Avez-vous leur or ou leur argent ? Je n'ai ni 1'un ni 1'autre. Les uns et les autres. Votre frere a-t-il mes gants ou les I siens ? II a les uns et les autres FIFTEENTH 1.ESSON. 73 Has he theirs or those of the clerks ? He has neither. (Mind Dir. I.) Have they neither ? (sing.) Have they neither ? (plur.) They have the one, but not the other. The Scotchman. The Dutchman. The Irishman. The Swiss. Still, yet, some, or any more, more. Any more satin. Some more steel. Y at some dollars. A few more francs. Save you any more cloth ? I have still some cloth. I have more. Has he any more steel ? He has. Have I yet many things ? You have still many (many more). Have the Dutch any more pepper ? They have not, but we have. Have you yet vinegar and sugar enough ? We have enough of the one, but not enough of the other. A-t-il les leurs ou ceux des commis < II n'a ni les uns ni les autres. N'ont-ils ni 1'un ni 1'autre ? N'ont-ils ni les uns ni les autres? Us ont 1'un mais non pas 1'autre, L'Ecossais. Le Hollandai^. L'Irlandais. Le Suisse. Encore (affirmatif ). Encore du satin. Encore de 1'acier. Encore des dollars. Encore quelquos francs. Avez-vous encore du Irap ? J'ai encore du drap. J'en ai encore. A-t-il encore ere 1'acier? II tn a encore. Ai-je encore beaucoup de choses ? Vous en avez encore beaucoup. Les Hollandais ont-ils encore du poi- vre ? Ilsn'enont pas ; mais nous en avons. Avez-vous encore assez de vinaigro et de sucre ? Nous avons assez de 1'un ; mais pas assez de 1'autre. N. B. Let the pupil compose a French Exerciee. FIFTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. QUINZIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Tuesday, April 1849. Write the date fully in French. Which exercises have these gentlemen to-day ? We have two. Which? The fourteenth and fifteenth. Have you many words 1 No, not many. Which volume of Cuvier's great works has your brother? He has the last. Has he not the seventh, also? He hag it not. Ho 7 many tomes has that work? It has ten. (Dir. 1.) Have you my work o. my friend's ? I have both. Has the foreigner my comb or your knife? He has both. Have the Dutch the fresh bread or cheese ? They have neither the one nor the other. Have I your penknife or my friend's ? You have neither. Who has them ? I have. Has the Dutchman my glass or that of this scholar? He aas neither. (Dir 1.) Has the Irishman our horses or chests? He has both. What have those Irishmen? They have some one dol- lar notes. Has the Scotchman our leather shoes or cotton stockings'? !! has neither. What has he ? He has the iron guns of the Swiss. "What has the Swiss got? He has thfi Scotchman's stick. Have >ho Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards? They have neither - Which ships have they ? They have their own. Has oui grocer any more pepper? He has some more. Has the 1 74 FIFTEENTH LES60K. lawyer's clerk any more half dollars? He has some more. He has yet four or five. Has he any more jewels? He has no jewels. Is the Swiss warm and hungry ? No, he is neither warm nor hun- gry; but the Irishman is dry and sleepy. Who is ashamed? No one is ashamed, but the minister is afraid of our big dog. Is no*, the Scotchman right? Yes, he is, and the Russian too. Are not the doctor and the apothecary wrong ? No, *hey are not wrong. Have the Irish anything old ? They have. W r ho has something iigly ? No one has. Have the Americans any more salt ? They huve, and some fresh butter, too. Have the painters anything pretty I No, to-day they have nothing. Have they not one pretty fan ? Oh, yes! They have still one. How many lawyers have you? Wt< have a- great many; we have also many (Dir. 7) physicians, minis- ters, grocers, gentlemen, apothecaries, and merchants. Has the youth Miss Anne's shawl? He has, and he has also her velvet bonnet ($ 32), her gold pencil-case, satin bag, handkerchief, and jewels. That's right. Is this the last journal ? No, it is that of thtt eleventh. Very well. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Obs. 34. More, affirmative, is encore. But with a negation, use, for : Not any more, no more. No longer ( Ne . . .plus de, (avec un nom.) any no longer any more. {. N'en. . . .plus, (sans le nom.) Je n'ai plus de feu, et il n'en a plus. have no more fire, and he has no more. He has no more rice. He has no more. Have we any more fresh butter ? [ have no more (no longer any). We have no more (no longer any). Has the wine merchant any mo^s vinegar ? No, he has no longer any. We ht- 'i few words. No more words. II n'a plus de riz. II n'en a plus. Avons-nous encore du beurre frais 1 Je n'en ai plus. Nous n'en avons plus. Le marchand de vin a-t-il encore du vinaigre ? Non, il n'en a plus. Nous n' avons plus de ce bon cafe. Les epiciers n'en onl-ils plus ? Us n'en ont plus. Je n'en ai plus. N'ont-ils plus ni or ni argent ? Si fait, ils en ont encore un peu. ( Ne... plus guere de, (avec un nom 1 ( IV' en . . . .plus guere, (sans nom.) Avez-vous encore beaucoup de ve- lours ? Je n'en ai plus gueit>. Le garc,on a-t-il encore beaucoup cki V)ujoux ? II n'en a plus guere. Encore un encrier. Plus d 1 encrier Encore quelques mots. Plus de mots Obs 35. 1'lus d j encrier Plus de mots, which seem to Bignifj : more FIFTEENTH LESSON. 75 tland more teords, is, however, in French, p negative expression. As tn *erb : I have, he has, &c., is understood, &o is the nc, whicli precedes it. ft 171, R. 8.) One more cabbage. A few moie. I Encore un chou. Encore quelquee uns. Have you a few more dollars ? I have (a few more). Have I still too many sous? You have not too many, but enough. How much more gold has he ? He has a little more (yet a little). How much or how many more has he? The last. The last two, three. The general's stick and gloves. ($ 32, Avez-vous encore quelques dollare? J'en ai encore (quelques uns). Ai-je encore trop de sous ? Vous n'en avez pas trop, Combien d'or a-t-il encore ? II en a encore un peu. Combien en a-t-il encore ? Le dernier. Les deux, let fr niers. Le baton du general et ses gants. N. 3.) FIFTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. QCINZIEMK EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Wednesday, April 1849. Mercredi, Avril, 1849. Have you one more exercise, Messrs. ? We have two more. Which? The last two. Has our cook much more fresh beef? He has not much more. Has he many more chickens? He has not. Has the farmer much more milk ? He has not much more milk ; but he has a great deal more butter. Have the French many more horses? They have not many more. Has our friend one more umbrella? He has no more. Has the tailor no more buttons ? He has no more. Has our carpenter no more nails? He has no more nails; but he has a little more wood. Has this cook no more fire? Yes, he has a little more. Have those Spaniards a few more half dollars? They have a few more. Have you a few more francs? We have no more francs ; but some more dollars. Have the Swiss still vinegar enough ? They have theirs and mine. Have they ? (Dir. 1.) Yes, they have. Have we any of the grocer's sugar? No, we have no more. Has the joiner wood enough? He has enough. Has he the stranger's wood? He has it not. Has he his iron and woodsn hammers ? He has them not. Have the sailors got their rice ($ 32), biscuits, beef, bread, and wine? They haye ihem ; but they have neither fresh butter nor cheese. How many ships has the little Russian ? These two. Has he no more ? No, he has but two. Is this to-day's paper ? No, it is not. Which journals has the lawyer? He has the last three. What day of tha month is it? It is the sixth. How many friends have youl I have but one good friend. Has the farmers horse too much grain ? He has not enough. Has he not much money ? Yes, he has a gruw Inol. Has he much iron ? He has still inv?h. Have we the cotton *6 SIXTEENTH LESSOIf. r>r thread stockings of the Americans ? We have neither theii throal nor cotton stockings. Is John cold, in the garden ? No, he is not. Are you very thirsty? I am thirsty enough. Is the Irishman too (trop) warm? Too warm? No, indeed, he is not too warm. Who is too warm? Nobody is too warm; but I am too hungry and sleepy. What ails your young dog? Nothing ails him. What ail? those Dutchmen ? They are afraid of the farmer's oxen and dog ($ 32, N. 3.) Who has my friend's book and cictionary? I have them not; but we have Edward's (Edouard) penknife, copy-book. liftd pencil. SIXTEENTH LESSON, 16th. Scizitme Le$on, 16me. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. Several. Several (of them). Several men. Several children. Several copy-books and pencils. (Dir. 2.) The father. This child. A son ... A cake. Tea. Has this gentleman several sons ? He has several. As much, as maiij. As much ... as, as many ... as. As much soap as sugar. As many men as children. Have you as much gold as silver ? I have as much of this as of that. I have as much of the one as of the other. Has he as many shoes as stockings ? He has as many of these as of those as many of the one as of the other. Quite (or just") as much, as many. Quite as much ... as, as many ... as. llae I quite as much velvet as satin ? You have (quite or just as much). Quite or just as much (of it). They have just as much of this as of that, fast as many of these as jf those. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Plusieurs, (no de before the noun.) En . . . p}.usieurs. Plusieurs horn mes. Plusieurs enfants Plusiours cahiers et plusieurs cray ons. Le pere. Get enfant. Vnfls. Un gateau. Du tht. Ce Monsieur a-t-il plusieurs his ? II en a ptasieurs. Autant de, (avant un nom.) Autant de . . . que de . . . (avant iet noms.) Autant de savon que de sucre. Autant d'hommes que d'enfants. Avez-vous autant d'or que d' argent f J'ai autant de celui-ci que de celui-la J'ai autant de 1'un que de 1'autre. A-t-il autant de souliers que de bas ? II a autant de ceux-ciquede ceux-la autant des uns que des autres. Tout autant de . . . (avant un nom.; Tout autant de . . . que de (av. !es noms). Ai-je tout autant de velours que Plus que lui. Plus que nous. Moins que vous. Moins qu'eux. Eux. Qu'eux. Autant que vous. Tout autant que lui. Autant que moi. Tout autant qu'eux. Tant de. Tant que cela. Pas tant. Pas tant que cela. Us ont six domestiques. En ont-ils tant ? Non, ils n'en ont pas tant que cela. Ils n'en ont qua quatre. SIXTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. SKIZI^ME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Friday, April 1849. Vendredi, Avril, 1849. Have you three exercises to-day, Mr. Charles? No, Miss, I have not. so many. How many have you "? I have got but two. W> have as many as you; bat those young scholars have more thai] we. Have they five or six? No, they have riot so many; they Moi, I, instead of: Je. Toi, thcu, " tu, rAre used in French as no-""j minative cases, when the yerb ig understood or Um,he,msteadof il separated from the pro- \Eux, they, ' Ua noun. ($ 38.) SEVENTEENTH LESSON 79 have only four. Four ? That's a great deal. Has this lawyer more friends than enemies ? He has more enemies than friends. Has the farmer as many sheep (moutons) as oxen ? He has just as many. Have you as many small guns as I ? I have just as many. Has me ugly foreigner as much courage as we 1 He has less than we. Have our neighbors as much fresh butter as cheese ? They have more of the latter than of the former. Have not your sons a?j many books as copy-books ? They have not so many of these 4s ol those ; they have fewer of the latter than of the former. How many noses has that stranger ? That small man ? Yes. He has but one. How many fingers has he ? He has several. Has ho ten ? No, he has not so many. Has he not so many? No, he has less than ton. How many has he ? He has but eight fingers and two thumbs. How many thumbs and fingers has you young scholar? He ? (mind the last note.) (Lui ?) Yes, he. He has not more thai; seven fingers and one thumb. And I, how many have I ? You Lave just as many as we (nous). Very well. Has the minister more children than the lawyer? The minister has more than he, but he. the lawyer, has more than they and we. How many pistols have you? I have only one; but my father has more than I and they. He has five. Has he so many, indeed ? Yes, he has just as many. John, have you more than seven dollars ? No, I have less than that. I have not so many. Have my children as much courage as yours? Yours have more than mine. Have I as much money as you? You have less than I, but more than he. Have you as many books as I ? I have fewer than you. I have not more than nine. Have I as many enemies as your father? You have fewer than he; but more than they. Have the Russians as many children as we ? We have fewer than they. Have the French as mauy ships as we? They have fewer than we. Have the dogs more feet than the horses? No, they have just as many. Has not your bird two feet ? Yes, it has two. Has not this little boy more arms than feet? Yes, he has two arms; but he has only one foot. What is the las/ *erb of the last exercise I It is What is (ho last noun of this exercise ? It is SEVENTEENTH LESSON, 17th. Dix-scptieme Legon, 17me. VOCABULARY. 1st Section. | VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section OF THE INFINITIVE -De Vlnfinitif. There are in Drench four Conjugations, which are distinguished by the termination ( f the Present of the Infinitivp, viz : so SEVENTEENTH LESSON. I. The first has its infinitive terminated in ER, as : parler, to Bpi ak which will be the model of its regular verbs. 2 The second in IR, its model fim'r, to finish, to eid ? The third in OIR, " recevoir, to receive. < The fourth in RE, " vendre, to sell. 06s. 36. A verb, in French, .s regular, when conjugated like the mode of its conjugation. Irregular, of course, when not conjugated like it. Eaclt verb given, hereafter, will have the number of its class. Those marked svith an asterisk (*) are irregular. To buy. To choose. To perceive. To wait for Anheter, I. 1 Choisir, 2. Apercevoir, 3. Attendre, 4. To cut, cut off. To build. To owe. To render, restore, Couper, I. Batir, 2. Devoir, 3. Rendre, 4. Fear, peur. Shame, honte. Time, le temps. Courage, le courage. Wrong, tort. Right, raison. A mind, a desire, a wish, envie. Obs. 37. These seven words require the preposition (de, of,) after then, when followed by an infinitive. Example. Are you afraid to speak I Avei- vous peur de parler? To work. Have you a mind to work ? I have a mind to work. He has not the courage to speak. Are you afraid to speak ? I am ashamed to speak. Have they time to wait ? They have neither time nor a wish to wait. To cut it, him. To cut them. To cut some. To cut one more. Has he time to cut the bread ? He has (time to c it it). Has he a mind to cut other trees ? Travailler, 1. Avez-vous envie de travailler ? J'ai envie de travailler. II n'a pas le courage de parler. Avez-vous peur de parler ? J'ai honte de parler. Ont-ils le temps d'attendre? Us n'ont ni le temps, ni envie d'at- tendre. Le couper. Les couper. En couper. En couper encore un. A-t-il le temps de couper le pain ? II a le temps de le couper. A-t-il envie de eouper d'autres ar bres? He has (a mind to cut others). II a envie d'en couper d'autres. SEVENTEENTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. PIX-SEPTIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Saturday April, 1849. Samedi Avril mil huit, &c. Have you more than one exercise this morning? We have no exercise, but we have a vocabulary. Have you not more than one Questions to be asked and answered in French, on the introduction of a verb. Of what conjugation is it ? De quelle conjugaison est-il ? Of th 1st, 2d, 3d, or 4th. De la Ire, 2de, 3me, ou 4me. Why ? Peurquoi ? Bv tense it ends in : er, ir, oir, or re. Farce qu'ilfinit en : er, ir, air, O'l re, ts it regular? Est il regulier ? It is. llVest Why ? Pourquoi? Be cause it is conjugated Use the model: parler, fin*r, recevoir, or ventlif.-* Parce qu'7 est conjugue comme le model : parler, &n. It i? net. U m ''cgt vas. It ia not conjugated, &c. ll n est pa* :ouiuue t &C. SEVENTEENTH LESSON. y ? No, we have not. (Dir. 1.) That is not much. No, thai is not much, but it is enough. Have you still a mind to buy my friend's horse and sheep? ( 32, N. 3.) I have still a mind to buy them } but I have no more money. Have you time to work * I tiave time, but no mind to work. Has your brother time to cut some beef or mutton ? He has. Is he afraid to cut any ? He is not. but he has no mind to cut any. Has he got no knife? ( 26.) Yes. he has one. Have you time to cut some cheese * I have. Has he a desire (a mind) to cut the cabbages ? He has, but he is ashamed to cut them. Is the tailor of the minister wrong to cut Jie coarse cloth? He is not wrong in cutting it. Who has time to jut the trees ? What trees ? The general's big trees. The farmer has time to cut them. How many trees has he time o cut? He has only time to cut two. Who has time to cut more than two? Nobody has. Are the little scholar and the little boy ashamed to apeak ? They are not ashamed, but afraid to speak. Am I not right in buying as many cakes as they? Yes, y^ u are right ia buying as many cakes as they. Is our friend right in buying that ugly old horse? No, he is wrong; but we are right in buying this pretty little dog. Has any one a mind to speak ? You, he, John, and I, have (469, N. 1) a mind to speak ; but we have not courage enough. Have you the courage to receive those gentle- men ? I have the courage and the wish to receive them. Is he not wrong to receive that note ? He is right to receive it. Has that sailor the courage to cut off the finger and thumb of this little boy 1 No, he has not ; but the doctor has. Has the cloth merchant a mind to ch ^ose a few more cloaks ? He has a mind to choose a few more, Dut he has no more money. Are the carpenters ashamed U bvlld a ship? They are not ashamed to build a small one; but the captain is afraid to build a large one. What are they afraid tc build? They are afraid to build a great many things. Is not the lawyei of merit wrong in receiving his young friends in his garden ' No, he js not wrong in receiving them in his garden : but he is no 1 right in choosing those old cakes and that bad wine. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. To break. To mend, to repair. Ccisyf. Of what conjugation is it ? Of the tirst. Why ? Because it ends in : er. is it regular ? Yes, it is. Why ? Because it is conjugated like the model : parler. To pick up. To look for, to seek. VOCABTJLAIRE. 2de Section. Casser, 1. Raccommoder, 1, De quelle conjugaison est-il ? De la premiere. Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il finit en : er. Est-il regulier ? Oui, il Test. Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il est conjugud comme Ic modele : parler. Ramasser, 1. Chercher. I. SEVENTEENTH LESSOR To buy, purchase. To buy one. To buy some moro. To buy two, To buy one or two more. Have you a mind to buy one more horse ? J. have a mind to buy two more. km I not right to pick up that beau- tiful satin shawl ? tTes, but you are wrong to break that pretty paper fan. is he afraid to mend this cloak ? Acheter, 1. En acheter un. En acheter encore. En acheter deua En acheter encore un ou deux. Avez-vous envie d'acheter encort un cheval ? J'ai envie d'en acheter encore deux. N'ai-je pas raison de ramas^er r beau chale de satin ? Si fait : mais voua avez tort dt ca*5*:i ce joli eventail de papier. A-t-il peur de raccommoder ce rrrui teau-ci ? II n'a pas peur de le raccommoder. Qu'ont-ils envie de chercher ? Us n'ont envie de rien chercher. Ces enfants ont-ils le courage d" dt tendre dans le jardin ? Us en ont le courage. Le jeune ecolier n'a-t-il pas tort d< vendre son dictionnaire ? Non, il n'a pas tort de le vendre, par- ce que c'est un vieux dictionnaire. Le marchand a-t-il plus de sucre qu 1'epicier? II n'en a pas tant. He is not afraid to mend it. What have they a mind to look for ? They do not. wish to look for anything. Have those children the courage to wait in the garden? They have (the courage). (Dir. 1.) fs not the young scholar wrong to sell his dictionary ? No, he is not wrong in selling it, be- cause it is an old dictionary. Has the merchant more sugar than the grocer ? He has not so much. SEVENTEENTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. DIX-SEPTIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Monday, May 1849. Lundi, Mai, 1849. Have we not the two exercises of the seventeenth lesson (de la) 1 Yes, we have the seventeenth lesson. How many verbs have we in our vocabularies? We have ten. Have we not more than ten? Is it not enough? Yes, it is enough. Have we any adjectives and nouns? We have several. Have we not many nouns and pro- nouns? We have more of the last than of the first. Has the young sailor any more biscuits or bread? He has biscuits, but (06s. 35'} no more bread. What has the old grocer got? He haa fresh cheese, but no more rice. Who has fresh butter? I have some yet, the physician has a little more, but the lawyer and the minister have no more. What has our tailor a mind to mend? He has a mind to mem! our old friend's (467, N. 1) coavs and vests. Has he not a mind to mend our hats arid theirs? No, but the hatter has a mind to merjG them. Has the little shoemaker time to mend our old shoes? Ho has time, but he has no mind to mend them. Are you afraid tt look for my horse ? I am not afraid, but I have no wish to look foi it. What are the carpenters right in building? They are right in building vessels. Are their children afraid to pick up some nails 1 EIGHTEENTH LESSON 83 I hey a,re no'. Have you a mind to break my jawel? I have a mind to pick it up, but not to break it. Am I wrong in picking up your 'leather gloves'? You are not wrong in picking them up; but you are wrong in cutting them. Who has a mind to break our large looking-glass? Our enemy has a mind to break it. Has the lawyer more merit than the minister ? The one has no more merit than the other. Has the big chicken more feet than this little bird* No, it has ;ust as many. EIGHTEENTH LESSON, 18th. Dix-hmtieme [,e$on } 18m ^ VOCABULARY. 1st Section. 'Jo make, to do, to perform. To be willing, to wish, to will. Will you ? Do you wish ? Are you willing ? Will you have ? I will, am willing, wish. I will not. Will he ? is he willing ? does he wish ? He will, is willing, wishes. He will not. Vv'e will, are willing, wish, will have. You will, are willing, wish, will have. They will, are willing, wish,uuZZ have. Who will (have)? Who does not wish? Nobody wishes. Some one wishes. Do >ou wish to have it ? Does any one wish to make my fire ? I am willing to make it. 1 do not wish to make it. Does he wish to buy your horse ? He wisiies to buy it ; does he not , Is it not as I say ? Is it not so ? VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Faire,* 4. Vouloir,* 3. Voulez-vous ? Je veux. Veut-il? II veut. Je ne veux pan. II ne veut pas. Nous voulons. Vous voulez. Vous ne voulez pas Us veulent. Veulent-ils ? Qui veut ? Qui ne veut pas ? Personne ne veut. Quelqu'ua veut Le voulez-vous ? Quelqu'un veut-il faire mon feu? Je veux le faire. Je ne veux pas le faire. Veut-il acheter votre cheval ? II veut T ache ter ; n'est-cepas? * N'est-ce pas ? (Idiom.) Obs. 38. (Important.} This French : N'et-cepas? answers to any nega live interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, as : 1. You are going t write, ARE YOU NOT ? meaning: is it not so ? 2. You would write, WOULD YOU NOT ? meaning: is it not so f 3. They wrote, DID THEY NOT ? meaning : is it not so f 4. He has the cloth, HAS HE NOT ? meaning : is it not so f 5. We were reading, WERE WE NOT ? meaning : is it not so J These five negative interrogations (in the same person as the five pre- ceding affirmations and immediately connected with them) are all translated . To write. To write tnem. Some To translate. To correct. To read. To copy. Will you read the last vocabulary ? Does he not wish to copy anything ? Will they translate this or that ex- ercise ? \Vi\\ you not correct it ? Yes, I will. l% he going, does he go ? tfc gocK 'is going.) He is not going. IVhc it gaing ? Nobody goes, iis Quelquepart, (not used with a nega- tion.) Allez-vous quelque part ? Ne . . . nulle part. Je np vais nulle part. Ecrire,* 4. Les ecrire. En ecrirc. Traduire,*4. Corriger, 1. Lire,* 4. Copier, 1. Voulez-vous lire le dernier vocabu laire ? Ne veut-il ricn copier ! Veulent-i'.s traduire cet exercioo ci ou celui-la ? ($ 37.) Nc voulez-vous pas le cornger 1 Si fait. Va-t-ii? Oba. 15 ) II va. II ne va pas. Qui va ? Personne ne va. NINETEENTH LESSON la he going to read, translate, and write ? He is going neither to read, translate, nor write. What is he going to do ? He is not going to do anything. Is the teacher going to correc ; an- other of our exercises ? He is (going to do it). h he coming (going to come) to the teacher's or to the minister's ? He is coming neither to this one's house nor to the other's. The teacher, master. French teacher. This professor. Our professor of English. At what o'clock ? At one o'clock. At two o'clock. Half. The or a quarter At half past one. At a quarter past one. At a quarter past two. At a quarter to (or of, or before) three. At twelve, noon. Half past twelve. At twelve at night, or midnight. Less. Now, at present. Not now. Ready. Are we ready ? I am ready. Ready to. They are ready to go. Va-t-il lire, traduire, et ecrire? II ne vani lire, ni traduire, ni ecjirts Que va-t-il faire ? II ne va rien faire. Le maitre va-t-il corriger UK autr* de nos exercices ? II va le faire. Va-t-il venir chez le maitre ou chez le ministre ? ! II ne va venir ni chez Tun ni chea 1'autre. Le maitre. Le maitre de Francaie Ce professeur. Notre proiese'ii ^ d' Anglais. A quelle heure ? 2 A une heure. A deux heures. Demi. Le ou un quart. A une heure et demie. 3 A une heure et quart (or et un quart), A deux heures un quart. (Mind the .l A trois heures moins un quart. A midi. Midi et demi. A minuit. A minuit et un quart. Moins, (comparative of peu, little.) A present. Pas a present. Pret. Prets. (plur.) Sommes-nous prets ? Je suis pret. Pret a prets a. Us sont prets & aller. Dans un quart d'heure. Avant de- mi-heure. Fn a quarter of an hour. Before half an hour. DIX-NEDVIEME EXERCICE. 2de Section. Friday, May 1849. Vendredi, Mai, 1849. Gentlemen, what are you going to do, to-day? Recite the voca- or.lary, translate and correct our exercises. Very well. Will you ; Va-t-il venir? literally, is he going to come? Allez-vous venir ? &,c.. are awkward expressions in English, but much used in French, and philosophi- cally so. He is writing, is never used in English for : he is going to w>tt Why should he is coming be substituted for: he is going to come ? [Dm.* of: Sortir, to go or come out, &e.] 2 Heure, hour, is a feminine noun. This class of nouns will be spokeu )f hereafter. For the present, the learner has only to write them as he 3e*>i Ihem written in the lessons. 3 The adjective demie is here in the feminine gender, agreeing with the eminine noun heure. But when this adjective precedes the noun, it does act agree with it in gender and number, as : une demi-fietire, half an hour. NINETEENTH LESSOR 91 begin. Sir! With much pleasure. What is the French of: some- where ? It is is it not? Yes, or no (as the case may require). Have you the French of: is he going? Yes, we have. What is it ? (quel est-il ?) It is it is right ; is it not ? Yes, or no. la the youth going, in a quarter of an hour, to the Scotchman's or to the Irishman's 1 He is going neither to the one's nor to the other 1 ,-* house ; but I am going to take (conduct) him to the young Dutch- man's. When are you going to take him there? Now. Is he ready? No, he is not yet ready. Very well; I will wait for him. (Je vais.) Do you go to the physician's this evening ? No, I do not. Do you go any where? I go somewhere at seven o'clock. Will their children go anywhere, in half an hour? No. they will go nowhere, because they are tired and busy. Do you wish to go anywhere ? I do not wish to go anywhere, but my brother's friends have a mind to go to the Englishman's. Where is the Englishman iou Q He is at home. Are his sons at home ? They are there i.ow. Are you ready to write and translate ? I am ready to trans- late, but not to write. I have no pencil. Has the cook any more butter ? No, he has no more ; but he is going to buy some. Where is he going to buy any ? He is going to buy some at the milk- man's. Has he much? He has but little now; but he is going to make some this evening. At what o'clock? At eight. W r hen will you go with me to the bookseller's? At six o'clock. I am busy at six o'clock. Will you go at seven ? No, not before eight or half past eight. Ver/ well. When are you coming (going to come) to my house? To-day at noon? Not at twelve, but at half past twelve. With whom are you coming? With nobody. Is not the student going to study first, and to recite afterwards ? Yes, he will (va) study first, and recite afterwards. Is he ready to com- mence? No, not yet. Why is he not yet ready? Because he has but little time, not much time. Who is going to correct our exer- cises ? The old professor is. What is the young teacher going to do ? He is going to put on his hat and gloves, and go to his father's. Will you read, translate, and copy your French with us to-day? 1 am afraid to do it. Are you ashamed also ? No, I am not ashamed , I am only afraid. Who has time and courage to copy those two exercises? These, or those? Those. This little scholar has time, courage, and a desire to copy them. When will the clerk go to the lawyer's and to the teacher's, to copy something? He will go there tirst to-day, and then to-morrow also. Does the grocer wish to buy as many bags of coffee as of rice ? He is going to buy more of the former tnan of the latter. We have biscuits; but have we enough ! We have not too many. How mar,y more bags have we? We NINETEENTH LESSON. have yet six. Have we but six? Have we not eight? Yes, w have eight; and the baker is going to send another. At \vhai o'clock ? At a quarter to six or at a quarter to seven. Very well. TWENTIETH LESSON, 20th. Vingtieme Legon, 20me, VOCABULARY. 1st Section. j VOCABULAIRE, Ire Secticu, To, in order to, for the purpose of. \ Pour, (avant un infinitif.) Obs. 40. In English, all prepositions (to, excepted) are usually followed by the present participle, as : of coming, without having, &c. In French; all prepositions are followed by the infinitive mood, except en (in), which is followed by the present participle. (Mind this Obs. Rul. 1.) To see. In order to see him. Have you money to buy (or, for the purpose of buying) bread ? I have some to buy some. Are you going to your brother's to (in order to) see him ? I have no time to go there to see him. Has your servant a knife to cut the cheese ? He has none to cut it. To be able, (can.) Can you ? Are you able ? I can. I am able. I cannot. I am not able (unable). Can you read ? Are you able to write ? Voir,* 3. Pour le voir. Avez-vous de 1'argent pour acheter du pain ? J'en ai pour en acheter. Allez-vous chez votre frere pour k voir ? Je n'ai pas le temps d'y aller pour le voir. Votre domestique a-t-il un coutea? pour couper le fro mage ? II n'en a pas pour le couper. Pouvoir* 3. Pouvez-vous ? Je peux (ou je purs;. Je ne pcux pas (ouje ne puis). Pouvez-vous lire ? Pouvez-voua ecrire ? Je peux lire et ecrire (ou je puis). Je ne puis ni lire ni ecrire. Balayer, 1. Tuer, 1. Saler, 1. Sucrer, 1. Puis-je ? (never peux-je ?) I can read and write. (Rul. 2.) I can neither read nor write. To sweep. To kill. To salt. To sweeten. Can I ? may I ? \m I able ? Obs. 41. Peux-je f Ne peux-je pat ? are not used interrogatively : say therefore : Puis-je ? Can I? Ne puis -je pas ? Can I nat ? (of which hers after, Lesson 28th.) May I or can I see that picture ? You can, or may. You cannot. Can he ? may he ? Can he not ? He can, or may* He is not able Can we, may we ? Can we not ? j Pouvons~nou? t pas? We can, are able. We cannot. Gin we see the vessels 1 Puis-je voir ce tableau-la f Vous pouvez. Vous ne pouves paa Peut-il ? Ne peut-il paa ? 11 peut. II ne peut pas. Ne pouvons-'vui Nous pouvons. Nous ne pouvonf ^51 Pouvons-nous vcirles vaisseaux* TWENTIETH LESSOR 93 we going ? Do we go ? We do. J Allons-nous? Nous aliens. Do we go there ? We do. We are rut going. We are not going t. Are we going to kill the ox ? I'o try. Y allons-nous 1 Nous y aliens. Nous n'allons pas. Nous n'y allone pas. Allons-nous tuer le boeuf ? Essayer. TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. VINGTIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Saturday, May 1849. Samedi Mai, 1849. Are we going to recite our lesson ROW? Not now. Mr. V. is not . Where is he"? He is at his friend's. Is he coming (going to come) ? Yes, he is coming. Very well. Can you translate to- day's exercise 1 We can translate it. At what o'clock can we com- mence? We can commence in a quarter of an hour. Can you, gentlemen, read and correct these exercises? We can commence, and you can continue (or proceed). Can you cut ihe bread with the knives that you have? We are going to try. Can you mend my gloves? You may mend them. We are going to look for some thread to mend those of the young professoi. Are you going to the tailor's to look for the old vests? We are not going there to look for them. We have neither the time nor the wish to do it. Can you put those shoes on? We are going to try them. Will you try our scissors? No, thank you, I have mine, and mine are very good (are sharp). Can the tailor make a coat to-day? No, he cannot make any. Have we glasses to drink our wine? We have glasses to drink it; but have we any wine? We can send the servant to buy some. Can you drink as much coffee as tea ? We can drink more tea than coffee, can we not ? Have you any sugar to sweeten the coffee ? I have some to sweeten the coffee, but not the tea. Has not the young man time to see my brother's child ? Yes, he has time to see him. Where is he ? Ho is in the garden. No, not in the garden, but in the large and beau- tiful vessel of the big captain. How much money have you with you ? I have a good deal. Have you a hundred dollars ? I have more than that. More than a hundred dollars? Why have you so much? Because I have a mind to buy a horse. Which one? The general's? Will he sell bis ? He will. It is not that (which) I wish to buy j but the farmer's young horse. Are we going to take any cakes home ? We are no* going to take any. Can we not take some ? No, we cannot. Can- not the cake-merchant send them to our house ? Yes, he can send them there in half an hour. That will dr>. (C'est I on.) Will the Swiss send his son to the painter's ? No, not to the painter's, but to ho bookseller's. W U he send him there now ? No, he is not going TWENTIETH LESSON. to send him there now, but to-morrow. Is not to-morrow Saturday I No, it is Sunday. What day of the month is it? It is the 18th. The 18th, indeed 1 ? Who is going to read and copy the last vocabu- lary ? Nobody is. Is not Mr. Lenoir wrong in going to Mrs. Ver- dier's house? Yes, he is wrong to go there; but he will go. Are you going to put on but one glove ? No, because I have but one. Is the servant going to buy a broom to sweep the store (magasin) 1 No, he is afraid to sweep it. Why is he afraid to sweep it? Be- cause the big Qog is there (in it). Who can sweep it? Little Robert can. Has he a broom to sweep it? He has a broom to sweep it. Has the cook sugar enough to sweeten the cakes? He i as enough to sweeten them; but he has no more salt to salt the birth, nor the beef. Is he not going to salt them ? Yes, he is ; because he is going to the merchant's to buy some salt to salt them. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. I VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. To, at, in. 1. To the. 2. To the. I A. 1. i 1'. 2. Au, aux. Oka. 42. A V is used before a vowel or silent h, in the sing. (Obs. 5.) Au (the contraction of: d le, 9), is used before consonants. Aux (contraction of: d les, 9), is the plural, before all letters. To the friend. To the friends. To the man. To the men. To the captain. To the captains. To the penknite. To the penknives. The basket. Td the basket. This carpet. To this carpet. His noor. To his floors. My cat. To my cat. To mine. To mine (plur). To yours. To ours (plur). To him, to her i -.direct object.) Tome. To us To you. To fnem. Are they able ? Can they ? May they? They can. They cannot. Cannot these men work ? What can your children do ? To speak to me. To epeak to him, (to her.) To write to him, (to her.) To me. To speak to the general and to his friend. To send the grocer a dollar. ( 5H.) To give, give away. To lend. A 1'ami. A\ix amis. A i'homme. Aux hommes. Au capitaine. Aux capitaines. Au canif. Aux canifs. Le panier. Au panier. Ce tapis-ci. A ce tapis-ci. Son plancher. A ses planchcrs Mon chat. A mon chat. Au mien. Aux miens. Au votres. Aux notres. Lui, (regime ind^ect av. le verbe.j Me, (regime indirect av. le verbe, $ 47, &c.) Nous. Vous. Leur. Peuvent-ils ? Us peuvent. Us ne peuven* pas. Ces hommes ne peuvent-il? pap tra vailler ? Vos enfants que peuvent-i!s fairr f Me parler. Peuvent-ils me parle- ' Lui parler. Us peuvent lui parts 1 Lui ecrire. M'ccrire. Parler au general et a son ami Envoyer un dollar a 1'epicier. Donner. Preter. TWENTIETH LESSON. 95 To give you- them us. (45.) To lend a friend some money. ($ 51 j) Can you write to me ? They can write to you. Can (he cierk speak to you ? lie cannot speak to us now. Can they not write to your brother ? Yes, tuey can write to him. Vous donner. Leur donner. Noue donner. Preter de 1' argent a un ami. Pouvez-vous m'ecrire ? Us peuvent vous ecrire. Le commis peut-il vous parler ? II ne peut pas nous parler a present, Ne peuvent-ils pas ecrire a votre frcre ? Si fait ; ils peuvent lui ecrire. TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. VINQTIEME EXERCICE. 2de Sec. Monday, June 1849. Lundi, Juin, 1849. At what o'clock are you going to recite, to-day ? My brotheia cannot recite before twelve o'clock. Can they not recite at ten ? No, they cannot. Will you take your big basket to my house ? 1 will not take my basket there, but to the general's. When ? Now 1 Is f o, I will take the basket there to-morrow. Do your sons wish to take mine to the physician's? No, they cannot take it there. Why can they not? Because they have not time enough. Is the farmer going to kill anything ? He is going to kill his big ox. Is he going to kill it now ? Yes, he is. Can they write to me ? They cannot write to you. Can they speak to you ? They can speak to us. Can they not wait for their friends? Yes, they can. Can they not burn as much coal as wood? No, they cannot burn so much of the former as of the latter. Have we more friends than the Dutch ? We have more than they. Has the grocer less coffee than tea ? He has less tea than coffee; but we have more of that than of this. Who has a cat? The sailors have a cat. Where is their cat? Their cat is in a small basket of wood. Can the little servant sweep the carpet? He can. Can he sweep the garret floor? Yes, he can do it. Will you lend him a broom to sweep that floor? We cannot lend any to sweep the floor, but we can lend one to sweep the carpet. Who is going to write to the merchant and to the grocer? The clerks can write to them. Is the professor of English going to write a book? Yes, he is going to write one. He can write a good one; can he not? Ye*, he can. He is a man of merit. ( 39, N. 3.) Are we not going to Pratl's garden to-night? No, we are not going there to-night, but to-morrow, at nine or ten o'clock. Will you give a dictionary to your son? Yes, I will give him a good dictionary. Will they lend me their horse ? They cannot lend you their horse, because the oid minister has it. Are we going to lend the lawyer ($ 51 $) Uiiything 1 ? We are going to lend the physician something. Arc 96 TWENTIETH LESSON. yon not going to lend many things'? Yes, we are going to lend many things. What are we going to lend T We are going to lend first, handkerchiefs, shawls, and hats; and afterwards cloaks, bags, and parasols, to the friends of the lawyer. Why ? Because thev have none. You are very good. Who is busy? The grocer and his clerk, the doctor and his neighbor the minister, the captain and his son, are bucy. Are you not busy, also ? Yes, we are busy, but not very busy. Are you ready to go to the garden of the Scotch- man ? I am ready to go, but Charles is not. Why is he not ready ' He is going to the grocer's to buy some good salt. Is he going to buy much ? He is. What does he wish to do ? He will salt the beef and the mutton which we have. Cannot the lervants salt them 1 No, they cannot, or they will not. VOCABULARY. 3d Section. Are they going ? Do they not go ? They are going, or they are. They go, They do not. To the Museum. To the wharf. Are they going to the museum? No, they are going to the wharf. Are the carpenters going to the ship ? They go there to work. They go neither to the wharf, nor the museum. Are they going to see anybody ? They are not going to see anybody. What are they going to do ? They are not going to do anything. Where are they going ? They go nowhere. Do they wish *o send the good book to the man ? They are going to send it to him. When are they going to send it to him? They are going to give it to him to- morrow. Can they lend you the old diction- ary ? They can (lend it to me) on Thursday. Cannot your friend lend you one be- fore Thursday ? No, he cannot (lend me one) before Friday or Saturday. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. Vont-ils ? Ne vont-ils pas ? Us vont. Us ne vont paa Au musee. Au quai. Vont-ils au musee ? Non, ils vont au quai. Les charpentiers vont-ils au bati ment ? Ils y vont pour y travailler. Jls ne vont ni au quai, ni au niusde. Vont-ils voir quelqu'un ? Ils ne vont voir personne. Que vont-ils faire ? Ils ne vont rien faire. Ou vont-ils ? Ils ne vont uulie pm. Veulent-ils envoyer le bon Iwrt d Vhommel Ils vont le lui envoyer. Quand vont-ils le lui envoyer Ils vont le lui donner demain. Peuvent-ils vous preter le vieuA dictionnaire ? Ils peuvent me le preter, jeudi. Votre ami ne peut-il pas vous en preter un avant jeudi ? Non, il ne peut pas m'en preter un avem vendredi ou samedi. For the order in which objective personal pronouns must be invariable connected in sentences, before the verb, ( $ 57), and with the partitive pro aoun en ($ 59 and $ 60 . TWENTIETH LESSON. Are they going to give me some sugar? They will give you some. Can he lend some money to my brother ? Can he lend my brother any money? (Dir. 4, $ 51i.) Me cannot lend him any. Will they lend us some ? 1 hey will not lend you any, but they can lend some to them. Are they going to give me the book ? They are not going to give it to you, but to lend it to you. Are you not going to send it to us ? f am not going to send it to you. Are you gcing to send it to them ? We are going to send it to them. Will you send the cabbages to the cook? We will send them to him (to her). Who is going to give the jewels to us ? Our good friends are going to give them to us. Am I going to give them to them ? Can he not lend them to you ? Vont-ils me donner du sucro t Us vont vous en donner. Peut-il preter de 1'argent a nun frere? II ne peut pas lui en prefer. Veulent-ils nous en preter t Ils ne veulent pas vous en preter. mais ils peuvent leur en preter. Vont-ils me donner le livre ? Ils ne vont pas vous le donner, main vous le preter. N'allez-vous pas nous Z'envoyer ? Je ne vais pas vous Z'envoyer. Allez-vous le leur envoyer ? Nous aliens le leur envoyer. Voulez-vous envoyer les choux au cuisinier ? Nous voulons les lui envoyer. Qui va nous donner les bijoux T Nos bons amis vont nous les donner. Vais-je les leur donner ? Ne peut-il pas vous les preter ? TWENTIETH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. VINQTIEMB EXERCICE. 3me Sec. Tuesday, June, 1849. Mardi, Juin, 1849. Who is going to recite to-day ? We are going to recite. Can you copy the vocabulary ? We cannot copy it ; we have not time to topy it ; but we can translate it. Will you try ? With pleasure. Is a le the French of: to the? No, Sir, au is the French of: to the. Very well, that is right. Can you give me the Frencii of: to the museum? We can give it; it is is it not] (Fes, or no, as he case mcy 6e.) And that of: to the baskets? Have you that of: Art "key going to see any one? Yes, we have. What is it? It is Is it right ? Yes, or no Who is going to the wharf? To which wharf? To Girard wharf (au quai Girard). Our merchant is going there to see his ship. To see what ? His ship. Is his ship at the wharf? It is there. Has he many sailors ? He has more than ten. More than what ? More than ten. How many has he ? He has twelve or thirteen. Has Tie so many? Yes, he has. Can you cut me some bread ? I can cut you some. Have you a knifo to cut me some? I have one. Can you mend my gloves? I uan mend them, but I have no wish to do it Can the tailor make me a coat? He can make you one. Will you speak to tne physi- cian * I will speak to him. Does your son wish to see me in ordei 33 TWENTIETH LESSON. to speaK to me ? He wishes to see you in order to give you a do? tar. Does he wish to kill me ? He does not wish to kill yea; h only wishes to see you. Does the son of our old farmer wish tc kill an ox 1 He wishes to kill two. Who has a mind to kill our cat? Our neighbor's bad boy has a mind to kill it. How much money can you send me ? I can Bend you twenty francs. Will you send me my carpet ? I will send it io you. Will you send the shoemaker anything? (quelque chose au yndonnierl} I will send him my shoes. Will you send him your scats ? No, T will send them to the tailor. Can the tailor send me my cloak ? He cannot send it you. Are your children able to write to me ? They are able to write to you. Will you lend me yom basket? I will lend it you. Have you a glass to drink your wine? I have one, but I have n^ wine j I have only tea. Will you give me money to buy some ? 1 will give you some, but I have only a little. Will you give me that which you have with you? I will give it you. Can you drink as much wine as milk ? I can drink as much of the one as of the other. Has our neighbor any wood to make a fire? (dufeu?) He has some to make one, (pour en fair c,} but he has no money to buy bread and butter. Are you willing to lend him some ? I am willing to lend him some. Do you wish to speak to the German ? I wish to speak to him. Where is he? He is at the museum. Very well, I am going to see him and speak to him. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. RESUME. L'adolescent va-t-il venir aujourd'hui ? L'adolescent va venii pour nous apporter de Pacier et du fer. Qu'allons-nous acheter 1 Nous n'allons rien acheter que du velours. N'ai-je pas un bon ami allemand ? Vous n'avez pas d'ami allemand mais vous en avez un suisse. Les marchands de nouveautes n'ont-ils pas de chales, de rubans, de gants, de bas, de velours, de drap ? Si fait, ils ont de tout celp et c'est ce que nous allons acheter. Chez qui allez-vous acheter *out cela 1 - Quelque chose chez celui-ci; quelque autre chose, chez celui-la. Qui va acheter des livres ? Ces deux ecoliers vont en acheter. Le ministre et Pavocat ne vont-iis pas en achete>' quelques uns aussi? Si fait; mais il ne vont pas en a^heter beau coup. Chez qui vont-ils les acheter? Chez Appleton. Le petit gaiQon de Pepicier ne va-t-il pas y acheter un joli canif de bon acier, un porte-crayon d'argent, un encrier de fer, du papier, et des crayons ? Si fait, il va y acheter tous ces articles. Non, non, pat tons ces articles (06s. 34.) fi ne vent ni encrier, ni canif. TWENTIETH LESSON. 99 ^4-il un canif et .in encrier ? II a encore nn encrier, mais pas de canif. Pourquoi ne veut-il pas en acheter un 1 Farce qiril a celui de son frere. Comment se porte-t-on chez le general r Tout le monde s'y po^-te bien. Je suis bien aise de Fapprendre. Et chez le ministre ' Chez lai, plusieurs personnes sont malades. Qu'a Jean? Jean a mal de gorge. Charles Fa-t-il aussi? Non, celui-la a mal aax dents. Qu'ont les deux petits? Us ont mal de tete. Et fcaphie ? Sophie n'a rien. J'en suis bien aise. Le ministre est-il malade? Oui, comme a Fordinaire. II a un mauvais rhume, Comment vous etes-vous porte ? Je ne me suis pas bien porte. Vous vous portez bien, a F ordinaire, n'est-ce pas? Je me porte parfaitement a Pordinaire, mais pas ce matin. II fait si chaud, n'est-ce pas? Oui, il fait trop chaud. Ou aliez-vous? J vais chez Papothicaire, chez le marchand de souliers. Ou le cordon nier., n'est-ce pas ? Non pas le cordonnier, mais le marchand de souliers. Est-ce tout ? Non, je vais chez le marchand de charbon et au telegraphe electrique. Je vous souhaite beaucoup de plaisir. J'ai Fhonneur' de vous saluer. Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Le Russe se porte-t-il mieux ? Oui, un peu mieux. J'espere que votre frere se porte bien ? Tres-bien, je vous remcrcie. Comment se porte-t-on chez lui ? Tout le moude s'y porte bien. Personne n'v est malade. Votre cuisinier a-t-il assez d'argent pour acheter du bo3uf et du mouton ? Oui, il en a assez pour acheter Fun et Fautre. Va-t-il porter autant de celui-ci que de celui-la ? II va porter plus de celui-la que de celui-ci. Les matelots orit-ils des billets pour acheter duchocolat? Us n'ont pas de billets; mais, ils ont de For. C'est assez bon, n'est-ce pas ? En ont-ils assez pour acheter des poulets, du sel, du poivre, des biscuits, du beurre frais, du pain frais, du bcBuf frais, du vin, du sucre, du the, du cafe. . . .eet-ce tout? Non, ce n'est pas tout. Des choux, du vieux fromage, du vinaigre, d'u frain, de la farine. De la farine ? Quel est Fanglais de cela 1 N'avez-vous pas Fanglais de farine ? Non, nous ne Favons pas. Qui Fa? Personne ne Fa. Votre domestique a un balai pcui calayer le plancher du magasin, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il n'en a pas. Voulez-vous lui donner un quart de dollar pour en acheter un? Je yais lui en donner un. Je n'en ai pas. Je n'ai que des demi-dol- ars. N'avez-vous pas un quart de dollar? Non, je n'en ai plus. Quel est F Anglais de: faire? C'est: to do, to make. C'est bien. c'est cela. De quelle conjngaison est-il ? II est de la conju Jaison. Pourquoi ? Parce qu'il finit en : .... Est-il regulier ?...-. Pourquoi? Parce qu-il n'est pas conjugue comme le modele. . . * 100 TWENTY FIRST LESSOH. (Le maitre peut faire les memes questions sur qnelques auiiea verbes, comme : Voir porter ecrire.) Quel est votre dernier vo- cabulairc ? C'est le Quelle section 1 La Y avez-vous des verbes? Oui, nous en avons plusieurs. Quels verbes avex- vous? Les avez-vous dans votre catalogue"? Avez-vous des norns dans le vocabulaire ? Combien en avez-vous? Lesecoliers ont-ils des adjectifs dans le leur ? En avez-vous dans le votre ? L'etranger en a-t-il dans le sieu'* Qu'avons-nous dans le notre ? Prenez mon parapluie pour le preter a Robert. Ou va-t-il? II va Bortir. Oui, mais, ou va-t-il ? Ne va-t-il pas au musee ^ A quel musee ? Sara, Jean, et Guillaume n'y vont-ils pas aussi ? Pouvez- vous sucrer mon the 1 Ne veut-il pas sucrer son cafe ? N'allez- vous pas mettre du sucre dans le chocolat 1 Nous aliens y en mettre. Qu'allez-vous mettre dans le vin? Je ne vais rien y mettre. Pouvez-vous ecrire au commis "?. ... a Fepicier ? . . . . aux etrangers?. . . .a nos amis r. . . . Quelqu'un veut-il tuer 1'oiseau du Jetit enfant ? Le cuisiuier a-t-il tue les jeunes ou les vieux poulets I TWENTY-FIRST LESSON, 21st. Vingt el unieme Le$on, 21mo. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. PRONOMS INTERROGATIFS. For things. Pour les choses. What? Qu'est-cequi? What? Qua? Qu'? Qvoil Regime indirect, avec une prepo- sition. To what ? A quoi ? Of or from what ? De quoi ? With what ? (what . . with ?) Avet quoi ? For what ? (What . . for ?) Pour quot ! Qui ? Who ? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without distinc- tion of sex ; as, who, in English. Quef and Quoi? What? have no plural, and always relate to things. Obs. 43. As direct object, use que before the verb in an interrogative form ; and quoi after the verb, in an affirmative form. After a preposition Me quoi, never que. [Mind that all those pronouns are not relative, frv rnterrogative.] What have they ? ^?/'ont-i]s | What will you say?) Que vouler What do you mean?J vousditel VOCABULARY. 1st Section. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. For persons. Pour les personnes. Nominative. Who? Nominatif. Qui? Object direct. Whom? Regime direct, Qui? Objective with a preposition. To whom ? A qui ? Of or from whom ? De qui ? With whom? (whom . . with?) Avec qtii ? For whom ? (whom . .for ?) Pour qui ? TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 10] The) have, what? Us ont, quoi? He will say what?} II veut diro He means what ? 5 quoi ? He is going to answer what ? il vi repondre, a quoi? Repondre, 4, (takes d before a noun. What is he going to reply to ? A quoi va-t-il repondre ? To answer, to reply to. Ohs. 44. Repondre, taking d before the noun, coincides with, to repl$ to, better than with to answer, which has no preposition after, and tht scholar is invited mentally to connect repondre d with to reply to, even when to a?tswer is used in the book. To answer the man, (to reply to.) To answer the men, (to reply to.) Whom do you wish to answer ? (reply to?) I wish to answer (reply to) my brother. To answer (reply to) him, her. To answer (reply to) them. Can you answer me in French ? I believe so. I believe I can. Has he my book? I believe he has it. Repondre a 1'homme. Repondre aux hommes. A qui voulez-vous repondre ? Je veux repondre a mor rrcre. Lui repondre. ($ 47.) Leur repondre, (pour les personnel (* 47.) Re'pondre au billet. Y repondre. ($ 47.) Y, (generalement pour les chosea.) Repondre aux billets. Y repondre, (pour les choses.) Faire une question (fern, noun) a quelqu'un. Voulez-vous me faire une question ? Je vais vous en faire une. En Francois. En Anglais. En Al To answer (to reply to) the note. To answer (reply to) it. To it, to them, (usually for things.) To answer the notes. To answer them, (things.) To ask a question of some one, some- body. Will you ask me a question ? I am going to ask you one. In French. In English. In German. lemand. Pouvez-vous me repondre en Fran- $ais ? Je crois que oui. A-t-il mon livre ? Je crois que oui. Obs. 45. Any affirmative answer after: I believe, may be expressed by: que oui. A negative answer, by : que non. (Dir. 6.) Can they speak German well ? I Peuvent-ilsbien parler 1'Alletnandt I believe not. I believe they cannot. I Je crois que non. TWENTY-FIRST EXERCISE. 1st Sec. VINQT ET UNIEME EXERCICE. Ire Sec. Wednesday, June, 1849. Mercredi, Juin, 1849. What are we going to try to-day ? We are going to try to recite. To recite what? To recite a vocabulary. Which? This one. Is it the 20th ? No, it is not the 20lh, but the last. It is the : what! The last, the 21st. Very well. Will you begin ? With pleasure. Will you ask us questions in French or in English ? I am going to ask you some in English first, and in French afterwards. We are ready to answer you. Are you ready, indeed ? I believe we are y (que oui.} Can I begin? I believe you can. To how many notes ten you reoly (answer) this evening? I can reply to six or seven. 102 1WENTY-FIB8T LESSON Can you answer so many 1 ? {a autant que cela?) I believe I can Have you as many brothers as I ? We have just as many as you and more than they. How many volumes of Trving's works have they? They have eight. Have they so many? Yes, indeed, and they are going to buy more. How many more? Two more, 1 believe. Has Miss Clara as many shawls as Miss Emily (Emilie)l No, Miss Clara has less of them than Miss Emily. Have you my copybook? I? No, I believe not. Has he got it? He? I believe m?t. Who has it? I cannot tell you. Have not those children got it? They? I believe not. Are you not going to give a handsome fan to Miss Victoria? Yes, I am going to give her one. Will you write to the Italian? I will write to him. Will your brother write to the English ? He will write to them, but they have no mind to answer him. Will you answer your friend? I will answer him. But whom will you answer? I will answer my good father. Will you not answer your good friends? I will answer them. Who will write to you ? The Russian wishes to write to me. Will you answer him? I will not answer him. Who will write to our friends? The children of our neighbor will write to them. Will they answer them? They will answer them. To whom do you wish to write ? I wish to write to the Russian. Will he answer you? He wishes to answer me, but he cannot. Can the Spaniards answer us? They cannot answer us, but we can answer them. To whom do you wish to send this note ? I will send it to the joiner. From whom is this boy going to receive a hat? He is going to receive one from his friend, the lawyer. For whom is this coat? It is for our father. Whom are these gloves for? They are for our friend's clerk. With whom are your children going to the museum ? They are going there with the old professor. Are the^ not also going to the wharf to see the merchant's beautiful vessel * Yes, they are going there with the young teacher, the old captain, and the good sailor. VOCABULARY, 2d Section. The play, the theatre. The ball To or at the play. To the theatres. To the ball. To the balls. The "parlor, drawing-room. The storehouse, magazine, warehouse. This counting-house. The market. In, at, to the market. There, thither. To go there ; to be there. To fend there. To carry it there VOCABULAIRE, 2cle SeC. Le theatre. Au theatre. Au bal. Le salon. Le magann. Ce compvuir Le marcht. Le bal. Aux theatres. Aux bals. Le grand salon* Au marche". Y. Y aller. Ye-tre Y tnvoyer. L'y porter. TWENTY-FIRST LESSON 103 Will they go to the theatre ? They wish to go there. Will you go there ? I will. (Dir. 1.) Are you going now ? I am. Is your cousin in the parlor ? He is ; or, he is there. He is not. My cousin. This cousin. Where is our cousin ? >c you know ? / know not (do not). Do you know the French of: to see? f do. I. know it. I do know it. [ know something. I know nothing. Do you know the French of: to have f i do not know it. I will tell you (I am going to). (19 N. 1.) To have, to get. To have got. To have to. Veulent-ils aller au theatre f Us veulent y aller. Voulez- vous y aller ? Je veux y aller, Y allez-vous a present ? J'y vais, Votre cousin est-il dans le salon ? II y est. II n'y est pas. Mon cousin. Ce cousin. Ou est notre cousin ? Oti notrJ cousin est-il I Savez-vous ? Je : e sais pas. Savez-vous le Franc.ais de : to see ? Je le sais. Je saisquelque chose. Je ne sais rien. Savez-vous le Franc.ais de : to havel Je ne le sais pas. Je vais vous le dire. Avoir. Avoir d. Obs. 46. When avoir, to have, expresses obligation, use the preposition d, before the following infinitive, and repeat it with each verb. What have you to do ? I have tc copy and translate that. [ have nothing to recite, nor read. Have your cousins nothing to say ? Yes, they have something to say. What has John to answer (reply to)? Qu'avez-vous a faire ? J'ai a copier et a tiaduire cela. Je n'ai rien a reciter, ni a lire. Vos cousins n'ont-ils rien a dire ? Si fait. Us ont quelque chose a dire. A quoi Jean a-t-il a rdpondre ? Jean a a repondre a quoi ? II a a repondre a nos questions. Alors. Si, s'il. S'il peut. He has to answer our questions. Then. If, if he. If he can. Obs. 47. The i, of si, is cut off, only when followed by t7, or Us, but in no other case. If he has, they have ; s'il a; s'ils ont s'il veut, &c. Wo are well. | Nous nous portons bien. TWENTY-FIRST EXERCISE. 2d Sec. EXERCICE 2lME. 2de Sec. Thursday, June 1849. . Jeudi Juin, 1849. Good morning, ladies and gentlemen! I hope yon are well. yes, Sir, we are well, thank you. How is Miss Emily's cousin 1 is he better ? I believe he is. How is your brother's cold ? His eold is better, but he has the toothache. I am sorry to hear it. Do you know how the general is? Yes, I know that he is well; but Captain Henry is sick. I know it; but he is better; is he not? I cannot tell you. What have we to do this evening? We have to recite, as usual. Who is going to begin ? I and he. Why not ht und I? Very well; he and I, then. I am going to ask (faire) a question of the one and the other, (d Vun et d Vautre.}-"W\\\ you inswer me in French? I am going to try. What have you got! 104 TWENTY-FI-RST LESSON. Nothing. What have you to do? I have only to write. have you to write ? I have to write a note To whom ? To the carpenter's cousin. What have you to give him 1 ? .We have to give him some fresh bread and butter. Has your servant anything to drink ? I believe that he has to drink some tea. Are we not going to drink some, too ? Yes, we are going to drink some. Al what o'clock ? At eight. At half past eight, you mean (vous von- lez dire). No, I mean at a quarter to nine. Have we to send much rice to the cook of Mr. Girard's vessel 1 Yes, we have to send him much. Has he any ? I believe that he has but little more. Then, we have to send it to him to-day; have we not? Yes, indeed. Who is going to take it to him ? Do you know ? Yes, I do. Who 1 The joiner's little boy. When will the lawyer go to the play '< He is going only to-mor- row night. When can his cousin go with him ? He cannot go to the play if he is going to a ball. To which ball is he going ? To that of the physician. Is he going to give a grand ball ? Yes, he is, to- morrow evening. Where is your son ? I believe he is at the counting- room. Where are they going to take me ? To the counting-room in their warehouse. Where are the cook and the grocer going? If they are going anywhere, they are going to market. Can I go with them? Yes, you may (Dir. 1), if you have nothing to do. To which market are they going? To the large one. Are the farme? and his cousin at market? No, they are in the shoe-store. Can yoii come to my house to go to the wharf? I have no wish to go to your house first, and afterwards to the wharf; but I am ready to go to the wharf now. Have you your hat, gloves, and umbrella? Um- brella? Is it bad weather? Yes, it is. Then, I will not go there but to the museum, if you wish to go with me. Are they going too? Yes, they, also. Very well; then we may go (y), if you are ready, Is the picture of the Italian in the parlor? Yes. it is there Is tne servant going to sweep the parlor? No, he cannot sweep it now. Why can he not? Because I believe somebody is in the parlor. Who is in it (y) ? Madarn Vernet and her cousin Frede- rick. Will you send them some biscuits, fresh butter, and soma wine ? I cannot, because the servant is not at home. If you wib eend them something, I can take it to them; can I not' 1 Very well you may, if you wish. How many biscuits have you 1 \ havii only six or seven ; is that enough ? It is. *h! Since. I Ah! Depuis. Since last Sunday. j Depuis dimanche dernier. Not quite well. | Pas tout-a-iait bien. t am glad to see you, them, him \ Je suis bien aise de vous. let. / ?att TWEttTY-SE^OND LES8OF IOC vNTY. SECOND LESSON, 22d. Vingt-deuxieme Lc$on, 22nu VOCABULARY. 1st Section. To, at, or in the corner .... corners. To, at, or in the hole .... holes. la tiie hole. In the holes. T>>, or at the bottom. Li the bottom of the bag ... of this chest. At the corner of the fire ... of the garden. The otfice. The lawyer's office. This workshop. The joiner's work- shop. To, or at the end. The road. At the end of the road ... of the roads. That cousin of yours, of mine, of his, of theirs, &.c. Tc send for. To go for, to fetch. To come for. To come for me. To send for me. To go for them. Whom are you going to send for ? I am going to send for nobody. At what o'clock are you coming for him ? (19 2 , N. 2.") Are you going for any one ? I? No. But John is going for his cousin, who is in our office. Is not the cat in the workshop ? Yes, it is at the end. These gentlemen are going to send for cakes and wine ; are they not ? ITcs, they are going to send for some. Will your boy go for some fresh butter and vinegar for us ? He will not gc for any for you. He is very kini (or good), inched ! AJ re you not going to send for the doctor, for the clerk who is sick ? \f 33, we are going to send for him. He wiil send for my brothers. Wo, ha has a mind to go for them. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Au coin. Aux coins. Au trou. Aux trous. Dans le trou. Dans les trous. Aufond. Au fond du sac. Au fond de ce coflre Au coin du feu. Au coin du jardin,: Le bureau. Cet atelier. Le bureau de 1'avocat L' atelier du menuisier. Au bout. Le chemin. Au bout du chemin . . . des chemins. Votre, mon, son, leur, &,c., cousin- (* 108.) Envoycr chercher. Aller chercher. Venir chercher. Venir me chercher, M'envoyer chercher. Les aller cker- cher. Qui allez-vous envoyer chercher ? Je nevais envoyer chercher personne. A quelle heure allez-vous venir le chercher ? Allez-vous chercher quelqu'un? Moi ? Non. Mais Jean va cherchei son cousin, qui est dans notre bu- reau. Le chat n'est-il pas dans 1'atelier? Si fait, il est au bout. Ces messieurs vont envoyer chercher des gateaux et du vin, n'est-ce pas! Oui, ils vont en envoyer chercher. Votre garcon veut-il aller cherchei du beurre frais et du vinaigre pour nous ? II ne veut pas en aller chercher pom vous. II est tres-bon, en veritd ! N'allez-vouspas envoyer chercher Jt docteur pour le commis qui eat malade ? Si fait. Nous aliens 1'envoyer chei- cher. II veut envoyer chercher mes freres Non, il a e.ivie de les aller cherchnr 108 TWENTY-SECOND LESSOW. Will you send for more glasses, or have we enough ? I will send for more, because we have only three. Voulez-vous envoyer cherclicr plui de verres, ou en avons-nous assess ? Je veux. en envoyer chercher, pare* que nous n'en avons que trois. TWENTY-SECOND EXERCISE. 1st See. VINGT-DEUXIEME ExERcicE.lre Se En avoir besoin. ($ 50.) J'ai besoin de cela. J'en ai besoin. Avez-vous besoin de ce couteau f Je n'en ai pas besoin. Avons-nous besoin de ces ciseaux i Je crois que vous en avez besoin. En avez-vous encore besoin ? Je n'en ai plus besoin. A-t-il besoin d'argent ? II en a grand besoin. Le marchand en a-t-il besoir ? II n'en a pas besom. Qui en a besoin ? Personne n'en a Jnsoin. Us en ont besoin. Jean et Charleu 'ot-ils besoin dt-i chevaux ? Us n'en ont pas beboin. De quoi ? De quoi avez-vous besoir \ J'ai besoin de tout cela. Je n'ai besoin de rien. De quoi a-t-il besoin ? ($ 95.) De rien. De cela. De toi't, Cormaitre,* 4. TWENTY THIRD LESSON. 113 To be acquainted with do know) a man ; somebody ; a good teacher. To be acquainted with nobody. Of me, of thee, of him, of it. Of us, of you, of them. Is your father in want of me ? fie is in want of you. Are you in want of these books ? I am in want of them. Is he in want of my brothers ? ConnaTtre un hommc ; .quelqu'un; un bon maitre. Ne connaitre personne. De moi, de toi, de lui, \en, $ 47. De nous, de vous, d'eux, (en.) Votre pere a-t-il besojn de moi t II a besoin de vous. Avez-vous besoin de ces livres * y en ai besoin. A-t-il besoin de mes freres ? He i* in want of them. \ II a besoin d'eux. (pour lespersonnes. ( II en a besoin. (pers. et choses.) Does he want that ? He does (want it.) Whom do I want ? (have I need of?) You want the lawyer's clerk. Whtil else or what more i A-t-il besoin de cela ? 11 en a besoin, De qui ai-je besoin ? Vous avea besoin du commis dc 1'avocat. Quoi encore ? De quoi encore'i TWENTY-THIED EXERCISE. 2d Sec. VlNOT-TROISIEME ExERClOE. 2do Sec. Ecrivez, en Franais, le quantieme du mois. I am much pleased at seeing you. Miss Clara. Sit down ; take his seat. How do you do, this morning ? I am pretty well ; better fhan last Tuesday. I am glad of it. How is your father'* I do Dot know. Father is not here, but he is coming in two or three days. But you, Sir; how have you been since I had tho pleasure of seeing you? I have been perfectly well, I thank yiu. Is it cold of warm, out of doors'? It is warm, quite warm. Indeed ! I am sorry for it. I bid you good morning, Sir. Miss, I present my respects to you. Adieu ! Is the professor going to make us recite (nous faire reciter) im- mediately 1 ? No, not before a quarter of an hour or half an hour. Then, I may still study my vocabulary; can I not? To be sure you can , B u t do you not know it yet"? Yes, I know it pretty well; but not too veil, (trop bien. 06s. 35.) May I go in the parlor, to study there? Can you not study here 1 ? I can write, read, copy, and translate here ; but I can study better in a corner of the parlor. If you will stay here, I can ask you (vous faire) a few questions, and then you can ask me some. Very well, I am going to stay. Will you begin or may I (puis-je?) ask you the first questions'? You may begin, if you are ready; for, I am ready to answer you. I am ^ot quite ready. I wish first to correct a word there. Now I am eady. You know th? date of the montt ; do you not? I believe f do. And you; do you know it? To be sure. And he; can he ti- it? I believe not. Who cannot tell the date of the nnnth! 114 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSOH. Robert cannot. I ? Yes, I can. Is it not the 8th of May ? Yea it is (or that's it). Are you going out? (N. 1, 19 2 .) To be sure ; have I not my hat, cloak, and gloves? Yes, you have. Have you to purchase (buy) anything? les, I nave to purchase many things. What? A large shawl, for Sarah; a pretty little stick, for Henry; some glovea, handkerchiefs, and velvet, for Charlotte. Is that all? All! No, indeed ! What else (or more) l What more ? A great manv things. Have you not to buy something for oui little cousin, John ? Yes, I have several things to get for him. First, a wooden gun and other toys; and afterwards some little books. Is that all for him? To be sure; it is enough; is it not? Yes, indeed. Have you a catalogue of those things? No, I have none; but, will you do me the favoi of making one for me ? Yes, with pleasure. W 7 here is the paper, where is the pencil? The paper is here, and the pencil there. Have you money enough to buy all that? I believe so. What can you lend me? A knife, if you have need of one. A what? A knife. Thank you, I have no need of a knife. What have you need of? I have need of a good gun. An iron or a steel one ? A steel one. Why do you want it? I want it to kill a cat, a dog, and some birds. Are you in want of this picture? Which? Our good painter's last picture. I ? No ; but he wants it. Who wants it '< This young man does. How much will he give for it? I do n reading, &c., are never translated literally.) To love, to like, to be fond of. I Aimer, 1 (a, avant un infinitif.l love. I do not love. I J'aime. Je u'aiinc pas. TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 115 fVoes he like ? He does. (Dir. 1.) Does he not love I He does not. A.re you fond of? We are (fond of). Dost thou love ? Thou lovest tea. Who loves to read ? They like to read. Do you like him ? . . . them ? I do (like him, them). E dc not (like him, them). Wot at all. I do not like him or /t &. all. Does he eell his horse ? He does. uo you sell anything ? I do not. Do those farmers sell cabbages ? They do. They do not. Do you finish your task ? \ do. I do not (finish it). What do the pupils finish ? This one finishes his exercise, those finish their tasks. Whom are you waiting for ? I ex- pect the boy whom he expects. Do you receive any notes to-night ? Yea ; as many as they receive. Aime-t-il ? II aime. N'aime-t-il pas. II n'aime pas. Aimez-vous ? Nous aimons. Aimes-tu ? Tu aimes le the. Qui aime a Ure ? Us aiment a lire L'aimez-vous ? Leg aimez-vousf (* 51.) Je I'aime. Je les aime. Je ne I'aime pas. Je ne les aime paa Pas iu tout. Je ne I'aime pas dr tout. Vend-il son cheval ? II le vend. Vendez-vous quelque chose ? Je ne \ends rien. Ces fermiers-la vendent-ila dea choux ? Ilsen vendent. Ilsn'en vendent pas. Finissez-vous votre devoir? Je le finis. Je ne le finis pas. Que tinissent les ecoliers ? Celui-ci finit son exercice, ceux-la finissent leurs devoirs. Qui attendez-vous ? J'attends lo gar$on qu'il attend. Recevez-vous des billets ce soir ? J'enre9ois autantqu'ilsenreoivent. TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 1st Sec. VINGT-QUATRIEME Ex. Ire Sec. Mettez (put) ici le quantieme du mois en Francois. Are you going to see Mr. Charles, to-day? I am. How is ho now? He is better, but not at all well. How is his old cousin? Ho is quite well. How have you been since I had the pleasure of seeing you at your friend's? I have always been well, as usual. How are you all at home? Every one is well. Is any one sick at your house ? No, nobody is sick. Is not your little boy sick ? Oh ! yes ; he is a little sick ; but not much. Are you not coming in? Yes, I am coming in (N. 1, 19 2 ), to sit down a moment. Come in, come in. Take this seat. No, thank you; I will (vai?) sit here. (N. 19 1 .) Do you always speak French? No, we do not always speak it. Why do you not always speak it ? Because I do not speak il rery well, Jules does not speak much better, and the children do uot epeak it at all. How many exercises do the scholars copy every day? They copy two; one in the morning, the other in the eve- ning. At what o'clock do they copy the morning one? They copy ft ttt i past 9. And the evening o le ; do they also copy it at past 9 1 116 TWENTY- FOURTH LESSCN They copy it at | past 7. When do you correct them ? 1 correcl them at two or of two. Do you not dine (diner) at one ? No, we dine later. Whc dines at one? All our neighbors do. Why do you not dine at one also ? Because we like to iine later. Do your children dine, 01 eat dinner, when you do? No, they dine before us. Do they like to eat dinner before you ? Yes, they do like to do it, because they are always hungry. Do they like to drink tea or coffee ? They like to drink neither tea nor coffee, but milk. Do you love your brother ? I do love him. Does your brother love you 1 He does not love me. Dost thou love me, my good child? I do love thee. Dost thou love this ugly man? I do not love him. Whom do you love ? I love my children. Whom do we love ? We love our friends. Do we like any one ? We like no one. Does anybody like us? The Americans like us. Do you want anything? I want nothing. Whom is your father in want of? He is in want of his servant. What do you want? I want the note. Do you want this or that note? I want this one. What do you wish to do with it? (en?) I wish to open it, in order to read it. Does he receive as many notes as I ? He receives more of them than you. What do you give me ? I do not give thee anything. Do you give this book to my brother? I do give it him. Do you give him a bird ? I do give him one. To whom do you lend your books? I lend them to those scholars. Does your friend lend me a dollar? He lends you one. To whom do you lend your clothes ? (habits ?) I do not lend them to anybody. VOCABULARY. 2d Section. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED Le Present Continue. Are you fond of, do you like bcsf ? | Aimez-vous le boeuf ? Obs. 53. As the noun beef is here used in its general sense, the FruirJi use, not the partitive, but the definite article, le, les, (the.) ( 15.) Does \e like the Prussians ? To eat. To arrange, to set in order. Do you like to eat beef ? Aime-t-il les Prussiens ? Manger, 1. Arranger, ranger, 1. Aimez-vous a manger du boauf ? Obs. 54. As the noun beef is here used to express a portion of beef, nol 11 the beef, the French use the partitive, du, des, (some or any.) Does he like to eat cakes ? ($ 20.) They like to eat some. To eat, eating, we eat. To change, changing, we change. (* 144, R. 2.) I o neglect, neglecting, we neglect. Aime-t-il a manger des gateaux f Us aiment a en manger. Manger, mangeant, nous mangeons. Changer, changeant, nous chars geons. N^gliger, nepHgeant, noup nt'gli geons TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 117 Do you neglect your French ? We do not neglect it at all. Docs he send you the bank note? He does. ( 1443.) He does not. [ send, thou sendest, he sends, they send, who sends ? What does he send / / sweep, thou sweepest, he sweeps, they sweep, who sweeps ? does he not eweep ? Who sweeps the parlor carpet ? I do not know who sweeps it. Open, to open one, opening. I open, thou openest, he opens. Does he open his chest ? He does. Does he open his eyes ? He does. Negligez-vous votre Frangais ? Nous ne le negligeons pas du tout. Vous envoie-t-il le billet de banque. I IlmeTenvoie. line me 1'envoie pas. J'envoie, tu envoies, il envoie, ilc envoient,quienvoie? Qu envoie-t- il? Je balaie, tu balaies, il balaie, iii balaient, qui balaie ? Ne bahie-t-il pas? Qui balaie le tapis du salon ? Je ne sais pas qui le balaie. Ouvrir,* 2, en ouvrir un, ouvraat J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre. Ouvre-t-il son coffre ? II I'ouvre. tOuvre-t-il les yeux ? II Ice ouvre. 06*. 55. Use the definite article, le, les, (the,) instead of the possessive, when the sense clearly indicates the possessor. Ses may be used, but let is preferable. SoufTrir. souflrir. To suffer. I cannot bear it, (them. To put away, to put by, lay up, (put any article in its proper place.) Will you put away your hat, clothes, money, shoes, books, pencils, &c. (Dir. 2.) To shut, to shut up the store. Is the servant shutting up the office ? He does not now, but he is going to shut it in a moment (presently.) This soldier. Some cider. Has the captain more than thirty sol- diers ? He has less than twenty. Often, pretty often, (enough.) What does the American like ? He is very fond of coffee and tea. To dine, to eat dinner, to eat supper. The dinner, at dinner. The supper, at supper. Do they often change then- servants? We often change them. To change something. Je ne peux pas le (I Serrer, 1. Voulez-vous serrer votre chapeau, vos habits, votre argent, vos sou* liers, vos livres, vos crayons, &c. Ferrner, 1. Fernier le magasin. Le domestique ferme-t-il le bureau f II ne le ferme pas a present ; mais ii va le fermer dans un moment, Ce soldat-ci. Du cidre. Le capitaine a-t-il plus de trente sot dats ? II en a moins de vingt. (16 3 . Souvent, assez souvent. Qu'aime 1'Americain ? II aime beaucoup le cafe et le the. (Obs. 53.) Diner. Souper. Le diner, a diner. Le souper, ? souper. Changent-ils souvenf de domes tiques? Nousenchangeonssouvem Changer de quelque chose, (de.) JVENTT-FOURTH EXERCISE. 2d Sec. VlNGT-QuATRlfcME Ex 2de Sec Mettez ici le quantieme en Fran$ais. Ah ' Mr. Arago, I am glad to see you. You a*e well, 1 hope. Tolerably well, thank you. I am glad t3 hear it. Do you know whe:o 118 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Mr. Lamartine is ? Yes, he is at home. Thank you, Sir. I have w write to him. Well ! come in my house and sit down a little. M my thanks. I am not tired. I am, as usual, in a hurry (presse), lor I wan* to see Mr. Rush who is going to Liverpool at i past 10. Adieu, then 5 for you have not much time. Adieu. It is warm, very warm, is it not ? No ; it is not too warm for me. Not too warm far you ! Then you like the heat (le c/maJ), indeed ! T do. Do fou not like the heat? Not quite so much as you, I believe. Do you recite this evening at 6 or at 7 o'clock 1 ? We recite only * 7 } I believe. Do you know what vocabulary we recite ? You recite the last one. Which is the last one ? The . . .is it not? I believe not. Which, then ? This one. I know these two. And I also. Then, I am ready to recite. And you? I also. What are you looking for (or, do you seek). Miss Charlotte ? Is it your shawl or cloak that you seek (are looking for) ? No, Sir, I am looking foi my copy-book of French, to translate my exercise in it. What do you eat at breakfast ? We eat a little beef or mutton, bread and butter, &c. Do you like beef at breakfast ? Yes, a little t but I like it very well (beaucoup') at dinner. Do you like to eat it also at supper? I do not like it so much (tant). As for me (mot), I do not like it at all. I cannot bear it. You cannot bear it? indeed ! No, indeed, I cannot. Do you eat much cheese? We do not eat much; we do not like it; we cannot bear it. Do you often change servants (de domestiques) ? Yes, we often change them. We change them every month. Does not Julius neglect his task often ? Yes, he does; but we do not neglect ours. What do you neglect? 1 believe that we do not neglect anything. (06s. 4.) You are good 3 holars, then, if you neglect nothing. Thank you. What are you going to fix or arrange? When ? To-day. To-day? We do not fix anything, but these boys set their books in order (fix). Does your father send you anything? He sends me all I wish. Does he send you shoes, stockings, ant? gloves? No, but he sends me money to buy some. How much ioes he send you ? He sends me more than ten dollars every month. Is that all? Yes, and that is enough Will you be kind enough to tell Isaac to open the panor? He is opening it now (I'ouvre). Very well. Then you need not tell him to open it; but you may *ell him to sweep it. I will. (Je vais le faire.) (19', N. 1.) Do you cut anything? We cut some wood. What do those mer- chants cut ? They do not cut anything; bit* their clerk cuts soma poarse cloth. Does he not cut the fine cloth too ? No , he is afiaid tc cnt it. Yon mean, he is afraid to tear it, do yoL not? Yes, 7 mean TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON 119 to tear '.l Does he not tear the cotton ? Yes, he tears it, and th*> coarse cloth too ; but he tears neither the velvet nor the satin. Wheu do you receive your notes'? I receive them every morning when you receive yours. Does ovr neighbor, the lawyer, receive nis journals when we receive ours ? I do not know when he receiver lii ?. What does your servant carry ? He carries several things in a large trunk. Does he open it? He does not. Where is he carry- ing it? He is carrying it home. (06s. 52.) Are you waiting for anybody? Yes, I am only waiting for the little Irishman. Do you wait for him often ? Yes, I do. Every morning or every evening? i'vlornmg and evening. Are you killing two birds? I am killing only one. How many chickens does that old cook kill ? He does not kill any. Who kills them, then? The farmers kill then. Do (the) farmers work as much as (the) sailors? They do. Who works more? You or your son ? We work as much the one as the other. Very ill. Worse. Much worse, i Tres-mal. Plusmal. Beaucoupp. ;n. Does the doctor hope yet ? Go (imper. | Le docteur espere-t-il encore ? Allez To rest yourself, myself. Good-by. | Vousreposer, merepo. Jevoussalue VOCABULARY. 3d Section. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED (* 144.) Le Prtsent Continue. Exceptions to the general rule given in $( 144). This desk. The teacher's desk. What are your brothers doing ? They are doing nothing. Are you not doing an exercise ? No, we do not do one. What are you doing in the office ? We do the task we have to do. Do you say anything to me ? W? tell you that they wish to eat. Do you say nothing ? No, nothing. That may be. At the corner of Walnut and 13th. That cannot be. TWENTY-FOURTH EXERCISE. 3d Sec. VINGT-QUATRIEME Ex. SMB Seo Mettez ici le quantieme du mois, en Francois. Mr. Jean, je suis bien aise de vous voir. Pouvez-vous me dire comment se porte votre cousin Armand ? II est tres-mal. Fn ferite ! J'en suis bien fache. Est-il plus mal que hier ? Oui, "'I ent beaucoup plus mal. Le docteur espere-t-il encore? Oui, il tujK'ro ensore, parce que Armand est jeune ; mais il est trs mal. Ce pupitre. Le pupitre du maitre Vos frores que font-ils? Us ne font rien. Ne faites-vous pas un exercice ? Non, nous n'en faisons pas. Que faites-vous dans le bureau ? Nous y faisons le devoir que nous avons a faire. Me dites-vous quelque chose ? Nous vous disons qu'ils veulem manger. Ne dites-vous rien ? Non, rien. ( 151. A. 8.) Cela peut etre. Au coin de Walnut et de la 13mo. Cela ne peut pas e*tre. 120 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Prenez un siege. Asseyez-vous. Non, je ne peux pas m'asseoir a present. Ne pouvez-vous pas vous asseoir un petit moment, pou vous reposer? Non. je ne ]e peux pas; car j'ai a aller chez 1'apO' thicaire pour acheter quelque chose. Est-ce pour Armand 1 * Oui, c'est pour lui. Alois, allez, allez. Adieu ! Je vous salue. Miss Emilie, what are you waiting for? lam waiting for the scholars. Are they coming, or do they come ? (06s. 52.) I be- lieve they are coming. What are they doing? Who? The shoe- makers. They are making shoes ($ 4). Are the carpenters making a ship ? No, they are .not making one. What do they do ? They do something, but we do not know what. Do you know where are my dictionaries? Which? The French ones. We know where they are. Will you tell us where they are? No, we will not tell you. You may look for them. You are very good, indeed ! Do the teachers owe anything to the butter-man ? They do not owe him anything. Do they not owe something to the tailors? They owe them something. How much? Not much. Not more than two or three dollars. Do they owe more to the joiner? No, they do not owe him so much; for, they owe him nothing. Nothing at all ? No, nothing at all. 1 believe they owe him nothing at all. I know they owe him something for their last desk. That may be, (cela peut etre.) Do the Messrs. Cowell & Son keep a dry goods store? Yes, they keep one. Where do they keep it? They keep it at the corner of Chestnut and Seventh (de Chestnut et de la 7me). What do they keep? They keep gloves, ribbons, satin, velvet, fine cloth, and many other things. Do they receive their satin, velvet, gloves, and ribbons from France (France) ? No, I believe they do not receive them from France ; they buy them (achetent) from our merchants. What do they receive from France ? They do not receive any- thing. Do the French take much tea ? No, they do not take much. They take more coffee than tea; do they not? Yes, they take a little more. Do they not take a great deal more of it? No-, they do not take a great deal more ; but they take more wine than either tea or coffee, (que de the ou de cafe.) W T hat do the Italians and Spanish drink? They drink chocolate. Do they not drink wine also ? Yes, they do. Do you know that the general's old brothe is very sick ? Yes, we know it ; and we know also that he is bettei this morning. We are glad to hear it. Do you say anything to we? We do not say anything to you. Do you tell them anything 1 ? We do not say anything to them. Do you say anything pretty to four good neighbor? We tell him something pretty. What do you tell him pretty 7 We are not going to tell you of it, or it to you. TWENTY FIFTH LESSON. 121 Vou have been well. I believe it. I Vous vous etes bien porte*. Jelecroia A.t the hour. Before the hour. Punctual. On the way, the road, coming. [ think. Dust. h is very dusty. A The are. Ponctuel. Avant 1'heure. En chemin. Je pense. De la poussiere, (femi.> II fait beaucoup de poussiere. nVENTY-FIFTH LESSON, 25th. Vingt-cinquume Legon, VOCABULAIRK. Ire Section. PRESENT TENSE CONTINUED. Ze Present Conti. ve. As the rule given in ( 144), on the formation of the plural of the present tense, is applicable to irregular as well as regular verbs, it remains now only to point out the present tense singular of a few irregular verbs, to enabit the learner to use them in-his exercises. They are the following : To do, to make. Doing. 1 do, thou dost, he does. To drink, drinking. I diink, thou drinkest, he drinks. To come, coming. I come, thou comest, he comes. To write, writing. I write, thou writest, he writes. To see, seeing. I see, thou seest, he sees. To say, tell, saying. I say, thou sayest, he says. To go out, going out. [ go out, thou goest out, he goes out. To read, reading. I read, thou readest, he reads. To know, (to be acquainted with,) knowing. I know, thou knowest, he knows. To put on, putting on. I put on, thou puttest, he puts. To sleep, sleeping, i sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. To serve, serving. I acrve, thou servest, he serves. To take, taking. I taxe, thou takest, he takes. To translate, translating, translate, thou translatest, he trans- lates. 11 Faire,* faisant. Je fais, tu fais, il fait. Boire,* buvant. Je bois, t^ bois, il boit. Venir,* venant. Je viens, tu viens, il vient. Ecrire,* ecrivant. J'dcris, tu ecris, ii ecrit. Voir,* voyant. Je vois, tu vois, il voit. Dire,* disant. Je dis, tu dis, il dit. Sortir,* sortant. Je sors, tu sors, il sort. Lire,* lisant. Je Us, tu lis, il lit. Connaitre,* connaissant. f Je connais, tu connais, il conncSi, ( Je sais, tu sais, il sail. Mettre,* 4, mettant. Je mets, tu mets, il met. Dormir,* 2, dormant. Je dors, tu dors, il dort. Servir,*2, servant. Je sers, tu sers, il sert. Prendre,*4, prenant. Je prends, tu prends, il prend. Traduire,* 4, traduisant. Jc traduis, tu traduis, il tradcjl, 122 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSOR, VINGT-CINQUIEME EXERGUE. Ire Sec Mettez (put) le quantieme, en Frarigais, ici. Bonsoir, Mr. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. J'espere quo voua vous etes bien porte depuis que je n'ai eu le plaisir de \ous voir. Tres-bien, merci. Suis-je le premier ici, ce soir ? Vous etes pre- mier. Vous Petes assez souvent, mais pas toujours. Je suis souve;:* tiop occupe pour venir toujours a Pheure. Je le crois, car vous ele^ bisn ponctuel. Ou sont les autres ecoliers? En chemiri, je pense, car ils sont ponctuels aussi. Mais pas tant que vous. Voulez-vou* prendre un siege? Non, je vous remercie, pas encore. Je vena d'abord chercher un mot dans le dictionnaire. Quel mot % oulez- vous savoir? Je veux savoir le Francais de: dust. Que voulez- vous dire en Francais ? Je veux dire : it is dusty. Le Francais de it is dusty, est: il fait de la poussiere. A present, je peux vous dire 1 II fait beaucoup de poussiere. Oui, je le sais, et la poussiere n'e^t pas agreable. Prenez un siege a present. Merci, je vais en pren- dre un. Dost thou see anything'? I do not (see anything). Does yom father see our ships ? He cannot see them at all from there j but we see them very well from here. How many soldiers do you see 1 ? We see a good many; we see more than thirty of them. The cap- tain expects more soldiers, does he not ? I do not know if he expects any others. Do you know the captain? No, I believe I do not know him ; but I know the general. Do you also know the general's cousin ? Who ? that tall and handsome young man who cornea often to the museum to see the pictures'? Yes, that one. I do not know him, but I see him very often. What do these sailors and soldiers drink ? They drink wine and cider. Do they drink more cf the latter than of the former? No, they drink more of the former than of the latter. Do they drink wine every day ? They do ; but they do not drink cider every day. Why not? Can they not get some ? (en avoir ?) No, they have not money enough to buy any. What do we drink? You know that we drink tea, coffee, and wine. Do we not drink chocolate too ? Yes, we do. We do like it as much as the Italians and Spaniards. Do we drink as much oi it as they ? No, we do not, for they drink it in the morning, at din ner, and supper. What art thou writing? I am not writing, I am reading. Who writes ? (is writing ?) The lawyer is writing. What is the Prussian doing ? He does nothing. Does he ncf study Eng- lish ? Yes, he is studying it. Does he not write it ? He does not What dost thou say ? I say nothing. I am too sleey;y to say any thing. Poos thy brother say anything ? He is afraid to say a word. - TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 123 I)o y oil say anything ? Yes, I tell our servant to go to tLe book seller's to bring me the last work of Cooper. Do you like his last work ? Do you not like it? I say that I like it very much. Who does not like it? Several gentlemen whom (que) I know. ( 77.) Do you tell me anything? I tell you something. Yes; but you do not tell me something pretty. Is it not pretty? No, not at all. Do fou do (are you doing) anything for me ? We do not do anything fcr you; bat those boys are (doing something for you). What aro they doing for me ? Do you not see it? No, I do not see it. Dost ihou see my shawl or gloves? (Dir. 2.) I see neither these nor that. What dost thou see ? I see nothing. Who sees them ? W T ho sees what? My shawl and gloves. Nobody sees them. Are they not here ? No, they are not. I see but this old cotton shawl. What do you say to the tailor and shoemaker? I do not tell them any thing. What do our friends -say to them? They tell the latter to mend their shoes, and the former to make them some coats and vests. Have they time to do it ? They have time and a wish to do it. What are you doing? I am putting my gloves on. Is he put- ting on his large hat? No, he puts on the old one. Do you not put any sugar in your coffee ? Yes, I put some, for I have not enough. Do you not put milk in it? No, I do not. Do you know those Ger- mans? I know one, but not the others. Who is acquainted with this Swiss ? We know him. Does he know us ? He does. Whom dost thou know? I know nobody. Does he not know you. 1 believe he does, (que si.) Do I look sick ? You do (look sick). You look very well. On the contrary. You do not look well. You look cold, (as if you were cold.) Miss, how have you been ? Ai-je 1'air malade ? Vous ave* 1'air malade. Vous avez tres-bon air. Au contrairo Vous n'avez pas tres-bon air. Voiu avez 1'air d' avoir fro id. Mle. comment von etes-vous porlce (fern.) VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. To give something to do to some one. Do you give anything to the dog to cat ? Do you feed the dog ? I give it some beef to eat. I give him nothing to eat. What do you give the scholars to translate ? I give them the 25th exercise. To bring. To find. To, at the play. Donner quelque chose d faire d qic! qu'un. Donnez-vousquelau-* chose a mange au chien ? Je lui donne du boeuf a manger. Je ne lui donne rien a manger. Que donnez-vous a traduire aui dcoliers ? Je leur donne le 25me exerr c. Apporter, 1. Trouv^r I Au spectacle. 124 TWENIT-FITTH LESSON. (2.) Our outcher. His sheep. What, that which, (relative pronoun, objective case.) Do you bring rr..e what I wish ? I do not bring you what you want, (or what you wish.) Do you find what you look for, (or what you are looking for ?) [ find what I look for. (am looking.) He finds not what he seeks. We bring what we find. All, or all that, all that which. They do not find all they look for, (or all that which they seek.) Do you mend all I do not ? (Dir. 1.) I mend it all. We eat all we have. Instead of. Notre boucher. Son rnouu n, Ce que, (pronom relatif, regnr.i direct.) (i 89.) M'apportez-vnus ce que je veux? Je ne vous apporte pas ce que voufi voulez. Trouvez-vous ce q^evous cherchez* Je trouve ce que je cherche. II ne trouve pas ce qu'il cherche. Nous apportons ce que nous trouvons. Tout ce que, (pron. rel. reg. direct.) (* 910 Us ne trouvent pas tout ce qu'ila cherchent. Raccommodez-vous tout ce que je ne raccommode pas ? Je le raccommode tout. Nous mangeons tout ce que nous avons. Au lieu de. Au lieu de lire. Instead of reading. Obs. 56. Instead of is in English followed by the present participle, but in French it is followed by the infinitive, as all other prepositions, except en. (Rule 1st.) This room, apartment. Put yourself, (imperative.) Near. Near Miss Ann. Near the fire. Get appartement-ci. Mettez-vous. Presde. Presde Mile. Anne. du feu. A present que j'y pense. ( 50.) Comme vous y pensez, il y pense. Venez,(imper.) * Venez ici. Me voici. S'il vous plait. S'il lui plait. Finir d'etudier. Moi, du moins. Lui, du moins. Now that I think of it. As you think of it, he thinks of it. Come, (imperative.) ($ 150.) Corne here. Here I am. If you please. If he pleases. To finish, to quit studying. At least I do, or I, at least. He, at least. VINGT-CINQUIEME ExERCiCE. 2de Sec. 6crivez la date ici, en Francois, (the date noun fern., of which hereafter.) Ah ! Mr. Charles, j'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Je vois que vou& rous portez bien. Tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., etes-vous ma- lade * Ai-je Vair malade? Un pen. Je suis un peu fatigue, mais non pas malade. J : en suis bien aise. Vo:is n/etes pas le premier, ee soir. Non, je vois que Mile. Clara esl ici avant moi. Com- onent vous etes-vous portee (fern.), Mile., depuis jeudi dernier. Je me euis tres-bien portee, merci. Je n'ai pas Pair malade, j'espere. Oh! non. Au contraire, vous avez tres-bon air, comme a Pordi- aaire. Merci M r Comment est le mal de gorge du general 1 Sor TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 125 ma* do gorge est mieux, mais non pas son rhume. Entrfez, Mr. Lenoir. Vous avez Pair d'avoir froid. Oui, fai froid. Mettez-voua ici, pres du feu et de Mile. Clara. Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Voua avez bon feu. Le feu est tres-agreable quand vous avez froid ; n'est- ce pas, Mr. 1 ? Oui ; Mile. II est alors tres-agreable. Vous avea: parfaitement raison. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait tres-froid. Ccnnaissez-vous Mr. de Genlis? J'ai le plaisir de le connaifre et de le voir tres-souvent. II a Tail malade, a present, n'est-ce pas! Mais, je crois que non. A present que j'y pense, je crois qu'il a maj aux dents. Cela peut etre. Si cela est, j'en suis bien fachee. Et moi aussi. Mr. de Genlis est un homme de merite, n'est-ce pas ? Jo le crois. Do you go to the play, in the evening? I do nc< Why? What have you to do ? I have to study. Does your teacher give you any- thing to study in the evening ? Yes, he gives us something to do then. At what o'clock do you finish studying ? We finish at 9 or 10 oclock; in a word (en un), we finish when we are tired, or sleepy, (when we are.} Does he give you anything to write ? Yes, he always gives us ($ 170) the quarter or the half of an exercise to write ; because he says that we know it better then. Do you know it better when you write it? To be sure. I do (moi) at least. Do you copy your father's notes in the evening? We copy them only in the morning, and afterwards we send them (away). Do the scholars write all they translate ? No, they do not. Do they mend all they tear? They do not. Do they find all truy look for? They do. Does the captain find all he looks for' 1 No, indeed, he does not. Who finds all he looks for? Nobody does. What do they wish to find? They wish to find but theii books. Do they not put them away? They do not. Who puta them away? Nobody does. Where are they? You know; do you not? No, not at all. The Swiss wants something; do you bring him all he wishes? I bring it to him, when I can find it. Where dost thou take rne to? I take thee to the museum. Do you not take me to the wharf? I have neither time nor a rnind to take you there, because it is bad weather. -Do not the merchants put away what they do not sell? They put away all (ney do not sell. At how much does the butcher sell his beef? lie sells it at ten cents, or sous. Does the butcher wish to buy your sheep? He does. What will he give you fof it (en) ? He will give me two dollars and a half for it. Is it enough ? I think not. If this butcher will not give you more than that, I know another who can give you more. Have our butcher? 126 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) as many oxen as sheep ? No, they have many moie of the latte? than of the former. Do they sell as much beef as mutton > They sell much beef, but they sell only a little mutton. What is the old cook looking for? He is looking for a young chicken, which he does not find. Where can it be ? Who knows ? What is the Ger- man doing in his room 1 ? He is reading the journal and feeding hia birds. What does he give them to eat? (what does he feed them with?) He gives them but grain to eat, (feeds them with.) W T hat journals* does he read ? He reads those which your cousin lends him. Does not your father lend him some, too ? He has three in his desk, which my father lends him j but he is not leadii g them now. John, come here. Here I am. Come with me. Where? Here, near the fire. Near the fire ? No, indeed ! I am warm enough where I am. Take that seat. No, I am going to take this one; that one is too big for me. Very well : take that little one, if you please. Now that I think of it, go in that apartment to bring me the cake .which is in my desk. Which one of your desks? The French one. I am going to bring it to you, if you please. You are going to give me some; are you not? Yes, to be sure. It is to give you some that I tell you to bring it to me. Have you a knife to cut it? I can cut you a little with my penknife. You cannot cut me enough with your penknife. Do you want so much? Yes, I want a great deal ; you know that I like it much. Go, then, go, instead of speaking. Will you go with me to the grocer's? Here I am, ready to go. Do you want a basket? Why? To put in ii something good, which you are going to buy; are you not? Yes, ! am going to buy something good, but the grocer can put it in papei bags. VOCABULAIRE. 3mc Section. To play. To listen. Instead of listening of playing. Do you play instead of studying ? I study instead of playing. That man speaks instead of listening Have you a sore finger ? Thumb ? I have a sore finger. Thumb. Has ymr brother a sore foot ? He has a sore eye. A sore nose. We have They have sore eyes. The elbow. The right elbow, The right arm. The left arm. The left knee. The right one. The back. The dog's back Jouer, 1. ficouter (sans prepcs.; Au lieu d'ecouter de jouer. Jouez-vous au lieu d'etudier? J'tudie au lieu de jouer. Get homme parle au lieu d'ecouter. tAvez-vous mal audoigt? Aupoucet tj'ai mal au doigt. Au pouce. tVotre frere a-t-il mal au pied ? til a mal^a Poeil. Au nez. tNous avb^ps Us ont mal aux yeux. Le coude. Le coude droit, Le bras droit. Le bras gaucha. Le genou gauche. Le droit. Le dos. Le tos du chien. TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 127 Has the dog a sore back ? It has. Is the dog' a back sore ? It is (sore). Is your left arm sore ? It is (sore). It is not. Whose elbow is sore ? Who has a sore elbow? Nobody's. Nobody. Are not the child's fingers sore ? Has not the child sore fingers ? f hey are He has. Which of his eyes is sore ? The left. IB not my right eye sore ? Yes, it is, or your right eye is sore. This bed. Those beds. Does the servant make the bed ? He makes the fire instead of making the bed. The bedstead. To learn, to learn how, learning. I do learn, thou learnest, he learns. They leafn. I learn to read, how to read. They learn to write, how to write. Do they not learn to speak French ? Yea, they do. Do Arthur and his cousin go out ? NeitherArthur nor his cousin does. Le chien a-t-il mal au dos ? II y a mal. Avez-vous mal au bras gauche ? J'y ai mal. Je n'y ai pas mal. Qui a mal au coude ? Personne n'y a mal. > L'enfantn'a-t-ilpasmal atix doigtsl II y a mal. A quel ceil a-t-il mal ? Au gauche. N'ai-je pasmal al'ceildroit? Si fait, vous y avez mal. Ce lit-ci. Cos ,fts-la. Le domestique fait-il le lit ? II fait le feu au lieu de faire le lit. I bois de lit. Apprendre,* 4, ajjrenant, (il prend d, avant un infinitif.) J'apprends, tu apprends, il apprend Us apprennent. ($ 144.) J'apprends a lire. Us apprennent a ecrire. N'apprennent-ils pas a parler Francois ? Si fait, ils 1'apprennent. Arthur et son cousin sortent-ils ? Ni Arthur ni son cousin ne sortent. Obs, 57. NEITHER, connected with nominatives, is : Ni .... ni . . . . n, before the verb. ($ 162, R. 6.) The following verb ia usually in the plural : Ni cet 6colier-ci ni celui-la nMtu- dient assez. Le dentiste. Le sofa. Le charpentier raccommode-t-il le bois de lit ? Non, parce qu'il a mal au pouce. tA quel pouce a-t-il mal ? Au droit. Neither this scholar nor that one studies enough. The dentist. The sofa. Does the carpenter mend the bed stead ? No, because he has a sore thumb. Which of hi3 thumbs rr sore ? The right one. ViNGT-ciNQUifcME ExERCiCE. 3me Sec. Mettez la date ici, en Frangais. An! Mr. Letourneur, je suis bien aise de vous voir. C ailment eo porte-t-on chez vous 1 ? Tout le monde s'y porte bien. Personne a'est malade a la maison; mais chez mon voisin. le ministre, tout .s monde est malade. Qu'ont ils? L'un, a mal de gorge, un autro, mal de tete; celui-ci a un rhume, celui-la mal aux dents. Alors,ils IQ sont pas tres malades. Non, mais il fait si mauvais, qu'ils souf- front beaucoup. Je suis fache d'apprendre qu'ils souffrent. Celui qui a mal aux dents ne peut pas dormir. Pourquoi ne va-t-il pa> [28 TWENTY -FIFTH LESSON. (3.) chez le dentiste? II a peur. En verite ! Qui est*/e? C'ea \e jeune Arthur. II a tort d'avoir peur. II le salt, mais il continue a avoir peur. Qui a le rkume ? C'est George. Prend-il quelque chose pour sonrhume? Oui, sans doute. Qu ? est-ce que c'est? Je ne sais pas quoi. Does your father go out? He does not. What does he do? He writes. Does he write a book? He does. (Dir. 1.) When does he write it ? He writes it in the morning, in the evening, and when he has time. He is at home now, then? To be sure. Do you wish to see him ? No, because he is too busy. Does the Prussian gc out ? No, neither he nor the Swiss goes out. Why do *hey not go cut ? They have sore feet. What do they do for their sore feet ? They do something, but I cannot tell you what. Does the shoe- maker bring our shoes? He does not. Does he drink? Does he not work? He does not work, because his left knee is sore. Hag anybody the toothache T Yes, this youth has it. Is he not going to the dentist? No, he is not. Is he going to send for him ? .He does not send for him. He does not wish to have the dentist. Has any- body a sore elbow? I believe so. Let me see. ($ 154.) Yes, the dentist has a sore elbow. Which of his elbows is sore ? The right or his right, (le.) Who has a sore arm ? I have. Do you not see it ? No, I do not see it. Which of jour arms is sore ? The left. Does the minister write now ? No, he cannot yet. Is not his right thumb better? It is better, but not well. Do you read your pretty book ? 1 do not. I have a sore eye. Which of your eyes is sore ? Do you not see ? My right eye is sore. Let me see it. See it or look at it. (voyez-le.) Who has sore eyes? The old cooks have sore eyes. What day of the month is to-day? It is the . . . And to-morrow ? The . . . What is the German (/Ding in his room? He is learning to read. Does he not learn to write ? Yes, he does. Does your son learn to trans- late ? He learns to translate, and to copy French. Does the Prus sian speak instead of listening? He speaks instead of listening. What does he do then ? Afterwards he goes to the farmer's to drink milk. Does the dentist fix (arranger) the teeth of your son? He does not. What does he? He makes teeth for the Dutchman, instead of fixing my son's teeth. Who studies instead of playing? A. few boys study instead of playing; but a great many play instead j{ studying. Does our English teacher speak French to us instead )i speaking English ? He does often. Do the children of the Swiss chirk wine in the morning, instead of drinking tea or coffee ? They drink neither wine, tea, nor coffee. Can you find the French of: to offer \ in this small dictionary? I TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) 129 fcin going to look for it immediately. Very well ; take the dictionary I have it. Do you find the word in it ? No, I do not. Indeed ! Le1 me see. I see why you cannot find it. You are looking for it in the French instead of the English. What is the grocer putting in tha' paper bag? I believe he puts in it salt instead of sugar. Is tha* salt, Sir? No, it is sugar, but it looks like (a Pair de) salt, does i not? Yes, it looks like it. ($ 50.) Let me, let me, I want to say Le* me taste it, but I do not know the French of: to taste. Will yot tell me, William? To be sure; it is gouter. Gouler } very well. Now I can say: Let me taste it. Do. (Dir. 1.) Take some and taste it. ( * 54.) Is it sugar or salt ? You are right, it is sugar. Then we can sweeten what we eat and drink. Do his little fiends receive Ciore books than copy-books * They leceive less of the former than of the latter. Do you sleep in this pretty little bed? No, I sleep in that large bed. Who sleeps in this one? Sophia does. Do the joiner's boys make sofas, desks, and bedsteads? Yes, the} make sofas, besteads, and desks. Do they work as much as the boya of the carpenter? They work quite as much. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 26th. Tingt-sixteme Lcgon, 26me. VOCABULAIRB. Ire Section. ^o you learn French ? Russian ? I Jo. I do not. The Polish. Russian. Turkish. Latin. Greek. Arabian, Arabic. Syrian, Syriac. Swedish. Does your son learn Latin ? No, he does not. The Pole. The Roman. The Greek. The Swede. The Arab. The Syrian. To speak French. German. Apprenez-vous le Franais ? Le Russe ? Je 1'apprends. Je ne 1'apprends pas. Le polonais. Le russe. Le turc. Le latin. Le grec. L'arabe. Le syriaque. Le suedois. Votre fils apprend-il le latin ? Non, il ne 1'apprend pas. Le Polonais. Le Romain. Le Grec. Le Suedois. L'Arabe. Le Syrien. Parler Fran$ais. Parler Allemand. 06*. 58. After the verb, parler, the article (le) is usually omitted before : Fran fats, Anglais, &c., although it is used after all other verbs. ( 47i.) Who speaks Swedish ? Not I ; but I am studying Polish. This minister reads Latin well, and translates Greek and Syrian. Are you an Englishman English ? Qui parle suedois ? Pas moi ; nidi j'etudie le polonais. Ce ministre lit bien le latin, t/ I A traduit le grec et le syriaque. Etes-vous Anglais ? Obs. 59. Where the indefinite article is used in English to denote quali iea, the French make use of m article. & 38, R. 2. p. 469.) (80 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. No, Sii, \ am a Frenchman. (French.) Is he a Turk, a Greek, or an Arab ? [3 your cousin a minister ? He ? No, he is an apothecary. Crazy, foolish. Sure, certain. Are they sure they have it ? They are. To take away, pull off, throw off. Take away, off. Well, vsry well ! \ie you tired and sleepy ? I am tired and sleepy. 06s. 60. Change the verb when the I am much obliged to you, (him, them.) You are welcome. It is not worth mentioning. Non, Monsieur, je sins Frances. Est-il Turc, Grec, ou Arabe '( Votre cousin est-il ministre ? Lui Non, il est apothicaire. Fou. (plur. s. 92.) Sur. (de avant un infinit.) Sont-ils siirs de 1' avoir ? Ila en mn sfirs. Oter. Otez. Eh bien ! Etes-vous fatigue et avez-vous soin meil ? Je suis fatigue et j'ai sommeil. adjective requires a different one. Je vous (lui, leur) suis bien oblige. De rien. EXERCICE. Ire Sec. jToubliez pas (do not forget) le quantieme en Frangais. Quel jour du mois est-ce? C'est le.... De quel mois? Du mois de ... En etes-vous sur? Oui, j'en suis sur. N'est-ce pas auiourd'hui jeudi? Si fait, c'est jeudi. Eh! bien, le papiei dit: jeudi le .... N'ai-je pas raison? Si fait, je crois que vous avez raison. Je vous remercie. De rien. Vous etes bien bon. Je suis bien aise de savoir le quantieme, parce que j ; ai un billet a ecrire. Avez-vous besoin de papier ? Non, je vous suis bien oblige. J'er. ai, je crois; mais je ne puis trouver mon encrier. Etes-vous sui qiril n'est pas dans votre pupitre? Je n'en suis pas tout-a-fait sur, mais je crois, qu'il n'y est pas. Laissez-moi voir ( 54) si je ne peux pas 1'y tronver. Cherchez. ( 150.) Eh bien! L'y trouvez vous? Non, il n'est pasici. Qui peut Pavoir? Votre cousin Arthur. je pense. Car il ecrit son devoir dans son appartement. Puis-je aller le cherciier? Non; s'il en a besoin, il peut 1'avoir. Je vais ecrire mon billet avec mon crayon. Do you go foi anything? I do go for something. What do yod go for? I go for some cider. Does your father send fcr anything? He sends for some wine. Does your servant go for some bread * He goes for some. For whom does your neighbor send ? He senda for the pnysician. Does your servant take off his coat in order to nake the fire? He takes it off in order to make it. Do you take iff yoai gloves in order to givo me money? I do take them off in irder to give you some. Do you leam Fiench? I do learn it. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 131 Dues ycLr brother learn German? He does learn it. Who learns English ? The Frenchman learns it. Do we learn Italian ? You do learn it. What do the English learn ? They learn French and German. Do you speak Spanish ? No, Sir, I speak Italian. Who speaks Polish 1 My brother speaks Polish. Do our neighbors speak Russian % They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. Do you speak Arabic? No, I speak Greek and Latin. What knife have you? I have an English knife. What money have you there ? Is it (est-ce) Italian or Spanish money? It is Russian money. .Have you an Italian hat 1 N3, I have a Spanish hat. Are you a Frenchman? No, I am a.i Englishman. Art thou a Greek? No, I am n Spaniard. Are these men Germans? No, they are Russians. Do the Rus- sians speak Polish? They do not speak Polish, but Latin, Greek, and Arabic. Is your brother a merchant ? No, he is a joiner. Are these men merchants ? No, they are carpenters. Are you a cook ? No, I am a baker. Are we tailors? No, we are shoemakers. Art thou crazy ? No, I am not crazy. What is that man ? He is a phy- sician. Does the son of the painter study Greek ? No, he studies English before Greek. He is right. Is he going to learn Greek before Latin ? No, he is going to learn Latin before Greek. Does the butcher kill anything to-day ? He kills oxen and sheep. Does he kill some every day ? He does. Why does he kill some ? He sells the beef and mutton in market. Do you listen instead of doing your task ? Yes, I do, because what you say is very pretty. Do they listen also ? No, they neither listen nor study, nor copy j but they sleep. They do right, if they are tired and sleepy. Afterwards they can work better. ( 170.) VOCABULAIKB. 2de Section. To wish. I wish you a good morning. Does he wish me a good evening ? He does. What do they wish me ? They wish you much pleasure. The forehead. Souhaiter, 1. t Je vous souhaite le bonjour. t Me souhaite-t-il le bon&oir f II vous le souhaite. Que me souhaitent-ils ? Ils vous souhaitent beaucoup plaisir. Le front. He has a large forehead. > T1 , - t His forehead is large, i Ob,. 55.) J H a le front He has blue eyes. His eyes are blue. Blue. Black. Large. The blue ones. A black one. Round. Square Long II a les yeux bleua. Bleu. Noir. Largo. Les bleus. Un noir. Rond. CarrO. Long* 132 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) A great, or large Knife. A great man. A. French book. An English penny. Un grand couteau. Un grand nomine* Un livre Frangais. Un sou Anglais Obs. 61. Adjectives of nations, colors, and shapes, come after the noun A. square handkerchief. A square bed. A. round hat. A round tree. Russian money. Italian velvet. A good American sailor. fto the Italians make fine black satin ? To listen to something. To listen to some one, to somebody. Do you listen to what your teacher tells you? I do. Does he listen to what I tell him ? lie does. He does not at all. Do you listen to what I tell you ? '\> you listen to me ? I do. Whom do you listen to ? Nobody. Un mouchoir carre. Un lit carre. Un chapeau rond. Un arbre rond, De 1' argent Russe. Du velour* Italien. Un bon matelot Ame'ricain. Les Italiens font-ils de beau satic noir ? t couterquelque chose, (sans prepoe.J t Kcouter quelqu'un. t Ecoutez-vous ce que votre maitre vous dit ? Je 1'ecoute. t Ecoute-t-il ce que je lui dis ? t II 1'ecoute. II *?e 1'ecoute pas du tout. t Ecoutez-vous ce que je TOUS dis ? t M'ecoutez-vous ? Je vous ecoute, t Qui ecoutez-vous ? Personne. (* 171, R. 8.) t coutez-vous mon frere ? t Je ne Z'ecoute pas. t N 'ecoutez-vous pas les hommes? t Si fait, je les ecoute. Le theme. Le dernier theme, t Prendre, boire du cafe ou le cafe, t Prendre, boire le the ou du the. Do you listen to my brother ? I do not (listen to him). Do you not listen to the men ? Yt j s, I do (listen to them). The exercise. The last exercise. To take, to drink coffee. To take, to drink tea. Obs. 62. With the verbs, to take and to drink, (le) or (du) may be use? jidirTersntly, with tea, coffee, and chocolate, but not so with other verbt And no .ins. Will you eat bread ? Will he take the bread ? Do you take (drink) tea ? I do. Do they drink tea every day ? They do take some every day. My lather drinks coffee. The French take coffee after dinner. Do they take it at breakfast ? Does her brother take chocolate ? Voutez- vous manger dupain ? (not le.} Veut-il prendre le pain ? (not du.) t Prenez-vous (buvez) du (le) the ? t y en prends. Je le bois. t Prennent-ils le thd tous les jours ? t Us le prenncnt tous les jours, t Mon pere prend du cafe, t Les Fran$ais boiveut du caft aprei dine. t Le prennent-ils a dejeuner ? t Son frere prend-il du chocolat ? 1 Un grand homme means a great man, but un homme grand a tall man A similar distinction is made with respect to the word pauvre, poor, which expresses pitiful, or a want of intellect, when before, and indigent, whra after the substantive. Ex. Un pauvre homme : a sorrowful (pitiful . miserably man ; and un homme pauvre. an indigent man. TWENT1 -SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 133 He drinks chocolate every morning. is your exercise easy to-day ? It is not very difficult, (or it is not) a very difficult vne, (or hard one,) but t II prend le chocolat tous les matins. Votre theme est-il aise aujourd'hui I II n'est pas lres-di]ficile, mais il es< long. it is long, or it is a long one. ViNGT-sixifcME TuihiE. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme en Franais. Mile. Victoria, j'ai I'honneur de vous saluer, VQUS vous portez lien, n'esl-ce pas? Oui, Mr., je me porte bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que j'ai eu le plaisir de TOUS voir au musee ? Je ne me suis pas tres-bien porte, je vous guis Ires-oblige. Je suis fache de 1'apprendre. Mais vous etes inieux, j : espere? Oui, beaucoup mieux; je peux dire: bien a pre- sent. Mais, je vois M. Guillaume. II va eritrer, je crois. J ; espere que non. Pourquoi done ? (so?) Ne 1'aimez-vous pas? Non, je ne peux pas le souffrir. Je vois qu'il n ; entre pas. Pourquoi ne pouvez-vous pas le souffrir ? II est trop vain. N'a-t-il pas raison d'etre vain? N'est-ce pas un joli jeune homme? Si fait; mais il a tort d'en etre vain. A present que j'y pense, savez-vous ou esl votre ami, Edouard ? Oui, il est a Burlington, chez un de ses cou- sins. Va-t-il venir ici bientot ? Je ne peux pas repondre a votre question ; car, je ne sais pas quand il va venir ici. Do you wish me anything? I wish you a good morning. What does the young Prussian wish me ? He wishes you a good evening. Where are the children? They are at your father's. Why are they there? To wish him much pleasure. Has the German black eyes? No, he has blue eyes. Who has black eyes? The Spa- niards, Italians, and Turks have black eyes. Has not that Greek small feet, a large forehead, and a big nose ? Yes, he has small feet, a large forehead, but he has not at all a big nose. Do you listen to me? I do, with much pleasure. Does the lawyer lister 1 to the minister? He does listen to him, in order to answer him (reply to him.} Are you going to listen to him ? No, I am going to study my exercise instead of listening to him. I do not wish to know what he is going to say. Have you your cousin's note ? To oe sure I have it. Have you to answer it immediately? Yes, I have to answer it immediately. Are you answering it now * Yes ! am ; but my eyes are sore, and I cannot answer it very well. Answer it ( 150, Art. 8) for me; will you? With pleasure, if ! jan. Tell me what I have to write. Tell him first why I do nol answer, and then tell him that I send him his round hat, his blue coat, hid black satin vest, his black velvet shoes, his French fan, his [34 TWENT1- SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) English gun, and several other articles, by (par) one o-f my frieucla who goes where he is. Listen to what the professor says, instead of speaking. Now, 1 listen to what he says. Is the doctor a man of merit? Listen to him, and then you can say whether (if, si) he is a man of merit. Do the scholars listen to their English teacher ? Those who are ffood, listen to him ; the bad ones play instead of listening. Ara pour gloves French 1 ? Yes, they are French gloves. (3. 39.) Do you give me English or German paper? I give you neithei English (repeat papier) nor German paper; but I give you some fine French paper. Do you read Spanish well? ($ 170.) I do not read Spanish well, but German. What book is the soldier reading ? He is reading a pretty French book.: Do the sailors drink tea or coffee, in the morning? Some take coffee, others drink tea. What do yon drink, in the evening? I take tea, then. You take coffee in the morning; do you not? No, I take tea in the morning, also. Do you drink no coffee ? No, I do not drink it any more. Who lakes chocolate ? The Spaniards and Italians drink a great deal of it. Do the French take it also ? They take some, but not so much as the others. Do the Turks take tea, chocolate, or coffee ? They take neither tea nor chocolate, but they are very fond of coffee. Why so ? Then. How goes it ? (First rate.) Is it possible ? It is possible. It is true, however. Is it true ? la it not true ? It is not true. t Pourquoi done ? done. Commentva? Celavabien,tres-bien, Est-il possible ? C'est possible. C'est vrai, cependant. Est-ce vrai I N'est-ce pas vrai? Ce n'est pis vrai. TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 27th. Vingt-se ptieme Le$on, 27me YOCABULALRE. Ire Section. To show. I show, do show, am showing. He does not show. Dost thou show ? Show him the apartment. To show something to some one, To show one something. Do you show me your gun ? I do. What do you show the man ? I show him my fine clothes. Tobacco. Tobacco, (for smoking.) Montr er, 1. Faire* voir. Je fais voir. Je montre. II ne fait pas voir. II ne montre p.\& Fais-tu voir ? Montres-tu ? tMontrez-lui > 1'appartement. \Faites-lui voirl ($ 150.) I Montrer > quelque chose \ Faire voirj a quelqu'un. Me faites-vous voir votre fusil ? Je vous le fais voir, (le montre.) Que faites-vous voir a 1'homme f Je lui montre mes beaux habit*. Du tabac. Du tabac a fimer , TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON 135 Snufl: To smoke. To snuff', take snuff. Do vou smoke or take snuff? I neither smoke nor snuff. You chew ; do you not ? I neither smoke, snuff, nor chew. Is it possible ! It is wonderful ! To chew. Do not chew, (imperat.) The gardener. This valet. Thatconcert. To the concert of Mr. . To intend, to intend to. Do you also intend to go to the ball ? I intend to go to it, (going there.) To know, to know how, (bef. a verb.) Dost thou know? Dost thou not know? Does the child know ? He does not. To swim. Swimming. Do you know how to swim ? Can you swim ? Does he read ? He does not know how. A cigar. A Spanish cigar. To think of, [meaning, what is your opinion of.] What do you think Du tabac en poudre, (a priscr.) Fumer,!. Prendre* dutabaconp"istr Fumez-vous ou prisez-vous ? Je ne furne ni ne prise. ($ 162, A. 6. Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas ? Je ne fume, ni ne prise, ni ne chique Est-il possible! C'est extraordinaire' Chiquer, 1. Ne chiquez pas. Lc jardinier. Ce valet-ci. Ce concert-la. Au concert de M. . , Compter, 1, (sans prepos.) Comptez-vous aussi aller au bal ? Je cot; pte y aller. Savoir,* 3. ($ 144, sans pre'pos.) Sais-tu ? Ne sais-tu pas ? L'enfant sait-il ? II ne sail pas. Nager, 1. Nageant. $ ' H, R. 2.) > Savez-vous nager ? Lit-il ? II ne sait pas lire. Un cigare. Un cigare espagnol. Penser, 1, de . . . . Que pensez-vous du temps ? of the weather ? VlNGT-SEPTIEME Tfl^ME. Ire SeC. N'oubliez pas d'dcrire la date en Franc,ais. Bon soir, Michel, comment vous portez-vous aujourd'hui? Je me porte tres-bien, merci. Et vous, Mr., comment va? Cela va bien, je vous remercie. Vous voyez que je fume un cigare espa- gnol, en voulez-vous un? Non, je vous suis bien oblige ; mais je nc fume plus. Vous chiquez, n'est-ce pas ? Non, je ne chique pas. Est-il possible ! Vous ne fumez ni ne chiquez ! C'est extraordi- naire ! N'est-ce pas? Oui, en yerite ! Mais vous prisez? Non, je ne prise pas. Quo: ! Vous ne chiquez, ni ne fumez, ni ne prisez ? Est-il possible ! C'est possible. Ce que je vous dis est vrai. Mais, pourquoi est-ce extraordinaire ? Parce que tout le monde fume ou prise ou chique. Non pas tout-a-fait. Que pensez- vous du temps ? Je pense qu'il est superbe. Quoi ! Ne fait-il paa j-op chaud pour vous? Pour moi? Non, en verite. What does your father want? He wants some tobacco. Will you go for some? I will go for some. Vvhat tobacco does he wantl He wants some snuff. Do you want tobacco, (for smoking?) I do not want any; I do not smoke. Do you show me anything? you gold ribbons, (des rubans d'or.) Doe? your father shov 136 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) his gun to my brother? He does show it him. Does he show hint his beautiful birds'? He does. Does the Frenchman smoke? He does. Do you go to the ball? I go to the theatre instead of going to the ball. Does the gardener go into the garden? He goes to the market instead of going into the garden. Do yon send your valet to the tailor? I send him to the shoemaker instead of sending him to the tailor. Does your brother intend to go to the ball this eve ning? He does not intend to go to the ball, but to the concert. When do you intend to go to the concert? I intend to go there this evening. At what o'clock? At a quarter past ten. Do you go foi my son ? I do go for him. Where is he ? He is in the counting- house. Do you find the gardener whom you are looking for? I do. Do your sons find the gardeners whom they are looking for? They do not. Do your friends intend to go to the theatre ? They do. When do they intend to go thither? They intend to go thither to-morrow. At what o'clock ? At half past seven. What does the merchant wish to sell you ? He wishes to sell me some pocket-books. Do you intend to buy some? I will not. Dost thou know anything? I do not know anything. What does your little brother know ? He knows how to read and to write. Does he know French? He does not. Do you know German ? I do. Do your brothers know Greek? They do not, but they intend to study it. Do you know English? J do not, but intend to learn it. Do my children know how to read Italian ? They know how to read, but not (mat's non) how to speak it. Do you know how to swim? I do not know how to swim, but how to play. Does your son know how to make coats ? He doea not know how to make any; he is no tailor. Is he a merchant 1 He is not, (ne Vest pas.) What is he ? He is a physician. We are well. We thank you. i Nous nous portons bien. Nous voui remercions. VOCABULAIKE. 2de Section. To conduct, conducting. I conduct, thou conductest, he con- ducts. Conduct htm to his uncle's house. Conduct me there also. I will, willingly, with pleasure. To extinguish, put out, extinguishing. Do you extinguish (put out) the fire ? I do not put it out. Put it out. He extinguishes it. Thou puttest it out. To light, to kindle, to fire. Conduire* 4. Conduisant, Je conduis, tt conduis, il conduit. Conduisez-le choz son oncle Conduisez-y-moi aussi ($ 58.) Volon tiers. Etei?idre,*4, eteignant. Eteignez-vous le feu ? Je ne 1'cteins pas. Eteignez-le. II Peteint. Tu I'eteins. Allumer, 1. The gas. This burner. Which / Le gaz. Ce bec-ci. Quel bee f burner ? ' TVP ENTT-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 137 How many burners do you light ? A. single gas burner is enough. Put out this burner, and light up the other. Often. As often as you. ($ 170) A.S often as I. As often as we, thou. Do you often go to the wharf? As often as he. As often as they. As goid as he, we, they, I, thou. ftfot so often. Less often. Do you frequently see my uncle? I do not see him so often as you. Not so often as I, as they. Oftener, more often. Often enough. Oftcner than we, than they. Too often. Does he come too often ? r believe he comes too often. To count. To count in French. The number. The numbers. Do you know this number in French ? What number ? This, 76. To pronounce. Can you pronounce my name? I can try. Well, try. VALUE. Can I pronounce it ? Yes, pretty well. Combien de bees allumez-voua ? Un seul bee de gaz est assez. teignez ce bec-ci et allumez 1'aatru Souvent. Aussi souvent que vous, Aussi souvent que moi, quo nous que toi. Allez-vous souvent au quai ? Aussi souvent que lui, qu'eux. Aussi bon que lui, nous, eux, moi, ton Mains souvent. Voyez-vous souvent mon oncle ? Je le vois moins souvent que vous. Moins souvent que moi, qu'eux. Plus souvent. Assez souvent. Plus souvent que nous, qu'eux. Trop souvent. Vient-il trop souvent t Je crois qu'il vient trop souvent. Compter. Compter en Franais.' Le nombre. Lcs nombres. Savez- vous ce nombre-ci en Fran^ais! Quel nombre ? Celui-ci. $ 38.) Prononcer, 1. ($ 144, R. 1.) tSavez-vous prononcer mon nnm ? Je puis essayer. Eh bien ! easayez. Puis-je le prononcer ? Oui, assez bien. VlNGT-SEPTIEME THEME. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas d'dcrire la date ici, en Franc.ais. Bon jour. Messieurs, comment vous portez-vous ? Nous nous per- ions bien, excepte M. le Blanc, qui n'est pas ici. Va-t-il venir? Non, il ne vient pas aujourd'hui. N'est-il pas assez bien pour venir "? Non, il rrest pas bien du tout. Qu'a-t-il ? Je ne saw pas ; et le Doc- f eur ne le sait pas mieux que moi, du moins, je le crois. Lui donne- t-ii quelque chose a prendre ? II lui donne quelque chose. Je suis bien aise, Messieurs, d'apprendre que vous vous portez bien. Nous vous remcrcions. Le theme que vous avez est-il difficile ? Moi, je le trouve difficile ; mais ces trois messieurs ne le trouvent pas diffi- cile. C'est vrai, au contraire nous le trouvons aise. Que trouvez-vous difficile ? Je ne peux pas vous le dire en Francais. Vous pouvez 1 The teacher is invited to make the pupils count in French, by the Tninute slowly at first ; but when they pronounce the numbers well and legularly, let them count as fast as they can ; not for the mere satisfaction of knowing whether they can count 150 or 170 in a minute, but to give eaat uid readiness to their utterance. Pupils are generally fond of this exercise {38 TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (Z.) yssayer, ri'est-ce pas? Oui,, sans doute. Ehbien ! essayez. V T jSci> tiers. Nous avons beaucoup de new mots. Ne savez-vous pas le Francais de: new? Je ne le sais pas. Ces autres messieurs le savent-ils? Moi, je le sais. Nous, nous ne le savons pas. Je vais vous le dire, c'est nouvcait. Pouv r ez-vous 1'ecrire ? Moi, non moi, oui n, o, u. v, e. a, u. Comment formez-vcus le pluriel ? Avec x n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est vrai, vous avez raison. Do you wish to drink some cider? I wish to drink some wine: hae you got any? No, I have none, but I will send for some. Has not your uncle got some excellent? Yes, he has. Conduct me to his house, then. I will, or willingly. Now ? No, not now, but very soon. Do you know how to make tea? I know how to make it; but I cannot make coffee. Who knows how to make chocolate-? I; it is not difficult. Where is your father's dentist going to? He is going nowhere. He remains at home to fix the teeth of his uncle. Dost thou conduct anybody I I conduct no- body. And you, whom do you conduct ? I conduct my son's valet. Where are you conducting him ? I conduct him to the lawyer's office, to show him where it is. Does your valet conduct this German boy? He does. Where to? He conducts him into the garden to speak to our old German gardener. Does yciur old German gardenei snuff? No, but he smokes. Does he work well ? Yes, he does, for ne cannot talk (parler a) with the other servants ; and he has to work. Do we conduct any one ? We conduct our children. Where are you * children conducting their uncle ? They are conducting him to the museum, to show it to him. Conduct me there also. Come with us. Aie they going to show him the theatre? No, they have no time to show it to him to-day ; they have time only to show him the museum. Can you pronounce the French of : to extinguish? I believe I can. Let us see, (Voyons, 150, Art. 2.) Try. Pronounce it is it right ? Not quite. Try it again is it better ? It is right now. I am very glad of it, for it is a difficult word. The imperative is not easy. Do you know it? Yes, I do. P onounco it, if you please. With pleasure. . ... is it right? Not quite. Pro- nounce the gn like gn } in the English word mignonette, gne That is better. Try it again That's right now. Can you count a little in French? Not much, but I intend to learn. Will you count? Willingly. Begin. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 No, 55, 6, 7, 8. No ; do not pronounce the h of /itm, say: uit. Uit, 9, 10, 11, 12, &c. (Let the teacher correct, in French, the mistakes as they occur, anc note down the number counted in a minute, whenever this exerci& takes place.) ^teiguez-vous le feu? T e ne Peteins pas, le cuisinier 1'eteint TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. ( /.) 130 Qui allume le feu le matin? Le cuisinier allume son feu, et nion valet allume le mien. Qui allume celui de votre oncle et de votre cousin ? Us n'ont pas de feu dans leurs appartements, parce qu'ilg n'y restent pas. Ou restent-ils? Ils sont avec nous dans le salon nnand Us sont a la maison. Sortent-ils souvent ? Oui, tres-souvent. Vont-ils souvent a Fail-mount? Non. pas tres-souvent. Pourquoi y vont-ils? Ils y vont pour voir la machine hydraulique, (the watei works.) Vont-ils plus souvent au musee? Oui, ils y vont plus sou- vent. Sortons-nons aussi souvent que nos voisins a gauche ? Nous eortons moins souvent qu'eux. L'epicier va-t-il aussi souvent au marche que mon jardinier ? Je crois qu'il y va aussi souvent. Al- lumez-vous le gaz tous les jours'? Oui, nous 1'allumons tous les Boirs. A quelle heure votre domestique Fallume-t-n"? A present, il allume le premier bee a sept heures et demie et les autres plus tard. A quelle heure l'eteint-il? II Feteint a dix heures et demie dans le salon, et dans nos appartements, nous Feteignons a onze heures ou a onze heures et demie. At the beginning (commencement) of the exercise. Unwholesome. It is unwholesome weather. Damp, humid. How goes the tooth- ache ? Since when ? It is better. Excepted. Much obliged. Au commencement du theme. Malsain. C'est un temps ma/sain. Humide. Comment va le mal da dents? Depuis quand ? II va mieux. Excepte". Bien oblige. TWENTY -EIGHTH LESSON, 28th. Vingt-huitieme Le$m, 28me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Obs. 63. Do and AM, when used to interrogate, in the present tense, may be rendered by EST-CE QUE, which must be used with the first person sin- gular, of those verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would pro- duce an unpleasant or a difficult sound.' (Dir. 8.) Do 1 wish ? Am I willing ? I Est-ce que je veux ? Amiable? Can I? I Est-ce quo je peux? Am I doing ? Do I do ? I Est-ce que je fais ? Wha*. am I doing ? I Qu'est-ce que je fais ? 1 Verbs whose first person singular forms Dnly Jne syllable, as: je sens, I feel ; je prends. I take ; je tends, I tend; jefonds, I melt: or whose lost syllable sounds like je, such as : je mange, I eat ; je venge, 1 revenge ; jt , 1 range ; je tonge, I dream : and others, such as : j'unis, I imito ; jt , J permit ; j'o/re, I offer ; &c., &c. 140 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) What do I say ? Where am I going to ? To whom do I speak ? Am I going ? 4m I coming ? You are. Are fou coming ? Do you tell or say 1 I do say or tell. He says. He docs not say. What does he not say? What do we not say ? Qu'est-ce que je dis ? Ou est-ce que je vaie ? A qui est-ce que je parle ? Est-ce que je vais ? Est-ce que je viens ? Vous venez. Est-ce que vous venoz Dites-vous ? Est-ce quu vous dites I Je dis. II dit. II ne dit pas. Qu'est-ce qu'ii D3 dit pas ? Qu'est-ce que nous ne disons past Obs. 64. Some verbs, however, ending in e mute in the first person sin- gular, present tense, may be used interrogatively in that person, but then they change e mute into e with the acute accent, followed by je. Do I speak ? Do I love ? Are you acquainted with that man ? [ am not at all acquainted with him. Is your brother acquainted with him ? He is weR acquainted with him. Do you drink cider ? I begin to drink cider, but my brother drinks milk. To begin to (commence) beginning. I begin to like it. Does he begin to study well ? I begin to be cold to be warm He begins to be ashamed sleepy. We commence to be hungry and thirsty. Badly, awkwardly. ($ 170.) Does your uncle speak English well ? He speaks it badly. They both write it well. A minute. In a few minutes. Parle-je ? (pas si bon one) Est-ce que je parle ? Aime-je ? Est-ce que j'aime ? Connaissez-vous cet homme ? Je ne le connais pas du tout. Votre frere le connait-il? II le connait beaucoup. Buvez-vous du cidre ? Je commence a boire du cidre, mail mon frere boit du lait. Commencer a, commenc.ant. Je commence a 1'aimer. (a av. 1'inlj Commence-t-il a bien etudier ? Je commence a avoir froid chaud- II commence a avoir honte sommeil. Nous commen9ons a avoir faim et soif. ($ 144. R. 1.) Mal tres-mal plus mal trop mal. Votre oncle parle-t-il bien Anglais? II le parle mal. Us 1'ecrivent bien 1'un et 1'autre. Une minute, (fern.) Dans quelques minutes. Ire Sec. Ecrivez le quantieme au commencement (at the beginning) du themo. Que pensez-vous du temps'? Nous Je trouvons Ires-deszgrcable. fl est froid et humide. Je ne le trouve pas froid ; mais tres-humic.e. C'est un temps malsain. Tres-malsain, en verite. II n'est pas bon pour ceux qui ont des rhumes. Non, et je sris fache de vo\is dire que Louis en a un tres-mauvais. Depuis quand? Depnia mercredi. J 7 ai Phonneur de vous souhaiter le bonsoir. Commenl va le mal de dents'? II va mieux, >5ien oblige. J'en suis bien aisc, TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (1.) 141 Comment se porte-t-on chez le gen6ral ? Tout le monde s'y porta bicn, excepte le valet irlandais. Qu'a-t-il ? Nous ne savons pas ce que c'est. Est-il trts-mal? Oui, il est oblige de rester dans son lit. Depuis quand est-il malade ? Depuis plusieurs jours. Cependant le Dr. croit qu'il est un peu mieux. Quand est-il mieux ; le ma- fin ou le soir ? II est mieux a midi et plus mal le soil*. Qu'a Henri ? II a mal a un coude. A quel ? Au droit ou au gauche ? Je crois que c'est au gauche ; mais je n'en suis pas stir. Do I read well ? You do. Do I speak pretty well ? You do. Does my little brother speak French well? He does. How does he write German ? He writes it badly. V/ho writes it well ? Oui young minister does. Does he write it as well as the Svv.'ss dentist 1 They both write it well, very well. I do not know who writes the best. Do we speak badly 1 You do not. Do I drink too much . You do. Am I able to make hats ? You are not ; you are not a hatter. Am I able to write a note ? You are. Am I doing my exercise well"? You are. What am I doing? You are doing e.xercises. What is my brother doing 1 ? He is doing nothing. What do I say 1 ? You say nothing. Do I begin to speak? You do begin to speak. Do I begin to speak well? You do not begin to speak well, (a bien parler,} but to read well, (mais d bien lire.} Where am I going to? You are going to your friend's. Is he at ho-ne ? Do I know ? Am I able to speak as often as the son of our neighbor ? He is able to speak oftener than you. Can I work as much as he ? You cannot. Do I read as often as you ? You do not, but you speak oftener than I. Do I speak as well (aussi bien) as you? You do not speak as well as I. Do I go to your house, or do you come to mine? You come to mine, and I go to 3 ours. When do you come to mine? Every morning, at half past six. Do you know the Russian whom I know ? I do not know the one you know, but I know another. Do you drink as much cider as wine ? I drink less of the latter than of the former. Does tho Pole drink as much as the Russian? He drinks just as much. Do the Germans drink as jnuch as the Poles? The latter drink more lhan the former. Dost thou receive anything? I do. What dosl thou receive? I receive some money. Does your friend receive books? He does. What do we receive? We receive some cider. Do the Poles receive tobacco ? They do. From whom (de qu.i) lo the Spaniards receive money? They receive some from tho (des) English, and from the (des) French. Comptez-vous tous les jours en Francais? Oui, nous comptona tf'aimez-vous pas a compter? (Let the pupil give his or her o\vr 142 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) answer.) Combien comptez-vous dans une minute 'a minute) 1 jtf compte 125. Et vous? Moi, je ne compte pas tant. Je ne eoinpte que 98. Et vous, et votre cousin Armand? Nous comptons 128 Est-ce plus que lui? Oui, c'est plus. Combien de plus? Trois de plus. (30 1 .) C'est vrai, /ons avez raison. Et vous, combien comp- tez-vous de moms qu'euxl Je compte trois de moins. Combien de plus que lui? Je compte 27 de plus que lui. C'est beaucoup n'est-ce pas? C'est assez, du moins. A degree, 32, zero, 75, 100, 212. Thank God. Ur degre, 32 C , ze*ro, 75, 100, Dieu merci. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Avant, (de, avant un infinitil.j Parlez-vous avant rf'ecouter ? J'ecoute avant de repo.idre. 06s. 65. As speak and listen have you for nominative, dispense with the second you, and use the infinitive mood after the preposition. (Rule 3.) Before, (previous to.) (R. 1.) Do you speak before you listen ? J Lsten before I answer. he Does he go to market before breakfasts ? To breakfast. To eai breakfast. He goes (there) before he writes. Do you take off your stockings be- fore you take off your shoes ? To depart, set out, start ; departing. When do you intend to depart ? I set out to-morrow for Paris. I depart, thou startest, he sets out. Do they go to see their uncle before they start for Charleston? They do. To wet, to moisten, to damp, wetting. Wet, damp, (adjectives.) Are your shoes wet ? Yes, they are quite wet. Va-t-il au marche avant de dejeuner ! K'ejeuner, 1. II y va avant d'ecrire. Otez-vous vos bas avant d'oter vos souliers ? Partir,* 2'^partant. Quand comptez-vous partir ? Je pars demain pour Paris. Jepars, tu pars, il part. Vont-ils voir leur oncle avant de par- tir pour Charleston ? Us y vont. Mouiller, 1. Mouillant. Mouille, (sing.) Mouilles, (plur.) Vos souliers sont-ils mouilles ? Oui, ils sont tout mouilles. Obs. 66. Tout, quite, bein an s. To dry, to get to dry. I dry, thou driest, be dries. R. 5.) Dry your shoes. an adverb is invariable, that is, does not tak 144, Take a seat near the fire and dry your shoes and feet. Tt is very warm ; very cold. r K use. Much, commonly, greatly, used. 41raoet, all, always, too much. Seche:,!. P'aire secher. Je seche, tu seches, il sechc. Sechez vos souliers (better) fa^f? secher, &c. Prenez un siege pres du feu, ct fait.i secher vos souliers et vos picds. II fait grand chaud ; grand f raid. En usage. En grand usage. Pr-sque, presque tout, toujours, trcp TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.' (2.) 143 YiNGT-HuiTiiiME TufijiE. 2de Sec. crivez le jour du mois au commencement du theme. Mr., nous vous souhaitons le bonjour, et nous esperons que vou* trous portez bien. Je vous suis bien oblige. Messieurs, et je vois avec plaisii qu-e vous avez 1'air de vous biea porter. Nous nous portona bien, Dicu mcrci, (thank God,) mais nous avons^grand chaud, (very warm.) Je le crois, car, il fait grand chaud. A quel degre est le tl&rmometre? Le mien est a 80; mais celui du voisin est a 82^. Vo:is parlez da thermometre de Fahrenheit, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, cai c'est ici le seul en grand usage. ^Si ce temps continue je ne peux pas rester ici. Ou allez-vous ? A Cape May. Quand partez-vous ? Je pars mardi on jeudi. Partez-vous seul ? Non ; je pars avec mon cousin. Pourquoi part-il avec vous ? Parce qu'il est malade. Qu'a t-il ? II a peur d'avoir le tic douloureux. Le tic douloureux ! Je BUIS bien fache de 1'apprendre. Nous en sommes tous faches. Je le crois. Vos souliers sont-ils mouilles? Je crois que non. S'ils 1 sont, je peux vous en preter d'autres, et vous pouvez faire secher let, votres. Non, merci. Vous etes bien bon. II est 8 heures et Louis n r est pas encore ici. Ce matin il n'est pas ponctuel comme a 1'ordi naire. Mon habit est tout mouille et mon gilet aussi. Changez les et faites-les secher. Ou puis -je les faire secher? Donnez-les au domestique pour les mettre pres du feu. Les souliers et les bas de ce petit enfant sont mouillea. Jean, otez-les et faites-les secher; car le pauvre enfant commence a avoir froid. Oui, Mile. Do I receive as much Spanish money as American ? You receive more of the laiter than of the former. Do I receive as many people (autant de monde) as the Doctor ? You do. Who receives more than he ? more than we 1 The apothecary does. From whom (de qui) do your children receive books'? They receive some from me, (de moi,) and from their friends. Do the English receive as much Turkish as American cotton ? They receive more American than Turkish cotton. Our New Orleans merchants receive more French than English cloth, do they not? I believe they do. What gloves do we receive 1 ? We receive French gloves. How many books does your neighbor lend you 1 ? He lends me three more. (30 1 .) When does the foreigner intend to depart? He intends to depart to-day. Depart with him, can you not? Can I not? No, indeed and you know very well that I am not ready. But you can soo- be ready. Do you think so? (le?) To be sure I do. Does tk Swede depart soon ? He departs in a few minutes Does he depar alone? No, he takes a valet with him, because he does not spaai English well enough to go alone. He is right.-- Dost thou set :KI; 144 TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) to-morrow? Dost thou intend to go with me? No, for we Jo net intend to depart before 10 days. Then I have to bid you adieu. Do the Clintons (Les Clinton, ($ 140, Art. 5) answer you imme- diately when you write to them? They usually answer me imme- diately, when they are not sick. Well ; write to them to know if I can go to their house on Saturday, and tell them to answer directly. Are you not going to read the dentists' note before you answer it? Yes, I am reading it now. Ah ! pardon me, (pardonner.) Does this Irish servant of yours (votre domestique irlanuais, 108) sweep your apartment before he makes your bed? No, he makes the bed before he sweeps the room. Dost thou drink before thou goest out ? I do. Do you like to go to market before you eat breakfast ? I do not, for I am almost always sick when I do it. Henry, put on your shoes and stockings. No, indeed, I intend to put on my stockings before I put on my shoes. Dost thou read first and translate after- wards? Yes, T do so; but I translate the exercise first, and write it afterwards. You do well; that is right. Do you gc to the Pole's house before you breakfast? Yes, I do. At what o'clock do your children breakfast ? They breakfast at seven o'clock. Do you take snuff before breakfasting? No, but I smoke after breakfast. Does your son smoke also after breakfast? He does not smoke at all, and I am glad of it. Does he chew or snuff? No, he does neither. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON, 29th. Vingt-neuvieme Legon, 29me VOCABTTLAIRE. Ire Section. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. The French have two kinds of comparison ; that of equality, formed by autant de before nouns, and aussi, before adjectives or adverbs, and qut, after them ; (16 1 , 27 2 .) and that of inequality, formed by plus or mains, before, and que after the same parts of speech. The superlative is formed by prefixing to the comparative, not only the definite article le, les, but any of those which we have called articles ($ 1), man, mes, &c. ce, cet, ccs. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. Great, greater, the greatest. Small, smaller, my smallest. Rich, richer, these richest. Poor, poorer, my poorest. Learnpd, more learned, the most learned. Quickly, quicker, the quickest. Often, more often, most often Positif. Comparatif. Superlatif. Grand, plus grand, le plus grand. Petit, plus petit, mon plus petit. Riches, plus riches, cesplus riches, Pauvres, pluspauvres, mes plus pau vres. Savant, plus savant, le plus savant Vite, plus vite, le plus vite. Souvent, plussouvent.le plus sou- vent. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) n IB book is small, that is smaller, and this is the smallest of all. This hat is large, but that is larger. Ie yoor hat as large as mine ? ft ie larger than yours. It is not so large as yours. B^lky, less bulky, the least bulky. Fine, less fine, the least fine. Sbvdy, not so slowly, the least slowly. Good, not so good, the least good. Are our neighbor's children as good as ours ? (good is sage when applied to children.) They are better than ours. 1 hey are not so good as ours, they are the least good of all. Ce livre-ci est petit, celui-la est plu* petit, et celui-ci est Ie plus petit de tous. Ce chapeau-ci est grand, mais colui la est plus grand. Votre chapeau est-il aussi grand que Ie mien ? II est plus grand que Ie voiro. II est moins grand que Ie votre. Gros, moins gros, Ie moins groa. Beau, moins beau, Ie moins beau. Lentement, moins lentement, Ie moins lentement. Sage, moins sage, Ie moins sage. Les enfants de notre voisin sont-ila aussi sages que les notres ? Us sont plus sages que les notres. Us sont moins sages que les notret), ce sont les moins sages de tous. Obs. 67. To express the absolute superlative, that is, the highest degree^ without comparison, the French, like the English, use one of the adverbs, tres, fort, bien, very; extrememeut, extremely ; iitfiniment, infinitely. Un tres-beau sofa. De trea-beaux sofas. Un tres-joli couteau. A very fine sofa. Very fine sofas. A very pretty knife. Very well. To be used to .... To be used to it. Why do you speak more in English than in French ? Because we are used to it. (06s. 48.) What are they used to take in he morning anu evening ? They are used to take coffee in the morning and tea in the evening. What am I used to ? He is not yet used to it. Tres-bien, fort bien. Etre accoutume a .... Y etre accoutume". ($ 50.) Pourquoi par lez- vous plus en Angluia qu'en Franc.ais ? Parce que nous y sommes accou- tume's. Que sont-ils accoutumes a prendio Ie matin et Ie soir ? Us sont accoutumds a prendre du cafe, Ie matin, et du the, Ie soir. A quoi est-ce que je suis accoutume ? II n'y est pas encore accoutume'. VlNQT-NEUVlfcME TfifiME. Ire See. Mettez Ie quantieme du mois ici en Francois. FaCies-nous des questions anjourd'hui, s'il vous plait. Volonticrb Qael temps fait-il? Qui peut me repondre ? Nous pouvons tone youa repondre. Commencez, M. Legris. Vous voule/ savoir quo 1 nemps il fait? Oui, M., s'il vous plait. Je vais votis Ie dire avea prand plaisir, Ie plus grand plaisirdu monde. Dites-le done, ("then.) 13 140 TWENTY -NINTH LESSON. (A./ Laisaez-moi voir si j'ai le Francais de unwholesome. Oh ! oui; nou I'avons. Alors, il fait un temps humide et malsa'm. Oui, vous avez raison, il fait un temps humide et malsain ; depuis deux on trois jours. N'est-ce pas extraordinaire? Si fait; c'est extraordi- naire, car le temps change tres-souvent. Mais il ne fait pas froid. An contraire, il fait chaud. II fait presque toujours chaud quand il fait humide, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, sans doute. Ce temps huniido r _i'est pas bon pour le rhume du petit Robert, qu en pensez-voiia 1 .ft; pense que non, et j'en suis fache, car c'est un bon petit garcori Comment se porte le frere du docteur? II se porte tres-bien a pre- eent. Et comment va le vieux cuisinier du general? II va mal : II est presque toujours malade, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, mais ce n'est pa extraordinaire, car il est tres-vieux. Are you taller (grand) than I ? I am taller than you. Is you* young brother taller than you? No, but I believe that he is just as tall. Is thy leather hat as bad as my fathers? It is better, but not so black as his. Ais the clothes (les habits) of the Italians as fine as those of the Irish ? They are finer, but not so good. Who makea the finest gloves'* The French, make them. Who makes the finest cloth? The French and Spanish do. Who has the finest norses? Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine, but those of out friends are the finest of all. Why do the French take wine at breakfast? Because they are used to it. See, those poor children have neither shoes nor stockings; are they not cold ? No, indeed! they are used to it. Am I used to write quick or slow? You are used to write slowly; but your cousin is used to write very quick. Who is more learned than this old Prussian'? I do not know wlio i? more learned than he. Is the minister more learned than the druggist? Yes, he is more learned than the druggist; but the law- yer is the mo3t learned of all. Who is the richest merchant here? Mr. is the richest. Do wo read more books than tho Dutch ? We read more (of them) than they, but the Prussians read (of them) more than we, and the Russians read the least, (le moins.) Hast thou a finer garden than that of our physician ? I have a liner one than he. Have the Americans a finer telegraph than the nther nations ? They have the finest of all. Are the shawls of this merchant larger and finer than those of that one ? They are larger, but not so fine. Have we as fine children as our neighbors'? We have finer ones. Is the weather as bad as yesterday? No, it is no! BO bad ; but it is warmer, and I am not sorry for it. I believe it, foi I know that you like the heat. Do the French speak more quickly than the English, Irish, Scots, and other nations? I believe not Some (quelques uns) speas quickly, but others speak slowly ($ 38.1 TWENTT-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 147 -Are youi clothes as wet as mine or his ? Yours are more we> than mine, but his are not wet at all. Do you depart for Washing- ton, soon? I start lo-rcorrow. Do you go alone? No, cousin William starts with me. When do you set out? We set out at 3 o'clock. George, go for some cigars; these gentlemen want some to smoke. Yes, Sir: but before going, I have to put my shoes on. They are wet, and they are near the fire to dry. Which of these two children is the better? (sage?) The one (N. pa. 43) who studies '& belter than the one who plays. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Irregular Adjectives. better, my best, worse, the worst. Good, Bad, Small, little, less, the least. Irregular Adverbs. Well, better, the best. Bad, worse, the worst. Little, less, the least. Much, more, the most. Adjectifslrrtguliers. Bon, neilleur, mon meilleur. Mauvais, pire, le pire. Petit, moindre, In moindre. Adverbes Irregvliers. Bien, mieux, le mieux. e pis. Mai, pis. Peu, moins, le moins. Beaucoup,plus, le plus. Obs. 68. We may with equal correctness say : plus mauvais, plug mal plus petit, but never plus bon, plus bicn, plus peu. Obs. 69. Never use pire immediately before a noun. Do not say : ur pire chien ; but, un plus mauvais chien. Votre chien est pireque celui-ci is correct, but: plus mauvais, is to be preferred. Wliose, (to wliom ?) ($ 109.J Wliose hat is this ? It is. It is mine hers yours. It is my uncle's d'ctionary, It is the dictionary of my uncle. It is my uncie's. Whoso kid gloves are those ? They are oars- 'hine theirs. ($ 39.) They arc 'he ch p !ti.en's cloaks. Who has the besi rice ? Whose lice is tr Qui a le meilleur riz ? f he grocer has it. Jt is the grocer'3. | L'epicier 1'a. C'est celui de 1' Spicier Who has the smallest feet ? Whose tee* arc ihe smallest ? Miss C. has the smai.cst. Miss C.'s are. Thai of rny .arher is the *:nest. Whose ribbon /s the hnndeomer, you/s or min, ? Yours is, (so left out.; > Qui a les plus petits pieds ? Mile. C. a les plus petits. Ce sont ceux de Mile. C. Celui de mon pere est le plus baao. Quel ruban est le plus beau ? L votre ou le mien ? Le vbtit Test. Obs. 70, So, in '-'m.iar se.uences, whether expressed or not, is re iderej French, by fc or V . TWENTY-NINTH LESSC N (2.) Ce gargon lit-il micux quo I'homme* II le fait. II ne le fait pas. Ce grain-ci est-il meilleur que te dernier ? I! Test. II est beaucoup meilleur. Les Suedois ecriven k ils moins que les Polonais ? Ils ecrivent moins que les autre? nations. Qui fait le plus d' argent ? Le bou langer, le boucher, ou le laitier ? Ils en font tous beaucoup. Votre jardinier est-il bon ? II I'est, mais son cousin ne i'est pas Voici. Le voici. En voici. Ou sont les gros couteauz ? Les voici. . 2de Sec. Does that boy read better than the man? He does so. He does not (do so). Is this grain better than the last ? ft is. It is much better. Do the Swedes write less than the Polea ? They writs less than the other na- tions. Who makes most money ? The baker, tha butcher, or the milkman ? f hey all make a great deal. (s your gardener good, or a good one ? He is, but his cousin is not. Here is. Here he is or it is. Here is some. Where are the big knives ? Here they are. VlNGT-NEUVIEME Ici, n'oubliez pas de mettre le quantierne, en Frangais. Yous avez Fair d'avoir froid. Fait-il froid dehors? Oui, il fait grand froid. A quel degre est le thermometre ? Je n'ai pas de ther mometre; je ne sais pas a quel degre il est. Mais j'ai froid, QO, { 38, N. 6,) je le sais. Comment se porte le medecin ? II se porte plus mal. Son rhume est-il pire? Oui, il I'est. Quelqu'un a-t-i mal de tete ? Moi, je Fai un peu avez-vous quelque chose a me don- ner? Oui, j'ai quelque chose qui est tres-bon pour le mal de tete. Donnez-le-moi. Je Fai dans mon portefeuille. Laissez-moi le cher cher. Tres-bien, cherchez-le et donnez-le-moi. Je Fai a present. Le voici. Prer.ez-5. Je, Fai. Lisez le papier pom savoir comment le preparer (to prepare) et le prendre. Je vous suis bien oblige. Je vais le lire tout de suite pour le preparer et le prendre. Preparez-le bien. Je vais essayer. Est-ce difficile a preparer? Non, ce n'est pas difficile a preparer. Adieu : je vais Farranger. Adieu, adieu. Whose big book is this? It is mine. Whose hat is that? It is my father's. Is your baker good ? (or a good one ?) He is good, but yours is better ; and that of the Prussian is the best of all our bakers. Take some pretty velvet shoes. I. have very pretty ones, but my brother has still prettier ones than I. From w r hom (de qui) does he receive them ? He receives them from his best friend in Paris. Is your wine as good as mine? Here is some ; taste it. anc. then you may know and tell me. Is it better, cr as good, or worse ? Il is better. Does your merchant sell good knives? He sells the heat. Do we not read more books than the Irish 1 Yes, we read THIRTIETH LESSOR. (l.J 149 more than they, but the Russians read (of them) more than we, and the Prussians read the most. Why do they read the most ? Because they wish to be the most learned. Do the merchants sell more sugar than coffee ? They sell more of the latter than of the former. Does your shoemaker make as many shoes as mine ? He makes more of them than yours. Can you swim as well (aussi 6ie?i) aa my son ? I can swim better than he, but he can speak French better than I. Does he read as well as you? He reads better than I. Does the son of your neighbor go to market? No, he remains at nome ; he has sore feet. Do you learn as well as our gardener's son? I learn better than he, but he works better than I. Whose gun is the finest? Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still finer, and ours is the finest of all. Has any one finer children than you ? No one has finer ones. Does your son read as often as I ? He reads oftener than you. Does my brother speak .French as often as you ? He speaks and reads it as often as I. Do I write as much as you? You write more than I. Do our neighbor's children read German as often as we ? We do not read it so often as they. Do we write it as often as they? They write oftener than we. To whom do they write ? They write to their friends. Do you read English books ? We read French books instead of reading English books. THIRTIETH LESSON, 30th. Trenticmc Le$on, 30me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. To believe, believing. I believe, thou believest, he believes. I believe that you know it. I believe you know nothing of it. To put, put on. Put, put on, (impera.) Do I put on your kid gloves ? Does he not put on? is he not putting?! Est-ce qu' il ne met pas? Nemet-i! pas? Croire,* 4, croyant. Je crois, tu crois, il croit. Je crois que vous le savez. Je crois que vous n'en savez rien. Mettre. (25 1 .) Mettez, (impdra.) Est-ce que je mets vos gants de cha- lie puts on. He does not. What do you put on ? I put this on. Do they put on anything more ? II met. II ne met pas. Que mettez-vous ? Je mets ceci. Mettent-ils quelque chose de plus f Obs. 71. We saw in (Ofa. 7,) that : quelque chose; ne . . . .rien and que I require de before the following adjective ; now we add : when a noun, pro- ne un, number, or adjective precedes an adverb or past participle, the prepo if ion de (as a connecting link) must be put before the adver D. 150 THIRTIETH LESSON They put nothing more. Do you go out ? I do. Do you not put on your big shoes ? Yes, I do. I do not go out without putting them on when the weather is bad. Without you, me, him, them, us, thee. Dees he go out without taking his umbrella and his cloak ? He does not go out without taking them. To rain. Does it rain ? It does. la the weather cloudy ? It is (so). Do I go out when the weather is cloudy ? Neither you nor we go out. Early. Early enough. As early as you, as they. He goes out as early as we. Too soon, too early. Too little, (adv.), too small, too great. You speak too little, and he too much. Together. We go out together. Later than you. I go out later than you. Do you go to the play as early as I ? I go thither earlier than you. Us ne mettent rien de vlu*. Sorte z-vous? Je sors. Nemettez-vouspasvosgrossoulitTS,? Si fait, je les mets. Je ne sors pal sans les mcttre quand il f&U mau vais temps. Sans vous, rroi, lui, eux, nous, toi. Sort-il sans prendre son paraplui.-? t son manteau ? (R. 1.) II ne sort pas sans les prendre. Pleuvoir* 3. Pleut-il ? II plcvi. Le temps est-il convert ? II Vest. Est-ce que je sors quand le temps est couvert ? Ni vous ni nous ne sortons. De bonue heure. D'assez bonne heure. D'aus si bonne heureque vous, qu'eua II sort d'aussi bonne heure que nous, Trop lot, de trop bonne heure. Trap peu, trop petit, trop grand. Vous parlez trop peu, et lui trop. Ensemble. Nous sortons ensemble Plus tard que vous. Je sors plus tard que vous. Allez-vous au spectacle d'aussi bonne heure que moi ? J'y vais plus tot (de meilleure heure) que vous. Plus tot, (de meilleure heure.) Votre pere y va-t-il plus tot que moi, (de meilleure heure que moi ?) Essay ez anything more ? No, nothing more, now. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Already, yet. Is it already done ? Do you speak already ? Does he start already ? (depart.) Not yet. No, not yet. I do not speak yet. He departs immediately. Do you finish your exercise already ? I finish it at this very moment, (time.) Do you give us anything to do ? Do I not always give you something to do? Deja. Est-ce deja fait ? Parlez-vous deja ? Part-il deja ? Ne . . . pas encore. Non, pas encore i Je ne parle pas encore. II part tout de suite. Finissez-vous deja votre theme f Je le finis a present mime. Nous donnez-vous quelque chose a faire ? Est-ce que je ne vous donne pas toujours quelque chose a faire ? Ols. 72. We have seen, in. the preceding lessons, that when two verba ire joined, the first sometimes requires no preposition 1 to connect itself with the second ; that sometimes it takes the preposition d ; 2 at others de. 3 See lists of those verbs ($ 156), preceded by a short explanation. The scholar was directed to form for himself lists of those verbs, of nouns, adjectives, &c., as they are presented in the vocabularies. In order to see how he has performed that task, I here insert the model of a dialogue on the subject, which teachers may modify according to circumstances. JYI. Armand, avez-vous un catalogue Mr. Armand, have you a catalogue of the verbs which govern other verbs without a preposition ? Yes, Sir, I have. Which is the first verb on your catalogue ? It is voulez- or,.t ? That is right. But instead of writing down voulez-vous ? make use of the infinitive. Do you know it ? Yes, Sir, I do. It is vouloir, i? it not ? Yes, that is it. So, your first verb which governs another des verbes qui en gouvernent d'au- tres sans preposition ? Ouf M .., j'en ai un. Quel est le premier verbe sur votre catalogue ? C'est voulez-vous? C'est bien. Mais au lieu d'ecrire, voules-vous I faites usage de 1'infinitif. Le pvea- vous ? Oui, M.,je 1 ea>s. C'ess vouloir, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, C'-MJ cela. Ainsi, votre premier ', 19'.) , 25 3 .) THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 153 Without a preposition is vouloir, is it not ? Yes, Sir, it is that. In what vocabulary is it ? I do nol know, but I have the folio, (page.) That will do. What is the second verb of your catalogue ? It is allez- vous ? What is its infinitive ? It is alter. Very well. Make use of iller, instead of allez-vous ? On wha*. page is it ? On the .... To hear, to understand. Hearing. I understand. I do not understand. Do you understand me ? I do. I understand you in part. I do not understand you at all. Is it possible ? Do you not understand a single word ? No, not a single one. qui en gouverne un autre aans preposition est vouloir, n'cst-ce pas? Oui, M., c'est cela. Dans, quel vocabulaire est-il ? Je ne sais; mais j'ai le fen 'diet. Cela suffit. Quel est le second verbe de votre catalogue ? C'est allez- vous ? Quel en est Vinfnitifi ($31.) C'est oiler. Tres-bien. Faites usage de aller au lieu dc allez-vous ? A quel feuillet est- il ? Au.... Entendre, 4. Entendant. J* entends* Je n' entends pas. M' entendez-vous ? Je vous entends. Je vous entends en partie. Je ne vous entends pas du tout. Est-il possible ? N'entendez-vous pas un seul mot ? Non, pas un seul. Manger trop est dangereux. Parler trop est imprudent. Faire du bien a ceux qui nous on! offenses, est une action loiiable. Quelque fois. Plusieurs fois. N'importe. Ob*. 73. The infinitive has no preposition before it vhen it is ased in ai absolute sense, or as a nominative case. To eat too much is dangerous. To speak too much is foolish. To do good to those who have offended us, is a commendable action. Sometimes. Several times. Pi ever mind, no matter. TKEXTIEME TH&ME. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme en Frinc,ais. Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que je n'ai eu Je plaisir do vous voir? Quelque fois bien, quelque fois mal; mais vous, com- ment vons etes-vous porte ? Je me suis toujours bien porte. Je le crois, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le pensez-vous? Tout le monde me dit que j'ai I'air malade. Moi, au contraire, je pense que vous avez tres-bon air. Mais, ce petit ganjon-la n'a pas bon air. C'esi vrai, et je crois qu'il est un peu malade. L'etes-vous, mon peth ami? Oui, M., j'ai un peu mal de tete. Depuis quand? Depuia ce matin de bonne heure. Avant dejeuner? Oui, un peu avant. Entendez-vous ce que ce petit garcon dit? Non, je ne 1'entends pas bien. L'entendez-vous, vous? Oui, je 1'entends parfaitement, parce que je suis accoutume a 1'entendre. Et moi, je ne 1'entends pa*, parce qne je n'y suis pas accoutume. Vous avez raison. Voyez vous qnelquefois le cousin du vieux general? Je le vois souvent wais savex-vous qn'il part? Pour ou ? (where to?) Pour la Cali 154 THIRTIETH LESSON (2.) lornie. Est-il possible ? Quand part-in Je crois qu'il est deja prg] a partir. Dans quel batiment part-il? II part dans le . .\ . Est-cc jn bon batiment ? Je crois que oui. N'est-ce pas le batirnerit de VI. C 1 Non, il n'est plus a Mr. C : mais a M. H A.llons le voir. Oui, allons-y. Mais, voyez done, (see there.) il plein N'importe. Prenonsnosparapluies. Je n'aupas le mien ici. N'im- porte. Nous pouvons vous en prefer un. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas? e votre 1 Je ne le prends pas toujours quand le temps est couven Moi, au contraire, je ne sors pas sans prendre le mien quand le temps est convert. Vous etes plus prudent que moi. N'importe. Partons. Vous faut-il un mouchoir de plus ? J'en ai un ; c'est assez. Is my Italian hat too large ? It is neither too large nor too small. Do you speak French oftener than English? I speak the lattei oftener than the former. Do your uncle and cousin buy much New York corn ? They buy but little. Have I enough fresh bread ? You have only a little, but enough. Is it late ? Why do you believe it i& late? Because 1 begin to be sleepy, (a avoir sommeil.) You may be sleepy, but it is not late. What o'clock is it? It is only half pas} nine. Is it too late to go to your father's? VVnj do you wish to go to my father's? I wish to return (rendre) him this French book. Is it, (3, $ 39,) a pretty book ? It is a very pretty book. Will you conduct me there? Can you not find the way alone? I believe I cannot in the evening. I do not wish to go there now. Give me the book, I can return it to him. No; I have to leturn it to him myself. (Moi-meme, 41$0 Very well. Do it, then. Does the young Spaniard buy an Arabian horse ? He cannot buy one. Why 1 Is he poor? He is not poor; he is richer than you. Why can he not buy one then ? Because (no Arabian horse can be found here) he cannot find any Arabian horse here. Is this Swiss as learned as that Pole ? He is just as learned, I believe ; but you are more learned than they and I. Are you studying already? No, not yet. I am smoking. Do you smoke so early 2 Yes, sometimes; when I am cold. Do you understand that gentleman ? I do. Is he learned ? Ho is. What is he ? A lawyer ? A minister ? An apothecary ? A mer- chant? Or nothing at all? I believe he is a little of everything, (un peu de tout.) Is your horse worse than mine ? It is not so bad a? yours. Is mine worse than the Dutchman's? It is wcrse. It is the worst horse (Ocs. 69) that I know, (connaissc, subjunct.) Do ycu give those men less silver than paper? (Dir. 3.) I give them more of the former than of the latter; for some of them cannot read, ano they do not like the paper. Who receives the most money' 4 The English do. Cannot yotr sen write a note in French? He cannot, THIRTIETH LESSON. (2.) 155 J>ut he begins to read a little. Do the Americans write more than we ? They write less than we ; but the Italians write the least. Are they as rich as the Americans'? They are less rich than they. Are your birds. as fine as our neighbor's'? They are less fine; but never mind, ours are fine enough. Faites du bien j do you under- stand that, Mr. Charles? Is it do well? No, Sir, that's not it, or it is not that. Then I do not understand it all, Lut in part. And you, Mr Durand, do you understand it? I believe I do not understand it. Nevermind. Who understands it ? I. Whatis its English? ( 31-1.) Do good. That's right. I see that yo;. understand it. I believe I do. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. L-'oiseau a-t-il son grain? Non, il ne Pa pas. Ne le lui donnez- vous pas tous les matins? Si fait, quand j'y pense; mais aujour- d'hui il n'a pas faim, il ne mange pas, parce qu'il a mal au pied. Qui a le pistolet de 1'etranger? Personne ne Pa. Avez-vous les porte-feuilles de cuir de ces deux matelots? Je n'ai que le porte- feuille de Pun d'eux. Je ne sais pas qui a celui de Pautre. Est-ce celui du grand et vieux que vous avez? Non, c'est celui du jeune et petit que nous avons. N'allez-vous pas le lui rendre ? Si fait, s'il le veut; mais il dit qu'il n'en a pas besoin. N'a-t-il plus d'ar- gent? Je crois que non; du moins, il n'a plus de billets. Le bo3uf et le cheval ont-ils leur foin ? Oui, ils ont leur foin. Mangent-ils le foin que vous leur donnez? Ils le trouvent bon, car ils le mangent bien. Que mangent-ils encore ? Ils mangent leur grain. Qu'a ce garcon? Lequel? Le bon ganjon. Lui? il a toujours quelque chose de joli. L'enfant du tailleur a-t-il quelque chose de vieux ou de vilain ? Non, il n'a rien de vieux ni de vilain ; mais il a un jol porte-crayon d'acier. Qu'avez-vous ? Rien. Qu'a M. Carnot? II n'a rien. Qu'a son frere? Qui'* le frere de Carnot? Oui, son frere. II n'a rien. Ce jeune homme-la a-t-il faim ? Non, il n'a pas faim, car il a du pain, du fromage, des biscuits, et il n'en mange pas. Pourquoi faites- vous cela 1 Nous avons honte de vous. Quoi ! Vous avez honte d<> ce que je fais? Nous en avons honte, pour vous. Vous etes bien bon, en verite I Ils ont soif; avez-vous beaucoup de cafe ce soir a leur donner? Je n'en ai guere ; mais j'en ai assez pour eux. Quo pensez-vous de Phabit de ce gargon-la? II a trop de boutons, n'est- ce pas? Oui, vous avez raison de le dire, et son gilet n'en a pas assez. Combien en a-t-il ? II n'en a que deux, je crois. Le fermiei n'a-t-il pas de vieux chevaux ? Non, il n'en a que de jeunes. Noua avons faim, avez-vous du pain a nous donner ? Je n'ai pas de pain mais j'ai d Vxcellents biscuits. Le jeune etranger a-t-il soif? Je croii 156 THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) que oui, car il boit souvent. ($ 170.) II boit quoi ? Un {.-ea de Ia?t un peu de vin. J'ai besoin de savon ; dites-moi ou je puis en trouver de ban* Vous pouvez en aeheter de tres-bon chez M Ou est SOT, magasin ? Dans la rue Chestnut, pres de la. ... Je vous re- mercie. De rien. N'avez-vous besoin de rien de plus 1 Non pas ce matin. Qui a le gros et grand couteau du cuisinier ? En a-t-il besoin pour tuer quelque chose ? Je ne sais pas pourquoi il en a besoin; mais il le cherche. L'avez-vous? Savez-vous ou il peut ! trouver ? Non, je n'en sais rien. Le Hollandais a-t-il quelque ihose a boire ? Pourquoi 1 A-t-il soif ? Oui, il a soif, et le Prussien, VIrlandais, et 1'Ecossais ont soif aussi. Donnez-leur du vin, s'ils ont Boif, et de vieux pain, s'ils ont faira. Ce Suisse n'a pas bon air ; est-il malade? Je ne sais pas, et comme il ne parle ni Anglais ni Fransaia nous ne pouvons pas parler ensemble. Qu'est-ce qu'il parle? Suisse, je ponse. Quel joli oiseau Mile. Emilie a! Qu'est-ce que c'est? 7 re eyes ? life eye* ar aJ'.vay* sore. THIRrY-SECflND LESSON (2.} 165 VOCABULAIRE. 2Je Sectioa So. So well. Not so often as .... Have you been hungry or cold ? I have been thirsty and warm. Who has been right, and who wrong ? If John has been wrong, then Julius has been right. No, they have both been wrong. We have been afraid to show any. To take place. The ball will take place. When is the ball in honor of the President going to take place ? "Does the concert take place to-day ? \ Is the concert to come off to-day? ] It takes place. It takes place this evening. It does not take place to-day. When did the grand dinner take place ? It took (has taken) place yesterday. It has not yet taken place, [had place.] The day before yesterday. Where had you a mind to go the day before yesterday ? To Bristol. How many times? Once, (or one time.) Twice, (two times. Thrice, (three times ) Many times, a great many times. Formerly. More than sir times. Has the President a bad cold ? No, he has had one, but he is well now. I am glad to hear it. I thought he was sick. / thought you were in New York. / thought they were Prussians. I thought I had your hat. Did you think you had it ? I did. Did you think you knew your lesson ? Did you think you knew that man ? I thought 1 did, but I see that I do not (know him). irone. To have gone. To have gone there. Did you go to the concert of V. ? I went or did go. I did not go, He went (there.) He did not go (there.) Who 1 as gone ? Who went ? Lewis Si. Si bien. Ne . . . . pat si sruven\ que .... Avez-vous eu faim ou froid ? J'ai eu soif et chaud. Qui a eu raison et qui a eu tort ? Si Jean a eu tort, alors Jules a st raison. Non, ils ont 1'un et 1'autre eu tort. Nous avons eu peur d'en montrcr. t Avoir lieu. Le bal va avoir lieu. t Quand le bal en honneur du Presi- dent va-t-il avoir lieu ? t Lo concert a-t-il lieu aujourd'h.ii I t II a lieu. II a lieu ce soir. t II n'a pas lieu aujourd'hui. t Quand le grand diner a-t-il eu lieu t II a eu lieu hier. t II n'a pas encore eu lieu. Avant-hicr. Ou avez-vous eu envie d'aller avant hier ? A Bristol. Combien defois ? Unefois. (udv.) Deux fois. Trois fois. Bien des fois. Autrefois. Plus de six fois. (16 2 .) Le President a-t-il un mauvaia rhume ? II en a eu un, mais il se porte bien a present. J'en suis bien aise. Je le croyais malade. Je vous croyais d New York. Je les croyais Prussiens. Je croyais avoir votre chapeau. Croyiez-vous Vavoir ? Je le croyais Croyiez-vous savoir votre lecon ? Croyiez-vous connaitre cet hoinme- la ? Je croyais le connaitre, mais je vois que je ne le connais pas. AlU, etre alle. y vtre alle. Etes-vous alle au concert de V. ? J'y ai etd. Je n'y suis pas alld. II y a e*te. II n'y est pas alls'. Qui y cst alle ? Louia y est allo t66 THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) Has he had a sore arm ? He has. | A-t-il eu mal au bras ? II y aeu nial What has been the matter with him ? ! Qu'a-t-il eu ? He had a sore elbow, and he has it i II a eu mal au cox de, et il y a incorc yet. mal. How many children has the Presi- Combien d'enfantsle President a-t-i' dent had ? (eus, because the object precedes.; He has had three, I believe, eus ? (eus, parce que Tobjet eal avant.) II en a eu trois, je crois. C'est a dire. Thai j'l to say, that is, (. e.) TRENTE-DEUXIEME THE"ME. 2de Sec. ^"oi's continuez a mettre le quantieme, n'est-ce pas ? Quoi ; Madame ! vous etes ici 1 ? Je vous croyais a Baltimore. J' > fei ete, M. mais je suis ici depuis deux jours. Est-il possible ! Ei je n'ai pas eu le plaisir de vous voir. Je pense que vous vous porr tez bien, car vous avez tres-bon air. Le President a-t-il ete a Balti- more'? Non, il n'y a pas ete. Ou est-il alle? II est alle a Richmond pour y voir ses meilleurs amis. N'a-t-il pas ete malade ? Si fait, il Pa ete, mais tres-peu. II a eu un rhume, n'est-ce pas? Oui, au commencement du mois d'Avril ; mais cela n'a pas ete grand' 1 chow'' (much expression constantly used.} Je le croyais encore malade En verite ! II ne Pest plus, et nous en sommes bien aises. N'avez- vous pas eu mal de tete ? Si fait, mais cela n'a pas ete grand' chose. A present, j'ai mal au pied, mais ce ri'est pas grand' chose. Je croyais avoir volre eventail, Mile Sophie, mais je vois que voua I'avez. Je Pai, mais il est a votre service. Merci. Si vous n'avez plus chaud, pretez-le-moi un moment, s'il vous plait. Le voici, prenez-le. II est joli et bon. Oh ! ce n'est pas grand' chose. Eu avez-vous besoin, a present ? Non, je n'en ai pas encore besoin, vous pouvez en faire usage. Votre cousin a-t-il le cheval du fer- mier'? Noii, le fermier en a eu besoin, lui-meme. ( 41^.) HTVC the English had as much sugar as tea 1 ? They have had aa much of the one as of the other; but they want more sugar than tea. Has the physician been cold, this evening'? No, he has been warm. Has he been warm enough ? He says that he has been too warm. Can that be ? Has the Dutchman been right or wrong 1 He has been right or wrong. If he has been right, he has not been wrong. If he has been wrong, he has not been right. I believe you are right when you say that. To be sure. Have I been rigiil l Pas grand 1 cliose, noi much, no great thing. As chose is femhiine, gr&nd'chose ought to be spelt : grande chose. But as, in pronouncing those words, thje d is not sounded, the French use the apostrophe to show thai the e is suppressed and fhe d silent. So in : grand 1 faim, grand 1 soif, g'and' mere, o, and very frequently omitted, may in French relate to a substantive, an aajective, or even a whole sentence. It changes neither its genaor nor num- ber when it relates to an adjective or a whole sentence. (29 2 , t}bs. 70.) Etes-vous les freres de mon ami ? Nous les sommes. Sont-ils riches ? Us ne le sont p?i3 Ces homines surit-iis savants ? Us le sont. Us ne le sont pas. Vous et votre ami, etes-vous fatigur'.-*! Je ne le suis pas, mais il dit qu'il Test. L'est-il, en veritd ? II le dit, Nos voisins sont-ils aussi pauv<;< qu'ils le disent ? Us le sont. Je crois qu'ils ne le sont pas. Votre frere a-t-il parld hier ? Je ne le sais pas. II le dit. Are you the brothers of my friend ? We are. (We are so we are they.) Are they rich ? They are not. Are those men learned ? They are. They are not. Are you and your friend fatigued ? I am not, but he says he is. Is he so indeed ? He says he is. Are our neighbors as poor as they say (they are) ? They are. I believe they are not. Did your brother speak yesterday ? I do not know. He says he did. TRENTE-TROISIEME THibiE. 2de Sec. Mettea la date en Francais- Avez-vous parle a votre raaitre ? Oui, je lui ai parle. Ou est-il * tl est dar.3 son appartement. Pourquoi n'en sort-il pas ? II est ma- lade. Est-il bien (very) malade? Non; mais il Pest trop poui donner des lemons aujourd'hui. Le medecin lui a-t-il donne quelquo chose a prendre ? Oui, il lui a donne quelque chose. Que lui a-t-il donne ? Je ne sais pas ce qu'il lui a donne. Est-il au lit ? (in bed 1 j Non, il n'est pas au lit, il est dans son grand fauteuil. Son fauteuil * Qu'est-ce qiie c'est? (What is that?) N'en savez-vous pas 1 'Anglais f Non, en verite. Votre maitre ne vous en a-t-il pas dit 1'Anglais * Non, je suis sur qu r il ne me Fa jamais dit. Charles, ne vous Pa-t-'" pas dit? Lui, non plus. Eh! bien, je vais vous le dire. C'esT zrin-chair. Fauteuil: Arm-chair? Est-il possible? C'est tres-pos sible, car c'est cela meme. C'est tout-a-fait different (different* do 'Anglais. C'est vrai, vous avez raison 172 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) Have you spoken to my father? I have. When did you? I Bpoke to him the day oefore yesterday. How many times have yuu spoken to the captain ? To which captain ? To the French, no, no, I do not mean the French, but the Greek. I ha^o not spoken to the Greek captain ; I do not know a Greek one j bu; 1 have spoken to the American. How many times have you spoken to him ? I spoke to him many times. Have you ever spoken to his son ? I have, often. To which strangers has your young cousin spoken? He hag 9jpQkeii to these and to those. To these three and those four? Yes ; tc them all, (a tons, ou a eux tons.) Are you the brother of that handsome young man, (ce beau garpon, is as often used as: ce beau jtune Iwmme.} Is that other young man the minister's cousin ? That one or this ? That one. No, that one is not ; but this one is. I wish to speak to him. Have you never done it? No, never. And I neither. Are your friends as busy as they say! They are (so). Are the carpenters as tired as they think ? I believe they are. Is the valet tired because he sweeps the stores? He is. Does he sweep them often ? He does it as often as he can. Has the Pole money enough to buy wood or coal ? I believe he has not got any. Give him this three dollar note. Is the dentist at home ? No, he has gone to the wire bridge. Has your old cook gone to market? No, he has gone to bed instead of going to market. Is he ill ? (ma- lade?) He is not ill, but only tired. Is he very tired? He is. because he made a great dinner in honor of the uncle of the French minister. Who is ill? I do not know who is. I am not. Are you as tall (grand) as I ? I am. Is your son much taller than you ? He is. Are these young men clerks ? They are. Are you as busy as your brother ? I am more so than he. Do you know the name of the English minister? No, I do not. Does Thomas know it? He neither. Has not Lewis told it to you ? No, he did not. Did he not tell it to your uncle ? I do not know if he has told it to him. To whom has he ta'i it? He has told it neither ( $ 56, $ 64) to him nor to them, nor to you, nor to me, nor to anybody. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. To write, written. Which notes have you written ? T have written these. Which words has he written ? fie has written those which you see. To drink, drunk. To see, seen. To read, read. To be acquainted with, been an- q minted with. Ecrire,* e*crit. (06s. 75.) Quels billets avez-vous ecrits ? J'ai ecrit ceux-ci. Quels mots a-t-il ecrits ? II a ecrit ceux que vous voyer. Boire,* bu. Voir,* vu. Lire,* lu. Connaftre,* connu. THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) ITS Winch mer. have you seen? I have seen those. Which books have you read ? [ have read those which you have lent me. Have you been acquainted with these men ? I have not. Which ones have you known.? (lave you seen any sailors ? I have seen some. I have not seen any. To call, to name, (not to call at, upon.) To call at, upon. Call on me. To throw, throw away them some. Do you call me ? I do not call you. Quels hommes avez-vous vus ? J'ai vu ceux-la. Quels livres avez-vous lus * J'ai lu ceux que vous m'avez pretet Avez-vous connu ces hommes ? ( % ne les ai pas connus. Lesquels avez-vous connus ? Avez-vous vu des mateiots ? J'en ai vu. Je n'en ai vu wcun. (32 1 , 06*. 76.) Appeler,!. Passer, 1, chez. Passez chez rnoi. Jeter, 1. Lesjeter, en jeter. M' appelez- vous ? Je vous appelle. Je ne vous appelle pas. Obs. 78. In verbs ending in eler and eter, as appeler, to call ; Jeter, to throw ; the letter I or Ms doubled in all persons or tenses where it is fol lowed by e mute. 1 Who calls me ? Your father calls you. Have you called the men ? I have called them. Do you throw your money away ? I do not throw it away. Who throws away his books ? Have you thrown away anything? I have thrown away my gloves. Have you thrown them away ? Qui m'appelle ? Votre pere vous appelle. Avez-vous appele les homines ? Je los ai appeles. Jetez-vous votre argent? Je ne le jette pas. Qui jette ses livres ? Avez-vous jetd quelque chose ? J'ai jete mes gants. Les avez-vous jetes ? THEME. 3me Sec. Vous mettez le quantieme ici, n'est-ce pas ? Bon jour, mon cher Monsieur, j'espere que vous vous portezbien Oi i, Dieu merci, je me porte parfaitement bien. J'en suis bien aise, j'en suis charme. Savez-vous que nous attendons le professeur grec ? Va-t-il passer chez vous ce matin ? II va passer ici, nous 1'attendons a 9 heures. J'en suis charme ; car, j'aigrande envie do le connaitre. Ne le connaissez-vous pis oncers'? Non, je n'ai pas encore eu le plaisir de le voir. Comment 1'appelez-vous'? Je ne eais pas son vrai nom, mais je 1'appellu Miaulitz. Comment epelez- vous son nom ? Je 1'epelle M, i, a, u, 1, i, t, z mais je ne eais paa g'il 1'epelle comme cela. N'importe, s'il vous repond quand VOUE ..'appelez comme-ca. Mais, a present que j'y pense, parle-t-il Fran- 1 Custom, however, does not observe this rule with regard to the verb echeter, to bay, and its compound, racheter, to redeem, to buy again. (25 1 .) 1.74 THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) cais * Sans doute. II )e parle bien pour un etranger. II parle aussi italien, allemand ; et un peu Anglais. II est done savant? Oui ; ii I'est. N'est-il pas encore neuf heures? Non, pas tout-a-fait. Je pense que comme il est professeur, il est ponctuel. Je le ponse aussi; et comme il est pres de Fheure, je pense qu'il vient et qu'il est en chemin. N'entendez-vous pas quelqu'uri? (30 2 .) Si fait, j'entends quelqu'un. Est-ce lui ; croyez-vous ? Oui, c'est lui- meme. (4l.) Voyez. Ah! il est bien grand, n'est-ce pas? What have you to tell me ? I have to tell you to call on Profe&soi C . Does he wish to see me ? He does. What does ne want with me? (me veut-il?) I do not know what he wants with you; he did not tell it to me. When? Immediately after breakfast. Does he breakfast early? He finishes usually at of 7 o'clock. Which exercises has your friend written ? He has written those. Which men have you seen at the wharf? I have seen these. Which books have your children read? They have read those which you have lent them. Have you seen these strangers or those ? I have neither seen these nor those. Which strangers have you seen? I have seen those to whom (a qui) you have spoken. Kave you been acquainted with these men ? I have been acquainted with them. With which boys has your brother been acquainted? He has been acquainted with those of our merchant. Have I been acquainted with these Frenchmen ? You have not been acquainted with them. Which wine has your servant drunk? He has drunk mine. Have you seen my brother's pretty little cousins? I have. Where have you seen them ? I have seen them at their own house, (chez eux.} Have you ever seen Greeks? I have never seen any. (06s. 76.) Has your father seen any? He has sometimes seen some. Do you call me ? I do call you. Who calls your brother? My father calls him. Dost thou call any one ? I call no one. Have you thrown away your hat ? I have not thrown it away. Does your father throw away anything? He throws away the notes which he has read, if they are not important, (importants.) Have you thrown iway your pencils? I have not thrown them away, for I want hem. (23 2 .) Dost thou throw away thy book? I do not throw il iway ; I want it to (pour) study French. Do you translate arid write ihiee exercises every day 1 No ; I translate and write only one but I study an 1 sad several. THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1,) ITS THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON, 34th. Trentc-quatrume Le$on, 34me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. PARTICIPES PASSES IRREGUL1ERS. Extinguished, Opened, Conducted, Taken, Believed, e"teint. ouvert conduit. pris. cru. INFINITIES. To extinguish, Eteindre.* To open, Ouvrir.* To conduct, Conduire,* To take, Prendre.* To believe, Croire.* To be able, (can,) Pouvoir.* to know, Savoir,* To be willing, Vouloir.* NEUTER VERBS. Verbes Neutres ou Intramilifs. See ( 158, and Art. 1, &c.) and study it carefully. Obs. 79. Those neuter verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliaij tire, in French, and to have, in English, will be marked thus, e . Been able, (could,) pm Known, su. Been willing, voulu. To set out, Partir.* To go out, Sortir.* To come, Venir.* Has your father set out ? Have your friends set out ? They have not set out. When did your brothers go out ? They went out at ten o'clock. Did the men come to your father's and to yotr uncle's ? They did. Which firef have you extinguished ? Which storehouses have you opened, and which shut ? (have you.) Have you conducted them to the storehouse and to the office ? I have. Which books have you taken ? How many notes have you received ? ( received but one. The same. The same jewel. TJiis secretary. This scrutoire. The secretary of the minister. Upon, on, the scrutoire (writing desk.) The bench. Upon that bench. Set ous., departed, parti*. Gone out, sorti*. Come, venu*. Votre pere est-il parti? Vos amis sont-ils partis ? II ne sont pas partis. Quand vos freres sont-ils sortis f Us sont sortis a dix heures. Les homines sont-ils venus chei votre pere et chez votre oncle ? Us y sont venus. Quels feux avez-vous dteints ? Quels magasins avez-vous ouverts, et lesquels avez-vous fermes ? Les avez-vous conduits au magasin et au bureau ? Je les y ai conduits. Quels livres avez-vous pris ? Combien de billets avez-vous re$us 1 Je n'en ai re*.u qu'un. Z< meme. Lts mimes. Le mime bijou- Ce secretaire. Le secretaire du ministre. Sur le secretaire. Le bane. Sur ce bane-la. TRENTE-QUATRliiME Tllf-ME. Ire See. N'oubliez pas d'ecrire la date en Franais. Quel vilain temps nous avons, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, nous avons un temps tres-desagreable. II pleut trop; il fait trop humide, et le temps est malsain. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez yens'? Noa 176 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) Dieu tijerci, tout le monde se porte bien ; mais presque tons out eie malades. Qu'ont-ils eu ? Non pas le cholera, j'espere ! Non, pae le cholera. Quoi done? L'un a eu le tic douloureux, 1'autre mal aux dents ; celui-ci a eu un violent mal de tete, celui-la quelqu'au* tre chose, en un mot ils ont presque tous ete malades. Je suis oharme d'apprendre qu'ils se portent bien a present. Quand avez- vous vu votre ami le jeune secretaire du general ? Je 1'ai vu avant- hirtr. Comment Fappelez-vous? Je 1'appelle Lucien. Lucien et \9 nom d' an des fieres de Napoleon, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, ce Pest. Je sais le nom a present. Est-il ici encore, ou est-il parti ? Parti pour oil? Je le croyais a Boston. Le general n'y est-il pas alle ? Non, le general est malade, au lit. Ne sort-il pas? Non, en verite. Qu''a-t-il ? Le medecin dit que c'est lagoutte, (gout.) Where are your cousins gone to? They have gone to the bridge. Have your friends left? (partis?) They have not yet left. When do they set out? This evening. Early or late ? At what o'clock ? At half past nine. When did the French boys come to youi brother's? They came there the day before yesterday. Did they come alone, or did their friends come also? They came also. Has any one come to see us ? The Swiss came. Who came to the Englishman's office? The French did. When did you drink any German wine ? We never drank any. Did you not drink some the day before yesterday and to-day, at the secretary's house 1 Is the wine that we drank there German wine? To be sure it is. Then German wine is very good. Has the big servant carried my notes? He has. Where did he carry them ? He carried one to the law- yer's office, the other to the merchant's counting-house. Did you not cany a pocket-book to the captain's? Yes, I did carry there that which you gave me to carry. Which papers has the gardener's son brought here? Did he bring any (aucun) here? Yes, he brought here those which you lent to his father. Where has he put them ? I have not seen them. 1 believe he gave them to Jacob, who has put them in the secretary, or under it, in the parlor. Which books has the clerk taken 7 He has taken the one which you do not read, and those whi'jh you have read. Have the clerks opened the stores? They have. Which did they open! They opened those you have se^n, under the lawyer's offices. When did they open them ? They did early in the morning. Did they shut them last night? No, the servants did. Do they shut them every night, and open ihem every morning? They do. Why did they not open them this morning? Because they are busy on the vessel, at the wharf. Did Jacob conduct the foreigners ic the museum? He did. D : d he not conc.uct them to the \virc THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 177 brktge a!;< He did not, but he intends to conduct them thero very goon. Has the cook extinguished the fires'? He has nol yet extin- guished them. Who has extinguished the parlor fire ? The Irisu servant has. Have you received any (aucun) bench, sofa, and arm-chair? We have received some. Has your brother received his'? He has not received them; but our friends have received theirs VOCABULAIRK. 2de Section. O'pon it The shawl is upon it. Under. Under the writing-desk. Under it, (underneath.) Whare are my velvet and satin hats? They are upon the sofa. Are my kid gloves on it also ? No, they are under. I see them. To learn how, learned fiow. Do you learn how to read and count ? I do learn how to do both. Have you learned how to speak ? I have learned how, (or it.) Gone. Have they gone ? In the stove. In it or within. To get or have . . . mended. Got or had . . . mended. To wash. To have . . . washed. Got . . . washed. To get... made, (bespeak,) have... made. To have . . . swept. Got . . . swept. To get . . . sold. Had . . . sold. Desstis (adv.) Le chale est dessua Sous (prep.) Sous le secretaire. Dessous (adv.) Ou sont mes chapeaux de velours el de satin ? lls sont sur le sofa. Mes gants de chamois y sont-ils aus-u I Non, ils sont dessous. Je les vois. Apprendre* a, appris a. Apprenez-vous a lire et a compter ? J'apprends 1'un et 1'autre. Avez-vous appris a parler ? Je 1'ai appris. AIU\ Sont-ils alles ? Dans le poele. Dedans (adv.) t Faire raccommoder. Fait racca- mmoder. Laver. t Faire laver. Fait laver. t Faire faire. Faitfaire. t Faire balayer. Fait balayer. t Faire vendre. ,Fait vendre. Oft*. 80. The two French verbs c^me together, while the English verbt are separated by some noun. To get the coat mended. To have it mended. To get them mended. To get some mended. Are you getting a coat made ? (do you order or bespeak a coat ?) I am getting one made, (I order one.) I have had one made. Has he had his handkerchief washed ? He has had it washed. He did not get it washed. I have had my shoes mended. I have had them mended. To wipe, wiped. t Faire raccommoder 1'habit. t Le faire raccommoder. t Les faire raccommoder. t En faire raccommoder. t Faites-vous faire un habit ? t J'en fais faire un t J'en ai fait faire un. t A-t-il fait laver son mouchoir ? t II 1'a fait laver. t II ne 1'a pas fait laver. t J'ai fait raccommoder mes soulicr^. t Je les ai fait raccommoder. Esnyer, 1, estuv* ($144, R. 3.) 178 THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) I wipe, thou wipcst, he wipes. Have you not seen my book ? Yes, I have put it away for you. When did you see my brother? I sr.w him last evening: at the bridge. J'essuie, tu essuies, il essute. N'avez-vous pas vu mon livre t Si fait, je 1'ai serre pour vous. Quand avez-vous vu mon frere ? Je 1'ai vu hier soir au pont. Where did you see my cousins ? i Ou avez-vous vu mes cousins? I saw them at the museum. i Je les ai vus au musee. TRENTE-QUATUIEME Tfl^ME. 2de Sec. Ou esl le chale de velours de Mile. Clara? II esl sui le sofa n'est-ce pas'? Ne 1'y voyez-vous pas'? Ses gants de fil sont-ils des- BUS aussi? Non, ils sont sous le bane. Dessous! avez-vous ditl Oui, c'est-ce que j'ai dit. Qui les a mis dessous? Je ne sais pas en veiite. Ramassez-les done vite, et meltez les sur le sofa avec son chale. Comme son chapeau de satin est sui le grand fauteuil de cuir, je vais mettre ses gants de fil dedans et son chale sur le dos du fauteuil. Tres-bien, faites-le. Mes souliers sont-ils sur le bane ? Non, ils sont dessous. Je les ai mis dessus : Qui les a mis dessous ? Moi. C'est moi qui les ai mis dessous. Je vous rernercie De rien. (26.) Le charbon est-il dans le coin ou sous le bane? II est dans le poele. Avez-vous mis du bois dedans? Oui, d'abord, j'ai mis du bois dedans, ensuite j'y ai mis du feu pour 1'allumer, 3t apres cela du charbon. Brule-t-il ? Oui, le bois et le charbon bru- lent bien. Nous avons bon feu. Si vous avez froid, mettez-vous pres du poele. Je n'ai pas,grand froid. J'ai vu un peu de bois dans un coin, est-il tout dans le poele ? II est dedans et brill e. Ou sont mes journaux ? Je les ai otes de dessus le poele, parce que je n'ai pas voulu les bruler. Les avez-vous mis sur le secretaire ? Non, ils soul dessous. Avez-vous envoye votre petit garcon au marche ? Je n'ai pas voulu Py envoyer. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas voulu 1'y envoyer 7 Je n'ai pas voulu 1'y envoyer, parce qu'il a ete un peu malade Qu'a-t-il en ? II a eu un violent mal de tete. Avez-vous ecrit a votre oncle, 1'apothicaire ? Je lui ai deja ecrit. Vous a-t-il repondu ? II ne m'a pas repondu. Vous a-t-il envoye 1'argent que vous voulez? II ne me Fa pas encore envoye. Avez-vous deja fait faire un habit 1 Je n'en ai pas encore fait faire. Avez-vous fait faire un gilet ? Je n'en ai pas fait faire. N'avez-vous rien fait faire ? Non, rien, parce que je veux avoir mon argent avant de faire faire quelqiie chose. Are you getting your floor swept ? I am. Have you had you: office swept? I have not yet had it swept, but I intend to have n swept to-day. Have you the same servant? The same! No, in- ieedj we have not the same. We have changed several times, (en, i 50 ) But you have the same cook- have you not? Yes, we have the same yet. Have you wiped vc-ur feet ? I have. Where did THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 179 f ou wipe them ? I wiped them on the old carpet. Have you had your benches, your sofas, and arm-chairs wiped? I have (had them wiped). What does your little valet wipe ? He wipes the big and small knives. Have you ever seen a Syrian ? I have already seen two or three. Have you ever shown one to your cousin ? I have already shown him one at the museum. Has he ever seen a Turk ? He saw one before I did, (moi.) Have you ever lent anything to anybody? Yes, indeed; I have many times lent something to a great many persons, (bcaucoup de monde.) Does the joiner's son know how to read ? He does. Is he learning how to write ? No ? he does not ; he is too young yet to learn how to write. "When is the great caucus going to take place ? It has already taken place. Did you go ? I did not. Miss Charlotte wishes to know if Mrs. B 's concert has taken place ? It took place last Tuesday. Did the gentlemen go to it ? They did. Have we yet the same milkman ? Yes, we have the same. We have not changed, (en,) because his milk is good, and he is punctual; but we have neither the same baker, nor the same butcher, nor the same grocer. Does the lawyer get his office washed? Yes, he gets it washed every Saturday. Get yours washed to-day; will you ? No, I cannot get it washed to-day : I am too busy, I have too much to write. Hast thou ever had thy shoes mended? I have sometimes had them mended. Has the little Dutchman had his vessel sold ? He had it sold last Wednesday. Why has he had it sold ? He had it sold because ho is going to California. Have his cousins gone there ? Yes, they have. rillRTY FIFTH LESSON, 35th. Trente-cinquieme Lecon, 35mc. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. To promise, promised. (Prometirc est comme son primitifi mettre.) To promise some one to come. To compose, to compound, composed. Compound Tenses. Thus, so. Promettre,* 4, promis, (prend d avant le nom ; de, avant Finf.) Promettre d quelqu'un de vetiir. Composer, 1, compose. Les Temps composes. Ainsi. Obs. SI. Les verbes composes sont con] ugues comme Icsprimitifs. Ainsi, ?rom\ettre est comme mellre ; Apprendre, comme prendre. (24*, 25!, To forget, forgotten, forget, (impera.) I forgot to take that to the dentist. Oubtier, 1. OuUie. Oubliez, (imp6r., de avant Finf. J'ai oublie" de porter cela au dentistc ISO THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON, (l.j [low f So, so. In this manner, (way.) Like that. Do you promise me to come ? I do promise you. What have you promised the man ? I have not promised him anything. Have you ever learned French ? 1 learned it formerly. To wear out. To spell. Tc- refuse. HJW has your brother written his exercise ? He has written it well. To put to dry, put to dry. Do you put your vest to dry ? I have already put it to dry. How old are you ? I arn twelve years old. How old is your brother ? He is thirteen years old. Almost, hardly ever. He is almost fourteen years old. About, about sixteen years and i. I am about fifteen years old. Nearly, (before numbers.) He is nearly fifteen years old. Hardly. Scarcely. Scarcely nine. You are hardly seventeen years old. Not quite eleven years and two months. * an not quite sixteen years old. Art >.hou older than thy brother ? I am younger than he. I caanot tell you how old I am. There is, there are. How many francs are there in a crown ? Three. Thrre are five centimes in a sou. There arc twenty sous or a hundred centimes in one franc. A, or one hundred. The centime. How many francs are there in a dollar ? 'i here are 5 francs and 7 sous. Comment f I Comme t e/u. t De cette maniere. Comma ct&t Me promeucz-voi.s de venir ? Je vous le promets. Qu'avez-vous promis a I'homme * Je ne lui ai rien promis. Avez-vous jamais appris le Francois Je I'&i appris autrefois. User 1. 6peler, 1. (Obs. 7$., Refuser, I, (de, avant I'inf.) Comment votre frere a-t-il ecrit set* theme ? II r a bien Aril. Mettre d secher f mis d seeker. Mettez-vous votre gilet a secher ? Je 1'ai ieja mis a secher. t Quel age avez-vcus ? t J'ai douze ans. t Quel age votre frere a-t-il ? t II a treize ans. Presque, presqut tamain. t II a presque quatorze ans. Environ, environ seize ans et d*.mi t J'ai environ quinze ans. Pres de, (avant les nombres.) t II a pres de quinze ans. A peine. A peine ncuf. t Vous avez a peine dix-sept ans. Pas tout-a-fait onze ans et dtr..-< mois. t Je n'ai pas tout-a-fait seize ans Es-tu plus age que ton frere ? Je suis plus jeune que lui. Je ne puis pas vous dire quel age j'al, 21 y a. Combien de francs v a-t-il dans uu e"cu ? Trois. II y a cinq centimes dans un sou. II y a vingt sous ou cent centimes dans un franc. Cent. Le centime. Combien de francs y a-t il dais 'A dollar ? II y a 5 francs et 7 sous. TRENTE-CINQUI^ME THEME. Ire Sec. ti. vous oubliez de mettre le quantieme au commencement du tneme, vone pouvez le mettre a la fin, (end fern.) Bon jour, mon cher ami, j-'ai re<;u votre billet et je vois avec plaisij *JUB vous IT' \>romenez de venir a notre petit concert. Je vous U THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 181 wromets, si je me porte bien. Je suis sur de vous avoir, car VOUP vous portez toujours bien. Non, je vous assure (assure you), car hiei j'ai eu mal de tete. Vous ai-je promis quelque chose? Vous ne m'avez rien promis. Je croyais vons avoir prcmis d'aller quelque part avec vous. Si vous me 1'avez promis, je 1'ai oublie. Qu r est-ce .me mon pere vous a promis? II a promis de m'acheter un beau iivre. Doniiez-moi ce que vous m'avez promis. Je ne peux pas Y-OKS le donner avant apres-demain. Votre ami a-t-il recu beaucoup i'srgint? II n'en a guere recu. Combien a-t-il repu? II n'a recu qu'un dollar et un ecu. Combien avez-vous donne a mon fils ? Je iui ai donne six dollars, ce qui fait un peu plus de trente r rancs. Est-ce tout ce que vous Iui avez promis? Oui, c'est touv ce que je luiai promis. Avez-vous de 1'argent Franc ais? J'en ai. Avez- vous des francs, des sous, et des centimes ? Oui, j'en ai. Combien de sous y a-t-il (are there) dans un franc? II y en a vingt. Avez- vous quelques centimes? J'en ai quelques uns. Combien de centimes y a-t-il dans un sou ? II y en a cinq. Et combien y en a-t-il dans un franc? Cent. Avez-vous un habit a prefer a ce pauvre homme? A Iui preter? Ou a Iui donner. J'ai un habit qui est un peu use, il peut 1'avoir. Are your shoes worn out ? They are almost worn out, but not quite. Are you going to have them mended ? The shoemaker has them to mend. Have you anything to lend to cousin Charles? 1 have. To whom have you lent your hat ? I have not lent it; I have given it away, because it is almost worn out. To whom have you piven it away ? I have given it to a pauper, (d un pauvre.} Does your little brother already know how to spell ? He does. Does he spell well ? He does. Hew old is he ? He is six years old. Let me hear him. Robert, come 'lere to spell. How has the doctor's little boy spelt ? He has spelt so so. Is he as old as Robert ? He is older. How have their children written their exercises ? They have written them badly, as usual; but they are young, they are only ten. Has my neighbor ient you his gloves ? He has refused to lend them to me. Do you know Spanish ? No, I do not like it. I have refused to learn it. Does the secretary's son speak Italian ? He speaks it well. Dooa he speak it with every Italian he sees? ( 78.) He does usually, but yesterday lie refused to speak to a stranger. How old are you, my fouug boy? I am eleven nearly. How do our friends speak? Th(,y do not speak badly. Do they listen to what you tell them? They do almost always. How hast thou learned Italian? I have learned it in this manner. As you understand it well, J suppose ft 182 THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) is a gocd way, (une bonne maniere,) is it not 1 ? I believe it is; a" least, I like that way. Have you called me "* I have not called you; but I have called your brother to tell him to piepare his clothes (habits) to start to-morrow for Boston. To start so soon? Yes, 1 want tc send some one to Boston, and he has time to go. Is he come ? No, he has not yet come. Do you know where he ha* gone ^ He has gone to the tailor's to bespeak a coat and a vest. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. To ^^de." stand, to comprehend. To hear, to understand. To wait for, to expect. To lose. Do you understand me ? I do. Have you understood the man ? I have understood him. I hear you, but I do not understand you. The noise. The wind. The noise (roaring) of the wind. Do you hear the roaring of the wind ? I do. I do not. To barJc. What (21 1 .) barks ? Dogs bark. ($ 15.) The barking. Have you heard the barking of the dogs ? [ have. I have not. To wait for some one or something. Comprendre,* 4, (conjugue comms prendre. (24 3 , 25 1 , 342.) Entendre, 4. Attendre, 4. Perdre, 4. J\Ie comprenez-vous ? M'entendet- vous? Je vous comf -ends. Je vous emends Avez-vous compris 1'homme ? Je 1'ai compris. Je vous entends, mais je ne voi;s comprends pas. Le bruit. Le vent. Le bruit du vent. Entendez-vous le buit du vent ? Je 1'entends. Je ne i' entends pas. Aboyer. ($ 144, R. 3.) Qu'est-ce qui aboie ? Les chiens aboient. Z' 'abatement. Avez-\ous entendu 1'aboiement des chiens ? Je 1'ai entendu. je ne entendu. 1'ai pae quelqr.e )~Attendre quelqu'un ou To expect some one or something. S chose. Attendez-vous mon frere 1 Je 1' attends. Attendez-vous des amis ? J'en attends quelques uns. Combien votre frere a-t-il perdu f II a perdu environ un ecu. J'ai perdu plus que lui. Hester, 1, (prend plus sou vent etrt que avoir pour auxiliaire.? 1 1 This verb takes avoir when it signifies to live in, and etrc, when it Signifies to remain. Ex. J'ai resti sept mois a Colmar sans partir de ma chambrc, (Voltaire ;) I remained (lived) seven months at Colmar without leaving my room. Je 1'attendais a Paris mais il est reste a. Lyon, (Th French Academv ;) I waited for him in Paris, but he remained at Lyons. Are you waiting for my brother 1 I am waiting for him. Do you expect some friends ? I do expoct some. How much has your brother lost ? He has lost about a crown. [ have lost more than he. To remain, to stay, to dwell. THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 18? Tne nobleman. Le gentilhomnie. Noblemen. Les gentilshommes. ( 140 7.) Obs. 82. Quand un mot est compose d'un nom et d'un adjectif, I'un ot 'autre prennent la marque (the mark) du pluriel. 1 (Genteel, pretty. Gentil. Where has the nobleman remained ? He has remained at home. I5ave you remained with him ? Ou le gentilhomnie est-il restd ? II est reste a. la maison. fites-vous reste avec lui ? TRENTE-CINQUIME TH&ME. 2de Sec. Si vous ne mettez pas la date ici, mettez-la a la fin du theme. Ou avez-vous mouille vos habits de cette maniere "? Un des gar- gons m'a mouille comme cela. N'importe. Otez vite votrs habit, vos souliers, et vos bas, et mettez-les pres du feu, a secher. Je ne lo peux pas, j'ai besoin d'etre a la maison a six heures et demie, et il est presque six heures et quart a present, ainsi vous voyez que je n'ai pas assez de temps pour faire secher mes habits. Vous avez raison. Alors, allez chez vous, changez-y d'habit, de bas et de souliers, aus- eitot que possible. Mais quel est le garcon qui vous a mouille ? C : est celui qui a mouille le petit Jules 1'autre soir. Le meme ! Oui le meme, en verite. C'est done un mauvais garQon ! Oui, je vous assure. Quel age a-t-il ? Had pcine dix ans. Me comprenez-vous 1 Je vous comprends. Qu'est-ce qui a faitce bruit-la? Jepense que c'est le domestique dans le salon. Quel age a notre voisin ? II n 'a pas tout-a-fait trente ans. Nos amis sont-ils aussi jeunes que nous? Ils sont plus vieux que nous. Quel age ont-ils? L'un a a peine dix- neuf ans, et Pautre en a pres de vingt. Votre oncle est-il aussi age que le mien ? Quel age a le votre ? Le notre a environ cinquante- sept ans et derm. Combien le votre a-t-il? II a a peu pres le meme age. How old are you ? I am hardly eighteen years old. How old is your brother ? He is about twenty-one. He is then older than you 1 To be sure. But as you are much taller, I thought you were older. No, ho is 3 years okier than I, (il a 3 ans de plus que moi.) How old art thou? T am not going to tell you how old I am. Do you understand me ? I do. Does the Frenchman understand us ? Ho does. Do you understand what (ce que} we are telling you ? We do understand it. Dost thou understand French ? I do not yet, but I am learning it. Do we understand the English 1 We do not un- Jeretand them. Do theEnglish understand us? They do. Do we ar.darstand them ? We hardly understand them. Do you hear an) 1 Except the adjective demi, half, which does not take it (19 2 , N. 3.) 134 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSOR. (1.) rrnse? 1 hear nothing. Have you heard the roaring of the wintl * I iiave heard it. What do yon hear ? I hear the barking of the dogs. Whose (29-) do^j is this? It is the dog of the Scotchman. Have you lost youi 3tick? I have not lost it. Has your servant lost my bank-notes 1 (billets de banque ?) He has lost them. Did you go to the ball] [ did not. W T here did you remain ? I remained at home. Where jid the noblemen remain? They remained in the garcen. Has your father lost as much money as I * He has lost more than you. Hew much have I lost? You have hardly lost a crown. Did vmir friends remain at the ball? They remained there. Do you know as much as the English physician ? I do not know as much as he. How many books have you read? I have hardly read two. Do you wait for any one ? I wait for no one. Are you waiting for the man whom I saw this morning? I am waiting for him. Art thou waiting for thy book ^ I am waiting for it. Do you expect your father this evening? I do. Do you expect some friends? rdo. THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON, 36th. Trente-sixicme Le$on } 36me, VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. To beat, beaten, bat. To bite, bitten, bite. Why do you beat the dog ? I beat it because it has bitten me. To owe, owed. How much do you owe me ? I owe you fifty crowns. How much does the man owe you ? He owes me sixty francs. Do our neighbors owe as much as we ? We owe more than they. How much dost thou owe ? Eighty francs. Two hundred crowns. Eighty-three francs. Battre, 4, batlu, batlez. Moidre, 4, mordu, mordez. Pourquoi battez-vous le chien ? Je le bats parce qu'il m'a mordu. Devoir, du. Combien me devez-vous ? Je vous dois cinquante ecus. Combien 1'homme vous doit-il ? II me doit soixante francs. Nos voisins doivent-ils autant que nous? Nous devons plus qu'eux. Combien dois-tu ? Quatre-vingts francs. Deux cents ecus. Quatre-vingt-trois francs. Deux cent cinquante francs. Two hundred and fifty francs. Obs. 83. As seen above, quatre-vingt and cent take s when they are ' owed by nouns ; but they have no s when followed by another numeral. Are you to ? I am to .... Where are you to go this morning after breakfast ? t Devez-vous . . . ? t Je dois .... t Ou devez-\ous aller ce matin apres dejeuner? THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (_!.) 185 I am to go to the store. i t Je dois aller au i lagasin. la your brother to come here soon ? I t Votre frtire doit-il venir ici bientoU He is to come here very soon. \ t 11 doit venir ici bientdt. Qbs. 84. Are you to . . . ? I am to . . ., &c., not being used here in their natural or literal sense, but expressing duly, obligation ; the French translate them by the verb to owe, viz. devez-vous . . . ? Je dois . . ., il doit . . ., &c. To return, (to come back.) It is also translated by retcurner, 1.) At what o'clock do you return from the market ? [ return from it at twelve o'clock. From it, from there, thence. Does the servant return early from the warehouse ? He returns from it at six o'clock in the morning. At nine o'clock in the morning. At five o'clock in the evening. At eleven o'clock at night. Revenir,* 2, revcnu* (conjugufe comme son primitif, venir. (24 3 25, 252, 341.) A quelle heure revcnez-vous ia marche ? J'e reviens a midi. En. Le domestique revient-il de bonno. heure du magasin ? II en revient a six heures du ma* in t A neuf heures du matin, t A ainq heures du soir. t A onze heures du soir TRENTE-SIXIEME THME. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas le quantieme on (either) ici ou a la fin du theme. Bon jour, mon cousin, comment va, ce matin ? Bien ; et vous Moi aussi. Avez-vous bien dormi } (slept.) Oui, j'ai tres-bien dor mi. Savez-vous si le dejeune est pret? Pret! Avez-vous deja faim? Oui, j'ai grand'faim, je vous assure. Tres-bien. Je vais voir si le cuisinier est revenu du marche. Allez, et revenez vite ; ou, plutot (rather) laissez-moi aller avec vous. Bien, allons ensemble voir si le misinier a ete au marche, et s'il en est revenu, et en (at the) meme temps, savoir quand il peut nous donner a dejeuner. Allons, venez, (come, let us go.) Allez-y, mes enfants. Moi, je vais compter les i et les i de dollars que mon vieux fermier m'a apportes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20 20 quarts de dollar, font 5 dollars. C'est bien. A present comptons les i dollars. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, et 1 font 19 J ; ai mal compte. Comptons encore. 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, et 2 font 20. C'est juste, (that's right.) Ah ! vous voila, Messieurs, et bien, le cuisinier a-t-il ete au marche et en est-il revenu? Oui, il en esl revenu, et le dejeuner va etre pret dans un instant. J'en suis charme, car ie commence aussi a avoir faim. Tenez ! (hear !) L domestiqne a donne le signal ; le dejeuner est pret. Allons dejeu- ner. Ponnez-moi mon mouchoir qui est sur le dos du fauteull. La i. Devez-vous diner en ville? (in town 1 ?) Oui, je dois diner Favocat de mon oncle. A quelle heure devp/-vons y aller 1 186 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON Mon cousin et moi, nous devons y aller a 2 heures i DoL il j aller avec vous ? Oui, il doit y veriir avec moi. Nous devons tone deux diner avec Pavocat. Why does your neighbor beat his dog? Because it has bitten hifi ooy. How many times did it bite him ? It has bitten him only once; and that is enough, is it not? Is your farmer returned from market 1 He is not yet returned from it. At what o'clock did your brother return from the ball ? He returned from it at one o'clock in the morning. At what o'clock didst thou come back from thy friend's? I came back (en} at eleven o'clock in the morning. Didst thou remain long with him? I remained with him about an Hour. How long do you intend to remain at the ball ? I intend 'o remain there a few minutes. How long did the Frenchman remain with you? He remained with me for two hours. How long did the Prussians remain in town ? They remained there during three months. Do you intend to remain long with us ? I intend to remain with you 8, 10, or perhaps 15 days, (a fortnight.) How much do I owe you* You. do not owe me much. How much do you owe your tailor? I owe him eighty francs, or about sixteen dollars. How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ? I owe him already eighty-five francs, that is, about seventeen dollars. Do I owe you anything? You owe me nothing. How much does the Englishman owe you? He owea me more than you. Do the English owe as much as the Spaniards ? Not quite so much. Do I owe you as much as my brother? You owe me more than he. Do our friends owe you as much as we ? They owe me less than you. How much do they owe you? They owe me two hundred and fifty francs. How many dollars is that? How much do we owe you ? You owe me three hundred franca, that is, about 60 dollars. VOCABULAIBE. flow long ? During, for. Whilst. Whilst I am here. Ho\r long has he remained there ? A. minute. An hour. A. day. A month. A. year. (he summer. The winter. 2de Section. Combien de temps ? Pendant.* Pendant que. Pendant que je suis ic Combien de temps y est-il reste ? Pendant 1 une minute. 2 Pendant une heure.* Pendant un jour. Pendant un mois. Pendant une annee, 2 L'etd. L'hiver. ' The adverb fendant, when it signifies for, may be omitted in French well as in English. ' Minute, heure, annee, and rue, are feminine nouns, of which the in Til IP TY-SIXTII LJiSSON. (2.) 187 85 l.ts uoms des saisons, (seasons,) des mois, et des joure, cxccpte Vautomne, autumn, qui est masculin et feminin. During the summer. Last winter. To dwell, to live, to reside, to remain. Where do you live ? [ live in William stree.t, number twenty-five. Where did your brother live ? He lived in Rivoli street, number forty- nine. Dost thou live at thy brother's house ? I do not live at his, but at my father's house. Does your friend still live where 1 lived. Ho lives no longer where you lived. No longer. Number, at number. How long were you speaking to the man ? I spoke to him for two hours. Did you remain long with my father ? I stayed there a long time. I remained with him an hour. A long time, long. Pendant 1'ete- L'hiver denrei. Demeurer, I. 1 Ou demeurez-vous ? Je demeure (dans la) rue 2 Guillaum& (au) numero vingt-cinq. 2 Ou votre frere a-t-ii demeurc ? II a demeure (dans la) rue de Rivoh, vau) numero quarante-neuf. 2 Demeures-tu chez ton freve ? Je ne demeu-re pas che; mi, aiais chez mon pere. Votre ami demeure-t-il encore ou j'ai demeure' ? II ne demeure plus ou vous avea demeure. Ne . . plus. Numero, au nume'ro. Combien de temps avez-vous parlfi a 1'homme ? Je lui ai parle pendant deux heures. Etes-vous reste long-temps chez mon pere ? J'y suis reste long-temps. J'y suis reste une heure. Long-temps, (never un long-temps.' TRENTE-SIXIEME TnfbiE. 2de Sec. N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme ici, ou au bout du theme. Avez-vous dit qu'il y a dans le bureau quelqu'un qui veut me voir ? Oui, je vous Fai dit. Quand est-il verm? II y a un momem Qui est-ce? Le connaissez-vous? Non, je ne le connais pas. Je ne Fai jamais vu. Je ne peux pas le voir a present, parce que jo dois etre au quai ahuit heures et'demie, et il est deja huit heures et vingt-cinq minutes. Dites-lui de revenir, cet apres-midi. Non, n'importe, je vais le lui dire moi-meme. Combien de temps avez- vous lu? J'ai lu environ trois quarts d ? heure. Combien de temp definite article is une, a, one, and the definite la, whose plural (les) is tne game as that of le. Feminine nouns take, like masculine nouns, an $ in the plural, as will be seen hereafter. 1 The verb demeurer takes avoir for its auxiliary when it tacans to hve in, and etre when it signifies to remain. Ex. II a demeure a Faris, he has lived in Paris il est demeure court en haranguant le roi, he stopped short : ji Haranguing the king. 2 Dans la before rue, and au before numtro, have been put be^vccn pBJ-utheses, because they are generally omitted. 188 THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) Le feimier a-t-il attendu? II n'a pas attendu long- temps. Jean a-'-u etudie long-temps? Non, pas tres-long-temps. Combien de tempi a-t-il etudie ? Presd'une demi-heure, (19 2 , N. 3.) Qu'a-t-ii fait pen- dant le reste du temps' 1 II a dormi. Quoi ! II a dormi une heure et demie, et il n'a etudie qa'une demi-heure ? C'est comme je vous le dis. A-t-il fait son devoir ? II ditqu'il Pa fait. C'est bon. Cela suffit. N'avez-vous pas promis a M. P. d'aller a son concert 1 Si fait, je le lui ai promis, s ? il a lieu pendant que je suis ici. Partez- vous bientot? Oui, dans quelques jours. Voyez-vous le ecldatqui est malade? Non; mais je vois celui qui 1'a ete. Combien de temps l'a-t-il ete ? 11 1'a ete pendant quinze jours, (a fortnight.) Votre cousin ne va-t-il pas a Charleston pendant Phivei . Si fait, il y va. Y reste-t-il pendant Pete * II n'y reste pas pendant Pete. 6u va-t-il alors? II en revient, pour rester avec nous. Combien de temps avez-vous demeure dans la rue Chestnut? Nous y avons demeure long-temps. Le chien est-il reste pres du feu pendant deux heures? II n'y est reste qu'une heure, parce qu'il a mal au dos. How much have you given for that English horse? I gave 220 dollars for it. Did not your little son give something to that poor little boy? Yes, he has given him 5 cents. Do you owe anything to the grocer? No, I believe I owe him nothing. Does your neighbci take bread from your German baker? He does. Does he owe him anything? I believe he aoes.. Does he owe the butcher? I do not know if he owes him anything. Do you see the sailor who is in the ship? I do not see the one ($ 87) in the ship, but the one en the wee bridge. Do you know his name? I do not. Where are you to go? I am to go to the old bridge. Is your friend's uncle to come here to-day? He is. At what o'clock is he to come? He is to come very soon. When are your sons to go to the play ? They are to go to-night, (ce soir.) When are they to return from it? They are to return from it at half past ten. When are you to go to the physician's? I am to go at ten o'clock at night. When is your son to return from (de chez) the painter's ? He is to return at five o'clock in the evening. Where do you live ? I live in Rivol) street, number forty-seven. Where does your father live? He lives at his friend's house, in Walnut street, (rue Walnut,) No. 251. Where do your brothers live 1 They live in William street, numbci one hundred and twenty. Dost thou live at thy brother's house ? - I live at his hDuse. Do you still live where you did? I live there still. Does your friend still live where he did? He no longer lives where he did. Where does he live at present? He lives at hi* faiher's house THIRTY -SEVENTH LESSOR. (1.) 189 -SEVENTH LESSON, 37th. Trente-septieme Lt$on, 37mc VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. Tdl ; until. Till, until noon, (twelve o'clock.) Till to-morrow. Till this evening. Till the day after to-morrow. lill Sunday. Till Monday. Till evening. Till morning. Uttii the next day. Until the day before yesterday. Till to-day. Until this moment that moment. Till now hitherto. Until then. How long ? Until what timel Jusque, (followed by a preposition and its objective case.) Jusqu'd midi. Jusqu'a demain. Jusqu'a ce soil . Jusqu'apres demain. Jusqu'a dimanche a lundi. Jusqu'au soir. Jusqu'au matin. Jusqu'au lendemavr^ Jusqu'avant hier. Jusqu'a aujourd'hui. Jusqu'a ce moment-ci moment la. Jusqu'a present jusqu'ici Jusqu'alors. Jusqu'd quand ? Jusques a quand ? What hour IWhat period ? Obs. 86. How long, meaning, until what time, what hour, or period, must be translated by jusqu'a quand. But when it means, How many hours, days, &c., or what length of time : (3G 2 ) translate by Combien de tpmps ? or Combien ? For instance : How long did you stay in New York ? may mean : Until what o'clock did you stay in New York, or in other words, when did you leave or quit it ? The answer might then be : At six o'clock, or on Tuesday, &c. Or else it may mean, How many hours or days, &c., did you stay there ? The answer might then be, stx hours, three days, &c. Hence, when How long is used, consult the answer to know exactly the meaning of the question. Until what hour do you take lessons ? We take them till one o'clock, (we quit at 1.) Tuesday, on Tuesday Wednesda/, On Thu.^day Friday Saturday.. Till I return, (till my return.) Till my brother returns, (till my bro- the.'s return.) Till four o'clock in the morning. Till midnight, (till 12 at night.) The reti'rn or coming back. How long did you remain at my fa- ther's house ? I remained at his house till eleven n'clock at night. To be ab!s, (can,) been able, 'could.) Has the hoy been able to read it ? He was aole to read it. He could not. Could yon iind the word ? Yea. I four.d t immediately Jusqu'a quand prenez-vous lemons ? Nous les prenons jusqu'a une heure. Mardi. Mercredi. (On is not trans- lated.) Jeudi. Vendredi. Samedi. (32 s , N. 1J Jusqu'a mon retour. Jusqu'au retour de mon frere. Jusqu'a quatre heures du matin. Jusqu'a minuit. Le retour. Jusqu'a quand etes-vous reste chez men pere ? J'y suis restd jusqu'a onze beuroa du soir. Pouvoir,* pu. (20, 243, 34..) Le garcon a-t-il pu le lire ? ($ 148.) II a pu le lire. II n'a pas pu. Avez-vous pu trouver le mot ? Oui, je Fni trouv^ tout de suite. 190 THIRTY SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) TRENTE-SEPTIEME TII&ME. Ire Sec. N'oubliez pas de mettre le quantieme du mois ici ou a ia fin. Mor cher Lucien, je suis charme de vous veir. Je vous croyai? absent. Depuis quand etes-vous revenu ? Je suis revenu satnedi dernier, Jusqu'a quand ailez-vous rester ici? (How long or until what time.) Je vais y rester jusqu'au retour de mon oncle, et peut- etre plus long-temps. L'attendez-vous bientot? Je 1'attends dans 5 ou 10 jours. Demeurez-vous avec votre cher cousin? Non, je ne t'emeure plus avec lui. Avec qui demeurez-vous? Je re demeure avec psrsonne. Je suis dans un hotel. Allez-vousy rester jusqu'au tetoar de votre oncle ? Je pense que oui. Laissez votre hotel et venez demeurer avec nous. Je vous suis bien oblige. Jusqu'a quand le commis du marchand de livres est-il reste au musee ? II n'y est reste que jusqu'a midi. Pourquoi done 1 ? (so.) Parce qu'il n'a p-as pu. Et pourquoi n'a-t-il pas pu y rester jusqu'a deux heurea comme les autres ? II n'a pas pu, parce que son pere dine de bonne heure. Allez-vous a Lancastre cet ete? Non, je n'y vais pas. Et vous, Jules, y allez-vous? Moi non plus. Et Charlotte et son frere, y vont-ils ? Eux non plus. Le professeur y va-t-il? Lui non plus. Qui y va? Personne n'y va. Combien de temps etes-vous tous restes a Bordeaux? Mon oncle y a demeure pendant 6 ans, mon cousin pendant trois ans, moi pendant six mois; mais ces jeunes garcons ri'y sont restes que quelques jours. Until what time do the carpenters work at noon ? They work till twelve. When do they leave off work in the evening? (or, until what hour do they work ?) Until 6 o'clock, or rather to 6. How long did I work ? (or, until what? &c.) You worked till 4 o'clock in the morning. Has the physician still long to wait ? (encore pom long-temps ?) He has. Am I to remain long here ? You are tn remain here till Sun lay. Is my brother to remain long with you ' He is to remain with us till Monday. How long (until what time ) are we to work ? You are to work till the day after tp-morrow.- - Have you still long to speak ? I have still an hour to speak. Did you speak long? I spoke (ai parle) till the next day. Did you remain, long in my counting-house ? I remained in it till this mo- ment. Have you still long to live at the Frenchman's house ? I Lave still long to live at his house. How long (till what time) have you still to live at his house ? Till winter. Has he swept the floor ? Ha has swept it. How long (lid he remain here ? Till noon, (midi.) Does your friend still live with you^ He lives with me no lou^.ji How long did he live with you? He lived witn me only a year- THIRTY-frEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 193 How Jong (till what time) did you remain at the ball? I remained there till midnight. How long (what time) did you retrain in the ship! I remained an hour in it. Have you remained in the garden till now ? I have remained there till now. VOCABULAIBK. 2de Section. One, some or any one, people, (and they , tef, ifor., in an indefinite sense.) Have they brought my shoes ? They have brought them. They have not brought them yet. What have they said ? They have said nothing. What have they done ? They have done nothing. To be willing, been willing. Has one wished to burn my coat ? No one would burn it. ($ 148 4.) Could they find the books ? They could not find them. Can they do what they w,sh ? They do what they can ; but they do not do what they wish. What do they say ? Nothing new. What do they say new ? They say nothing new. Something or anything new. New. My new coat. Mv new horse. My handsome horse. My new friend. My handsome coat. On. (pronorn indt'fini, toujcure singu- lier. $ 38.) A-t-on apporte mes souliers \ On les a apportes. On ne les a pas encore apporte's. Qu'a-t-ow dit ? On n'a rien dit. Qu'a-t-on fait ? On n'a rien fait? Vouloir,* voulu. (18 1 , 24 3 , 34 1 .) A-t-on voulu brulei mon habit ? On n'a pas voulu le bruler. A-t-on pu trouver les livres ? On n'a pu les trouver. Peut-o/i faire ce qu'on veut ? On fait ce qu'on peut ; niais on in- tuit pas ce qu'on veut. Que dit-on ? Rien de nouveau. Que dit-on de nouveau ? ( 06*. 7.J On ne dit rien de nouveau. Quelque chose de nouveau. Neuf, nouveau, (before a vowel or h mute, nouvel.} 1 Mon habit neuf. Mon nouveau che ;al. Mon beau cheval. Mon nouvel ami. Mon bel habit.* 1 Nouveau (nouvel before a vowel or h mute) is used for things wbicb FORTIETH LESSON. (2.) inarchand n'en a pas beaucoup. N'avoris-nous pas de lait ' Si fait> aous en avons un peu. En avons-nous assez? Nous n'en avons guere, mais assez. Le garcon du cuisinier a-t-il le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin? Non, il ne 1'a pas. Que n'a-t-il pas? II n'a pas le cordon de fil de notre vieux voisin. Le petit garcon iva-t-il pas les bas de coton ? Quels bas de coton ? Ceux du jeune avocat. II ne les a pas. Avez-vous du fromage de 1'epicier? J'en ai un peu. En avez-vous assez ? Je n'en ai pas assez. Avez-vous penr de ce jeune homme-la ? Non, je n'en ai pas peur. Qui a soif 1 Nous avons soif ; et nous avons sommeil. Le menuisier a-t-il "cur du chien ? Non, le chien a peur du menuisier. N"avons-nous paa le parapluie de coton du chapelier? Non, nous ne 1 'avons pas, mais nous avons les gants de fil de son ami. Combien de bceufs avons-nous? Nous en avons trois. Combien en a-t-il? II n'en a qu'un. Combien les Allemands en ont-ils, ou. Les Allemands, combien en ont-ils ? Us en ont cinq. N'en ont-ila pas six? Non, ils n'en ont que cinq. Qui a du courage? Notre jeune commis en a. En a-t-il trop? Non, il n'en a pas trop, maia assez. Ce petit garcon-la a-t-il du coeur? II n'en a guere. Les peintres ont-ils beaucoup d'argent? Non, ils n'en ont guere. En avez-vous beaucoup ? Je n'en ai qu'un peu. Qui en a beaucoup 1 Nous en avons beaucoup. Qu'avons-nous ? Nous avons beaucoup d'or et d'argent. En avons-nous trop ? Nous n'en avons pas trop, mais assez. Les domestiques de 1'epicier combien de verres ont- fls? Ils en ont sept ou huit. N'en ont-ils pas neuf ? Si fait, ils en ont neuf. N'en ont-ils pas dix ? Ils n-'en ont que neuf. N'en ont- ils pas assez ? Pardonnez-moi, ils en ont assez. Combien d'yeux cet homme-ci a-t-il ? II en a deux. Et celui-la, combien en a-t-il ? II n'en a qu'un. N* avez-vous qu'un oiseau ? Pardonnez-moi, j'en ai deux. Ces gargons ont-ils beaucoup de batons ? Quels gar^ons ? Ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? Ni ceux-ci ni ceux-la, mais ceux du menui- sier. Ils n'en ont pas beaucoup. Avez-vous le dernier papier? Non, je ne 1'ai pas. Avez-voua un papier ? Non, je n'en ai pas. Le ministre a-t-il le journal de hier? II en a un. Votre frere a-t-il le parapluie du president? Non, mais il a le baton du gouverneur, (governor.} Qui a le cheval du gouverneur ? Notre vieux matelot 1'a. A-t-il les gants du pre- sident ? Non, le president lui-meme les a. Le lieutenant-gouver- neur a-t-il les billets du prefet? 11 ne les a pas. II n'a pas quoit II n'a pas les billets du pretet. Je les ai. Combien de francs le president du Senat a-t-il? II n'en a pas; mais il a des dollars Combien en a-t-il? II en a beaucoup. En a-t-il trop? II n'en a pas trop. En avors-nous assez ? Nous n'en avons pas assez, T^es FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (I.) 207 iren ont-ils pas assez ? Us n'en ont pas fop. Qni en a trop ? Personne n'en a trop. Le president et le vice-president om- Js beaucoup d'amis? Ils en ont beaucoup; mais Je prefet n'en a guere. N'en avons-nous pas beaucoup ? Si fait, nous en avona beaucoup. Qui en a peu ? Le Russe en a peu. Avez-vous quelques sous? Oui, j'en ai quelques uns. Ai-je quelques ecus? Vous n'en avez pas, mais vous avez des francs, et des billets de banque. Combien en ai-je ? Vous en avez dix. N'ai- je pas deux billets de dix dollars! Non, vous n'en avez qu'un, mais vous arez trois billets de cinq dollars. Jean a le premier volume de 1'ouvrage de Thiers, n'a-t-il pas le second'? Non, il ri'a que le premier. L'Americain n'a-t-ii pas le dernier vclume ? Non. U ne 1'a pas. Qui 1'a? Personne ne Fa. Quelqu'un a le journal du cinq de ce mois-ci, n ; est-ce pas? Le Russe a celui du six, du sept, et du huit, mais non pas celui du cinq. Quels papiers le jeune chapelier a-t-il? II a ceux que vous n'avez pas. Les Allemands n'ont-ils pas froid ? Non, ils ont chaud et soif. Le menuisier et Fepieier n'ont-ils pas tort? Non, ils ont raison. Notre cord onnier n'a-t-il pas les souliers de cuir du gouverneur? -II a ceux du lieu- tenant-gouverneur. J'ai le douzieme exercice, mon ami Charles a le trei/.ieme, les avocats ont le quatorzieme, qui a le quinziemel Personne n'a le quirizieme, mais nous avons le seizieme et le dix- septieme. Quel cahier avez-vous? J'ai le mien. Le fils de 1'ami de votre maitre est-il ici? Non, il est a Bostor.. FORTY-FIRST LESSON, 41st.- VoCABtJLAIEE. Tht one u/'o, he who, him who. Those wha They who. To perceive, perceived, perceive. Do you perceive the scholar who comes ? I do perceive the one who is coming. The one on ... Those in .... ($ 87.) I do not like the one (those) coming. Does your unc.e perceive the soldiers who are going to the covered bridge ? ie does not perceive those who go. Whom do the children perceive ? They ocrceivc nobody. Quarante et unieme Lecon, 41me. Ire Section. Celui qui. ($ 40.) Ceux qui. Apercevoir, aperfu, apercevez, fconjt gue comme recevoir. (24 1 , 24 3 , 31 .) Apercevez-vous 1'ecolier qui vient ? J'aper^ois celui qui vient. Celui qui est sur . . . Ceux qui sont dans . . . Je n'aime pas celui qui vient, ccua qui viennent. Votre oncle aper^oit-il lessoldataqni vont au pont couvert ? II n'aperc.oit pas ceux qui y vont. Qui les enfants aper$oivent~il* 9 Ils n'apercoivent personne. 208 FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (I.) [low was the weather yesterday ? What kind of weather was it yest. ? What weather had we yesterday ? Was it fine weather yesterday ' It was bad weather yesterday. It is fine weather this morning. It is neither cold nor warm, but plea- sant and dry. Dark, obscure. Clear, light. Dusky, gloomy. Dry. Wet, damp. Is the weather damp ? il is not damp, but dry. The weather is too dry to be pleasant. The moonlight, moonshine. The sun. Is it moonlight ? It is. Is it too T Quel temps a-t-il fait hier ? Quel temps avons-nous eu hici ? t A-t-il fait beau temps hier ? t II a fait mauvais temps hier. t II fait beau temps ce matin. t II ne fait ni chaud ni froid, mak agreable et sec. Obscur. Clair. Sombre. Sec. Humide. t Fait-il humide ? t II ne fait pas humide, mais sec. t II fait trop sec pour etre agreable. t Le clair dc June. Le soleil. t Fait-il clair de June ? II fait clair de lune. t Fait-il trop de soleil ? Have we too much sun ? sunny ? It is too sunny. It is not. This syrup. His vinegar syrup. Have you tasted this vinegar syrup ? I have. I have not. How do you like it ? Obs. 95. The French seldom use aimer in similar cases. What do you think of it ? t Qu'en pensez-vous ? I like it pretty well. t Je le trouve assez bon. I do not like it at all. To learn by heart. Learned by heart. Learn every day something by heart. I learn by heart. What have you learned by heart ? We learned our exercises. Who likes to learn by heart ? This fish. Do you like fish ? (Obs. 53.) t II en fait trop. II n'en fait pas trop Ce sirop. Son strop de vinaigre. Avez-vous goute ce sirop de vinaigre ? Je 1'ai goute. Je ne 1'ai pas goute. t Comment le trouvez-vous ? Je 1'aimc t Je ne le trouve pas bon du tout. Apprendrepar cceur. Appris par cceur Apprenez tousles jours quelque chose par oseur. J'apprends par cceur Qu'avez-vous appris par cceur ? Nous avons appris nos themes pai cceur. Qui aime a apprcndre par cceur ? Ce poisson. Aimez-vous le poisson 1 QUARANTE ET UNIEME TnibiE. Ire Sec. Comment est le temps anjourd'hui? II fait tres-beau temps. A-t-il fait beau hier? II a fait mauvais hier. Quel temps a-t-il fai- ce malin ? II a fait mauvais, mais a present il fait agreable. Fait-U chaud? II fait tres-chaud. Le therm ometre est a 81 degres et $. II ne fait pas froid, alors. Non, en verite, il ne fait pas froid, mais tres-chaud, au contraire. Avez-vous deja ete au nouveau jardin de M ? Non, je n'y ai pas encore ete. Pourquoi done? Parce que nous avons eu mauvais temps. Avez-vous peur du mauvaU (amps'? Je n'en ai pas peur quand je suis oblige de sortir; mais ift FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 209 traime pas a sortir qnand il pleut. Mais il n'a pas fait de pluie depuis plnsieurs jours. Vous avez oublie; car, il en a fait hier, avar: 4 .-hier, et le jour avant. C'est-a-dire : jeudi, mercrcdi, et mardi. Oui, 7DUs avez raison. Do you perceive the man who is coming? I do not perceive him. Do you perceive the soldier's children! I do perceive them. Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden ? I do not per- ceive thoue who are going into the garden, but those who are going to the market. ^-Does your brother perceive the man who has lent hiin money? He does not perceive the one who has lent him, but the one to whom he has lent some. Dost thou see the children who are studying? I do not see those who are studying, but those who are playing. Dost thou perceive anything? I perceive not-hing. Have you perceived my parents' warehouses? I have perceived them. Where have you perceived them ? I have perceived them on that side of the road. Allez-vous manger de ce poulet ou de ce poisson? De ce poulet, s'il vous plait. Je n'aime pas le poisson. Quel morceau voulez- vous? N'importe. Donnez-moi le premier verm. N'avez-vous paa de choix.? Non, je n'ai pas de choix. Tenez, voici un bon morceau; du moins, je 1'aime. L'aimez-vous aussi ? Je crois que oui, car, je mange de tout; j'aime tout. Voulez-vous un verre de vin ou un verre de sirop? Donnez-moi un verre de sirop; mais n'y mettez pas beaucoup de sirop. Mettez-1'y vous-meme. Donnez-le-moi Je vais y en mettre un peu. Tenez, voila le verre. Mettez-y le sirop qu'il vous faut. Qui est ce petit Monsieur?^ C'est mon plus jeune frere. Enverite! Est-ce un bon enfant? Etudie-t-ilcomme il faut? II fait assez bien son devoir. Aime-t-il a apprendre par ccEur ? Oui, il apprend tous les jours quelque chose par co3ur. Lea ecoliers n'aiment-ils pas generalcmcnt (generally) a apprendre par ccDur? Jl y en a qui aiment a le faire; mais beaucoup aiment a etudier, mais non pas a apprendre par ccBur. Do you intend going to see the new vessel of Mr. Tessier? I Jo. When? to-morrow, or the day after? The day after to-mor- row, if the weather is fine. Is it light enough in your counting- house? It is not light in it. Do you wish to work in mine? I do wish to work in it. Is it light there ? It is very light there. Why cannot your brother work in his warehouse? He cannot we rk there, because it is (il y faii} too dark. W r here is it too dark? In his warehouse. Is it light in that hole ? Il is dart there. Is the \vea* ther dry ? It is very dry. Is it damp ? It is not damp. It is too dry. Is it moonlight? ft is not moonlight: it is very damp. Of 210 FORTF-FIRST LESSON. (2.) what does youi uncle speak ? He speaks of the fine weather.(M what do those men speatf ? They speak of fair and bad weather. Pave you tasted that wine ? I have tasted it. How do you like it 3 I like it well. How does your cousin like that cider? He does no* like it. Which wine do you wish to taste ? I wish to taste that which you have tasted. Will yo r i taste this tobacco ? I have tasted it already. How do you like it 1 ? I like it well. Why do you nA taste that cider ? Because I am not thirsty. Why does your friend not taste this beef? Because he is not hungry. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. L'eleve. t Une fois par jour. The pupil. Once a day. Thrice, or three times a month. So much a year. So much a head. So much a soldier. Six times a year. Early in the morning. We go out early in the morning. When did your father go out ? To speak of some one or something. Of whom do you speak ? We speak of the man whom you know. Of what are they speaking ? They are speaking of the weather. To be pleased, content, satisfied with. t Trois fo.s par mois. t Tant par an. t Tanl par tcte. (!M tete, the head, est un nom fenO Tant par soldat. Six fois par an. Le matin de bonne heure. Nous sortons le matin de bonne heure. Quand votre pere est-il sorti ? Parler de qudqu'un ou de quelque chose. De qui parlez-vous ? Nousparlons Je 1'homme --.ue vous connaissez. De quoi parlent-ils ? Ils parlent du temps. Eire content de.... Ohs. 96. To be pleased, cannot be translated literally in French ; because iho verb p*aire is intransitive, and cannot be used in the passive form. Are you satisfied with this man ? I am pleased with him. Are you pleased with your new coat ? I am pleased with it. What are you pleased with ? Displeased, discontented. [ am displeased with him, or it. They speak of your friend. Do they ? What do they say of him ? Are they speaking of your book ? They are. They are not. Not. ($171, N. 2.) The teacher and hi.s pupil have not gone out. F> wuisfied with what you have. Etes-vous content decet homme-ci ? J'en suis content. Etes-vous content de votrc habit neuf? Yen suis content. De quoi etes-vous content ? Mecontent. J'e suis mecontent. On parle de votre ami. En parle-t-on ? Qu'en dit- jn t Parle-t-on de votre livre ? On en parle. On n'en parle point Ne point (nearly synonymous to ... pas.) Le maitre et son eleve ne sent poinv sortis. Soyez content de co que voua avez. FORTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 311 I am not dissatisfied with it. Do they speak of the cholera? They do. What do they talk of? (or about ?) Nothing is spoken of. Water. The water. Some water. Wine and water. Syrup and water. A glass (or drinl*} of water. A drink of cider. A glass of wine and water of mine- ral water. Je n'en suis point mecontent. Parle-t-on du cholera ? On en parle. De quoi parle-t-on ? On ne parle de rien. Eau, (ieminin.) U eau. De V tan, Du vin et de 1'eau. Du sirop et d 1'eau. Un verre d'eau. Un verre de cidre. Un verre de vin et d'eau d'eau minerale. QUARANTE ET UJUEME TlliME. 2dc SeC. Ah ! vous avez un morceau de pain et de beurre. Allez-v us 10 manger, ou le donner a quelqu'un ? Je vais le manger, car j ? a grand'faim. Comment ! Vous avez deja faim ? II n'est pas tar-a cependant. Combien de fois mangez-vous par jour? Nous man- geons quatre fois. Combien de fois vos enfants boivent-ils par jour? Us boivent plusieurs fois. Buvez-vous aussi souvent qu'eux? Je bois plus souvent. Combien de fois par mois allez-vous au theatre ? le n'y vais qu'une fois par mois. I-es eleves y vont-ils ? Us n'y vont point. De quoi parlent-ils ? Us parlent de leurs lecons. Font* Us trois themes par jour? Us n'en font que deux, mais ils les font comme il faut. Avez-vous pu lire le billet qu'on vous a ecrit? Je n'ai pas pu le lire tout. Est-ce qu'il est mal ecrit? Oui, je vous assure ; voyez, vous-meme. C'est vrai. Soyez le bien venu, M. Allons prendre un verre d'eau minerale. J'y mets toujours du sirop et vous ? Moi, non. How many times a year does your cousin go to the ball ? Ho goes two or three times during the winter. Do you go there as often as he? I am not used to go. How oftei does your cook go to market? He goes generally once a day; sometimes twice. Then he goes every day, except (excepte) Sunday; does he not? Yes, he does Whom are you inquiring for? I inquire for your English cousin. Is he at home? No, he is not. Do you like a large hat ? I do not like a large hat, but a large umbrella. What do you like to do? I like to write. Do you like to see these little boys? I like to see them. Do you like mineral watei, with syrup ? I do. Does your brother like cider? Ho does. What do the soldiers like? They like wine. Dost thou like tea ni coffee? I like both. Do these children like to study? They like to study arid to play. Do you like to read and tc write? I like to reo/i and to write. How many times a day do you go out? I go 212 FORTY-SECOND AESSON. (1.) out as often as I need to go out. Do you often go to my uncle's? 1 go there six times a year. Do you understand the man who is speaking to you ? I do not. Why do you not? Because he speaks too badly. Does this man know French? He knows it, but I dc not know it. Why do yen not learn it 1 I have no time to learn it. Of whom have they (on) spoken? They have spoken of your friend. Have they not spoken of the physicians? They have net spoken of tnem. Do they not speak of the man of whom we have spoken? They do speak of him. Have they spoken of the r.c bio- men ? They have spoken of them. Have they spoken of those of whom we speak? They have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken of others. Have they spoken of our children or of those of our neighbors ? They have spoken neither of ours nor of those of our neighbors. Of which children have they spoken? They have spoken of our masters. Do they speak of my work? They do speak of it. Are you satisfied with your pupils? I am satisfied with them. How does my brother study? He studies well. How many exercises have you studied? I have already studied forty-one. Is your master satisfied with his scholar? He is satisfied with him, and with the presents he has received. FORTY-SECOND LESSON, 42d.Quarante-dcuxieme Lcfon, 42we. VOCABULAIBE. Ire Section. OF PASSIVE VERBS Des Verbes Passifs. Passive verbs represent the subject as receiving or suffering from otliera ,he action expressed by the verb. In French, as in English, they are con- jugated by means of the auxiliary verb et re, to be, joined to the past par- ticiple of the active verb. Thus any active verb may be changed into the passive voice. The past participle agrees with the nominative. ( 159.) Active voice. Passive voice. Voix active. Voix passive. I love. I am loved. J'aime. Je suis aime". Thou condurt st. Thou art conduct- Tu conduis. Ta es conduit. ed. Ho praises. He is praised. II loue. 11 est loue. We hear. We are heard. Nous entendons. Nous sommes entendus. iTou punish. You are punished. Vouspunissez, Vous etes punia They blame. They are blamed. Us blament. Us sent blamea To praise, praised, praise. Loiter, 1, loue, louez, (impi'ra.; To punish, punished., punish. Punir, 2, puni, pwiissez. To blame, blamed, blame no Blamer, 1, blame, Ne bldmez pc one. soniie. By. Par or de. Byrne, By us. De or par moi. de or par nous. FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) 213 By thee, by you. By him, by them. By whom 13 the naughty punished ? [Ie is punished by his father. By whom is the good loved ? Be is loved by everybody. Ok*. 97. Par is used lor physical or menial actions, affections of the heart or soul. Which man is praised, and which is blamed ? Naughty, wicked. The naughty. (Skilful, clever. Diligent. Assiduous, industrious, studious. Idle, lazy. Ignorant. The idler, the lazy fellow. To reward. To esteem. To despise. De or par toi, de or par voua. De or par lui, d'orpareux. Par qui le mechant est-il puni ? II cst puni par son pere. De qui le bon est-il aime ? II est aime de to at le monde. De relates to ti?c To hate, hating, hated. I hate, thou hatest, he hates. Good, wise.) These children are loved, because they are studious and good. To travel (to go) to a .... (to the.) Where has he travelled to ? He has travelled to Vienna. Is it good travelling f It is good travelling. It ifa bad travelling. In the spring. It is bad travelling in the winter. Quel homme est loue, et lequel est blame? Mechant. Le mechant. Habile. Diligent. Assidu, industrieux, studieux. Paresseux. Ignorant. Le paresseux. Recompenser, 1. En jmer, 1. M6- priser, 1. Hair* 2, haissant, hat. (24 1 .) Je hais, tu hais, il hait, (le sing, eel irrdgulier.) Sage, (said only of childn. i.) Ces enfants sont aimes, parce qu'iln sont studieux et sages. Aller,* 1, a ... (au) (avant un n^m.) Ou st-il alle"? II ect alle a Vienne. t Fait-il bon voyager ? t II fait bon voyager, t II fait mauvais voyager. Dans le printemps, au printemps. II fait mauvais voyager dans 1'hiver QUARANTE-DEUXIEME TH&ME. Ire Sec. DC qui avez-vous parle ? Nous avons parle de vous. IVPavez- vous loue ? Nous ne vous avons pas loue, au contraire, nous vous avons blame. Pourquol m 'avez-vous blame'? Parce que voua n'etudiez pas bien. Votre frere vous a parle de quoi ? II a parle de BCS livres, de ses chevaux et de ses chiens. Pourquoi ses enfants eont-ils aimes? Parce qu'ils sont bons, ils sont aimes. Sont-ils plus Rages que nous? Ils ne sont pas plus sages que vous, mais ils sont plus studieux. Votre cousin est-il aussi assidu que le mien? II est aussi aesidu que le votre, mais le votre est plus sage que le mien. Fttit-il bon voyager au printemps? II fait bon voyager au printempa ut dans 1'automne ; mais il fait mauvais voyager dans l'ete et dans I'hiver. Aimez-vous a voyager? Avez-vous quelque fois voyage en luver? J'aime assez a voyager, el j'ai sou vent voyage en ete muis 234- FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) pas en hiver. Le general est souvent malade, vous sav r ez qr.'il a ti goutte. Pourquoi ne voyage-t-il pas ? II dit que le printemps est trop humide, Pete trop chaud, et Phiver trop froid. Et que dit-il de Pan tomne ? II dit qu'alors il est trop occupe pour voyager. Are you loved? I am loved. By whom are you loved? I am loved by my uncle. By whom am I loved ? Thou art loved by thy parents. By whom are we loved ? You are loved by your friends. By whom are those boys loved ? They are loved by their neigh- bors. By whom is this man conducted ? He is conducted by me. Where do you conduct him to? I conduct him home. By whom are \ve blamed? We are blamed by our enemies. Why are we blamed by them ? Because they do not love us. Are you punished by your master? I am not punished by him, because I am good and studious. Are we heard ? We are. By whom are we heard ? We are heard by our neighbors. Is thy master heard by his pupils ? He is heard by them. Which children are praised ? Those that are good. Which are punished ? Those that are idle and naughty -Are we praised or blamed ? We are neither praised nor blamed. Is our friend loved by his masters? He is loved and praised by them, because he is studious and good; but his brother is despised by his, because he is naughty and idle. Is he sometimes punished'' He is (il Pesfy every morning and every evening. Are you some- times punished? I am (je ne le suis) never; I am loved and rewarded by my good masters. Are these children never punished? They are (Us ne le son*) never, because they are studious and good; but those are so (le sonf) very often, because they are idle and naughty. Who is praised and rewarded? Skilful children are praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed, despised, and punished. Who is loved, and who is hated ? He who is studious and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is hated. Must one be (faut-il etre} good in order to be loved ? One must be so, (ilfaut Vetre.^ What must one do (que faut-il faire) in orde. to be loved? One must be good and assiduous. What must one do in order to be rewarded? One must be (ilfaut etre} skilt'..L and study much. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. To drive, to rids in a carriage. To ride (on horseback). TD go on foot, to walk. Do you like to ride on horseback ? I like to drive. To live, lived, living. \ live, chou livest, he .ives. Aller en voiture, Aller a cheval, Aller a pied, take the aux iliary etre. Aimez-vous a monter a chcval ? J'aime a aller en voiture. Vivre,* 4, vecu, vtvanl, Je vis, tu via. il vii. FORTY-SECOND LEbSoN. (2.) 215 Is it good living in Paris ? Is the living good in Paris ? It is good living there. The living is good there. Dear. Is the living dear in London ? Is it dear living in London ? The living is dear there. Thunder. The thunder roars. This storm. This fog, mist. ' it windy ? Does the wind blow ? it is windy. The wind blows. I*, is not windy. It is very windy. Does it thunder ? Is it foggy ? It is stormy. It is not stormy. Does the sun shine ? 't thunders very much. ^s soon as, as soon as I, as they. AS soon as I have eaten, I drink. As soon as I have taken off my shoes, I take off my stockings. What do you do in the evening ? Do I sleep ? Thou sleepest. Who sleeps ? Does the child sleep ? He still sleeps. Without money. Without speaking. Without saying anything, (a word.) At last. To arrive. Arrived. Has he arrived at last ? He has not arrived yet. Is he coming at last ? To be sure, he is. And then. As soon as he has supped, he reads, and then he sleeps. I t Fait-il bon vivre a Paris I > t II y fcit bon vivre. | Cher. > t Fait-il cher vivre a Londresf t II y fait cher vivre. Le tonnerre. Le tonnerre gronda Cet orage. Ce brouillard. t Fait-il du vent? t II fait du vent. t II ne fait pas de vent. t II fait beaucoup de vent. t Fait-il du tonnerre ? t Fait-il du brouillard ? t II fait de 1'orage. t II ne fait pas d'orage. t Fait-il du soleil? t II fait beaucoup de tonnerre. Aitssitot que, aussitdtquemoi, qu'eux Aussitot que j'ai mange, je bois. Aussitot que j'ai ote mes souliera, j'ote mes bas. Que faites-vous le soir ? Est-ce que je dors ? Tu dors. Qui dort ? L'enfant dort-il ? II dort encore. Sans argent, t Sans parler. (Dir. 1.' t Sans rien dire, t Sans dire un mot. Enfin. Arriver, 1. Arrive 6 . (&repour auxil.f Est-il enfin arrive ? II n'est pas encore arrive". Vient-il enfin ? Sans doute, il vient. Puis, et puis. Aussitot qu'il a soupe, il lit, puis il dort. QrjARANTE-DEUXIEME TH^ME 2de Sec. Aimez-vous a monter a cheval le matin? Non, mais j'aime & mouter a cheval le soir. Pourquoi? Parce que le soir, il fait plus frais, et vous dorme/ mieux apres votre retour. Je crois que vous iivez raison, et cependant on monte plus a cheval le matin que le oir. Votre frere a-t-il jamais monte a cheval "? II n'y a jamaia monte. Votre oncle monte-t-il a cheval aussi souvent que votre pere'? Us vont souvent a cheval Pun avec 1'autre. Avez-vous ete en voiture au pop.! de fil de fer ? Oui, nous y avons ete plusieurs foia V avez-vous ^eja 6te achevaH Non, je n'y ai jamais ete a cheval 216 FORTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) Allons-y cet apres-midi. A cheval ou en voiture 1 A cheval. Norij mais a pied, si vous voulez. Aimez-vous a aller a pied ? Oui, j'aime beaucoup a alier a pied ; il fait trop de po'issiere pour y aller a cheval Have you been in London ? I have been there. Is the living good there ? The living is good there, but dear. Is it dear living in Paris ? It is good living there, and not dear. Do you like travel- ling in France ? I like travelling there, because one finds good peo- ple (de bonnes gens) there. Does your friend like travelling in Hol- iand 1 He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. Do you like travelling in Italy ? I do like travelling there, because the living is good there, and one (et qu'on y) finds good people there ; but the roads are not very good there. Do the English like to travel in Spain? They do like to travel there but they find f.he roais there too bad. How is the weather ? The weather is very bad. Is it windy? It is very windy. Was it stormy yesterday ? It was very stormy, (un grand orage.) Do you go to the market this morning? I do go thither, if it is not stormy. Do you intend going to France this year? (ceite annee?) I intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. Do you like to go on foot ? I do not like to go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (quand) I am travelling. Will you go on foot ? I cannot go on foot, because I am tired. What sort of weather is it ? It thunders. Does the sun shine ? The sun does not shine; it is foggy. Do you hear the thunder? it roars. Yes, I hear it: it roars much. Is it fine weather? The wind blows hard, and the thunder roars much. What do you do in the evening? I work as soon as I have supped. And what do you do afterwards ? Afterwards I sleep. When do you drink ? I drink as soon as I have eaten. When do you sleep ? I sleep as soon as I have supped. Have you spoken to the merchant ? I have spoken to him. What has he said? He has left (parti*} without saying anything. Can you work without speaking? I can work, but not (iion pas) study French without speaking. Wilt thou go for some wine ? I cannot (point) go for wine without money. Have you bought any horses ? I do not buy without money. Has your father arrived at last ? He has arrived. When did he arrive ? This morn- ing at four o'clock. Has your cousin set out at last ? He has not set out yet. Have you at last found a good master? I have at lasl found one. Are you at last learning German ? I am at last learning it. Why have you not already learned it ? Because I have not been able to find a good master. 3RTY-THIRD LESSON. (I.) 217 FORTY- TJIikD LESSON, 43d. Quaiante-troisiem Leqon, 43me. VOCABULAIRB. Ire Section. OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. Des Verbes Rejlechis ou Pro<..ominauz. See ($ 180), and study it carefully. T.:> cat yourself. To cut myself. To cut ou. selves. Vous couper. He couper. Nous couper. se coupor Do you burn yourself? I do noi burn myself. ^Tou do aot burn yourself. I see myself. I do noi. Do I see myself? He sees himself. He does not. We see ourselves. They see themselves. They do not. Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to warm myself. Does he wish to warm himself? He does wish to warm himself. They wish to warm themselves. To enjoy, to divert, to amuse myself. 1 > To pass or spend my time. i Let me amuse myselt. Amuse your- self. Enjoy yourself, but do not neglect your duty. How do you spend or pass your time I 1 I pass it in reading. He passe* his time in playing. Each. Each one. Each man. Each of those men. Each man amuses himself as he likes. To cut himself. To cut herself. To cut itself. To cut one's self. ) Vous brulez-vous. ? Je ne me brulc point. Vous ne vous brulez pas. Je me vois. Je ne me vois point. Est-ce que je me vois ? 11 se voit. II ne se voit point. Nous nous \oyons. Us se voient. Us ne se voient point. Voulez-vous vous chauffer ? Je veux me chauffer. Veut-il se chauffer ? II veut se chauffer. Us veulent se chauffer. M'amuser, 1, (a, avant 1'infinitit.) Laissez-moi m'amuser. Amusez- vous. Amusez-vous, mais ne negligez point votre devoir. t A quoi vous amusez-vous ? t Je m'amuse a lire. t II s' amuse a jouer. Chaque (avec le nom.) Chacun (sana nom.) Chaque homme. Chacun de COB hommes. Chaque homme s' am use comme il veut. Chacun s'amuse de son mieux. Le gout. Le bon gout. Chaque homme a son gout. Le mien est d'etudier. Each one amuses himself in the best way h3 can. The lasts. The good taste. F.ich man has his taste. Mine is to study. Ole. 98. Translate is to, meaning, consists in, by est de t (piind the prepos.) 1 Vous amusez voui ? which is much used by the French, is rendered in English, not by : do you amuse yourself? but by, pass or spend your time te above. 19 218 FORTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) QUARANTE-TROTSIME THME. Ire Sec. Ah! vous voila, enfin! Je vous ai attendu long-temps, Je snif fache de vous avoir fait attendre ; mais je n'ai pas pu ( 14d) venir plutot. Quelqu'un est-il malade chez vous ? Non, mars .... N'irr- porte. Parlons de votre nouveau ch-eval. Vous plait-il? (arc yon pleased ?) II ne me plait pas beaucoup. Pourquoi done ? II es1 bon, il va bien j mais il est si grand ; si grand que j'ai 1'air d'un enfant quand je suis dessus. L'avez-vous essaye deja? Oui, deux fois. Est-il difficile a monter? Non, pas du tout. Joseph. Joseph! OB ra'appelle. Je crois que c r est mon oncle qui a besoin de moi Allez, alors. Adieu. Attendez. Je veux vous demander queioue chose. Quoi ? Voulez-vous revenir ce soir ? Ce soir ? Je crois que non. Je suis tres-occupe. Mais vous-meme, venez me voir. Et pourquoi? Si vous etes si occupe, nous ne pouvons ni parler ni nous amuser ensemble. Vous avez raison.; mais, il me faut partir. Adieu, au plaisir. Au plaisir. Who kindles your fire? Our servant does. Does he kindle it well? He burns himself sometimes. Does he make your coffee? Yes, and he does il first-rate, (excellent.) You have been in Eng- land, have you not? Yes, I have. And in Ireland too? No, I would nol (did not wish to) go there. Were you afraid to go ? Yes, a little. How i* the living there? (y vit-on?) So, so; not so well as in England and France. Where is the living dearer, in Paris or in London ? It is dearer in Paris, no, 1 mean in London. Do peo- ple despise the lazy and the wicked ? Yes, people despise them. What is esteemed? Merit is. Do scholars love or hate theii teachers? Some love and esteem them; others hate them. The studious is generally esteemed, is he not ? Yes, he is, by every- body. Do parents punish their bad children ? Yes, they do, when these do something wrong, (mal.) Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass ? I see myself in it. Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass' 1 They ca;i see themselves therein. Why does your brother not light the fire ? He does not light it, because he is afraid of burning him- self. Why do you not cut your bread? I do not cut it, because I fear to cut my finger. Have you a sore finger ? I have a sore finger and a sore foot. Do you wish to warm yourself? I do wish to warm myself, because I am very (grand) cold. Why does that man not warm himself ? Because he is not cold. Do your neighbors warm themselves ? They warm themselves, because they are cold. How do you pass your time ? I pass it in the best way I can. How do your children pass their time ? They pass it in studying, writing O^rd playing.- How does your cousin spend his * He amuses him- FORTY-THIRE LESSON. (2.) 219 self in /ending good books and in writing to his frieudy. What do you do when you have nothing to do at home ? I go to the play, and to the concert. I often say, " Every one amuses himself as he likes."- Every man has his taste ; what is yours 1 Mine is to study, to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, and the ball, and to ride. His, is to do nothing. Theirs, is to have fine dogs, VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. Each of vou, us, them. The world, (the people.) Genteel people. Every one, everybody, says and be- lieves so. Everybody speaks of it, them, you, &c. Every one (any one) is liable to make a mistake. To be subject to (plagued with) the toothache. We are all liable to make mistakes. To mistake, to be mistaken. Do not make a mistake (impera.) Are you mistaken ? I am. Is he mistaken ? He is not. To deceive, to cheat. He has cheated me. He has cheated me of a hundred francs. You cut your finger. Chacun de vous, de nous, d'eux. Le monde. Le beau monde. Tout le monde le dit et le croit. Tout le monde (chacun) en parle. Tout homme (chaque homme) est sujet a se tromper. E\re sujet au mal de dents. Nous sommes tous sujets a nous tromper. t Me, te, se, nous, vous tromper, 1. t Ne vous trompez pas. ( 55.) t Vous trompez-vous ? Je me trompe.. t Se trompe-t-il ? II ne se trompe point. Tromper, 1. II m'a trompe. II m'a trompe de cent francs. Vous vous coupez le doigt. Obs. 99. When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself, the voro is made reflective. I cut my nails. A hair. To pull out, pluck out, extract, snatch. He pulls out his hair. He cuts his hair. The dentist extracts one of his teeth. To go away, (tear or take one's self away from a place.) Obs. 100. Je m'en vais, is equivalent to : I take myself from here. Je me coupe les onglcs. Un cheveu, (plur. x.) Arracher, 1. II s'arrache les cheveux. Jl se coupe les cheveux. Le dentiste arrache une de ses deiita t AT, t', s', nous, vous en aller,* I. Are you going away ? I am. I am not. js he going away ? He is not. (a he not going away ? He is. .\'n 1 going ? You are. t Vous en allez-vous ? Je m'en vaia t Je ne m'en vais pas. t S'en va-t-il ? II ne s'en va point t Ne s'en va-t-il point ? II fe'en va, t M'en vais-je ? Vous vous en ullrt. 20 FORTY-THIRD LESSOK. (2.) Are we not going away ? t Ne nous en alloiM-nous pan ? Ves, we are. Are these pupils going away ? They are not. To feel sleepy. t Si iait, nous nous en allona. t Ses eleves s'er. vont-iis ? t Us ne s'en vont pas. t Avoir envie df donnir. Do you feel sleepy ? t Avez-vous envie de dormir / I do feel sleepy. t J'ai envie de donnir. To soil. Do not soil, Salir, 2. Ne salissez pas. T* /ear, dread, feared, fear nothing, i Craindre* 4, craint. Ne craignci rien. Xftrf to fear. $ 1717.) I dread. He fears he has nothing. He fears to soil his fingers. Do you dread to go out ? I do dread to go out. He is afraid not to go there. Do you fear that man ? I do not fear him. What do you fear ? Nothing. Whom do you fear ? Nobody. Ne pas craindre (de av. 1'infin.) Je crains. II craint de ne rien avoir II craint de sc salir les doi;,ts. Craignez-vous ile sortir ? Je crains de sortir. II craint de ne pas y aller. Craignez-vous cet horn me ? Je ne le crains pas. Que craignez-vous ? Rien Qui craignez-vous ? Personne. I fear nobody. I Je ne crains personne. QtJARANTE-TROISliiME THlblE. 2de SeC. Vous avez Pair d'avoir chaud, prenez un verre de sirop. Avez- vous de 1'eau mmerale ici ? Non, nous n'en avons point ; mais nous pouvons en envoyer chercher, ou plutot, allons-en boire, chacun un verre, chez Papothicaire du coin. Volontiers. Allons-y. Venez aussi, Frederic, ne voulez-vous pas ? Non, je n'aipas soif, mais j'ai faim. Ainsi, a votre retour, apportez-moi un ou deux gateaux. Ou pouvons-nous en acheter? Vous pouvez en trouver chez le mar- ohand de gateaux. Demeure-t-il au coin.? Non, il demeure au milieu de la rue. De quel cote 1 De ce cote-ci. N ? avez-vous jamaia rien achete chez lui ? Non, je n'achete jamais de gateaux. Pour- quoi done ? Ne les aimez-vous pas? Si fait, je les aime beaucoup, au contraire, mais je n'ai pas souvent faim avant diner. Avant de vous en aller. pretez-moi votre canif. Pour faire quoi? (ou mieux : pourquoi faire ?) Pour me couper les ongles. Ne vous coupez-vous pas les ongles avec des ciseaux? Non, je ne peux pas me couper les ongles avec des ciseaux. N'avez-vous pas de janif ? Si fait, j'en ai un; le voici; mais il ne coupe pasassez, pour me couperles ongles. Do you cut your hair ? (les cheveux.) I do cut my hair. Does your friend cut his hair ? He cuts his nails, but not his hair. Why does that man pull out his hair? Is he crazy? Yes, he is. Why not your cousin brush Jus coat ? He does not brush it, because FORTY-FOURTH LESSON (1.) 221 he is afraid of soiling his fingers. What does my neighboi tell you? He tells me that (gwc) you wish to buy his horse ; but I know that (quc") he is mistaken, because you have no money to buy ir. What do they (on) say at the market? They say that (quc) the enemy is beaten. Do you believe that? I believe it, because every one says so. Why have you bought that book? I have bought it. because I want it to learn French, and because every one speaks of it, and praises it. Are your friends going away ? They are. When are they going away? They are going away to-mor- row. When are you going away? We are going away to-day. Am I going away? You are going away, if you like, (si vous vou- l ez .} What do our neighbors say ? They are going away without saying anything. How do you like this wine ? I do not like it. What is the matter with you? I feel sleepy. Does your friend feel sleepy ? He does not feel sleepy, but he is cold. Why does he not warm himself? He has no wood to make a fire. Why Joes he not buy some wood ? He has no money to buy any. Will you lend him some? If he has none I will lend him some. Are you thirsty? I am not thirsty, but very hungry, (grand^fairn.) Is your servant sleepy ? He is sleepy. Is he hungry ? He is hungry. Why does he not eat? Because he has nothing to eat. Are youi children hungry? They are hungry, but they have nothing to eat. Have they anything to drink? They have nothing to drink. Why do you not eat ? I do not eat when (quand") I am not hungry. Why does the Russian not drink ? He does not drink when he is not thirsty. Did your brother eat anything yesterday evening] He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a piece of bread. Did he not drink? He also drank. What did he drink? He irank a glass of wine and water, and some syrup and water. FORTY-FOURTH LESSON, 44th. Quarante-quatrieme Lcron, 44m VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. PERFECT OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. Parfait des Verbes fisjlschit Have you cut yourself? I have cut myself. Have I cut myself? You have cut yourself. Vou have not cut yourself. Hast thou cut thyself? I ha/e not cut myself. Has your brother cut himsell Vous etes-vous coupe ? ($ 18Q--2J Je me suis coupe. Me suis-je coupe ? Vous vous etes coupe. Vous ne vous etes pas coupo T'es-tu coupe? Je ne me suis pas coupe. Votre frere s'est-il coupe 1 222 FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) He has cut himself. Have we cut ourselves ? ($ 180 2.) We have not cut ourselves. Have these men cut themselves ? They have not cut themselves. To walk, take a walk, a stroll, To go a walking, to stroll. To take an airing in a carriage. The coach. A new coach. To take a ride. Do you take a walk ? I do take a walk. Does he take a walk ? He does. We take a walk. Thou wishest to take an airing. They wish to take a ride. To walk a child. Do you take your children a walk- ing? I take them a walking every morn- ing. To go to bed, he down. Go to bed. To go to bed, to get in bed. Go to bed. Get in bed, (impera.) To get up, to rise. Get up, rise. Do you rise early ? I rise at sunrise. I go to bed at sunset. The (or at) sunrise. The (or at) sunset. Gentlemen, at what time did you go to bed ? At three o'clock in the morning. At what o'clock did he go to bed yesterday ? He went to bed late. II s'est coupe. Nous sommes-nous coupes ? Nous ne nous sommes pas coupjfl Ces hommes se sont-ils coupes ? II ne se sont pas coupes, t Me, te, se, nous, vous, promener t Aller me, te, &c., promener. t Se promener en carrosse. Le carrosse. Un carrosse neuf. t Se promener a cheval. ! Vous promenez-vous ? t Je me promene. ($ 1444.) t Se promene-t-il ? II se promene, Nous nous promenons. Tu veux te promener en carrosse. Us veulent se promener a cheval. Promener un enfant. Promenez-vous vos enfants ? Je les promene tous les matins. t Se coucher, 1. Couchez-vous t Aller se coucher, se metlre au lit. t Allez-vous coucher. Mettez-vout au lit. t Se lever, 1. Levez-vous. Vous levez-vous de bonne heure ? Je me leve au lever du soleil. Je me couche au coucher du soleil. Le (ou au) lever du soleil. Le (ou au) coucher du soleil. Messieurs, a quelle heure vous etes- vous couches? ($180 2.) A trois heures du matin. A quelle heure s'est-il couche hier 1 II s'est couche tard. QUARANTE-QUATKIEME TH^ME. Ire SeC. Je n'ai pas vu George, ce matin, ou est-il ? II est alle chez le dentiste. PourquoH A-t-il mal aux dents'? Oui, il Pa eu ioute /a nuit, (all night.) Va-t-il se faire arracher une dent? (feminin.) Oii, Bi le dentiste veut l ; arracher. N'arrache-t-il pas toujours les dents auand on le veut ? Non, je vous assure. Pourquoi done ? Parce que quelque fois ce n'est pas necessaire. Avez-vous jamais eu une dent wrachee ? Non, jamais encore. Que vous a dit le jardinier 1 11 m'a dit qu'on a arrache un de ses petits arbres. En verite ! Quj peui Pavoir arrache 1 II n'en sait rien. J'ai oublio de vous rendre FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 223 rotre canifj mais le voici, tenez, prenez-le. Merci. C'est.moi qui vous remercie. Qu'avez-vons au doigt ? Je me suis coupe. Avec luoi "? Avec un des couteaux du cuisiniei Qu'avez-vous mis des- sus? Rien encore. N'allez-vous rien y mettre ? Pardonnez-moi. (Jn peu d'eau de Cologne et un morceau de linge. Have you cut your hair ? I have not cut it (myself), but I have had it cut, (me les suis fait couper.) What has this child done'? He has cut his foot. Why did they give him a knife ? They gave him one 10 (pour} cut his nails, a.id he has cut his finger and his foot. Do you go to bed early ? I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep wher. I 50 to bed early. At what o'clock lid you go to bed yesterday ? Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. At what o'clock do your cliildren go to bed ? They go to bed at sunset. Do they rise early? They rise at sunrise. At what o'clock c/id you rise to-day ? To-day I rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday evening, (hier au soir.) Does your son rise late ? He rises early, for he never goes to bed late. What does he do when he gets up ? He studies, and then breakfasts. Does he not go out before he breakfasts? No, he ttudies and breakfasts before he goes out. What does he do after Breakfasting ? As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to my house, and we take a ride. Didst thou rise this morning as early as I ? I rose earlier than you, for I rose before sunrise. Do you often go a walking ? I go a walking when I have nothing to do at home. Do you wish to take a walk ? I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. Has your brother taken a ride ? He has taken an airing in a carriage. Do your children often go a walking ? They go a waJking every morning, after breakfast. Do you take a walk after dinner ? After dinner I drink tea, and then I take a walk. VOCABULAIEE. 2de Section. 1o rejoice at something. I rejoice at your happiness. At what does your uncle rejoice ? [ have rejoiced. They have rejoiced. you have made a mistake. We have made a mistake. To hurt somebody. t Se rejouir 2 de quelque chose. Je me rejouis de votre bonheur. De quoi votre oncle se rejouit-il ? Je me suis rejoui. Us se sont rejouis. t Vous vous etes trompe. t Nous nous sommes trompe's. t Faire du mal d quelqu' u*i. The evil, the pain, the harm. j Le mal. Have you hurt that man ? t Avez-vous fait du mal a cot homme ? I have hurt that man. tt fiy did you hurt that man t J'ai fait du mal a cet hommc. t Pourquoi avez-voue fait du mul cet homme ? 224: FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. '2.) I hate net hurt him. Does thai hurt you? That hurts me. To do good tc anybody. Have I ever done you any harm ? No ; on the contrary, you have done me good. I have never dsne harm to any one. t Je ne lui ai pas fait de maK t Cela vous fait-il du mal t t Cela me fait du mal. t Faire du bien a quelqn'un. t Vous ai-je jamais fait du mal ? t Non ; vous m'avez au contrairs fait du bien. t Jo n'ai jamais fait de mal a pef sonne. t Vous ai-je fait mal ? t Vous ne m'avez pas faL mat Cela me fait du bien. Faire de. Le domestique que fahil de son balai ? t II balaie le plancher avec. t Que veut-ii faire de ce bois ? II n'en veut rien faire. Have I hurt you ? You have not hurt me. That does me good. Tc do with, to dispose of. What does the servant do with his broom ? He sweeps the floor with it. What does he wish to make of this wood ? He does not wish to make anything of it. Obs. 101. When a proposition has no definite subject, the English, in order to avoid the pronouns they, people, &.C., use the verb in the passive voice, and say : 1 was told, instead of, They told me ; He is flattered, instead of, They flutter him ; It was given to me, instead of, They gave it to me. This is always expressed in French by means of the indefinite pronoun on, one. Ex. He is flattered, but he is not beloved. | O?i le flatts, mais on ne 1'aime pas i am told that he is arrived. j On me dit qu il est arrive. QlJARANTE-QUATRIEME THEME. 2cfo SeC. Qni est cet enfant que vous louez tant? C'est A!b?rt ; le plus jeune fils de notre epicier. Ne le connaissez-vous pas? Non, je ne le connais pas. Ne 1'avez-vous jamais vu dans le magas'n rie 1'epicier '( C ''est possible. Mais pourquoi 1'avez vous tant loue? On I'a louf parce qu'il a bien etudie. Mais il n'a fait que son devoir. Fant-i> le louer pour cela ? Sans doute. Je ne croyais pas eela cerereir Quand on le Iou3, il etudie mieux. C'est different. Powouo cet autre enfant a-t-il etc puni ? Pourquoi punit-on les enfants geno ralement? Parce cu'ils sont mechants et paresseux. C'est poi cela merne qu'or a puni cet autre. Et celui-ci, l'a-t-on recom- pense ? On 1'a recompense parce qu'il a bien travaille. Que faut-i faire pour ne pas etre meprise ? II faut etre studieux, diligent, et sage. Ah ! L:uis, vjus vous etes fait couper les cheveux, vous avoz mia nn habit neuf, un joli gilet de satin noir, vous avez 1'air d'un autre garcon. Je vous ai a peine connu. Que pensez-vous de mon habi ncuf ? Je le trouve superbe. FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 225 What have you done with your money? I have bought a book with it. What has the joiner done with his wood? He has rnaJe a bench of it. What has the tailor done with the cloth which you gave him ? He has made clothes of it for (pour) your children and mine. Has that man hurt you? No, Sir, he has not hurt me. iVhat must one do in order to be loved? One must do good to tr.ose that have done us harm. Have we ever done you harm? j\o ; you have on the contrary done us good. Do you do harm to any c~e ? I do no one any harm. Why have you hurt these children? f have not hurt them. Have I hurt you? You have not hurt me, but your boys have, (m'en out fait.} What have they done to you? They have beaten me. Is it (est-ce) your brother who has hurt my son? No, Sir, it is not (ce nest pas) my brother, for he has never hurt any one. Have you drunk that wine? I have drunk it. How did you like it? 1 liked it very well. Has it done you good? It has done me good. Have you hurt yourself? I have not hurt myself. Who has hurt himself? My brother has hurt himself, for he has cut his finger. Is he still ill. (malutle?) He is better, (rmewz.) I rejoice to hear that he is no longer ill, for I love him. Why does your cousin pull out his hair? Because lie cannot pay what he owes. Did your father rejoice to see you? He did rejoice to see me. What did you rejoice at? I rejoiced at seeing my good friends.- What was your uncle delighted with, (s'est il re/out?) He was delighted with the horse which you have sent him. What were your children delighted with ? They were delighted with the fine clothes which I have had made for them, (que je leur ai fait fairs.} VOCABULAIRE. 3me Section. A. knife was given him to cut his bread, and he cut his finger. To flatter som* one. To flatter one's self. He flatters himself that he knows French. Nvthing but. He has nothing but enemies. To become. (Devenir does not take de after it.) On lui a donne un couteau pour cou- per son pain, et il s'est coupe" le doigt. Flatter 1 quelqu'un. Se flatter, (takes de before the infini tive.) t II se flatte de savoir le Franc.ais. Ne . . . que. II n'a que des ennemis. Devenir,* 2, p. passd devenu", (cot jugue comme Venir. (25 1 , 34 1 .) He has turned a soldier. i t II s'est fait soldat. Have you turned a merchant ? ] t Vous tes-vous fait marchand \ J have tuined (become) a lawyer. I t Je me suis faitavocat. f u ,i * $ t Votre frere qu'est-t7 dcvenu ? * hat ha ? become of your brother ? \ f Qu , est ^^* ntrefrire ? 226 FORTY-FOURTH LESSOR. (3.) What has become of him ? I do not know what has become of him. To enlist, to enroll. tr i r i f t II s'est enrole. He has enlisted. f t Tl ' t Qu'est-r7 devenu t t Je ne sais pas ce qa'il esl tlever.fi S'enroler, 1, se faire soldat. I cannot pay you, for I haire no money. He cannot give you ary bread, for he has none. To believe some one. Do you befieve that man ? I do not believe him. s'est fait soldat. Je ne puia vous payer, car je n'a' pas d' argent. II ne peut pas vous donner de pnin, car il n'en a pas. Croire* 4 quelqu'un. Croyez-vous cet homme ? Je ne le crois pas. Obs. 102. The verb croire governs the accusative ; we say, howe.tr ; To believe in God. I Croire en Dieu. I believe in God. I Je crois en Dieu. To utter a falsehood, to lie. Do not lie, (impera.) I lie, thou liest, he lies. The story-teller, the liar. Me?itir,* 2; past part, mcnti, pres, part, mentant. Ne mentez pas. Je mens, tu mens, ii merit. Le menteur. THME, 3me Sec. Promenez-vous souvent vos enfants? Je les promene tous le.1 matins et tous les soirs, quand le temps le permet. C ; est-a-dire, quand il fait beau temps'? Non; mais quand il ne fait pas trop mauvais. Les menez-yous promener quand le temps est couvert ou humide ? Sans doute. Et quand il pleut ? Oni, s'il ne pleut pas heaucoup. Quand le tonnerre gronde? Oui, meme quand le ton- nerre gronde, s'il ne fait pas de pluie. Allez-vous les mener prome- ner ce soir? Non, il fait trop de pluie et de vent. N ; entendez-voug pas le bruit du vent ? Si fait, je Fentends. Et le bruit de la pluie sur la maison ? Oui, je Pentends aussi. On ne peut pas promener avec plaisir pendant un orage comme celui-la. Vous avez raison, je pense comme vous. Croyez-vous ce petit gargon avec les che- veux noiis? Oui, c'est un bon petit gar^on, mais cet autre-la est un grand meriteur. Sait-il quand il ment? En verite, je crois que non. Pourqnoi n'entrez- vous pas? Avez- vous peur d'etre mordu pal notre petit chien blanc? Mord-il aussi bien qu'il aboie ! II aboie beaucoup, mais il ne mord pas. What has become of your friend ? He has become a lawyer. What has become of your cousin? He has enlisted. Has your neighbor enlisted? He has not enlisted. What has become of him ? He has turned a merchant. What has become of his children ? His children have become men. What has become of your son ? He has become a great man. Has he become learned? He has F^RTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 227 b(.-c( me learned. What has become of my book ? I do not know \rhat lias become of it. Have you torn it ? I have not torn it. What has become of our friend's son ? I do not know whai has become of him. la he in England or Italy? I cannot tell you. I believe his father does not know what has become of him. Whom did he go travelling with? He went with his cousin. Do they know what has become of the latter? Oh! yes; he has returned, ind he is studying to become a doctor. It is extraordinary. Whv Joes this man rejoice so much? (tant ?) Because he flatters himself 3e has good friends. Is he not right in rejoicing? He is wrong, foi .le has nothing but enemies. Is he not loved ? He is flattered, but tie is not beloved. Do you flatter yourself that you know French? I do flatter myself that I know it; for I can speak, read, and write it. Has the physician done any harm to your child? He has cut his finger, (lui a coupe le doigt,) but he has not done him any harm, so (ef)-you are mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. Why do you listen to that man? I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; for I know that he is a story-teller. How do you know that ne is a story-teller ? He does not believe in God ; and all .hose (to us ceux) who do not believe in God are story-tellers. FORTY-FIFTH LESSON, 45th. Quarante-cinquieme Le$on, 45me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS Verbes Unipertonnels. We have already seen (41 ', 42 s ,) some idiomatical expressions with/aire, til of which belong to the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no deter ninate subject, are conjugated only in the third person, by means of the pronoun il, it. Ex. To rain, it rains. To snow, it snows. To hail, it hails. The substantives belonging to these three verbs are feminine, as will be seen when we come to treat of feminine nouns. Pleuvnir,* 3. il pleut, past part. plu. Neiger, 1. il neige. Greler, 1. il grele. To lighten. Does it lighten ? It does. The lightning. It lightens. (t does not lighten. It lightens much. Does it rain ? It rains very hard. Does it snow ? It snows hard. t Faire des dclairs. t Fait-il des e'clairs ? II en fait U eclair. t II fait des dclairs. t II ne fait pas d'dclairs. (OJ>*. 27.) t II fait beaucoup d'eclairs. t Pleut- il ? II pleut d verse. t Neigft-t-il ? II m igcfort, (beau coup.) 228 FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) It hails much The hail. The snow. The sun does not shine. The sun is in my eyes. To thunder, it thunaera. To shine, to glitter, shining, shined. The shutters. It hails, shut the shutters quick. Is the walking good ? It is good (bad) walking. This country. In that country He has made many friends in that country. Of which, of whom, whose. I see the man of whom you speak. I have bought the horse of which you spoke to me. I see the man whose brother has killed my dog. I see the man whose dog you have killed. Do you see the child whose father set out yesterday ? I see it. Whom have you seen ? I have seen the merchant whose warehouse you have taken. I have spoken to the man whose warehouse has been burnt. II fait beaucoup de grele. La grele. La neige. (noms lei; fl 19, t II ne fait point de solell. * Le soleil me donne dans la vuc. Tonner, 1, il tonne. Luire,* 4, luisant, lui, (p. passe. Les volets. II grele, fermez vite !e> volets. t Fait-il bon mai^her ? t II fait bon (mauvais) marcher. Ce pays-ci. Pans ce pays-la, t II s'est fait beaucoup d'amis dai fl ce pays-la. Doiit, (pronom eiatif. $ 86^ Je vois 1'homrre dont vous parlez. J'ai achetc le chevaldont vous m'avez parle. Je vois 1'homme dont le frere a tue mon chien. Je vois 1'homme dont vous avez tuj le chien. Voyez-vous 1'enfant dont le pere eat parti hier ? Je le vois. Qui avez-vous vu ? J'ai vu le marchand dont vous ave* pris le rnagasin. J'ai parle a I'homme dont le magasin a ete Drule. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME TnibiE. Ire Sec. Que! mauvais temps il fait aujourd'hui! II pleut a verse; il fait des eclairs, le tonnerre gronde. . . .Ne grele-t-il pasaussi? Je le croyais il y a un moment, (a minute ago.) Ne vaut-il pas mieu* fcnre former les volets ? (have .... shut ?) Je crois qu ? il vaut mieux !e faire fermer. Car s'il grele encore, la grele peutcasser nos car- reaux de vitre. (panes of glass.) Dites a Salomon de venir fermer les volets. Ou est Salomon? Appelez-le, si vous ne pouvez pas le trouver. Qu'est-ce que c'est que ce bruit ? N'est-ce pas la grele qui vient contre les vitres? Salomon, fermez vite ces volets. N'y a-t-il pas un carreau de casse ? (30 1 , Obs. 71.) Non, M., je n'en vois pas de casse. Voici un volet de ferine. Fermez vite l'autro ; 2ar je crains pour nos carreaux. Have you seen the gentleman from whom T have received a pro sent? I have not. Have you seen the fine gun of which I spoko Co you "? I have. Has your uncle seen the books of \\ nich you rooke to him ? He has. Hast thou seen the man whose childrer PORFy-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 229 have been punished? I have not seen him. To whom have you been speaking in the theatre ? I have been speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine dog. Have you seen the little 'uoy whose father has become (s'est fait} a lawyer? I have seen him. Whom have you seen at the ball ? I saw the farmer whose horses you bought ( 88), and the men whose coach you had a mind to buy. Whom do you see now ? I see the man whose servant haa broken my looking-glass, and my two panes of glass. Have yen heard the man whose friend has lent me English money? I have not. Whom have you heard? I have heard the French captain vrhose S3n is my friend. Hast thou brushed the coat of which I spcke to thee? I have not yet brushed it. Have you received the money which you have been wanting? I have. Have I the brown paper of which I have need? You have it. Has your brother the Italian books of which he has need ? He has. Have you spoken to the merchants whose warehouse we have taken? We have spoken to them. K&,ve you spoken to the physician whose son has studied German ? I have Hast thou seen the poor men whose warehouses have been burnt' I have. Have you read the books which we have lent you ? Wr have. What do you say of them? (en?) We say that they anj very fine. Do you give anything to the children who are idle ? We give them nothing. Did it snow yesterday ? Yes, it did hail, lighten, and snow last evening and all night. I am very sorry for it. Why ' Because we are going to have bad walking for a few days. AIS we not? VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. That of which. (No antecedent.) I Ce dont, (n'a point d'antecedent ) That of which. > (with Decedents.) elui ce que je sais tous les mots necessaires pour cela ? Je crois que oui. Ji vais essayer. Attendez. Savez-vous le Francais de: final? Je ne suis pas sur du (about the) Francais de: final. Est-ce le meme que 1' Anglais ? Oui, c'est le meme. Vous savez traduire: changing? n'est-ce pas? C'est: changeant. C est cela. Com- mencez. Je vais repeter la question. Je pense que : repeter est to repeat, n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est cela meme. Comment formez- vous le futur des verbes Fran^ais 1 En changeant (R. 1), 1'r final de la Ire et 2de conjugaison, le oir, de la 4me, non, je me trompe, je veux dire : de la 3me et le re de la 4me, en rai. C'est cela. Pou- vez-vons me dire le futur de : former? Oui, c'est : formerai. Quel est celui de : devoir? C'est devoirai. Non, vous vous trompez. lei, il faut changer oir en rai : alors c'est: devrai. Tres-bien. Quand vous avez la premiere personne, pouvez-vous former les autres? Oui: car le futur finit toujours en : rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Shall you have any books'? I shall have some. Who will give you any ? My uncle will give me some. When will your cousin have money ? He will have some next month. How much money shall you have ? I shall have thirty-five francs. Who will have good friends 1 The English will have some. W r ill your father be at home this evening ? He will be at home. Will you be there 'i I shall also be there. W'ill your uncle go out to-day? He will go out, if it is fine weather. Shall you go out? I shall go out, if it does not rain. V r ill you love my son? I shall love him, if he ia good. Will you pay your shoemaker ? I shall pay him, if I receive my money. Will you love my children ? If they are good and assiduous, I shall love them; but if they are ille and naughty, I shall despise and punish them. Am I right in speaking thus? You are not wrong. Is your friend still writing? He is still writing. Have you not done speaking? I shall soon have done. Have our friends done reading ? They will soon have done. Wher will you send me the money which you owe me ? I shall send il to you soon. Will your brothers send me the books which I have lent them? They will send them to you. When will they scud (hem to me 1 They will send them to you next month. FORTY-SIXTH LES5ON. (2.) 233 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Section. To hold, keep I shall or will hold. To comn. I shall or will come., To sit down. I shall or will sit down. To be necessary. It will be necessary. To provide. I shall provide. To be able. I will be able. To foresee. I shall or. will fore- see. To know. I shall or will know. To suspend. I shall suspend. To be worth. I will be worth. To see. I shall or will see. To be willing. I shall be willing. To do. I shall or will do. When shall you do your exercises ? I will do them soon, (ere long.) My brother will do his exercises to- morrow. Next Monday. Next Tuesday. Last Wednesday. Last Thursday. Next month. This month. That age, century. When will your son go to the bridge ? He will go next Tuesday. Shall you go anywhere ? We shall go nowhere. Will he send me the book ? He will send it you if he has done with it. Shall you be at home this evening ? I shall be there. Will your father be at home He will be there. Will your cousins be there ? They will. Tenir,* 2. Je tiendrai.. Venir,* 2. Je viendrai. S'asseoir,* 3. Je m'asseierai or Je m'assierai. Falloir,* 3. 11 faudra. Pourvoir,* 3. Je pourvoirai. Pouvoir,* 3. Je pourrai. Pruvoir,* 3. Je prevoirai. Savoir, 3. Surseoir,* 3. Valoir,* 3. Voir,* 3. Vouloir,* 3. Faire,* 4. Je saurai. Je surseoira:. Je vaudrai. Je verrai. Je voudrai. Je ferai. Quand ferez-vous vos themes ? Je les ferai bientot. Mon frere fera ses themes demain. Lundi prochain. Mardi prochain Mercredi passe. Jeudi dernier. t Le mois prochain. Ce mois-ci. Ce sicde-ld. Quand votre fils ira-t-il au pont ? II ira mardi prochain. Irez-vous quelque part ? Nous n'irons nulle part. M'enverra-t-il le livre ? t II vous 1'enverra s'il 1'a fini. Serez-vous chez vous (a la maison ce soir ? J'y serai. Votre pere sera-t-il chez lui ? II y sera. Vos cousins y seront-ils ? Ils y seront. Obs. 105. (Important.) When a verb, in the future tense, is connected with another hy the conjunction if, si, 1 the French verb following si must be in the indicative mood, present tense, although, in English, it may be in die future tense, or subjunctive mood. Will John go to the concert ? Yes, if you go, or will go, or should go. Jean ira-t-il au concert ? vous y allez. Oui, si ' Si, (if, meaning granting, supposing that.) But when si means whether^ .he following verb must be in the future tense : I do not know whether hi Will go or not, Je ne sain pas s'il ira ou rion. 284: FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) . 2de Sec. Allez-vous a Washington aujomd'hui? Non, je n ? at pas le tenif 9 d'y aller aujourcFhui. Quand irez-vous ? J'irai jeudi ou samedi prochain. Aurez-vous le temps de venir nous voir? Sans doute qu* je Paurai. (Dir. 6.) Quand viendrez-vous? J'irai demain. Non, je me trompe, apres-demain. Vraiment 1 Oui, vraiment. Enver- rez-vous du tabac en France ? Oui, j'y jn enverrai. Par quel bati- ment 1'enverrez-vous ? Je Py enverrai par le meme que M. Lippard Y en enverra-t-il ? Oui, il y en enverra. Y en enverra-t-il beau- coup ? II y enverra tout ce qu'il a. Qui tiendra le magasin du coin > Je ne sais pas qui le tiendra. N'est-ce pas le petit marchand qui le tiendra? Lui et ses freres le tiendront. Tiendront-ils des ntu- veautes? Us ne tiendront que du drap. Quand Pouvriront-ils ? lia I'ouvriront dans quinze jours. Ne vous trompez-vous pas? Non. je vous assure. Vos cousins viendront-ils bientot ? II ne viendront pas avant quinze jours. Votre oncle viendra-t-il avec eux? II viendra, si le capitaine ne vient pas. Croyez-vous que le capitaine viendra? II viendra s'il n'a pas la goutte. Quand saurez-vous votre theme'? Je le saurai dans iin quart d'heure. Croyez-vous que vous le saurez si-tot? Oui, je le saurai. Frederic saura-t-il le sien ? II le saura. Les nouveaux ecoliers sauront-ils les leurs ? Ila les sauront. Nous les saurons tous. Has the tailor made my coat ? He has not made it yet ; but he will soon make it. When will he make it? When he shall have time. When will you do your exercises? I shall do them when 1 shall have time. When will your brother do his? He will do them next Saturday. Wilt thou come to me ? I shall come. When wilt thou come ? I shall come next Friday. When have you seen my uncle ? I saw him last Sunday. Will your cousins go to the bill, next Tuesday? They will go. Will you come to my concert ' I shall come, if I am not ill. Will you be able to pay me what you owe me ? I shall not be able to pay it you, for I have lost all my money. Will the American be able to pay for his shoes? He has lost his pocket-book, so that he will not be able to pay for them. Will it be necessary to send for the physician ? No- body is ill, so that it will not be necessary to send for him. Will i; be necessary to go to the market, to-morrow? It will be necessary to go there, for we want some beef, some bread, and some wine. Shall you see your father, to-day ? I shall see him. Where will he be ? He will be at his counting-house.-- -Will you go to the ball to-night? I shall not go, for I arn tco ill to go to it. -Will you? friend go ? He will go if you will. FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 235 VOCABULAIKE. 3me Section. Ob. 106. (Important.) When a verb in the future tense is connected with another by tiie word when, quand ; the French verb following quaud raitet be in the future tense, although the present is then used in English. As. Will he go when I go ? (or I do.) He will go when you do. He will wrhe it if you will. He will write it when you do. Will he send some white paper to my counting-house ? lie will, if you will have some. He will, when you want some. you be able to pay the shoe- maker if he send his bill ? I will pay him when he sends it. Who will hold my parasol ? Give it to me, Miss, I will (hold it). He will hold it, or they will. Will your cousin's friend come to my concert ? He will. Shall you corn', ? I will be there. To employ, uso. I will employ. To try. I shall or will try. What will you use to do it ? I will use this. Will you try soon ? I will. Will he not try also ? Yes, he will, but they will not. You are mistaken, they will try also To acquire. I will acquire. To run. I shall or will run. To gather, pick. Will I gather ? To die, (lose life.) Who shall not die ? What w ; li you acquire ? I will acquire what I can. Ira-t-il quand firai? II ira quand vous irez. II Vecrira si vous Vicrivez. (Obs. 10.' II I'ecrira quand vous 1'ecrirez. En.verra-t-il du papier blanc a mon comptoir ? II y en enverra si vous en voulez. II y en enverra quand vous en vcu- drez. Fourrez-vous payer le cu donnier. s'il envoie son memoire ? Je le paierai quand il I'enverra. Qui veut tenir mon parapluie ? Donnez-le-moi, Mile., je le tiendrai. II le tiendra, ou ils le tiendront. L'ami de votre cousin viendra-t-il u mon concert ? II ira. Y viendrez-vous ? J'y serai. Employer. J'emploierai. > * ^44_3 ) Essayer. J'essaierai. ) Qu'emploierez-vous pour le faire ? J'emploierai ceci. Essaierez-vous bientot ? J'essaierai N'essaiera-t-il pas aussi ? Si fait, il essaiera, mais ils n'essaie- ront pas. Vous vous trompez, ile essaieront aussi. J'acquerrai. 1 Acquerir,* 2. Courir,* 2. Je courrai. Cueillir,*2. Cueillerai-je ? Mourir,* 2. Qui ne mourra pas f Qu'acquerrez-vous ? J'acquerrai ce que je pourrai. Obs. 107. If, instead of when, quand, the words what, ce que ; as soon as. aussitot que, des que ; after, apres que ; as, comme ; wnere, ou ; conned the English verbs, use the future tense after the 2d verb in French. Will you run as soon as he runs t We will run after he has run, and where he has run. Courrcz-vous aussit-dt qu j \] courra ' Nous courronsapres qu'iiaura couru et ou il a-tra couru. 1 These 4 verbs, and the lists given in 1st and 2d sections, amounting e auxiliaries included) to 21, are the most important exceptions. 236 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) QUARANTE-SIXIEME THEME. Sine Sc'C. Si je viens samedi prochain, votre fils viendra-t-il ? 11 vieudro quand vous viendrez. Fera-t-il ce que je ferai? II fera ce qu'il pourra. Iront-ils ou vous voudrez? Non, ils n'iront pas oil je vou- drai, mais ou ils voudront. Quand cueillerez-vous mon bouquet 1 ? Je le cueillerai quand et ou vous voudrez. En cueillerez-vous aussi un pour Emma? Je lui en cueillerai un aussi, des que vous me le direz. Accuerra-t-il de Phonneur s'il fait son devoir? II en ac- querra des qu'il fera ce qu'il a a faire. Courrez-vous si je eoura? Qui, ^e courrai quand vous courrez, ou aussitot que vous aurez court. Comment est le vieux soldat? II est bien malade. Croit- on qu'il en mourra? Oui, on croit qu'il en mourra. Et le matelot 1 ? II est mieux, on espere qu'il n'en m'ourra pas. Qu'acquerront cea ecoliers? Ils acquerront de 1'honneur. Ce jeune cheval vaudra-t-ii deux cents dollars, quand il aura quatre ans? Je crois qu'il vaudra plus que cela. Vraiment ! Will the farmer gather his corn to-day ? No, he will gather il only to-morrow, or the day after. Will he be ready then ? He will be ready, we shall be ready, and our friends will also be ready. Where will our young neighbors go? They will go nowhere; they will remain at home, for they will have a great deal to do. What will they have to do ? They will have to cut their grain and to put it in their granary. You will lose your money, if you do not keep your pocket-book shut up, (ferme.} Will your cousin keep an apo- thecary store ? He will keep one. Where will he take a store 1 He will take one near the museum. Will he be able to get one there, (y en trouver un?) He hopes so. When will he come? He will come when his father gives him (Obs. 106) the two thousand dollars which he has promised him. Will he give them to him goon ? He will receive them in a few days. Will he receive any money from you ? Yes. I will lend him some. WiV he pay you back? (repaiera-t-il?) He will, for he is diligent, assiduous, and he will without doubt do his duty. I hope that you are not mift- taken FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 47th. Quarante-sepiicme Lr$on. 47 ^ VOCABULAIRE. Ire Section. To Mong. (24 3 , 40 2 , 46 2 .) | Ajtpartenir* 2. (conj. comme ternr.} Do you belong ? I do. oes that horse belong to your bro- ther? It does (belong to him). Appartenez-vous? J'appartiens. Ce cheval appartient-ilavotrefrcre ? II lui appart'ent. FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. ('!.) 237 A qui appartiennent cts gants ? Us appartiennent aux capitaines. Ces chevaux appartiennent-ils au> generaux Americains ? Ils leur appartiendront bientot. Contenir, * 2. (comma venir) convenu (davant le nom ; de, av.int 1'infini. Ce drap a-t-ii convenu a votre frcre ' II ne lui a pas convenu. Ces souliers conviennent-ils a vos enfants? Ils leur conviendrom. Vous convient-il de faire cela ? II me conviendra de le faire. Convient-il c. votre cousin de veirir avec nous ? II ne lui conviendra pas de sortir. Parvenir,* 2, d. (comme venir) par- venu e . t Parvenez-vous a apprendre le Fran- $ais? t J'y parviens. t Je parviens a 1'apprendre. t Ces hommes parviennent-ils a ven-* dreleurs chevaux? S'ilsn'ysont pas encore parvenus, ils y pni viendront. Reussir, 2, d. reussissant, reussi Reussissez-vous a faire cela ? J'y reussis ; mais il n'y reussit pas. Y avez-vous reussi? J'y ai reusfii Nettoyer, 1. Tout de suite. A 1'instant, sur le champ. Je vais le nettoyer tout d Vheure Je vais le faire tout de suite. Je vais travailler. THEME. Ire Sec. J'ai trouve des gants. A qui appartiennent-ils ? Sont-ce des gants de chamois'? Oui. Ce sont des gants de cnamois. Ils m'appartiennent alors. Donnez-les-moi. Attendez un instant, s'ii vous plait. Sont-ilsblancs, jaunes, verts, ou bleus ? Les miens soul plutot bruns que jannes. Alors les voici. Ils vous appartiennent. Je vous rernercie. De nen y (you are welcome.) Avez-vous achete 'juelqie chose ? Oui. Qu'est-ce qui (2 1 1 ) vous a convenu? Ceui m'a convenu, et cela conviendra a mon frere. .Cela lui conviendro- t-il? Oui, j'en suis sur. Le cousin de Pavocat a-t-il ete au musee vos amis? II ne lui a pas 'jonvenu d'y aller. de sorte qu'il a To whom do these gloves belong ? They belong to the captains. Do these horses belong to the Ame- iican generals ? They will soon belong to them. ($ 170. To suit, (24 3 , 25', 25'-:, 462.) suited. ( Used principally in the 3d person. Did that cloth suit your brother ? It did not. Do these shoos suit your children ? They will suit them. Docs it suit you to do that ? Ft will suit me to do it. Does it suit your cousin to come with us? It will not juu iiim to go out. To succeed, succeeded. Do you succeed in learning French ? I do (succeed in it). I do succeed in learning it. Do these men succeed in selling their horses ? If they have not yet suc- ceeded, they will succeed in it. To succeed, succeeding, succeeded. Do you succeed in doing that ? [ do ; but he does not. Did you succeed ? I did. ($50.) To clean. Immediately, directly. This instant, instantly. I am going to clean it presently. \ will do it immediately. I am going to work. 38 FORTT-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) refuse d'y aller avec eux. Parvenez-vous a faire votre devoir ions les jours? J'y parviens souverit. Le menuisier est-il parvenu a raccommoder votre pupitre ? Oui ; il y est parvenu tout de suite. Est-il aussi parvenu a raccommoder le secretaire % Non, il n'a pas reussi a le faire. A-t-il mieux reussi avec le fauteuil ? Cui. rl y a parfaitement reussi. Qui a nettoye votre gilet de satin? Notre nouveau domestique Pa nettoye. N'a-t-il pas bien reussi ? Vrai ment, oui. Vos souliers sont-ils nettoyes? Us le sont. Je me trompe, on les a pris pour les nettoyer. To whom does that horse belong? It belongs to the English taptain, whose son has written a note to you. Does this money belong to you ? It does belong to me. From whom huve you received it? I have received it from the men whose children you have seen. Whose horses are those? They are (ce sont} ours. ( 39, N. 3.) Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him iiere l I have forgotten to tell him so, (le.) Is it (est-ce) your father or mine who is gone to Berlin ? It is mine. Have you brought me the book which you promised me ? I have forgotten it. Has your uncle brought you the pocket-books which he promised you 1 ? He has forgotten to bring me them. Have you already writ- ten to your friend ? I have not yet had time to write to him. Have you forgotten to write to your relation? I have not. Does this cloth suit you 1 It does not suit me ; have you no other ? 1 have some other: but it is dearer than this. Will you show it to me? I will show it to you. Do these shoes suit your uncle ? They do not Buit him, because they are too dear. Are these (sont-cc* the shoes of which (dont) you have spoken to us? They are (cc sont) the same, (les memes.) Whose shoes are these? They belong to the nobleman whom you have seen this morning in my warehouse. VOCABULAIRB. 2de Section. Is there? There is. I fY a-t-il? II y a . Are there ? 1 here are. > There is not. There are not. There is noth.ng nobody. Will thtre be ? There will be not be tVhat is there ? the matter there ? Was there, or has there been ? There was. t II n'y a pas. II n'y a point. t II n'y a rien personne. 1 Y aura-t-il ? II y aura. II if y aura pas. t Qu'y a-t-il la ? Qu'est ce qs'il } a la? t Y a-t-il eu? II y a eu There has been nothing. > f n n , a rien eu Nothing has taken place. > Nothing has taken place. Is there wine ? syrup ? There is some. There is nc moie. (Vie there men of morit 1 t Y a-t-il du vin ? du sirop ? t II y en a. II n'y en a plus, t Y a-t-il des hommes de merito f FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.J 239 06*. 108. The interrogative : Wliat is ? followed by a preposition, is aanslated by: Qu'y a-t-il ? t$ 118.) The relative : IVliat is, by: Ce gu'il y a. ($ 874.) What is in the barrel! 1 do not know what is in. 4re there to be many people at the ball of Mrs. Rush ? There are to be a great many. The credit. On ciedit. To sell on credit. aady money. In ready money. To buy for cash. To sell ibr cash. To pay down. Will you buy for cash ' Hoes it suit you^to seli me on credit ? To jit. Does that coat fit me ? It fits you. That hat does not fit your brother. It does not fit him. Do these shoes fit you ? They fit me. That fits you very well. To keep. Will you keep the horse ? I shall keep it. You must not keep my money. t Qu'y a-t-il dans le bariZ ? (1 mute.l t Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a dedans* Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de monde au bal de Mme. Rush ? II doit y en avoir beaucoup. Le credit. A credit. Vendre a credit Argent comptant. En argent cornp tant. Acheter compiant. Vendre comptant. Payer comptant. Voulez-vous acheter argent comp tant ? Vous convient-il de me venHrj a credit \ t Aller Men. t Get habit me va-t-il bien ? t II vous va bien. t Ce chapeau ne va pas bien a votre frere. t II ne lui va pas bien. t Ces soulicrs vous vont-ils bien ? t Us me tont bien. t Cela vous va fort bien. Garder, I. Garderez-vous le cheval ? Je le garderai. 11 ne faut pas garder mon argent QUARANTE-SEPTIEME TufiltfE. 2de Sec. Quand vous serez en Europe, irez-vous en Allemagne ? Je crois que j'irai ; du moins, j'ai grande envie d'y voyager. Y voyagerez- vous a pied 1 Non ; il ne me convient pas d'y voyager a pied ; de sorte que j'irai en voiture. En voiture, ou en diligence? (public coach.) Quelque fois en voiture; quelque fois en diligence. Croy- ex-vous que vous aimerez a voyager en Allemagne autant qu' en Italic ? Je rfen sens nen, en verite, (I do not know anything aboul it.) Le marchand que vous connaissez a Amsterdam a-t-il bean* coup de credit ? Oui, c'est un des premiers marchands de la ville Comment 1'appelez-vous ? On Pappelle Vous avez un habit qui vous va bien; 1'avez-vous fait faire ici ? Non, je ne 1'ai pas fait faire ici. Ou done ? Nulle part. Je 1'ai achete tout fait, (readv Ponrquoi le dites-vous pas: dejdfait? pour, already made ? 210 FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) Parce que les Francais ne 1'emploient point. Vraiment, il vous v aussi bieri que possible. Je vous ai prete mon canif, n'est-ce pael L 7 avez-vous garde ? Je 1'ai garde, et je le garderai encore, car j'en aurai besom tout a 1'heure. Does this merchant sell on credit 1 ? He does not sell on credit. Does it suit you to buy for cash? It does not suit me. Where did you buy these pretty knives'? I bought them at (chez) the mer- chant's whose warehouse you saw yesterday. Has he sold them to you on credit? He has sold them to me for cash. Do you often buy for cash? Not so often as you. Have you forgotten anything lere ? I have forgotten nothing. Is there any wine in this barrel ? Fiere is some in it. Is there any vinegar in this glass ? There is none in it. Is wine or cider in it?- (dedans?) There is neither wine nor cider in it. What is there in it? There is vinegar. Are there any men in your warehouse ? There are some there. Is there any one in the office ? There is no one there. Were there many people in the theatre ? There were many there. Will there be many people at your ball ? There will be many there. Are there many children that will not play ? There are many that will not study, but all will play. Hast thou cleaned my trunk ? 1 have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. Do you intend buy- ing an umbrella? I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it me on credit. Do you intend to keep mine? I intend to give it you back, if I buy one. Have you returned the book to my brother ? I have not yet returned it. VOCABTJLAIRE. 3me Section. You had better . . . I had better .... He had better . . . Instead of keeping your horse, you had better sell it. Instead of selling his hat, he had bet- ter keep it. To please, pleased, please. i please, thou pleasest, he pleases. To please some one, (transitive.) t Vous ferez mieux de . . . t Je ferai mieux de . . . t II fera mieux de . . . t Au lieu de garder votre cheval, voua ferez mieux de le vendre. t Au lieu de vendre son chapeau H fera mieux de le garder. Flaire,* 4, a ; p, p. plu, imper. plais ez. Je plais, tu plais, il plait. Plaire a quelqu'un, (intransilif.) Obs. 109. Plaire, etant intransitif, ne pent pas etre employe au passif. Ainsi, il nefaut pas traduire : Are you pleased with this book? par 8te- vous plu avec ce livre ? mais par Vunipersonnel. Does this book please you ? I am very well pleased with it, but he 's not much pleased with it. Ce livre vous plait-ii ? II me plait beaucoup, mais il no id plait guere. FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 241 Charles .s delighted with' it. What are you so much delighted with ? This. I will do what you please. You are pleased to say so. You joke. II plaTt beaucoup a Charles. Qu'est-ce qui (21') vous plait tant I Ceci. t Je ferai ce qu'il vous plaira. t Cela vous plait a dire. What is your pleasure ? ) + ~ , ., What do you want? \ t Que vous plait-,1 f What do you say ? To delight in, to be pleased. How are you pleased here ? 1 am very well pleased here. t Plait-il ? t Se plaire,* 4. (d, avant un infiu.i t Comment vous plai-sez-vous ici ? t Je m'y plais beaucoup. Obs. 110. The impersonal it is, is rendered by c'est for the singular, and by ce sont, when followed by a 3d pers. plur., and only then. ($ 38, N. 3.) Whose book is this ? It is his. Whose shoes are these ? They are ours. It is they who have seen him. It is your friends who are right. A qui est ce livre ? C'est le sien. A qui sunt ces souliers ? Ce sor,t les notres. Ce sont eux qui 1'ont vu. Ce sont vos amis qui ont raison. QUARANTE-SEPTIEME THEME. 3me Sec. Fait-il du soleil ce matin 1 Oui, il en fait. Alors je ferai bien de prendre mon parasol, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, vous ferez bien de le pren- dre. Fait-il beaucoup de soleil en Angleterre ? Non ? le temps y est presque toujours convert. Y tonne-t-il souvent ? Non, il n'y fait pas beaucoup de tonnerre. Avez-vous peur du tonnerre ? Non, maia ie petit chien blanc en a peur. Plait-il ? Ne me comprenez-voue pas'? Si fait; mais, je n'ai jamais vu un chien craindre le tonnerre. Celui-la en a peur, je vous assure. Vous plaisez-vous ici ? Oui, beaucoup, beaucoup, (very much.) Cela vous plait a dire. Non vraiment. Je m'y plais beaucoup. Que pensez-vous du dernier o ivrage de C. D 1 Je ne Taime pas du tout. Cela vous plait a dire, car il plait a tout le monde. S'ii plait a tout le monde, je vous assure qu'il ne me plait pas. Quel parapluie voulez-vous ? C'est celui-ci que je veux. Et quels gants vous faut-il 1 Ce sont ceux-l& qu'il me faut. Que faut-il a votre cousin ? II a ce dont il a besoin. Alors, vous pouvez vous en aller. Nous aliens nous en aller dans un instant. Adieu, au plaisir. Je m'en vais aussi. Au plaisir, done. What is your pleasure, Sir 1 ? I am inquiring after (40 2 ) your father. Is he at home? No, Sir, he is gone out. What do you say? (Plait-il?) I tell you that he is gone out. Will you sit down and wait till he comes back? When do you expect him'? When \vill he come back ? I do not know exactly. He may return in a quarter ui an hour or less; he may return only for dinner. That is, between (entre) 2 and 3 o'clock. I suppose, (supposcr.) Not between 2 and 21 242 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (I.) 3, as you suppose, but between 1 and 2. Never mind. I have na time to wait now, so that I had better call again. As you please. What name shall I tell him? Give him this note: he will find mj name in it. I will give it to him. Good morning. Is it our bakei or the doctor's, who has sold you bread on credit 1 It is ours. Is that your son? He is not mine; he is my friend's neighbor's son, (le fils du voisin de mon ami. 140 2.) Where is yours? He haa become a traveller, (voyageur ;) he is now in Paris. No, I am mis- i&ken, in Bordeaux. Do you intend to sell your coat? I intern* keeping it, for I want it. Instead of keeping it, yea had better sell it. Do you sell your horses ? I do not sell them. Instead of keep- ing them you had better sell them. Does our friend keep his para- sol ? He does keep it ; but instead of keeping it he had better sell it, for it is worn out. Does your son tear his book ? He does tear it; but he is wrong in doing so, for instead of tearing it he had better read it. FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 48th. Quarantc-huitieme Le$on, 48m VocABULiiRE, Ire Section. When will you go away ? (43 2 .) I will go soon. By and by. He will go away soon, (by and by.) We will go to-morrow. They will go to-morrow. Thou wilt go immediately. Wlien, (conjonction adverbiale.) What will become of you if you lose your money ? (44 3 .) I know not what will become of me. What will become of him ? What will become of us ? What will become of them ? I do not know what will become of them. The turn, my turn, in his, in my turn, In my brother's turn. Each in his turn. When it comes to your turn. Our turn will come. To take a turn, (a walk.) Ho is gone to take a walk. Quand vous en irez-vous ? Je m'en irai bientot. Tout a I'heure. II s'en ira tout a I'heure. Nous nous en irons demain. Us s'en iront demain. Tu t'en iras sur le champ. Lorsque, (never used interrogatively.) t Que deviendrez-wjtts si vous perdez votre argent ? (Obs. 105.) t Je ne sais pas ce que je deviendrai. t Que deviendra-t- il ? t Que deviendrons-fwms ? t Que deviendront-i'Zs ? t Je ne sais pas ce qu'iis deviendront Le tour, mon tour, dson, amont'y a pas lain, Combien de milles y a-t-il ? Un mille. Y a-t-il dix milles ? II y a plus de aeux cents milles de New York a Washington. II y a environ cent milles de Ber?is a Vienne. De Venise, du Havre. (9.) Je suis de Paris. t De quel pays etes-voua? Etes-vous de Frr ace ? J'en suis. Je n'en suis paa Le Parisien t II est Parisien. Le roi. Le phitosf phe, Le prdcepteur. L'aubergiste, 1'hote. Etes-vous Anglais ? D'ou venez-vous ? Je viens de Paris. FIFTIETH LESSON. (1.) TO flee., lo fly, run away. Run away. Do uot fly away. I run away, thou runnest away, he runs away. Why do you fly? I fly because I am afraid. To assure. I assure you that he is arrived. To hear a sound, a noise. TJ hear a news Wave you hearu nothing new ? I have hsard nothing new. S'enfuir,* 2, s'e ifuyant, fui. Enfuyez-vous. Ne vous enfuycz pas Je m'enfuis, tu t'cnfuis, il s'enfuit Pourquoi vous enfuyez-vous ? Je m'enfuis parce que j'ai peur. Assurer, 1. Je vous assure qu'il est arrive". Entendre un son, un bruit. Apprendre une nouvelle (nom fern.) t N'avez-vous rien appris de nou veauf 1 Je n ai rie.i appris de nouveau. ClNQUANTlfeME TH&ME. Ire Sec. Allez-vous quelque part? Pourquoi me demandez-vous celal Farce que je vois que vous etes pret a voyager. Vous avez tout ce qu'il faut pour cela. Chapeau, gants, parapluie, manteau. ( 14 C 6.) Vous avez raison. Je vais partir pour Providence. Com- bien y a-t-il d'ici a Providence? II y a environ 250 milles. Y a-t-il plus loin de New York a Washington que de Philadelphie a Provi- dence? II n'y a pas tout-a-fait si loin. Qui craignez-vous ? Ce mediant homme qui s'enfuit. Ne craignez-vous pas ce gros chien noir? Je ne le crains pas, il n'est pas mediant; il n'a jamais mordu personne. N'a-t-il pas mordu Paubergiste ? Non, il ne lui a pas fait de mal. Qu'est-ce qui ($116) vous plait tant, mon jeune neveu ? Ce petit chien-la. II est si obeissant qu'"il fait tout ce ($ 91) qu ; on vtut. N'aviez-vous pas mon dictionnaire ce matin ? Si fait, je 1 'a vais, et je Pai encore. En avez-vous eu besoin? Non, pas jusqu'a present. Si vous en avez besoin, je vous le rendrai. Don nez-le-moi. Le voici. How far is it from Paris to London ? It is nearly two hundred miles Irom Paris to London. Is it far from here to Berlin ? It is far. Is it far from there to Vienna? It is almost a hundred and fifty n.iles from there to Vienna. Is it further from Paris to Blois tnan from Orleans to Paris? It is further from Orleans to Paris than from Paris to Blois. How far is it from Paris to Berlin? It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin. Do you intend to go to Paris soon? I intend to go soon. Why do you wish to go this time . l (cette fois ?) In order to buy good books and g>od gloves, and to see my good friends. Is it long since you were there? (n'y, 49 2 , Obs. 114.) It is nearly a year since I was there. DC you not go to Italy, this year (cettc annee ?) I do not go, for it ifl 1oo far from here to Italv. 254 FIFTIETH LESSOR. (2.) Who ire the men that have just arrived? They are ph.iiG.so phers. Of what country are they ? They are from London. What countryman are you? I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Ita- lian. Are you from Tours? No, I am a Parisian. How much money have your children spent to-day? They have spent but little ] they have spent but one crown. Where did you dine yester- day ? I dined at the innkeeper's. Did you spend much ? I spent a crown and a half. Has the king passed here ? (par id ?) He has not passed here, but before the theatre. Have you seen him ? I have seen him. Is it the first time (la premiere fois que} you have seen him ? It is not the first time, for I have seen him more than twenty times. I thought you had seen him a few times, but I did not think that you had seen him twenty times. Why does your serva; t run away? He is afraid of that ox. Why do you run away? T ' I do not run away. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. To happen. The happiness, fortune. The unhappiness, misfortune. A great misfortune has happened. He has met with a great misfortune What has happened to you ? Nothing has happened to me. I have met with your brother. The poor man. I have cut his finger. Y"ou have broken the man's neck. To pity, pitying, pitied. pity, thou pitiest, he pities. Pity that host and his nephew. [ pity him with all my heart. With all my heart. To complain. Do you complai i ? I do not complain. Do you complain of my friend? [ do complain of him. [ do not complain of him. To dare, to spoil. Damage nothing. To serve, wait upon, served, serve. Dost thou wait upon, (serve ?) I do wait upon, (I serve.) Me waits upon, (he serves.) Do you wait upon ? (do you serve ?) To serve some one, to wait upon some one. Arriver, 1. Le bonheur. Le malheur. II est arrive un grand malheur. t II lui est arrive un grand malheur Que vous est-il arrive ? II ne m'est rien arrive. J'ai rencontre votre frere. Le pauvre homme. t Je lui ai coupe le doigt. t Vous avez casse \ecou a rhomin*. Plaindre,* 4, plaignant, plaint. Je plains, tu plains, il plaint. Plaignez cet hote et son neveu. Je le plains de tout mon cceur. t De tout mon coaur. t Se plaindre,* 4. Vous plaignez-vous ? t Je ne me plains pas. Vous plaignez-vous de mon ami ? Je m'en plains. Je ne m'en plains pas. Oser, 1. Gdter, 1. Ne gatez nen Servir,* 2, (25 1 ,) servi, serve*. Sers-tu t Je sers. II sert. Servez-vous ? Servir quelqu'un. FIFTIETH WESSON. (2.) 255 Has he been in your service ? I A-t-il 616 a votre serv;ce f H^ he served you ? | Vous a-t-il servi ? f t Combien y a-t-il qu'il vous sert f How long has he been in your ser- \ f Combien y a _ t _ U qu > U est v * ce ' ( service ? The service. Le service. To offer, ojfered, offer. Do you offer ? I do. I offer nothing. J)ost thou offer ? He oflers. Offrir* 2, offert, offrez. OfTrez-vous? J'^ffre. Jen'offre rieii Offres-tu ? II offre. CINQUANTIEME THEME. 2ie Sec. M offrez-vous ce bouquet? Oui, Mlie.; je vous Poffre de tout mon ccBur. Vous plait-ill (47 3 , 06s. 109.) II me plait beaucoup, et je vous remercie de votre don, (for your present.) De rien. (26V) En avez-vous offert un a Sophie? Non, je ne lui en ai pas offert. Lui en offrirez-vous un domain? Je n'y manquerai pas. Ne Poubliez pas, je vous prie. Non, je vous assure que je n'y manquerai pas. Avez-vous mon eventail Hollandais? Non, je croyais que vous 1'aviez vous-meme. Je 1'avais, il y a. un moment, et je croyais que vous 1'aviez pris. Non, je ne Pai pas eu. Ah! je le vois; il est derriere vous. Le voici. Merci. De rien. Qu 7 est : il arrive au neveu de M. Lenoir? Oh! pas grand 7 chose. II 5'est fait un peu mal au doigt. Ne vous est-il rien arrive ? A moi ? Non, il ne m'est rien arrive. Qu'est-ce que vous apprenez? J'ap- prends ceci, et ce' n'est pas difficile. Qu'est-ce que vous avez appris de nouveau? Je n'ai rien appris de nouveau. On p.arle du cholera, de la Californie ; mais ce n'est pas nouveau. Of whom has your brother heard 1 He has heard of a man to v'hom a misfortune has happened. Why have your scholars not done their exercises? I assure you that they have done them, and you arc mistaken if you believe that they have not done them. Whf have you done with my book? I assure you that I have not seen 't. Has your son had my knives? He assures me that he has not had them. Has your uncle arrived already? He has not arrived yet. Will you wait till he returns? I cannot wait, for 1 hive a good deal (beaucoup} to do. Have you not heard anything new? I have heard nothing new. Has the king arrived? They say that he has arrived. What has happened to you? A great misfortune has happened to me. What? (lequel ?) I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow with a stick. Then I pity you with all my heart. Why do you pity that man ? I pity him because you have broken ais neck. Why do you complain of my fr'iend ? I complain of lim because he has cut my finger. Does that man serve you well 1 256 FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) He does serve me well, but he spends too much. Are you wiling to take this servant ? I am willing to take him, if he will seivtj me. Can I take that servant? You can take him, for he ha? served me very well. How long is it since he is out of (hors de; your service ? It is but two months since. Has he served you long? He has served me for (pendant) six years. Do you offer mo anything'? I have nothing to (a) offer you. What does my friend offer you I He offers me a book. Have the Parisians offered yo'J anything? They have offered me wine, bread, and good beef. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. To confide, intrust. Trust me with it. Do you trust me with your money ? J do trust you with it. I have intrusted that man with a secret. The secret.. To keep anything secret. I have kept it secret. To take care of something. Do you take care of your clothes ? I do, I put them away. Will you take care of my horse ? I will take care of it. To leave, left. Leave, let me. To squander, to dissipate. He has squandered all his wealth. To hinde* prevent, keep from. You hinder me from sleeping. Do not keey me from sleeping. To shop, to purchase. What have you purchased ? f have purchased two handkerchiefs and a bag. Have you purchased anything ? Most lovely, charming. A dmirably. That hat fits you admirably. That coil fits him very well. It : a charming. Confar, 1, ... a ... Confiez-le-mci. Me confiez-vous votre argent ? Je vous le confie. J'ai confi^ un secret a cet homme. Le secret. t Carder le secret de quelque chos* t J'en ai garde le secret. Avoir* soin ) de , ^ Prendre* soin, ) Avez-vous soin de vos habits ? J'en ai soin, je les serre. Voulez-vous prendre soin de moc cheval ? Je veux en prendre soin. Laisser, 1, laisse. Laissez-moi Dissiper, 1. 11 a dissipe tout son bien. Empecher, 1. (de av. 1'infinL* t Vous m'empechez de doripir. Ne m'empechez pas de dormir. Faire emplette, (a feminine noun takes de before the substantive.) Faire des emplettes. t De quoi avez-vous fait empltte f t J'ai fait emplette de deux moa choirs, et d'un sac. Avez-vous fait des emplettef- ? Charmant, (an adjective,) tres-bia extremement bien, (adverbs.) A merveille, (an adverb.) Ce chapeau vous va a mervei 1 ^ Cet habit lui va tres-bien. C'est c^armant. FIFTIETH LSSON. (3.) 257 T T jibiE. 3me Sec. Quclqu'un vient de s'en aller, n'est-ce pas? Oui, quelqu'un vient ie sortir. Qui vient de s'en aller ? C'est un Anglais qui a dissipe tout son bien (all his fortune, wealth) en France. Est-ce un An- glais? Oui, je vous assure. Je le croyais Allemand ou plutot Hoi- iandais. Vous vous etes trompe, car il est de Bristol, en Angleterre. Pourquoi cet adolescent fuit-il? II s'enfuit parce qu'il craint d'etre puni. Par qui craint-il d'etre puni ? II craint de 1'et.re pay un de ses parents, parce qu ; il n'a pas pu faire son devoir. A qui confiez-vous votre argent? Je le coufie a la banque, ou je le garde moi-meme. ( 4l.) Ne confiez rien a ce garcon-la, car il lie peut pas garder un secret. Je ne lui confierai rien. Qui a soin de voa oiseaux? J'en ai soin moi-meme. Qui en aura soin lorsque vous eerez chez votre oncle? Thomas m'a promis d'en avoir soin. Laissez mes gants blancs, (leave my white gloves alone.) Vous les salissez, vous les gatez. Tenez! les voila, (here! there they are.) Why do you pity our neighbor ? I pity him because he has trusted a merchant of (de) Paris with his money, and the man (et que celui-ci) will not return it to him. Do not trust this man with anything. I do not trust him with anything. Has he already cheated you ? I have never trusted him with anything, so that he has never cheated me; but it is said that he has cheated many people. Will you trust my father with your money? I will trust him with it. With what secret has my son intrusted you ? I can- not intrust you with that with which he has intrusted me, for he has desired me (m'a prie de) to keep it secret. Whom do you intrust with your secrets? I intrust nobody with them, so that no- body knows them. Has your brother been rewarded ? He has, on the contrary, been punished; but I beg you (prier) to keep it secret, for no one knows it. What has happened to him ? I will tell you what has happened to him, if you promise me to keep it feeciet. Do you promise me to keep it secret? I do promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. Will you take care of my clothes? I will take care of them. Are you taking care of the book which I lent you ? I am taking care of it ; I have put it away in my desk. Who will take care of my servant? The landlord will take care of him. Do you throw away your hat? I Jo not throw it away, for it fits me admirably. Does your friend sell his coat? He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. Who has spoiled my book ? No one has spoiled it, because no one has dared to touch it, (le toucher.) Did not that little boy with black hair touch 258' FIFTIETH LESSON. (3.) it ! No, I prevented him from touching it, (his touching it.) Pre" vent his touching it ; for if he does, he will soil and spoil it. POUR LA 50ME LECON. Theme en Fran?ais. Le chien de Petranger a-t-il mal au dos? Oui, il a mal au dos. Le jeune cheval du boucher a-t-il mal au dos ? Non, maig son vieux mouton a mal au dos. Va-t-il tuer le mouton qui a mal au dos? Non, il ne va pas tuer celui-la. Lequel va-t-il tuer ? II va tuer celui qui a mal au pied. Qui a mal au lios? Je ne sais pas qui a mal au dos. Le ioli petit mouton de Mile. Sara est-il dans le jardin ? Non, il est dans son appartement Quel appartement allez-vous prendre ? Je vais prendre celui qu vous n ? avez plus. Aimez-vous cet appartement-la'? Non, maia j'aime celui-ci. Le trouvez-vous (do you think it) joli? Oui, assez joli. Ne le trouvez-vous pas trop petit ? Non, je le trouve assez grand. Quel jour allez-vous prendre votre appartement? Nous allons le prendre le 10 de ce mois. N'est-ce pas aujourd'hui le buit? Si fait, c'est le huit. Alors (then) vous allez prendre votre appartement dans deux jours'? Oui, nous allone le prendre dans deux jours. Avec qui allez-vous jouer ? Je vais jouer avec le fiis du dentiste. Ou allez-vous jouer avec lui? Nous allons jouer dans 1'atelier de son pere. Voulez-vous venir jouer avec nous ? Avec plaisir. Qui est dans cet appartement-la 1 Le petit garpon qui a mal au coude et au genou. Avec qui les medecins sont-ils ? Us sont avec les enfants qui ont mal aux yeux. Ne voulez-vous pas venir avec nous voir le pont de fil de fer ? Si fait, avec plaisir, (yes, 1 will.) Ce bois de lit-la est-il assez grand pour 1'appartement que vous prenez? Celui que nous prenons n'est pas tres-grand. Pour- quoi vos petits amis vont-ils chez le consul ? Us y vont pour lire les journaux de France. Quels papiers de France recoitril? II en recoit plusieurs. En regoit-il autant que le President du- conscil municipal? (of council.) II en recoit plus que lui. En lit-il pins de dix? II en lit moins de dix. II n'en lit que quatre ou cinq. N'est-ce pas assez? Si fait. Je crois que c'est trop. Je ne pen* pas en lire autant. Combien en lisez-vous? Je n'ai le temps d'en lire qu'un. Le boucher vous apporte-t-il ce que vous achetez au marche? II ne me 1'apporte pas; mais il m'envoie ce que j'achete. Vous l'envoie-t-il tous les matins'? Non, nous n'allons au marchc que tous les trois jours, le mercredi et le samedi. Avez-vous deux grands bois-ds-lit? Non. J'ai un grand bois-de-lit pour moi et un petit pour mon fils. A qui est ce beau iardin? C : est celui de . . . A qui sont cee FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 25& beaux chevaux et ce joli carrosse, (carriage.) Je ne sais pas a qui Us sont. Vous etes grand ; mais je crois que mon cousin est plus grand que vcms. Non, il est moins grand que moi. J'ai deux pouces de plus que lui. (O&s. 71.) Les Americains envoient-iL? plus de coton en France qu'en Angleterre (England) ? Non, ils en envoient beaucoup plus en Angleterre qu'en France. Ou les Bos- toniens achetent-ils leur charbon ? Ils 1'achetent presque toujours & Philadelphie. Combien le paient-ils a Philadelphie ? Ils le paient $4 le tonneau ( 7) el ils le vendent $7 ou $8. Votre onclo lit-il beaucoup? II aime beaucoup a lire les ouvrages Francais, Anglais, et Americains. Vos cousins lisent-ils les journaux tous lea jours'? Ils commencent tous les matins a les lire. Que lit votre pere ? II ne lit rien a present; il a mal aux yeux. II fait lire notre plus jeune frere pour lui. Quels ouvrages les Americains lisent-ils? Us lisent les ouvrages de toutes les autres nations aussi bien que les leurs, Ont-ils, eux-memes; beaucoup d'ouvrages? Ils en font tous les jours quelques-uns. L'ami du fils de son jardinier travaille-t-il autant que le cousin du menuisier ? Non, il ne travaille pas tant que lui. Est-il plus jeune ? Non, au contraire, il est plus age. Combien a-t-il de plus? (How much older?) 11 a 2 ans de plus. II est done paresseux? Oui, un peu. Vous avez de jolis souliers, qui vous les fait ? Notre cordon- nier. Les fait-il toujours aussi bien? Oui, si vous les faites faire. Combien vendez-vous ces gants, Mile.? Nous les vendons demi- dollar. En avez-vous a un quart de dollar? Oui, nous en avons; mais ce ne sont pas les meilleurs. Laissez-moi voir les uns et les autres. Voici ceux que nous vendons cinquante sous; ils sont supeibes, com me vous voyez. Voila ceux de 25 sous. Ils sont bons ; mais ils sont moins Dons que les autres. Votre panier est-il assez gr?.nd pour mettre votre marche (marketing) dedans? Je crois que oui. Nous y mettons, du moins beaucoup de choses. Qu'a votre cheval ? II a mai au dos et a un pied. Jules n'a-t-il pas mal a 1'ceil? Si fait: il y a mal. FIFTY-FIRST LESSON, 51st. Cinquante et unieme Le$on } 51me VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. Will the people come soon ? Soon, very soon, too soon, enough. A violin. A piano. Le monde viendra-t-il bientot ? Bientot, trop tot, assez tot. Un violon. Un piarm. To play upon the vio in. ) r - JL ' i' / * Joner flu violon. T. p by the v;o in. 260 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) Ols. 118. When a musical instrument is spoken of, the verb, jouet, id play, takes de, but a, when a game is spoken of, As : To play at cards, at chess. To play the (upon the) piano. What instrument do you play ? To touch. To play the piano. Near me, near them, near the fire. Near the trees, near the hotels. Near going. Near breaking it. Where do you live ? I live near the castle. What are you o>ing near the fire ? To dance. To fall, fallen, do not fall. Did you fall ? I did not. To drop, (meaning to let fail.) Has he dropped anything ? He has not dropped anything. .To retain, to hold, keep back. To approach, to draw near. Draw near the fire, (approach.) Do you approach the fire ? I do approach it. To approach, to have access to one. He is a man difficult of access. I go away (withdraw) from the fire. To withdraw (or go away) from. I go away from it. Why does that man go away from the fire ? He goes away from it because he is not cold. 5V; much, so many. I have written so many notes that I cannot write any more. Do you fear to go out ? Jouer aux cartes, jouer aux echecs. t Jouer du piano. t De quel instrument jouez-vous t Toucher, 1. Toucher lo piano. Pres de moi, pres d'eux, pres dufeu Presdesarbres, pres des hotels. ($ 11.' Pres d'aller. Pres de le cjjsser. Ou demeurez-vovs ? Je demeure pres du chateau. Que faites-vous pres du feu ? Danser, 1. Tomber, 1, tombe e . Ne tombez point. Etes-vous tombe ? Je ne suis pas tombe. Lais&er tomber. A-t-il laisse" tomber quelque chose ? II n'a rien laisse tomber. Eetenir,* 2, (comme tenir, 24, 25', 34'.) S'apprecher, I, (de av. un nom.) Approchez-vous du feu. Vous approchez-vous du feu ? Je m'en approche. Approcher quelqu'un. C'est un homme qu'on ne peut op- procher. Je m'e'loigne du feu. S'eloigner, 1, (de av. le n^m.) Je m'en eloigne. Pourquoi cet homme s'eloigne-t-il du feu? II s'en eloigne parce qi'il n'a paa fro id. Taut. J'ai e*crit tant de billets que je no puis plus en ecrire. Craignez-vous de sortir ? Je crains de sortir. I do fear to go out. ClNQTJANTE ET UNIEME TldblE. Ire Sec. J'ai entendu tomber quelque chose, avez-vous rien laisse toroberl Non, je crois ne rien avoir laisse tomber. Voyez, cependant. Ah! voici un de d'argent ; est-ce vous qui 1'avez laisse tomber? C'est le de de Louise. Je 1'ai peut-etre fait tomber. Je croyais Pavcir mis dans son panier. Je 1'ai trouve pres du pied du fauteuil. Merci. De rien. Qui va au musee cet apres-midi ? George y va; mais jo crams de ne pas pouvoir y aller. Pourquoi done 1 Mon oncle FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 261 nont de me dire qu'il attend 100 sacs de cafe et qu'il faut le& rece voir et les faire mettre dans le magasin. N'importe, si vous n ? j ullez pas cet apres-midi, vous irez une autre fois. Cela est vrai Jouez-vous du violon et du piano ? Non, je ne joue que du violon En jouez-vous tous les jours ? Un peu, pour ne pas oublier. Do you play the violin ? I do not play the violin, but the piano. Shall we have a ball to-night? We shall have one, in the large par- lor. At what o'clock? At a quarter to eleven. What o'clock is it UCw? It is almost eleven, and the people will soon come. What instrument will you play? I shall play the violin. If you play the violin, I shall play upon the piano. Are there to be (doit-il y avoir, 47 2 ) a great many people at our ball ? There is to be a great many. Will you dance? 1 shall dance. Will your children dance? They will dance if they please, (si cela leur convient, or si cela leur plait.) How do you spend your time in this country ? I spend my time in playing on the piano, and in reading. How does your cousin divert himself? He diverts himself in playing upon the violin. Does any one dance when you play? A great many people dance when I play. They never fail to do it. (On n'i/ manque jamais.) Who? At first (d'abord) our children, then our cousins, at last our neighbors. Do you amuse yourselves ? I assure you that we amuse ourselves very much. Whom do you pity ? 1 pity your friend. Why do you pity him ? I pity him because he is ill. Has anybody pitied you ? Nobody has pitied me, because I have not been ill. Do you offer me any- thing? I offer you a fine gun. What has my father offered you? He has offered me a fine book. To whom have you offered your fine horses? I have offered them to the English captain. Dost thou offer thy pretty little dog to these children? I offer it to them, for I love them witl. all my heart. Why have you given that boy a blow with your fist? Because he hindered me from sleeping- Has any- body hindered you from writing? Nobody has hindered me from writing, but I have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin and nephew. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. To recollect, (no prep, in French.) Se rappeler, I, (33 3 ,) rappelez-vouc Do you recollect that ? cela. Vous rappelez-vous eela? I d"> recollect it. I Te me le rappelle. f\>re your brother recollect that ? lie recollects having seen it. IV> vou recollect the words ? Votre frere se rappelle-t il coin ? II se rappelle 1'avoir vu. Vous. rappelez-vous les mots ? I do recollect them. Je me les rappelle. Have you recollected the words ? I Vous ctes-vons rappele* les mot* t 262 FIFTY-l'IRST LESSON. I have recollected them. I have not recollected them. Have you recollected them ? You have recollected them. Has he recollected them ? He has recollected them. We have recollected them. They have recollected them. I recollect (remember) coming. Je me les suis rappeltSs. Je ne me les suis pas rappelds Vous les etes-vous rappeles ? Vous vous les etes rappeles. Se les est-il rappeles ? II se les est rappeles. Nous nous les somrues rappelea. Us se les sont rappeles. Je me rappelle etre venu. /Se souvenir,* 2, de. So ivenez-voai de . . . Se ressouvenir,* 2, de. enir,* 24 3 , 25', &c.) Do you remember that man ? I do remember him. Do you remember seeing him ? I do not. 1 do remember it. What do you remember ? I remember nothing. I do not remember falling down. To sit down. Sit down, (impera.) Are you sitting down ? I am sitting, thou art sitting down. Is he sitting down ? He is not. I shall or will sit down. He sits near the fire. He is sitting near the fire. To run away, to fly. Did you run away ? I did not run au ay. Why did that man run away ? He ran away because he was afraid. Who has run away ? \Ressouvenez-vous-en, (de avani le nom et av. 1'auxiliaire.) Vous souvenez-vous de cet homoie t Je m'en souviens. Vous souvenez-vous de 1'avoir vu * Je ne m'en souviens pas. Je m'en souviens. De quoi vous souvenez-vous ? Je ne me couviens de rien. Je ne me souviens pas d'etre tomba t S'asteoir,* pres. part, s'asseyant ; past part, assis. Asseyez-vous. Vous asseyez-vous ? Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds. S'assied-il? II ne s'assied point. Je m'assierai, orje m'asseierai. (462) I II est assis pres du feu. I Se sauver, I, s'enfuir,* 2. (50 '.i Vous etes-vous sauve ? Je ne me suis pas sanve. Pourquoi cet homme s'est-il sauve J II s'est sauve parce qu'il a eu peur. Qui s'est enfui ? f Qui s'est sauve ? He has. They have. I II s'est enfui. Us se sont sauve"s, ClNQTJANTE ET UNIEME TfifblE. 2de Se Vous ivez 1'aird'avoir froid, approchez-vous du feu. Je n'ose pas m ; en approcher. Pourquoi n'osez-vous pas'? Je crains de ma Draler. Cela vous plait a dire. (47 3 .) Votre neveu s'eloigne-t-il du feu parce qu'il craint de se bruler ? Non, mais parce qu ; il n'a plus froid, je pense. Nun, ce n'est pas pour cela. Et pourquoi done 1 ll a laiase tomber un quart de dollar, et il veut le ramasser. Tenez le voila pres du sofa. Ramassez-le pour lui. De quel cote du sofa 1 De ce cote-ci j la, pres de votre pied. Bon, je le vois a present. Je I'ai, je vais le 1-ui rendre. Tenez, voici votre quart de dollar. Merci. De rien. Ah ! M. I ucien, vous rappelez-vous ie nom du medecip FIFTY-FIRST LES.SON. (3.) 26" du general ? Non, je ne me le rappelle pas. Qui s'assied sur ce tauteuil? Parsonne ne s'assied dessus. Alors, je vais m'y asseoir. Comme il vous plaira ; il est k votre service. Pourquoi le petit Jules s'eloigne-t-il ? II a honte de ne pas s'etre souvenu de vous porter rnon billet. Do you remember anything pretty ? I remember nothing at all ; I am too sleepy. What does your uncle recollect ? He recollects o yon like to write better than to speak? t like to spotk better than to write. Better than. Aimer mieux, (no prep. 170 2.) Aimez-vous mieux rester ici que d sortir? J'aime mieux rester ici q^e de sortir, (mieux comes directly after the verb.) II aime mieux jouer que d'etudier. Aimez-vous mieux 6crire que de parler ? J'aime mieux parler quo d'ecrire. Mieux . . . que de, (avant un inftnitiC) Only, when separated from the verb, 264 FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.J lie likes to do both. I like beef better than mutton. Do you like bread better than cheese ? I like neither the one nor the other. I like tea as much as coffee. Just as much, hardly so much. A calf, calves. Some, any veal. Aloud. Low, too low. Does your master speak aloud or low ? He speaks aloud and slowly. In order to learn French, one must speak aloud and quick. Quicker, faster. As fast as you. Not so quick, less quick. He eats quicker than I. Do you learn as fast as I ? I learn faster than you. I do not understand you, because you speak too fast. To sell cheap. To sell dear. Does he sell cheap ? He does not sell dear. He has sold to me very dear. This man sells everything so dear, that one cannot buy anything of him. You speak so fast that I cannot under- stand you. To buy something of some one. [ have bought it of him. II aime a faire 1'un et 1'autre. J'aime mieux le bceuf que le mouton Aimez-voua ntieux le pain que la fromage ? Je n'aime ni 1'un ni 1'autre. J'aime tout autant le the que le cafd Tout autant, a peine tant. Un veau, des veaux. Du veau. Haul, a haute voix. Bas, trop baa Votre maitre parle-t-il haut ou has < II parle haut et lentement. Pour apprendre le Fran^ais, il faut parler haut et vite. Plus vite. Aussi vite que vous. Pas si vite, mains vite. II mange plus vite que moi. Apprenez-vous aussi vite que moi ? J'apprends plus vite que vous. Je ne vous comprends pas, parce que vous parlez trop vite. Vendre bon marche. Vendre cher. Vend-il a bon marchd ? II ne vend pas cher. II m'a vendu fort cher. Get homme vend tout si cher, qu'on ne peut rien acheter chez lui. Vous parlez si vite que je ne puis vous comprendre. Acheter quelque chose aquelqu'un. Je le lui ai achete. 1 ClNQTTANTE ET UNIEME THEME. 3me Sec. Ramassez le gant de chamois de Mile. Clara, qui vient de le laisser tomber. (Obs. 115.) Adrien Pa deja ramasse. Votre neveu vieni de finir son devoir, n'est-ce pas ? Non, il ne 1'a pas encore fait. Moi, je croyais qu'ti I'avait (he had) fait. Vous vous etes trompe. (43 2 .) Voussortez 1 ? Passez-vous presdumusee? Non, je passs loin de-la. N ; irnporte. Charles, venez me voir ce soir, (come and see me. $150 12) voulez-vousi Je suis tres-occupe, cependant j'irai, si je m'en souviens. Si vous avez tant a faire, vous tomberez 1 Acheter d quelqu'un means to buy of or for some one. Ex. JTai achete zecheval d votre frere, I have bought that horse of your brother; i.e. Jt V 3,1 achete de lui, I have bought it of him. Fai achete un gateau a man enfant, I have bought a cake for my child : i. e. Je Vai achete pour lui, I have bought it for him. FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) 265 malade. Ne le craignez-vous pas'? Moi, je ne le crams pas, mais mon pere le craint. Pourquoi vous etes-vous sauve comme cela hier soir? J'etais (I was, imperfect) tres-presse. Qu'aviez-vous a faire? Vousle savez bieu. J : avais a appiendre mes lemons. Etiez- vous (were you, imperf.) presse lorsque vous etiez chez le marchaad de gateaux'? Quand etais-je la? N'y etiez-vouspas a onze heures? Je n'y etais pas. II vend trop cher. Ses gateaux sont a peine aussi bons que ceux des autres marchands, et ils sont beaucoup plus petits. Do .your scholars like to learn by heart? They do not like to learn by heart; they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. Do you like cider better than wine? I like wine better than cider. Does your brother like to play? He likes to study better than to play. Do you like veal better than mutton? I like the latter better than the former for breakfast ; but I like the former better than the latter for dinner. Do you like to drink better than to eat? I like to eat better than to drink; but my uncle likes to drink belter than to eat.-^Does the Frenchman like fowl better than fish ? He likes fish better than fowl. Do you like to write better than to speak? I like to do both. Do you like honey (miel) better than sugar? I like neither. Does your father like coffee better than tea? He likes" neither. Can you understand me ? No, Sir, for you speak too fast. Will you be kind enough (avoir la bonte de ne pas, 171 7) not to speak BO fast? I will not speak so fast, if you will listen to me. I am ready to listen. Can you understand what my brother tells you in French? He speaks so fast that I cannot understand him. Can your pupils understand you? They understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be understood one must speak slowly. Is it necessary to speak aloud to learn French ? It is necessary to speak aloud. Does your master speak aloud ? He does speak aloud and g'.ow. Why do you not buy anything of that merchant? He sells so dear that I cannot buy anything of him. Will you take me to another? I will take you to the son of the one from \vhom you bought last year, (Vannee passee.} Does he sell as dear as this one? He sells cheaper. Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish? They do not like to learn either; they only like to learn French. Do you like mutton ? I like beef better than mutton. Do your children like cake better than bread? They like both. Has Ke read all the books which he bought? He bought so many (taut) that he cannot read them. Do you wish to write some exercises? ; ha/e written so many that I cannot write any more. Why does ihit lad run away so fast? Will any one touch him? hui't him 7 28 266 FIFTY SECONE LESSON. (1.) No one will hurt him ; but he will be punished by his mastur fo: run having (pour ne pas avoir) done his task. ( 171 7.) FIFTY-SECOND LESSON, 52d.Cinquante-deuxieme Le$on, VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. By the side of. By. To pass by the side of some one. I have passed by the side of you. Have you passed by the side of my brother ? I have passed by the side of him. A cote de. Passer a cote de t uelqu'un. J'ai passe a cote de vous. Avez-vous passe a cote de mon frere I J'ai passe a cote" de lui. Obs. 119. Prepositions formed with a, au, or aux, and a noun, require the preposition de after them ; almost all others require none. To pass by a place. I have passed by the Meatre. He has passed by the castle. You have passed before my ware- house. Which way did they pass ! To dare. I dare not go thither. He dares not do it. I did not dare to tell him so. To make use of, to use. Used, use it Do you use my copy-book ? I do use it. Does your father use it ? He does use it. Have you used my gun ? I have used it. They have used your books. They have used them. To instmt, instructed, instruct. I instruct, thou instructest, he in- structs. To teach. To teach some one something. He teaches me arithmetic. [ teach you French, have taught him French. To teach some one (how) to do some- thing. fie teaches me (how) to read. Vou teach them (how) to write. t Passer aupres ffun endroit. t J'ai passe aupres du theatre, t II a passe aupres du chateau. Vous avez passe devant mon mag a sin. Par ou ont-ils passe ? Oser, 1, (point de preposition.) Je n'ose pas y aller. II n'ose pas le faire. Je n'ai pas os le lui dire. Se servir,* 2, de, (50 2 ) servi, serves vous-en. Vous servez-vous de mon cahier f Je m'en sers. Votre pere s'en sert-il ? II s'en sert. Vous etes-vous servi de mon fusil ? Je m'en suis servi. Us se sont servis de vos livres Us s'en sont servis. InstrvAre* 4, instruit, instruisez. J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruu Enseigner, 1. Apprendre * 4. Enseigner quelque chose dqi>elqu * II m'enseigne le calcul. Je vous enseigne le Fran^ais. Je lui ai enseigne* le Fra^aie. Apprendre a quelqu'un a faire quo? que chose, ou Enseigner a .... II m'apprend a lire. Vous leur apprenez a ecrire. FIFTY-SECOKD LESSON. (2.) 26? ClNQUANTE-DEUXIEME THEME. Ire Sec. Pai ou avez-vous passe pour venir chez nous ? J'ai passe auprea da pont de fer, du quai Buena Vista, et du musee. Vous avez done fait un grand tour, (taken a long walk."] Oui, j'aime a me promenei, et j'aime mieux me promener de bonne heure qu'a midi. Vous avez raisonj il ne fait pas si chaud alors. C'est pourcela que je le fais. Vous servez-vous de votre parapluie ? Non, je ne m'en sera pas. Prenez-le. Servez-vous en. Merci. De rien. Avez-voua rencontre le neveu de Pepicier? Non, mais j'ai passe a cote da celui de 1'apothicaire. Que vous a-t-il dit ? Rien. Je 1'ai aperiju ; mais il ne m'a pas apercu, de sorte que nous avons passe a cote Pun de Pautre sans nous parler. Avez-vous dit a votre cousin ce qu'on a dit de lui? Je n'ai pas ose. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas ose ? je nersais pas exactement pourquoi je n'ai pas ose; mais je ne le lui ai pas dit. Ne le lui direz-vous pas ? Pourquoi lui dire ? Cela ne lui fera pas plaisir. Have your new books been found ? They have been found. Where ? Under the bed. Is my coat on the bed ? It is under it. Are your brother's stockings under the bed ? They are upon it. Have I been seen by anybody ? You have been seen by nobody. Have you passed by anybody ? I have passed by you, and you did not see me. Has anybody passed by you ? Nobody has passed by me.^-Where has your son passed ? He has passed by the theatre. Shall you pass by the castle? I shall pass there. Why have you not cleaned my trunk ? I was afraid to soil my fingers. Has my brother's servant cleaned his master's guns? He has cleaned them, Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers'? He has not been afraid to soil them, because his fingers are never clean, (propre.) Do you use the books which I have lent you? I do use them. May I (puis-je") use your knife? Thou mayest use it, but thou must not cut thyself, no* spoil the knife. May my brothers use your books? They may use them. May we use your gun? You may use it. but you must not spoil it. What have you done with my wood? I have used it to warm myself. Has your father used my horse 1 He has used it. Have our neighbors used our clothes ? They have not used them, because they did not want them. Who has useJ my hat? Nobody has used it, for nobody has dared use it. VOCABULAIRE. 2Je Sec. The French master, (meaning the master of the French language.) The Frencn master, (a Frenchman, whatever he teaches.) Le maitre de Franyais. Lt matre Fran$ais. 268 FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) To shave, to shave one's self. To get shaved. To dress, to undress. To dress one's self. To undress one's self. Have you dressed yourself? [ have not yet dressed myself. Have you dressed the child i [ have dressed it. To undo, undone, undc. To get rid of. Are you getting rid of your damaged sugar ? I am getting rid of it. Did you get rid of your old ship ? I did get rid of it. To part with. The design, the intention. To intend, to have the intention of. I intend" to go thither. We have the intention to do it. Do you intend to part with your horses ? i have already parted with them. He has parted with his gun. Have you parted with (discharged) your servant ? I have parted with (discharged) him. To get rid of some one. I did get rid of him. Did your father get rid of that man ? lie did get rid of him. ClNQUANTE-DEUXlEME TH^ME. 2de Sec. Vous etes seul ; vous vous etes enfin debarrasse de ce vaurien. Je m'en suis enfin debarrasse. Pourquoi votre pere s'est-il defait de sea chevaux? S'en est-il defait? N'en savez-vous rien? Je n'en ai Raser, 1, se raser, rasez-vout. t Se faire raser. Habiller, 1. Deshabiller, 1, S'habiller, 1. Se deshabiller, 1. Vous etes-vous habille ? Je ne me suis pas encore habilld Avez-vous habille 1'enfant ? Je 1'ai habille-. Defaire,* 4, defalr, defait CB (comme faire, 25 1 , 27.) Se defaire,* de. Vous defaites-vous de votrc sucr avarie ? Je m'en defais. Vous etes-vous defait de votre yieu. 1 * vaisseau ? Je m'en suis defait. t Se defaire* de. Le dessein. Avoir dessein, (de avant un inhnt./ J'ai dessein d'y aller. Nous avons dessein de le faire. Avez-vous dessein de vous defaira de vos chevaux ? Je m'en suis deja defait. II s'est defait de son fusil. Vous etes-vous defait de votre do mestique ? Je m'en suis defait. Se debarrasser de quelqu'un. Je me suis debarrasse de lui. Votre pere s'est-il debarrasse du cet homme ? II s'en est dobarrasse. Serez- pret lorsqu'il arrivera? J'ai a me raser et a m'habiller, cai vous voyez que je ne suis ni rase ni habille. Eh bien ! rasez-vous et habillez-vous. Qu'est-ce qui vous en empeche ? Rien ne m ; en empeche, et je vais dans mon appartement pour cela. Appelez- tnoi. s'il vient avant mon retour. Je Vy manquerai pas. Guillauma riFTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 269 qu avez-vous dessein de faire de votre fusil Anglais? Le maitre FranQais m'a prie de (has asked me to) le lui preter. Allez-voua iC lui porter ? Pendant qu'il s'habille et se rase, il a envoye ce petit garcon, pour le chercher, (get it.) Allez-vous le confier a ce petit garcon,? Croyez-vous qu'il le gatera? J'en aipeur. Alois je ferai mieux de le lui porter moi-meme. Have you shaved to-day 1 ? I have shaved. Has your brothel shaved? He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved. Do you shave often ? I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the evening. When do you shave in the evening? When I do not dine at home. How many times a day does your father shave ? He snaves only once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day. Does your cousin shave often? He shaves only every other day, (de deux jours fun.) At what o'clock do you dress in the morning? I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. Does your neighbor dress before he breakfasts? He breakfasts before he dresses. At what o'clock in the evening dost thou undress? I undress as soon as I reiurn from the theatre. Dost thou go to the theatre every evening? I do not go every evening, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. At what o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the' theatre? I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o'clock. Have you already dressed the child ? I have not dressed it yet, for it is still asleep, (dort encore.") Did you at last get rid of that man ? I did get rid of him. Why has your father parted with his horses? Because he did not want them any more. Has your merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar ? He has succeeded in getting rid of it. Has he sold it on credit ? He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit. Who has taught you how to read ? I have learned it with (cAcz) a French master. Has he taught you to write ?- He has taught me to read md to write. VOCABULAIRB. 3me Sec. To wake. To awake. I generally awake at six o'clock in the morning. My servant generally wakes me at BIX o'clock in the morning. fiveiller, 1. Reveiller, 1. S'eveiller, 1. Se riveiller. Je m'eveille ordinairement a su heures Se preparer, 1. Se tenir* pret. Fendre, 4. Fendre le cceur d quelqu'un. Vous fendez le coeur a cet horn me. A qui est-ce que je fends 'e cceur ? Ces beaux yeux fendront plus d'im cceur. Kepandre, 4. fitendre, 4. S' etendre sur. Cet homme s'etend toujours sur ce sujet. Le sujet. S'etendre sur le plancher. Pendre, 4, d ou sur. Lemur. Le mur du jardin. Je pends mon habit au mur. II pend son chapeau a 1'arbre. Nous pendons nos souliers aux clous. Le voleur a e"te pendu. Qui a pendu le panier a 1'arbre ? Le voleur. Le brigand, le voleur de grand che- min. Vous etes toujours studieux, et voua le serez toujours. You are always studious, and always be so. Obs. 121. The personal pronouns are almost always repeated in French before every verb of which they are the nominative case, whether they are repeated in English or no* ; but when they are not in the nominative case they must always be repeated. Ex. Your brother is, and will always be good. A well-educated son never causes his father any grief; he loves, hon- ors, and respects him. Had he ? He had. He had not got it. Did you know ? I did know. I did net. ClNQUANTE-TROISIEME THEME. 2de Sec. Saviez-vous que votre oncle est ici ? Je ne le savais pas. Ne le isaviez-vous pas vraimenf? Non, je vous assure que je ne le savaia pas. Quand est-il arrive ? Hier soir. Je serai bien aise de le von Votre frere est toujours sage, et il le sera toujours. Un fils bien eleve ne cause jamaia de chagrin a son pjere ; il Z'aime, Z'honore, et le respecte. Avait-il? II avait. II ne I'avait pas Saviez-vous? Je savais. Je ne savais pas. FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (I.) 275 A -t il emore \v^ memes habits, ou en a-t-il change ? II en a change- II a un bel habit bleu au lieu du vieux brun qu'il avait. Pourquo* vous en allez-vous si tot 1 ? Ne vous amusez-vous pas ici? Vous vous trompez si vous pensez que je ne m'amuse pas ici; car, je vous assure que je trouve beaucoup de plaisir a causer (converse) avec vous. Pourquoi vous en allez-vous done ? Je croyais que vous le saviez. Qu'est-ce ? On m'attend (I am expected) au concert d'un de mes parents. II doit commence! a neuf heures, et vous voyest qu'il est neuf heures moins un quart. Je ne savais pas cela. Adieu 1 Are you ready to depart with me ? I am so. Does your uncle depart with us? He departs with us if he pleases, (s'il le veul.) Will you tell him to be ready to start to-morrow at six o'clock in the evening ? I will tell him so. Is this young man ready to go out ? Not yet, but he will soon be ready. Why have they hanged that man? They have hanged him because he has killed somebody. Have they hanged the man who stole (38 2 ) a horse from your brother ? They have punished him, but they have not hanged him , they hang only highwaymen in our country. What have you done with my coat? I have hanged it on the wall. Will you hang my hat upon the tree? I will hang it thereon. Have you not seen my shoes? I found them under your bed, and have hanged them upon the nails. Has the thief who stole your gun been hanged? He has been punished, but he has not been hanged. Why do you expatiate so much upon that subject? Be- cause it is necessary to speak upon all subjects. If it is necessary to (s'z'Z faut) listen to you, and to answer you when you- expatiate upon that subject, I will hang my hat upon the nail, (repeat the pro- noun je before each verb,) stretch myself along the sofa, listen to you, and answer you as well as I can. You will do well. Your nephew learns French, does he not? To be sure. How long haa he been learning it? These five months. Does he know as much as you ? He knows more than I. I thought you knew more than he. You made a mistake, He has been learning it longer than I. FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON, 54th. Cinquante-quatriime Le^on, 54m VOCABULAIBE. Ire Sec. To be well. flow do you do ? ( am well. t Se porter Men. t Comment vous porte vous I t Je me porte bien. Obi. 122. The verbs to be and to do. are both expressed in French by tha 276 FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) reflective verb se porter, when they are ured in EngUsh to inquire after, et to speak of a person's health. How is your father ? j Comment se porte roonsieui votrs I pere ? Obs. 123. The qualifications of monsieur, Mr. ; madame, Mrs. ; made- moiselle, Miss; usually precede the possessive pronouns in French, when we speak to a person respecting his parents, relations, or friends, and wish to pay them some respect. He is ill. "our brother. Your cousin. II se porte mal. t Monsieur votre frere. t Monsieur votre cousin, t Messieurs vos freres. Your brothers. Obs. 124. It may be seen that the plural of monsieut s messieurs, being changed into mes. Yjur uncles. To doubt a thing. To question anything. Do you doubt that ? I do. I do not doubt it. I make no question, have no doubt of it. What do you doubt ? I doubt what that man has told me. | t Messieurs vos oncles. > Douter, l r de quelque chose. Doutez-vous de cela t J'en dooto. Je n'en doute pas. The doubt. Without doubt, no doubt. To agree to a thing. Do you agree to that ? I do agree to it. How much have you paid for hat ? I have paid three crowns for it. that De quoi doutez-vous ? Je doute de ce que cet homme m r a dit. Le doute. Sans doute. Convenir,* 2, de quelque chose, (con jugated like its primitive, renir.*, Convenez-vous de cela ? J'en conviens. t Combien avez-vous paye ce cha- peau ? t Je Fai paye trois e'cus. 06s. 125, When one of the prepositions, /or, at,*is used in English tc ezprest >he price of a thing, it is not rendered in French. (40 1 , 06s. 93.) I bought this wine at 6 dollars a bas> ket. ( 7.) I bought some at $10 a basket. J'ai achete ce vin 6 dollars le panier. (ou a 6 dollars.) J'en ai achete a $10 le panier. ClNQTJANTE-QUATRlihME TufbtE. Ire Sec. Ou est M. votre oncle ? II voyage. Y a-t-il long-temps qu'il voy- age? Il y a deja quelques mois. Se porte-t-il bien 1 ? Oui, il se porte beaucoup mieux depuis q\ril voyage. Que pense-t-il de 1'Eu- rope* Quelques pays lui plaisent, d'autres ne lui plaisent pas A-t-il ete en France? Oui, il y est passe ; raais comme il ne pane pas le FraiKjais, il ne 1'aime pas beaueoup. Comment 1 M. votra riF\Y-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 277 onclfc re parle pas Francais! Non, il ne Pa jamais appris Com ment se porte-t-on chez vous' 1 Tout le monde s'y porte bien. El chez M. votre neveu ? Le domestique dit qu'on y est malade. Qni y est malade? Je ne sais pas. Comme j'ai Pintention d ? y aller, je n'ai rien demande au domestique. Je doute de ce que ce valet dit, Je ne le crois pas toujours. Ou avez-vous achete ce joli baton ? Le troavez-vous joli ? Oui, charmant. Combien Pavez-vous paye ? Je iron ai donne que trois quarts de gourdes, (dollars.) Ce n'est pas cher. files vous convenu d'aller demain a Burlington 1 J'en suns convenu. Prenez de notre vin a $12 le panier. J'en prendrai. How is your father? (Monsieur votre pere ?) He is (only) so so. (35 1 .) How is your patient? He is a little better to-day than yesterday. Is it long since you saw your brothers ? (Messieurs vos freres ?) I saw them two days ago. How art thou ? I am tolerably well. How long has your cousin been learning French? He has been learning it only eight months. Does he already speak it? He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your brother, who has been learning it these two years. Is it long since you heard of my uncle? It is hardly a fortnight (qttinze jours) since I heard of him. Where is he staying now ? He is staying at Berlin, but my father is in London. Did you stay long at Vienna? I stayed there a fortnight. How long did your cousin stay at Paris? He stayed there only a month. Has your uncle at last bought the garden ? He has not bought it,' lor he could not agree about the price. Have you at last agreed about the price of that picture ? We have agreed about it. How much have you paid for it? I have paid fifteen hundred francs for it. What hast thou bought to-day ? I have bought two fine horses, three beautiful pictures, and a fine gun. For how much hast thou bought the pictures? I have bought them for seven hundred francs. Do you find them dear? I do not find them dear. How much nave you spent, then T I have spent and paid nearly four thousand francs. How many dollars (gourdes) is that ? About 800. It is a good deal of money. Have you already heard of your cousin who is gone to Hungary? He had agreed to write to me, but he has .iot yet done it; however, I have written to him. VOCABULAIRB. 2de Sec. The price. Have you agreed about the price ? We have agreed about it. About what have you agreed ? About the price- Le prix. ltes-vous convenus du prix f Nous en sommes convenus. De quoi Stes-vous convenus ? Du prix. 278 FIFTY FOURTH LESSOK. (2.) To agree, to compose v difference. To feel, feeling. Felt, feel. Do you feel ? We do not. I feel, thou feelest, he feels. To consent, to agree to ... I consent to go thither. To wear (garments.) The garment. What garments does he wear ? He wears beautiful garments. Against my custom. As customary. My partner. To observe something. To take notice of something. Do you take notice of that ? I do take notice of it. Did you observe that ? Did you notice what he did ? I did notice it. To expect, (to hope for.) What do you expect ? (hope for ?) Do you expect to receive a note from your uncle ? I expect it. I do not. He expects it. We expect it. Have we expected it. We have expected it ? To get, (meaning to procure.) I cannot procure any money. He cannot procure anything to eat. S J accorder, 1. Sentir* 2, sentant. Senti, atnttx. Sentez-vous ? Nous ne sentonspaa Je sens, tu sens, il sent. Consentir,* 2, (comme sentir,*) (d ou de av. 1'infin., a av. un nom.> Je consens a (d'y) aller. Porter, 1, (des habits.) Le vetemoat. Quels vetements porte-t-il? II porte de beaux vetements. Contre mon ordinaire. Comme a 1'ordinaire. Mon associe. t S'apercevoir, 3, dequelqiie c/.ne. Vous apercevez-vous de cela? Je m'en apergois. Vous etes-vous aperc,u de cela ? Vous etes-vous aper$u de ce qu'i! fait? Je m'en suis aperu. t S'attendre, 4, (a av. 1'infini.) A quoi vous attendez-vous f Vous attendez-vous d recevoir un billet de votre oncle ? Je m'y attends. II s'y attend. Nous nous y attehdons. Nous y sommes-nous attendus? Nous nous y sommes attendus. t Se procurer, 1. c Je nepeux pas me procurer d'argenl- ( Je ne puis me procurer de 1' argent. | II ne peut se procurer de quoi manger. ClNQUANTE-QUATRIEME TH^ME. 2de Sec. Quefque chose ne vois plait pas. C'est vrai. Je m'attends a recevoir un present, et il ne vient pas. Ne soyez pas -(4 1 2 ) impa- tient, il viendra, si on vous Pa promis. Qui vous fait ce don ? Le secretaire du general m'en a promis un. Le cousin de 1'apothi- caire a-t-il consenti a vous ceder son dictionnaire Anglais et FranQais ? Tl n ; y a pas encore consenti. Y consentira-t-il ? J'espere qu'il y consentira. Qu'allez-vous porter ce printemps? Je n'ai pas encore fait de choix. Je ne sais pas ce que je porterai. Moi, je porterai des habits fonces au printemps, et quelque chose de clair en ete. N'aviez-vous pas un surtout clair l-'hiver passe ? Si fait. J'en ai porte un tout 1'hiver Je le croyais. Moi, je ne les aime plus claiia FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) 279 Je les ai airnes autre fois. Avez-vous vendu votre grain a 75 cents te boisseau? (a bushel. $7.) J'en ai eu 80 cents le boisseau. Have you agreed with your partner ? I have agreed with him. Does he consent to pay you the price of the ship ? He consents to pay me the price agreed upon, (convenu.) Do you consent to go lo France ? I do. Do you too ? I ? No. Have you seen your old friend again* (revoir,* comme voir t * 25 1 , 33 3 .) I have seen him again. Did you recognise him ? I could hardly recognise him j for, contrary to his custom, he wears a large hat. How is he ? He is very wsll. What garments does he wear? He weais beautiful new garments. Have you taken notice of what your boy has done? I have taken notice of it. Have you (J'en) punisheu nim for it ? i have punished him for it. Has your father already written to you ? Not yet; but I expect (je m? attends) to receive a note from him to-day. Of what do you complain? I complain of not being able to procure some money. Why do these poor men complain? They complain because they cannot procure anything to eat. How are your parents? They are, as usual, (comme d V ordinaire,) very well. Is your uncle well ? He is better than he usually is. Have you already heard of your friend who is in Germany ? I have already written to him several times ; however, he has not answered me yet. Why have you punished your boy ? I did it because he broke my best glass. I had given him some syrup and water, and instead of drinking it, he spilt it en the new carpet, which we bought ten days ago; and what do you think he did afterwards? Did ho break the glass? Yes, he did, and then I gave him a few blows. What did you pay for a yard of your new carpet ? I paid dear for it: $1.60. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. To make fun of some one or some- } _, t ^j f Se moquer de queiqu un ou ae quel . To laugh at soml one or something. ) ^ ue )se ' He laughs at everybody. ) d j d He criticises everybody. > Do you 'augh at that man ? I ch not laugh at him. To slop, to stay. Stop, wait, hold on Have you stayed long at Berlin ? I staved there only three days. To sojourn. To stay. Where does your brother stay at present ? A i present, actually. Vous moquez-vous de cet hommc? Je ne m'en moque pas. S'arreter, 1. Arretez-vous. Vous etes-vous arrete long-temps 3 Berlin ? Je ne m'y suis arrthe que trois jours. Sejourner, 1. Ou Monsieur votre fr<>e scjourne-t-il actuellement f Actuellement. 280 FIFT /*FOtK TH LESSON. 3.) The residence, stay, abode. Paris is a fine place to live in. After reading. After cutting myself. After dressing yourself. After dressing himself. After shading ourselves. After warming themselves. I returned the book after reading it. I threw the knife away after cutting myself. You went to the concert after dress- ing yourself. He went to the theatre after dressing himself. We breakfasted after shaving our- selves. They went out after warming them- selves. The sick person, (the patient.) Tolerably well. It is rather late. It is rather far. Lc sejour. t C'est un beau sejoui quc Paris t Apres avoir lu. (40 1 .) t Apres m'etre coupe. t Apres vous etre habille 1 . t Apres s'etre habille. t Apres nous etre rases, t Apres s'etre chauffes. t J'ai rendu le livre apres 1'a voir lu. t J'ai jete le couteau aprea m'etra coupe", t Vous etes al!6 au omcert apres vous etre habille. t II est alle au theatre apres s'que de.) Why does he .augh at you ? He laughs at me because I speak badly. Why has your brother no friends ? He has none, because he criticises every- body. Why are you laughing at that man? I do not intend (je n'aipas dvssein) to laugh at him. I beg you not (frier de, $ 171 7) to do it; for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. Do you doubt what I am telling you ? I do not doubt it. Do you doubi what that man has told you? I doubt it, for he has often told Etorics, (mentir,* 44 3 .) Have you at last bought the horse which you FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 281 wished to buy last month ? I have not bought it. foi I have not Deen able to procure money. What have you done with the books v hich the English captain has ent youl I have returned them to him, after reading them. Why have you thrown away your knife ? I have thrown it away aftei cutting myself. When did I go to the concert'? You went after dressing yourself. When did your brother go to the ball? llo ,Tcnt after dressing himself. When did you breakfast ? We bieak- lasted after shaving ourselves. When did our neighbors go out? They went out after warming themselves. What did you do this morning'? I shaved, after rising, and went out after breakfasting. What did your father do last night 1 ? (hier soir?) He supped after going to the play, and went to bed after supping. Did he rise early ? He rose at sunrise. A USEFUL HINT. Some of the observations have been given in French, to show the pupil that it can easily be done. Let him now translate in French all the English he finds in the book, as a part of his daily task. FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON, 55th. Cinquante-cinquicme Le^on, 55m VOCABULAIEE. IrC Sec. DEFINITE ARTICLE, FEMININE Article Dtfini, Feminin. Sing, and plur. The, of, from the, to the, for the. Singulier. La, 1', de la, de 1', a la, a I 1 , pour la, pour 1. Piuriel. Les, des, aux, pour les. Obs. 126. It will be observed that the plural of the definite article is alike for both genders. (9 1 .) When the definite article stands before a vowel ar an h mute, in the tin gular, it is also alike for both genders, viz. V. Sing. Plur. The woman, women. The mother. The daughter or the girl. The sister. The candle. The bottle, The key. She, it. They, (nominatives.) Her, it. To her, to it. Of, from her. Of, from it. Them. To (hem. To them. Of, from thorn. Singulier. Piuriel. La femme, les femmes. La mere, les meres. La fille, les filles. La soeur, les soeurs. La chandelle, les chandelles. La bouteille, lea bouteilies. La clef, les clefs. Elle. Elles, ($ 38, 1 & 2.) Nominal La, P. Lui, y. D'elle, en. En (* 47.) Lee. Leur, (21 1 .) Y, (21 1 .) D'eilee en. En. Has she? She has. Haa she not 1 'A-t-elle? Elle a. N'a- -el.e oaa? 282 FIFTr-FIFIA LESSON. (1.) Have they? They have, they have not. \ Ont-elles? Ellesont, elles n'ont paa Of, from. To. With, My, (feminin singul'.er ) Ma, de ma, a ma, avec ma Thy. Ta, de ta, a ta, avec ta. His, her, its. Sa, de sa, a sa, avec sa My, (plur. des deux genres.) Mes, de mes, a mes, avec mes. 06s. 127. In the plural, the possessive pronouns are always alike for boUi genders. (9 1 .) The father and his son or his daugh- ter. ($ 32.) The mother and her son or her daugh- Le pere et son fils ou ta hl!e. La mere et son fils ou sa fille. ter. The child and its brother or its sister. 1 L'enfant et son frere ou sa soeur. Sing. Plur. Singulier. Pluriel. My pen, my pens. | Ma plume, mes plumes. Thy fork, thy forks. i Ta fourchette, tes fourchettes. His or her nut, his or her nuts. Sa noix, ses noix. Our hand, our hands. | Notre main, nos mains. Your mouth, your mouths. i Votre bouche, vos bouchee. Their door, their doors. | Leur porte, leursportes. Obs. 128. The personal pronoun leur must not be mistaken for the pos- sessive leur. The former never takes an s, while the latter does, when the person or thing possessftd is in the plural. Ex. Je leur parle, I speak to them ; je vois leurs freres et leurs soeurs, I see their brothers and their sisters. The pretty woman. ( SOO 4.) The pretty women. The small candle, the small candles. The large bottlo, tl.e large bottles. La jolie femme. Les jolies femmes. . La petite chandellc, les petites chandelles La grande bouteille, les grandes bouteilles. THME. Ire Sec. Comment se porte Madame votre mere ? Je vous temercie, elle se porte passablement. Et Mesdemoiselles vos soeurs? Elles ne se portent pas si bien qu'a 1'ordinaire. Qu'ont-elles ? Elles n'ont pas grand' chose ; mais elles se plaignent un peu. Les femmes aiment a se plaindre, n'est-ce pas ? Elles ne se plaignent pas plus que les homines. La fille du ministre est-elle mieux'? On di' qu'elle est plus mal. Mange-t-elle quelque chose ? Non, elle a trop mal a la bouche pour manger. Brule-t-on des chandelks ou du g^az chez votre soBur ? On y brule du gaz. On pense que ce n'est pas si cher que les chandelles. Ou Sophie a-t-elle mis la clef? La clef de auoi ? La clef du pupitre Franpais. Je re sais pas. Mais voici ma clef; elle ouvre le pupitre. N'importe. Je n'ai pas d> 1'onvrir. A-t-on apporte les bouteilles 1 Les touteilles da FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.^ 283 quoi ? Les bouteilles de vin. Oui, les voici ; (here they are,) Lerriere a porte. Combien avez-vous paye la bouteille ? J'ai paye presque an demi-dollar la bouteille. Avez-vous vu la jolie femme qui a passe par ici ? Quand a-t-elle passe 1 II y a un moment. J'etais alors occupe a casser mes noix, de sorte que je irai pas pu la voir. Ma plume d'acier est dans mon grand portefeuille, prenez-la, si voua la voulez. Merci. De rien. Has your sister my gold ribbon ? She has it not. What has she 1 She has nothing. Has your mother anything 1 ? She has a fine gold fork. Who has my large bottle ? Your sister has it. Do you some- times see my mother"? I see her often. When did you see your sister ? I saw her a fortnight ago. Who has my fine nuts'? Your good sister has them. Has she also my silver forks ? She has them not Who has them ? Your mother has them. Vhat fork have you ? I have my iron fork. Have your sisters had my pens ? They have not had them, but I believe that their children have had them. Why does your brother complain ? He complains because his right foot aches. Why do you complain ? I complain because my left eye aches. Among you country people (parmi vous autres ( 41) gens de campagne) there are many fools; are there not 1 ? asked (demanda) a philosopher, lately, (Vautre jour,) of a peasant, (a unpaysan.) The latter answered, (repondit :) " Sir, they are to be found (on en trouve) m all stations, (Vctat.") " Fools sometimes tell the truth, (la verite,'''] said (dit) the philosopher. What did the philosopher ask of the countryman ? He asked if there were not (ii j y avail pas) many fools among country people ? What did the countryman reply to the philosopher? He answered that there were some in all stations. Was the philosopher pleased with the peasant's answer? (la re* ponse, fem.) I think he was pleased with the answer. What do you think of the peasant's answer ? I think it .... (L'ecolier peut finir la reponse.) Do you not like that young lady's face? Yes, I do; but not her hair, (plur.) Has not that young woman too much tongue? Yes, she has a little too much; at least, so they say, (on le dit.) VOCABULAIEE. 2de Sec. Which woman ? Which women ? Which daughter ? Which daughters ? Which, what one ? Which ones ? This, that woman. These, those women. This lady, these ladies That young lady, those young ladies. Quelle femme ? Quelles fernmci* I Quelle fille ? Quelles filles ? Laquelle ? Lesquelles '; Cette femme. Ces femmes. Cette dame-ci, ces dames-ci. Cette demoiselle-la, ces demoi aol'cB-la. 284 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) The Land, the hands. The right hand. The left hand. I have a sore hand. La main, les mains. La main droite. La main gauche. J'ai mal a la main. Obs. 129. Avoir mal is used with the preposition c, to expr< 58 thak I part of the body is affected with illness or pain. (23 1 .) The tooth, the teeth. La dent, !es dents. Have you the toothache ? Avez-vous mal aux dents 1 I have the headache. J'ai mal a la tete. I feel a pain in my side. J'ai mal au cote*. His feet are sore. II a mal aux pieds. The face. The mouth. The cheek. La figure. La bouche. La jtme, The tongue. The language. La langue. The door. The window. The street. Laporte. La fenetre. La rue. The town. The linen. The old woman. La ville. La toile. La vieille femme. REMARK. From what precedes, this principle maybe deduced: The characteristic ending of French feminine nouns and adjectives is the letter 2 .) Some light. Some silk. Some good soup. Some good apples. De la lumiere. De la soie. De bonne soupe. De bonnes pommes. Obs. 131. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, and ct, double thai! final consonant before the a rr.ute of the feminine. Examples: A cruel certitude. Such a promise. An old acquaintance. A good truth. A dumb woman. Obs. 132. In the masculine, the above adjectives would he crttsl, tncun, ban, muet. Une cruelle certitude. Une pareille promesse. Une ancienne connaissarxo. Une bonne verite. Une femme mu*>.tte. FIFTY-FIF1H uiSSON. (2.) 285 INDEFINITE ARTICLE, FEMININE. Article Indefim, Fe^inin. 3 or an, of, from a, to a, with a. Une, d'une, a uue, avec uiio. A. virtuous woman. | Une femme vertueuse. Obf. 133. Adjectives ending in the masculine in x become feminine by cnanging x into s* as, masc. vertkeux ; fem. vertueuse, virtuous. \ happy young lady. J Une demoiselle heureuse. 1 ClNQUANTE-CINQUIEME TtliblE. 2de Sec. &ont-ce les Demoiselles Cavaignac 1 Oui, ce sont elles. Voulcz- foufi me presenter d elles? (introduce me to them. 64.) Volontiers. Vensz. Attendons un moment, car vous voyez qu'elles paiient u ces dames en bleu. Quelles sont ces deux dames en bleu, ellea Bonl jolies, n'est-ce pas? Je ne les connais pas. Approchons a pre- sent. Mesdemoiselles, vonlez-vous me permettre de vous presenter mon ami, M. de Montcalme ? Nous sommes bien aises, M. de Montcalme, de fiire votre connaissance, (acquaintance.) Mesde- moiselles, tout le plaisir est de mon cote. Vous avez bien de la bonte. (literally goodness, here, politeness.) Mile. Clara va-t-elle jouer du piano 1 ? Non, elle n'en touchcra pas (will not play) ce soir, parce qu'elle a mal a la main droite. Comment s'est-elle fait du mal? Elle s'est fait du mal avec ses ciseaux. Quel bruit est cela? C'est la porte de la rue (street door) qu'on vient de fermer. Pourquoi Mile. Sophie tint-elle son mouchoir sur sa joue? y a-t-elle mal? Elle n'a pas mal a la joue, mais aux dents. Cette femme muette est-elle heureuse ? Oui, elle est heureuse, parce qu'elle est bonne et vertueuse. Is your sistor writing N) ; Madam, she is not. Why does she not? Her rjht hand is sore. Why does not the daughter of your neighbor go out ? She does not, because she has sore feet. Why does my s'r.ter not speak ? Because she has a sore mouth. Hast thou not seen my silver pen ? No, but I have seen your sister's steel pen. Hast thou a front room ? I have a back one, (une de der- riere,) but my brother has a front one. Is it (est-ce) an upper room ? It is or.8, (e'en csl une.) Does the wife (la femme) of our shoemaker go OTI already ? No, my lady, she does not go out yet, for she is still very ill. Which bottle had your little sister? She had our moiner's, (celle de.) Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's? I have eaten neither of yours (de la votre) nor your mother's, but. of that of my good sister. Have you seen the lady who was with me this morning ? No, but 1 MUTT her amiable daughter. Has your mother hurt herself? She aaf, v.ot hurt herself. Can you write with this steel pen ? Which 1 1 F -orn the masculine heurenx. 286 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) (la qucllc?) Sophia's ^ Yes, Sophia's. No, but I shall wi he with the golden one, (celle d'or.) Each (chaque) woman thinks herself amiable, and each (chacune) is conceited, (a de Vamour propre.) The same as (de metne que) men, my dear friend. Many a one (tefj thinks himself (se croit] learned who is not so, (ne Vest pas,} and many men (bien des hommes) surpass (surpasser) women in vanity, (en vanite.) What is the matter with you 1 ? Nothing is the matter with me. Why does your sister complain * Because she has a pain in her cheek. Has your brother a sore cheek ? No, In t he feels a pain in his side. Where is the silk? It has fallen from the window in the street. Did this old woman pick it up ? Yes, she did ; but she did not pick up the linen. Did the linen fall also from the window ? Yes, it did. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. An active young woman. | Une jeune personne 1 active. 06s. 134. Adjectives ending in the masculine in /, become feminine bf changing f into ve, as, masc. actif ; fern, active, active. Une robe neuve. 2 Une proposition naive. 3 Avez-vous ma plume ? A new gown. An ingenuous proposal. Have you my pen ? No, Madam, I have it not. Which bottle have you broken ? Which door have you openea ? Non, Madame, je ne Pai pas. Quelle bouteille avez-vous cassee ? Quelle porte avez-vous ouverte ? Obs. 135. The past participle agrees with its direct object, (regime direct,} in gender as well as in number. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) Which windows have you opened ? Which bottles has the woman broken ? Which young lady have you con- ducted to the ball ? Which water have you drunk ? Which letters have you written ? This, this one. These. That, that one. Those. Have you this or that pen ? I have neither this nor that. Do you see tha woman ? I see her. Have you seen my sisters ? No, Miss, 1 have not seen them. Quelles fenetrcs avez-vous ouvertes I Quelles bouteilles la femme a-t-elle Quelle demoiselle avez-vous con duite au bal ? Quelle eau avez-vous bue ? Quelles lettres avez-vous ecrites ? Celle-ci. Celles-ci. Celle-la. Celles-la. Avez-yous cette ph'me-ci ou celle la? Je n'ai ni celle-ci ni celle-la. Voyez-vous cette femme ? Je la vois. Avez-vous vu mes sceurs ? Non, Mademoiselle, je ne les ar J>BJ! vues. 1 Personne, as a pronoun, is masculine ; as a substantive it ia fernin'ne, * From the masculine neuf 9 From the masculine wot/ FIFTY-FI1TH LESSON. (3.) 287 Lui a-t-il parle ? II lui a parlti. Lui, lour. (06s. 128.) Parlez-vous a mes soeurs? Je lour parle. De grosse toile. De bonne eau. Une serviette. Une serviette proprv Has he spoken to her ? He has. To her, to him, to them. Do you speak to my sisters ? [ speak to them. Seme coarse linen. Some good water. A napkin, a towel. A clean napkin. The following double the letter I : (before a consonant, | Beau, < before a vowel or A) g j ( mute, ) t before a consonant, | Nouveau < before a vowel or h \ mute, { Vieux, < Vicil, 5 Fou, ( Fol, 1 J Mou, ( Mol, a De beaux bas de soie. Le Chretien, Fern, la Chre'tienne Le Juif. " la Juive. Le negre. " la negresse. Un compagnon. " une compagne. (Lindsome. Sew. Nouvel, 01.1. foolish. Soft. belle. nouvelle. vieille. folle. molle. Un ami. " une amie. Celebrer, 1, filer, 1. Some fine silk stockings. The Christian. (06*. 132.) The Jew. (Obs. 134.) The negro. A companion. A friend. (Remark, p. 284.) To celebrate, to feast. ClNQUANTE-CINQUJEME TlI^ME. 3me Sec. A quelle joue avez-vous mal? Ala droite ou a la gauche? Je n'ai mal ni a la joue droite ni a la gauche. Vraiment ? Je croyais que vous aviez mal a 1'une ou a 1'autre. A quoi cette dame s'amuse- t-elle ? Elle s'amuse a toucher du piano. Guillaume, apportez do IP lumiere, nous voulons jouer aux echecs. Voulez-vous une chan- dello, ou allumerai-je le gaz? Apportez une chandelle, allumee. N'avez-vous pas revu notre ancienne connaissance, Mme. Leroux'! Non, je n'ai pas revu cette ancienne connaissance, mais j'en ai revu une autre. Qui ? Devinez, (guess.) Vous a-t-elle fait une pareille 1 Fol is used instead of fou before nouns beginning with a vowel. JFW Always precedes, and fou always follows its substantive. Ex. Un march! fou, a foolish bargain; un fol espoir, a foolish hope. Substantively,/on means a madman, and folle a madwoman. 2 Formerly, mol was more in use than mou. The Academy writes : " Vnhomme mou et effemine," a weak and effeminate man. \Ve read, tiowever, in Buffbn, " Les Chinois sont des peuples mols," the Chinese arc in effeminate people. 288 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. (3.) promesse ? Oui, elle en a fait une pareille, a ma sceur, ma cousine. et a moi. ($64 2.) Comment se portent Mesdemoiselles VOH soBurs ? Elles se portent tres-bien depuis quelques jours. Ou demeu- rent-elles ? Elles demeurent a Wilmington. Est-ce une petite ville ? Oui, c'est une petite ville dans Vetat de Delaware, (the state of Dela- ware.) Quel jour les Turcs celebrent-ils ? Us celebrent le vendredi ; les Juifs celebrent le samedi, et les Chretiens le dimanche. Quel *our est-ce que les negres celebrent? Les negres celebrent le jour d3 ieur naissance, (their birth-day.) Is your sister as old as my mother? She is not so old, but she is taller. Has your brother purchased anything? (fait des emplettes ?) He has purchased something, (il en a fait.} What has he bought * He has bought fine linen, good pens, old candles, and napkins. Has ho not bought some silk stockings? He has bought some. Have you a sore nose ? I have riot a sore nose, but 1 have the tooth- ache. Have you cut your finger? No, my lady, I have cut my hand. Will you give me a pen ? I will give you one. Will you have this or that? I will have neither. Which (laqudlc] one do you wish to have ? I wish to have that which your sister has. Do you wish to have my mother's good black silk (bonne soie noire) or my sister's? I wish to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, but that which you have. Do you open the back window ? I open it, because it is too warm. -Which windows has your sister opened ? She has opened those of the front room. Have you been at the ball of my old acquaint- ance? I have been there. rWhich young ladies have you taken to the ball? I took my sister's friends and companions (fern.) there. Did they dance ? They danced a good deal. Did they amuse them- selves? They amused themselves. Did they remain long at the oall ? They remained there two hours. Is this young lady a Turk ? No, she is a Greek. Does she speak French ? She speaks it. Does she not speak English? She speaks it also, but she speaks French better. Has your sister a companion ? She has one. Does she like her? She likes her very much, for she is very amiable. That active young woman is ingenuous, is she not? Yes, she is (both) active and ingenuous. What do you think of his sister's new silk gown? Her new silk gown? Yes, the silk one. Her now silk n pleases me much. FIFTY-SIXTH LESSO1> (1.) 289 FIFTY -SIXTH LESSON, 56th. CinquantC'sixicme Le$on, 56me VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. To go to the country. To be pleased in the country. To go to the bank. "Fo rtop at the bank. To t>r at the exchange Tr> or at the river. To or at the kitchen. T or at the cellar. To or at church. To or at school. To or at ihe French school. To or at the dancing school, singing hool. The play. 'The opera. To go a hunting. Is h j a hunting ? To hunt. To fish. To go a fishing. To get tired of fishing. The whole day, all the day. The whole morning. The whole evening. The whole night, all the night. The whole year. '.;'(, e whole week. Tbs whole society. Aller a la campagne. S' am user a la campagne. Aller a la banque. S'arreter a la banque. A la bourse. A la riviere. A la cuisine. A la cave. A I'eglise. A 1'ecole. A 1'ecole de Francois. A 1'ecole de danse, a 1'ecole de shajil La comedie. L'opera, (a masculine noun.^ 1 f Aller a la chasse. t Est-il a la chasse ? Chasser, 1. Pecher, 1 Aller a la peche. S'ennuyer a la peche. Toute la journee. Toute la matinee. Toute la soirde. 2 Toute la nuit. Toute I'annee. 3 Toute la semaine. Toute la societe. 4 A.I nouns ending in a are of the masculine gender, except sepia, sepia ; auJ t*',?a, a tumor, which are feminine. s The words o'jiy, wning, and evening, are expressed by jour, matin, and tair, when we speak of z part of them, and by journee, matinee, and soiree, when their whole duration is to be expressed. Ex. ll vient me voir tout les jourg, he comes to see me every day ; fai reste chez moi, toute la journee, 1 etayed at home all tiie day long ; je me promine tons les matins pendant une heure, I take an hour's wall: overy morning ; il a plu toute la matinee, it has been raining all the morning ; firai vous voir demain an soir, I shall call upon you to-morrow evening ; ou passerez-vous la soiree? where shall you spend the evening ? 3 Year is expressed by an when we wish to express one or more units of twelvemonth, and by annee when \t is considered as a twelvemonth in it& ddration. Ex. Il y a six ans que man f re re ne m'a ecrit, it is six yenrs since my brother wrote to me ; une annee keureuse est celle que Von passt an* ennui et sans infirmite, a happy year is that which is spent withou/ diouenes8 or infirmity. 26 290 FIFTY-SIXTH LESS3M. ^f. All at once. < Tout a la foia. C Tout a coup. Suddenly, all of a sudden. This week. This year. Last week. Next week. Every woman. Once, one time, every time. Every week. Soudainement, Cette semaine. Cette anriee. La semaine passee. La semaine prochaine. Toutes les femmes. Une fois, toutes lesfois, clmque fois Toutes les semaines. A table. This mahogany table. Une table. Cette table d'acajou. ClNQUANTE-SIXIEME THEME. Ire Sec. Venez-vous de la campagne pour aller a la banque? Oui, j'ai dessein de changer uri billet de banque en argent. Irez-vous a ia bourse avarit de retourner a la campagne ? Non, mais j'irai achete: quelque chose pour aller a la peche. Aimez-vous la peche ? J ; aJme assez a pecher. Pechez-vous toute la journee? Non, nous pechoiiS toute la matinee ou toute la soiree. Qui va a 1'ecole de chez Jean va a Pecole d' Anglais et de Franpais, Sophie a 1'ecole de at de chant, et Frederic ne va a aucune. Qu'allez-vous faire cette semaine a la campagne ? Nous allons couper notre grain. VOA cousins vont-ils en Californie la semaine prochaine ? Us n'iront que dans deux semaines. Leurs femmes et leurs filles iront-elles avec eux ? Non, elles n'iront pas. N'avez-vous paj nettoye mes bas de soie, mes pantalons, mon habit bleu, et mon gilet blanc ? Non, pas encore, je ne peux pas faire tout a la fois. On ne peut pas fa. re tout a la fois, c'est vrai; mais je croyais que vous aviez eu assez <'t> temps pour faire chaque chose a son tour. I hear a noise in the cellar; who is in it? The old dumb woman, I suppose. What does she want from (dans) the cellar? She wants some wood or coal. I have your steel fork ; have you mine ? 1 have not yours, but hers, and Henry's is on the table, ia the ether room. Which table 1 The mahogany table. Where is your nii>- ther ? She is at church. Is your sister gone to school ? She is. Does your mother often go to church? She goes every morning and every evening. At what o'clock in the morning does she go to church ? She goes as soon as she gets up. At what o'clock does she get up ? She gets up at sunrise. Dost thou go to school, to- day? I do. What dost thou learn at school? I learn to read, write, and speak there. Where is your good mother? She is gone to shop (50 3 ) with my little sister. Do your sisters go this evening to the opera? No, Madam; they go to the dancing and singing school. Do they not go to the French school? They go in the FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 291 morning, but not (mats non) in the evening. Is you; father gone a hunting? He has not been able to go a hunting, for he has a cold. Do you like to go a hunting? I like to go a fishing better than a hunting. Is your father still in the country 1 Yes, Madam, he ia still there. What does he do there ? He goes a hunting and a fish- ing. Did you hunt in the country? I hunted the whole day. How long did you stay with my mother 1 ? I stayed with her the whole evening. Is it long since you were at the castle ? I was there last week. Did you find many people there ? I found only three per- sons there, the French teacher, his wife, and their daughter, who dances so well. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sei /our aunt. Madame votre tante. Your niece. Mademoiselle votre niece. Your cousins. Mesdemoiselles vos cousines. Any person. Toute personne. (55 3 , N. 1.) The earache. t Le mal d'oreille. The heartache. t Le mai de coeur. His sister has a violent headache. t Sa soeur a un violent mal de tete. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Pronoms Possessifs Absolus, Feminm. Singular. Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) Ours, yours, theirs. Plural. Mine, thine, his, (hers, its.) Ours, (0. 9, 4. 1 ) yours, theirs. Were you doing ? (imperfect.) / was. What were you saying ? I was not saying anything. Have you my pen or hers ? i was saying that I had hers. What do you wish to send to your aunt? I wish to send her a tart. Will you send her some fruit also ? I will send her some. Have you sent the books to my sis- ters ? 1 have sent them to them, fho iche, pain, It douleur. ia tourte. la pScho. la fraise. : us t&rt, Thf pesch, The strawberry, Tht> cherry, The newspaper, the gazette. 1& cerise, la gazette. Singulier. La mienne, la tienne, la sienne La notre, la votre, la leur. Pluriel. Lesmiennes, lestiennes, lessiennes. Les notres, los votres, les leurs. Faisiez-vous ? (imparfait) Jefaisais. Que disiez-vous ? Je ne di&ait rien. Avez-vous ma plume ou la sienne ? Ie disais que j'avais la sienne. Que voulez-voua envoyer a votro tante ? Je veux lui envoyer une tourte. Voulez-vous lui envoyer aussi des fruits ? Je veux lu/ en envoy ei. Avez-voug envoye les hvrcs a m;t scEurs ? Je les leur ai envoye's. The aunt, la tante. The female cousin, la cousine. The niece, la niece The maid-servant, la servants The female relation, la parente. The female neighbor, la voisine The foninle -.onk. la cu 292 FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) The brother-in-law, le beau frcre, The sister-in-law. la belle-soeur. Que faisiez-vous ? Je faisais une tourte aux cerises pour ma niece. Disiez-vous a la servante de ferniei lesfenetres? Je le lui disais. The merchandise, (goods,) la marchandise. What was you doing ? I was making a cherry tart for my niece. Were you telling the maid-servant to fasten the windows ? I was. CLSQUANTE-SIXIEME Tn^ME. 2de Sec. Mile,, votre niece est-elle a la maison? Je ne sais pas. Je vais aavoyer la servante pour voir si elle est dans sa chambre. N'im- porte; je n'ai pas le temps de m'arreter a present. Voulez-voua BToir la bonte de lui presenter ces peches, en mon nom? Oh! elles sont superbes ! Je vous remercie, en son nom. Mais a pre- sent que j'y pense, comment se porte Madame votre belle-sceur? J'etais chez elle hier soir. Elle se porte bien, merci. Presentez-lui mes compliments quand vous la reverrez. Je n'y manquerai pas. J'ai Phonneur de vous saluer. Adieu, M. La parente du general a-t-elle mal d'oreille ? Mal d'oreille ! Noil, elle n'a pas mal d'oreille. Pourquoi le croyiez-vous ? La cuisiniere de notre voisine n'a-t-elle pas envoye une tourte aux cerises a notre petite fille, cette semaine? Si fait, elle lui en a envoye une; non pas cette semaine, mais la semaine passee. Que faisiez-vous Pannee passee ? J'etais marchand. N'etes-vous pas Passocie de votre beau-frere? Je n'ai point de beau-frere, de sorte que je ne puis pas etre son associe. On m'a dit que votre belle-soeur avail une excellente cuisiniere. est-ce vrai? On en trouve a peine une bonne, mais la sienne I'est. En etes-vous sure ? Oui, du moins ma belle-sreur le dit. Are these girls as good (sage) as their brothers? They are better than they. Can your sisters speak German? They cannot, but they are learning it. Have you brought anything to your mother ? I brought her some good fruit and a fine tart. What has your niece brought you ? She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good peaches. Do you like peaches? I like them much. How many peaches has your neighbor (fem.) given you? She has given me more than twenty. Have you eaten many cherries, this year? I have. Did you give any to your little niece ? I gave her BO many that she cannot eat them all. Why have you not given any to your good neighbor? (fem.) I wished to give her some, but ahe would not take any, because she does not like cherries \We there any pears (la poire) last year ? There were not mm: r. Ha your cousin (fem.) any strawberries'? She has so many that *he cannot eat them all. Do you expect to see your niece, to-day 1 [ hope to see her, for she has premised me to dine wiih us. J admire (admirer) that family, (to ftmillej) for tie father is the king FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 293 tnd me mother is the queen of it. The children and ti.e servants are the subjects (le sujet) of the state, (Vetat.) The tutors of the children are the ministers, who share ( partager) with the king and queen the care (le soin) of the government, (le gouvernement.) The good education (Vcducation, fern.) which is given to children (Obs 101 2) is the crown, (la couronna) of monarchs, (le monarque.) VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. Obs. 136. The three substantives auteur, author , peintre, pamter ; podcc, poet, are of the masculine gender only, and are used for both sexes. She is a poetess. la she a painter ? She is an author. To hire, to let. Have you already hired a room ? To admit or grant a thing. To confess a thing. Do you grant that ? I do grant it. Do you confess your fault ? I confess it. T confess it to be a fault. fo confess, to avow, to own, to ac- knowledge. To confess. So much, so many. She has so many candles that she cannot burn them all. To catch a cold. To make sick. Elle est poete. Est-elle peintre ? Elle est auteur. Louer, 1. Avez-vous de'ja loud uno chainbre I Convenir* de quelque chose. Convenez-vous de cela? J'en conviens. Convenez-vous de votre faute f J'en conviens. Je conviens que c'est une faute. Avouer, 1. Confesser, 1. Tant. Elle a tant de chandelles qu'elle ne peut pas les brulei toutes. t S'enrhumer, 1. t Rendre malade. 06s. 137. To make, before an adjective, must be translated by: rendre If you eat so much it will make you! Si vous mange/ tant, cela vous ren- sick. I dra malade. Obs. 138. When the English pronoun it relates to a preceding drcum tance, it is translated by cela; when to a following circumstance, by il. Does it suit you to lend your gun ? It does not suit me to lend it. It does not suit me. Where did you catch a cold ? a cold in going from the opera. To have a cold. The cold, the cou^Ii. f have a cold in my head. Vou have a cold on your The brain, the chest. Vous convient-il de preter votre fuaill II ne me convient pas de le preter Cela ne me convient pas. t Ou vous etes-vous enrhume ? t Je me suis enrhume en sortani rf' 1'opera. t Eire enrhumu. Lc rhume, la toux. t J'ti un rhume de cerveau. t Vous avez un ihume de poitrino Le corveau, la pt itrine. 294 FIFTY^SIXTH LESSON. (3) Has she not a bad cough ? j N'a-t-elle pas une mauvaise toix 1 Vea. she has (one). : Si fait, elle en a une mauvaise, ClNQUANTE-SIXIEME THEME. 3me SeC. Avez-vous bien dormi la nuit passee ? Non, je n'ai pasbien dorm du tout. On a fait tant de bruit qae cela m'a empeche de dormir, Ou avez-vous passe la soiree hier ? Je I 7 ai passee chez mon beau frere. Y avez-vous vu votre belle-scrar? Je 1'y ai vue. Comment 8e porte-t-elle ? Elle se porte mieux qu'a 1'ordinaire. Avez-voua joue 1 Nous n'avons pas joue, pas memo aux echecs; mais noua avons lu de bons livres; car ma belle-scEur aime mieux lire :pe de jouer. Avez-vous lu la gazette de ce matin? Je Fai lue. Y a-t-ii quelque chose de nouveau dedans ? II y a toujours du nouveau; maia rien de bien intercssant. Que dit-on du roi et de la reine ? Celui-la est occupe du soin du gouvernement, et celle-ci du soin de safamille. N'etait-elle pas a la campagne quand vous y etiez? Non, elle n'y etait pas alors; mais elle y etait la semaine derniere. Sa fille est interessante, n'est-ce pas ? C'est ce que je disais. Le commis di- sait-il ou faisait-il quelque chose ? II disait quelque chose, mais, il ne faisait rien. Qui faisait quelque chose? Charlotte faisait une couronne de cerises. Why do your sisters not go to the play ? They cannot go thither Decause they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. Where did they catch a cold? They caught a cold in going from the opera last night. Does it suit your sister to eat some peaches ? It does not suit her to eat any, for she has already eaten a good many, and if she eats so much it will make her ill. Have you already hired a room? I have already hired one. Where have you hired it? I have hired it in William-street, (Jans la rue or rue GuiUaume,) num- ber one hundred and fifty-two. At whose house (chcz qui) have you hired it? At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. For whom has your father hired a room ? He has hired one for his son, who has just arrived from France. Why have you not kept your promise ? (la promesse.) Which promise ? I do not remember what I promised you. Had you not promised us to take us to the concert last Thursday? I confess that I was wrong in promising you ; the concert, however, has not taken place. Does your brother co.ifess his fault ? He confesses it. Whr.t ac?-g your uncle say to (de) that nots ? Ho says that it is vviittsn very well, but he admits that he has bosn wrong in sending it to the cap- lain. Do you confess your fault now ? I confess it to be a fault. Where have you found my coat? I have found it in the blue room UD stairs. The front room or the tack ycom 1 The back room, (Ota, FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 295 81.) Will you hang my hat on the tree ? I will hang it thereon. How are you to-day ? I am not very well. What is the matte* with you ? I have a violent headache and a cold. Where did you catch a cold? I caught it last night in going from the play. How old is your niece ? She is about 10 years old. FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 57th.- Cinquante-septilme Legonfilme. To question, the question. The cravat, carriage, house. The letter, family, promise. The leg, the right leg, the left. This throat. This sore throat. A T e have all a sore throat. The meat. Fresh meat. Fresh beef. The food. The dish. Salt meats. Salt meat. Cool water. Some good victuals. The dainty dishes. Milk-food. To march, to walk, to step. Obs. 138J. Marcher must not be mistaken for se promener. (44 1 .) former means to walk, and the latter to walk for pleasure. Questiomer, 1 (21'), la q. estion. La cravate, la voiture, la maison. La lettre, la famille, la promesse, La jambe, la jainbe droite, la gauche. Cette gorge. Ce mal de gorge. Nous avons tous mal a la gorge. La viande. De la viaude salee. De la viande fraiche. Du boeuf frais. De 1'eau fraiche. De bons aliments. Les eutreinets. Du laitage. L' aliment. Le mets. DCS mots sales. Marcher, 1. The I have walked a good deal to-day. I have been walking in the garden with my mother. To walk or travel a mile. To walk or travel a league. To walk a step. To take a step, (meaning to take measures.) To go on a journey. To make a speech. A piece of business. An affair. To transact business. To meddle with something. What are you meddling with ? [ am meddling with my own business. 1 do not attend to it any longer. That traveler always meddles with other people's business. \ dc not meddle with other people's business. Others, other people. J'ai marche beaucoup aujourd'hui. Je me suis promene dans le jardiu avec ma mere, t Faire un mille. t Faire une lieue. t Faire un pas. t Faire une demarche, t Faire un voyage, t Faire un discours Une affaire. Faire des affaires. t Se mtler de quflque chose. De quoi vousmelez-vous? Je me mele de mes propros affaires. Je ne m'en mele plus. Ce voyageur se mele toujours det affaires des autres. Je ne me mele pas des affaires d"ou trui. Autrui, (indefinite pronoun, without gender or plural.) 296 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) Did you wish, want? I did, (imperf.) | Vonliez-vous? (147) Jevoalais > (imjx He employs tim8 elf in painting. { J {J ^ The art of painting. 1 La peinture. Chemistry. The chemist. | La chimie. La chimiste. ClNQUANTE-SEPTfEME THEME. Ire S8C. On m'a dit que vous vouliez me questionner ? Oui, c'est vrai, j'ai une question a, vous faire. De qui est la lettre que vous avea re?ue? La lettre que j'ai re'sue ! Ah ! c'est un secret. Que vous ne voulez pas me Conner, n'est-ce pas? Oui, c'est un secret que j'ahne mieux garder. Eh, bien ! gardez-le. La voiture est devant ,a porte de la inaison, etes-vous pret a partir? Pret; mais non, je ne savais pas que la voiture allait venir sitot. Nous croyions que vous le saviez. Qu'avez-vous encore a faire ? J'ai a mettre ma cravate. C'est 1'affaire d'une minute. L'atfaire d'une minute ! pas avec moi. J'aime a avoir une cravate bien mise, bien arrangee. Alors ne parlez plus et faites-le vite. Eh, bien ! Laissez-moi ; alL z-vous-en, (go away.) Je vais en bas, je descends, pour pre- parer votre chapeau, vos gants, et votre parapluie. !Non, non, laissez tout cela et melez-vous de vos propres affaires. Si je me mele des votres, c'est quo je vous aime. Will you dine with us to-day? With much pleasure. What hav* you for dinner 1 (qucls mcts avez-vous ?) We have good soup, some fresh and salt meat, and some milk-food. Do you like milk-food"? I like it better than (preferer d) all other food. Are you ready to dine ? I am. Do you intend to set out soon 1 I intend setting out next week. Do you travel alone? (seul?) No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. Do you travel on foot or in a carnage ? (42 2 .) We travel in a carriage. Did you meet any traveler in your last journey (dans votre dernier voyage) to Berlin ? We met many travelers. How do you intend to spend your time (49 3 ) this summer? I intend to take a short (petit) journey. Did you walk much in your last journey ? I like much to walk, but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. Did he not wish to walk 1 He wished to walk at first, (tVabord,} but he wished to get into the coach (monter en voiture) after having taken a few steps, so that I did not walk much. Does he no longer do any business? He no longer does any, for he is too old to do it. Why does he meddla with your business? He does not generally (ordinairement) meddle tith other people's business, but he meddles with mine because he Icvs3 me. Has your master made von recite your lesson to-day 1 He has maJe me recite it. Did you know it? I knew it pretty well. Have you also done some exercises ? I have done some but I have not quite finished my lesson. FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 297 VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. That art is easy. L'art. Get art-l& est/octfc. Etrange, etonnaut. C'est etrange. C'est dommnge. S'occuper, 1, de or a. Concenter 1, or regarder, 1, quel> qu'un. Regarder, 1, quelqu'un. f Jeji'aime pas & me meler de c qui ne me regarde pas. Cela ne regarde personne. \ Se saucier, 1, de. S'en soucier. Se soucier de, is not frequently used affirmatively. Aves-vous envie d'aller en Italic ? f Je ne m'en soucie pas. Elle aimait ($ 147) la danse, mais ello ne s'en soucie plus. Nous ne nous soucions pas dechanter. Attirer, 1. L'aimant attire le fer. Son chant m' attire. Charmer, 1. Enchanter, 1. J'en suis charme, (fern, ee.) La beaute. La bonte. The art. Strange. It is strange. It is a pity. To employ (/tie's selfi . To concern some one. To took at some one I do not jke to meddle with things that do not concern me. Tfcat concerns nobody. To care about. To care about it. Obs. 139 Do you wish to go to Italy ? I have no great wish to go. I do not care about it. I'd rather not. She used to like dancing, but she cares no more about it. We'd rather not sing. To attract. Loadstone attracts iron. Her singing attracts me. To charm. To enchant. I am charmed with it. The beauty. The goodness. Obs. 140. All nouns ending in le, and expressing properties or qi alities, are feminine. The harmony, the voice, the power. To repeat. The repetition, the rehearsal. The wisdom. Study. The lord. Our Lord. A memorandum, a bill. A nightingale. All beginnings are difficult. To create. The Creator, the creation. The fear of the Lord. The benefit. Heaven. The earth. Solitude. The meeting. Flour, meal. Some wheat. The mill. Marriage. Death. Le seigneur. Un me'moire. L'harmonie, la voix, le pouvoir. Repeter, 1. La repetition. L'e'tude. Notre Seigneur. Unrossignol. Tous les commencements sont diffi- ciles. Creer, 1. Le Createur, la cre'ation. La crainte du Seigneur. Le bienfait. Le ciel. La terre La solitude. L'assemble'e. La farine. Du froment. Le raoulin. Le mariage. La mort. ClNQUANTE-SEPTlfeME THEME. 2de Sec. N'admirez-vous pas la beaute de cette dame 1 Si fait, mais j'ad DQire encore plus sa bonte. Prefrrez-vovs la bonte a la beaut6* 298 FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) Bans doute. Qui ne la prefere pas ? Beaucoup de personnes. Ls farine de votre boulanger est-elle bonne ? Elle est quelqiie fois bonne et quelque fois sure, (sour.) Ou se tenaient leurs assem- blies ? Leurs assemblies se tenaient dans la solitude des boia. Madame de Beaumont va-t-elle au concert ? ISFon, elle a ced6 sn place a sa niece. Autrefois elle aimait le chant, a present elle no e'en soncie plus. N'iront-elles pas au bal? Non, elles n'iront pas. car elles ne se soucient plus de la danse. De quoi te soucies-tn ! Je ne me soucie pas de grand' chose, (7 am indifferent to almo^ everything.} Ou est le maitre de chant ? II est a la repetition. Combien de repetitions y a-t-il par semaine ? II y en a une ton* les matins. L'art de peindre est-il facile? Demandez a Mile. Caroline, qui s'occupe de la peinture. La bont6 est un bienfait du ciel, n'est-ce pas ? Oui. C'est un bienfait que le Createur a ac- corde a la terre. Avez-vous appris le mariage de votre cousin ? Oui, il m'en a informe. C'est doinmage, n'est-ce pas? Je ne dig rien ; mais je n'en pense pas rnoins. La mort ducapitaine esi etrange, n'est-ce pas? Oui, elle est tr.'s-etraiige. What have you been doing ($ 1 45) at school, to-day ? We have been listening to our professor. What did he say new and interest- ing? He made a long (grant/) speech on the goodness of God, After saying (40 1 ) "Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God," he said, " God is the Creator ol heaven and earth; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wis- dom." What are you doing all day in this garden ? I am walking in it. What is there in it that attracts you ? (qu'est-ce qui vous y attire?) The singing of the birds attracts me, (m'y attire.) Are there any nightingales in it 1 ? There are some in it, and the har- mony of their singing enchants me. Have those nightingales more power over (sur) you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender (tendre) mother, who loves you so much? I confess the harmony of the singing of these little birds has more power over me than the most tender words (que les paroles les plus tendres) ul my dearest friends. Row does your niece amuse herself (or pass her time) in her solitude? She reads a good deal, she plays on the piano, she is fond of paint:' -ng, and she writes letters to her absent mother. How does your uncle amuse himself in his solitude ? He used to find ($ 147) much pleasure in society, in the world; but now he does not care about it; he is only fond of fishing and chemistry. Why de you not call on Frederick ? What is that to you? (qu'est-ce que cela DOUS fait) I beg, (je vous prie?) I do not generally meddle wil'i things that do not concern me ; but I love yo-u so much that I con FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. {I.) 299 Pern myself much about (que je m'in'.eresse beaucoup a) what you are doing. Does any one trouble his head about you? No one troubles his head about me, for I am hot worth the trouble, (je n'en vaux pa* In peine.) F.FTY-EIGHTH LESSON, 58th. Cinquante-huitieme Le$on, 59 we. VOOABULAIBE. Ire Sec. SECOND FUTURE. Futur Passe ou Compost. Tne Futur passe, like the second future, is formed from the future :f tht auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. Ex. I shall have loved. Thou wilt have loved. He, she, or one will have loved. We shall have loved. "ou will have loved. They will have loved. I shall have come. Thou wilt have come. He will have come. She will have come. We shall have come. You will have come. They will have come. They will have come, fern. I shall have been praised. Thou wilt have been praised. He will have been praised. She will have been praised. We shall have been praised. You will have been praised. They will have been praised. They (fern.) will have been praised. I shall have risen. Thou shalt have gone to bed. Shall he have undressed himself? She will not have dressed herself. Will any one have praised one's self? We shall have made a mistake. Shall you have taken a walk ? Shall they not have sat down ? Shall they not have sat down ? On sera venu. J'aurai aimd. Tu auras aime. II, elle, ou on au r a aime". Nous aurons aimd. Vous aurez aime. Us (fern, elles) auront aim6. Je serai venu, Fern, venue. Tu seras venu, " venue. II sera venu. Elle sera venue. Nous serons venus, Fern, venues. Vous serez venus, " venues. 1 Us seront venus. ) Elles seront venues. ) J'aurai et<5 loud, Fern, louee. Tu auras dtd loud, " louee. II aura e"te loue. Elle aura dtd loude. Nous aurons e*te loues, fern,, loudest Vous aurez dte loues, " ouees. Us auront dtd loues. Elles auront dtd louees. Je me serai levd, fern, levde. Tu te seras couche, " couchee. Se sera-t-il ddshabilld ? Elle ne se sera pas habillee. Se sera-t-on loue ? Nous nous serons trompds. Vous serez-vous promend ? (sing.)* Ne se seront -ils pas assis ? Ne se seront-elles pas assises ? 1 It is hardly necessary to remark, that if one person only is spoken to, I e. when the second person plural, vous, is employed instead of the second person singular tu, no * is put to the past participle. BOO FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON (i.) To have left. When I have paid for the horse I shall have only ten crowns left. How much money have you left ? I have one franc left. I have only one franc left. How much has your brother left ? He has one crown left. How much has your sister left ? She has only three sous left. How much have your brothers left ? Thev have one louis left. t Eester, 1. Quand j'aurai paye le chcva il * me restera que dix ecus. Cornbien d' argent vous reste-t-ii 1 II me reste un franc. II ne me reste qu'un franc. Combien reste-t-il a votre frere I II lui reste un ecu. Combien reste-t-il a votrc soeur ? II ne lui reste que trois sous. Combien reste-t-il a vos freres? II leur reste un louia. Obs. 141. In English the present (Obs. 106, 46 s ) or the perfect is used after the conjunctions, when, as soon as, or after, when futurity is to be expressed ; but in French the future must in such instances always l employed. CINQUANTE-HUITIEME THME. Ire Sec. Lorsque vous serez venue nous voir, nous irons ^ous voir, cai vous savez que vous nous devez une visile. Comptez-vous lea visites de cette maniere ? Non, c'est seulement pour vous rappelei qu'il y a long-temps que nous n'avons eu le plaisir de vous von chez nous. Aussitot qu'ils auront ete apportes, envoyez-les-moi, entendez-vous ? Je n'y manquerai pas. Quand irez-vous voir lea De Courci? ( 140 5.) Nous passerons chez eux aussitot que nous gerons informes de leur retour. Charles ira-t-il se promener a cheval apres qu'il aura dine ? Non, il ira faire une visite a son oncla dont la femme est morte, (is dead.) Sa femme est morte, et de quoi? Elle est morte du cholera. C'est dommage. C'etait une tres-bonne dame. Le marchand a-t-il envoye le baril de farine 1 Non, il ne 1'a pas encore envoye. Quand il Paura envoye, faites du pain. J'en ferai aussitot que la farine sera venue. Saviez- vous que Thomas est mam ? (married'?) Non.je ne le savais pas; maisje eavais que Marthe est mariee, et bien mariee. Avec qui est-elle mariee? Elle est mariee avec M. Dubois. Le marchand? Non, 1'avocat. J'en suis charmee. Will your parents go into the country to-morrow ? They will not go, for it is too dusty. Shall we take a walk, to-day? We will not take a walk, for it is soon going to rain. Will it rain cefcie 12~ o'clock ? I believe it will. Do you see the castle of my relation behind (derriere) yonder mountain ? (cette montagne-ld?) I see it. Shall we go in* 1 We will go in, if you like. Will you go into thai room? I shall not go into it, for it is smoky. I wish you a gooO liirning, Maoam, (26 2 .) Will you not come in? Will you not si* down? I will sit down upon jhal large arm-chair. Will you teL FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2.) ,501 me ivhat has become of your brother ? I will tell you. Wlere is your sister"? Do you not see her? She sits upon the bench. la your father seated upon the bench"? No, he sits upon the sofa of mahogany. Hast thou spent all th; money ' T have not spent all. How much hast thou left! I have no* much left; I have but five francs left How much money have thy sisters left"? They have but three crowns left. Have you money enough left to pay jour tailor? ) have enough left to pay him ; but if I pay him I shall have bu1 little left. How much money will your brothers have left? They will have a hundred crowns left. When will you go to Italy "? I shall go as soon as (aussitot que) I have learned Italian. When will your brothers go to France ? They will go as soon as they know F;ench. When will they learn it? They will learn it when they have found a good master. How much money shall we have left when we have paid for our horses? When we have paid for them, \\ e shall have only a hundred crowns left. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. V\ hen they have paid the tailor, they will have a hundred francs left. V\ hen I am at my aunt's, will you come to see me ? After you have done writing, will you take a turn with me ? You will play when you have finished your exercise. What will you do v\ hen you have dined ? When I have spoken to your brother, I shall know what I have to do. Quand ils auront paye" le taillcur, il leur restera cent francs. Quand je serai chez ma tante, vien drez-vous me voir ? (Obs. 106, 46 s . > Apris que vous aurez fini d'ecrire viendrez-vous faire un tour avec moi ? Vousjouerez lorsque vous aurezfini votre theme. Que ferez-vous quand vous aurez dine? Quand j'aurai parle* a votre frere, je saurai ce que j'ai a faire. IDIOMS WITH FAIRE. Does it rain ? It does. It rains. Does it snow ? It does not. It snows. Is it muddy? It is muddy. fs it muddy out of doors ? It is very muddy. Is it dusty ? It is very dusty. IB it smoky? It is too smoky Out of doors. Out of the window. t Fait-il de la pluie ? II en fait. t II fait de la pluie. t Fait-il de la neige I II n'en fait pa* t II fait de la neige. t Fait-il de la boue ? t II fait de la boue. t Fait-il sale dehors ? t II fait tres-sale. t Fait-il de la poussiere ? t II fait beau coup de pouasiere. t Fait-il de la fumee ? t II fait trop de *umee. Dehors. Par 302 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (2* To enter, to go in, to come in. \ Entrer, 1, dans. Will you go into m) room ? I will Voulez-vous entrer dans ma go in. Will you go in ? I shall go in. To sit down. Ts sit, to be sealed. fJa is seated upon the large chair. Sb.3 io seated upon the bench. To fill . . . with, Jill up ... with. Fill this bottle with wine. What do you fill up with water ? What does he fill his purse with ? He fills his purse with money. Th3 pocket. My vest pocket. bre ? Je veux y entrer. Y entrerez-vous ? J'y enireiuL S'asseoir,* 3. (51 2 .} Etre assis ; fern, assise. II est assis sur la grande chaise. Elle est assise sur le bane. Eemplir, 2 . . . de, remplissez . . . de. Remplissez cette bouteille de vin. Que remplissez-vous d'eau ? De quoi remplit-il sa bourse ? II remplit sa bourse d'argent. 1 La poche. La poche de mon gilet. ClNQUANTE-HUITIEME TllEME. 2de See. Oil est Mile. Emilie ? Elle est assise sur le bane SLUS le gros u.bre dans le jardin. II fait tres-humide, n'a-t-elle pas peur de s'er.- rhumer ? Elle craint plus la poussiere que Vhumidite, (dampness.) Que fera-t-il aussitot qu'il aura fini son theme ? jouera-t-il du violon? Non, il n'en jouera pas ; car Fhumidite a casse deux cordes (strings) de son violon. Quelles cordes sont-ce? Ce sont les deux plus petites. N'a-t-il pas d'autres cordes? Non; mais quand il aura fini, il ira en acheter. Jouerez-vous du piano quand il jouera du violon ? Je ne me soucie pas de jouer aujourd'hui ; mais nous jouons tres-souvent ensemble. II fait de la pluie, appelez Mile. Emilie, ou elle sera mouillee. Vous vous trompez ; ce n'est pas de la pluie, mais de la neige. Je crois que vous avez raison, et j'en suis bien fache, car il fera tres-ale dehors, il fera tres-mauvais marcher. Je commence a avoir froidj entrons dans mon bureau; il y fait plus chaud. Do you gain (gagner, 53 2 ) anything by (d) that business ? I do not gain much by it, (i/,) but my brother gains a good deal by it. He fills his purse with money. How much money have you gained 1 I have gained only a little, but my cousin has gained much Dy il He has filled his pocket with money. Why does that gardener not work ? He is a good-for-nothing fellow, for he does nothing but eat all the day long. He fills himself up with fresh and salt meat, so that he will make himself (se rendre] ill if he continues to eat so much. With what (de quoi) have you filled that bottle? I have filled it with wine. Will this man take care of my horse? He will 1 The ambiguity conveyed by: II remplit sa bourse d'argent, might be avoided by saying : 11 remplit d'a-gmt sa bourse ; but the French havo nol yet adopted the latter construction. Hence I have used the former. FIFTY-EIGHTH lESSON. (3.) 303 take care of it. Who will take care of my servant? The landlord will lake care of him. Does your servant take care of your horses 1 He does take card of them, and my cousin's. Is he taking care of your clothes? He takes care of them, for he brushes them every morning. Have you ever drank French wine ? I have never drunk any. Is it long since you ate French bread'.* It is almost three years since I ate any. Have you hurt my brother-in-law ? I have not hurt him, but he has cut my finger. What has he cut your finger with ? With the kniiu which you have lent him. Is your father arrived at last? Every- body saj'3 that he is arrived, but I have not seen him yet.--Has thu physician hurt your son ? He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. VOCABULAIRB. 3me Sec. Have you come quite alone ? I Etes-vous venu tout seul ? No, I have brought all my men along] Non, j'ai amen tout mon monde. with me. To bring. \ Amener, I. OLs. 142. Amener must, in French, not be mistaken for apponer. The former is used when the object can walk, and the latter when it cannot. Ex. He has brought aL his men along with him. Have you brought your brother along with you ? [ have brought him along with me. Have you told the groom to bring me the horse ? The groom, the ostler. Are you bringing me my books ? I am bringing them to you. To take, to carry. II a amend tout son monde. Avez-vous amene votre frere ? Je 1'ai amene. Avez-vous dit au palefrenicr de m'a mener le cheval ? Le palefrenier, le valet d'dcurie. M'apportez-vous nies livres? Je vous les apporte. Mener, 1. Obs. 143. The same distinction must be observed with regard to menei and porter, as with amener and apporter. Will you take that dog to the stable ? I will take it thither. Are you carrying this gun to my father ? I carry it to him. The cane, stick. The stable. To come down, to go down. To go down into the well. To go or come down the hill. To go down the river. Voulez-vous mener ce chien a 1* curie ? Je veux 1'y mener. Portez-vous ce fusil a mon pere ? Je le lui porte. La canne. L'ecuric Descendre, 4. Descendre dans le piiits. Descendre la montagne. Descendre la riv'ere. 1 1 The verb descendre takes the auxiliary avoir in its compound tensot ivhen, as in these examples, it is construed with the accusative ; otherwise 804 FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) To alight from one's horse, to dis mount. To alight, to get out. To go up, to mount, to ascend. To go up the mountain. Where is your brother gone to f He has ascended the hill. To mount the horse. To get into the coach. To get on board the ship. To desire, to beg, to pray, to request. Ask him to do it. Ask your brother to come down. Do, (I beg you would,) pray. The river, (if it empties in a sea.) The river, (empties in another river.) The river Schuylkill empties in the Delaware. The beard. The stream, torrent. To go or come up the river. Descendre de cheval. (52^.) Descendre de voiture. Monter, I. Monter la montagne. Ou votre frere est-il alle ? II a monte la colline. 1 Monter a cheval. t Monter en voiture. Monter sur un vaisseau. Frier, 1, (de av. 1'infin.) Priez-le de le faire. Priez votre frere de descendra : je vous en prie. Le fleuve, (se jette dans tine mer.} La riviere, (se jette dans un fleuve.) La riviere Schuylkill se jette dans le fleuve Delaware. La barbe. Le torrent. Remonter la riviere. ClNQUANTE-HUITIEME TlIEME. 3me SeC. Le voyageur a-t-il descendu la montagne ? II a descendu la mon tagne, et il a remonte le fleuve. Votre neveu est-il descendu do cheval pour ramasser le gant de sa compagne? Non, un voyageur a eu la bonte de le ramasser et de le rendre a la demoiselle. Jouez Hail Columbia pour nous. Je ne me soucie pas de jouer a present. Ah! jouez-le, je vous en prie. (Oh! do. play it.) Je le ferai pour vous obliger; mais je ne pourrai pas bien le jouer, je vous assure, car jene suis pas en train. (I do not feel like it; in the humor.) Qui est ce M. a la barbe bleue ? C'*est le ministre de notre eglise. Le palefrenier a-t-il mene le nouveau cheval a la vieille ecurie? Oui ; il 1'y a mene. Voulez-vous amener votre so3ur avec vous et apporter son cahier de chant? Je 1'amenerai, mais je n'apporterai pas son cahierde chant. J'ai oublie ma canne dans 1'ecurie; allez-Fy cher- cher pour moi. Attendez-moi un instant, je reviendrai de suite. Has the joiner's leg been cut off? (couper ?) They have cut it off to prevent his dying. Are you pleased (content) with your servant'? [ am much pleased with him, for he is fit for anything, (propre d It takes etre. Ex. Il a descendu la montagne, he has gone down the moun- tain ; elle est descendue d'une famille honorable, she is descended from an honorable family. 1 Monter also takes avoir when, as in *bese examples, it is construed with the accusative, and etre when otherwise. Ex. Il est monte par degrts the hijjhesi military employments. FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (1.) 305 lout.) What does he know? He knows ererything, (tout.) -Can he ride? (monter & cheval?) He can. Has your brother returned at ast from England ? He has returned thence, and has brought you a fine horse. Has he told his groom to bring it te me ? He has. What do you think (que ditcs-vous) of that horse? I think (je dis] that it is a fine and good one, (qii>il est beau et 6on,) and beg you to it al it ir.to the stable. How did you spend your time yesterday 1 ? 1 vent to the concert, and afterwards (cnsuitt) to the play. When did that laborer (ouvrier) go down into the well ? He went ic *n into it this morning. Has he come up again already ? (reman* if ?) He came up an hour ago. Where is your brother? He is in his room. Tell him to come down, pray, do, (je vous en prie.) I will tell him so, but he is not dressed (52 2 ) yet. Is your friend still (toujours) on the mountain? l*e has already come down. Did you go down or up (remontcr) the river? We went down. Did my cousin speak to you before he started ? He spoke to me before he got into the coach. Have you seen my brother ? I saw him before I went on board the ship. Is it better to get into a coach than to go on boaid the ship? It is not worth while to get into a coach or to go on board the ship, when one has no wish to travel. FIFTY-NINTH LESSON, 59th. Cinquante-ncuvieme Legon, 59me VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. OF THE IMPERFECT. DeVImparfatt, ($147.) For us Torniation and use sec ($ 147). That paragraph must be carefully studied. When I was at Berlin I often went to see my friends. When you were in Paris yon often went to the Champs-Elysdes. At the death of Lucretia Rome was governed by kings. Washington was a great man. Cicero was a great orator, (used to be.) Our ancestors went a hunting every day, (used to go.) The Romans cultivated the arts and sciences, and rewarded merit. Were you walking ? I was not walking. Quand j'etais a Berlin, j'a/Zais sou- vent voir mes amis. Quand vous etiez a Paris, vous allies souvent aux Champs-Elysees. A la mort de Lucrece Rome etait gouverne"e par des rois. Washington etait un grand homme. Cice'ron e"tait un grand orateur. Nos ancetres allaient tons les jouti a la chasse. Les Remains cultivaient les arts et les sciences, et rdcompensaient I merite. Vous promeniez-vous ? Je ne me oromenais oas. {506 FIFTF-NINTH IESSON. (1.) Were j'ou in Paris when the king : was there ? I was there when he was there. Where were you when I was in Lon- don ? A.t what time did you breakfast when you were in Germany ? i breakfasted when my father break- fasted. Did you work when he was working ? studied when he was working. Some fish. Some game. When I lived (used to live) at my father's, I rose (used to rise) earlier than I do now. ( 145 1.) When we lived in that country, we went a fishing often. When I was ill, I kept in bed all day. Last summer, when I was in the country, there wae a great deal of fruit. tiez-vous a Paris lorsque le roi f etait ? J'y etais lorsqu'il y etait. Oii etiez-vous lorsq.iej' etais a Lou- dres? Quand dejeuniez-vous lorsque voa* etiez en Allemagne ? Je dejeunais lorsque mon pere d jeunait. Travailliez-vous lorsqu'il travaillui ; J'etudiais lorsqu'il travaillait. Du poisson. Du gibier. Quand je demeurais chez mon pere je me levais de meiileure heuro que je tie le fais a present. (53 1 , 06s. 120.) Quand nous demeurionu dans te pays-la, nous allions vuvent d la peche. Quand j'etais malade, J3 gnrda : s le lit toute la journee. L'etd passe, pendant que j'etais a la campagne, il y avail be.iucoup de fruit. ClNQUAXTE-NEUVIliJIE THElME. Ire SCC. Qui cherchiez-vous? Je cherchais mon petit ftere, que je ne peux irouver ni en haut ni eti bas. Si vous le cherchez encore, il faut aller pres du fleuve. Que fait-il la? II peche, assis sur le bane que vous y avez fait mettre 5 (had or got placed.) II n'etait pas tres-biea hier ] Thumidite ne le rendra-t-elle pas malade ? J'espere que non. II y a a la porte un gar^on qui vous demande. Faites-le entrer. Que me voulez-vous ? Je vous apporte vos habits. Pourquoi ne lea avez-vous pas anportes avant? Ils n'etaient pas faits, de sorte que je ne pouvais pas les apporler; mais les voici. C'estbon. Mettez- les sur cette chaise. Quand je les aurai essayes, je passerai chez le tailleur. Tres-bien, M. Vous avez appris votre lecon, pourquoi rotre sceur ne savait-elle pas la sienne? Elle a fait uno longuc jlong, fern.) promenade avec notre chere mere, de sorte qu'elle n'a pas pu 1'etudier. Ou ont-etles ete ? Elles ont d'abord ete pres de !a riviere qui est derriere notre jardin, ensuite elles ont passe devant .a grande maison neuve, dont elles ont fait le tour, et enfin, elles sent inontees sur la montagne. Et tout cela a pied ? Oui mais je vous assure qu'elles etaicnt bien fatiguees. Je le crois Were you loved when you were at Dresden ? (Dresde ?} I was ant hated Was ycur brother esteemed when he was in London 1 ! FlFTiT-NlNTH LESSON. (2.) 307 He was loved and esteemed. When were you in Spam ? I was ihere when you were there. Who was loved and who was hated 1 Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, were loved, and those who were naughty, (mediant,) idle, and disobedient, were punished, h-ited, and despised. Were you in Berlin w r hen the king was there 1 I was there when he was there. Was your uncle in London when I was there ? He was there when you were there. Where were you when I was at Dresden? I was in Paris. Where was youi father when you were iu Vienna? He was in England. At what time did you breakfast when you were in France I I breakfasted when my uncle breakfasted. Did you work when he .vas working? I studied when he was working. Did your brother work when you were working? He played when I was working. On -vhat (De quoi) lived our ancestors? They lived on nothing but fish and game, for they went a hunting and a fishing every day. Were you ascending the river (fleuve) while it rained ? Yes, we were ascending it v/hile it was raining very fast; and as we had no umbrellas, we got very wet. Did you often go to see your friends when you were at Berlin ? I went to see them often ; 5 or 6 times a week. Were you writing to John ? I was writing to him, his cousin Julius, and his friend Alfred. (64 2.) Did you sometimes go to the Champs-Elysees when you were at Paris ? I often went. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. A thing. The same thing. The same violin. The samejlute. It is all one ; it is the same ; it makes no difference ; no matter, &c. Such. Such a man. Such men. Such a woman. Such things. Such. Such men merit esteem. Out, Out of the city, (the town.) Without or out of doors. Who is out? The church stands outside the town. I shall wait for you before the town gate. The town or city gate. The barrier, the turnpike-gate. Seldom, (rarely.) Some brandy. The life. To get one's livelihood by. 1 gftt my livelihood by working. lie gets his living by writing. line chose. La meme chose. Le meme violon. La meme flute, t C'est egal ; c'est la meme chose ; fa ne fait rien ; cela ne fait rien. Mas. Un tel ; fern. Une telle. Un tel homme. De tels hommes. Une telle femme. De telles choses. Pareil ; fern, pareille. De pareils hommes me'ritent de 1'estime. Hors de. Hors de la ville. Dehors. Qui est dehore ? L'eglise est hors de la ville. Je vous attendrai devant la porte -JU la ville. La porte de la ville. La barriere. Rarement. De 1'eau de vie. La vie. Gagner sa vie a Je gagne ma vie a. travail er. II gagne sa vie a e'crire. 308 FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.J Je gagne mon arge it a tr&vailler. A quoi cet hommt gagne-t-il savie ? Continuer, 1, (de or c, av. II continue son discours. Un bon appetit. Le conte, (la narration \ Le bord. t bord du ruisseau. Le bord de la rner. Au bord de la mer. Le rivage, la rive. Gens. t Ce sent de bonnes gens. I gain my money by working. By what does that man get his live- lihood ? To proceed, to go on, to continue. He continues his speech. A good appetite. The narrative, the tale. The edge, the border, the shore. The edge of the brook. The sea-shore. On the sea-shore. The shore, the water-side, the coast, the bank. People or folks. They are good folks. Obs. 144. The adjectives that precede gens must be feminine, those thai follow it, masculine. Those people are despised. I Ces gens-la sont meprise's. Those wicked people are despised. I Ces mechanics gens sont me'prise's ClNQUANTE-NEIJVIEME TlI^MK 2de Sec. Qui est dehors? Personne n'est dehors. Thomas, fermez les portes et les volets. Lemarchand de vin a-t-il envoye Peau-de-vie? Non, il n'a pas encore pn Penvoyer, parce que son garden est ma- lade. A-t-il bu trop d'eau-de-vie ? C'est cela meme, (the very thing.) Ou serez-vous oblige d'attendre votre neveu et votre niece ? Nous les attendrons: elle, a la barriere, lui, a i atelier. Les attendipz-vous au musee hier? Non, je les attendais au pont couvert. Faisait-il de 1'orage alors ? Oui, il en faisait. Le tonnerre grondait, il pleuvait et il grelait. Sont-ils venus apres Forage " Us ont cru que je n'etais pas sorti. Quel conte ce voyageur vous a-t-il fait ? ( did he relate ?) II m'a fait un conte auquel je n'ai riencompris; il m'aditdeschoses etranges et extraordinaires. C'est dommage que les voyageurs fcagerent (exaggerate) comme ils le font. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de fruit cette annee-ci? II y en aura beaucoup, des pommes, sun-ntt, (especially.) Que faisiez- vous lorsquevous demouriez dans ce pays- la? Quand nous y demeurions, nous allions souvent chasser sur lo Dord de la mer. Quels gens aviez-vous la ^ Nous y avions co bonnes gens, mais ils ne sont pas heureux. Do you rise early ? Not so eady as you, but when I lived at my nnole's I rose earlier than I do now. Did you sometimes keep in bed when you lived at your uncle's? When I was ill I kept in bed all day. Is there much fruit this year? I do not know: but last summer, when I was in the country, there was a great deal of fruit. What do you get your livelihood by ? I get my livelihood by work- ^g. Does your friend get his livelihood by writing? He gets it by SIXTIETH LESSC \. (. ) 309 peaking and writing. Do these gentlemen get their livelihood bj working? They get it by doing nothing, (d ne rien faire,) for they are too idle to work. What has your nephew gained that money b) ? He has gained it by working. What did you get your livelihood by when you were in England] I got it by writing. Did your cousin get his appetite by writing 1 He got it by working. Have you ever seen such a person? I have never seen such a one, (une pareille.) Have you already seen our church! I have not seen it yet. Where does it stand? It stands Outside the town. If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order 10 show it you. What do the people live upon that live on the sea- shore ? They live on fish alone. Why will you not go a hunting any more ? While I was hunting yesterday, I killed nothing but an ugly bird, so that I shall not go any more a hunting. Why do you not eat? Because I have not a good appetite. Why did your bu- ther eat so much? Because he had a good appetite. Do you make faults in your exercises ? I do sometimes. You must not (il ne faut pas en) make any, for you have all ($91) you want to prevent you from making any. SIXTIETH LESSON, GOih.Soixantieme Legon, 6Qme. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. IMPERFECT CONTINUED. Imparfait Continue. \ forgot, thou fargottest, he or she forgot. We forgot, you forgot, they forgot. When we went to school we often forgot our books. When you went to church you often prayed to the Lord for your chil- dren. [ paid, thou paidest, he or she paid. We paid, you paid, they paid. When we received some money we employed it in purchasing good books. When you bought of that merchant you did not always pay in cash. lias your sister succeeded in mend- ing your cravat ? She has succeeded in it. J'oubliais, tu oubliais, il ou elle ou bliait. NousoubhVons, vous oublnez, ils ou elles oubliaient. ($ 147 5.) Quand nous allions a I'ecole nous oublitons souvent nos livres. Quand vous alliez a 1'eglise vous priiez souvent le Seigneur pour voa enfants. Je payais, tu payai's, il ou elle payait. Nous payions, vous payt'ez, ils ou elles payaient. ($ 1476.) Quand nous recevions de 1'nrgent nous I'employwtts a acheter de bons livres. Quand vous achetiez chez ce mar c'nand vous ne payt'ez pas toujourfl comptant. Votre so3ur est-elle parvenua t rao commoder votre cravate ? Elle y est parvnnue. 310 SIXTIETH LESSON. (I.> Has the woman returned from the market ? She has not yet returned. Did the women agree to that ? They did agree to it. Where is your sister gone to ? She is gone to the church. La femme est-elle revenue di. mar- che? Elle n'en est pas encore revenue. Les femmes sont-elles convenuer dv. cela? Elles en sont convenues. Oil votre sceur est-elle allee? Elle est allee a i'eglise. POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT. Conditional, Simple ou Pthsnt. ^or its formation and use see ($ 148.) That paragraph must be well ssdied. '( would go if I had time. Ff he knew what you have done he would scold you. To scold. Do not scold if you can prevent it. if there were any wood he would make a fire. Should the men come, it would be necessary to give them something to drink. Should we receive our letters, we would not read them until to-mor- row. Not until, (meaning not before.) Must I go ? You must go. You must not go. To guess. A.n acquaintance. An .... of mine. I SoixANTiiiME TH&VIE. Ire Sec. Attendez-vous quelqu'un? A present? Non. J'attendals u"i mvrier (workman) a six heures, et comme il n'est pas venu, je ne 1'attends plus. S'il venait, 1'err.ploieriez-vous ? ( 144 ? ; Non, si cet ouvrier venait a cette heure-ci, je ne 1'emploierdis pas s'il n'avait pas une excellente raison a me donner pour avoir manque de ver.ir. Vous avez raison, il n'y a ricn de tel (06s. 7) que d'etre ponctuel. Saviez-vous que M. N. D etait mort? Oui, je 1'avaia appris avant d'arriver. Etait-ce une de vos connaissancts 1 Oui, r'etait une de mes plus anciennes connaissances. Combien y avait- 11 qne vous le con^aissiez ? II y avait environ .... Devinez. Deviner ! Je ne peux jamais deviner. Dites-le moi. Eh! bien, il y avait quinze ans. Q\\ faut-il que faille? II faut que vous allicz chez lo marchand de bijoux. Chez le bijoutier ? Oui, chez le bijoutier. Et pourquoi faut-il que j'y aille? Je voulah faire faire (34 2 ) J'irais si j'avais le temps. S'il savait ce q" ue vous avez fait I] vous gronderait. Grander, 1. Ne grondez pat si vous pouvez 1'empecher. S'il y avait du bois il fcrait du feu. Si les hommes venaient, il faudrait leur donner quelq le chose a boire. Si nous recevions nos lettres, nous ne les lirions pas avant demain. Pas avant, (de av. 1'infini.) Faut-il que j'aille ? II faut que vous allicz. II ne faut pas que vous alliez. Deviner, 1. Une connaissance. Une de mes. . . . s, SIXTIETH LESSON. (2.) 311 chose : mais comme j'ai change d'intention, il faut que vous aliiez le lui dire, tout de suwte pour Pempecher de comiijencer Pouvrage. Did you use to forget anything when you went to school 1 ? We often forgot our books. Where did you forget them ?^ We forgot them at the school. Did we forget anything? You forgot nothing. Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church ? Sho prayed for her children. For whom did we pray? You prayed for your parents^ For whom did our parents pray ? They prayed ioi their children. When you received your money, what did you do with it? (qa'cn faisiez-vous ?) We employed it in purchasing some good books. Did you employ yours also in purchasing books ? No, we employed it in assisting the poor, (a secourir les pauv,es.) Did you not pay your tailor? We did pay him. Did you u^ways pay in cash, when you bought of that merchant? We alwa} ^paid in cash, for we never buy on credit. Has your sister succeeded in mending your stockings? SL n'est pas la canne. C'est selon : quelque fois 1'un vaut mieux, 320 SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. (3.) quelque fois Pautre. Dit-on : remplissez d'eau la bouteille ? Nan, cela, ne se dit pas. Que dit-on done? On dit: remplissez la boiv teille d'eau. Where did you take this book from ? I took it out of (dans) the loom of your friend, (fern.) Is it right to take the books of othei people? It is not right, I know; but I wanted it, and I hope tnal your friend will not be displeased, for I will return it to her as soon as I have read it. What is your name ? My name is William, (Guillaums.) What is your sister's name? Hei name is Eleanor, (Leonore.) Are the ladies handsomer in Paris than in London 1 Strangers say they are. Are the women handsome here ? Yes, (hey are. Are they rich? Some are rich, others are poor. Are they industrious ? They used to be. You seem unhappy ; are you angry at any one ? Yes, I am angry at rny husband, wh J has not Deeu willing to (or would not) take me to Boston. He is not rich enough, perhaps. Avis AUX LECTEURS. Nous allons des aujourd'hui, (from to-day,) laisser une partie des questions sans reponses, pour aceoutumer i'eeolier a les faire lui-meme. What countrywoman is she? Are you, too? Would you be sorry if you could go travelling? Would you not have been pleased if she had not died? What are you mad at? That merchant ia honest ; people can do business with him, can they not ? Whom do you say is so polite ? That man and his wife are happy, are they not? This young girl is very interesting; is she not happy f . Are your gloves easy or difficult to put on ? Does that foreignei bring good wines? What do they sell cheap? What is useless ?- What is impolite ? Is the German hard (difficult) to translate ? Is it, to pronounce 1 Is it not, to speak ? If this (ceci) is useful, why do you not do it?- -If to get up early is useful and easy, why do you not get up earlier than you do? (49 2 , Obs. 114.) Is it right to speak iT of the absent? Do not fill that bottle with wine. \\ ha* would you fill with coffee, if you had any? Would he have drunk that brandy, if I Lai given it to him? What is that gootf for? VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. What is your name ? My name is Charles. What do you call this in French ? How do you express this in French ? What is that called ? George the Third. t Comment vous appelez-vous * t Je m'appelle Charles. t Comment cela s'appeile t-il an Fran$ais ? t Comment dit-on cela en Comment appclle t-on cela? George trois. SIXTY-FIRbT LESSON. (3.) 821 Obs. 145. After the Christian name of a sovereign, the French employ Jie caidinal numbers without an article, while the English use the ordinal. Lewis the Fourteenth. I Louis quatorze. Henry the Fourth. I Henri quatre. 06s. 146. First and second, however, are exceptions to this rule : fcrjirst, the French use premier; and for second, either deux or second. Quint instead of cinq is also used in speaking of the emperor Charles V. and of the pope Sixtus V. Henri premier. Henri second or Henri deux. Le pape Sixte- Quint. Charles- Quint parlait couramment plusieurs langues europeennes. L' Europe, europe'en. Couramment. Pluldt . . . que. Plutot . . . que de. Plutot que de dissiper mon irgent, jo le garderai. Je le paierai plutot que d'y aller. Je briilerai plutot 1'habit que de le porter. II est arrive* plus tot que moi. t Un habit a demi-use. t Faire les choses a demi. Regner, 1. (28 2 .) Regne-t-elle t Un sot discours. Infernal. Sa majeste, (nomfim.) Leurs ma jestds. SOIXANTE ET UNIEME TlI^ME. 3me SeC. Qui regne en Angleter re? La reine Victoria premiere. Quel roi regne en France * Aucun roi n'y regne. Quel en etait le dernier f Louis Philippe premier. Quel a ete le dernier Charles d'Espagne ? &tait-ce Charles trois ou quatre ? 'a ete Charles quatre. Quel a ete son successeur, (successor?) !'a ete Ferdinand sept. Combien de George y a-t-il eu en Angleterre? II y en a eu quatre. Y en a-t-il eu en France ? Non, il n'y en a eu aucun. Y a-t-il eu ua Henri quatre dans ce dernier pays ? Oui, il y en a eu un, qu'on nomme Henri le Grand. Sans repcnse. 'Pouvez-vous faire dea reponses en Francais? Auriez-vous pu en faire a la premiore lecon ? Que faut-il que j'aie ? Veut-il que j'aille chez le bijoutier? Si vous etiez riche comme Etienne Girard 1'etait, que feriez-vous ? Ne portait-il pas toujours un habit a demi-use ? Qui fait les choses hdemi? Que teriez-vous plutot que d'etre marchand? Quel roi de France a ete mis a mort, (put to death?) Oil voulez-vous qu j'aille* Henry the First. Heary the Second. P^pe Sixtus the Fifth. Charles the Fifth spoke several Eu- vopean languages fluently. Europe, European. Fluently. Rather. Rather . . . than. Rather than squander my money, I will keep it. [ will rather pay him than go thither. I will rather burn the coat than wear it. He has atrived sooner than I. A half- worn coat. To do things imperfectly, (by halves.) To reign. Does she reign ? A foolish discourse. Infernal. His, her majesty. Their majesties. <57*. Obs 10.) 322 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (1.) What did Charles V. say of European languages? Lliarles V who spoke fluently several European languages, used to sa) (avail coutume de dire) that we should speak (qu'il fallait parler] Spanish with the gods, Italian with our (son) friend, (fern.,) French with our friend, (rnas.J German with soldiers, English with geese, [une oie,) Hungarian (hongrois) with horses, and Bohemian (bohc mc.en) with the devil, (le diable.) Do you admire what Charles V. said of languages'? I do not, I assure you. I think, on the con trary, that it is a very foolish speech. Why do you think so? Be- cause those languages must be spoken (il faut parler ces langues} to the people who speak them, and not to geese, horses, and the devil. How did his majesty (sa majeste) the emperor, Charles V., know that the Bohemian suited his infernal majesty? (sa majeste infernale.) Are not all the majesties relations? Questions sans reponses. How is that called in French ? What ia the French of: companion? of: a female companion? of: an acquaintance of mine ? Do you know, or do you not know, that of. a half -worn-out hat? Is that young lady called Eleanor? Is hei brother called Stephen? (Etienne.) Where did George III. reign 1 Was Charles the First put to death ? (mettre d mort ?) Was Six- tus V. a pope (papc) or a king? Are all kings happy? Have there been many popes ? Is it correct to say : happy as a king or a pope * Who would not rather be a farmer than a king? What must 1 have? Where must you go? You wish me to be kind; be so yourself. Does she wish me to come and play at her concert 1 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON, 62d. Soixantc-deuxiemc Lcgon, G2me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. As to, as for. As to me ; to them.' I Quant a ; quant a moi ; a eux, a elles As to that, I know not what to say. | Quant a cela, je ne sais que dire. 06s. 147. Ne is used without pas with the four verbs : To cease, to dare, to be able or Jcncwhow. I do not know what to do. Do you not know where to go ? She does not know what to answer. We do not know what to purchase. You (io not cease importuning me. Shs continually complains. I dare not ask you for it. Srr -dares not tell you. Cesser, oser, youvoir* s-zwi Je ne sais que faire. Ne savez-vous ou aller ? Elle ne sait que reponuio. Nous ne savons qu'acneier. Vous ne cessez de TO' importu ne.v Elle ne cesse de se plaindre. Je n'ose vous le demandet. Elle n'ose vous le dire. SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 82S I cannot go to the covered bridge. I cannot tell you, (would not know how.) Can you not believe it ? To die of a disease, (malady,') She died of the varioloid. L"id he not die of apoplexy ? They died with the cholera. The, a ferer. The yellow fever. A chill. The intermittent fever. The apoplexy. A n attack of a .... He has a chill. He has a fever. He has had a fever. His fever has returned. He was struck with apoplexy. To strike, knock, rap, at the door. What has happened to that priest ? What has happened to her ? She had a dreadful accident. To shed, pour out. Pour me out a drink. A tear. To shed tears. To pour out a drink some water. { pour out some drink for that man. With tears in his, her, our, or my eyes. Sweet, mild. Sour, acid. Some sweet wine. A mild air. A mild zephyr. A soft sleep. Ncthing makes life more agreeable than the society of, and intercourse vith, our friends. Je ne puis aller au pont couvert. Je ne saurais vous le dire. Ne sauriez-vous le croire ? Mourir d'une maludie. Elle est morte de la variole. N'est-il pas mort d' apoplexie f Us sont morts du cholera. Lajievre. La Jievre jaune. Un frisson. La Jievre intermittent* L' apoplexie. line attaque d'a .... II a un frisson, t La fievre 1'a pria t II a eu la (un acces de) fievre. t La fievre 1'a repris. II a ete frappe d' apoplexie. Frapper, 1, frapp er a la portc. Qu'est-il arrive a oet ecclesias ique ? Quo lui est-il arrive ? (50 2 .) 11 lui est arrive un accident affreuut. Verser, 1. Versez-moi a boko. Une larme. Verser des larmea. Verser a boire de 1'eau. t Je verse a boire a cet homme. Les larmes aux yeux. Doux ; fern, douce. Sur. Du vin doux. Un air doux. Un doux zephir. Un doux sommeil. Rien ne rend la vie si douce quo la societ^ et le commerce de nos amis. SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME TH^ME. Ire Sec. Allez-vous vous verser a boire ? Moi, non ; mais quant a Henri, il ne cesse de se verser a boire. II faut qu ; il ait soif. C'est tres proba- vle. Versez a boire au jardinier. Que lui verserai-je ? De 1'eaa, de Peau-de-vie, ou du vin doux ? Comme il a eu la fievre, versez- iui un peu de vin doux. Est-ce bon pour la fievre'? On le dit. Votre cidre est-il doux ou sur? II n'est ni doux ni sur. Airre- t-il le cafe doux? Non, il le prend sans sucre. Qu'est-ce qui rend la vie da ice? Mile. Clara a-t-elle encore la fievre intermittentu ? Sa fievre est passee. Quel accident est arrive a 1'ecclesiastique ? II est tombe de che"val, et il s'est fait beancoup de mal a la jamb gauche et au pied droit. Sans reponscs. Vous eces-vous associe avec le marchand qui vend si bon marchc? A-t-on.ou vous dire de quelle maladio ]c 824 SIXTY-SECONL LESSON. (2.) vieil ecclesiastique est mort? Ce vin ivest-il pas un peu surl-'Ce cerises sont-elles donees? Mon the est trop doux, versez-y un pesi d'eau et de lait. Votre fils ne craint-il pas la fievre jaune a la Nouvelle Orleans, ou Pa-t-il deja eue ? Que dit le medecin ? Croit-il que cette attaque d ; apoplexie tuera le vieil epicier ? Ne faut-il pa* que vous veniez? Of what illness did your sister die ? She died of (de la) fever. Hiw is your brother? My brother is no longer living; he died fhree months ago. I am surprised (itonnc) at it, for he was very w ell last summer, when I was in the country. Of what did he die 1 He died of apoplexy. How is the mother of your friend? She is not well ; she had an attack of ague, the day before yesterday, and this morning the fever has returned. Has she an intermittent fever? I do not know, but she often has chills. What has become of the woman whom I saw at your mother's ? She died this morning, of apoplexy, Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart? They will rather tear them than learn them by heart. What does this man ask me for ? He asks you for the money which you owe him. Sans reponses. How do you like this wine ? Shall I pour you out a glass of brandy and water? Does she not prefer a glass of mineral water, with syrup? Do you not know what to eat? Where must you be to-night? How many of your cousins are alive? How much syrup shall I pour out for her? Did you noi hear a knock at the front door? Why does she shed tears? Has an accident happened? What has happened to them? Does he not quit (cease) speaking? How does your mother like our food I Why does she not eat any more ? VOCABULAIEE. 2de Sec. A case. The report. Ten cases of cholera. Is the report favorable ? To augment, increase. Diminish, decrease. To report. Do they report all the cases ? Does the cholera increase or not ? It seems to be dint nishing now. How many cases have they reported ? Q.ily 7 for the last 24 hours. To tr que la derniere fois. A.idez-vous volre cousin a faire son devoir? Seulement lorsqu'il est Irop difficile. Quant a mon frere et a moi, nous ne nous aidons jamais Tun 1'autre. Pourqnoi cet enfant crie-t-il? v II s'est fait du mal a la jambe gauche. A quoi sert de crier? A rien; mais lea erifants orient. 1 Aide, in the signification of help, is feminine ; it is masculine whc-n it means an assistant. S26 SIXT V-SECOND LESSON. (2.) SM ;* reponses. Rit-elle parce que ce Monsieur est toml?-- Riez-vous toujours quand vous voyez tomber quek t a'uri ? Ne con- naissez-vous personne qui crie alors? Vous fiez-vous ace boucher? Ne se fie-t-elle pas a sa domestique ? Nous pouvons nous fie/ a celle-ci ; n'est-ce pas? Ne nous trompera-t-elle point? Savez-vous le Francais de : As you please ?N ; avez-vous pas entendu frapper? Que vous verse-t-elle ? N'appelle-t-on pas au secours? Sentez- vous 'a doux zephir? Ne faut-il pas que j'ai un chapeau neuf? Seriez-vous fache si je m'en allais ? Quel est le nom de votre nan- valle connaissance ? Have you inquired after the merchant who seiis so cheap ? I have; but nobody would 1 or could (personne n'a voulu ou n'a pit) tell me what has become of him. Never mind ; yc.n will easily find another who sells as cheap. I wish I could, 2 (Je voudrais pouvoir;*) for I have but little money. Did the general's nephew die of a disease or of an accident? He died of the yellow fever. Kas not a dreadful accident happened to the apothecary's old clerk? He fell and broke his arms or legs. (Dir. 2 24 2 , Obs. 55.) > His arms and legs, did you say ? No, only his arms or legs. Would she cry for help, if I should beat her? ( 1483.) If you should hurt her, I guess she would cry. Would they not laugh, if I was to tell them that tale ? No, I guess they would be angry. Must I not go for some cigars? Yes, you must go for some. Must I not have the money to pay for them ? Yes, you must have it ; here it is. After you have paid for them, (46 3 , 06s. 107,) you will have six cents left; you may keep them. Sans reponses. What dost thou ask me for? Will you pass me the bottle, if you please ? Have you not drunk enough ? Shall 1 give you (faut-il vous verser) some wine ? Why do you not eat? Who knocks at the door ? Why does he cry ? What has happened to you ? Where will you go to, this evening ? W T here will your brothers go to ? Why do you go to town ? Will you go with me ? Must I sell to that man on credit? Has he already deceived (trom- per) anybody? Must I trust those ladies? Do those merchants trust you? Whom do those gentlemen Laugh at? Why do those 1 Translate could, by: j'ai pu, il a pu, il pouvait, &c. Would, by: j'ai voutu, il a voulu, je voulais, &c., when they refer to past actions instead of future ones. ( 148 4.) 2 I wish, in such phrases as, I wish I could, I might, I had, &c., or any other imperfect tense, where it means, I should like to, must be translated oy : Je voudrai pouvoir, avoir, &c. When / wish, does not mean, I should like to, but merely, 1 want, translate it by : Je veux, &c., as : / wish to see yoitt If, veux ou desire vous voir. SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) 327 people laugh at tt<3'? Ought \73 to laugh (faut-il ss moquer) al persons who speak badly? What are you laughing at? How long (depuis ,'juand] have you bsen wearing it so large ? (grand.) YOCASULAIRE. 3mc Sec. To ring. A t-ei'J, a sma?i bell. To hear G r-iig. Heard a ring. He must go. Where niLs; he go ? Do you wish him to be good or not ? I wish him to be good, and I wish her also to be good. Must he not have a new coat ? He rnuui ecr.75 v/xth me to the tailor's To l&ugk i?. o. psr?(Kz,'s face. We laughed in his face. To I'iKgh a!, to deride some one. I laugh at (deride) you. Were you laughing at us ? Were you making fan of us ? We did not laugh at you. Full. \ book full of errors. To afford. Can you afford to buy that horse ? I can afford it. I cannot afford it. Who is there ? Who is it ? is that ? It is I, he, she, we, you, thou. Is it he ? It is not he. Are they your brothers ? (47 3 .) It is they. It is not they. Is it she? Jtissi'-e. ft is not she. Are they your sisters ? It is they, (feminine.) tt is not they. " It is I who speak. 10 it they who laugh ? It ia you u'ho laugh. \\ ie thou who had done it. Sonner, 1. Une cloche. TJne clochctte. Entendre sonner. Entendu sonner. II faut qu'iZ aille.. Ou faut-il qu'e/Ze aille / Voulez-vous qu't'J soil bon ou nonf Je veux qu'il soit bon, et je veux aussi qu'elle soit bonne. ($ 151.) Ne faut-il pas qu'ilait un habit neuf? II faut qu'i7 vienne avec moi chez Ic tailleur. Eire au nez de quelqu'un. Nous lui avons ri au nez. Se rire ou se moquer de quclqu'un. Je me ris (rne moque) de vous. (54 s /, Vous riiez-vous de nous ? Voui moquiez vousde nous? ($ 147 1.) Nous ne nous riions pas de vous. Plein, pleine. Un livre plein de fautcs. t Avoir les may ens, (de before i/j finitive.) t Avez-vous les movers d'acheter ce cheval ? J'en &i les moyens. t Je n'en ai pas lea rnoyens. Qui est-ia ? Qui est-co ? Qui est cela? .C'cst ir.oi, iui, el's, nous, vous, toi Ezi-ce lui ? Co n'etit pas lui. Sont-cs vos frererj ? or, Est-ce qua C3 sont vos fireres ? Ce sont eux. Co ne sent pas eux Est-ce elle ? C'est elle. Ce n'est pas el!o. Sont-ce vos sceara? or, Est-ce que ca sent vos sonurs ? Ce sont clles. Ce ne eont pc9 elles. C'cst moi qui parle. Sont-ce eux (elles) qui rient f or Est-ce que ce sont eux (ellee) ^ai rient ? C'est vous qui riex. C'est toi qui 1' as fait. 828 SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) It is yoUj gen0.e k n3G, v/ho have said j C'eat voua, Messieurs, qui avcz clii that. Wo learn French, ncy brother and I. t Mon ft ere ct moi nous apprenoiu le Fraujais. Obs. 348. The uniting pronoun nous or -jous must be placed before verb, when it has two or more nominatives of di.flferent persons. ($ 33.) Y ju and I will go into the country. You and he will stay at home. J ntor, preceptor. t Vous et moi nous irons a la cam- pagne. t Vous et lui vous restores ?. ia mai- son. Instituteur. SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME THEME. 3me Sec. NVt-on pas sonne 1 Je crois que si, (si au lieu de cui: la qu.es- don est negative, 10 2 7 06s. 26.) La domestique est-elie ailee a la porte % Je ne 1'ai pas entendue. II faut qu'elle y aiile plus vita. Elle n'a peut-etre pas entendu la clochette. C'est possible. Esl-ce elle qui court ? Je presume que oui. Oui, c'est eila. Qui etait-oe 1 ? On a apporte le bonnet de Madame. Portez-ls-!ui. Qai va au concert ce soir? Vous et moi nous irons si nous avcns ie temps. Votre instituteur vous gronderait-il si vous ne faisiez pas votre devoir? Non, mais il serait fache. Quand faut-il que la voiture soit prete ? II faut qu'elle le soit a 10^ heures. A queile heure faut-il que Charles vienne ? II faut qu'il vienne un quart d'heure avant. La voiture sera-t-elle pleine I Elle sera pleine. Ne pour- rions-nous pas aussi prendre la petite Emilie ? Non, il ne faut pas qu'elle vienne; elle criera. -Est-ce vous qui riez comme cela? Rit-elle au nez de cet etranger 1 De qui se moquent-ils ? Votre voisin ne se rnoqne-t-il pas de vos enfants parce qu'ils se levent si tard ? Cet &uteur s'a-i-il pas fait un livre plein de fautes 1 Ce verre de quoi est-il plein 1 Or. m'a dit que M. P , voulait acheter la grande maiscn de B au coin de Broadway, en a-t-il les moyens ? Sont-ce vos amis qui viennenf? Is it your eister who is playing on the piano ? It must be she. (il faut que ce soit elle} for no other person plays. No, it is not she, for here she is. Who is it, then ? It is our cousin Elise. Are they your sistezs who are coming? It is they. Are they youi neighbors (fem.) who were laughing at you? They are not om neighbors. Who are they ? They are the daughters of the countess vvhose brother has bought your house. Are they the ladies you have spoken of to me ? They are. Shall you learn German ? My brother and I will learn it. Shall we go to the country, to-morrow ' I shall go to the country, and you will remain in town. Shall my lister and I go to the opera ? You and she will remain at horne^ SIXTI-TKfRD LESSON. (1.) 329 *ud your brother will go to the opera. What did you say w hen your tutor was scolding you* I said nothing, because I had nothing to say ; for I had not done my task, and he was in the light to scold me. Sans reponses. You must come to my house, to-morrow, to bring me back the books which I have lent you ; do you hear 1 ? Who is to play at the concert, to-night? Is it thou who hast soiled my fan ; Could he learn this by heart, before to-morrow? Could she learn it yesterday ? (N. 2, 62 2 .) Would she not go to Baltimore, laat vreek? Would her nieces go there next week, if iiiey could? I wish I could travel; don't you? (et vous?) 1 We wish we were 'earned : does she not ? Does she not care about the piano ? SIXTY-THIRD LESSON, 63d. Soixante-troisiemc Legon, 63me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. To get into a bad scrape. To get out of a bad scrape. I got out of the scrape. That man always gets into bad scrapes, but he always gets out of them again. Between. Between them. Among us, among acquaintances. Between friends. To make some one's acquaintance. To become acquainted with one. t S'attirer, 1, (sefaire,) de mauvai- ses affaires. t Se tirer, 1, d' affaire. Je me suis tire d'affaire. Get homme s'attire toujours de mau vaises affaires, mais il s'en tire toujours. Eutre. Entr'eux. Entr'elles. Entrc nous, entre connaissances. Entr'a mis. Faire connaissance avec quelqu'un. Faire la connaissance de quelqu'un, have made his or her acquaintance. \ i have become acquainted with him > J'ai fait sa connaissance. or her. ) Are you acquainted with him, her? ) Le (la) connaissez . vous r Do you know him, her ? > 1 We have seen, (18 1 , 06s. 38,) that n'est-ce pas was used to ask a negative interrogation in the same person as a preceding affirmation, but now, we say, when the interrogation, whether negative or not, is in another person, use the conjunction et with any required personal pronoun. Don't you? Et vous i Don't he ? Et lui ? Don't she ? we ? they ? Et elle ? nous ? eux ? I know him ; io you ? Et vous ? Does he ? she ? Peter, &c. : Et lui ? et elle ? et Pierre t But, does any one ? must be translated by: Quelqu'un le connait-il ? * The verb to know is always expressed by connallre* when it signifies to te acquainted with, and by savoir* in all other cases. Ex. I know that man, .hat lady, Je connais cet homme, cette dame ; I know my lesson, Jeaaia ma I know what you wish to say, Je sais ce que vous voulez dire. 830 SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) I am I do. I am not I do not. He is an acquaintance of mine. She is my acquaintance. He is not a friend, lie is but an ac- quaintance. To enjoy. Do you enjoy good health ? To be well. She is well. Does she enjoy a great fortune? Does he enjoy a good reputation? To imagine. Our fellow creatures. He has not his equal or his match. To resemble some one, to look like That man resembles my brother. That beer looks like water. We resemble each other. They do not resemble each other. Is it time that I ... thou ... he ... she . ; . we, &c. Is it time for me ... thee . . . him . . . her... us, &c., to..? Is it time for us to go, come, have, be ? It is time for us to go, come, have, be. Je le (la) connais. Je ne la connais point. II est de ma connaissance. Elle est de ma connaissance. Ce n'est pas un ami, ce n'est qu'uno connaissance. Jouir, 2, de. Jouissez vous d'une bonne sante ? Eire lien portant, portante. Ktre en bonne sante. t t Elle est bien portante. J j Elle se porte bien. | t Elle est en bonne sante". Jouit-elle d'une grande fortune ? Jouit-il d'une bonne reputation? S'imaginer, 1. Nos semblables. II n'a pas son semblable. t Res&embler, 1, a quelgu^un. (Mind the ss and the a.) Get homme ressemble a mon frere. . Cette biere ressemble a de 1'eau. Nous nous ressemblons. Us ou elles ne se ressemblent pas. Est-il temps que je . . . tu . . . il . . . elle . . . nous . . . vous ... ils . . . elles . . ., (govern the subj. 151.) Est-il temps que nous allions, veni- ons, ayons, soyons ? II est tempa que nous allions, que nous veni- ons, ayons, soyons. SOIXANTE-TEOISIEME THEME. Ire SeC. Est-il temps que nous allions a Washington pour 1'affaire de Fre- deric ? Oui, il faut que nous y soyons demain ou, au plus tard, apres-demain. II y a une mauvaise affaire ; je ne sais comment il s'en tirera. Lui ! il se fait souvent de mauvaises affaires, mais il s'en tire touj ours. C'estvrai, il est tres-heureux. Ne jouit-elle pas d'une fortune considerable? Si fait, son pere lui a laisse une grande for- tune, dont elle jouit, et dont elle fait bon usage. Jouit-elle d'uno bonne sante? Oui, pour une personne riche, elle jouit d'une tres- bonne sante. Sa soeur est-elle bien portante? Non, il faut qu'elle son souvent malade, car elle n'a pas bon air. Ce monsieur, n'est-il pas une de vos connaissances ? Lequel ? Celui qui est entre les deux dames en jaune ? Non, celui qui est entre la table et la fene- tre. Ressemblez-vous & votre sceur? Vous ressemble-t-elle ? A qui ce commis ressemble-t-il ? Mon frere et moi, nous ressemblons SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) 331 aousl Ces deux SGBUFS ne se ressemblent-elles pas ctnime deux gouttes d : cau. (2 drops of water?) Pourquoi cet homme s'enfuit-il comme ca? II faut qu'il ait fait quelque chose de mal ; ne le croyez- vous pas? What is the report of the health-office, to-day 'i- du comite de sjfe?) The report has increased to-day. How many cases are there ? 53, and only 11 deaths. We must hope that it will dimmish soon. A certain (certain) good-for-nothing fellow liked brandy much, but he found in it (Jui) two bad qualities, (une qualite :) " If I put water to it," said he, " I spoil it; and if I do not put any to it, ii spoils me." Does your cousin resemble you'? He resembles me. Do your sisters resemble each other? They do not resemble each other; for the elder (Fcrmee) is idle and naughty ; and the younger (la cadette) assiduous and good-natured towirds everybody. How is your aunt? She is very well. Does youi mother enjoy good health ? She imagines she enjoys (s' imagine jouir) good Health ; but I believe she is mistaken, for she has, these six months, nad a cough, of which (dont) she cannot get rid. Is it right to laugh thus at everybody ? If I laugh at your coat, I do not laugh at everybody. Does your son resemble any one ? He resembles no one. Why do you not drink? I do not know what to drink, for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. If you wish to have some other, I shall go down (descendre) into the cellar to fetch you some. You are too polite, Sir; I shall drink no more to-day. Have you known my father long? I have known him long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. We often worked for one another, and we loved each other like b/others. I believe it, for you resemble each other. When I had not done my exercises, he did them for me; and when he had not done his, I did them for him. VOCABULAIRB. 2de Sec. Each other, one another. Of each other. Without one another. The brother and the siste. love each other. Are you pleased with each other ? We are. As, as well as ; as wcl! as we ; they. Th^ appearance, the countenance. To show a disposition to. That man whom ycu see shows a desire to approach us. To loik pleased with some Mm. L'un 1'autre Tune 1'autre. L'un de 1'autre. L'une sans 1'autre. Le frere et la soeur s'aiment 1'un A 1'autre. Etes-vous contents 1'un de 1'autie ? Nous le sommes. Ainsi que; ainsi quc nous ; qu'cjjc. La mine. Faire mine de. Cette homme que vous voyez tail mine de nous approcher. Faire bonne mine a quelqu'un. 332 SIXTY -THIRD LESSON. To Ifok cross at some one. When I go to see that mar , instead of receiving me with pleasure, he looks displeased. A. good-looking man. A bad-looking man. Bad-looking people, or folks. To go to see some one. To pay some one a visit. To frequent a place. To frequent societies. To associate with some one. To look like, to appear. How does he look ? Pie looks gay, (sad, contented.) You appear very well. You look like a doctor. She seems angry, to be in a Dad humor. They look pleased. They appear to be in a good humor. To look good, to appear to be good. To drink to some one. To drink some one's health. I drink your health. It is all over with me ! her ! them . (fem.) It is all over. It is better for me, him, you, them, us, thee : or I, he, you, we, thou hadst better .... It is better for me to do it, for us to do it, for you to do it. (I had better Faire mauvaise mine d quelqu'ttn. Quand je vais voir cet homme, au lam de me faire bonne mine, il me tail mauvaise mine. Un homme de bonne mine. Un homme de mauvaise mine. Des gens de mauvaise mine. Aller voir quelqu'un. Faire une visite) a quelqu'un. Rendre visite J Frequenter un lieu, (endroit.) Frequenter des societes t Frequenter quelqu'ur. Avoir Vair. Quelle mine a-t-il ? Quel sir a-t-;! f II a I'air enjoue, (triste, content.) Vous avez I'air bien pcitant. Vous avez I'air d'un m*5decin. Elle a I'air de mauvaise hume'ir. Us ont I'air content. Us ont 1'an. d'etre de bonne humeur. Avoir I'air bon. t Boire a quelqu'un. Boire a la sante de quelqu un. T Je bois a votre santd. t C'en est fait de moi ! J'elle d'elles! t C'en est fait, t II vaut mieux que je, il, vous, eiies, nous, tu, (must be {Allowed by the fubjunctive.) // vaut mieux que je le fasse, noua le fassions, vous le fassiez. do it, &c.) JSOIXANTE-TROISIEME TH^ME. 2de SeC. Pourquoi fre que for it is we who have taken them all. (tout ce/a,) in order to teach you to take better care (avoir plus de som, 50 3 ) cf your things. (affaires j) and to shut the door of your room when you go out. Why do you look so sad? I have experienced great misfortunes. After having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking menj ind to my still greater ill-luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom 1 love so much, has been struck with ipoplexy. You must not afflict yourself (s'affliger) so much, for you know that we must yield to necessity. Do you know a good place to swim in ? I know one, but it is rather far. Where is it? If you will go with me, I will tell you. 1 will go if it is not too far. On that side (38 l ) of the river, behind the wood, (laforetj) near the high road, (le grand chemin.) When shall we go to swim ? This evening, if you like. Will you wait for me before the city gate ? I shall wait for you there ; but I beg of you not to forget it. You know that I never forget my promises. Where did you become acquainted with that lady? I became acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. Why does your cousin ask me for (40 1 ) money and books ? Because ho is a fool ; of me, (car a mot',) who am his nearest relation, (son plus proche parent,) and his best friend, he asks nothing. Can you get rid of that man? (52 2 ). I cannot get rid of him, for he will abso- lutely (d toute force) follow me. Has he not lost his wits? It may be, (ccla se peut.) What does he ask you for? He wishes to sell me a horse which I do not want. SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON, 64th. Soixante-quatrieme Le$on, VOCABTJLAIRE Ire Sec O5a. 149. Jiow, how much, how many, before an exclamation, are trans l-ated by que. Ex. How good you are ! \ ^ ue T 8 6fe / bon ! ( Que de bontd vous avez! JIow fjolish he is, not to go ! | Qu'il est sot, de ne pas y aller ' Obs. 149i. The adjective which in English follows how, stands in French ttter the verb : and v hen 4 ue is followed by a substantive, de must alwavs precede the latter. 836 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) How foolish she is to believe him ! How rich that man is ! How handsome that woman is ! How much kindness you have tor me ! How many obligations I am under to you ! To bs under obligations to some one. I am under many obligations to hirn. How many people ! How happy you are ! Flow much wealth that man has ! How much money that man has spent in his life ! To be obliged to some one for some- thing. To be indebted to some one for some- thing. I am indebted to him for it. To thank. To thank one for something. Qu'elle est sotte de le croire ! Que cet homme est riche ! Que cette femme est belle ! Que de bonte vous avez pour rial! t Que d'obligations je vuus ai ! t Avoir des obligations d quelqu'un, t Je lui ai beaucoup d'obligations. Que de monde ! Que vous etes heureux ! Que de richesses cet homme a ! Que d' argent cet homme a depensd dans sa vie ! Etre oblige a quelqu'un de quelque A chose. Etre redevable a quelqu'un de quel- que chose. Je lai en suis redevable. Remercier, 1, (has no prepos. before the pers. but de before the object.) Remercier quelqu'un de quelque chose. Voulez-vous me passer cet eventaii I Ayez la bonte de me ..... Faites-moi le plaisir de me ..... Vous prierai-je de me ..... Veuillez (impe'r.) me ..... Obs. 150. Never use remercier before the performance of the action, bu. one of the opposite phrases, or any of similar import. 1 will thank you for that fan, or Shall I thank you for that fan ? I thank you for the trouble yov have taken for me. Je vous remercie de la peine vous avez prise pour moi. SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME TiifbiE. Ire Sec. Que ce petit garpon est sot de crier comme cela ! Que vous etes impoli de 1'appeler sot ! Et vous, que vous etes impertinent de m'appeler impoli ! Vous a-t-il repondu ainsi, lui qui vous a tarn d'obligations ! II est riche, et il a oublie toutes les obligations qu'il m'a. Qui n'a point d'obligations a ses semblables ! Nous nous devoris des secours les uns aux autres. C'est vrai. Quel est ct jeune homme en habit bleu 1 C'est le neveu d'un de nos premiers marc.hands. Que d'argent ce neveu a depense ! Que Madame Lewis est belle ! n'est-ce pas? Et qu'elle est aimable ! Quelqu'un vous a-t-il remercie des dons que vous nous avez fails? Cela n'en vaut pas la peine. Faites-moi le plaisir (I will thank you) de ire les montrer. Volontiers. Moiitons dans la chambre do Levant SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 837 nous les y trouverons. -Veuillez raraasser ma plume d'acier, (I'll thank you to. . . .) La voici. Je vous remercie. De rien. A qui cet officier est-il redevable de sa compagnie. (company.) Tl en est redevable a son oncle, le general. A qui est-il redevable de sa place? (situation!) How many people there were at the ball! Then you enjoyed yourself (s'amuser) a good deal, I presume? No, not at all. Why so ? There was there such a multitude, that one could hardly got hi. How many invitations they must have sent! Could you dance 1 ? (N. 62 2 .) No, there was not room (place) enough. I bring you a pretty present, with which you wi'l be much pleased, I Lope. How good you are! What is it? A silk cravat. How many obligations I owe you! W 7 here is it? I have got -t in my coat-pocket. Here it is, in this paper. Shall I open it? Yes, open it. Now I see the cravat. How beautiful it is! Does it please you? It pleases me much, and I thank you for it, with all my heart. I hope you will at last accept (accepter) something from me. What do you intend to give me ? I will not tell you, for if I did, you would have no pleasure when I should give it to you. Where do you wish me to go for you ? Where do I want you to go for me ? It is rather far. No matter, (n'importe,) I am so much indebted to you, that I will go wherever (o) you please. (46 3 , Obs. 107.) How kind you are ! Not more than you, (pas plus.) How foolish Clarissa is, to stay at home when she could go travelling! Now she is almost too old, but say how foolish she was not to go 15 years ago, when she could have gone! With whom could she have gone 15 years ago ? W T ith her cousin's family, from Virginia, (laVirginie.) Had she lost her wits? Perhaps, or perhaps her heart. Make haste ; you and I must be at home in a quarter of an hour. Come, then; I am ready, I am not, (pas mot;) for, beforo I go away, I must have my pencils. Here they are. I am much obliged, and under many obligations to you. VOCABULAIRB. 2de Sec. How large ? Of what size is the dog ? How high ? Oi what height is the tree ? IJowdeep? Of what depth is the pond? De quelle grandeur est le chien ? De quelle hauteur . . . est 1'arbre ? De quelle profondeur . . . est Velang ? Ols. 15(H. When speaking of dimensions, the English use the verb to be, while the French use avoir, with the preposition de before the noun cr adjective of dimensions. How thick is this ? Combien ceci a-t-il d'epai$- 1 In general, the substantive is more elegantly used than the adjective but deep cannot be expressed by de profond, nor thick by d'epai*. 338 SIXTY- FOURTH LESSON. (2.) How high is his or her he ise ? It is nearly fifty fee; high. Our house is thirty feet broad. That, table is six feet long. '] ha' river is twenty feet deep. Tlc size. What is your size ? how tall . . . I am 5 feet 9 inches. Of what size is that man ? He is but 5 feet 1 inch. How was that child dressed ? It was dressed in green. The man with the blue coat. The woman with the- red gown. Is it true that his house is burnt ? It is true ; it is but too true. Is it not, (or is it not true ?) I shall perhaps go there ; but not he. t Combien sa maison o-t-eHo d , haut ou de hauteur ? t Elle a environ cinquante pieda ic haut ou de hauteur, t Notre maison a trente picds ie large ou de largeur. t Cette table a six pitds do lon^ ; de longueur, t Cette riviere a vingt pieds ie pro fonde^r. 1 La taille Quelle est votre tailk ' t J'ai 5 pieds 9 pouces. De quelle taille cet hommc est-il ? t II n'a que 5 pieds 1 pouce. Comment cet enfant etait-il habille \ t II etait habille de (ou en) vert, t L'homme a 1'habit bleu, t La femme a la robe rouge. Est-il vrai que sa maison est bruise 1 C'est vrai, ce n'est que trop vrai. N'est ce pas, (n'est-il pas vrai?) J'irai peut-etre ; mais il n'ira pas. Y (there), must not be used before the future and condition^ Obs. 151. of: atter. To share, to divide. Whose horse is this ? It is mine. (29 2 .) It is my horse. It is mine. ($ 38, N. 3.) It is mine, or it belongs to me. Whose horses are these ? Are these gloves yours ? They are mine, or they belong to me. Whose house is that ? It is mine, or it belongs to me. Whose houses are these ? They are mine, or they belong to me. It is not your purse : is it ? These are not your notes : are they ? No, they are not. Partager, 1. A qui est ce cheval ? II est a moi. C'est mon cheval. C'est le mien. C'est le mien, ou il est a moi. A qui sont ces chevaux ? Ces gants sont-ils a vous ? Ce sont les miens, ottilssonta moi (47 s . Obs. 110.) A qui est cette maison ? C'est la mienne, ou elle est a moi. A qui sont ces maisons ? Ce sont les miennes, ou elles sont a moi. Est-ce que c' 'est 2 vctre bourse ? Est-ce que ce sont 2 vos billets ? Non, ce ne les sont pas. ($ 393 ) 1 See note on page 337. 8 When a simple interrogation is used after a negation, as : You have nr-4 3T? ring, bite ytu ? The French merely use the interrogative form : Est-ct fe. . . as: Est-ce que vous avez ma bague ? You may use : Avez-vous ma Ifoguet but the other corresponds better with the doubt which the English mode seems to COD rev. SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 339 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME TH&ME. 2de Sec. Avez-vous vu la nouvelle maison de Parocat? Oui, je Pai vue. fit vous, ne ravez-vous pas encore visitee? Non, il faut que j'aillo La voir bientot. II vaut mieux que vous alliez en voir la grandeur. Combien a-t-elle de hauteur ? Elle a au mains 56 pieds de hauteur. Combien de largeur a-t-elle ? Elle a, laissez-moi voir, los deux salons ont chacun 18 pieds de largeur et le vestibule a peu pres 8, ce qui fait 44 pieds, et Pepaisseur (the thickness) des murs a pcu pres 4 autres pieds. Alors le tout fait de 48 a 50 pieds de largeur, n'est-ce- pasl C'est une grande maison pour un petit homme. Quelle est sa taille ? II a environ 5 pieds 3 pouces; car j'ai au moins 6 pouces de plus que lui. Votre fils n'est-il pas grand 1 Si fait, il a plus de 6 pieds. A qui sont ces deux beaux chevaux noirs? Ah! qu'ils sont beaux ! Ce sont ceux du ministre Americain. N'est-ce pas le Mon- sieur a Phabit noir, au gilet blanc, et a la cravate bleu mazarin ? Combien cette riviere a-t-elle de profondeur ? Combien cette table d'acajou a-t-elle de hauteur? N'est-il pas temps que nous allionsvoir le pont-neuf ? Whose houses are those ? They are mine. Do these pens belong to you? No, they belong to my sister. Are. those (sont-ce Id) the pens with which she writes so well 1 They are the same. Whose gun is this? It is my father's. Are these books your sister's? They are hers. Whose carriage is this ? It is mine. Which is the man of whom you complain ? It is he (celui) who wears a red coat. '/low were they dressed? Some were dressed in blue, some in green, some in yellow, and several m red. Who are those men ? The one who is dressed in gray is ny neighbor, and the man with the black coat the physician whose son has given my neighbor a blow with a stick. Who is the man with the green coat? He is one of my relations. Are there many philosophers in your country 1 There are as many there as in yours. How does this hat fit me ? It fits you very well. How does that coat fit your brother? It fits him admirably. Is your brother as tall (grand) as you ? He is taller than I, but I am older (age) than he. Of what size (de quelle taille) is that man ? He is five feet four inches (un pouce) high. How high is the house of our landlord? It is sixty feet high. Is your well deep ? Yes, Sir, for it is fifty feet deep. " There are many learned men (un savant) in Rome, are there not, (n'est-ce pas ?") Milton askea a Roman. "I\ot so many as when you were there," answered (ripondit) the Roman. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. Jl; ran up, run up, p. p , run up i Accourir,* 2, accouru*, accourez rite, Quick. \ (cotijugiii commc Courir.) (46 3 , 48 l .) 340 SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. (3.) Many men had run up ; but instead of extinguishing the fire, the wretches set to plundering. To run to '.he assistance of some one. To save, to deliver from danger. To save anybody's life. To plunder, (to rob.) The pillage. To fft about something. Have they succeeded in extinguish- ing tho fire ? They have succeeded in it. The watch indicates the hours, To indicate, to mark. To Quarrel. To quarrel with one. To dispute (to contend) about some- thing. What are those officers disputing about ? They are disputing about who shall go first to the aUack. To be ignorant of something, or Not to know something. The eve, the day before. The day before that day was Satur- day. The day before Sunday is Saturday. What day comes before Sunday? h it time for me to take ? It is time that you should take, we should take. Although I can, thou canst, he can. \ j We can or may, you can or may, they j may. I Foi the formation of the subjunctive To cu.e, heal. To cure one's self. | Eeaucoup d'hommes etaient arcoa rus, mais au lieu d'eteindre le feu les miseribles s'etaient mis a piller Accourir,* 2, au secours (a I'lssiei ance, a 1'aide) de quelqu'un Sauver, 1, du danger. Sauver !.a vie a quelqu'un. Filler, 1. Le pillage. t Se mettre* a quelque chose. Est-on parvenu a eteindre le fe if On y est parvenu. La montre marque les hcures. Marquer, 1 ; indiquer 1 Se quereller, 1. t Quertller quelqu'un. Disputer sur quelque chose. Sur quoi ces officiers dis t ulent-ils ? t Us disputent a qui ira le premier 1'attaque. Ignorer, 1, quelque chose, (no prep.) La veille, (de avant le nom qui suit.) t La veille de ce jour-la etait un samedi. t La veille de dimanche est samedi Quelle est la veille de dimanche ? Est-il temps queje prenne ? II est temps que vous premez que nous prenions. Quoiqueje puisse, tu pnisses, il puisse. Nous puissions, vous puissiez, ila puisse/it.. present, see ($ 151.) Guerir, 2. Seguerir. Guerissez-voua. THME. 3me Sec. Esl-il viai que votre oncle soit arrive ? Quoiqu'on m'ait dit qu'il est arrive, je ne le crois pas, je vous assure. Le ministre vous a-t-il assure de son assistance ? Oui,'je vous assure que c'est vrai. N'est-ii pas temps que nous premons le the"? Si fait, il est temps qne nous fe prenions. Irez-vous a 1'assemblee ? Quoique je puisse y aller, je n'inu pas, parce que m'a mere ne desire pas que j'y aille. Com- ment se trouve Emma aajourd'hui ? Quoiqu'elle soit mieux, elle o'est pas encore bien Sort-elle? Oui, qucaqu'elle ne soit pa* SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 341 guerie, elle sort. !Se querellent-ils toujours ? Us se querellent , mais il est temps qu'ils soient amis. Sur quoi disputez-vous? Nous disputons sur le rapport du comite de sante. Disputerez-vous toa- jours'? Pourquoi ne disputerions-nous pas? Ne vous a-t-elle paa sauve d'un grand danger 1 ? L'attaque a-t-elle eu lieu? A-t-elle rcussi? Ou etie/.-vous la veille de ce jour-la? Ignoriez-vous le manage de M. Francois? Quelle est la veille de lundi? Quells est la veille du douze? N : entendez-vous pas crier au feu! (fircl) nu feu! A-t-on sauve la maison? A-t-on pu sauver 1'ecurie? Si I'on avait eu plus d'eau, la maison aurait-elle brule ? " What is the difference (la difference) between a watch and me ? 5> inquired (demanda) a lady of a young officer. "My lady," replied he, " a watch marks the hours, and, near (aupres dc) you, one for- gets them." How many obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! You have saved my life ! without you I should have been lost. Have those miserable men hurt you ? They have beaten and robbed me, and when you ran to my assistance they were about to (ils allaienf) strip (deshabiller) and kill me. I am happy to have delivered you from the (c/cs) hands of those robbers. Ifow good you are ! I shall always be indebted to you for it ! It is not worth mentioning, (speaking about it.) Why are those officers quarreling? They are quarreling because they do not know what to do. Have they succeeded in extinguish- ing the fire? They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said (on dit) that several houses have been burnt. Have they not been able to save anything? They have not been able to save anything; for, instead of extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches (Ics misc- rablcs) who had come up, set to plundering. What has happened? A great misfortune has happened. Why did my friends set out without me ? They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that you did not come, they set out. What is the day before Mon- day called ? The day before Monday is Sunday. Why did you not run to the assistance of your neighbor whose house has been burnt 1 I was quite (entierement) ignorant of his house being on fire, (que le Jeu fut a sa maison ;) for, had I known it, I would have run to his assistance. SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON, 65th. Soixante-cinquieme Le$on, b>w. VOCABULAIRE, Ire Sec. To propose. I Se proposer, I, (de before inhn.) I propose going on that journey. \ Je me propose de faire ce voyage 342 SIXTV-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) He proposes joining a hunting party. To play a game at chess A. game at billiards. A. game at cards. A. party, a soiree ; a musical party. To succeed. Do you succeed in doing that ? I do succeed in it. Tj endeavor. I endeavor to do it. I endeavor to succeed in it. Endeavor to do better. Since, seeing, considering that. Since you are happy, why do you complain ? To be thoroughly acquainted with a thing. To make one's self thoroughly ac- quainted with a thing. That man understands that business perfectly. I understand that well. Since or from. From that time. From my childhood. From morning until evening. From the beginning to the end. From here to there. To blow, to blow out. Strongly, hard. East, the east, to the east, east wind. The north, to the north, the north wind. The west, to the west, the west wind The south, to the south, the south wind. The north-west. The south-east. To encourage. To unroot, pull. II se propose d'aller a .ne purtio (i chasse. t Faire une partie d'echcca. Une partie de billard. Une partie de cartes. ' Une partie, cu soiree; une n/irtffe musicale. Reussir, 2, (d before infin.) Reussissez-vous a faire ccla ? J'y reussis. Tocher, I, (de before infin.) Je tache de le faire. Je tache d'y reussir. Tachez de faire mieux. Puisque. Puisque rous etes heureux, pourqtMti vous plaignez-vous ? Jtre aufait de quelquc chose. Se metlre au fait de quelque choae, Get hommo :st au fait de celte af- faire. Je suis au fait de cela. Depuis. Depuis ce moment-la Depuis ma jeunesse. Depuis le matin jusqu'au soir. Depuis le commencement jusqu'a la fin. Depuis ici jusque la. Smiffler, 1. Fort. Est, i'est, a 1'cst, le vent d'est. Le nord, au nord, le vent de nord. Uouest, a 1'ouest, le vent d'oues*. Le sud, au sud, le vent de sud. Le nord-ouest. Le sud-est. Encourager, 1. ($144 2.) Dera ciner, 1. SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME TH^ME. Ire SeC. Vous proposez-vous de faire un petit voyage cet ete ? Je me pro pose de faire -3n petit tour. N'est-il pas temps que vous partes ? (151.) Je me propose de le faire dans quelques jours. Si vous n'etes pas occupe, ailons faire une partie de billard. II y a si long- temps que je n'ai joue au biilard, que vous n'auriez aucun plaisir a faire une partie avec moi ; mais si vous aimez les echoes, j'en feraj une partie avec vcus. J'aime les echoes le soir quand on est trau AiXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (1.) 843 \\u\\o Mais ne faut-il pas que nous allions nous preparer pour la soiree de Madams Bush? Quoiqu'elle m'ait fait 1'honneur de m'tn- viter, (to invite me,) je ne pourrai pas y aller. Tachez d'y venir. Puisqua vous le desire/, je tacherai d'y aller. Y jouera-t-on aux cartes ? II y a toujours une partie de cartes. Ce jeune liiandais est- il au fait? Votre servants est-elle au fait de son devoir? Ce corn- mis est au fait, n'est-ce pas'? Vous dites que votre cousine est toujours de bonne humeur, pourquoi done se plaint-elle du matin jusqu'au soir ? Quant a la danse, il est au fait, n'est-ce pas? Est- c qu'il s'est bien conduit depuis sa jeunesse? (64 2 , N. 2.) Quel bruit est cela? N'est-ce pas le vent qui -souffle? Oh! Cojmne.il souffle fort ! Est-ce que c'est un vent d'ouest 01. ie nord ? The wind has been blowing ($145) from the east these (depuis} three or four days, are you not astonished that we have no rain ? (subj. 151.) Yes, I am; for when the wind blows from the east, we generally have rain. Is your west wind warm or cold? The west wind is not very cold, but the north and the north-wet winds are usually strong and very cold. Are they not cool in summer? Yes, they are. I presume your south wind is warm, is it not? It is our warmest wind. And the south-west? That is pleasant. Does the wind blow hard here ? It sometimes blows hard enough to unroot trees, (diraciner dcs arbres.)lf Miss Clara is at Mrs. M.'s parly, will you present me to her ? I will, with pleasure. Have you been long acquainted with her ? I have known her these 2 years. Does she understand {he figures of quadrilles? (Est-elle au fait des figures des quadrilles ?) She knows them very well, or understands them perfectly, do you? (64* , N. 2.) Who won the game of chess ? I endeavored to do it, but I could not (62 2 , N. 1.) Your cousins frequently play chess, do they notl No, they more frequently play billiards or cards. I wish I could translate my exercises without mistakes ; but, although I try to do it, I cannot succeed. Try again. It is the only means to succeed. Since you encourage me, I will continue. If she was not unhappy, would she complain? There are people who always complain. Why are you without a light? The wind blew it out when you came in. What does your French master make you do? He Diakes me read a lesson ; afterwards ho makes me translate English jxercises into French on the lesson which he made me read ; and from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks French to m, and I have to answer him (il me f ant lui repondre) in the very latguage (dans la langue meme) which he is teaching me. Have you already learned much in that manner ? You see that I hava tlready learned something. . 844 SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) VOCABTJLAIBE. 2de Sec. To reduce, abate, reduced. Seduce. Dost thou reduce ? I reduce, she reduces. Tc translate, translated. Translate. Tc introduce, to present. T: induce the price. Reduce the price a crown. To translate into French. Shall I translate French into English ? Translate from one language into another. I introduce him to you. 1 introduce you to him, her. He will present us to them. He himself has told it me. He has told it me, to myself, (not to another person.) One does not like to flatter one's self. Reduire* 4, Reduis-tu ? redtt't. EcduistZ Je reduis, elle rod nil Traduit. Traduisez (as reduire.) Prt Traduire* 4. Inlroduire,* 4, senter, 1. Reduire le prix. Reduisez le prix d'un ecu. Traduire en Fran$ais. Traduirai-je duFran$aisen Angl&is? Traduisez d'une langue dans une autre. Je 1'introdttis chez vous. t Je vous le presente. t Je vous presente a lui, a ellc. t II nous presentera a eux, a ellea II me 1'a dit lui-mcme. (4H.) II me 1'a dit a moi-meme. On n'aime pas a se flatter soi-meme. Obs. 152. Sometimes the word meme is an adverb, and answers to the English word even. He has not even money enough to buy some bread. We must love everybody, even our enemies. Again, (anew.) He speaks ngain. To fall, to lower. The price of the merchandise falls. To deduct To raise, lift up, put up, rise, increase. Is Hour higher or lower ? She has lowered the window ; raise it c up. The provisions. Produce has risen. To overcharge, to asJt too much. Not having overcharged you, I can- not deduct anything. An ell. A yard. A metre, (measure.) TV produce, (to yield, to profit.) {low much does that employment yield you a year ? An employment. To permit, permitted. Permit. II n'a pas meme assez d'argent poiw acheter du pain. II faut aimer tout le monde, meme nos ennemis. De nouveau. 11 parle de nouveau. Baisser, 1, (tomber, 1, 51'.) La merchandise baisse de prix. Rabattre, 4, (see battre, 4, 36'.> Lever, 1. (^ 144 4.) Hausse . La farine a-t-elle hausse* on baisse t Elle a baisse la fenetre, levez-la. Lesdenre"es. Lesdenre*esonthauss& Surfaire,* (like/aire.*) Ne vous ayant pas surfait, je ne sau- rais rien rabattre. Une aune Une yard ou verge Un metre. Rapporter, i. Combien cet emploi (cette charge.' vous rapporte-t-il (elle) par an ? Un emploi, une charge. Fermettre,*4 ;de), periuis. (metre.) 1XTY- FIFTH LESSON. (3.) 345 TiiibiE. 2de Sec A-t-il reduit le prix de son velours de soie? Non, il (fit qiril nc rabattra rien . Ce marchand surfait trop. II assure qu'il ne snrfait pas du tout, mais que com me ses merchandises sont de la meilleure qualite, il est oblige de vendre plus cher. Voulez-vous m'introduire un autre ? Je vous intrcduirai avec plaisir. Qui a presente ce jeune avocat au president? Le ministre le lui a presente. Le roi a-t-il ete presente au ministre ? Non, mais le ministre 1'a ete au roi. Puisque vous connaissez M. Martin, voulez-vous me le pre- senter'? Je vous le presenterai. II vient par ici. Dr. Prudieu. per- mcltez moi (permit me) de vous presenter M. Martin, de Louisville. Dr., je suis charme d'avoir le plaisir de votre connaissance. C'esi a- ec beaucoup de plaisir, M., que je fais la votre. Vous ?'a-t-il dil lui-meme ? Non, mais sa femme elle-meme me Pa dit. Votre pere vous a-t-il permis (from permcttre, to permit) d'acheter 3 aunes de ce drap? II me Pa permis. Leur permet-il de se servir de son cheval ? Avez-vous leve la fenetre? L'e coton hausse-t-il ? What is the price of this cloth ? I sell it at three crowns and a half the ell. I think (trouver) it very dear. Has the price of cloth not fallen ? It has not fallen ; the price of all goods (la marchandise) has fallen, except that of cloth, (excepte cclui du drop.) I will give you three crowns for it, (en.) I cannot let you have (donner) it for (a) that price, fcr it costs me (couter, 1) more. Will you have the goodness to show rrs some pieces (la piece) of English cloth? With much pleasure. Does this silk suit you ? It does not suit me. Why does it not suit you ? Because it is too dear; if you will lower the price, (en rabattre quelqut chose,) I shall buy twenty yards of it. Not having asked too much, I cannot take off anything. You iearn French; does your master let you translate? He lets me read, write, and translate. Had cotton risen in England, by the last news? Yes, it had risen of a penny. Then it will rise here. Probably, (proba- blement.) Is it true that produce arid provisions are lower ? I be- lieve they are the same, (aw meme prix;) that they have neither risen nor sunk, (lowered.) What is the price of a yard of your silk velvet? It is 4 dollars a yard. It is high. How beautiful it is! See! Is flour high? Five dollars a barrel. Will it not be lower in the fall ? It may lower, fall. Will you permit me to use your fan ? If he would reduce the price of his house, would you take it for your family? Would he purchase 2 barrels of floui, if it was 4$ dollars a barrel? How do you do, to-day? I am very unwell, (tres-mal.) How do you like that soup? I think (trcuver\ it in very bad; but since I have lost my appetite, (Vappctit } ) I do 546 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSOK. (1.) not like anything, (je ne troi^ve rien de bon.) How much doaf that employment yield to your father 1 It yields him more than four thousand (mille has no s in the plural) crowns. SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON, 66th. Sotxante-sixiefoe Le$on, 66me VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. A ki'id, sort, (a species.) What kind of fruit is that ? A stone (of a fruit). A plum stone. A stone of a peach, an apricot. Stone-fruit. Break these stones. One must break the stone before one comes at the kernel. A kernel. &.n almond. Kernel-fruit. A. sweet almond. A bitter almond, (t is a kernel-fruit. To gather, gathered. Gather. f gather, thou gatherest, he gathers. To gather fruit. To serve up the soup, the breakfast. To bring in the dessert. The fruit. An apricot. A peach. ^ plum. An anecdote. Roast meat. To cease, to leave off. I leave off reading. She does not leave off speaking. To avoid. To escape. To escape a misfortune. He ran away to avoid death. To flee, to taJietoJlight, one's heels, &LC. To do without a thing. Can you do without bread ? I can do without it. There are many things which we must do without. To depend, belong to, be connected with. This employment and the duties connected with it. That lesson and the exercises be- longing to it. Une espece. Quelle espece de fruit est cela, (a: est-ce la ?) Un noyau. Un noyau de prune. Un noyau de peche, d'abricot. Fruits a noyau. Cassez ces noyaux (92.) II faut casser le noyau pour en avoir 1'amande : (a proverb.) Une amande, un pepin. Une amande. Fruits a pepin. Une amande douce, amere. C'est un fruit a pepin. Cueillir,* 2, cueilli. Cueillci. Je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille. Cueillir du fruit. Servir la soupe, le dejeuner. Servir le dessert. Le fruit. Un abricot. Une peche Une prune. Une anecdote. Du rod Cesser, 1, de. Je cesse de lire. Elle ne cesse de parler. (62 1 .) fiviter, 1, (de before infin.) Echapper, 1. t Echapper a un malheur. II a pris la fuite pour echapper a la mort. Prendre la fuite. Se passer de quelque chose. Pouvez-vous vous passer de pain ? Je puis (je peux) m'en passer. II y a bien des choses dont il faut se Dependre, 4, de. Get emploi et les devoirs qui en do" pendent. Cette le?on et les themes qui en d<5 penden* SIXTT 3IXTH LESSON. (1.) 347 SOIXANTE-SIXIEME TiiS.ME. Ire S ;c. Ainez-vous les amandes? Oui, je les aime douces.- -L'epiciei in coin vend-il de bonnes peches seches ? Non, les peches sechea qu'il vend sont sures, trop sures. C'est dommage. N'est-il pas btcntot temps que nous ayons des abricots? Des abricots? Ce n'est pas encore la saison (season.) II faut que les cerises et les fraises viennent (subj. 151) avant. Nousn'avons pas encore eu ces fruits-la Dans la saison des fruits j'aime beaucoup les desserts. Jean, si vous allez dans le jardin, ne cueillez pas les fruits. Non, je n'en cueillerai pas; mais no faut-il pas que je cueille un bouquet? Si fait, cueille? en un pour votre cousine Marie. Quelle espece de fruit est cela? Ce n'est pas un fruit. Qu'est-ce done ? C'est une tomate (a tomato.) Elle ressemble a un fruit, n'est-ce pas ? Dans la saison des tomates, je ne peux pas m'en passer, et VOLTS'? (62 3 , N. 1.) Mon fils ne peut pas se passer de pain, les votres s'en passent-ils ? Pourquoi evilez- vous M. Charles ? Mile. Amanda a ete bien heureuse d'echapper a la mort. Elle a echappe a un accident affreux, ne le saviez-vous pas'? You must speak, (subj.) you must not be afraid. I am too bashful (timide) to speak. I should like to (je vnudrais bien) know why I am so bashful. You would not be so bashful if you studied better Do you think so ? To be sure, I do. Have they already brought in the dessert? They have brought it in. Do you like fruit? I like irnit, but I have no more appetite. Will you eat a little cheese? I will eat a little. Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese? 1 vvill eat a little Dutch cheese. What kind of fruit is that? It is stone-fruit. What is it called? It is called thus. Will you wash your hands ? I should like to (je voudrais bien) wash them, but I have no towel to (pour) wipe them with. I will let you have (fain former) a towel, some soap, and some water. I shall be much obliged (fort oblige) to you. May I ask you for (oscrais-jc vous dcmander) a little water ? Here is some, (en voici.) Can you do without soap? As for soap. I can do withoufit, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands with. Do you often do without soap? There are many things which we must do without. Why has that man run away ? Because he had no Other means of escaping the punishment (la punition) which he had deserved, (meriler.) Why did your brothers not get (se procurer) a better horse ? If they had got rid of their old horse, they would have got a better. Has your father arrived already? Not yet, bul wo hope that he will arrive this very day, (aujourd'hid menu.) Has 70 ir Hend set out in time, (d temps?) I do not know, but I hore he has (qu'il sera. 58', Obs. 141) set out in time 348 SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. VOCABULAIK.E. 2de Sec. 2 S'acquitter, 1, d'unt commisfum. sion, to do an errand. I have executed your commission. I Je me suis acquitte de vutre com ' mission. {Vous etes-vous acquitte de ma ccaa mission t Avez-vous fait ma coniiuission? I have executed it. 7l> do one's duty. To discharge, to do, or to fulfil one's duty. That man always does his duty. That man always fulfils his duty. To rely, to depend upon something. He depends upon it. 1 rely upon you. You may j ely upon him. That ts to say, (i. e.) Et ceetera, (etc.) My pen (quill) is better than yours. They will warm the soup. Dinner (or supper) is on the table, (is served up.) Do you choose any soup ? Shall ! help you to some soup ? 1 will trouble you for a little. To serve up, to attend. Not that I know of, you know of. It is impossible that I should receive it in time, (for me to receive it.) 7 should like to know. I wonder why he says it. I wonder whether, (should like to know if. ..) Je m'en suis acquitte. faire son devoir, Rcmplir son devoir. Get homme fait toujocrs son dcroir. Get homme s' acquitte toujours da son devoir. Compter, 1, sur quelque chose II y compte. Je compte sur vous. Je me fie a vous. Vous pouvez vous fier a lui. Vous pouvez vous y fier. Vous pouvez compter sur lui. C J est-d-dire. Savoir. Et Cietera, etc~i Ma plume est meilleure que la votre. On fera chauffer ia soupe. On a servi. > t Vous servirai-je de la soupe f t Je vous en demanderai un pev Servir* Pas que je sache, vous sachiez, (sub $151.) 11 est impossible que je h refoived temps. Je voitdrais bien savoir. Je voudrai* bien savoir pourquoi il le dit. Je voudrais bien savoir si*. . . 2de Sec. Que faut-il que nous fassions aujounThui ? Je vous donne h etudierle vocabulaire delasoixante-sixieme le^on, seconde section; et apreparerles themes Fran<;ais et Anglais qui en dependent (belong to it; connected with it.) Tachez de ne point faire de fautes, J'essale tonjours, mais je n'y reussis pas. Pierre (Peter) s'est-il ac quitte de ma commission ? Fas que je sache. Votre crusine parle- SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. (3.) 84& '*ello plus que votre scBur? Elle le fait; non parce qu'elle parle mieux, mais parce qu'elle n'est pas si timide. J'ai une commission .mportante a faire. pour laquelle je compte sur vous. Vous pouvez compter sur moi. Je m'en acquitterai de mon mieux. Je voudrais bien savoir si 1'on peut cornpter sur notre domestique ! Mile. Ernilie n'est pas encore revenue, faut-il qu'on tienne ( 151) la soupechaude poui elle? Vous servirai-je un peu de soupe? Pourquoi n'on prenez-vous pas, si vous ne pouvez pas vous en passer ? Que voua servirai-je ? Mon neveu va a Norristown, voulez-vous qu'il y fasse quelque commission? Have you executed my commission > have executed it. Haa your brother executed the commission which I gave him ? He has executed it. Would you (voudriez-vous) execute a commission for me 1 I am under so many obligations to you that I will always execute your commissions, when it shall please you to give me any. Will you ask the merchant whether (si) he can let me have (me donner) the horse at the price (au prix) which I have offered him ? I am sure that he would be satisfied if you would add a few crowns more. If I were sure of that I would add a few crowns more. Good morning, my children ! have you done your task ? You well know that we always do it j or else (ou bien) we must be sick, or we must have a good excuse, (une excuse.) I wonder whether you could tell me an anecdote? Will you try to relate one to us? (nousenraconterune?) In English or in French? Not in English ; but in French. It is impossible for me to relate it without making many mistakes. We think so ; therefore we will excuse them, (excuser } 1.) One of the valets de chambre (un des valets de chambre) of Louis XIV. (de Louis XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to bed, (comme it se mcttait au lit,) to recommend (de faire recommander) to the first president (d Monsieur le premier president) a lawsuit (un proces) which he had against (con/re) his father-in-law, and said, in urging him, (en le pressani :) "Alas, (Helas,) Sirs, (StVg,) you have but to say one word. 77 "Well," (Eh!) said Louis XIV., "it is not that which embarrasses me, (cc n'est pas dc quoi je suis en pcine ;) but tell me, (dis-moi,) if thou wert in thy father-in-law's place, (d la place de....,) and thy fathe'-m-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad (bien aise) if I said that word VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. To suffice, be sufficient, answer. (s that bread sufficient for you ? ^t is sufficient for me. thou dost suffice. Snjire,* 4, svffixnnt, sujftt, Ce pain vous suffit-il ? II me suffit. Je suflis, tu sufHs. 350 SIXTY-SIXTw .ESSON. (3.; Cot argent suffira t-il aeet homme f (usually in thi '3d pers. sing. <$- plur.) II lui suffira. Peu de bien suffit an sage. Cette somme a-t-elle suffi a cei homme ? Get homme s'est-il contente de cette somme ? De ces 3 gourdes ? (fern ) Elle lui a suffi. Elles lui ont suffi II sMsn est contente. Se contenter de quelque chose. Elle luisuffirait, si vous vouliezseuZe- ment y ajouter quelques e"cus. II se contenterait, si vous voftliea seulement y ajouter quelques ecus. Ajouter, 1. N*y ajoutez rien. S'erribarquer, 1. Une voile. 1 t Mettre a la voile, t Faire voile pour. Faire voile pour 1'Amcrique, (allei en Amerique.) Marcher. A pleines voiles, (a toutes voiles. 1 ) Marcher a pleines voiles, (cingler.) II s'est embarque le seize du mt?if dernier. II a mis a la voile le trois coujant. Le courant. Le quatre ou le cinq du courant. La lettre est du six du courant. Regarder, 1. Regardez-le, (la.) SOIXANTE-SIXIEME THME. 3me Sec. Je voudrais bien savoir quand le batiment mettra a la voile ? Le capitaine ne le dit-il pas dans sa lettre du quinze du courant ? Je n m'en souviens pas. Regardez-la. II dit seulement: Mon batimeut fera voile mccssamment, ce qui veut dire : sans delai, bientot, dans quelques jours. Quelle est la date aujourd'hui ? C'est le 20 da courant. Faut-il que vo js sachiez le jour que le batiment fera voilo 1 D, est important que je lesache. ( 151.) Ce que vous avez sur votie liste de provisions suffira-t-il ? La regarderai-je ? Ne 1'avez-vous pas encore regardee 1 ? Non. Si je 1'avais regard e e, je saurais si ?-a que vous avez suffirait. Eh bien! regardez-la. Du fromagej Will that money be sufficient 5or that man ? It will be sufficient for him. Little wealth suffices for the wise. Has that sum been sufficient fcr that man? Was that man contented with that sum ? With those three dollars ? fie was (satisfied with it, with them.) He has been contented with it. To be contented with something. It would be sufficient for him if you would only add a few crowns. He would be contented if you would only add a few crowns. To add. Add nothing to it. To embark, to go on board. A bail. To set sail. To set sail for. To sail for America. To sail. Under full sail. To sail under full sail. He embarked on the sixteenth of last month. He sailed on the third instant. The instant, the present month. The fourth or fifth instant. The letter is dated the 6th instant. To k ok at. Look at it, (him or her.. 1 Voile, meaning a veil, a '.over, is masculine. Elle s'est achete un voile. Ex. She Pas bought a veil SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) 351 in vin, de Teau de vie, du biscuit, du beurre, des an'jandes. dea pruncaux, (prunes,) des raisins sees, (raisins,) du boeuf. Si voua n'avez pas de langues suites, (salt tongues.) il faut en ajouter. Com Sien en ajouterai-je ? II faut que vous en ajoutiez au moins 5 ou 6. Vous passerez-vous d'cEM/s ? (eggs ?) Non, ni de poulets; car j'aime beaucoup les oe-afs et les poulets. Ajoutez-les a la liste. What is that vessel coming under full sain It is tae packet (faqvebot) Susquehanna, from Liverpool. How fast it sails ! Il sailed from Liverpool the 3d instant. It will soon come (arrivcr) to the wharf. Let me finish looking at your list, and then we will go and see who is Ti the packet. The last articles are chickens and eggs. Will twelve pair of chickens be sufficient? I would think so. And how many eggs will you want? (vousfaudra-t-il?) About -welve dozer., (dou- zaines,} or one hundred and fifty, will answer, (suffiront.] Will you not want two hundred ? No, I guess twelve dozen will be enough. You will do well to put them up in salt. I wish I had everything arranged. 1 also. On the list is there any tea, sugar, coffee, choco- late, pepper, and vinegar? Yes, I see all those articles. Have you sent anything on board ? (a bord ?) I have already sent several chests full on board. We must, in going (en allant) to the Liverpool packet, see if they have been received, and where they have been put. Have they served up the soup? They have served it up somo minutes ago. Then (alors) it must be cold; I like soup only when it is hot. They will warm it for you. You will oblige me, (obliger.) Shall I help you to some of this roast meat ? I will trouble you foi a little. Will you eat some of this mutton ? I thank you, I like fowl better but a very small piece will suffice me. May I offer you (vous offrirai-je) some wine ? I will trouble you for a little. Is this bread sufficient for you ? It would be sufficient for me if I was not very hungry. When did your brother embark for America? He sailed on the 30th of last month. Do you promise me to speak to your brother ? I promise you, you may depend upon it. I rely upon you. Will you work harder (micux) for next lesson than you have done for this? (53 1 , and $200.) I will work harder. May I rely upon it? You may. SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON, 67th. Soixante-septieme Le$on, tfme VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. Ti be a judge of something. I t Se connaitre en quelque chose. Are you a judge of cloth ? I t Vous connaissez-vous en drap f 552 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (1.) I am a judge of it. I am not a judge of it. I am a good judge of it. I am not a good judge of it. To draw. To chalk, to trace, (to counterdraw.} To draw a landscape. To draw after life. The drawing. The drawer. Nature. Natural. To manage, or to go about a thing. How do you manage to make a fire without tongs ? I go about it so. Fou go about it the wrong way. I go about it the right way. How does your brother manage to do that? Skilfully, handily, dexterously, cle- verly. Awkwardly, unhandily, badly. To forbid. I forbid you to do that. To lower. To cast down one's eyes. The curtain (of a theatre). The curtain rises, falls. The stocks have fallen risen. The day falls. Night comes on. It grows dark. It grows late, it is rather late. To stcyp. Je m'y connais Je ne m'y connais pas. Je m'y connais tres-bien. Je ne m'y connais pas beaucouj c Dessiner, 1. Calquer. 1. Dessiner un paysage. Dessinsr d'apres nature. Le dessin. Le dessinateur, La nature. Naturel, naturelle. *S'y prendre. Comment vous y prenei-vous pom faire du feu sans pincettes ?* Je m'y prends comme cela. Vous vous y prenez mal. Je m'y prends bien. Comment votre frers s'y prend-il pour faire cela ? Adroitement. Maladroitement. Defendre, 4, (de av. I' inf.) Je vous defends de faire cela. Baisser, 1. t Baisser les yeux. Latoile (d'un theatre), le rideau. t La toile (le rideau) se le ve, se baisse. Le change a baisse haussd. Le jour baisse. II se fait nuit. II se fait tard. Se baisser. SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME-TH&ME. Ire Sec. Je voudrais bien savoir (I wonder) qui se connait bien en che vaux? M. Lenoi: s'y connait. Etes-vous sur qiril s'y conn aisse bien? ( 151.) Oui, j'en suis sur; car je m'y connais moi-meme. mais il s'y connait mieux que moi. Vous dessinez, je sais. Des- sinez-vous d'apres nature, ou copiez-vous 1 Je copie, generalement Voulez-vous que je dessine quelque chose pour vous? Je vou- drais avoir une copie (a copy) de ce paysage. Jean peut vous eu clessinsr une copie. Croyez-vous qu'il veuille le faire ? ( 151.) En 7 All nouns ending in tie are feminine, except the two following : un amu- tztte, an amulet ; un squelette, a skeleton ; and some compounds, a* : w\ Vorte-m.~uchettes , a snuffer-stand; un tire-botte, a boot-jack ; un caste-noisette out-crackers. SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (2.) 353 sas qiril ne veuille pas. (In case he would not,) ne pouvez-vous pas le calquer? Comment voulez-vous le calquer, lorsqu'il est sons verre ? C'est vrai. Je n'y pensais pas. Ne peut-on pas 1'oter du cadre? (frame.) Sans doute, on le peut. Comment vous y pren- driez-vous pour Foter? II faut d'abord oter les clous qui tiennent e d~s du cadre. Mais pour cela il faut que nous ayoris des pin- cettes. J'ai une paire de pincettes. La voici. Voila un clou d'ote, (3 1 , Obs. 7.) 1 En voila deux d'otes, en voila trois. Ah ! II n'y en a que trois. Alors ils sont tous otes. Mais atlendez done; ne noua esi-il pas defendu d'oter les gravures (engravings) des cadres pout calquer ? Are you a judge of cloth ? I am a judge of it. Will you buy some yards for me ? (ra'en ?) If you will give me the money, 1 will buy you some, (vous en.) You will oblige (obliger) me. Is that cleik a judge of cloth? He is not. How do you manage to do that ? I manage it so. Will you show me how you manage it? I will, (je le veux bien.) What must I do for my lesson of to-mor- row i You will copy your exercises properly, learn the next voca- bulary, (vocabulaire suivant,) and write the exercises belonging to it. How do you manage to get goods (des merchandises) without money? I buy on credit. How does your sister manage to learn French without (52 1 ) a dictionary ( She manages it thus. Sho manages it very dexterously. But how does your brother manage it? (Mais M. voircfrere com- ment s'iy prend-il ?) He manages it very awkwardly; he reads and looks for the words in the dictionary. He may (pent) learn in this manner twenty years without knowing how to make a single sen- tence, (une seule phrase.) Why does your sister cast down her eyes ? Is it because she is bashful ? She casts them down because she is ashamed of not having done her task. Shall we breakfast in the garden, to-day? The weather is so fine, that we should (qu'il faut) *ake advantage of it, (en profiter.) How do you like that coffee'? [ like it very much, (excellent.) I wonder why you stoop ? I stoop to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped, and in which I have put some money. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec Fo smell, to feel. He smells of garlic ; she of musk. I'c feel some one's pulse. Sentir* (54 2 .) II sent Vail; elle, le muse. t Tate- le pouls a quelqu'un. 1 After a noun, the past participle (used as an adjective. *hat is. NO auxiliary) must be preceded by dear d\ (3 1 , Obs. 7. 30', Oc*. 71.1 554 81 XTY-&E YEN TH LESSON. (2.) To consent to u thing. I consent to it. To hide, to conceal. To hidt one 1 s self. The wit, the mind. Indeed. In fact. The truth. The effect. True. A. true man. This is the right place for that pic- ture. To think much of one, (to esteem one./ T> esteem some one. I do not think much of that man. I think much of him, (I es.3em him much.) the flower, the bloom, the blossom. vVi a level with, even with. That man has his eyes on a level with his head, (prominent eyes.) To blossom, (to flourish.) To grow, growing, grown. I grow, thou growest, he or she grows, one grows, people grow. To grow rapidly, (fast.) To grow tall or big, grown tall. That child grows so fast that vc may even see it. That child has grown very fast in a short time. That rain hsr Made the corn grow. Corn. Indian corn. What a fine carnation ! What a good odor ! Has mignonette a fine ccent, odor, or smell ? does it smell good, nice ? Thai heliotrope has a delightful scent. To be witty, wr irt, talented. Consentir * a quelque chose. (5-t 2 .) J'y consens. Cacher, 1. Se cacher. Cachez- VOUA L'esprit. En verite. En eflet La verite. L'effet. Vrai. Un homme vrai. Voila la vraie place de ce tableau, Faire cas de quelqu'un. Estimer, 1, quelqu'un. Je ne fais pas grand cas de ce( homme. Je fais grand cas de lui, (je 1'estime beaucoup.) La fleur. A fleur de. Get homme a les yeux a fleur de tete. Fleunr, 2. 1 Croitre,* 4, croissant, crd. Je crois, tu crois, il ou elle crolt, or croit. Croitre rapidement. Grandir, 2, grandi. t Get enfant grandit a vue d'ceil. Get enfant a bien grandi en peu de temps. Cette pluie a fait grandir les bles. Du ble. Du ma'is. Quel bel (Killet! Quelle bonue odeur ! Le reseda sent-il bon ? ou a-t-il une bonne odeur? Get heliotrope a une odeur delicieusc. t Avoir de 1'esprit. DOIXANTE- SEPTIEME THEME. 2de ScC. Quelle belle (what a fine) fleur vous avez-la ! Sent-elle bon 1 entez-la et regardez-la. Elle est belle ; mais elle ne sent pas bon. Quelle espece de fleur est-ce ? Ne la connaissez-vous pas ? C'esi 1 Fleurir, to blossom, is regular ; but when it means to flourish, its pre- sent participle mfiorissant, and its imperfect indicative florissait,flortssatent. Ex. Un empire jlorissant, a flourishing empire ; une armee flo^issante, a flourishing army ; cet auteui jf-oafiuit sous son regne, that author flourished under his reign ; les aria tj l.t v ces florissaient alors, arts and sciences Terr then flourishing. SIXTY-SEVENTH LKSSON. (2.) 355 on dalilie. Ce beurre sent Fail. L'aimez-vous quand il a le goiu a'ail? Je ne Faime ni quaud il sent Fail ni quand il en a le gout. '24 2 , Obs. 55.) Que pensez-vous des ouvrages de W. Irving'? J'en tais grand cas. Et de ceux de C. D.? Je n'en fais pas grand cas. II y a trop de mots dedans. Votre cuisine est-elle a fleur de terre? Qui, comrne presque toutes les cuisines moderncs, ou que Fon batit a present. Les anciennes cuisines n'etaient pas a fleur de terre ; ma's au dessous. Que cachez-vous ? Quelque chose que je ne veux pas que vous voyiez, ( 151.) En verite ! Je suis fdche que vous le cachiez; ( 151) en avez-vous honte? N'importe.cela me concerns, ct ne vous concerne pas. En eflet, cela ne me regarde pas; mais je ae croyaispas que vous en auriez faitun secret. Votre neveu gramiit beaucoup, n'est-ce pas'? Sa sceur ne grandit-elle pas a vue d'ceil? Qui ne grandit plus? Which is the most flourishing city of the United States ? (dcs fitats- Unis ?) It is New York, I think ; but there are many other flourish- ing cities in the U. S., ($. U.) Which are the other flourishing places'? (endroits ?) Philadelphie, Baltimore, Boston, Cincinnati, La Nouvelle-Orleans, Pittsbourg, &c. &c. Does Indian corn grow well this season 1 ? Yes, it looks very well. The last rain we had (have had) has made it grow very fast. The mind always shows itself- it cannot be hidden. That lawyer is witty, is he net? Yes, indeed. How witty (d'esprit) is that young lady ! Truth has always a good effect, has it not 1 ? No, not always; truth sometimes make us ene- mies. Is your portrait (portrait) in its right (true) place ? No, the light comes from the wrong (mauvais) side. Your portrait ought to be on the other side of the parlor. Then it would be in its true light, (jour.) Had you not better change its place ? The family will not consent to it. That engraving would be in its true place, there ; and your portrait in its, here : if I were you, I would change them. It is indifferent to me, and as the rest of the family have arranged it so, I will not meddle with it. Do you like the smell of this little flower'? It ia delightful. Is it not a piece of mignonette ? No, it is a piece of heliotrope. Why do your sisters hide themselves? They would not hide themselves if they did not fear to be seen. Whom are they afraid of? They are afraid of their governess, (une institutrice.) who scolded them yesterday because they had not done their tasks, (lew devoir.) Have you already seen my son ? I have not seen him yei ; how is he ? He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise uim, for he has grown very tall in a short time. 856 SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) VOCABULAIRE, 3me Sec. A cover. A shelter. A cottage, a hut. To shelter one's self from something. To take shelter from something. Let us shelter ourselves from the rain, the wind. Let us enter that cottage in order to be sheltered from the storm, (the tempest.) Everywhere, all over, throughout. A.11 over (throughout) the town. A shade. Under the shade. Let us sit down under the shade of that tree. To pretend. That man pretends to sleep. That young lady pretends to know French. They pretend to come near us. Now. From, since. From morning. From the break of day. From the cradle, from a child. From this time forward. As soon as. As soon as you please. As soon as I see him I shall speak to him. For fear of. To catch a cold. I win not go out for fear of catching a cold, tie does not wish to go to town, for fear of meeting with one of his creditors, fie does not wish to open his purse, for fear of losing his money. To transcribe fairly. A grammar. A French grammar. |Ungite. Un abri. Une (hammers > Se mettre a 1'abri de quelque chuso. Mettons-nous a 1'abri de lapluie,dt vent. Entrons dans cette chaumiere, pous etre a couvert de la tempete, o pour etre a 1'abri des injures dts temps. Partout. Par toute la ville. Une ombre. 1 A I'ombre. Allons nous asseoir a 1'c mbre de cet arbre. Faire semblant de. Cet homme fait semblant de dormir. Cette demoiselle fait semblant de savoir le Francjais. Us font semblant de s'approcher de nous. Maintenant. Des. Des le matin. Des le point du jour. Des le berceau. Des a present. Des que. Des que vous voudrez Des que je le verrai je lui parlerai. De crainte ou.de peur de. Prendre froid, s' enrhumer. Je ne veux pas sortir, de peur de m'enrhumer. II ne veut pas aller a la ville, de peuf de rencontrer un de ses creanciers II ne veut pas ouvrir sa bourse, dc peur de perdre son argent. Mettre* au net. (33 1 .) Une grammaire. Une grain mairs Frangaise. SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME TH^ME. Sme Sec. Le ciel est couvert, ne ferons-nous pas mieux de prendre chacnn un parapluie? Oh! non, cela n'en vaut pas la peine. S ; il pleut, 1 Omlre, a shadow, is feminine game at cards, are masculine. but ombre, a kind of fish, and I omb f f SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. (3.) 357 nous trouverons quelqu'abri. Sans doute, nous trouverons quelque maison ou quelque chaumiere. Aliens, allons. Tenez, niainte- nant il fait du soleil, et un soleil bien chaud. II faut que nous prs- nions ($ 151) le cote de 1'ombre. Oui, vous avcz raison, allons a Tombre. Lorsque nous aurons passe par toute la ville, nous senti- rons assez le soleil a la campagne. Passerons-nous a 1'ombre. tnanl a moi, je ne nren soucie pas. Je n'ai pas trop chaud de ce Ctne-ci, mais je ne vous empeche pas d'aller a Fabri des maisons, si vous avez trop chaud au soleil. Jacques (James) et moi, nous allons a 1'ombre, vous autres, (47^, 1,) faites comme vous voudrn/. Samuel fait semblant de ne pas ($ 171 7) avoir peur du chaud, Dependant, il le sent aussi bien que nous autres. Tenez, (Obs. 94.) voyez done ! Thomas a sa grammaire Francaise ! Eh bien ! qu'y trouvez vous d'extraordinaire ? Si j'ai le temps j'etudierai. J'ai deja mis mes themes au net, et vous, avez-vous mis les votres au net? Je les mettrai ce soir. Why does that man give nothing to the poor? (aux pauvres ?) He is too avaricious, (avare ;) he does not wish to open his purse, for fear of losing his money. What sort of weather is it ? It is very warm ; it is long since we had any rain ; I believe we shall have a storm, (un orage.) It may be, (cela se pent bien.) The wind blows 3 iv thunders already; do you hear it? Yes, I hear it, but the storm is still far off, (encore bien loin.) Not so far as you think ; see how it lightens. It rains, it pours; what a shower! (ijudle averse !) If we go into some place (quelque part) we shall be sheltered from the ktorm. Let us go into that cottage, then, (done;) we shall be shel- tered there from the wind and the rain. The storm has ceased. We must go. Let us thank these good people for the shelter they have given us. We are much obliged to you. Adieu ! You are welcome. Where shall we go now? Which road shall we take? The shortest 'court') will be the best. We have too much sun, and I am still very tired; let us sit down under the shade of that tree. Who is (qucl est) that man who is sitting under the tree? I do not know him. It seems he (zZ parait qu'il) wishes to be alone, (seul ;) for when we offer (vouloir*) to approach him, he pretends to bo asleep. He is like your sister: she understands French very well, (fort bien;) but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends not to anderstand me. Has not your uncle given the cleik (Dir. 3) some- thing to transcribe ? Yes, he has. I wonder whether it is important that he should transcribe it ($ 151) immediately? Ycs ; it is, foi fear the gentleman should go without the copy, ( 151.) 358 SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. l.J SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON, GBih.Soixante-huitieme Lcfon, 68vw VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. SECOND IMPERFECT TENSE Preterit. For its formation and use, see ($ 153,) and study it carefully. INFINITIVE. IMPERFECT. PRETERIT. f c> have, Avoir, I had. J'eus, tu eus, i! cut, nous eumes, vous eutes, ils eureiu To be, Eire, I was. Je fus, fus, Had you money enough ? I had enough. Had he the pleasure :f seeing her ? No. he was deprived o ' it. (To de- prive.) Had they no soup on that day ? They had none, but we had some. Had I less good luck than they ? You had as much as they, (fern.) Wast thou happy in thy choice ? I was not at all. Who was ? We were, they were ; but you were not. Togo, Aller, I went. J'allai, To find, Trouver, I found. Je trouvai, To bring, Apporter, I brought. J'apportai, fut, fumes, futes, furer:, Eiites-vous asset d'arge.it ? J'ef eus assez. Eut-il le plaisir de la roir ? Non, il en fut Drive. (Friver, 1.; N'curent-ilspasde soupe cejour-ia Us n'en eurent pas, mais nous or eumes. Eus-je moins de bonheur qu'eux ? Vous en eutes autant qu'elles. Fus-tu heureux dans ton choix ? Je ne le fus pas du tout. Qui le fut I Nous le fumes, ils le furent ; mais vous ne le futes pas. alias, alia, allfimes, allates, allereut vas, va, vames, vates, verent. tas, ta, tames, tales, teront. Where did you go last night ? ( 153.) I went nowhere, I stayed at home. Who went to the minister's ball ? None of the family went, but Sarah and Fanny will go to the consuV s ball. Did not the consul give one 3 weeks ago? Not the consul, but the ambassador and his wife gave one then. And it was there that his wife were her beautiful wreath, was it not ? 1H . you find what you were seeking ? I did, but afte^ looking long for it. the battle decisive ? It was completely so. The year before last. The week , 77m steamboat A heamship Ou allates-vous hier soir ? (timo past.) Je n'allai nulle part, je restai a la maison. Qui alia au bal du ministre I Pcrsonne ($ 1533,) de la famille n'y alia, mais Sara et Fanny iront au bal du consul. Le consul n'en donna-t-il pas un il y a trois semaines ? Pas le consul, ( 153 3,) mais I' am bassadeur et son ipouse en donne- rent un alors. Et ce fut laque son epousc porta son superbe bandeau, n'est-ce pas? Truuvates-vous ce que vous chc?- chiez ? Je le trouvai, mais apres Tavob chercht? long-temps. La batailie est - elle chez elle ? ( Vot )tre mere est-elle a la maison t 364 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. {1} She is. She is not. I am going to her house. A. cause, a reason. A cause of complaint. A. cause of sadness. She has reason to be sad. Grief, sorrow, sadness. Is that woman ready to go oat ? She is. Is she not ? Notwithstanding, in spite of. Notwithstanding that you. In spite of him, her, them. To contrive, to manage. Do you manage to finish your work every Saturday night ? Do you manage to have your work done every Saturday night? Try to do that to oblige me. I will do everything to oblige you To command, look upon, ovet look. The window looks into the street. The window looks out upon the river. The back-door looks into the garden. To fasten, to tie. To tie his shoes. He was fastened to a tree. Until you get home. ( 151.) Elle y est. Elle n'j eat paa Je vais chez elle. Un sujet, une raison, une cause. Un sujet de chagrin. Un sujet de tristesse. Elle a un sujet de trisiesse. Le chagrin, la tristesse. Cette femme est-elle prete a sortir f Elle Test. Ne 1'est-elle pas ? Malgre, en depit de. Malgre cela. En depit de \oua. Malgre lui, elle. En de"pit d'eux. Faire en sorte de. Faites-vous en sorte de finir votre ouvrage tous les samedis soir ? Faites-vous en sorte d' avoir fini votre ouvrage tous les samedis soir ? Faites en sorte de faire cela pour m'obliger. Je ferai tout pour vous obliger. Donner sur. La fenetre donne sur la rue. La fenetre donne sur la riviere. La porte de derriere donne sur ie jardin. Attacher, 1. Attacher ses souliers. On 1'attacha a un arbre. Jusqu* a, ce que vous arriviez a la maison. SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME TH^ME. Ire Sec. Comme M. Salomon vient lard pour nous faire visite ! II vient pour se faire inviter a diner. Ailates-vous chez le colonel avant- hier? Non, je n'y allai pas. Y etes-vous alle ce matin? Non, et je n'irai pas avant sa soiree musicale. Et pourquoi pas'? D'abord, parce que je ne lui dois point de visite, et secondement, parce qu'on pourrait croire que je veux me faire inviter. Ce garcon ne s'est-il pas fait battre ? II est si mediant qu'il se fit battre ileux fois la semaine passee. M. D vous doit-il encore? Non, je me suia fait payer. Quel sujet de chagrin cette jeune dame a-t-elle? A-t- elle perdu son mari 1 Non, elle a perdu son oiseau favori. Est-ce la ce qui cause son chagrin ? Je crois que oui. Us ne veulent paa que vous fassiez cela. N'importe, je le ferai en depit d'eux. Fera l-elle en sorte de venir? Lorsqu'il sut qu'elle n ; irait pas, il fit en fcorte de s'y rendre, n'est-ce pas ? When had you finished your task 1 I had finished i* when you came in. ($ 155 1, 2.) As soon as Caesa^ (Cesar) had crossed SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 36fi (passer) the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate, (diliberer:) h was obliged (devoir) to conquer (vaincre) or to die. An emperor (ur empereur) who was irritated at (irrite contre) an astrologer, (un astro* ogi/.e.) asked him : " Wretch ! what death (de quelle) doetthou believe thou 'wilt die ?" " I shall die of a fever," replied the astrologer. " Thou liest/' said the emperor, " thou wilt die this instant of a vio- lent death." As soon as he was seized, (sat'sir,) he said to the em- peror. " Sire, (Seigneur,) order some one to feel (ordonnez qu'on ni* t&te) 1 my pulse, (24 2 , 06s. 55) and it will be found that I have a fever." This sally (cette saillie) saved his life. Do you perceive yonder house ? (cette nwison Id-bas ?) I do. Had you perceived it before ? I had not. Would you tiav perceived it if I had not shown it to you? May be so, (pent etre que out,) may be not. But now that you have shown it to me, what kind oi a house is it? It is an inn, (une auberge.) If you agree, we will go into it, to drink a glass of wine or cider, for I am very thirsty. Try (faites en sorte) to keep your thirst until you get home. It does not suit men like us to enter (dans) inns. I see that the inn overlooks the river. And as the house is high, it commands a large portion of the country. You appear sad; what cause of grief have you? If you were as thirsty as I am, you would also have a cause for grief. Are you always thirsty when you see an inn? I once saw a small black horse that managed to stop at every inn before which he passed. Ah! ah! I guess he was thirsty too. Did the colonel pay you last week ? No, he could not. He might have done it, if his nephew had not spent all his money ; but he will manage to pay me to-morrow. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. To drown. i. Noyer, 1. To drovn a dog, a cat. I Noyer un chien, un chai. To be drowned, to be drowning. ) g e nover To drown one's self, to get drowned. > Sauter par la fenetre. Jeter par la fenetre. Je me noie. (1443.) II sauta par la fenetre. Le betail ; plur. les bestiaux t Se tenir chaud. t Se tenir fraifc Se tenir propre. Se tenir droit. Keep yourself properly. ! Tenez-vous comine il faut . . . bica, To keep on one's guard against some I t Se tenir en garde contre quciqu on To leap through the window. To throw out of the window. I am drowning. He jumped out of the window. The cattle. To keep warm. To keep cool. To keep clean. To keep one's self up, straight. 1 Ordonner que . . , (c-der that . . .) requires the subjunctive after it. 366 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) that Keep on your guard against man. To take care (to beware) of somebody or something. If you do not take care of that horse, it will kick yoa. Take care that you do not fall. To keep on one's guard against some one. To beware of somebody or some- thing. Keep on your guard against that man. Take care. A thought. An idea. A sally. To be struck with a thought. A thought strikes me. That never crossed my mind. To take it into one's head. He took it into his head lately to rob me. What is in your head ? t Tenez-vous en garde contre ce< horn me. Prendre garde a quelqu'un ou d quelque chose. Si vous ne prenez pas garde a ce cheval, il vous dounera un coup de pied. T Prenez garde de tomber. ' Se tenir (etre) sur ses gardes avec quelqu'un. t Se garder de quelqu'un ou quclque chose. T Tenez-vous sur vos gardes avec cet homme. Prenez garde. Une pensee. T Jne idee. Une saillie. Venir en pensee, (a 1'idee, a 1'esprit.) II me vient une pensee. Cela ne m'est jamais venu a 1'esprit. t S'aviser, 1. t II s'avisa 1' outre jojr de me voler t De quoi vous avisez-vous ? SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME TtiibiE. 2de Sec. Avez-vous vu ce mediant petit garcon attacher ce pauvre peti chien, le jeter dans la riviere, et le noyer ? Si je 1'avais vu, j'auraia fait en sorte de Pen empecher. J'ai essaye de le faire; mais je n'ai pu y reussir. La petite fille qui tomba dans Peau, de la fenetre du bateau a vapeur, se noya-t-elle ? Non, on la sauva, dans un petit bateau. Le voleur fut-il pris? Non, il sauta par la fenetre et fit en sorte de se sauver. Vous etes sur un bane casse ; prenez garde de tomber. J'y prendrai garde. Voyez comme cette jeune demoiselle aux cheveux noirs se tient bien ! Oui, c'estun plaisir de voir comme elle se tient ! Si vous vous approchez trop de ce cheval, il vous don- nera un coup de pied. J'y prendrai garde. Faites-vous des afTairesi avec cet homme la-bas ? LequeH Celui au chapeau blanc. Non^ yen faisais autrefois; mais a present je me tiens sur mes gardea contre lui. Ne s'avisa-t-elle pas de revenir ici Pautre jour ? Ne Braignez rien. II ne s'avisera plus de le faire. You appear very well satisfied ; what thought struck you ? Some- thing which had never crossed my mind before. What is it ? Should I tell you, (if I were,) you would be as wise as I. Did William pimp out of the window? Yes, he did. What did he do aftei tumping out of the window 1 After he had jumped, he first ran to the g;irden gate, opened it ; and then ran towards the bridge Did ho SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) 361 go as far as the bridge ? No, there were some cattle in the road, and he was afraid of them, so that he stopped. Are the cattle as large here as there ? No, the cattle (bestiaux) are larger there than here. How can I keep myself warm ? Put on a warmer coat. Where must I put the butter to keep it cool ? You must put it in the cellar. Who is that little boy? He is Uie baker's son. I admire him, for htf always keeps himself so clean. Does your cook keep her kitcker. clean ? Why do the cattle go in the shade 1 Did Thomas dare (s'aviser) to ask you for money ? Yes, he did. Did you lend him any'? No, I was on my guard against him What was the cause of your quarrel with the gardener's boy 1 He took it into his head (or he dared) to call me a fool. Did you not Deat him after he had called you so I I did, soundly, (commt il faut.) Why do you laugh at me ? I do not laugh at you, but at your coat. Does it not look like (63 1 ) yours? It does not look like it, for mine is short (court) and yours is too long, (Hong ;) mine is black and yours is green. Why do you associate with (63 2 ) that man ? I would not associate with him if he had not rendered me great ser- vices, (le service.) Do not trust him, (ne vous y fiez pas } ) for if you are not on your guard, he will cheat (tromper) you. VOCABULAIRE. 3me See. In my, your, his or her place. We must put everything in its place. Ground, round. All around. We sailed around England. They went about the town to look at ' all the curiosities. To go around the house. To go about the house. How much does that cost yo . ? How much does this book cost you ? It costs me three crowns and a half. That table costs him twenty crowns. Alone, by one's self. I was alone. One woman only. One God. Goa alono can do that. The very thought of it is criminal. A single reading is not sufficient to satisfy a mind that has a true taste. To kill by shooting. fo blow out some ine's brains. A ma, votre, sa place. II faut mettre chaque chose a sa place. Autour. Tout autour. Nous naviguames autour de 1' Angle- terre. t Us allerent $a et la dans la ville, pour en voir toutes les curiosites, A Her autour de la maison. Faire le tour de la maison. Aller c.a et la dans la maison. Combien cela vous coiite-t-il ? Combien ce livre vous coiite-t-il ? 11 me coute trois e'cus et demi. Cetle table lui coute vingt ecus. Seul ; fem. seule. J'etais seul. Une seule fenin c . Un seul Dieu. Dieu seul peut faire cela. La seule pense"e de cela esi crimmt llr Une seule lecture ne suffii pas p'>u contenter un homme qui a da gou: Tue.r (fun coup d'arme a feu. Bruler la cervellc a quelqu un. 368 SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. (3.) To shoot one's self with a pistol. He has blown out his brains. Ho has blown out his brains with a pistol. He served for a long time, acquired honors, and died contented. Se brfiler la cervelle d un co zp Ji pistolet. II s'est brule la cervelle. II s'est brule la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet. II servit long-temps, parvint am honneurs, et mourut content. Oba. 153. In narratives, when the verbs are in the ^-me tense, the pro- nouns oi the third person are not repeated. He arrived poor, grew rich in a short i II arriva pauvre, devin, ricbe en pec time, and lost all in a still shorter j de temps, et perdit tout, en moine time. I de temps enco-e. . 3me Sec. A votre place je ne laisserais pas mes livres et rnes papiers ca ei .a, mais je mettrais chaque c.bose a sa place. Je tache de tenii chaque chose a sa place ; mais je ne puis y reussir. Pourquoi a-t-on mis cela autour de ce jeune arbre "? Pour empecher le betail de le mordre et de le casser. Le capitaine navigua-t-il autour de Pen- droit ? II navigua tout au tour dans son bateau. Ne descendit-il pas ? Si fait, il descendit. N'attacha-t-il pas son bateau a un arbre 1 II 1'y attacha. Lut-il le livre ? II le lut en un seul jour. Etait-elle seule quand le voleur entra? Oui, elle etait seule. Voulut-il lui bruler la cervelle d'un coup de pistolet ? Oui; mais comme elle fcllait prendre une prise de tabac, elle jeta tout son tabac dans lea yeux du voleur, qui tira son coup sans la toucher. II lui vint une heureuse idee, n'est-ce pas? Oui, elle eut vraiment une heureuse pensee. Combien ce parapluie vous coute-t-il? Ce drap-la voua a-t-il coute 4 gourdes la verge *? Cette maison lui coutera aumoins 1 5.000 gourdes, n'est-ce pas ? Dieu seul connait notre dcstince, (fate,) n'est-ce pas? What is th? matter with you ? Why do you look so melancholy ? (avoir Vair melancolique?) I should not look so melancholy if I had no reason to be sad. I have heard just now (49 2 ) that one of my best friends has shot himself with a pistol, and t} at one of my wife's best friends has drowned herself. Where has she drownod herself She drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yes- tfsrday, at four o'clock in the morning, she ~ose without saying a word to any one, (a personne,) leaped out of the window which tookg into the garden, and threw herself into th* river, where she was drowned. I have a great mind (grar.de envie) o bathe (s 6atgn*r) to-day. Where will you bathe ? In the rivr-. Are you not afraid of teing drowned ? Oh, no ! I can swim.- Who taught SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) 369 vou? Lasl summer I took a few lessons in the swimmii /g-school Vecole de natation.) Were you not afraid to go into the water before you could swim' A little, but I could not have learned without going into the water. You did not think like the man who said : I will go into the water only when I know how to swim. There are many who, like thai man, think that they will try to speak French only when they know now. Do they not know that if they do not try to speak they can- not learn? I guess they forget it. Why do you work so muchl I work in order to be one day useful to my country. Would you cooy your exercises if I copied mine?. I would copy them if you copied yours. Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I had transcribed mine ? She would have transcribed it. Would she have set out if 1 had set out? I cannot tell you what she would have done if you had set out. SEVENTIETH LESSON, 70th. Soixante et dixieme Legi i } TOroe. VOCABULAIRE, Ire Sec. As we began to use the verb in the Imperative mood from the 8th lesson, and referred to the article in the Synopsis in the (25), and all subsequent lessons, THE IMPERATIVE MOOD L'Imperatif will be nothing new to the student. However, as that mood must be found somewhere, we place it here. See, for its formation and use, ( 150.) That article must be carefully studied. Have patience. Be (you) attentive, patient, affable. Go (ye) there. Do not go there. Give it to me. Do not give it to me. Send it to him. Lend it to me. Have the goodness to hand me that plate. To borrow . ... of or from. I will borrow some money of you. 1 will borrow that money of you. Borrow it of (or from) him. Do not borrow it of him. I borrow it from him. Do not tell him or her. Toll her. Ketun. it to them. ($ 150- -8.) Ayez patience. Soyez attentif, patient, affable. Allez-y. N'y allez pas. ($ 1508.) Donnez-le-moi. Ne me le donnei pas. Envoyez-le-lui. Pretez-le-moi. Ayez la bonte de me passer ce plat. Emprunter, 1 ... a. Je veux vous emprunter de 1'argent Je veux vous emprunter cet argeuu Empruntez-le-lui. Ne le lui empruntez pas. Je le lui emprunte. Ne le lui dites pas. Dites-le-Ini Rendez-le, (-la-)-leur. 370 SEVENTIETH LESSON. (1.) Do not return it to them. Patience, impatience. The neighbor. The snuff-box. The segar-box. Be ye good. Be not (so). ($ 1508.) Know it. Do not. Obey your masters, and never give thorn any trouble. Pay what you owe, comfort the af- fltCted, and do good to those that have offended you. Love God, and thy neighbor as thy- self. To obey. Obey your father, To comfort. Comfort them. To offend. Offend no one. Let us always love and practise vir- tue, and we shall be happy both in this life and in the next. To practise. Let us see which of us can shoot best. To express. Express your wish to your friend. To express one's self. Express your- self. To make one's self understood. Make yourself understood. To accustom. Children must early be accustomed to labor. To accustom one's self to something. To be accustomed to a thing. I am act astorned to it. ! Ne le leur rendez pas. j La patience, 1'impatience. Le prochain. La tabatiere. La boite Soyez bons. Ne le soyez paa. Sachez-le. Ne le sachez pat). Obeissez a vos maitres, fit ne It us donnez jamais de chagrin. Payez ce que vous devez, consoles les malheureux, et faitesdu bicn a ceux qui vous ont offenses. 1" Aimez le bon Dieu, et le prochain comme vous-meme. Obeir. 2, d. Obeissez a votre pcre. Consoler, 1. Consolez-les. Offenser, 1. N'offensez personne. Aimons et pratiquons toujours la vertu, et nous serons heureux dana cette vie et dans 1'autre. Pratiquer, 1. Voyons qui tirera le mie^x. Exprimer, 1. Exprimez votre souhait a votre ami. S'exprimer, 1. .Exprimez-vous. Se faire comprendre. Faites-vous comprendre. Accoutumer, 1, a (av. 1'inf.) II faut, de bonne heure, accoutumer les enfants au travail. S' accoutumer a quelque chose. Eire accoutume d quelque chose. J'y suis accoutume. SOIXANTE ET DIXIEME TH&ME. Ire SeC. Ayez de la patience, soyez attentif, et vous reussirez. Je ferai en Borte d'etre patient et attentif. Si vous avez ma Vie de Washington, donnez-la-moi. Je vous 1'aurais deja donnee, si vous aviez etc ici Hier des que je I'eus finie, je la mis dans mon pupitre pour vous la donnev, mais vous ne vintes pas. Faites vos themes; pourquoi ne les faites-vous pas 1 Mon frere n'est pas a la maison. II ne faut pa& que vous les lui fassiez faire. Je ne les lui fait pas faire, mais ii a la clef du pupitre. Non, la voici. Ouvrez-le, prenez votre livre, votre cahier, et tout ce qu'il vous faut, et commencez. Je vais m ; y nr ettre a Pinstant. Que fait Sara ? Elle lit le livre que vous lu: ttV3z prete, Elle a tort d'etre toujours a lire. Dites-lui de dessinei ce paysage. (67 1 .) Et lorsqu'elle 1'aura fin-i, pourra-t-elle se mettre a SEVENTIETH LISSON. (2,) 371 lu lecture ? (reading ?) Non, alors faites-lui decliner ^o decline) quel- ques noms avec des adjectifs. Comment? Comme ceci : La belle pomme, de la belle pomme, a la belle pomme. Les poires mures, (ripe pears,) des poires mures, aux poires mures. Have patience, my dear frieno), and be not sad ; for sadness alters (changer) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse, (empirer le mal.) Be not afraid of your creditors; be sure that they will do you co ha -m. They will wait, if you cannot pay them yet. Pay me \vha1 you owe me, will you"? As soon as I have money, I will pay all .hat you have advanced (avancer) for me. Don't you forget! you hear ! I shall not forget, you miy depend apon it, for I tkuik of it (fy pense) every day. I am your debtor, (le debiteur,) and I shall never deny (nier) it. What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! pray lend it me. What do you wish to do with it * I wish to show it to my sister. Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. Do not fear, (Ne craignez rien.) What do you want of my brother ? I want to borrow some money of him. Borrow some of somebody else, (d un autre.) If he will not lend me any, I will borrow some of somebody else. You will do well. Do not wish for (souhaiter) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence (la Providence) has given you, and remember that there are many men who have not what you have. As life is short, (court,) let us endeavor (65 1 ) to make it (56 3 , 06s. 137) as agreeable (agreable) as possible, (qu'il est possible.) But let us also remember that the abuse (Vdbus) of pleasure (in the plural in French) makes it bitter, (amere, fern.) What must we do in order to be happy? Always ( 170) love and practise virtue, and you will be happy both in this life and in the next. VocABULAifcE. 2de Sec. To have the habit of. I cannot express myself in French, for I am not in the habit of speak- ing. You speak properly. To converse, to chatter, to prate. A prattler. A. chatterer. To practise. I practise speaking. To permit, to allow. Permit me to eo (there.) I do. Avoir 1'habitude de . . Je ne puis pas bien m'expnmer en Franc.ais, parce que je n'ai pas 1'ha- bitude de parler. Vous parlez comme ii faut. Causer, 1. Bavarder, 1. Jater, 1. Un causeur, fern, euse. 1 Un jaseur,/ero. euse. Exercer, 1. Je m'exerce a parler. Permettre,* 2, de. (Comire mettre 25 1 , 33 1 .) Permettez-moi d'y alLer. Je vout le permets. Une cauteufe moans also a small sofa for two persons. 372 SEVENTIETH 1 ESSON. (2.) I do not permit her to go. The pei mission, the permit. Do good to the poor, have compassion on the unfortunate, and God will take care of the rest. To do good to some one. To have compassion on some one. Compassion. Pity. The rest. ft' he comes, tell him I am in the gar- den, under the jasmin bower. Je ne lui perme\s pas c >' allcr. La permission, le perm is. Faites du bien aux pauses, nyai compassion des malheureux, ei i* bon Dieu aura soin du reste. Faire du bien d quelqu'wi. Avoir compassion de quelqu'un. La compassion. La pine". Le restw, S't'Z vient, dites-luique je suis au jar- din, sous le berceau de jasmin. suffers elision in the conjunction si, if, before the Us, they ; but not before elle or dies. (21*. Obs. 47.) Obs. 154. The letter personal pronouns, iZ, he Ask the merchant whether he can lot | Demandez au marchand s't'Z peut me me have the horse at the price donner le cheval au prix que ie lui which I have offered him. I read, and was told. ai offert. j ai lu, et Von m'a raconte. Obs. 155. The indefinite pronoun on takes a euphonic V after the w^rda et, oil, oil, si, que, and qui. There they laugh and weep by turns. If they knew what you have done. The country where diamonds are found. You have been, or will soon be told. We say with precision what we un- derstand well. Whom do people love ? Those to whom they owe their happiness. Can one be great without being just ? One can be great onl inasmuch as ne is just. On y rit et Ton y pleure tour a tour Si Von savait ce que vous avez fait. Le pays ou Von trouve le diamant. On vous a dit, ou Von voua dira bientot. Ce que Von con$oit bien s'cnonce clairement. Qui aime-t-on ? On aime ceux a quj Ton doit son bonheur. Peut-on etre grand sans etre jusce ? On ne peut etre grand qu'acuunl que Ton est juste. Obs. 156. But the euphonic Z' is omitted, when on is followed by le, la, or les. Say : Je ne veux pas qii'on le tourmente, I do not wish him to ba molested, and not que Von le, &c., which would be harsher than qu'on le. SOIXANTE ET DIXIEME TH^ME. 2de Sec. Bon jour. Mile. N . . . . Ah ! vous voila enfin. Je vous ai attendue avec impatience. Vous etes une causeuse, je crois. Vous me par donnerez, n'est-ce pas, ma chere ? Je n'ai pas cause, je vous assure , mais je n'ai pas pu venir (N. 62 2 ) plus tot. Permettez-moi de voii ce que veils avez apporte. Vous permettre de le regarder ! Je Pai apporte e;',pres (on purpose) pour vous le montrer. Tenez, le voila, pienez-le Je le tiens. Ah! que c'est joli ! Vous exercez-vous a peindre ? Je pratique quelque fois. Mais ccmment se porte madama votre mere ^ On dit qu'elle se porte mieux depuis qu'elle est aux eaus SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (1.) 373 (at thi spnngs) et 1'on cioit qu'elle sera bientot guerie. Que je suia ciiarmee de 1'apprendre ! Volre pere vous permit-il d'aller au bal avant-hier ? Oui, des que je lui eus demande il m'en donna la per- mission. Saiomon a-t-il compassion des pauvres? Lui! II n'a compassion de personne. Parlons Francais. Ayoz la bonte de par- ler, vous, et moi, je vous repondrai en Anglais. Vous paiiez tout arssi bien que moi. Vous plaisantez, (plaisantei, 1, to jest.) Non, jf ne plaisante pas. Vous me flattez pour me faire parler. Since (puisque) we wish to be happy, let us do good to the poor, and let us have compassion on the unfortunate ; let us obey our mas- ters, and never give them any trouble j let us comfort the unfortunate (iss infortunes,) love our neighbor as ourselves, and not hate those (etne haissons pas ceux) that have offended us; in short, (enun mot.} let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. My son, in order to be loved you must be laborious (laborieux) and good. Thou art accused (on t 'accuse) of having been idle and negligent (negligent) in thy affairs. Thou knowest, however, (pourtant,) thai thy brother has been punished for having been naughty. Being lately (Vautre jour) in town, I received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly (fort) complained of thee. Do not weep, (pleurer ;) now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, and be a good boy, (sage,) otherwise (autrement) thou wilt get nothing for dinner, (d diner.) I shall be so good, my dear father, that you will certainly (certainement) be satisfied with me. Has the little boy kept his word? (tenif* parole?) Not quite; for after having said that, he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table, (se mil d une table,) and fell asleep, (s'endormit.) " He is a very good boy when he sleeps," said his father, seeing him some time (quelque temps) after. Do you understand all I am telling you? I understand (entendre) and comprehend (comprendre*) it very well; but I cannot express myself well in French, because I am not in the habit of speaking it. That will come in (avec le) time. I wish (sou- haiter) it with all my heart SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON, 71st. Soixante-onzieme Le$on, 7 [mt VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. lc ttind up. To remain up. \ Eire debout. Kester debou . Wil\ VDU pe.mit me to go to the market? To hasten, to make haste. Voulcz-vous me permettre d'aller ao marche ? t Scdeptcher, 1, de. 574 SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON, (l.j Make haste, and return soon. Go and tell him that I cannot come to-day. Depechez-vous, et revei.ez bie.vttk.. Allez lui dire quc je ne puis veni.' aujourd'hui. 06s. 157. In French the verbs alter,* to go, and venir,* to come, ar< always followed by the infinitive instead of another tense used in English, and the crnj unction and is not rendered. ($ 150 J2.) He came and told us he could not conrre. Gro and see your friends. To weep, to cry. '} he least blow makes him cry. To frighten. To be frightened, to startle. The least thing frightens him or her. Be not frightened. To be frightened at something. What are you frightened at ? At my expense. At his, her, our expense. At other people's expense. That man lives at everybody's ex- pense. To depend. That depends upon circumstances. That does not depend upon me. It depends upon him to do that. ! yes, it depends upon him. To astonish, to surprise. To be astonished, to wonder. To be surprised at something. 1 am surprised at it. An extraordinary thing happened which surprised everybody. To take place, to happen. Many things have passed which will surprise you. To surpj \se. Many days will pass before that. A man came in wl .3 asked me how I was. II vint noua dire qu'il ne pouvait pru venir. Allez voir vos amis. Pleurer, 1. Le moindre .cup le iait p'euer Effrayer, 1, S'effrayer, 1. La moindre chose 1'effraie, Ne vous eflrayez pas. S'effrayer de quelque chose. De quoi vous effrayez-vous ? A mes depens. A ses, a nos depens. Aux depens d'autrui. Cet homme vit aux depens de toui le monde. Dependre de. Cela depend des circonstances. Cela ne depend pas de moi. II depend de lui de faire cela. Oh ! oui, cela depend de lui. Etonner, 1. S'etonner, 1. Etre elonne de quelque chose. J'en suis 6tonne. II arriva une chose extraordinaire qui e'tonna tout le monde. Se passer, 1. II s'est passe plusieurs chose s qui vous surprendront. Surprendre,* (comme prendre.) II se passera plusieurs jours avant cela. II entra un homme qui me demand a comment je me portais. SOIXANTE-ONZIEME THEME. Ire SeC. Pleurez-vous, mon petit bon homme, (a familiar expression con- rtantly used for: my little boy,) parce que vous etes oblige de restei deoouf? Oui, il ya si long-temps que je suis debout que je suia &e&-fatigue. Si Ton vous permettait de vous asseoir, seriez-vcus plua SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 373 sage nne autre fois? Je tacherais de Fetre. Je c jmpte sur votr parole. Asseyez-vous la-bas, (yonder.) Si vous avie/ touche cette petite fille, elle aurait pleure, car elle pleure pour la moindre chose. Je suis etonne pu'elle (151) ne pleure pas, car je lui ai donne un coup. Alors, il est vraiment etonnant qu'elle ne pleure pas. Aux depens de qui avez-vous fait ces belles emplettes? A mes proprei depens ; je n ? en fais jamais aux depens d'autrui. Votre ami obtien- dra-t-il lemploi qu'il desire ? C ; est selon : cela dependra des circon- glances. Si cela dependait de votre cousin, le secretaire, Pobtien- drait-il' 1 Oui; mais cela ne depend pas de lui. Lorsque la chose fat arrivee, cela n'etonna-t-il pas tout le monde? Oui, chacun en fut etonne. Vous surprenez tout le monde. mais votre nevei* ne sur- prend personne. II me surprend. Can you stand one hour on one foot without moving? I have never tried, but I think I could. If you were to try (esiayiez, imparf.) you would find out your mistake (erreur, fern.) before $ an hour. Is your letter written ? No, not quite. Make haste to finish it. And why should I make haste to finish it? You must make haste, (151,) if you wish it to go by the steamship. I thought it went only {ne mettait a la voile, que) on Wednesday next. (N. p. 167.) That is true ; but from Boston, not New York. And my letter must go (151) from here to Boston by the mail, (le courrier.) So that I must make haste, as you say. Go then and tell William to get ready, so as to carry it to the post office (la poste) as soon as I finish it. Do not be afraid, you have yet time enough. Do not speak to me, or else I shall not be able to finish it in time. Do you wonder at (de) what takes place? No; now, nothing astonishes me. Everything is now so astonishing, so wonderful, that nothing appears extraordinary. Wliy does that woman weep ? Haa her child been dead long? This little girl weeps because she has lost a five cent piece "j have you not one to give her? Does that man live at his own expense, or at that of other people? Does it depend on him to do that? Does not that marriage depend on his brother-in-law ? On whom does it depend then ? I wonder whethei (66 2 ) the general will be elected? (Hire* 4, like lire.) Shall 1 go and tell them to make loss noise ? Shall I go and buy you a bottle of cologne ? VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. Then, thus, consequently. j Done. Therefore. Ennui. | C'est pourquoi. Ennui, 1'ennui. The other day. Lately. I L' autre jour. Dernierement. In a short time. In. \ Dans peu de temps. Dans, en. Obs. 158. When speaking of time, dans expresses the epoch, and en the duration. 376 SEVENTY-TIRST LESSON. He will arrive in a week, (when a week is elapsed.) It took him a week to make this "journey. He will have finished his studies in three months. He finished his studies in a year. tie has applied himself particularly to geometry and mathematics. He nas a good many friends. II arrivera dans huit jours. II a fait ce voyage en huh jours. II aura fini ses etudes dans u >if mois. II a fini scs etudes en un an. II a fait une e"tude particuliere de ia geometric et des mathematiques. 5 II a lien des amis. (II a beaucoup d'amis. The word lien is always followed by the article, and beauaruf Obs. 159. by the preposition de. Y:u have a great deal of patience. < They have a great deal of money. You have a great deal of courage. To make a present of something to some one, Mr. Lambert wrote to me lately, that his sisters would be here in a short time, and requested me to tell you so ; you will then be able to see them, and to give them the looko which you have bought. They hope that you will make them a present of them. Their brother has assured me that they esteem you, without knowing you personally. To want amusement. To get or be tired. How could I get tired in your com- pany ? He gets tired everywhere. Agreeable, (pleasing.) Tiresome. To be welcome. You are welcome everywhere. Vous avez bien ie la pptience. Vous avez beaucoup de patience. Us out bien de 1' argent. Vous avez bien du courage. Faire present de quelque chotie d quelqu'un. Monsieur Lambert m'ecrivit 1'autre jour que mesdemoiselles ses sceurs viendraient ici dans peu de temps, et me pria de vous le dire. Vous pourrez done les voir, et leur donner les livres que vous avez achetes. Elles esperent que vous leur en ferez present. Leur frere m'a as- sure qu'elles vous estiment, sans vous connaitre personnellement. > t S'ennuyer, 1. t Comment pourrais-je m'ennuyer aupres de vous ? II s'ennuie partout. Agjeable. Ennuyeux euse,/e'm t Etre le bienvenu. t Vous etes partout le bienvenu. SOIXANTE-ONZIEME TlifblE. 2de SeC. Voudriez-vous n'avoir rien a faire? Non, je vous assure, car je m'ennuierais comme tous ceux qui n'ont pas d'occupations. Voui avez bien raison. Cependant il y a bien des jeunes gens qui vou draient ne point avoir d'occupation. Us ne savent pas ce qu'ils desi rent. Us s'ennuieraient s'ils n'en avaient point. Que faisait-il der- nieremcnt* Rien, c'est pourquoi il mourait d'ennui. Le colonel D ; arrivera-i-il pas dans peu de temps 1 Au contraire, il va joindrt SEVENTY-SECOND LKSSON. (1.) 377 1071 regiment ^to join his regiment.) A quel regiment appartient-iH fl appartient au cinquieme regiment. Que dessina-t-elle i'autre jour? Quand je la vis, elle dessinait le nouveau paquebot. J'en- tends toujours Mme. G. . . . gronder sa demoiselle parce qirelle ne se lient pas droit, la voila, ne trouvez-vous pas qu'elle se tienl com me il faut? Elle se tie.'tt aussi droit qu'il le faut. Quand le capitaine joindra-t-il sa compagnie ? II la joindra dans 3 jours. Combien de jours lui faut-il pour faire le voyage ? II lui en faut 8, et com mo u est en chemin depuis 5 jours, il lui en faut encore 5 pour le finir. Will you drink a cup (une fosse) of tea? I thank you; I do not like tea. Do you like coffee? I like it, but I have just (49 2 , 06s. 115) drunk some. Do you not get tired heie? How could 1 get tired in this agreeable society! As to me, I always want amuse- ment. If you did as I do, you would not want amusement, for I listen to all those who tell me anything. In this manner I learn many anecdotes, a thousand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired; but you do nothing of that kind, (de tout ccZa,) that is the reason why you want amusement. I would do everything like (comme) you, if I had no reason to be sad. Have you seen Mr. Lambert? I have seen him; he told me that his sisters would be here in a short time, and desired (prier) me to tell you so. When they have arrived (463, 06s. 106) you may give them the gold rings (la bague) which you have bought to make them a present of. Will they receive them ? Oh ! yes, for they love you without knowing you personally. Has my sister already written to you? She has written to me many times, and I am going to answer her, for her letters are always agreeable and welcome, (bienvenues.) Shall I (faut-il) tell her that you are here ? Tell her ; but do not tell her that I am waiting for her impatiently. Why have you not brought (58 3 , 06s. 142) your sister along with you? Which one? The one you always bring, the youngest. She did not wish to go out, because she has the toothache. I am very sorry for it, for she is a very good girl. How old is she ? She is nearly fifteen years old. She is very tall (grande) for her age, (I 1 age.) How old are you ? I am twenty-two. Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON, 12&.Soixante-douz: erne VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. OF NEGATIONS. Des Negation* See ($L7U for the manner of using them, and consult the ;uiide accessary. 578 SEVENT Y-f EC JND LESSON. (1.) tiave yuu none of my copybooks ? I have none, and I have seen none. Elave you neither seen nor heard the great lady singer ? ($ 171 4.) No, and I shall neither see nor hear her. I neither care about seeing nor heat- ing her. What did he do as soon as he had recognised hie sister ? No sooner had he recognised her than he threw himself in her arms. Touch neither the flowers nor the fruits. I shall touch neither these nor those. Does that seamstress earn but 1 wo dollars a week ? That seamstress earns but two. Would she not gain more if she was a mantua-maker ? IVavez-vous aucun de mes cahiers f Je n'en ai aucun, et je n'en ai vu aucun. JV'avez-vous ni vu ni entendu la grande canlatrice? Non, et je ne la verrai ni nc Tea- tendrai. Je ne me soucie ni de '/i voir ni de 1'entendre. Que fit-il aussitot qu'il eut reconnu sa soaur ? II ne 1'eut pas plutot reconnue qu'il se jeta dans ses bras. Ne touchez ni les fleurs ni les fruits. Je ne toucherai ni ceux-ci ni celles- la. Cette couluriere ne gagne-l-elle que deux gourdes par semaine ? Cette couturiere n'en gagnc qnc deux. N'engagnerait-elle pasdavantage si elle ctaitfaiseuse de robes ? Ainsi nous voyons qu'avec les temps simples ne se place toujours avant, Bt le complement, toujours apres le verbe. Moreover, besides. Besides that. Besides what I have just said. There are no means of finding money now. To push, shove, jog. Do not . . . me. Along the road. Along the street. All along . . All the year round. To enable to. To enable John to ... That enabled me to go. To be able to. He is able to do it. To the right. On the right side or hand. Straight on. To the left. On the left side or hand. Could you not tell me which is the nearest way to the city gate ? to the bridge ? follow (or go along) this street, and when you are at t'i.e end of it, En outre, d'ailleurs. Outre cela. Outre ce que je viens de dire. II n'y a pas mo yen de trouver de 1'argent a present. Pousser, 1. Ne me poussez pas. Le long du chemin. Le long de la rue. Tout le long de . . . t Tout le long de 1'anne'e. Mettre d mvme de. Mettre Jean a meme de . . . Cela me mit a meme d'y aller. Eire en etat ou etre d meme de. II est en etat (a meme) de le faire. A. droite. Surla droite. Toul droit. A gauche Sur ia gauche. Ne pourriez-vous pas me dire qud est le chemin le plus court pour arriver a la porte de la ville f au pont ? Suivez (allez tout le long de) ceae rue, et quand vous serez au SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. l. 379 tournez a droite, vous trjuirerez no carrefour, que vous traverserez. Et puis, ou irai-je ? Puis vous entrerez dans une rue as- sez large, qui vous menera sur une grande place publique, a droite vous verrez un cul-de-sac ou une impasse. Vous laisserez le cul-de-sac a i:,ain gauche, et vous passerez sous lea arcades qui sont a cote. t Ensuite vous demanderez. Une arcade. Le carrefour. Un cul-de-sac. Une impasse. Traverser, 1. Traversons. turn to the right, and you will find a cross-way, which you must go through. And then, where shall I go ? You will then enter a broad street, which will bring you to a public square, on the right you will see a Hind alley or court . Vou must leave the blind alley on your left, and pass under the arcade that is near it. Then you must ask again. An Arcade. The cross- way. A blind alley. A court. To cross, to cross over. Let us cross. SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME THME. Ire Sec. Est-elle en etat d'aller a pied jusqu'a la promenade publique? Non, elle n'est pas en etat de s'y rendre a pied. D'ailleu-rs, le me- decin n'a-t-il pas defendu qu'elle aille (151) a pied? Oui, il 1'a defendu j d'ailleurs, elle ne peut plus mettre ses souliers. II faut que nous ayons une voiture. Par ou passerons-nous? Nous irons tout le long de notre rue, juaqu'au jardin public, la nous nous arreterons quelques instants. Pour la laisser reposer, n'est-ce pas ? Oui, et en outre, pour la laisser jouir du frais, (de lafraicheur, cool, coolness.) Apres cela, ne traverserons-nous pas le jardin public ? Non. Per- sonne n'y pa?se en voiture. Ou irons-nous done ? Nous tournerons a gauche, et nous passerons sous 1'arcade du coin, ou elle pourra prendre le verre d'eau minerale ordonnee par le medecin. N'en prendrons-nous pas aussi ? Si fait ; quoique le docteur ne Fait pas ordonnee. De quel cote tournerons-nous ensuite ? A droite, jusqu'fc 1'impasse du voleur. Nous laisserons cette impasse a gauche, et nous irons tout droit jusqu'a la promenade publique. La, nous dcscendrons. La couturiere est-elle venue ? La faiseuse de robea a-t-elle envoye les robes neuves? Qui est votre faiseuse de robes? Who pushes me so? I cannot write, if you do it any more. No- body pusnes you. No, nobody pushes me now, but somebody d; J push me a little while ago. Nobody has pushed you. You urite Dadly, and you will blame us for it. Why does that officer push that man all along the street? Because he is a good-for-nothing fellow, who will do nothing. What is the gardener going to put all along thie wall? He is going to put some trees there. Fruit-trees? (Dei wbres fruitiers?) 1 Plum-trees here, pear-trees there, further on 1 Peche, pecker, peach-tree ; pomme, pommier, apple-tree ; abricot, abri eotier. apricot-tree: hence, vrunier ceriiier. amandier, rosier, frose-bush.) 580 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) peach-trees/ -Is he not going to put cherry-trees there ? No, because they grow too big, (Us vicnnent trop gros,) and so do apple-trees, Is it difficult to get money now ? No, it is not difficult to find, but as usual you must give a good security, (bonne securitc.) Can you procure me any? What security have you to give 1 ? Is not my name sufficient 1 ? A single name is not sufficient for capitalists, (n capitaliste ou rentier.) What did you do for him? I lent him a horse, and that has enabled him to join his regiment in time. Why did he not start on horseback? He did not, because he depended on the steamboats. What has become of them ? One has been burned, so that he could riot have continued his journey (voyage) if I had not lent him a horse. Has he sent him back ? (renvoycr, 1.) I suppose the horse is on the way ; but as it requires four days for the journey, he will arrive only the day after to-morrow. Did the colonel write to you by mail, or did he send a message by the electric telegraph t We have no eiectric telegraph along our roads, so that he wrote me by mail. In the forests there must be (il doit y avoir) many cross-ways, (bien des } ) how can the mail-riders (les courriers) recognise them ? They are ased to them. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. Dans les temps composes. ($ 1714, 5.) Were any of the workmen called ? Not one of them was called. Nobody has been called. Would she have done but that ? gjhe would have done but little more, or, she would not have done much more. Has she left my book anywhere ? She left it nowhere. To get (or be) married. Do not get m. To marry somebody. To marry, (to give in marriage.) My cousin, having given his sister in marriage, married Miss Delby, Is your cousin married ? No, he is still a bachelor. Is your niece married ? No, but she is going to be married To be a bachelor. An old bachelor. An old girl, maid. Embarrassed, puzzled, at a less. An embarrassment, a puzzle A-t-on appele aucun des ouvriers ? On n'en a appele" aucun. On n'a appele personne. JVaurait-elle fait qus cela ? Elle n'en aurait fait guere plus, ou elle n' en aurait guere plus fait. A-t-elle laisse mon livre quelque part ? Elle ne 1'a laisse nulle part. t Se marier, 1. Ne vous mariez pas. pouser, 1, quelqu'un. Marier, (donner en mariaee.) Mon cousin, ayant marie sa epousa Mademoiselle Delby. M. votre cousin est-il marie ? Non, il est encore gargon Votre niece est-elle manee ? Non, mais elle va se marier. Etre garon. Un vieux gar^on. Une vieille fille. Embarrasse. Un embarras. SEVENTY-SECO>/ LESSON. 881 You embarrass (puzzle) me. You puzzle (perplex) me. He asks my sister in marriage. The measure. To take measures. 1 shall take other measures. 'Toocness ! how rapidly time passes in your society . The compliment. You make me a compliment which I do not know how to answer. It is not my fault. Do not lay it to my charge. To lay the fault to one's charge. Who can help it ? Whose fault is it f I cannot help it. The delay. He does it without delsty. I must go, (must be oft'.) I am off. Go away ! Begone ! To jest, joke, be in fun. Do not trifle. The jest, joke. You are jesting. Vt us m'embarrassez. Vous me mettez dans 1'embarras. II dcmande ma sceur en manage. La mesure. Prendre des mesures. Je prendrai d'autres mesures. Mon Dieu ! que le temps passe vitc dans votre societe ! (en votre com pagnie.) Le compliment. Vous n>e faites un compliment au- quel je ne sais que repondre. Ce n'est pas ma faute. Ne me 1'imputez pas. Imputer, 1, la faute a quelqu'un. A qui est la faute ? { Je ne sais qu'y faire. \ Je ne saurais qu'y faire. Le delai. II le fait sans delai. Je me sauve. Je vais me sauvci . Sauvez-vous ! Allez-vous-en ! Plaisanter, 1. Ne plaisantez point. La plaisanterie, le badinage. Vous badinez. Vous vous moquca. Si la negation forme le nominatif, il y a un changement dans la maniere de 1'employer. ($ 151 6.) Does anything please them ? No, since their return nothing pleases them. Nobody cares to have them. Neither suit me. Neither these nor those houses will sell dear. None of my friends is going. No one knows it. Quelque chose leur plait-il ? Non, depuis leur retour rien ne leur plait. Personne ne se soucie de les avoir. Ni 1' un 7ii 1' autre ne me conviennenl. Ni ces maisons-ci ni celles-la ne so vendront cher. Aucun de mes amis 'y va. Nul, (pas un) ne le sait. SoiXANTE-DOUZliiME TH&ME. 2de Sec. Votre samr, m'a-t-on dit, se marie bientot. Oui, elle se mariera la semaine prochaine. Ne devait-elle pas se marier le mois passe ? Si fait, mais le colonel qu'elle va epouser n'a pas pu quitter son regiment alors. Est-il ici pour long-temps'? Non, il n'y restcra que quelques semaines. C'est dommage (57 2 ) qiril soil oblige ($ 151) de partir si tot, n'est-ce pas?- Je presume qu'il aura le temps Je passer la lune de mid (honey-moon) ici. En outre, s'il ne resto pas, ce n'est pas sa faute. II prendra, peut-elre, des mesures pour ne pas partir si tot. Mile. S , ne va-t-elle pas se marier? Non, elle a tant d'admirateurs (admirers) qu'elle est embarrassee dans 882 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (2.) son choix. Qui vous blame ? Mon oncle me blame, mais je ne eaurais qu'y faire. Est-ce ma faute, si j'ai mauvaise memoirs ? ]> me faut si long-temps pour apprendre mes legons, que je m'emmie, que je m'endors, et que je n'apprends lien. Votre pncle Jacques eM un vieux garcori, n'est-ce pas ? Non. il est marie, mais il ri'a pas d'enfants. Votre cousine est presque vieille filk, n'est-ce pas'? Oui, c'est tout-a-fait une vieille fille. Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in your society ! You make me a compliment which I do not know how to answer. Have you bought your watch in Paris? I have not bought it; my uncle haa made me a present of it, (en.) What has that woman intrusted you with ? She has intrusted me with a secret about a (d j un) great count who is in great embarrassment about the (d cause du) marriage of one of his daughters. Does any one ask her in marriage ? The man who demands her in marriage is a nobleman of the neighbor- hood, (le voisinage.) Is he rich? No, he is a poor devil, (diable } ) } who has not a sou, (le sou,) and who, besides, is old and disagreea- ble. You say you have no friends among your schoolfellows, (le condisciple :) but is it not your fault ? You have spoken ill (mal parlc] of them, and they have riot offended you. What are you astonished at ? I am astonished to find you still in bed. If you knew how (combien) sick I am, you would not be astonished (fern.) at it. John, (Jean!) What is your pleasure. Sir? Bring some wine. Presently, Sir. Henry! Madam? Make the fire, (du feu.) The maid-servant has made it already. Bring me some paper, pens, and ink. Bring me also some sand (du sable) or blotting-paper, (du papier brouillard,) sealing-wax, (de la circ d cacheter,) and a light, (de la lumiere.) I am going for the blotting- paper, the sealing-wax, and the light; but we have no sand. Never mind the sand. Afterwards you will go to my sister's, to tell hex /lot to wait for me. Be back again before 12 o'clock, to carry my letters to the post-office. Very well, Madam. Do not fail, for you know that the mail closes (se ferme) at 12, and the letters must be (il faut que , 151) in the post office before (avant gwe, 151) tLe hour strikes. I will not fail, Madam ; you may depend upon it. 1 Those two expressions : Mon Dieu ! and Diable, are constantly used by the French. The first is their only interjection for a host of English ones, such as : Bless me ! Oh dear ! Dear me ! Gracious ! Goodness ! &c. &c. The second is connected with every sort of epithets ; such as : bon diable, (good or clever fellow) ; mauvais diable, (bad fellow,) vilain, vieux, petit, grand, gros, beau, Sec. &c. Whoever wishes to speak French with French people, ought to become familiar with the terms, if not to use them himself, at least to understand those who do. Hence, however reluctantly, we fol low the text o<"_ OllendorfT. SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3L) 383 VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. Avec 1'infiuitif. ($ 1717.) That He likes to do nothing. Has she ever promised not to touch your jvatch ? No, never. What are they afraid of? Not to nave done their task in time. Does your cousin expect many people to her soiree ? She is afraid she will have but few. lie cannot take a joke, is no joker. To beg someone's pardon. To pardon. Pardon me. I beg your pardon. The pardon. The time-piece, house clock. To advance, go too fast. Is it too fast ? The watch goes too last, (gains.) To retard, go too slow. Is it too slow ? The time-piece goes too slow, (loses.) My watch has stopped. To go right, to stop, to go wrong. Where did we stop ? We left ofl"at the fortieth lesson, page one hundred and thirty-sJA. To wind up a (town clock.) a watch. To regulate a watch, a time-piece, a clock. Your watch is twenty minutes too fast, and mine a quarter of an hour too slow. It will soon strike twelve. Has it already struck twelve ? To strike. Make the clock strike. What hour is striking ? It is one. On condition, or provided. I will lend you money, provided you will henceforth be more economi- cal than you have hitherto been. H-jreafter, for the future, henceforth. 1 ho future. My prospect, fate. Economical. article must be carefully studied. II aime a ne rien faire. A-t-elle jamais promis de ne pas toucher votre montre ? Non, jamais. De quoi ont-ils peur ? De ne pas avoir fait leur tdche a temps. Votre cousine attend-elle beaucoup de nionde a sa soiree ? Elle craint de n'en avoir que pou (282, Qbs. 65.) t II n'entend pas raillerie. Demander pardon d quelqu'un. Pardonner, 1. Pardonnez-moi. Je vous demande pardon. Le pardon. Cette pendule. Avancer, 1. Avance-t-elle ? La montre avance. Betarder, 1. Retarde-t-elle 1 La pendule retarde. Ma montre s'est arretee. Aller bien, s'arreter. 1. aller mal. t Ou en etions-nous ? t Nous dtions a la lecpn quarante, page cent-trente-six. Monter une horloge, une montre. Reglerune montre, une pendule, une horloge. Votre montre avance de vingt mi- nutes, et la mienne retarde d'un quart d'heure. II va sonner midi. Midi est-il deja sonne? Sonner, 1. Faiics sonner la pendule. Quelle heure sonne-t-il ? C'est une heure. A condition. Sous condition. Je vous prSterai de 1'argent, a con- dition que vous serez desormaii plus econome que vous n'avez 6i4 jusqu'ici. Ddsormais, dorenavant, a 1'avenit L'avenir. Mon avenir. feconome, economique, manager 384 SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. (3.) To renounce gambling. Renounce it. t'o follow advice (counsel). Follow the good. You look so melancholy. Adieu, farewell. God be with you, good-by. Till I see you again. I hope to see you again soon. Renoncer au jeu. Renoncez-jr Suivre un conseil. Suivez les bon Vous avez 1'air si melancolique. > Adieu. I Au plaisir de vous revoir. Sans adieu, au revoir. Quand le verbe est omis (omettre,* 4, to omit.) ($ 151 8.) Study il 9oreiully. What is he afraid of? Nothing. Whom is she afraid of? Nobody. Whom does she fear ? No one. Do you want five ? Not more than two. - De quoi a-t-il peur ? De rien. De qui a-t-elle peur ? De personne. Qui craint-elle ? Personne. Vous en faut-il cinq ? Pas plus do deux. SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME TuihiE. Sine Sec. Quelle heure est-ri"? II est plus d'une heure et demie. Vous dites qu'il est une heure et demie, et a ma montre, il n'est que midi et demi. En moms de vingt-cinq minutes deux heures sonneront. Pardonnez-moi, une heure n'est pas encore sonnee. Je vous assure qu'il est deux heures moins vingt-quatre minutes, car ma montre va tres-bien. Va-t-elle aussi bien qu'un chronometre ? Je crois qu'elle va mieux que bien des chronometres. Elle va mieux que notre horloge, qu'on est oblige de regler toutes les semaines. Comment va votre pendule ? Elle va superieurement aussi. Ni ma montre ni notre pendule ne varient (varier, 1, to vary) d'une minute dans six mois. Elles vont toujours ensemble. Votre montre doit etre arretee ou derangee, (out of order.) Est-elle montee"? Je 1'ai montee hier soir en me couchant. A quelle condition le leriez-vous? Suivez eon conseil a condition qu'il suive ($151) le votre. Son avenir ne serait-il pas moins incertain s'il etait plus econome? Ne le serait-il pas encore moins s'il renoncait au jeu ? Donnez-lui en le conseil Te n'y manquerai pas. Adieu, au plaisir. Sans adieu. Your schoolfellows have done you good, and nevertheless you have quarrelled with them; why did you? Was it my fault? I think it was theirs. Never mind. You must, without delay, make your peace with them. Dialogue (le dialogue) between a tailor and Ms journeyman, (le gar$on.) Charles, have you taken the clothes to the Count Narissi ? Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. What did he say ? He said nothing but (sinon) that he had a great mind to give me a box on the ear, (des soufflcts, plur..) because I had not brought them sooner. What did you answer him 1 ? Sir, said I, I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me; and if you do SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 885 aoi do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely had i said jhat, when he put his hand to his sword, (porter la main a son cpee,) and I ran away. Has it already struck twelve ? Yes, madarrij t is already half- past twelve. Is it so late? Js it possible? That 13 not late, it is still early. Does your watch go well 7 ? (bienJ) No, Miss N., it is a ^uaiter of an hour too fast. And mine is half an hour too slow. Perhaps it has stopped. In fact, you are right. Is it wound up? ft is wound up, and yet (pourtant) it does not go. Do you hear? it is striking one o'clock. Then I will regulate my watch and gc home. Pray (de grace) stay a little longer, (encore un pen!) I can- not, for we dine precisely at one o'clock, (d unc heure precise.) AJieu, Mien, till I see you again. You say you want fifty dollars; I will lend them to you with all my heart, but on condition that you will renounce gambling, (renoncer au jeu,) and be more economical than you have hitherto been. I see now that you are my friend, and I love you too much not to follow your advice. SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON, 73d. Soixante-treizicm: Lc$on, 73me VOCABULAIBE. Ire Sec. To last, (to wear well,) stand. A short time. That cloth will wear well. How long has that coat asted you ? It lasted me a year. That color is not a standing one. To my, his, her, their, our liking. To everybody's liking. Nobody can do anything to his liking. A boarding-house. A boarding-school. To keep house, (a boarding-house.') To board with any one or anywhere. To be a boarder. To exclaim. Tt) make uneasy. To get or grow uneasy. To be uneasy. Why do yo i fret, (are you uneasy ?;. I do not fret, (am not uneasy.) That news mokes me uneasy. am uneasy at not receiving any news. Durer, 1. Peu de temps Ce drap durera bien. Combien de temps cet habit vouh a-t-il durd ? II m'a dure un au. Cette couleur n'est pas de dureo. ^(U l , Obs. 27.) A man, son, leur, notre, grc. Au grd de tout le monde. On ne peut rien faire a son gre. Une pension. Tenir maison. Tenir pension Eire en pension. ^ Se mettre en pension. Etre petisionnairt. S' eerier, 1. Inquiet er, 1. S'inquieter. Etre inquiet, fern, inquiete. Pourquoi vous inquie"tez-vous ? Je ne m'inquiete pas. Cettc nouvelle m'inquieie. Je suis inquiet de ne point roccvoO de no u voiles. 586 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) She is uneasy about that affair. Do not be uneasy. The uneasiness, trouble. Quiet. Be quiet, just wait, stop. To quiet. Compose yourself To change, alter, fade, pass away. That man has altered a great deal since I saw him. To bt of use. Of what use is that to you ? Tnat is of no use to me. Of what use is that to your brother ? It is of no use to him. Of what use is that stick to you ? I use it to beat my dogs, Of what use are those baskets to your brother ? He uses them to carry his vegetables to market. I Elle est inquidte sur cette aflaire Ne vous inquietez pas. L' inquietude. Tranquille. Soyez tranquille Tranquilliser, 1. Tranquillisez-vous, Changer, 1. La couleur change Get homme a beaucoup change dc puis que je r>e 1'ai vu. t Servir,* 2, d quelque chose. t A quoi cela vous sert-il t t Cela ne me sert a rien. t A quoi cela sert-il a votre trerc f t Cela ne lui sert a rien. t A quoi ce baton vous sert-il \ t II me sert a battre mes chiens. t A quoi ces paniers servent-ils d votre frere ? t Us lui servent a porter ses legumes au marche". II s'en sert pou* porter ses legumes au mirche. SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME THEME. Ire See. De quet (Lap ferez-vous emplette'? Je veux du drap vert; mais je veux qu'il dure et que la couleur tienne ( 151), qu'elle ne passe pas. Si vous voulez de bon drap, il faut aller chez les Messieurs . Ne demeurent-ils pas au coin de cette rue-ci? Si fait, c'est la qu'ils ont leur magasin. Au dessus du (above the) magasin n ; y a-t-il pas une pension bien tenue ? Si fait, il y a ce qu'on appelle une pension d la mode, (a fashionable boarding-house.) Vous con naissez-vous en drap ? Oui, asssz bien. Voulez- vous venir m'aider a en choisir? Volon tiers. Mais ne vous inquietez pas, soyez tranquille ; car si vous achetez le drap chez ces MM. , il sera bon et la couleur tiendra, elle ne changera pas, je vous assure. Votre cousin a beaucoup change dernierement, a-t-il ete malade ? Son epouse est encore plus changue. Sont-ils dans une bonne pen- sion ? Combien de pensionnaires y a-t-il 1 Quel est le prix de la pension ? Si votre associe reste dans une mauvaise pension, a quoi lui sert son argent? Est-il avare ? S'il esv marie, pourquoi ne tient-i) pas maison ? La pension leur convient-elle ? Sir, may (oser) I ask where General B lives ? He lives neai the arsenal, (arsenal, mas.,) on the other side of the river. Could you tell me waich road I must (je dois) take to go there ? You must go (( lt>l) slong tiie shore, and at the end take a little street (quand ous serez au bout, prenez une petite rue) on the right, which will lead you straight to his house. It is a fine house ; you will find it easily. I thank yon, Sir. .Does Captain N iive here ? Yes, SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2) 387 Sii, walk in, (donnez-vous la peine cTentrer,) if you please. Is the captain at home? I wish to have the honor (I'honncur) to speak to him. Yes, Sir, he is at home. Whom shall I have the honor to announce? (annoncerJ] I am from B , and my name is F , Who keeps this fashionable boarding-house'? Miss P . an old maid. Last summer, when we were a hunting together, (enscmlle^) night grew upon us (la nuit nous surprit) at ten leagues (line lieue) at least from our country seat, (la maison de campagne.) Well, (Eh bienj) where did you pass the night ? I was very uneasy at first, but your brother, not in the least, (pas le moins du monde ;) on the contrary, in his opinion (gre) it was an agreeable incident ; he tran- quillized me so that I lost my uneasiness. After some time we found a peasant's hut, where we passed the night. Here I had an opportunity to see how clever your brother is. A few benches and a truss of straw (une bolte de paille) served him to make a comforta ble (commode) bed; he used a bottle as a candlestick, another bundle of straw served us as a pillow, and our cravats as pightcaps. W 7 hen we awoke in the morning, we were as fresh and healthy (bicn por- tant) as if we had slept in our own beds. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. Of what use are these bottles to your landlord ? They serve him to put his wine in. To stand instead, to be as. I use my gun as a stick. This hole serves him for a house. He used his cravat as a nightcap. fo avail. What avails it to you to cry ? It avails me nothing. Opposite to. Opposite that house. Opposite the garden Opposite to me. Right opposite. He lives opposite the arsenal. I .ive opposite the king's library. T get hold of... < Seizeuponit . JLe take possession of. ) To witness. To show. To give evidence aga'nst gome one t A quoi ces bouteillej servent-elles a votre hote ? t Elles lui servent a mettre son vin. t Servir,* de. t Mon fusil me sert de baton, t Ce trou lui sert de maison. t Sa cravate lui a servi de bonnat du nuit. t Servir,* (de before inf.) t A quoi vous sert-il de pleuier f t Cela ne me sert a nen. Vis-d-vis de. Vis-a-vis de cette maison. Vis-a-vis du jardin. Vis-a-vis de moi. Tout vis-a-vis. II demeure vis-a-vis de I'arterMl. Je demeure vis-a-vis do la biblio- theque royale. S'emparer de . . . Emparez-vous-on Temoigner, 1. T< moigner contre quelqu'un. 388 SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) He has shown a great deal of friend- ship to me. To turn some one into ridicule, To become ridiculous. To make one's self ridiculous. To be born. Wnere were you born ? [ was bcrn in this country. Where was your sister born ? She was born in the United States of North America. Where were your brothers born ? They were born in France. The game. The game-bag, pouch. A horse-hair. The feathers. A pillow. A cushion, down. A hair cushion. A down pillow. II m'a temoigne beaucoup d'aiLUi^ Tourner quelqu'un en ridicule. Tomber dans le ridicule. Se rendre ridicule. Eire lie. t Ou etes-vous ne ? t Je suis ne dans ce pays-ci. t Ou vctrc sceur est-elle nee ? t Elle cst ne'e aux tats Unis dl I'Amenque du Nord. t Ou vos freres sont-ils nes ? t Us sont nes en France. Le gibier. La gibeciere. Un crin. Les plumes. Un oreiller. Un coussin, le duvet. Un coussin de crin. Un oreiller ds duvet. The boarder. The pensioner. Le pensionnaire ... du gouverne- ment. SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME THE~ME. ' 2de Sec. A quoi lui sert de savoir le Francais, si elle ne le parle, ni ne le lit, ni ne le pratique 1 ( 171 3.) II lui servira quand elle voyagera en Europe. Se sert-il de sa gibeciere pour^ oreiller? Oui, lorsqu'il Be couche sous les arbres a la campagne. A quoi vous sert de vous affliger? Je ne peux m'empecher d'etre afflige du malheur arrive a mon ami. Son cheval lui sert-il a quelque chose ? 11 se promene a cheval tous les jours. Ou son fils est-il ne? II est ne a Philadel- phie. Sa fille y est-elle nee aussi? Oui, elle est nee dans la maison vis-a-vis. Si vous etiez ne en Ecosse, mon petit bon homme, que seriez-vous? Je serais ecossais. n'est-ce pas? C'est vrai. Et votre soBur que serait-elle, si elle y etait nee ? Elle serait ecossais aussi Nor. pas ecossais, mais ecossaise. De quoi le voleur s'est-il empare ? li s'est empare de tout ce qu'il a pu. Qui a temoigne centre lui? Le bijoutier qui demeurait vis-a-vis de la poste, et 1'aubergiste qui demeure au coin de la place ou se trouve la bibli- otheque de la ville. Ne tournez personne en ridicule. Aimeriez- vous a etre tourne en ridicule ? Ne ferai-je pas bien de le baltre, s'il me tourne en ridicule? Which is the shortest (court) way to the arsena. ? ^tm arsenal?] Go down (suivez) this street, and when you come to the end (au bout,) turn to the left, and take the cross-way, (vous truuverez un que vous traverscrez ;) you will then enter into a rather narrow (etroit) street, which will lead you to a great square, (It place,) where you will see a blind alley. Through (par) which I must pass? No, foi SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON (1.) 389 shere is no outlet, (une issue.) You must leave it on the right, and pass under the arcade which is near it. And then ? And then you must inquire, (further.) I am very much obliged to you. Do no! mention it, (il n'i/ a pas de quoi.) Are you able to translate an English letter into French ? I am. Who has taught you "? My French master has enabled me to do it. Was your French teacher born in France ? No, he was not. Your mother is wrong to fret about her eldest son ; for, although he is ( $ 151) in the army, (d I'arwiee,) he knows how to get out of a bad scrape. A candidate (un candidat) petitioned (dcmande" ) the king of Prussia (de Prusse) for an employment, (un emploi.) This prince asked him where he was born. " I was born at Berlin,'' answered he. ct Begone!" said the monarch, (le monarque,) "all the men of Berlin (un Berlinois) are good for nothing." " I beg your majesty's pardon," replied the candidate ; " there are some good ones, and I know two." " Which are those twr ?" asked the king. 1 The first," replied the candidate, " is your majesty, and I am the second." The king could not help laughing (ne put s'empecher de rire) at this answer, and granted (accordcr) the request, (li de* mancfe.) SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. Soixant .-quatorziemc Lc$on, 1 (me. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. To lose sight of. [ Perdre. de vue. The sight. My sight is good. (I La vuc. t J'ai bonne v^e. have good sigk.t.) 1 wear spectacles because my sight is bad, (or I have a bad sight.) (24 2 , Obs. 55.) Are you near-sighted,or lOng-sighted ? I am near-sighted. The ship is so far ofT, that we shall soon lose sight of it. I have lost sight of that. As it is long since I was in England, I have lost sight of your brother. As it is long since I have read any French, I have lost sight of it. Je porte des lunettes parce que j'ai Zavuemauvaise, (oumauvaise file.) t Avez-vous la vue courte oulongue ? t J'ai la vue courte. Le batiment est si loin, quc nous le perdrons bientot de vue. J'ai perdu cela de vue. Cornme il y a long-temps que je n'w et<* en Angleterre, j'ai perdu votre frere de vue. Comme il y a long-temps que je n'ai lude Franc.ais, je 1'ai perdu de vuo. Obs. 160. Ought and should (when it means ought) are rendered into French by the conditionnel $ 148) of the verb devoir, to owe. Ought to kave, should have, by the conditiunnel paste. ($ 149.) 590 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (1.) You ought to or should do that. He ought not to speak thus to his father. We ought to go thither earlier. They should listen ti what you say. You should pay more attention to what I say. You ought to have done that. Ho should have managed the thing better than he has done. You should have managed the thing differently. They ought to have managed the thing as I did. We ought to have managed it differ- ently from what they did. You ought to have played on the flute while I was playing on the violin. I wished to do it, but my flute was out of order. He ought to have wished it to you. A stay, a sojourn. To make a stay. Do you intend to make a long stay in the town ? I do not intend to make a lori.. T stay in it. SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME Tn^ME. Ire Sec. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous n'avez vu 1'avocat 1 ? Oui ; je i'ai perdu de vue. Voyez cet oiseau, comme il est haut ! II est presque a pfrte de vue, (out of sight.) Pourquoi, lui qui a la vue courte, ne porte-t-il pas de lunettes? II ne s'en soucie pas. Vous devriez faire ce que votre mere desire. Je Paurais fait, si j'avais pu; mais quoique j'aie essaye trois fois, je n'ai pas pu reussir. Vous voila deja de retour I Vous auriez du faire un plus long sejour aupres de votre vieille tante. J'y en. ai fait un assez long, ne vous deplaise, (please your honor.) Quei sejour y avez-vous fait? Vous croirez a peine que j'y ai fait un sejour de six semaines et demie. Ce n ? cs ( pas possible ! Si fait, c'est tres-possible. J'etais aupres d'elle le 14 Juitij et je ne I'ai quittee que hier; et vous savez que c'est aujoui- d'hui le 4 d'aout; ainsi comptez. Je ne me le serais pas imagine Vous m'avez perdu de vue sans chagrin. A peasant, (paysan,) having seen that old men, (le vieillard,) tthose sight was bad. used spectacles to read, went to an optician Vous devriez faire cela. II ne devrait pas parler ainsi a sor pere. Nous devrionn y aller de meilleurfl hcure. Us devraient couter ce quc voua dites. Vous devriez faire plus d'attention a ce que je dis. Vous auriez du faire cela. II aurait du s'y prendre mieux qu ? J n'a fait. Vous auriez du vous y prendre d'une maniere differente. Us auraient du s'y prendre commc je m'y suis pris. Nous aurions du nous y prendrt d'une autre maniere qu'ils ne s'v sont pris. Vous auriez du jouer de la flute pen dant que je jouais du violon. Je souhaitais le faire. mais ma flute etait derangde. II aurait du vous le souhaiter. Un sejour. Faiie un sejour. Comptez-vous faire un long sejojti dans la ville ? Je ne compte pas y faire un long se"- jour. SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) 391 tvn opticien) ani asked for a pair The peasant then took a book, and, having opened it, said the spectacles were not good, (fern.) The optician put another pair of the best which he could find in his shop (la boutique) upon his nose ; but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to him : ' My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all?" " If I could," said the peasant, "I should not want your spectacles." I thought that you would be thirsty; that is the reason I brought you to the apothecary's shop to take a glass of mineral water and syrup. Give us two glasses of mineral water- What syrup. Miss? No matter which, (ri 'importe le qucl ;) I like mem all. I have seen six players (le joueur) to-day, who were all winning (gagner) at the same time, (en meme temps.) That cannot be, for a player can only win when another loses. You would be right if 1 were speaking of people who play at curds or billiards, (06s. 118, 51 1 ;) but I am speaking of flute and violin players, (de joueur s de flute et de violon.) Do you sometimes practise (far, **) music? (de la musique?) Very often, for I like it much. What instrument (06s. 118, 51') do you play? I play the violin, and my sister plays the piano. My brother, who plays the bass, (la basse.) accompanies (accompagner) us, and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds (applaudir) us. Does she not also play some musical instrument ? (un instrument de musique?) She plays the harp, (la harpc,) but she is too proud (fiere) to practise music with us. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. To suspect, to guess. I suspect what he has done. He does not suspect what is going to happan to him. To think of some one or of something. Oi whoii do you think ? I tnink t,f my friend. Do you think often of him her f I do, very often. Of what do you think ? To turn upon. To be the question. It is questioned, it turns upon. The question is not your pleasure, but your improvement. You play, Sir, but playing is not the thing, but studying. What is going on ? Se douter, 1, (de, av. 1'inf.) Je me doute de ce qu'il a fait. II ne se doute pas de ce qui va lui arriver. Penser a, quelqu'un ou d quelquf chose. A qui pensez-vous ? Je pense a mon ami aniie. Y pensez-vous wuvent ? ($ 50, 2.) J'y pense tres-souvent. A quoi pensez-vous ? t S'agirde. II s'agit de. II ne s'agit pas de votre plaisir, mail de vos progres. Vous jouez, Monsieur, rnais il ne e'agit pas de jouer, il a'agit d'etu dier. De quoi s'agit-il f 392 SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. (2.) The question 's to know what we shall do to pass the time agreeably. On purpose. I beg your pardon, I have not done it on purpose, To be silent, being silent, been silent. Da silent, quit talking. Hush, I say. Are you silent ? Do you cease talking ? I om. I do. He is never silent. After speaking half an hour he was silent, he ceased speaking, &c. II s'agit de savoir ce que nous feion* pojr passer notre temps agreable ment. Expris. Je vous demande pardon, je ne I'd pas fait expres. t Se taire,* 4. Se taisant tu. t Taisez-vous. Taisez-vous doCe t Vous taisez-vous ? t Je me tais. II ne se tait jaraais. Apres avoir parle pendant une demi- heure, il se tut. Obs. 161. Could ( 149) is rendered by the conditionnel of pouvoir, (to be able.) Alight, by the conditionnel modified by psut-etre, perhaps. Could have, might have, by the conditionnel passe. Could you speak if you tried ? / might, but I am sure he could. Could you sing before a large audi- ence ? / could not, but Miss B., (could,) might. Could they have danced the Polka ? They might, but I know she could (have danced it.) Could you have played before those great musicians? We could not, but Henry might have played before them. Pourriez-vous parler si vous cs sayiez ? Je pourrais pcut-vtre, mais je suis stir qu'il pourrait. Pourriez-vous chanter devant (49 s , Obs. 116) une grande audience? Je ne pourrais pas, mais Mile. B. (pourrait,) pourrait peut-etre. Auraient-ils pu danser le Polka ? Us auraient peut-etrepu.,ma.is je sais qu'elle Vaurait pu. Auriez-vous pu joner devant ces grands musiciens ? Nous n'aurion* pat pu, mais Henri aurait peut-etre pu jouer devant SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME TlliblE. 2de Sec. Savez-vows ce qu'il aurait fait si je n'avais pas ete ici? Je mo doute de ce qu'il aurait voulu faire. Aurait-il pu reussirl II y serai* peut-etre parvenu. A qui pensez-vous quand vous ne pensez a lien I Je pense a la personne qui fait cette belle question. Do quoi s'agit-i ? II s'agit du musicien, de Phonneur de la famille. De quoi s'agissait-il ? De savoir s'il avail easse le chandelier expres ou non. Moi. je crois qu'il 1'avait fait expres. S'il 1'avail fait expres, il ne pleurerait pas de cette maniere. Ce ri'est que pour nous faire croire qu'il ne Pa pas fait expres. Taisez-vous, vous UT imputez toujours des torts. Je ne me tairai pas pour vous. Laissons cela, et racontez-nous une anecdote. Une ville assez pauvre fit une depense considerable en fetes et en illuminations, a ''occasion du passage ie son prince. Celui-ci en paraissar.t etonne un courtiaau SEVENTY-FIFTH (1.) 398 fa courtier) dit, " Eile n'a fait que ce qu'elle devait a votre majeste/ {< C'est vrai," reprit un autre, " mais elle doit tout ce qu'elle a fait." C'est tres-bien, je ne me doutais pas que vous auriez si bien reussi Je vous remercie du compliment. A. thief having one day entered a boarding-house, stole three cloaks, (le manteau.) In going away he was met by one of the Hoarders, who had a fine laced (galonne) cloak. Seeing so many cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief answered boldly (froidement) that they belonged to three gentlemen of the house, who had given them to be cleaned, (d dcgraisser.) "Then you must also clean (degraissez done aitssi) mine, for it if? very much in need of it, (en avoir grand besoin,") said the boarder; "but," added he, "you must return it to. me at three c'clock." "I shall not fail, (y manquer,) Sir, 37 answered the thief, as he carried off (cmporter) the four cloaks, with which he (qu\') is still to return, (n'a pas encore rapportes.) You are singing, (chanter,} gentlemen, but it is not a time for (il ne s'agit pas de) singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. We are at a loss. What are you at a loss about? I am going to tell you : the question is with us how we shall pass our time agreeably. Play a game at billiards or at chess. (51 1 .) We have proposed joining a hunting-party ; do you go with us? (etes-vous des notres?) I cannot, for I have not done my task yet; and if I neglect it, my master will scold me. Every one according to his liking ; if you like staying at home better than going a hunting, we cannot hinder you. Does Mr. B go with us? Perhaps. I should not like to go with him, for he is too great a talker, (trop bavaid,) excepting that, (d cela pres,) he is a clever man, a fine fellow, (jun excellent hom*ne.) SEVENTY- FIFTH LESSON, 75th.Soixantc-quinzieme Lc$on, 75mt VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. Towards, ("physically,) (morally.) He comes towards me us. tie has behaved very well towards me. We must always behave well towards everybody. The behavior of others is but an echo of our own. If we behave weli towards them, they will also Vers. Envers. II vient vers moi nous. II s'est tres-b ; en comporte cnver* moi. II faut toujours nous bien comportei envers tout le monde. La conduite des autres n'est qu'un echo de la notre. Si nous nous comportons bien envers eux, ila ae 394 SEVENTY FIFTH LESSON (1 J behave well towards us ; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them. To treat or to use somebody well. To use somebody ill. As you have always used me well, I will not use you ill. \s he haa always used me well, I hav? always used him in the same manner. i To delay, (to tarry.) Do not be long before you return. f shall not be long before I return. / long to or for. comporteront bien au^si enters nous; mais si nous en usons inn! avec eux, nous ne devons pas at- tendre mieux de leur part. En user bien avec (juelqu'uK. En user mal avec quelqu^un. Comme vous en avez use touj oura bien avec moi, je n'cn userui prjs mal avec vous. Comme il en a toujours bien use avc moi, j'en ai toujours usd de la meme maniere avec lui. Tarder, 1, (takes d av. 1'inf.t Ne tardez pas d revenir. Je ne tarderai pas d revenir. t ll me tarde . . . (unipersonnel.) Obs. 162. The subject of the verb long, must be rendered in French by ihe indirect object, me, te, lui, nous, vous, or leur. (39 1 , Obs. -90.) I long to see my brother. t II me tarde de voir mon frere. He longs to receive his money. We long for dinner, because we are very hungry. They long to sleep, because they are tired. To postpone, to put off. Let us put that off until to-morrow. Let us put off that lesson until another time. t II lui tarde de recevoir son argent, t II nous tarde de diner, parce que nous avons bien faim. t II leur tarde de dormir, parce qu'iia sont fatigues. Hemcltre,* u. Remettons cela a demain. Remettons cette lecon a une autre fois. SOIXANTE-QUINZIEME THibiE. Ire Sec. Comment Jacques se conduit-il envers ses parents ? II ne se con- duit pas bien envers eux. A-t-il des amis ici ? II n'en a pas, car il se comporte mal envers tout le monde. Qu'aurait-il du faire lors- qu'il me vit? II aurait du s'avancer vers moi et me souhaiter une bonne annee, (a happy new year.) Ne leur tarde -t-il pasde se baigner? (to bathe?) Si fait, il leur tarde beaucoup : mais 1'eau de la riviere est encore trop froide. Ne vous tarde-t-il pas que le courrier arrive 1 (151.) Si fait; maisil me tarderait beaucoup plus si je n'avais pas entendn parler de mon ami. Ne tardez pas a revenir, entendez- vous? Je ne tarderai pas car il me tarde de partir. Rernettrons* nous 1'affaire a demain ? Non, ne la remettons pas; car il "oua tarde qu'elle soit finie. ( 151.) Que voudriez-vous savoir? II noua arde de connaitre le resultat (the result) de Pelection Comment s'est il comporte envers sa femme ? Pendant la lune de miel, il s-est comporte comme il faut. Et ensuite 1 Mal, comme il le fail en vers toutes ses connaissances. SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSOR (2.) 395 As yo i. have always used me well, I will use you in the same manner. I will lend you the money you want, but on condition that trou will return it to me next week. You may depend upon it. How has my son behaved towards you? He has behaved well towards me, for he behaves well towards everybody. His fathei fold him often : The behavior of others is but an echo of our own If we behave well towards them, they will also behave well towards js ; but if we use them ill, we must not expect better from them.-" May I see your brothers ? You will see them to-morrow. As they Dave just arrived from a long journey, (le voyage,) they long for sleep, for they are very tired. What has my sister said ? She said that she longed for dinner, because she was very hungry. I have the honor to wish you a good morning. How do you do ? Very well, at you. eervice. And how are all at home 1 ? Ttlerably well, thank God ! My sister was a little indisposed, (indisposee,) but she is well, (retablie ;) she told (charger de) me to give you her best compliments. I am glad (charme) to hear that she is well. As for you, you are health itself, (la sante meme ;) you cannot look better, (vous avez la meilleure mine du monde.) I have no time to be ill my business (mes affaires) would not permit me. Please (donnez- vous la pcine) to sit down ; here is a chair. I will not detain (dis- (raire) you from your business, (les occupations ;) I know that a mer- chant's time is precious, (que le temps est precieux a un negotiant.) VOCABULAIRE To be at one's ease. To be comfortable. To be uncomfortable. I am very much at mj' ease upon this chr.ir. You are uncomfortable upon your chair. What can that be ? We are uncomfortable in that board- ing-house. That man is well off, for he has plenty of money. That man is badly off, for he is poor. To make one's self comfortable. Make yourself comfortable. To be uncomfortable. To inconvenience one's self. To put one's self out of the way. Do not put yourself out of the way. That man never inconveniences him- self; he never does it for anybody. . 2de Sec. Eire d son aise. tre mal d son aise. Je suis bien a mon aise sur cetto chaise. Vous etes mal a votre aise sur votre chaise. t Qu'est-ce que cela peut Stre ? Nous sommes mal a notre aise da v > cette pension. Cet homme est a son aise, car il a beaucoup d' argent. Cet homme est mal a son aise, par. c qu'il est pauvre. Se mettre d son aise. Mettez-vous a votre aise Eire gene. Se gener, 1. Ne vous genez pas. Cet homme ne se gene jamais; tl ins se gene jamais pour personnc. 896 SEVENTY-FIFTH L2SSO&. V 2.) Can you, without putting yourself to mcontcnience. lend me ten dollars and your gun ? To make entreaties. To beg with entreaty. \ employed every kind of entreaty to engage him to it. To solicit, to press, to sue, to entreat. clere and (here, up and down, all about. Now and then. From time tc tine. Indifferently, (as good as bad.) J have done my composition tolerably well. Pouvez-vous, sans vous gfrjer, me preter dix gourdes, et sans ir.cott' venient me preter votre fusil ? Faire des instances. Prier avec instances. Je Ten ai sollicile avectoutes les in stances possibles. Kolliciter, 1, Par-ci, par-la ; ici et la. De loin en loin. De temps en temps, Tant bien que mal. J T ai fait ua composition tant bien que mai. TiiibiE. 2de Sec. J'ai perdu de vue les enfants :le Madame R . Sont-ils che/ elle ? Ils sont en pension. Comment s'y trouvent-ils? Le fils se trouve mal dans sa pension, il s'en plaint, il n ? y est pas a son aise. Et les fiiles, sont-elles a leur aise dans la leur? Elles s 7 en plain- draient si elles ne s'"y trouvaient pas bien, si elles n'y etaient pas a leur aise. Si vous avez chaud. levez le chassis, (the sash,) mettez-vous a votre aise. Ce medecin est-il a son aise ? II n'irait pas a pied s'ii etait a son aise. Ou allez-vous vous promener? Je vais par-ci, par- la. Quelque fois je morite la rue, d'autre fois je la descends. Voyez-vous M. le general? De temps en temps, de loin en loin. Comment avez-vous fait votre theme? Tant bien que mal. Le commis du negociant fait-il son devoir? II le fait tant bien que mal : mais le negociant r.'en est pas content. Ou sont nos messieurs ? Ils ne se genent pas; ils sont a fumer dans le salon. Les avez-vous pries d'aller fumer dehors? Je les ai pries avec instances de le faire, mais ils n'ont pas envie de se gener. Have you made your French composition ? I have made it. Was your tutor pleased with it ? He was not : for it was difficult, and T made it but indifferently, (tant bien que mal.) Are you comfortable in your fashiorable boarding-house? I am. Is there not too much etiquette there for you ? A little etiquette is necessary. I do not like to be always with people who put themselves too much at their ease y who use no ceremony, (sont sans ceremonie.) When the dog was attacking you, did you not entreat them (prier avec instances de) to Dome to 3 our assistance ? I did earnestly beg them to come, but Jhey would not, (time expired.) Did the dog bite and hurt you much ? He bit me a little here and there. At what o'clock were they tc '36 1 , Obs. 84) play off that game of billiards, before they (28 2 , Obs. 65} put it off? They vere to play it at 6 o'cfek in the morning. Wh? SEVENTY-FIFTH ^ESSON. (3.) S07 diu they postpone it ? They did so, because one of them was obligee to go to New York, but he will return in a day or two. Who got you that situation'? Cousin James did. How do you like to be a clerk? I like it pretty well. What does it bring you 1 N 7 ot much now, because I am not thoroughly acquainted with tho business, but when (46 3 ) I am I shall earn more. Why are you going away so soon ? Stay. I have nothing pressing (de presse a) to do now, my courier is already despatched, (mon courrier cst dejd cxpedie.) I shall not stay any longer. I only wished in passing (en passant par ift) to inquire about your health. You do me much honoi. It is rery fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the pleasure o f seeing you again (revoir*) this afternoon, (cette apres dince,) and if you have time we will take a little turn together. With the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. I will some for you (venir prendre) about (vers) seven o'clock. Adieu, then, ill I see you again. I have the honor to bid you adieu. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. To impart something to somebody. imparted that Have you father ? I have imparted it to him. To look .... to speak in vain. to your In vain 1 looked all around, I saw neither man nor house : not the least sign of settlement. A dwelling, habitation, settlement. In vain I speak, for you do not listen to me. In vain I do my best, I cannot do anything to his liking. Yau may say what you please, no- body will believe you. It is in vain that they earr money, they will never be rich. We seai ch in vain, for what we have .ost we cannot find. To salute, bid adieu, good day, bow. I have the honor to bid you adieu. Present my compliments to him, (to her.) Remember me to him, (to her.) Fairs part de quelque chose d quel- qu'un. Avez-vous fait part de cela a votro pere ? Je lui en ai fait part, t Avoir beau regarder . . . avoir beau parler. J'avais beau regarder tout autour de m)i, je ne voyais ni homme, ni maison : pas la moindre apparence d'habitation. Un-e habitation. J'ai beaa parler, vous ne m'ecoutex pas. J'ai beau faire de mon mieux, je no peux rien faire a son grd. Vous avez beau dire, personno ne vous croira. Us ont beau gagner de 1' argent, lie ne seront jamais riches. Nous avons beau chercher, nous ne pourrons pas trouver ce que noua avons perdu. Saluer, 1. J'ai i'honneur de voua saluer. Dites-lui bien des choses de ma port 398 SEVENTY- FIFTH LESSEN. (3.) Pray present my compliments to your sister. Remember me (present my compli- ments) to him, (to her.) I shall not fail. The present, >'the present time or tense.) The past. The future. The loss of time. Enjoy all the pleasures that virtue permits. Je vous prie de faire mes compii ments a Mademoiselle votre SOJUT Presentez-lui mes civilites, (me tres-humbles respects.) Je n'y manquerai pas. Le present. Le passe. L'avenir, le futur. La perte da temps. Jouissez de tous les plaisirs quo la vertu perniet. SOIXANTE-QTJINZIEME THEME. 3me Sec. Bon jour, Mile., j'espere que vous vous portez bien ! J'ai 1'hon- neur de vous saluer, M. Je suis bien portante, je vous remercie. En effect, vous avez tres-bonne mine. Et vous, vous etes la sante meme. Vous voulez-vous moquer de moi! car, je suis a demi- mort. Nori, vraiment, je trouve que vous avez tres-bonne mine, Vous avez beau dire, Mile., je sens que je ne suis pas la sante meme. Vous, M., vous avez beau dire, vous ne me ferez pas croire que je n'y vois pas. Avez- vous fait part a quelqu'un de la nouvelle dont je vous ai fait part hier 1 ? Oui, j'en ai fait part a mon cousin, et je me proposals d'en faire part a quelqu'autre personne. Ktait-ce un secret? Non pas exactement. M. F. est riche, est-il de la bonne societe? Non, il a beau etre riche, on ne veut pas 1'y admettre. Le fils du consul a perdu beaucoup de temps; mais il peut le reparer s'il s'applique. Vous avez beau dire, la perte du temps est irreparable. On a dit avec verite : II n'est permis d'etre avare que du temps. That ofd woman is always scolding, (est toujours d grander ,} in vain I do my best. No one can do anything to her liking. You may say what you please; no one will believe you. It is true, nevertheless. Can /oj, without putting yourself to inconvenience, lend me one hundred dollars ? As you have always used me well, I will treat you in the same manner, and will lend you that sum. Have you imparted to your brother what I told you to tell him ? As he was very tired, he longed to go to sleep ; so that I have postponed imparting it to him till to-morrow. Will that do ? Yes, it will. The loss of time is an irreparable loss. A single minute cannot be recovered (se recouvrer) for all the gold in the (dit) world. It is, then, of the greatest importance to employ well the time, which consists (consister) only of (en) minutes, of which we must make good use. We have but the present; the past is no longer anything, (n'est plus Tien,) and the future is uncertain, (incertain.) A great siaiiy people ruin themselves (se miner} because they wish to SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (!.] 399 fcdulge themselves too much, (a force de vouloir se faire du tnen.) if most men (la plupart des hommes) knew how to content them selves (secontenter de) with what they have, they would be happy but their greediness (leur avidite) very often makes (rendre) them unhappy. In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble ourselves about (ne pas s'inquieter de) the future, and enjoy the present. 1 was very much dejected (triste) when my cousin came to r le, (vint me trouver.) " What is the matter with you ?" he asked mo. " Oh, (ah !) my dear cousin," replied I, " in losing that money I ha*e lost everything." " Do not fret," said he to me; "fci I have found your money." SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON, 76th. Soixante-seizieme Le$(m } 7omc. VOCABULAIRE. Ire Sec. Do you read ? Are you reading ? I do. I am. They Are they making a noise ? are (making one). Is she coming ? She is. Were you scolding ? I was so. Will he not be dressing himself? Yes, he will. To mean. What do you mean ? I mean what I was saying. What does that man mean ? Nothing. lie means nothing. What does that mean ? What does : " Je suis d Zj/e," mean ? That means : I am reading. That does not mean anything. I do not know what that means. To be dost. To be particular. \ do not like to deal with that man, for he is too particular. To grow impatient, to Jret. Do not fret about that. To tit ip, to watch. I am sitting up. I have sat up all night. j Lisez-vous ? Je lis. Etes-vous a lire ($ 144 6.) Je suig a lire. Sont-ils a faire du bruit ? Us sont a en faire. Est-elle a venir ? Elle est a venir. Etiez-vous a gronder ? J'etais a le faire. Ne sera-t il pas a s'habiller ? SI fait. Vouloir dire. t Que voulez-vous dire? t Je veux dire ce que j'etais a dire, t Que veut dire cet homme ? Rien. t II ne veut rien dire, t Que veut dire cela ? Qu'est-cc que cela veut dire ? t Que veut dire : Je suis a lire t t Cela veut dire : I am reading, t Cela ne veut rien dire, t Je ne sais pas ce que cela veut diro. t Y regarder de pres. t Je n'aime pas a faire des affaires avec cet homme , car il y regarde de trop pres. t S' impatient er de. Ne vous impatientez pas de cola. Veiller, 1. Je suis a veiller. J'ai veilld toute la nuit. ioo SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) To advise He is advising him to . . . The dress, the costume. An elegant dress. To dress o?ie's self. That man always dresses well. To find fault with something. That man always finds fault with everything he sees. Do you find fault with that ? I do not find fault witii it. A trick, (a turn, a round." T; play a trick. To play a trick upon some one. To take a turn. I have taken a turn round the garden. He has taken a couple of turns round the garden. To take a little turn. To travel through Europe. More (meaning) besides. Conseiller, 1, de . . II es. a le eon seiller de . . . La mise. Une'mise elegante. Semettre* 4. Get homme se met toujours bien. t Trouver d redire d quelque chose. t Get homme trouve toujours a redi'f a tout ce qu'il voit. t Trouvez-vous a redire a cela? t Je n'y trouve rien a redire. Un tour. Jouer un tour. Jouer un tour aquelqu'un. t Faire un tour, t J'ai fait un tour de jardin. t II a fait deux tours de jardin. t Faire un petit tour. t Faire le tour de 1' Europe. De plus. (30 1 , Obs. 71.) (Aprcs < nom ou nombre.) Vous m'avez donne trois livres, mttis j'en veux trois de plus. De mains. Beaueoup de moins. Trois de moins. Trois de trop. You have given me three books, but I want three besides. Less. Many less. Three less. Three too many. SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME THME. Ire Sec. Ah ! vous voila. Oui, c'est moi-meme. Venez-vous de faire un -etit tour ? Non, je viens du magasin de M. D., ou je voulais acheter des gants de peau (kid) mais je n'ai pas pu. Et pourquoi done? n'en a-t-il pas'? Si fait, il en a de superbes; mais il y regarde de trop pres. Que voulez-vous dire par cela? Ce que je veux dire? C'est tout simple, (it is plain.) Je veux dire qu'il vend cher et qu'il ne veut rien rabattre. Je sais qu'il n'a qu'un prix; mais je ne croia pas qu'il y regarde de trop pres. N'avez-vous pas trouve a redire a son prix ? Si fait, et je lui ai dit qu'il demandait 12 sous et demi de plus que les autres marchands. Et vous lui avez peut-etre offert 25 sous de moins que son prix ? Non, mais 12 sous et demi. Alors, ne vous plaignez pas : ne trouvez pas a redire a sa conduite, cai n ; y regardez-vous pas d'aussi pres que lui ? Moi ! y regarder d'aussi pres que lui ! Jean, qu'es-tu a faire ? Je su's a nettoyer mon fusil. Quo fait Anne ? Ne Pentendez-vous pas ? Elle est a pratiquer son piano et a chanter. Est-ce elle qui est a pratiquer? Je croyais que p'etait Julie qui etait a le faire. Anne a fait beaucoup de progres iepuis que je ne 1'ai entendue. SEVEN TV-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 401 Did you mean to say that you and your cousin Henry arc going 62 3 , 06s. 148) to make the tour of Europe ? No, I meant to say :hat he and I are going to make the tour of the United States of North America. De VAmerique du nord, are four words too many, United States is enough. You like to find fault; but who is that young lady so elegantly dressed ? (mise si elegamment ?) Is it not the one whc. was drinking a glass of mineral water at the corner ? Oh ' it is not the same. She looks like her. At any rate (apres tout) she has on an elegant dress. She is walking, (d marcher.) How well she walks! Now she is laughing. How pretty are her teeth ! Hush! h-.;sh! you make me mad (vous m'impatientcz) with your exclama- tions ! Hush yourself. You have no taste. What does that mean, Sir? That means that although you dress ($151) well yourself, yoi are too particular about other people's dress. Do not play a trict upon me. I will not play one upon you. Why have you played a trick upon that man ? Because he ahvayi finds fault with everything he sees. What does that mean, Sir* That means that I do not like *o deal with you, because you are- toe particular. I wonder why your brother has not done his task. L was too difficult. He has sat up all night, and has not been able to ao it, because it was too difficult. Why are you so sad ? You do not know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend, (fern.) Tell me, for I assure you that I share ( partager) your sufferings (la peine) ae- well as your pleasures. I am sure that you feel for me, (prcndre* part d mes peines,) but I cannot tell you now (en ce moment) what makes me uneasy. J will, however, tell you when an opportunity offers, (d ^occasion.) VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. My, his, her reach. The child's reach. Within my reach. Out of my reach Those things are not within the reach of everybody. Within gun-shot. A gun-shot, (meaning distance.) Two gun-shots, ( " .) How many shots have you fired ? I wonder wl 7 that man makes such n noise ? So long as. So long as you behave well, people will love you. To cun j oft Ma, sa porfee. A la portee dfe 1'enfant. A ma portee. Hors de ma ported. Ces choses ne sont pas a la portee de tout le monde. A la ported du fusil. Une portee de fusil. Deux portees de fusil. Combien de coups de fusil avez-vcus tires ? (48 2 .) Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi C9t homrne fait un tel bruit ? Taut one. Tant quo vous vous comporterei bien, on vous aimera. Enle" who spoke tne French language with fluency and elegance, (cou- rammcnt et avec elegance.) "Good heaven, (Mon Dieu!) is it possi- ble 1 ? 5 ' exclaimed he, "that even children here speak the French language with purity, (la purete. n ) Let us seek (rechercher) the friendship of the good, and avoid (eviter) the society of the wicked (le mechant ;) for bad company corrupts (Ics mauvaises societes corrompent] good manners, (les bonnes fiiaurs.) What sort of weather is it to-day? It snows continually, (toujours } ) as it snowed yesterday, and according tc all appearances, will also snow to-rnorrow. Do you think it will snow ( 151 5) to- morrow also ? I hope it will, for I am always very well when it is very cold. And I am (et ?noz, jc me porte) always very well when it is neither cold nor warm. It is too windy to-day, and we should do better if we stayed at home. Whatever weather it may be, (Quel- que temps qu'il fasse. $ 151 11,) I must go out; for I promised to be with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my word, [tenir* parole.) VOCABULAIRB. Sme Sec. See ($ 151) and study it carefully, and make a Jist of the antecedents as they occur. It seems you are angry, (you appear.) I II semble 1 que vous soyez fache (R. 4.; You appear angry, (to be angry.) I Vous semblez fache, (etre fache.) The subjunctive is employed in the first sentence because il sembleis used unipersonally ; but not being used so in the second, the indicative is employed. Is it sufficient that you and I should complain of it ? Yes, it is sufficient that we complain of it (for us to complain.) So that neither she nor they must complain. Let him come if he wishes. Let them wait if they have a mind. Let Julius write the btter, and you will carry it. Suffit-il que vous vous en plaigniez et que je m'en plaigne ? Oui, il suffit que nous nous en plai- gnions. Ainsi ni lui ni eux ne doivent s'en plaindre. (77 1 , N.) Qu'il vienne s'il veut. ($ 150 7.) Qu'ils attendent s'ils en ont envie. Que Jules ecrive la lettre, et vous la porterez. 05s. 164. Wo saw ( 150 7) that the 3d pers. sing, and plur. of the impera- tive wore like the same persons of the present of the subjunctive, cons^ q'jently, we can now use those persons of the imperative without difficulty. Il semble, it seems, is also construed with the indicative when it has an indirect object, as : It seems to me that you are angry ; il me semble que tyyr:a ea facU. It seems to thee, il te semble, I lui semble, &c., to him 01 fror, &c. SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (3.) 413 Let him have the goodness to hold it. Let Sophia receive her reward. Where do you prefer him to buy the candy ? Let him buy it at the grocer's. Watch the bird. Take care it does not run or fly away. Let them mind it. Aek Betsy to tell the cook to cook the salt fish. I doubt her being able to cook it, for her coal fire is almost out. ($ 151-2.) I wish you may succeed. I doubt that he is arrived. (R. 2.) I wish to be obeyed. I wish him to be told so. He wishes me to have patience. I doubt his being at home. (R. 2.) I fear we shall have a storm. He denies having done it. He complains of your having ill- treated him. I am very sorry for your having done it. regret that you should have been obliged to wait. Y"ou will approve of my not going thither. He disapproved of your having said it. Wha do you wish these men to buy ? Qu'il ait la bonte de le tenir. Que Sophie reoive sa recompense. Oil preferez-vous qu'il acheto lc candi ? Qu'il 1'achete chea 1'6'picier. Veillez 1'oiseau. Prenez garde qu'il nes'enfuie, (ne s'en aille, s'envele.) Qu'ils y prcnnent garde. Priez Lisette de dire a la suisimero de faire cuire le poisson sale. Je doute qu'elle puisse le faire cuire, car son feu de char bo n est presquo eteint. Je desire que vous reussissicz. Je doute qu'il soil arrive. Je veux qu'on m'oficissc. Je souhaite qu'on le lui disc. II veut que j'ate patience. Je doute qu'il soil a lamaison. Je crains que nous it'ayons un orage. II nie qu'il Vait fait. II se plaint que vous Vayez mal- traite. Je suis au dusespoir que vous Vaye* fait. Je regretfe que vous ayez etd obligfi d'attendre. Vous trouverez bon quo je n'y aille pas. II a trouve mauvais que vous Z'ayca dit. Que voulez-vous que ces hommes achctent ? Que voulez-vous qu'il reponde? Vous attendez-vous a ce qu'il vous donne ses marchandises pour rien ? Que voulez-vous que je boive ? What do you wish him to answer ? Do you expect him to give you his goods for nothing ? What do you want me to drink ? SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME TuibiE. 3me Sec. Suffit-il que vous le disiez pour qu'on le croie ? N'est-il pas suffi ant que je le disc pour qu'on le croie? Merite-t-il qu'on 1'attende? ( 151 2.) S'il merite qu'on 1'attende ! Sansdoute qu'ii le merits! S'il a pDrdu le feuillet, qu'il le rctrouve, } (find it again.) Qu'il le 1 The syllable re prefixed to a French verb, corresponds in English to i tack, again, anew, or re. Venir, revenir, to come back , porter, reporter, to carry back or again; trouver, retrouver, to find a,ain ; voir, revoir, to ecf tgain ; renouveler, to renew; doubler, redcublcr, to redouble, &c. ; con- tiderer, reconsidcrer, to consider again or anew. 14 SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. (4.) retrouve ! c'est plus aise a dire qu'a faire. Qu'il essaie, Tenaz- rous bien la flute ? Prenez garde qu'elle ne tombc. Je la tien& bicn. Je prendrai garde qu'elle ne tombe. II est impossible que le counier ne soit pas encore arrive ! Pourquoi Salomon reste-t-ii si long-temps'? II est possible que la neige ait empeche le courrier d'arriver a Pheure ordinaire. II est possible que cela soit; maia j'espere qu'il n'en est pas ainsi. ($ 151 2.) Je 1'espere aussi, maia ayons patience jusqu'a ce que Salomon revienne. Quelque desir qiiC vous ayez d'avoir vos lettres, ot quelqu'importantes que les nou- velles puissent etre, il faut que nous attendions avec patience. Vous en parlez bien a votre aise. J'attends sans m'impatienter. Have you corrected Louisa's exercise ? Yes, I have. How many mistakes had she ? She had but three or four. But three or four ! That is a good deal for her. The exercise must nave been very hard, (difficult.) (77 1 , N.) It was. She is the most attentive and studious pupil I have. Are you not afraid we shall have ( 151 6) a storm ? I am afraid we shall have a violent one. See, how black tne sky is at the west ! Are you glad that I did it, and that he could not do it? (62 2 , N. 1.) I am glad you did it; but I am sorry that he could not do it. Let the girl go (06s. 164) to the apothecary's. What do you wish her to purchase? I want her to buy some perfumed soap, and to ( 151 9) put it in my desk. What must we bring you from the country ? Is it necessary that you should go? We have promised to go. Would you not be astonished if we did not keep our promise'? ($ 148, N. 3.) You come late; you have made us wait a longtime. We regret that you have been obliged to wait. How long have you been waiting'? Never mind the time we have already lost, let us lose no more ; but let us finish our affair quickly, so that (a/in que, 151) we may go home. It seems you are a little cross, (un peu de mauvaise humeur.) It does not suit you, Sir, to find fault with me, when the fault is yours. Come. Let us have done. VOCABULAIBE. 4me Sec. I believe he Is in the right. Do you believe that horse is worth a hundred crowns ? J> do not believe that it is worth a hundred crowns. I hopo he will come. l>o r nQt that Aon pas que, > Will you stay here until 1 can go out with you ? I will go out before he comes back. If you had what you have not, you would be rich. I sent you my book, that you might read it. Unless you accompany her, she will not go out. Though your children were idle, yet they improved. it a man had ever so little acquaint- ance with another, he was bound to take a part in the dispute, and venture his person as much as if he had himself been angry. Be it as it may, they will not go. Though she was little and bad-look- ing, she was nevertheless amiable. Nonobstant que, Pose que, Pour que, Pour peu que, Pourvu que, Quoique, Sans que, Si peu que, Soit que, Suppose que, for all that, no; withstanding thai, suppose that. that, in order lhat. if ever so little, hen little soever, provided, save that, though . , . without . . nowevcr little, whether, suppose that. Voulez-vous rester \c\jusqu a, ce que je puisse sortir avec vous ? Je sortirai avant qu 'il ne revienne. En cas que vcus eussiez ce que vous n'avez pas, vous seriez riche. Je vous envoyai mon livre, ajin que vous le lussiez. A mains que vous ne Uaccompagniez, elle ne sortira pas. Bien que vos enfants f us sent pares- seux, ils faisaient des progres. Pour peu qu'un homme fut connu d'un autre, il fallait qu' il entrdt dans la dispute, et qu'il paydt de sa personne, comme s'il avait ei^ lui-meme en colere. Quoiqu'ii en soil, ils n'iront pas. Quoiqu' elle fut petite et qiCelU e*t mauvaise mine, elle ne laissait paa d'etre aim able. Je ne la voudrais pas pour femmo, quoiqu'elle soit riche, et qu 1 elle ait beaucoup d'esprit, parce qu'ello n'a pas bon cceur. Pourvu quevoiiB soyez de rnes amis, je suis content. Soit que vous ayez raison ou tort. 1 would not have her for a wife, though she is rich, and has a great deal of wit, because she is not good-hearted. Provided you are my friend, I am satisfied. Whether you are right or wrong. SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIEME THME. Ire Sec. Preferai,-il que je le fisse? Non, il ne preferait pas que vous le fisslaz. Ne pre fere rait -il pas que vous y allassiez ? Non, mais il orefererait que ses neveux y allassent. Jerome n'etait-il pas un assez bon domestique ? Si, quoiqu'il oubliat quelque fois de fcrrnei aes portes. Niait-il qu'il ne 1'eut fait? Non, il ne le niait pas. - Se plaigni'.-il que vous. lui. et moi, nouseussions tout mange 1 Non, 418 SEVENTH-NINTH LESSON ^2.) il ne se plaignit pas qne nous eussions tout mange, mais il a'ea etonna. Ne se souciait-ii pas que vous vinssiez ? II aurait, an coritraire, beaucoup desire que je vinsse, mais il ne se souciait paa quo ces enfants-la vinsserit. N'exigedtcs-voi\s pas (require) que nous le promissionssur le champ? Je ne m'en souvienspas. Est-ca que j'exigeai que vous le promissiez? Etait-il a ecrire quand vous 1'appelates 1 Pourquoi votre ami ne vient-il pas a cette heure- ci ? II faut qu'il soit a etudier. M. de Turenne would never buy any thing on credit of tradesmen, (ti marchand,) for fear, he said, they should lose a great part of their money, if he happened to be killed All the workmen who were employed about his house had orders (avail ordre) to bring in their bills (un memoir e) before he set out ($ 152) for the campaign, (se mettre* en campagne,) and they were regularly paid. You will never be respected (respecter) unless you forsake (abandonner) the bad company you keep. You cannot finish your work to-i:ight, unless I help you. I will explain to you (expliquer) every difficulty, that you may not be disheartened (decourager) in your undertaking, (unc enterprise.) Suppose you should lose your friends, "what would become of you ? In case you want my assistance, call me ; I shall help you. A wise and prudent man (un homme sage et prudent) lives with eco nomy when yonng, in order that he may enjoy the fruit of his labour when he is old. Carry this money to Mr. N., in order that he may be able to pay his debts, (une dette.) Will you lend me that money ? I will not lend it you unless you promise to return (rcndrc) it to me as soon as you can. Did the general arrive? He arrived yesterday morning at the camp, (le camp,) weary, (/as,) and tired, (harasse.) but very seasonably, (tres-d propos;) he immediately gave his orders to begin the action, though he had not yet all his troops. Are your sisters happy ? They are not, though they are rich, because they are not contented. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. THE PERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Parfait du Suljonctif) is formed 5y the present of the auxiliary and the past participle. Il requires an ante- cedent. f must have sent them there. She mast have come early. Although he has not dressed himself. Don't you hope the thief has been taken ? II faut que je les y ai envoyes. II faut qu'elle soit venue de bonne heure. Quoiqu'il ne se soit pas habilie*. N'esperez-vous pas que le voleu: ei! ete pris ? it combines wiih the piesent and the future of the Indicative. ($ 151 SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. (2.) 419 II ne viendra pas quoique je I'aie invite. Ircns-nous (irions-nous) sans quo nous soyons (fussions) invite's ? Elle a (avail) toujours bonne mine, si pen ^w'elle soit (fut) habiil^e. Je ne crois pas qu'il se soit rejoui dti la bonne nouvelle que nous avcno regue. H will not come al hough I have invited him. Shall (should) \\3 go without being invited? She always look" (looked, well, how- ever little she may (might) be dressed. I do not think he rejoiced at the good n TE vc have received THE PLUPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Plus que parfait du us ormed from the imperfect of the auxiliary and the past participle of ano- Iher \erb. ($ 151 12.) It combines with the past tenses and conditionnels. Before I had loved. Avant que j'cussc aime". Before she had departed. Avant qu'elle fut panic. Before they had gone away. Avant qu'ils s'en fussent alles. Although you had been seen. Quoique vous eussiez >Jte vus. He deserved to have been punished. II meritait qu'on 1'eut puni. He was exercising the functions of II remplissait les fonctions de consul, consul, although his nomination had quoique sa nomination n'eut pae not been ratified by the senate. I etc sanctionn^e par le senat. Cfcs. 166. Some conjunctions govern the indicative when the sen ence affirms positively that the thing in question is or will be, and the subjunc- tive when it is not certain, or only wished for. They are the following: Defa$on que. De maniere que. ~\ De sorle que. En sorte que. [ So that, in so much that. Tdiement que. Sinon que.. You behave in such a manner that you are loved by everybody. Behave in such a manner that you may be loved. Except that. Ind. Vous vous conduisez quevous etes aime de tout le monde. Subj. Conduisez-vous de fa$on que vous soyez aimc. SoiXANTE-DIX-NEUVltMB TlifiMR. 2de Sec. Guillaume est-il a lire dans sa chambre ? Non, il etait a jouer de la flute dans le jardin avant que vous entrassiez. Qu'est-il a faire maintenant ? II faut qu : il soit a se promener dans le bosquet, (grove. ) Faut-il que j'aille Pappeler 1 ? Non, qu'il s'y promene; mais en cas qu'il revienne bientot, vous lui direz que je desirerais qu'il s'habillat pour sortir avec moi. S ; il cut su (had he known) que vous desiriez qu'il sortit avec vous, il se serait deja habille. Ccla ne pi csse pas, (there is no hurry.) II aura le temps de se preparer avant quo je sois prete moi-me~ie. Pour peu que vous eussiez attendu co matin, vous auriez pu voir le general, car vous etiez a peine sorti ^u'il est rentre. Puis-je avoir le plaisir de le voirl Non, il est 4:20 SEVENTY-^INTH IESSCV. '3.) encore sorti. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que vous attendiez * Si /ail pourvu que vous soyez sur qu'*l rentrera bientot. Although they have a good memory, that is not enough to lears any language whatever, (yuelque langue que ce s&it ;) they must make use of their judgment, (le jugemenl.) Behold how amiable that ladj is; for a 1 . 1 , that she (quoiquCelle) has no fortune, I do not love her ths less- V ;11 you lend me your violin? I will lend it you, provided you return it to me to-night. Would your mother call upon me ? She would, provided you would promise to .ake her to the concert I shall not cease to importune (importuner] her, till she has forgiven Pie. Give me that penknife. I will give it you, provided you will not make a bad use of it. Shall you go to London ? I wi}) go. pro- vided you accompany (accompagner) me : and I will write again \recrirc*) to your brother, lest he should not have received my letter, Where were you during the engagement? I was &\ bed to have my wourds (une blessure) dressed, (panser.) Would to God (Plut a Dieu) I had been there ! I would have conquered (vaiKtre) or per- ished, (perir.) We avoided an engagement for fear we should be taken, their force being superior (supericure) to ours. God forbid (d Dieu ne plaise, with the subjunctive,) I should blame your coriduc but your business will never be done properly unless you do it your- self. Will you set out soon ? I shall not set out till I have dined. Why did you tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew the contrary ? You are so hasty, (prompt,) that however little you are contradicted (contrarie) you fly into a passion (s'emporter) in an instant. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. Since you know him and are respon- sible for him. ($ 1519.) Unless you are attentive, and do your task regularly, you will not learn. If your friend were here, ana would call upon me. ($ 151 10.) Fi he loved me, and sincerely wished my welfare. II' anybody come, ar.d I should not be at home, send h: me. H your brother -writes to you, and you are satisfied with Ais letter, I beg of you to let me know it. Be industrious, that your parer's may be satisfied. ( 15110.) Ind. Des que vous le connaissez et que vous repondez de lui. Subj. A moms que vous ne soyea attentif, et que vous nefassiez rd- guliercment votre devoir, vous n'apprendrez pas. Si votre ami etait ici, c* qn'il voulut venir me voir. S'il m'aimait, et qu'ildtsir&t sincere ment mon bonheur. Si quelqu'un venait, et qv* jc nc fusse pas a la maipon, envcyez-moi chercher. Si votre frere vous ecrit, et que vous soyez content de sa lettre, je voue prie de m'en faire part. Appliquez-vous, que \os parent! soient contents, (qfin out.) HEVE>l"i-NlrfTH LESSON. (3) 421 Whether 1 leader write, it is always found fault with. I can say nothing without your know- ing it. Do not begin before I give you no- tice. He is never punished unless he has deserved it. Wait till your Cather returns. Queje Use ou quefecrh e, on y tro jve toujours a redire, (soit que.) Je ne puis rien dire que tu ne k saches, (sans que.) Ne commencez pas que je ne voua avertisse, (avant que.) Jamais on ne le punit qu'il ne Vait merite, (d mains que.) Attendez que votre pere revtenna (jusqu'd ce que.) SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVIEME THME. 3me Sec Puisque vous allez de ce cote-la, et que vous passez devam la boutique de 1'apothicaire, arretez-vous-y et dites-lui de nous envoyei une boite de poudre minerale. Je le ferai avec plaisir. A quehe heure faut-il qu'il 1'envoie ? N'importe a quelle heure, pourvu que ce soit avant Pheure du coucher, (bed-lime.) Quoiqu'il n'apprit pas facilement, et qu'il n'eut guere de temps, il faisait des progres. Oui, parce qiril etait attentif et studieux. Si vous eussiez ete aussi indus- trieux que votre cousine, et que vous vous fussiez mieux applique, n'eussiez-vous pas appris davantage? Quoiqu'il fut a faire une partie d r echecs, et qu'il eut presque gagne, il la quitta des qu'il apprit que sa sceur desirait qu'il 1'accompagnat. Ne commencez pas qua je ne vous en avertisse, et que je ne vous envoie un autre crayon. Je n'y manquerai pas. Should your father not arrive to-day, and if you want money, 1 will lend you some. I am much obliged to you. Have you done youi task ? Not quite ; if I had had time, and if I had not been so uneasy about (de) the arrival (Varrivee) of my father, I should have done it. If you would study and be attentive, I assure you that you might learn the French language in a very short time. He who wishes to teach an art, must know it thoroughly, (dfond;) he must give none but clear (precise) and well-digested (digerer) notions (la notion) of it; he must instil (faire entrer) them one by one into the minds (dans V esprit] of his pupils, and above all, (surtout,) he must not overburden (surcharger) their memory with useless or unimportant (insignifiant) rules. My dear friend, lend me a louis. Here are (en void) t\vo instead of one. How much obliged I am to you, (que d' obligations je votu !) I am always glad when I see you, and I find my happiness iff pours. Is this house to be sold? Do you wish to buy it? Why not? Do you think it is a good house, and that it is worth 7000 dol.ars? I do not think it is. Why was not your sister studying' 1 ! d etudicr?) She would have been studying if she were not alway 422 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (I.) BO absent, (distrai. ) I like pretty anecdotes; they season (assai^i* ner f conversation, (la conversation,) and amuse everybody. Pra) relate me some. Look, if you please, at page 148 of the book whici I lent you, and you will find some, EIGHTIETH LESSON, 80th. Quatrc vingtieme Le$on. 80m.-. VOCABULAIBK. Ire Sec. SUBJONCTIF Continui. Quelque, whatever, whatsoever, however, is connected in thret ways. (U51 11.) However good you are or may be, (1st way.) However cross (peevish) she may have been. However rich they were, (might be.) However rich she might have been. However elegant they thought them- selves. Whatsoever courage you may have, he has more than you. ($ 151 11.) Whatsoever patience we may have, we will never have enough. Whatsoever riches he may have, he will soon see the end of them. Whatsoever kindness I have had for him, I never shall have as much as he merits. Whatsoever faults you may make, I will take care to correct them. Vhatever may be the happiness which you enjoy, I am happier than you. ($ 151 -11.) Whatsoever may be the fortune which you enjoy, you may lose it in an instant. Whatsoever may be the efforts which you make, you never can succeed. Whatsoever may be the pains which you take, no one will be under obligations to you for them. Vhatever, wJiatsoever, (mean'Qg all thing* soever.) Quelque bor ^ue vous soyez. Quelqu'acariatre qu'elle ait et6. Quelque riches qu'ils fussent. Quelque riche qu'elle cut pu etre. Quelqu' elegants qu'ils se erussent. Quelque courage que vous ayez, il en a plus que vous. Quelque patience que nous ayons^ nous n'en aurons jamais assez. Quelques richesses qu'il ait, il en verra bientot la fin. Quelque bonte que^'ateeue pour lui, je n'en aurai jamais autant qu'il lo merite. Quelques fautes que vous fassiez, j'aurai soin de les corriger. Quel que soil le bonheur dont vous jouissiez, je suisplus heureux que vous. Quelle que soit la fortune dont vous jouissiez, vous pouvez la perdrc en un instant. Quels que soient les efforts que vous fassiez, vous ne pouvez jamais reussir. Quelles que soient les peines qiie vous preniez, on ne vous en aura aucune obligation. Quelque chose q:ie, or quoi que ce sort EIGHTIETH LESSON (1.) 425 Whatsoever you may do for my fa- tncr, ho \vill reward you for it. ($ 15113.) I complain of nothing whatsoever. Of whomsoever you may speak, avoid slander. ($ 15113.) 1 know nobody who is so good as you are. <$ 1515.) I have seen nothing that could be blamed in his conduct. Whatever his projects might be. they did not succeed. ($ 15111 > Quelque chose que (or quoi que} voul fassiez pour mon pere, il vous re"- compensera. Je ne me plains de quoi que ce soit. De qui que ce soit que vous parlie^ evitez la me'disance. Je ne connais personne qui soit aussi bon que vous. Je n'ai rien vu qu'on puisse blamer dans sa conduite. Quels que fussent ses projets, ila n'ont pas ivussi. QUATRE-VIJSGTIEME Tii&viE. Ire Sec. Qu'est il a faire secher ? II est a faire secher ses souliers ; mais quelque soin qu'il prenne a le faire, 11 ne reussira pas de long-temps. De combien de manieres peut-on exprimer en Franc, ais : Whatever riches you possess ? De deux manieres, je crois. Quelles sont- elles? Quelque richesse que uous, ne faut-il pas employer le sub- tonctif apres quclque ? Si fait, il faut Pemployer. Alors on doit dire: Quelque richesse que vous possediez. Quelle est la seconde maniere ? Quelle que soit la richesse que vous posscdiez. N ? y a-t-il oas une autre maniere ? Pas que je sache. Comment peut-on exprimer en Franc ais, However rich you may be 1 Oh ! mais ce n'est pas la meme chose que: whatever riches you possess? Non. ce ne sont pas les memes mots ; mais n'est-ce pas la meme significa- tion ? Alors, on peut dire : Quelque riche que vous soyez } n'est-ce pas ? Sans doute. Un peu de jugement est la seule chose qui soit necessaire. You must have patience, though you have no desire to have it ; for I mup* also wait till I receive my money. Should I (en cos que) receive it to-day, I will pay you all that I owe you. Do not believe that I have forgotten it; for I think of it every day. 1 Or did you be- lieve, perhaps, that I had already received it? I did not believe that you have already received it; but I feared that your other credit- ors (le crjancier] had already received it. You wish you had more time to study, and your brothers wish they did not need to learn. Would to God you had what I wish you, and that I had what I wish. Though we have not had what we wish, yet we have almost always been contented ; and Messieurs B. have almost always been discontented, though they have had everything a reasonable man (un homme raisonnable) can be contented with. Do not believe > Madam, that I have had your fan, (un eventail.) Whc tells you thai 1 believe it 7 My brother-in-law wishes he had not had what he 424 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (2.) has had. Wherefore '\ He has always had many creditors, and no money. I wish you would always speak French to me j and yoc must obey, if you wish to learn, and if you do not wish to lose youi lime uselessly, (inutilcment.) I wish you were more industrious (ossirfu) and more attentive when I speak to you. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. The superlative followed by qui or que, ($ 1513.) Y >u are the most amiable lady I Vous etes la dame la plus aimaMa que je connaisse. C'est 1'homme le plus extraordinaire que faie jamais vu. Vous etes les eleves les plus studieui que fate jamais eus. La meilleure g^rde qu'un roi puitst arc know. (* 1513.) lie is the most extraordinary man that I have ever seen. You are the most studious pupils I have ever had. The best guard a king can have is the heart of his subjects. | avoir, c'est le cceur de sea sujets. An ordinal number followed by qui or que. ($ 151 3.) Me is the first man who has dared to tell me so. You are the second amiable lady that I have met with in this town. C'est le premier homme qni ait os6 me le dire. Vous etes la deuxieme dame aimable que j'aie rencontrce duus cetic ville. The words le seul, V unique, the only one, &c. ($ 151 3. You are the only one upon whom I can rely. I want an office the duties of which may be easy to fulfil. ($ 15114.) I have an office of which it is easy to fulfil the duties. I aim at a situation that may be agreeable and lucrative. I aim at a situation that is an agree- able and lucrative one. She is the handsomest woman of those that were at the opera. I do not know any of the persons who called on you this morning. [ hope you will say nothing of what I have intrusted you with. i have read the second volume of the work which you nave lent me. May heaven ever preserve you from such a misfortune. ($ 151 15.) Would to God. Vous etes le seul sur qui je compter. Je desire une place dont les fopct ; -jn> soient aisles a remplir. J'ai un emploi dont il est aise de remplir les fonctions. J'aspire a une place qui soil agre" able et lucrative. J'aspire a un emploi qui est agrd able et lucratif. C'est la plus belle des femmes qui etaient a 1'ope'ra. ($ 151 14.) Je ne connais aucune des personnca qui sont venues chez vous c*5 matin. J'espere que vous ne direz rien de ce que je vous ai confie. J'ai lu le second volume de que vous rn'aven pretd. Fasse le Ciel que pareil malheur vous arrive jamais. PKit a Dieu. Plut au Ciel. EIGHTIETH LESSON. V 3.) 438 Would to God it were so ! t Plut a Dieu qu il en fut ainsi I Would to God he had done it ! | Plut a Dieu qu'il i'eut fait ! QUATRE-VINGTIEME TuibiE. 2de Sec. M. J. B, m'a ecrit un billet, dans lequel il me dit: Quoique Tar- gent soit rare et qu'on n'en obtienne que difficilement, je voua envoie un bon (check) sur la banque, pour la somme dont vous avez bosom. Puisqu'il en agit ainsi, il s'ensuit qu'il est mon ami. ($ 151 4.) Quel est le plus beau don que Dieu ait fait a I'homme 1 I. Evangile esi ie plus beau present que I'homme ait rect. de Dieu. Si la vie et la mort de Socrate sont d : un sage, que peut-on dire de la vie et de la mort de Jesus-Christ I Que ce sont celles d'ur dieu. Arrive-t-il sou vent qu'on soit trompe par ses amis? II n'ar- rive pas souvent qu'on soit trompe par eux. On est souvent irompe par de faux amis; mais il est rare qu'on le soit par de vrais amis. If I were not your friend, and if you were not mine, I should not speak thus to you. Do not trust (mcfiez-vous de) Mr. N., for he flatters you: do you think a flatterer (un flattcur] can be a friend I You do not know him as well as I, though you see him every day. Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father has offended me. Oh ! here he is coming, (le voild qui vient,) you may tell him all yourself. What do you think of our king ? I say he is a great man, but I add, that though kings be ever so powerful, (puissant } ) they die as well as the meanest (vil) of their subjects. Have you been pleased with my sisters'? I have; for howevei plain (laide) they may be, they are still very amiable ; and however learned (savant) our neighbor's daughters may be, they are still sometimes mistaken. Is not their father rich ? However rich he may be, he may lose all in an instant. Whoever the enemy may be whose malice (la malice) you dread, (apprchender,) you ought to rdy (se rcposer) upon your innocence; but the laws (la loi) condemn (condamner) all criminals, (un criminel), whatever they may be. Whatever your intentions (une intention) might be, you should have acted differently, (differ emment.) Whatever the reasons (la raison) be which you may allege, (alleguer,) they will not excuse youi action, blame able in itself. VOCABULAIRE. 3me Sec. Plut a Dieu que tons les grand* seigneurs aimassent la paix ! Plut au Ciel que nous ne fussioni to God that all great lords loved peace! ($ 151 15.) Would to God we may never he more unhapy . jamais plus malheureux: Vlny you be happy ! I Puissiez vous etre heureux! Though it cost me all I have, I shall ! Dut-il m'en couter iout co /jue je 426 EIGHTIETH LESSON. (3.) possede, je saurai me pr<5scrv01 d'un semblable rnalheur. 1 Fussent-ils a cent lieuesd'ici, j'iraii les chercher. 2 know Lew to preserve myself from such a rr-'sfortune. ($ 151. 15.) Biould 'aey be a hundred leagues hence, I would go for them. 06s. 166?. It is essential for foreigners to observe, that in the Fren^l. lan- guage the construction with the infinitive is preferable to that, with the sub- junctive, whenever the former may be employed without ambiguity, that ie, when the sam English subject is repeated. (2S 2 , Obs. 65.) Say, there ibre : I come (in order) to see you ; not : { Je viens pour vous voir; and not : 1 come that 1 may see you. ( Je viens pour que je vous vote. f Je ne crois pas pouvoir sortii demaih ; I do not think I shall be able to go J and not : out to-morrow. \ Je ne crois pas que je puisse aorta 1 v demain. I shall marry a woman who will please me. ( 15114.) I shall marry a woman who must please me : or, the woman I shall marry must please me. lere is a book for you which you may consult occasionally. jrive me a book that I may be able to consult occasionally. Lend me that book, which you do not want. Lend me a book which you :nay not be in want of. Do not leave a place where you are comfortable, and whence you hear well. Choose a place where you may be comfortable, and whence you may hear well. 2nd. J'epc.. serai une femmc qui me plaira. Sulj. J'epouserai une femrne qui me Ind. Voila un livre que vous consulter au besoin. Subj. Donnez-moi un livre que je puisse consulter au besoin. Ind. Pretez-moi ce livre, dont voua rfavez pas besoin. Subj. Pretez-moi un livre dont vous n'ayez pas besoin. Ind. Ne quittez pas une place oik vous ties commodement, et d'o vous enlendez bien. Subj. Choisissez une place ou VOMS soyez commodement, et d'ow voub entendiez bien. THEME. 3me Sec. L'homme, en general, peut-il lever un fardeau (burden) de 300 livres "? Quelques hommes peu vent lever des fardeaux beaucoup plus pcsants (heavy) ; mais il y a peu d : hommes qui puissent en lever un de 300 livres. Avons-nous du riz ? Nous en avons un peu. mala 'e ne crois pas que nous en ayons assez. Faut-il que j'en achete iih sac? Non, un boisscau (bushel) sera assez. Pensez-vous qu'un boisseau dure jusqu'a ce que le riz nouveau paraisse ? Je pense que oui. La recolte de riz (crop] peut etre mauvaise; ne vauirail-il pas 1 Instead of Quand meme il devrait m'en couter tout ce gut )e fcc. Si meme il devait m'en coxiter, fec. 2 Quand meme its scraienl d cent lieues d'ici, (J-c. S'ils EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON, (l ) 427 mieux que nous en achetassions plus d'un boisseau ? Comme la recolte de ble et celle de mais ont ete bonnes, la difference de piix ne pourrait pas etre considerable, en c a .s ($ 151) meme que la recolte de riz vint a manquer. Cependant, faites comme voua voudrez. Non ; je ferai comme il vous plaira. pourvu que vous mo le chsiez. Whatever may happen to you in this world, never murmur (mur- wtfrer) against Divine Providence, (la divine providence ;) for what- ever we may suffer, we deserve it. Whatever I may do, you are never satisfied Whatever you may say, your sisters shall be punished, if they deserve it, and if they do not endeavor to amend, (Jamcnder.) Who has taken my gold watch? I do not know. Do not believe that I have had it. or that Miss C. ha& had your silver snuff-box, (la tabatiere,) for I saw both in the hands of your sister when we weje playing at forfeits, (au gage touche.) To morrow 1 shall set out for Dover; but in a fortnight I shall be back again, (revcnir,*) and then I shall come and see you and your family. Where is your sister at present? She is at Paris, and my brother is at Berlin. That little woman is said (on dit) to be going to mairy General (le general) K., your friend; is it true "? I have not heard of it. What news is there of our great army ? It is said to be lying (etre) between the Weser (le Veser) and the Rhine, (le Rhin.)A\\ that the courier told me seeming (paraitre) very probable, (vraisem- blable,) I went home immediately, wrote some letters, and departed for London. EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON, 81st. Quatre-vingt-uueme Le^on, Sim*. VOCABULAIRE, Ire Sec. Just a little, ever so little. Will you do me the favor of giving me a piece of bread ? Do you wish a great deal ? No, just a little. Tant soil peu. Voulez-vous me faire le plaisir de me donner un morceau de pain ? En voulez-vous beaucoup ? Non, tant soil peu. i.tFdfeMMh To make the best of. 1'hat man does not know how to make the most of his talents. 1 hat man turns his monsy to account in trade. How do you employ your money ? t Get homme ne sail pas faire valji* ses talents, t Get homme fait valoir son arg ni dans le commerce. 1 Comment faites-vous valoir \ j :rt argent ? I employ it in the stocks ) t Je le fais valoir dans les foads pv.b I turn it to account : .n the sto( ks. ) lies. EIGHTY-FIRS! LESSON. (1.) la it not proper that he should claim his rights ? Let him claim them. To boast, to brag. i do not like that man, because he boasts too much. Notwithstanding that. For all that, although. That man is a little bit of a rogue, but notwithstanding he passes for an honest man. Although that man is not very well, he notwithstanding works a great deal. Although that woman is not very pretty, still she is very amiable. Although that man has not the least talent, yet for all that he boasts a great deal. Although that tavern-keeper's wife is rather swarthy, yet for all that she turns the business to good account. Provided you write on the 3d, and put your letter in the post-office before 11 o'clock, I will receive it on the 5th. To go back, to return. The top, the upper part. Upper Canada. The bottom, the lower part. Lower Canada. Up to the top. To the very bottom. The eldest brother. The eldest sister. He is the eldest. She was the eldest N'est-il pas a propos qu'il fasse veloi ses droits ? Qu'll les fassc veloii t Sefaire valoir. t Je n'aime pas cet homm.3 pare* qu'il se fait trop valoir. S Ne laisser pas de. Cet homme est tar.t soil pea .rlpon, mais il ne laisse pasde pusser poul honnete homme. Quoique cet homme ne soil pas bits portant, il ne laisse pas de tra- vailler beaucoup. Quoique cette femme ne soil pas bien jolie, elle ne laisse pas d'etre for! aim able. Quoique cet homme n'ait aucun ta- lent, il ne laisse pas de se faire beaucoup valoir. Quoique la femme de cet aubergiste soil tant soil peu basane'e, elie ne laisse pas de faire valoir le bouchon. Pourvu que vous e"criviez le 3, et e,ue \ous mettiez votre lettre a lo poste avant 11 heuree > je la re cevrai le 5. Retourner, 1. Le haut. Le Haut Car.; ja. Le bas. Le Bas Canada. Jusqu'en haut. Jusqu'en bas. Le frere aine. La soeur ainee. C'est 1'aTne. C'etait 1'amee. TnibiE. Ire Sec. Mon cafe n'est pas assez sucre, veuillez me donner tant soil peu plus de sucre. Avec plaisir. II faut que vous aimiez votre cafe bien sucre, car je crois y avoir mis deux cueillerees (spoonfuls) de sucre. Que vous y ayez mis ($ 151 10) deux cueillerees o>; non, Is cafe n'etait pas assez sucre. II est possible que je n'y en aie mis qu'une, Serait-il etonnant que vous n'y en eussiez pas mis du tout? ">ui, vraiment; il serait tres etonnant que j'eusse oublie d'y en met- re. Cela ne vous arrive-t-il jamais 1 ? Pas tres-souvent, je vous assure. Je le crois. Je peux dire, sans me faire valoir, que jo suls au fait de ma bcsogne. (business.) Ce n'est pas d'aujourd'hui quo jy m'en apertjois. Vous connaissez Mile. Eloise, n'est-ce pas? N'est- EIUHT Y-FIRST LESSON. (2.) 429 elle pas aimable? Quoiqu'elle ne soit ni jolie ni spiritirjlle, (witty,) clie ne laisse pas d'etre tres-aimable. Where are the two Misses Vignette ? They have not yet returned from Europe. You are acquainted with them, are you not ? I know Iho eldest only. Is it possible that you do not know both of them' When arc they to return"? They will not return before their com- pany has visited Italy and the upper and the lower Rhine. Although Theodore B is younger than his brother Henry, for all that he ; s 0.; talented (a autant dc talents) as his elder brother, (son fr*re aine, or simply son aine.} Whither shall you go next year? I shall go to England, for it is a fine kingdom, (le royaumc,) vhere I intend spending the summer on (a) my return from France. Whither shall you go in the winter ? I shall go to Italy, and ihence (de Id) to the West Indies, (aux Indes occidentals , ou aux colonies^ but before that I must go to Holland to take leave of my friends. What country do these people inhabit? (habiter?) They inhabit the south (le midi) of Europe j their countries are called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and they themselves are Italians, Spaniards, or Portuguese ; but the puople called Russians, Swedes, Poles, and Hungarians (Hongrois) inhabit the north and east of Europe; and the names of their countries are Russia, Sweden, Poland, (la Pologne,) and Hungary. France is separated (separer) from Italy by (^ar) the Alps, (les Alpes,) and from Spain by the Pyrenees, (les Pyrenees.) VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. To appear, to seem, seeming, seemed, appear. Let him appear. I appear, thou appearest, he appears. To keep, to maintain. My keeping or maintenance. My keeping costs me six hundred francs a year. To drive in, to sink. To converse with. A conversation. To spare, save, lay ip, put by lOOOf. Spare your money. To get tired. To be titcd. To handle. To lean against. Para!tre,*4, paraissant, paru, par aissez. Qu'il paraisse. Je parais, tu parais, il parait. Entretenir,* 2. Mon entreticn. Mon entretien me coute six cents francs par an. Enf oncer, 1. S'entretenir* avec. Un e-ntretien, une conversation. pargner, 1. Sauver mille francs, fipargnez votre argent. Se lasser, (de bef. inf.) fitre las; fern, lasse, (de bef. inf.) Manier, 1. S'appuyer, 1. 1 The word Colonies, is more used by the French than, Indes occidentals f, West Indies,) which is the book-word; just as in New York they say the North instead of the Hudson river, &c. East Indies, (book word) Indet (colloquial) Les Indes ou les Grandea Indes. 430 EIGHTY-FIRST LfcSSON. (2.) Lean against me. "^ean against the wall. To aim at. Short. To step short Virtue is amiable. ($ 15.) Vice is odious. Men are mortal. Gold is precious. Corn is sold at a crown a bushtl. Beef costs four pence a pound. The horror of vice, and the love of virtue, are the delights of the wise Appuyez-vous su.r inoi. Appuyez-vous coutre la muiaillc. Coucher enjoue. Court. S'arreter tout court. | La vertu est aimable. I Le vice est odieux. Les hommes sont mortels. | U or est precieux. Le bl6 se vend un e'en le boisseau, Le boeuf coute quatre sous la livre. L'horreur du vice, et 1' amour de \ vertu, sont les delices du scge. man. England is a fine country. | L'Angleterre est u i beau pays. 06s. 167. The definite article is ilso used before the names of kingdoms, countries, and provinces.- ($ 15.) Italy is the garden of Europe. The dog is the friend and companion of man. L'ltalie est le jardin de 1'Europe. Le chien est Z'ami et le compagnon de Z'homme. Obs. 168. The articles are repeated in French before every substantive, and agree with it in gender and number. (Dir. 2.) Thessaly produces wine, oranges, lemons, olives, and all sorts of fruit. He ate the bread, meat, apples, and cakes ; he drank the wine, beer, and cider. Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are valuable endowments when heigh- tened by modesty. The longer the days the shorter the nights, and the longer the nights the shorter the days. ($20012.) La Thessalie produit du vin, det oranges, des citrons, des olivos, et toutes sortes de fruits. II a mangd le pain, la viands, lea pommes, et les gateaux ; il a bu lo vin, la biere, et le cidre. La beaute", Zes graces, et Z' esprit, sont des avantages bien precieux, quand ils sont releve"s par la nioclcstio. Plus les jours sont lon^ plus Ice nuits sont courtes, et plus ies nuits sont longues plus lea jours sont courts. QUATRE-VINGT-UNIEME Tn&ME. 2de Sec. Plus vous paraissez vous amuser, plus il parait s'amaser aussi. (200 12.) Le vaisseau a louche, (grounded.) n'est-c pas dom mage ? II est dommage qu'il ait echouej (echouer, 1, to ground,) mais je ne crois pas que nous courions aucun danger. Oh! vcyez comme il s'enfonce! N'ayez aucune peur. Plus il s'enfoncera dans le sable moms nous courrons danger de chavirer, (upset.) C'est Tra*. p/iis il eritrera dans le sable moins il y aura de danger cju'il 1 Except when preceded by en or de. Ex. Tirai en Ad Magne a mot tetour de France, T shall go to Germany on rty return from F.ance. EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON, (l ) 481 chavire, a moms qu'il ne s'enfonce entierement. Ne craignez pas cela. J'ai grana' peur. Appuyez-vou-s sur moi. Je vous lasserai, je vous fatiguerai. Qu'est-ce qui est aimable, la vertu ou le vice ? Qu'est-ce qui est odieux? Qu'est-ce qui est precieux? Qu'est-ce qui se vend un ecu le boisseau ? Vous avez vlsite 1'Angleterre , c'eat un beau royaume, n'est-ce pas ? Though the Mahometans (le Mahometan) are forbidden the use of wine, (dtfcndre quelque chose d quelqu'un,) yet for all that some of them drink it. Has your brother eaten anything this morning'? Ho has eaten a great deal j though he said he had no appetite, yet for all that he ate all the meat, bread, and vegetables, (les legumes,) and drank all the wine, beer, and cider. Are eggs (un auf } dear at pre- sent ? They are sold at six francs a hundred. In case they are cheaper to-morrow, buy a hundred. Do you like grapes? (ie rai- sin?) I do not only (non seulement) like grapes, but also plums, (une prune,) almonds, nuts, and all sorts of fruit. Though modesty, candor, and an amiable disposition (Vamabilite) are valuable endow- ments, yet for all that there are some ladies that are neither modest, nor candid, (candide,) nor amiable. The fear of death and the love of life being natural to men, they ought to shun (/wr*) vice, (le vice,) and adhere to (s'attacher d) virtue. What does your living oost you a year? Do you spend less than your eldest brother? The less you will spend the more you will save ; are you not of my opinion 1 Are you taking aim at that small bird? Is it worth killing? Was not the last scholar who recited obliged to stop several times, and finally to stop short? Was it not a pity? Did he not appear very modest, although he was talented ? The more I sang the less embarrassed I felt, (etais, ou je me sentais.) Is it so with you ? EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. Quatre-vingt-deuxieme Le$on } VOCABULAIRE. Ire See. To give occasion. Do not give him cause to complain. To leave it to one. \ leave it to you. A good bargain. To stick 01 to abide by a thing. I abido by the offer you have made me. not doubi but you are my friend Donner lieu, (de before infin.) Ne lui donnez pas lieu de se plaiirjn t S'en rapporter d quelqu'un. t Je m'en rapporte a vous Un bon marche*. t 5" en tenir a. t Je m'en tiens a 1'oflre qur peut s'en aller. Qu'il s'en aille, s'il craint qu'il pleuve. Si vous le araignez aussi, pretez-lui un parapluie. Je n'en ai pas a lui preter. Faut-il que je prenne le votre ? II ne faut pas que vous preniez le aeuf. parce que vous savez que Jean est un ctourdi, (giddy boy;) et il pourrait le perdre, mais prenez le vieux, et qu'il s'en aille bien ifite, ou plutot qu'il attende, car la pluie a commence. Est-tl probable que ce ne soit qu'ime ondee ? (shower ?) II me parait qra ee ne sera qu'une ondee. A quelle heure faut-il qu'il soit ici? Nefaut-il pas que je finisse !e paysage avant de ra'en aller 7 - EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) 435 Qu'elle le dise cm non, je n'en crois rien, et vous? N est-il pas a dejeuner'? N'etaient-elles pas a coudre 1 Si vous ne venez qu'a cinq heures au lieu de trois, ils ne pourront pas sortir avec nous, parce qu'a cette heure-la ils seront a reciter leurs legons. DIALOGUE. The Master. If I were now to ask you such questions as I did in the beginning of our lessons, viz. (telles que :) Have you the hal which my brother has ? am I hungry ? has he the tree of my brother's garden ? &c. What would you answer ? The Pupils. We are obliged (etre force) to confess that we found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confidence in the method you follow, we answered as well as the small quantity of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were, in fact, not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But new that we can almost keep up a conversation in the beautiful language which you teach us, we should answer: It is impossible that we should have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot have one and the same thing. To the second question we should answer, that it is impossible for us to know whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we should say : that there is more than one tree in a garden ; and in asking us whether he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logically correct. At all events we should be ungrateful (ingrat) if we allowed such an op- portunity to escape, without expressing (temoigncr) our liveliest gra- titude to you for the trouble you have taken. In arranging those wise combinations, (la combinaison,) you have succeeded in ground- ing us almost imperceptibly (impcrceptiblement) in the rules, and exercising us in the conversation, of a language which, taught in any other way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties. EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. Quatre-vingt-troisicmc Lccon, S3m* "V OCABTJLAIRE. Ire Sec. it lacks a quarter. | t II s'en faut d'un quart. It lacks a half. Hdw much does it want ? It d3as not want much. it wants but a trifle. t II s'en faut de la moitie. Combien s'en faut-il ! II ne s'en faut pas beaucoup. II s'en faut de peu de chose. i36 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (1.) It lacks but an inch of my being as tall as you. It lacked a great deal of my being as rich as you. In a foolish manner, at random. il talks at random like a crazy man, a fool, or a drunkard. To rcsor t to violence. A fact. It is a fact. Else, or -slse. To make fun of. To contradict, to give one the lie. Should he say so, I would give him the lie. His actions belie his words. To scratch, To escape. I fell from the top of the tree to the bottom, but I did not hurt myself much. I escaped with a scratch. The thief has been taken, but he will escape with a few months imprisonment. By dint of. By dint of labor. By too much weeping. You will cry your eyes out. [ obtained of him that favor by dint of entreaty. That excepted. That fault excepted, he is a good II s'en faut d'un pouce quo je soil aussi grand que vous. II s'en fallait de beaucoup que js fusse aussi riche que voua. t A tort et d travers. II parle a tort et a travers ccmme via fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne, En venir aux voies de fait. Un fait. C'cst un fait, Ou bien. Se moquer de. Dementir quelqu'un. S'il disait cela, je le dementirais. Ses actions dementent ses paroles. figratigner, 1. t En etre quitte povr. J'ai tombe du haut de 1'arbre en baa, mais je ne me suls pas fait beau- coup de mal. J'en ai Gt6 quitte pour me egra- tignure. Le voleur a ete pris, mais il en serj quitte pour quelques mois de pri- son. t A force de. t A force de travail. t A force de pleurer. t A force de pleurer, vous perdrez les yeux. t J'obtins de lui cette faveur a force de prieres. t A cela pres. t A ce defaut pres, c'est un bon homme. QUATRE-VINQT-TEOISI^ME THlhlE. Ire Sec. Avez-vous toute la somme ? II s'en faut d'un quart que je ne 1'aie. D'un quart, avez-vous dit 1 II s'en faut presque de la moiue. Seriez-vous satisfait de la de ce que je possede ? Ce que j'ai et la \ de ce que vous possedez, me rendraient riche. Vous ne pensez pas a ce que vous dites, y pensez-vous ? Est-ce que je parle jomme un fou, un sot, ou un ivrogne? Pour peu que vous soye/ ivrc ; vous parlez comrne un sot ou comme un fou. Je vous remercie du compliment, Vous etes le bienvenu, car vous le meritez autant que qui que ce soil. Croyiez-vous etre aussi grand que Rochamp'i Oi.i, je le croyais, mais 1'autre jour, quand je me tirsdebout aupres de lai, je vis que j'etais de beaucoup plus petit, De combien do EIGHT Y-T-HIRD LESSON. (2.) 437 pouces etes-vous plus petit? II s'en faut de trois pouces au inoins quo je ne sois aussi grand que lui. Ne querellez plus avec lui autrement vous en viendrez aux voies de fait. Si vous ne votilez pas que je me querelle avec lui, il faut rempecher de se moquer de moi. Je tacherai de le faire. Do you not often contradict Henry when he relates something': I do only when he says incredible, (incroyable,) inconsistent, (incon- sistant,) or false things. ( 2007.) What do you think of Mrs. A 1 Her company, her conversation, is agreeable enough; only, she exaggerates too much ; that excepted, she is a pleasant lady. Your ancle will not grant what you want. I hope he will, by dint of entreaty. You will entreat in vain, (beau prier ;) you will not obtain it. Never mind, I will ask whether I obtain it or not. Will you be my guest I (manger avec quclqu'un.) I thank you; a friend of mine has invited me to dinner: he has ordered (faire pre- parer) my favorite dish, (un mets favori.) What is it? It is a dish of milk, (du laitage.) As for me, I do not like milk-meat : there is iiothing like (il ri*y a rien tel qu') a good piece of roast beef or veal. What has become of your younger brother? He has suffered shipwreck (faire naufrage) in going to America. You must give me an account of that, (raconter quclque chose.) Very willingly, (volon- tiers,) Being on the open sea, (en pi cine mer,) a great storm arose. The lightning struck the ship and set it on fire, (le mil en feu.'} Tho crew (I'equipage) jumped into the sea to save themselves by swim- ming. My brother knew not what to do, having never learned to ewim. VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec. To vie with each oilier. Those men are trying to rival each other. Clean. Clean linen. The more as. The less as. I am the more discontented with his conduct, as he is under many obli- gations to me. I am the less pleased with his con- t A Venvie, (fun de i 1 outre.) t Ces hommes travaillent a 1'envic, (1'un de 1'autre.) Propre. Du lingo propre ou blanc. D'autant plus 'que. D'autant moms que. Je suis d'autant plus mecontent de sa conduite, ^w'il m'a beaucoup d'obligations. Je suis d 1 auta.nl moins satisfait dees duct, as I had more right to his | conduite, ^ej'avais plus de droitB friendship. j a eon amitie 1 wish that, I should like ... I Je voudrais que . . . ($ 15112.) I wish that house belonged to me. ) t Je voudrais quo cetto maison tir 1 eh^uld like to own that house ) a moi. 138 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (2.) To muse, to think. [ thought a long time on that affair. To be naked. To have the head uncovered. To have the feet uncovered. Rever, 1, (d before noun.) J'ai reve long-temps a cttte affaire Et re nu nue. t Avoir la tete nue. t Avoir les pieds nus. Obs. 169. The adjective *. like demi, (19 2 , N. 3) is indeclinable before the noun, but declinable after. To be barefooted. To be bareheaded. To ride barebacked. To have like to, or to think to have. Etre nw-pieds. Etre ntt-tete. t Aller a poil. t Manquer ou penser. Obs. 169 J. Manquer takes de before the infinitive, but penser dees not. I had like to have lost my money. [ thought I had lost my life. We had like to have cut our fingers. < J'ai manque de perdre mon argent. ( J'ai pense perdre mon argent. Je pensai perdre la vie. Nous avons manque de nous coupei les doigts. II a manque de tomber. II a manque d'etre tue". II a pense etre tue. Peu s'enest fallu qu'il n'ait die tu& II a pense" mourir. A vos trousses. L'ennemi est a nos trousses. t Tomber. La foudre est tombee. La foudre tomba sur le vaisseau. fie was very near falling. He was within a hair's breadth cf being killed. He had liked to have died. At, on, or upon your heels. The enemy is at our heels. To strike, (in speaking of lightning.) The lightning has struck. The lightning struck the ship. QuATRE-VINGT-TROISlEME THlblE. 2de Sec. J'ai plusieurs bons ecoliers dans cette classe. Est-ce qirils etudier.t &. 1'envie Tun de 1'autre? Oui, ils etudient a 1'envie. N'avez-vous pas aussi des ecolieres qui etudient a 1'envie 1'une de 1'autre ? Si fait, j'en ai qui etudient a 1'envie les unes des autres. Etes-voug satisfait (are you pleased) de la maniere dont Leopold se conduit? Non, j'en suis d'autant moins satisfait qu'il avait promis davantage. Ne sorit-ils pas etonnes qu'elle ait agi de cette maniere ? Si fait ; ils en sont tres-etonnes, et ils sorit d'autant plus mecontents, (so much the more displeased,) qu'elle connaissait parfaitement leur opinion.- - Que pensez-vous de mon procesT Je ne m'en suis pas encore occupe. Je voudrais que vous y revassiez un peu. Je suis ci y ieA T er. Mais vous voyez que je suis nu-pieds; il faut que je me chausse, (chausser, 1, io dress one's feet, to put on what is to go on the feet as a part of dre?*.) que je rinisse de n^habiiler, et j'y reverai. Je vousen avertis, je serai a vos trousses jusqu'a ce que voua vous en oocupiez serieusement. Savez-vous que Montcalrne a EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. (3.) 439 j'etre tue? Non, je n'en savais rien. Quel accident ILL est-il arrive ? Comment a-t-il manque d'etre tue ? II est tombe de cheval. I wish that umbrella was mine. Have you none ? No, I wish I had one. (62 2 .) Can you not afford to buy one ? No, I cannot ; fci I was robbed, and was near being killed. How so ? The robbers upset our carriage, and we were all very near being killed. (Feu s'm est fallu que nous n'ayons tous ete tucs.) When were you so neai being killed? It was last week that we were so nearly killed. Were you all rofebed ? Yes, but I was the only one who had much money. My companions had only a few dollars each. I entreated Very hard, but it was in vain. ( J 7 ai cu beau prier, f'a ete en vain.) My brother reflected in vain; he found no means to save his life. He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining en all sides. He hesitated no longer, and jumped into the sea. Well, (eh bien,) what has become of him? I do not know, having not heard from him yet But who told you all that? My nephew, who was there, and who saved himself. As you are talking of your nephew, d propos dc ,) where is he at present l He is in Italy. Is it long since you heard from him ? I have received a letter from him to-day. What does he write to you ? I will tell you by and by. VOCABULAIRB. 3me Sec. The half, the third, the fourth. I La moitie, le tiers, le quart. 06s. 170. These are irregularly formed, but from le cinquivme, the fifth, all others are regular. What is the half of 6 ? It is 3. What is the * of 7 ? It is 3 and *. What is the third of 9 ? It is 3. What is the i of 10 ? It is 3 and *. That of 11 ? It is 3 and f. What is is the J of 12? It is 3. That of 13 ? It is 3 and *. That of 14 ? It is 3 and *. That of 15? It is 3 and I. The | of 12 are 8. The * of 12 are 9. While my brother was on the open eea, a violent storm arose unexpect- edly; the lightning struck the ship, which it set on fire, and the whole crew jumped into the sea to save themselves by swimming. He was struck with fright when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. Quelle est la moitie de 6 ? C'est 3. Cellede?? C'est 3 et demi. Quelle est le tiers de 9 ? C'est 3. Quel est le i de 10 ? C'est 3 et un tiers. Celui de 11 ? C'est 3 et deux tiers (f.) Quel est le quart de 12 ? C'est 3. Celui de 13? C'eat3etunquart (J.) Celui de 14 ? C : est 3 et demi (.) Celui de 15 ? C'est 3 et troia quarts xf .) Les f de 12 sont 8. Les f de 12 sont 9. Mon frere dtant en pleine mer, il sur- vint une grande tempete ; la foudre tomba sur le vaisseau, qu'clle mil en feu, et tout 1'equipage se jcta dans la mer, pour se sauver a la nage. II fut saisi de frayeur, voyant que !? feu gagnait de tous les cotes. 40 EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON (3.) He did not know what to do. He nesitated no longer. I have not heard of him yet An an^cl. A masterpiece Masterpieces. I t II ne savait quel parti prendr. II ne balanc,a plus, t Je n'ai pas encore eu de sea nog Tell<*. Un ange. Un chef-d'oeuvre. Des chefs-d'ceuvre. Obs. 171. Of a word compounded by means of a preposition, expressed understood, the firet word- only takes the mark of the plural. Four o'clock flowers. His cr her physiognomy. II is or her shape. Th i expression. The look. Contentment. Respect. Admiration. Grace, charm. Delightfully. Fascinating. Thin, (slender.) Uncommonly well. His or her look inspires respect and admiration. Des belles- Avertir quelqu'un de quelque clusa To warn some one of something. ) Give notice to that man of his bro- I Avertissez cet homnie du retour di ther's return. I son frere. QuATRE-VlNGT-QUATKliiME TlIlblE. Ire Sec. Un certain roi devant, un jour, faire son entree dans une ville & tkux heures de Fapres-midi, le senat envoya quelques depute {Jcfuhes} pour le complimenter. Celui qui devait porter la parole, n'etant pas accoutume a parler en public, ccrnraenQa ainsi : " Alex- andre le Grand, le Grand Alexandre," et s'arreta tout court. Le roi, qui avait grand'faim, (32 2 ,) dit: "Ah! mon ami, Alexandre le Grand avait dine, et moi, je suis encore a jeun." Ayant dit cea paroles, il continua son chemin vers 1'hotel de ville, ou on lui avait prepare un diner magnifique. Savez-vous deviner les enigrnes (enigmas'?) Je ne les devine pas tres-aisernent. cependant, il m'arrive quelqufe fois de le faire. Vou lez-vous que je vous en dise une courte ? Voyons, dites-la. La voici. Plus il y en a moins fa pese. Plus il y en a moins ca pese Qu'est-ce que cela peut etre ? Je ne peux m'imagiuer ce que c'est. Vous rendez-vous ? (do you give it up ?) Oui, je me rends. Et moi aussi. The emperor Charles the Fifth (Charles-Quint) being one day out a hunting lost his way in the forest, and, having come to a house, entered it to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pre- tended to sleep. One of them rose, and approaching the emperor, told him he had dreamed he should take his watch, and took it. Then another rose and said he had dreamed that his sur- tout fitted him wonderfully, and took it. The third took hia purse. At last the fourth came up, and said he hoped he would not take it ill if he searched him, and in doing it perceived around the emperor's neck a small gold chain to which a whistle (un sifflet) was attached, which he wished to rob him of. But the em- peror said : " My good friend, before depriving me (priver quelqwun dc quelc,nte chose) of this trinket, (le bijou,) I must teach you its virtue." Saying this he whistled, (siffler, 1.) His attendants, (se.s gens,) who were seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunde.rsfruck ( frappe iV etonncment) to behold his majesty in such a state. Bet the emperor, seeing himself out of danger, (/tors dc danger,) said: "These men (void des hommcs qui) have dreamed all that they liked. I vish in my turn also to dream." And after having mused a tew seconds, he said : " I have dreamed that you all four descive JLir,HTY-FOUIirH LESSON. (2.) 443 to be hanged:" which was no sooner spoken than executed before >he house. VOCABULAIKE. 2ie Sec. To follow from it. l\ follows from it that you should not do that. I low is it that vou have come so late ? I do not knov< low it is. flow is it that ne had not his gun ? f do not know how it happened. To clear, to elucidate, to clear up. The weather is clearing up. To refresh. Refresh yourself, and return to me immediately. To whiten, to bleach. To blacken. To turn pale, to grow pale. To blush, to redden. To grow old. To grow young. To make merry. Gay, merry. Mirth. To make one's self merry. Cheer up. He makes merry at my expense. To feign, counterfeit, dissemble, pretend. Never pretend. I feign, thou feignest, he feigns, tie knows the art of dissembling. To procrastinate, to go slow about. I do not like to transact business with that man, for he always goes very slow about it. A proof. This is a proof. To stray, to get Icit, to lose one's) self, to lose one 1 8 /ay. Through. The cannon-ball went through the wall. ran him through the body. QUATRE-VINOT-QUATRIEME Tn^ME. 2de Sec. Un bon vieillard, etant fort malade, fit appeler son epouse, qui encore fort jeune, et lui dit: "Ma chere, vous voyez que ma derniere heure s'approche, et que je suijs force de vous quitter. C'est pourquoi, si vous voulez que je meure en paix, il faut que vous mr tonte un bsau trait (V ) asked where her husband was, when he lay concealed (etre cache) for having been deeply concerned in a con- ipiracy, (pour avoir trempe dans une conspiration,) resolutely (coura- geuscimnl) answered, she had hid him. This confession (un aveu) 446 KIGHTY-F1FTH LESSON. (2., drew her before the king, who told her, nothing but her discovering where her lord was concealed could save her from the torture, [qu'elU ne pouvait echapper d la torture qu'en decouvrant la retraite de son epoux.) " And will that do V> (sujfire*) saic the lady. " Yes/' says the king, " I will give you my word for it.' ; " Then," saya she, " I have hid him in my heart, where you will find him." Which surprising answer (cette reponse admirable} charmed ho* enemies VOCABULAIRE. 2de Sec On both sides, on every side. On afl sides. Allow me, my lady, to introduce to you Mr. G., an old friend of our family. I am delighted to become acquainted with you. I shall do all in my power to deserve your good opinion. Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B., whose brother has rendered such eminent services to your cousin. flow happy we are to see you at our house ! lit is the prerogative of great men to conquer envy; merit gives it birth, and merit destroys it. De part et d'autre. De toutes parts. Permettez, Madame, quejf vouspre- sente Monsieur de G.,comme an- c:x?n ami de notre famille. Je suis charmee, Monsieur, de fa ro votre connaissance. Je ferai tout ce qui sera en mon pou- voir, pour me rendre digne de voe bonnes graces. Mesdames, permettez que je voua presente M. de B., dont Is frere a rendu de si eminents services a vo tre cousin. Ah ! Monsieur, que nous sommes en- chantees de vous recevoir chez nous! C'est le privilege des grands hommes de vaincre 1'envie ; le merite la fait naitre, le merite la fait mou- rir. It is the finest country in Europe. C'est le plus beau pays de /'Europe Obs. 173. The preposition in, connected with a relative superlative, is rendered in French by : de. Candia is one of the most agreeable islands in the Mediterranean. He lives in his retreat like a real philosopher. Ols. 174. Like is rendered by tn when it means equal to. You live like a king. Vous vivez en roi. He acts like a madman. II agit en furieux. To behave like a blunderbuss. Se conduire en dtourdi. Who, where I am, knocks as if he Qui frappe en maitreoii je auicl were master 1 Candie est une lies iles les plus agrea bles de la Mediterranee. II vit dans sa retraite en Tai philo sophe. fix EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. (2.) 447 QUATRE-VINGT-CINQTJIEME Tn^ME. 2de Sec. Quel est le pays le plus etendu, dans lequel, exactemant le meme iangage est employe par la masse de la nation? Ce sont les Etats- Unis. Y paiie-t-on le meme Iangage depuis le Nord jusqu'au sud, et de Pest a 1'ouest? Oui, la masse de la langue est la meme, ce- pei.dant il y a des mots caracteristiques de presqne toutes les locali- ses. Les habitants du Nord peuvent-ils comprendre sans difficulte, le Iangage de ceux du midi, qui demeurent quelque fois a 2500 nriilles'? Oui, ils le comprennent tout de suite ; mais ils ne (absent pas de reconnaitre immediaiement la partie des Etats-Unis ou 1 in- dividu qui leur parle, a repu son education. En est-il de meme en Europe? Non, pas a beaucoup pres, (far from it.) Cnaque pro- vince, chaque comte, chaque district presque, a son Iangage t iarti culler, que les voisins n'entendent pas plus que nos indiens ameri- cains ne s'entendent les uns les autres. Nos indiens ne s'entendent- ils pas tous? Non, chaque tribu a sa langue exclusive, et ces tribus different autant par le Iangage que par le costume, (dress.) Cornelia, the illustrious (illustre) mother of the Gracchi, (des Grac- ques,) after the death of her husband, who left her with -twelve children, applied herself to (sc vouer d) the care of her family, \vith a wisdom (la sagesse) and prudence that acquired for (acquerir*) her universal esteem, (Vestime universelle.) Only three out of (d'entre) the twelve lived to years of maturity, (I'dge mur ;) one daughter, Sempronia, whom she married to the second Scipio Afri- canus; and two sons, Tiberius and Cains, whom she brought up (clever) with so much care, that, though they were generally ac- knowledged (savoir generalemenl) to have been born with the most happy dispositions, (la disposition,) it was judged that they were still more indebted (etre redevablc) to education than nature. The answer she gave (faire*) a Campanian lady (une dame de Campanie) con- cerning them (d leur sujct) is very famous, (fameux se,) and includes in it (renfermer) great instruction for ladies and mathers, That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show, (ctrc passionne pour le faste et I'eclat.) having displayed (Staler) her diamonds, (lediamant,) pearls, (la perle,) and richest jewels, earnestly desired Cornelia to let her see her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously (adraitement) turned the conversation to another subject, to wait the return of her sons, who were gone to the public schools. When they returned, and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the Campanian lady, pointing to them, (monger :) "These are my evvels, and the only ornaments (la parure) I piize, (priser.") And uch ornaments, which are the strength (la force) and support (It 48 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (1.) wulicn) of society, add a brighter lustre (un plus grand lustre] to fair (la becute) than all the jewels of the East, (de V Orient.) EIGHTY -SIXTH LESSON, 86th. Quatre- vingt-sixieme Lepn, 8Cw;e PRESENT OR ACTIVE PARTICIPLE. Participe present. For its use and formation, see ($ 156 ). Study it carefully. VOCABULAIRE. Ire SeC. The house being built, we occu- pied it. Having studied, I recited well. Not having studied, my cousin did not recite as well as I did. Not knowing the name of the gentle- man, I could not write it. The note becoming due on Sunday, it must be paid on Saturday. His brother-in-law's coat fitting him, he put it on. Understanding the language they spoke, I learned their secret. How did you find it out ? By listening to their conversation. Where did you find her purse ? In the bushes, tchile looking for birds' eggs. We saw the fire while crossing. How is the plural of nouns and of adjectives formed ? By adding an s to the singular. How is the present participle formed ? By changing the ons of the first per- son plural into ant. How can they improve their writing ? By copying good copper-plate models. How does it happen that . . . ? How does it happen that he is so small, his parents being so tall ? Il is one of tnose facts we see, but for which we cannot account. As mesmerism, I suppose. La maison etant batie, nous 1'occa pames. Ayant etudie, je recitai bien. JV' ay 'ant pas etudie, mon cousin ne recita pas aussi bien que moi. Ne sachant pas le nom du M.. je ne pus pas 1'ecrire. Le billet icheant dimanche, il faut le payer samedi. L' habit de son beau-frere lui scant, il le mit. Comprenant la langue qu'ils par- laient, j'appris leur secret. Comment le decouvrites-vous ? En ecoutant leur conversation. Ou trouvates-vous sa bourse ? Dans les buissons, en cherchant dea O3ufs d'oiseaux. Nous vtmes le feu en traversant. Comment forme-t-on le pluriel dea noms et des adjectifs ? En ajoutant s au singulier. Comment forme-t-on le participo present ? En changeant le ons de la premiere personne du pluriel en ant. Comment peuvent-ils bonni/ier leur ecriture ? En copiant de bora modeles graves. Comment se fait-il que . . . ' (v> 151. ' Comment se fait-il qu'il soit si petit, son pere et sa mere e'tant &\ grands ? C'est un de ces faits qu'on voit. mais qu'on he peut expliquer. Comme le mesmieneme, ie supposK EIUHTY-SIXTH LESSON. 449 The more you study the more you learn. Do not people learn by studying ? Yes, the more one studies the more one learns. Go up stairs and get me a silk hand- kerchief. Will you choose a good steel pen arid write a letter to Julia ? Piusvousetudie/plus vousapprene* N'opptend-on pas en etudianl ? Si fait, plus on etudie plus on ap- prend. Allez en haut me chercher un mouchoir de soie. Voulez-vous choisir une bonne phrno d'acier pour ecrire a Julie ? QUATRE-VINGT-SIXlfcME TlIKME. Ire SeC. La venture etant cassee, que nous faut-il faire? II nous faut attendre qu'elle soil raccommodee. Plus nous altendrons plus noua nous reposerons, et je vous assure que j'ai grand besoin de repos, car je suis tres-fatiguee ; ne 1'etes-vous pas ? Non, je ne le suis pas du tout. Comment se fait-il que vous ne le soyez pas'? Je ne saia pas comment cela se fait; mais, je ne me sens pas fatiguee, pas le moins du monde. II parait que plus vous voyagez, moins vous souffrez, et moi, au contraire, plus je voyage, plus je souffre. C'est peut-etre, parce que vons aviez peur des derniers chevaux que nous avons eus. C'est vrai, j'en ai eu peur; ils elaient vigoureux et /ringanfs, (frisky,) et je craignais qu'ilsnc prissent lemors aux dents, (would run away.) Moi, je les ai trouves beaux, et voila tout. J'ai trouve qu'ils allaient vite, mais je n'ai pas eu la moindre peur. Quoi ! N'avez-vous pas eu peur quand ils out pris le galop? (began to gallop.) Non ; ce n'etait que le petit galop (hand-gallop or canter.) Votre peur vous a plus fatiguee que le voyage. The more I look at her, the more I admire her, don't you ? (62 3 , N. 1.) No, on the contrary, the more I look at her, the less I admire her face, her manners and voice; but whose handsome carnage is this 1 ? Which one do you mean? for I see several. That dark ejreen carriage, with the driver's seat (le siege du cocher) in white cloth. I see it now, you are right, it is elegant; but I do not know whose it is. Do you see it, Theodore? Yes, I do. Whose is it? I do not know. Do you, Aletta? I neither. ($ 171 9.) Does your cousin Eloise ? She neither. Does any one? (62 3 , N. 1.) No, no- oody here knows it. It looks like a new carriage, and is very tasty, (d'wn gout exquis.) I came down without my parasol ; I must gu back for it. No, no, cousin, I will go up and get it for you, (montei .e chercher.} Where shall I find it? I had it in my hand, so that ! must have left it cither on the bed, the bureau, the toilet, or a chair; vou will certainly find it somewhere in the room. I shall be back in a minute. J cap n/ t play that new polka You will learn it by practising. i60 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) Can you speak while playing on the piano 1 ? Yes, I can speak while playing a tune I know. Could you not speak while playing on the violin? No, I cannot; but I have seen a good many persons that could. Ladies can generally talk while playing the piano, can they not? Yes, as they frequently sing while playing; they do not find it more difficult to speak than to sing. QUATRE-VINGT-SIXI^ME THEME. 2de Sec. POLITENESS. When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis XIV. his man- ners, address, and conversation, gained much on the es.eem ana friendship of that monarch. One day, in a circle of his courtiers, talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy manners, the king offered to lay a wager he would name an English nobleman that should excel in those particulars any Frenchman of his court. The wager was jocularly accepted, and his majesty was to choose his own time and place for the experiment. To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some months, till the courtiers thought he had forgotten it; he then chose the fol lowing stratagem : he appointed Lord Stair, and two of the most polished noblemen of his court, to take an airing with him after the breaking up of the levee ; the king accordingly came down the great staircase at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and corn- ing up to the side of the coach, instead of going in first, as usual, he pointed to the French lords to enter; they, upon this unusual ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honor; he then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and instantly sprang into the coach : the king and the French lords followed. When they were seated, the king exclaimed: " Well, gentlemen, I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager.'' "How so, sire ?" " Why," continued the king, " when I desired yov both to go into the coach, you declined it : but this polite foreigner (point- ing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands of a king, though not his sovereign, than he instantly obeyed." The courtiers hung down their heads in confusion, and acknowledged the justness of his majesty's claim. I cannot see the justness of that decision. The French lords by refusing the honor proffered by the king, (que le roi leur offrait,) dis- played (montrerenf l ess obedience, but more politeness. MILDNESS. The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the comse oi his lifti, commanded admiration from all who knew him ; but in nc EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON (C ) 451 ane instance, perhaps, more than the following. Sir Isaac nad a favorite dog, which he called Diamond; and being one day called out of his study into the next room, Diamond was left behind. When Sir Isaac returned, having been absent but a few minutes, he had the mortification to find that Diamond having thrown down a lighted candle among some papers, the nearly finished labor of many years yras in flames, and almost consumed to ashes. This loss, as Sir Isaac Newton was then very far advanced in years, was irretrievu bte ; yet, without once striking the dog, he only rebuked him with tli is exclamation: li ! Diamond ! Diamond ! thou little knowestthe mischief thou hast done." Zeuxis entered into a contest of art with Parrhasius. The former painted grapes so truly, that birds came and pecked at them. The latter delineated a curtain so exactly, that Zeuxis, coming in, said: " Take away the curtain, that we may see this piece." And finding his error, said : " Parrhasius, thou hast conquered : I only deceived birds, thou an artist." Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes; the birds came again and pecked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a passion, and saying, " My boy must be very badly painted," daubed his face, (lui barbouilla la figure.) The inhabitants of a great town offered to Marshal de Turenne a hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered them : ll As your town is not on the road I intend to march, I cannot accept the money you offer me." A corporal of the life-guard of Frederick the Great, who had a great deal of vanity, but at the same time was a brave fellow, wore a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket-bullet instead of a watch, which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined one day to rally him, said : " Apropos, corporal, you must have been very frugal to buy a watch : it is six o'clock by mine ; tell me what it is by yours?" The soldier, who guessed the king's intention, instantly drew out the bullet from his fob, and said: "My watch neither marks five nor six o'clock; but it tells me every moment, that it is ny duty to die for your majesty." " Here, my friend," said the king, quite affected, "take 'his watch, that you may be able to tell the hwir also." And he gave him his watch, which was adorned with AN AFFECTING NARRATIVE OF THE RECOVERY OF EYESIGHT. The operator, Mr. Grant, having observed the eyes of his blind patient, and convinced his friends and relations, among others the 452 EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) Rev. Mr. Kerswell, that it was highly probable he should be able tc remove the obstacle which prevented the use of his sight; all who knew and had any regard for the young man, or curiosity to be pre- sent when one of full age and understanding received a new sense, assembled themselves on this ocasion. Mr. Kerswell, being particu- larly interested, desired the whole company, in case the blindness should be cured, to let the patient make his own observations, with- out enabling him to discover his friends by their voices. Among several others, the mother, brother, sisters, and a young la iy for whom he had a passion, were present. The work was performed with great skill and dexterity. When the patient first received the dawn of light, there appeared such an ecstasy in his action, that he seemed ready to swoon away in the surprise of joy and wonder. The surgeon stood before him with his instruments in his hands. The young man observed him from head to foot, after which he sii/veyed himself as carefully, and seemed to compare himself, and think they were exactly alike, except the instruments, which ho took for part of his hands. When he had continued in mis amaze- ment some time, his mother could no longer bear the agitations ol so many passions, but fell upon his neck, crying out, " My son, my son." The young man knew her voice, and could tpeak no more *han, "Oh! me, are you my mother?" and fainted. The whole room were, you will easily conceive, busily employed in recovering him, except the young lady who was attached to him, whose agitation was so great that she shrieked in the loudest man- ner; that voice seemed to have had a sudden effect upon him, as he recovered; and he showed a double curiosity in observing her, as she spoke and called to him, till at last he exclaimed : " What has been done to me ? Whither am I carried ? Is all this about me ? The thing I have so often heard of, is this the light? Is this see- ing? Were you always thus happy, when you said you were glad to see each other? Where is Tom who used to lead me? But I could x.ovv, methinks, go anywhere without him." He offered to move, but seemed afraid of everything around him. He was told i>at for some time he must suffer his eyes to be covered, and Tom to lead him as usual, which he consented to with great reluctance. He was at last prevailed on to have his eyes bound, in which situation they kept him in a dark room, until it was judged propel to let the organ receive its objects without further precaution. During the lime of this darkness, he bewailed himself in the most distress- ful manner, and accused all his friends, complaining that some incantatioii had been wrought on him, and some strange magio used to deceive him into an opinion that he b id enjoyed what they '-ailed EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2.) 453 dght. He added, that the impression then let in upon his so'al, would certainly distract him, if he were not so at that present time. After some days, it was thought proper to take the bandage from bis eyes, and the young lady whom he loved was instructed to do it, as well to endear herself to him by such a circumstance, as to ir.cderate his ecstasies, by the persuasion of a voice which had so iroch po-.ver over him as hers ever had. When this beloved object began to take off the binding from hi* eyes, she spoke to him as follows : "My dear William, I am nrw taking the binding off, though, when I consider what I am doin^, I tremble with the apprehension, that though I have from my very childhood loved yoi dark as you were, and though you have conceived so strong a love for me, yet vou will find there is such a thing as beauty, *vhich may ensnare you into a thousand passions of which you are innocent, and take you from me for ever: but before I hazard this, tell me in what mailer the love you always professed to me entered into your heart for As usual admission is at the eyes." The young man answered " Dear Lydia If I am to lose by sight fhe soft emotions which I have always felt when I have heard your voice ; if I am no more to distinguish the step of her I love when she approaches me, but to change that sweet and frequent pleasure for such an amazement as I knew the little time I lately saw ; or, if I am to have anything besides which may take from me the sense I have, of what appeared most pleasing to me at that time, the sight of you, pull out these eyes, before they lead me to be ungrateful to you. or undo myself. I wished for sight only to behold you; pull them out if they are to make me forget you." With these assurances. Lydia was well satisfied. In all his con vcrsation with her he showed but very faint ideas of anything which had not been received at the ears. INTERESTING NARRATIVE. The following is an extract from a letter written by a young mar- ried lady in India, to her mother in England, and must be consi- dered as a beautiful specimen of affection, fortitude, and piety. " About three o'clock we left Rose farm, and at half past five saw Ihe ship coming towards us with many sails set; but before I pro- ceed to say another syllable, I must caution you strongly, and par- ticularly, my dear mamma, against giving way to your feelings, but continually bear in mind that all is past, and I am, thank God, now safe and well, as is my dear brother Frank. The story 1 muft relate js certainly disastrous, and might have been dreadful ; but for the 454 EVGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. (2) mercy of Providence, who in this instance appears to have stretched forth his omnipotent arm to rescue us from a precipitate and shock- ing end (namely, a watery grave), almost miraculously. The cir- cumstances were nearly, as the terrible agitation I underwent would permit my memory its exercise, as follows: The ship was going with a fine breeze at the rate of four miles an hour over (or against) a strong ebb tide running nearly at the same rate ; and, as it was in our favour, we soon came close to the ship, and the officer, keeping watch on deck, seeing who it was, ordered a rope to be thrown, which our boatman caught and fastened to a part of the boat, in order that the men in the ship (as is customary) might pull us to the side ; but Frank, when they began to do so, Hiding the tide too Ptrong, and the progress the ship was making against it, too great for it to be accomplished with facility, called to his chief officer, Mr G., to request the pilot to let fly some particular sail, which request after a little hesitation, was complied with; but Frank, perceiving the difficulty of our coming along side continuing to exist, ordered Mr. G. again to tell the pilot to back the topsails; Mr. G. returned for answer, " The pilot won't, Sir/' Brother then called out to the pilot, John, to whom he personally repeated his request, adding, " For God ; s sake comply, for there is a lady in the boat, and you will certainly pull us under water." I, through the Venetian, saw the pilot 'shake his head, and heard Frank call out to let go the rope, which had been thrown from the ship to us; but the men not executing imme- diately their order, what he had foretold actually occurred; we were dragged under water. Oh ! what a dreadful moment ; no words can express the feelings such a moment creates, and no one, excepi those who have been placed in a similar situation, can conceive the agony, the horror of it. The boat we were in is called a boleah ; it is a large boat with a thing like a house on the top of it; therefore, instead of the cabin being below, as in English pleasure yachts, it is on the deck. When the accident happened I was alone in the cabin with all the baggage, beds, &c. ; my maid was sitting neal the door, and brother was at the further extremity of the boat. He, when under water, let go the rope which fastened us to the ship, and by this means saved every soul but one from perishing, for the Doat, instead of sinking, upset and floated with the bottom upwards. Poor Frank with great difficulty (he cannot swim), from the in- cumbrance of a great coat, got above water, and held on to the bottom of the b< >at. My proceedings inside were attended with more difficulty. I possessed during the whole time entire presence of roiiidj which, though it saved me, addef send HIM an apple, it would be correct to say: send an apple TO HIM. If so, then LUI must be used. But a still better dependence is to be placed on the French verb (self, If it requires the preposition d to govern its indirect object, lui must be used, not otherwise. How is this to be ascertained? By consulting the list of verbs, ($ 1565.) N. B. The same direction applies to the indirect pronoun LEUR, which translates both THEM, and TO THEM. The other objective pronouns do not present the same difficulty, because they are the same, whether direct or indirect, (me, te, nous, vous, 47.) DIR. 4. On Objective Nouns. The preposition connected with an objec- tive pronoun, is sometimes suppressed, or at least connected with the pro- noun so as to form a single word. Ex. J\le, is used for d moi, to me. Lui, for d lui, d eJle, to him, to her, &c. and then both in English and French there is an inversion or change in the position of the pronoun ; which, in English, is placed before the objective case ; while, in French, it is put still nearer the beginning of the sentence, viz : before the verb. Will you give u pencil to me? is the grammatical construction, which, by the suppression of the preposition to, and the inversion it necessitates, becomes will you give me a pencil ? in which me and pencil appear in an inverted order. Voulez-vous me donner un crayon, is the Only way the French have to trans- late both the grammatical and inverted construction ; because the sup- pression of the preposition d, which necessarily takes place, (there being only one object, 51,) forces the pronoun me to be placed before the infinitive donner. But mark this carefully. The preposition connected with the object -ve noun is never suppressed in French, although it is frequently ione in English by means of an inversion. ($ 5H.) The phrase : Give Mary i;i apple, in which there is an inversion, is more used than give an appU <) Mary, although the latter is the true grammatical construction. But ip Fiench it is only the last order that is to be translated, and never the former Donnez une pomme a Marie ; and never : donnez Marie une pomme. I will send John the knife, (the knife \ J'enverrai le couteau a Jean. to John.) She wrote her mother a letter, (a let- ter to her mother.) E.le dcrivit une lettre a sa mere GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 459 Fltow Sarah the piesent I made you. 1'ell Andrew the French of: His horse. Montrez a Sara le present quo jc vous ai fait. Dites a Andre* le Franais de : Ilia horse. Whenever 3011 meet with a similarly constructed sentence, give it its full grammatical extent and translate it. DIR. 5. When you do not know the infinitive of a verb, find it in a dic- tionary, and any of its persons may be formed by the rules given for the for- mation of the different tenses. Dm. 6. A simple sentence consists of a verb and its nominative ; I ad- mire, is a simple sentence. You do so well, is another. A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences, connected by a conjunction or a relative pronoun. I admire what you do so well ; I suppose that you know it. He speaks and writes eloquently. In English, the conjunction that, and the relative pronouns whom, which, that, are usually omitted, as: 1. I believe you know it, (that omitted.) 2. I know the person you call, (whom left out.) 3. I read the book he has written, (which.) 4. He learns the lesson you gave him, (that.) In French, neither the relative pronoun nor the conjunc- tion is omitted. Hence, translate the four sentences above by: 1. Je crois QTTE vous le savez. 2. Je connais la personne QTJE vous appelez. 3. Je Ha le livre Qu'il a ecrit. 4. II apprend la Ie9on QUE vous lui avez donnee. Avez-vous mon couteau ? Je crois QUE oui ; que is used because oui ia equivalent to: j'ai votre couteau; which, being a simple sentence, must be connected by que with the former, je crois, to form the compound sentence Je crois que fai votre couteau, or je crois que oui. (2V.) DIR. 7. Much, many, enough, little, &c., are called adjectives in English, wiien connected with nouns. In French, comlien, beaucoup, assez, pcu, trap, autant, plus, mains, guere, un peu, &c., are considered as adverbs of quantity; and as such, having no affinity with nouns, they require a con- necting link, which is the preposition de. Hence, always use de after beau- coup, combien, &c., before the following noun, and repeat it before every one. When the noun is left out, the partitive pronoun en, placed before the verb, and repeated before every one, takes its place and that of the pre- position de. ($47, N. 4. 12'. 2 &c.) DIR. 8. In English, to form an interrogation with the verbs to be and to have, the pronoun nominative is placed after the verb; for instance, I have, affirmation; by transposition becomes have I? interrogation. You hare, have you ? I am ; am I ? You are ; are you ? &c. This way of forming the interrogation tallies with the genera, ru'e in French, which is to put the pronoun nominative after the verb, not only with the two verbs avoir, to have, and etre, to be ; but with every other verb. So : J'ai, becomes ui-je ? Je suis, suis-je ? Je dois, d~is-je ? Jt "cpoM, le^oif-je? &c. Should the Americans use the same mode of interrogation with othe verbs as they do with to have and to be, students would meet with no diffi- culty; but instead of transposing the pronouns, they retain the affirm ativt form and use auxiliaries, such as do, did, shall, &c. For instance : 1 owe, iooa not become interrogative by saying : owe I ? but by putting fa before 60 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. I owe, as, do I owe ? do I receive f &c., for the present tense. Did 1 VUH I did I reteive? for the imperfect. Shall and will, for the future tense, should, wxild, &c., for the potential, &c. So that when the student wishej to form an interrogation, in French, he naturally looks out for a word cor responding to the auxiliary, do, or did, or shall, &c., and feels much disap oointed when told there is none. It is for a long time with him a source of perplexity. When he discovers that do is sometimes translated by fait, he ia constantly using fait wherever does occurs ; when told it is wrong, he naturally feels dispirited. It is hoped that the full explanation, here given, will convince the learner that the principal use of do, did, &c. is to form interrogations and negations in English, 1 and that since he can, with the verbs to have and to be, interrogate without using do, did, &c., so he can in all French verbs. If he is once convinced of this idea, a great cause of per- plexity will be removed. The French, however, have another mode of interrogating, which consists inputting: EST-CE QUE (28 1 ) before the affirmative form of every person, which can be used interrogatively. Ex. J'ai, I have. Est-ce que fai? have I? Tu es, thou art. Est-ce que tues? artthou? II lit, he reads. Est-ce qu'il lit ? does he read? Nousdevons, we owe. Est-ce que nous devons ? do we owe ? Vous savez, you know. Est-ce que vous savez ? do you know ? Us aiment, they love. Est-ce quails aiment ? do they love ? From these examples it is evident that this mode of interrogation may be used in every case, but it must be employed in the first person singular of some verbs in which the transposition of the pronoun would produce a diffi- cult or an unpleasant sound. 1st. When that first person is a monosyllable, as : je sens, je prends, je tends, jefonds. 2d. When the last syllable sounds like je, such as: je mange, je range, &c. ; and others, such as : j'unis, je permets, j'ojfre, &c. DIR. 9.- -The student may easily notice that the parfait is formed by merely adding the pas: participle to the well known expressions fai, jr. Vai, je neVai pas, je n'ai rien, ^ en ai, je les ai, &c. As je 1'ai eu, (31 2 ) je ne 1'ai pas eu, je n'ai rien eu, j'en ai eu, je les ai eus, &c., and so of any other past participle. Je 1'ai vu, je les ai donnes, j'en ai cnvoye, &c. RULES. RULE 1. Every preposition governs the infinitive mood, except the pre- oosition en (in) which governs the present participle. (20 1 .) Note 1. Apres, (after) like every other preposition, (except en,} must be followed by the infinitive mood in French, but there is this peculiarity respecting apres, that it can be followed only by the infinitive of the auxi- liaries avoir or etre ; as, Apres avoir parle, after having spoken. Apres etre parti, after having departed. Apres vous etre leve, after havinp I To form a negative, do, did, &c., are invariably used, for instance; 1 go, doei not become negative by saying : / go not ; but by : I do not go. / went is not / went lot, but I did not go, &c., &c. As the French form their negations in a diflercm way, the student must not looV for anything corresponding to do, did, &c., in In* Drench negatives 6RAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 461 iaen. Now, although in English you may omit the auxiliary having, and ay : after speaking ; after departing ; after rising ; it cannot be done in French. (40 l .) R. 2. When two verbs come together, the second is in the infinitive mood voulez-vous faire, (18 1 ,) if the first is neither to have (avoir) or to be (etre) used as auxiliary of a past tense. Of course, if the two verbs are connected by a preposition, such as : a, to, de, of, from, &c., it governs the second verb ic the infinitive, according to R. 1., and the preposition must be repeated before every verb. (20 1 .) R. 3. Do you speak before you listen ? There are in this sentence two verbs, speak and listen, connected by a preposition and having the same nomi- native, you. Whenever that is the case, the French dispense with the second nominative by using the infinitive mood after the preposition, (R. 1,) and say : Parlez-vous avant d'ecouter ? which corresponds to : Do you soeak before listening ? (28 2 , Obs. 65.) R. 4. When the nominatives are different, as : He writes after yoo, have spoken, the French use the English construction, and say : 11 ecrit aprcs que vous avez parle". They, of course, insert the conjunction que, left out in English, but never omitted in French. Note. After that conjunction que the verb is frequently in the subjunc- tive mood. ($ 151.) R. 5. When two or more nouns, two or more adjectives, or two or more verbs govern a noun or a verb, they must govern it without any preposition, or with the same. If they require different prepositions, see ($ 140 9.) R. 6. 'Every French preposition precedes the word it governs, is never eparated from it, and & repeated before every word. ($ 117, 16"^, &c.) ARTICLES. 1. ARTICLES are used in French to show the gender and number of nouns. Although French grammarians admit of but one article, viz : the definite, le, la, les, (the), two others are usually introduced in English- French grammars, i. e. the indefinite, un or une, a, an, 1 and the partitive, iu, de la, des, some. It seems to me that the name of Article might appropriately be given to ill the words which point out the gender or number of nouns. Accordingly we might call : 1. Mon, ma, mes, my, ($29,) &c., possessive articles, (because, besides I And likewise the following : Aucun, tout, any, &c. Indefinite Articles. Tout homme } peu t le faire. Toute femme ) Aven-vous aucun ami (aucune connaissauce,) a Pari ? 462 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. showing the gender and number > they indicate possession,) Listead of namLig them possessive adjective pronouns. 2. Ce, cet, cette, ces, this, these, &c., demonstrative cuticles or adjectives, instead of demonstrative adjective pronouns. ($ 36.) 3. Quel ? quels ? quelle ? quelles ? which ? interrogative articles, instead of interrogative adjective pronouns. 4. Deux, trois, &.C., numeral articles. 1 $#. In English, articles are not, as in French, used to show the gender and number, but to limit the signification of the noun. From this funda- mental distinction arises the great difference in the use of the articles 'n !he two languages. INDEFINITE ARTICLE. ArticU Inuifim. & 3. Singular. A or an, (12 3 ,8', &c.) For a, with a, of a, to a. Plural. Some, any, a few. For some. For a few. With some. To a few. Of, or from some, or a few. And so it unites with every other preposition, both in the singular and olural. 4. Some, any, a few, are frequently understood or left out in English, but never in French. Ex. Singulier. Un, mascul'n. Une, feminin. Pour un, avec une, d'un, a uno. Pluriel. Des. Quelques (14 1 .) Pour des. Pour quelques. Avec des. A quelques. De quelques. Fie admires some modern authors. We have friends in town. Have you received letters ? II admire quelques auteurs modernes. Nous avons des amis en ville. Avez-vous reu quelques lettres ? $5. In the singular it is generally used alike in both languages, and re- peated before every noun, so as to mark its gender. As : He has a pencil, a ruler, and a book. | II a un crayon, une regie, et un livre. $ 6. 1st Exception. Cent, (14 2 ,) a jundred ; mille, a thousand ; long-tempt ,36 2 ,) a long time ; beaucoup, (13 J ,) a great deal, a great many, in French have no article. $7. 2d Exception. Before a noun of weight, measure, and number connected with its price, use the definite le, la, les, not the indefinite wticle. Butter sells at twenty cents a pound. This cloth is worth three dollars a yard ; the metre (65 2 .) Coal sells at five dollars a ton. Le beurre se vend vingt cents la livre. Ce drap vaut trois dollars la verge ; le metre. Le charbon se vend cinq dollars le tonneau. l This classification may ie new in an Englisn-French grammar, although .ong ago thought of by some of the best French grammarians. See Gram, dos Giara < tnicles. Note 234 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS- 463 ARTICLE DEFINI1 E. $8:- -The. Singular masculine before a consonant le Singular feminine before a consonant : la. Singular mas. or fern, before a vowel or I. mute : V . Plural mas. or fern, before vowels or consonants : let. For the, Pour le, pour la, pour 1', pour Ice. Before the, Avant le, la, I 1 or les. Aud so on with every preposition, except de, (of or from,) and d, (to, at, Sc,c. ; and every preposition ending with rfeand d. These two prepositions, In their connexion with the definite article, present an exception which ia easily explained and understood, but which much practice alone cui enable the student to use with accuracy. Of the, from the, sing, fern., is de la, (the preposition and article remain- ing separated before a consonant.) Of, from the, sing. mas. or fern., before a vowel or h mute it : .le V Thus far the connexion is formed regularly, as in English, that is, the ire- position de and the article la or V remain separate : de la, ds Jt But it is different with the masculine singular. Of, from the, sing, mas., regularly, would be de le, but (hose two wortis are, before a consonant, always contracted into du. 1 Of, from the: plur, mas. or fern., instead of de les, is contracted into JeJ To the, fern, sing., remains in two words : (regular) d la. mas. or fem. before a vowel or h mute, is (regular} d V . mas. sing, instead of: d le in two words, contracts irregularly into aw. 2 plur. mas. and fem. instead of d les, contracts ir-egularly into aux? 9. The contraction du, being the union of the preposition de and tho article le, ought never to be used when that article is not required. Then, translate of my friend, by de man ami, and never by du mon ami, which would be equivalent to de le mon ami, of the my friend, in which the article le is unnecessarily introduced. But, translate of yours, by du votre, because, yours without article in English, being le vdtre, with the article, in French, of yours becomes de le vdtre, or its contraction, du votre. And so it must be, whenever the article le is admitted by the French construc- tion, although it may be rejected from the English. Near being pres de. near the becomes pres de le, or, contracted, pres du. Near the castle, is then vres du chateau. The very samr process applies t: dts, which is the contraction of du - When hi b 'ench you meet with : de le, de les, Jt is as a preposition and a pro- noun objective II parle de le faire, he speaks of doing n il parle de Its Cairo, ho their contractions, iu, icg. II parle iv, capitaine, des capitaines. He speaka Of the captain, of the faptains. 9 When you meet with d le, a les, it is as a preposition and pronoun objective : II (tanae d le faire, a les faire j he thinks of doing it, of doing them r and not as a pre- T.sition and article. Instead of d le, use au. Instead of d les, use aux. II par'* tu capitaine, ntir capitaines; he speaks to the captain, to the captains. i64 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. les. Then, of my friends, (plur.,) must not be des met tmis, ^vhich be equivalent to of the my friends ; but de mes am'-s. 1O. Des (contraction of de les, preposition and article plural) is not, [and mind it carefully] the plural of de, which, being a preposition, is inva riable ; but that of du (contraction of de le, preposition and article masculine singular.) $ 11. Near the, pres du, pres de la, pres de V , pres des. Let this be the model for every preposition ending with de, when it is to be connected *viih the definite article, but not otherwise. (51 J .) $ 12. To the, for the masculine, should be a le, but it s always cot- Iracted into au, before a consonant. To the dictionary, au dictionnaire. To my dictionary, is not au man dictionnaire, which would be equivalent to j le mon dictionnaire, to the my dictionary; but a man dictionnaire, leaving out the article. To mine, must be au mien ; because mine, is h mien, &c. $13. At far as, being : jusqu'L; as far as the, will bejusqu'au, jusqu'a la, jusqu'd r, jusqu'aux. As far as the castle, literally jusqu'u le chateau, which, contracted, becomes JUSQU'AU chateau. Take jusqu'au, &c., as the model of every preposition ending with a, in its connexion with the definite article, but not otherwise. (38 1 .) To the, in the plural, should be a les, but it is always contracted into aux,. To the children ; aux enfants. To my children, should be d mes enfants, and not aux mes enfants, which would be equivalent to d les mes enfants, (to the my children.) $ 14. The function of the article being to show the gender and number cf French nouns, and not merely to limit their signification, ($2,) we deduc from it these general principles. 15. The definite article must be placed before every noun, if that noun ie not determined by some other qualifying, determining, or limiting won*. (14, Ex ) See ($ 1406) for an exception. $ 16. Proper names of countries require a French gender or number ; hence the article that accompanies each one. Le Bresil. La France. Les Etats-IL;:s. Those ending in e mute are mostly feminine, all others maa culine, ($ 140 8.) Exceptions among nouns. $ 17. Proper names of individuals, pointing out their own gender, requhf MD article. Alexandre, Jeanne, Philadelphie. $ 19. When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, the article id not repeated before each. The old and brave soldier. Le vieux et brave fcf VJat. Le vieux et le brave soldat, would indicate that there are two ; one DlJ and one brave. PARTITIVE ARTICLE. A.tbough here is in English grammars no article so called, yet, as t?ic Eng\ish- French grammars have it, and as it has some or any for correspond ant in English, we insert it here. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 465 IB. FIRST PARTITIVE, before a noun. Some or any, before sing. mas. beginning with a consonant : du. " sing. fern. " " " de la. " " " sing. m. or f. " " a vowel: del'. " " " the plural " " " des. 20. It has exactly the same form as the definite article connected wir toe preposition de. And it is repeated before every noun. 21. For some or any. Pour du. I With some or any. Avec de la. Before some or any. Avant deV. \ To some or any. A du, d dea. $ 22. When connected with of or from, as : Of, or from some, it is (not de du, de de la, de des, .lit) simply de. Of some authors. Dictionaries. | D'auteurs. De dictionnaires. $23. Some or any. For some. With some. Of, from some. To some. $21. Near some. (Model for the prepositions with de.) Quelque, sing. Pour quelque. De quelques. Pres du (sing.) Prig de (plur.) Quelques, plui Avec quelyues. A quelque. Pres de quelque. Pres de quelques. $25. Obs. Some or any, is frequently omitted in English, but nevei in French. We have soup and beef for dinner. We have California gold. Have youeaten chestnuts, apples, and nuts ? Nous avons de la soupe et du bceuf pour diner. Nous avons de 1'or de Californie. Avez-vous mange* des chataignes, des pommes, et des noix ? $26. SECOND PARTITIVE ARTICLE, before an adjective, or after anegation. De or d 1 ', (not des, mind it.) Nous avons du pain, (1st partitive.) Nous avons de bon pain, de bonne viande, de bons poulets. (2d partit., II a du pain, il n'a pas de beurre. II a d'aimables enfants. Some or any : Mas, fern. sing. plur. We have some bread. We have some good bread, good meat, good chickens. (II 2 .) fie has bread, he has no butter. (II 1 .) Hr has amiable children, (some, a few.) $ 27. N. B. If the adjective is placed after the noun, instead of the 2d, use the 1st partitive article. He has amiable children, may be translated in French by: II a d'aimables enfants. 2d partitive, the adjective being before. [1 a des enfants aimables. 1st partitive, the noun being before. $28.-- 1 have some more, orothers. | J'cn ai d'autre, ou d'autres; fiot des autres, because the partitive comes immediately before the adjective. {29. POSSESSIVE ARTICLES, OR ADJECTIVES, USUALLY CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. ($1.) $30. The following words are usually classed among pronouns, but n, in English as well as in French, they merely refer to nouns; as they arf 166 GRAMMATICAL SYNCFSII. always prefixed to them, and never take their pla;e; the term Posscsavt Articles, instead of Possessive Pronouns, does not seem inappropriate. 1 $31. Before a consonant. Before a vowel Before a' I. or h mute. Sing. Mas. Sing. Fern M. $ F. Plur. M. $ P My mon ma mon. mes. Thy ton ta tor* tes. His, her, its J son sa son sos. Our notre notre notre nos Your votre votre votre vos. Their 2 leur leur leur lews. As its function is to show the gender and number : $32. RULE. The Possessive Article, in French, agrees with the object possessed, and not with the possessor, as it does in English. Or else : It agrees with the noun to which it is prefixed, not that it refers to; and It must be repeated before every noun. The father, his son, and daughter. The mother, her son, her daughter, and friends. Le pere, son fils, et sa fille. La mere, son fils, sa fille, et see amies. J What is ITS infinitive? is translated cy: Quel EN est tfinfinitif? because the words, ITS infinitive, can be changed to : THE infinitive OF IT, corresponding to the French: EN est Vinfinitif. Hence this rule. (302.) ITS is not translated by son, sa, ses, but by LE, LA, ou LES ... EN, when it can b changed to : THE ... OF IT. Ex 1. I like Philadelphia; ITS markets i J'aime Philadelphie; LES marches BK are excellent. | sont excellents. When that inversion cannot be made without destroying the sense, use : son, sa, les. Ex.2. The country has ITS delights, must be translated by: La campagne a IBS agrements, because the sentence does not admit of the inversion : the country has 'he delights of it. 2 THEIR, is not translated by leur or leurs, but by le, la, les . . . en, when their can be changed to : the . . . of them. These languages are copious; I admire ( Ces langues sont copieuses; J'EN admire THEIR beauties (the ... of them). ' LES beautes. lJut use leur or leurs, when the inversion is inadmissible. Those languages have THEIR beauties. As we car_not say : have the beautiet of them, wo must use leurs, and say: Ces langues ont LZURS beaut&s. The above rule being derived from the English construction, will be founu more practical than the rule of French Grammarians, which is: When the possessor it nominative of the sentence in which ITS or THEIR is used, translate by: son, sa, sea, or leur, leurs. If the possessor is not the nominative, translate by : le, la, lea . , ta. (See examples above.) Exception. When tiie thing possessed is governed by a preposition, use: eon, sa, 0s, leur, leurs. The Philade.phia water- works are admi- rable; everybody wonders at their sim- p.icity. Les machines hydrauliques de Philade.- phie sont admirables; tout le monae s'etonne de leur simplicite. But if you employ a verb that requires no preposition, the rule must be used. An fomt le monde en admire la simplicity. This formn an exception to both nilea. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 467 My cousin's brother and sister. 1 I Le frere de mon cousin et sa soeur. M y cousin's sister and brother. I La soeur de mon cousin et son frere 33. DEMONSTRATIVE ARTICLES OR ADJECTIVES. 34. Always prefixed to a noun, and repeated before every one. (See 30. ' Masculine. Singular. Fern-mine. .,,, ., . 5 Ce, before a consonant, or h aspirated. ) r .+ i his, that. } Cet, before a vowel or h mute, f Cette< These, those. Ces, for the Plur. Mas. and Fern, before all letters Before a consonant. This hat, that hat. Ce chapeau. Mas, Sing Before h aspirated. This hero, that hero. Ce hdros. Before a vowel. This, that child. Cet enfant. Before a silent h. This, that man. Cet homme. Before all letters. This, that table. Cette table. Fei: . Sing. 4 1 , 8 1 , 9 2 , 10 1 .) This, that needle. Cette aiguille. These, those men. Ces hommes, Mas. Plur. These, those women. Ces femmes. Fern. Plur. But when much precision is required, -ci and -la are added ; as: This hat. (8 1 .) Ce chapeau-ci. This child. Cet enfant-ci. This table. Cette table-ci. These men. Ces hommes-ci. That hat. Ce chapeau-la. That child. Cet enfant-la. That table. Cette table-Id. Those women. Ces femmes-la. 36. When one says: If you read this book, I will read that or that one, it is evident that the word this connected with book, takes the place of no other word previously expressed, and that, consequently, it is not a pronoun, but a mere attendant on the noun book, to limit its signification, in the same manner as the article does ; and that it may then be considered as a demon- ttrative article or adjective, but not a pronoun. In every similar case, it must be translated by : ce, or cet, cette, ces. It is also evident that the word that, or that one, takes the place of a noun previously named, viz : book, and that, of course, it is not an article or adjective, bu a true pronoun demonstrative, ( 36,) to be translated by : celui- la. &.c. PRONOUNS. 38. DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Masc. Sing. Masc. ftur. This, this one. The latter. \ Celui-ci. These. Ceux-ci. That, that one. The former. I Celui-la. ! Those. Ceux-la. l My cousin's brother and sister, is an ellipsis for my cousin's brother and my con- fin's sister; which in French would be: Le frere de mon cousin et la saurde monr.ou- tin; but instead of putting the second noun in trio possessive case, use u possessive article ( 31), and say : Lefrert de mon cousin et sa saur. ( 110.) 168 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Obs. -Ci and -la are omitted when other words (such as : de, of; 7 ue, which ;) are added to complete the sense. i, Of Henrietta' s, those CeuxdeHeraietLP of H. Those which are . . Ceux qui sent . . Fern. Plur. These. Those. Those ?f.... Those which . Celles-ci. Celles-la. Celles de . . . Celles que .... Henry's, that of H. Celui de Henri. The one which I Celui que j'ai. have. Fern. Sing. This this one. ) c u rf The latter. 5 That that one. > c ,. The former. 5 That of, the one of. Celle de That, the one Celle qui .... which .... 37. Obs. As these are pronouns, they always come after a i antecedent noun to which they refer and with which they agree. And therefore when you have an English sentence like : this or that book, the noun, in French, must be put in the first part of the sentence, to serve as an antecedent to the pronoun (that) which follows. This book or that . . . Ce livre-ci ou celui-la. Celui-la referring to: book ; whilst ce, cet, cette, (this cr that, same Eng- lish as above), ces (these or those), are always placed before the neun of which they point out the gender and number, without referring to anything pre- viously mentioned. * 38. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. NOMINATIVES. Pronoms Personnels. Nominatifs. 1st CLASS. Ire CLASSE. Coi nected with the verb, in French.' Singular. He, she, it. Tu. II, elleil, elle. 2d CLASS. 2de CLASSE. Separated from the verb, in Frtnch. ! Singulier. I. Moi. Thou. Toi. He, she. Lui, elle. One, some or any one. On. (Always connected with a verb of the 3d p-s. sing., although liie English pronoun may be plur. See below, 3d plur.j 1 The negative ne, ', and any objective pronouns, le, me, Ac., ($ 47,) may interveiM between a nominative of the 1st class and the verb, without destroying the connex- ion; but no other word. As: il donne, il me donne, il ne donne pas, il ne me It donne pas, d)nne-t-ii? But to translate: he who gives, do not say: il qui donne; lut: lui qni Jonne, because who separates he, and gives: He ! Can he do it? Lui! peut-il le faire? Can he do it? He ! Peut-il le faire ? Lui ! 2 The separated nominative is frequently left out in English, or, if expressed, it 11 y as for me, as to me, &c. The French mm, toi, &c., is evidently an abrkigmenl of as to me, and, consequently, is nothing but the objective case used as e nominative : As for me, I do not know anything about it. He .' Ha did not do it. (As *o Mir ) <)idst thou go ? We believe it. (As to us.) Quant a moi, or simply moi! je e'en sais rien. (Je n'en sais rien, moi .') Lvi ! il ne 1'a pas fait. Y as-tu ete, toi ! \ Nous! nous le croyorj. Nous le cro? ons, nous. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 469 Plural. I PlurieL We. Nous. 1 i We. Nous. Vou jr ye. Vous. 1 Ye or you. Vous. They. Us, m. elles,/. I They. Eux, m. Elles,/ People, they, we, you. On. People seek happiness. cherche le bonheiir. tn the 3d pers. sing, and plur. may be classed the following expressions, which remain the same, whether connected with, or separated from the verb. Singulier. I PlurieL fie, she, it. Ce, c'. 2 | They, (it). 4 Ce. 2 Ce. 3 This, that, it. 4 Ceci, cela, 5 a, ce, These, those, Ces choses-ci. Cos c'. 6 they. choses-la. 1 The uniting pronoun news or vous, must be placed before a verb, when it hat two or more nominatives of different persons. Ex. at (l?i Kxercise.) 2 Instead of: il, elle, i/s, elles, use ce or c' with the verb to be, when it has a nomi- native predicate, as some grammarians say, or two nominatives according to others. As: He is an Englishman; c'est vn Anglais: because Englishman, un Anglais, it used as a predicate noun to he. But you must translate lie is English, by il est Anglais, and not : c'est Anglais ; because, English is then used _ an adjecti/0, and not as a second nominative or a noun predicate. (26 1, Obs. 59.) She is an English girl. She is English. They are Frenchmen. They are French. C'est une Anglaise. Elle est Anglaise. Ce sont des Francois Us sont Francais. 3 $39 It is, is translated by ce sont; is it? by sont-ce? (261, Obs. 59.) only when followed by a 3d person plural. As : Is it they who sell those beautiful shawls ? Sont-ce eur, qui vendent ces beaux chiles ? Yes, it is they. Oui, ce sont tux. But it is we who have that ; is rendered by C'est nous qui avons cela ; not ce so~it nous, because, we, although plural, is not a 3d person, (473, Obs. 110.) < When you say: take this, pointing to an object without naming it, or without applying the word this to a noun previously mentioned, it is evident that, in such a case, the word this means this thing, or this object, or this article, and that, of course, it is used as the name of the object itself, or as a noun, (although usually called a demonstrative adjective pronoun.) In every similar case, translate as above. Hence, cert, cela, ceux-r.i, ceux-ld, should never be connected with nouns, although this, that, these, those, in English, can be used with f r without a noun. This admi- nistration, is, Cette administration, not ceci ou cela administration. (243, 382.) 5 \V\\enformer and latter apply to actions, translate by cela and ceci, not by celui- td and celui-ci, which refer only to definite nouns or objects. As : Have you my book ui I his ? I have the former, but not the latter, (here former and latter apply to tin noun book,) then say : J'ai celui-ld, mais non pas celui-ci. Have you taken my book and torn his ? I did the former, but not the latter, (they 1 ere apply to actions,) than May: J'ai fait cela, mats non pas ceci. (N. pa. 271.) 6 Ce, cannot be used immediately before an objective pronoun. It is not correct vt translate it pleases me, by ce me plait, but by cela me plait, cd ou ceci mt pia'ti. Ce is mostly used with the verb to be, seldom with others. It is suitable, c'est ;onvenable; but, it suits, must be cela convient, not ce convient. It is Buffi- tient, s'r.st auffisant, or else, cela suffit, and not ce suffit. (473, 6G3 ) u gool, that is, or it is good. i'ht it, it is that. C'est cela. /4 i a mafaction of cela. Ceei est bon, cela ou c'est ben. That's not it, 'tis not so. Ce n'est pa< cela. 470 GRAMMATICAL SlUOFSIS. Stnguher. This ono, that one. Celui-ci> Jelui-la m The latter, the for- Celle-ci, celle-la /. mer. This one.. That one. Celui-ci . . cet autre The one who, that, Celui qui, celle qui. which. Some one, any one. Quelqu'un. Nobody, not anyone. Personne ne. No one, not anyone. Nul ne, nulle ne. None, no one. Aucun ne, aucune ne. Bach one,every one. Chacun, chacune. The one or the other. L'un ou 1'autre. Plurte*. These,those, some. \ The latter, the for- I Ceux-ci, eeux-14. m. mer, (some do, [ Celles-ci, celles-la../ some do not.) Some . . . others. Those who, that, which. Some, a few. All. J Ceux-ci . . d'autrea. Ceuxqui,cellesqu Que.ques uns. Tous The one . . the other. L'un . . . 1'autre. Ni 1'un ni 1'autre, Neither this one nor Ni celui-ci ni celui- that one. la. Nothing, not any. Rien ne . . . . I The one and the L'un et 1'autro. [ other, both. /Some ... others. Les uns . . les autrjfl )Both. Tous deux, toutes ( JK deux. Neither of them. Ni iss uns, ni lee autres. Neither these nor Ni ceux-ci ni com those. la. All. Tous. Who (pour les pers.) Qui. Qwtest-cequi? (the f of qui is never cut off.) A few,some .. others. Quelques uns d'autres. What? (pour les Qw'est-ce qui? choses.) N. B. The nominative case and the verb are frequently left out in English. As: This, when followed by . . ., Those, where preceded by . . ., That, 911 the side-board ; ]\ly gloves, in my pocket, &c. In all similar sentences, the pronoun and verb must be expressed in French : Ceci, quand il est . . PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Pronoms Personnels. Separated from the verb. t 40. NOMINATIVES. NOMINATIFS. $ 41. OBJECTIVES. REGIMES. I who, I that. Moi qui. I whom, I that. Moi que. Thou who, thouthat. Toi qui. Thou whom. Toi que. He who. he Jiat. Luiqui. 1 a He whom, he that, a Lui que. 1 Celui qui, 2 to ' I Celui que. 2 She who, she that. Elle qui, 1 i She whom, she that Elle que. 1 Celle qui, 2 J | Celle que.* J Lui, elle, apply not to people in general, but to particular persons, and require BO complement. Who is called the Father of his Country ? He (pointing to Washington). She (Miss D.) who writes so well. Qui est appele le Pere de sa Patrfe? Lui (montrant Washington) Elle (Mile. D.) qui ecrit si bJen. The plurals, eux, elles, apply to particular persons. They (the kings) who had promised BO much. They (the Misses R.) who speak French BO prettily. Eux (les rois) qui avaient tant promu- Elles (les Demoiselles R.) qui parlent ai joliment le Frangaii Lui, elle, eux, &c., apply only to persons, not to things. 2 Celui, celle. ceux, celles, apply to nouns having a general sense, or to nouns thai ^nire complements GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 471 NOMINATIVES. The person who. La personne qui. OBJ-CTIVES. The person whom. La personno que. Plural. Pluriel. Plural. Pluriel. We who, we that. Nous qui. We whom, that. Nous que. You who, you that. Vous qui. You whom. Vous que. They who, they Eux qui. 1 They whom, that. Eux que. 1 that. Those who, that. Ceux qui. 8 Those whom, that. Ceux que * They who, that. Elles qui. 1 They whom, that. Elles que. 1 Those who, that. Celles qui. 2 Those whom, that. Celles que. a John and Louis Jean e* Louis J. and L., whom. Jean et Loui? who. qui. que. $4U.-COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. NOMINATIVES AND OBJECTIVES. Myself, moi-meme. Oneself, soi-mcme. Thyself, toi-meme. Ourselves, nous-memes. Himse.f, lui-meme. Yourself, vous-mSme. Herself, elle-meme. Yourselves, vous-mSmes. Itself, lui,elle,soi-meme. Themselves, eux-me'mes. elles-memes. Among compound pronouns may be included : We, (nom.,) among us, (obj.) i Nous autres. You, (nom.,) among you, (obj.) I Vous autres. When objectives, they unite with every preposition. The French use them frequently in familiar discourse ; but only in the 1st and 2d per. plur. We citizens like country air. Among you merchants are there no rogues 1 Nous autres citoyens nous aimone . 1'air de la campagne. Parmi vous autres marchands n'y a-t-il pas de fripons 1 *> 42. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 43. The Frencn have two kinds. 1st. Those which are immediately governed by the verb, and called DIRECT OBJECTIVES, or REGIMES DIRECTS. They correspond to the objective case of an English verb. $ 44. 2d. Those which are governed by a preposition, and called INDI- RECT OBJECTIVES, or REGIMES INDIRECTS. These correspond to the objec- tive case of an English preposition. The latter are subdivided into two classes. He (any one) who practises virtue is Celui qui pratique la vertu est heureux happy. Celles qui etudient le Frangais . . . They (a.l ladies) who study French [ have the hook of him who is sick. i Jtee note 1, preceding page. 800 note 2, preceding page J'ai le livre de eel ui qui est mnltuit, 472 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. $ 45. The 1st class includes those which, in a single word, express txMl the preposition and the pronoun. Ex. : To him, is expressed in French by the single word lui, (Dir. 2); to her, by the same word, lui ; to them, by 'he single word leur ; of it, of them, by ($47) en, &c. $ 46. The 2d class includes those that are attended by a preposition expressed. Ex. : For her, pour elle ; with them, avec eux, avec dies ; with out me, sans moi; to me, d moi / of me, de moi. $47. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Proems Objectifs ou Rigim&. MONOSYLLABLES. BEFORE THE VERB, except with the Imperative commanding. Direct objectives. Regimes directs. Indirect objectives. Regimes indirect! 1. Me, me, m'. To me, me, m' 2. Thee, te, t>. To thee, te, t'. 3m. Him, le, 1'. To him, /. of, from him, m. lui, en. /.Her, la, 1'. To her, of, fromher(porsons), f. lui, en. n. It, le, la, 1'. Toit,there,ofit,fromit(things), n. y. en. 1. Us, nous. To us, nous. 2. You, vous. To you, vous. 3. m. Them, les. To them, of them, m. leur, en. f. Them, les. To them, from them, f. leur, en. n. Them, les. To them, of them (things), n. y, en. $47. Pronouns having, by themselves, a definite signification, ought never to represent a noun taken in an indefinite sense, that is, a noun used without article or without some limiting word. When, then, the question, Parlez-vous Francois? is answered by, je It parle, that le relates to a word used without any limiting article ; hence, the answer seems incorrect. It is correct, however ; but the question ought to be, Parlez-vous le Franais ? using the article after parlez-vous, in the sam* manner as it is used after e"tudiez-vous, apprenez-vous, lisez-vous, &c. Custom, nevertheless, rejects le after the verb parler. (26 1 .) $48. AFTER THE VERB. In the Imperative commanding. A 1' APRES LE VERBE. Imperatif commandant. Direct objectives. Regimes directs. Indirect objectives. Regimes indirect^ I. T e, moi. To me, moi. 2, Thee, ioi. To thee, toi. 3.n. Him, le. To him, of him, 1m, en /. Her, la, To her, of her, lui, on. n. It, le, la. To it, of it, y, on. 1. Us, nous. To us, nous. 1. You, vous. To you, vous. l.m. Them, les. To them, of them, leur, en. /. Them, les. To them, of then-,, leur, en. . Them, les. To them, of them, y, en. $49. Any objective prcnoun followed by a verb in the infinitive mooc Ex. : I wish you to come, must be turned to / wish tnat you would requiring, in French, the subjunctive nood : Je desire que vous veniez. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 473 $ 50. When the English objective prououn it or them, alone, or governed by in, with, of, or any other English preposition, is to be translated by a French verb requiring the preposition a, use y. II y repond ; he answers tt : il y reusslt ; he succeeds in it : il y pense ; he thinks of it. The verbs ripondre, reussir, penser, requiring a, the English pronoun it, by taelf, or with any English preposition, must be translated by y. ($48.) And by en, if the French verb requires the preposition de. II en cat fache ; he is sorry for it: on Yen blame; he is blamed for it; on doute ; they doubt it. ($ 48.) We have seen (I 1 , &c.) nouns connected with the definite article ; tc replace them, when used in the objective case, they require a definite piD- noun ; in English it or them; in French, le, la, les. I have it; je I'ai: k have them ; je les ai. ($48.) We have seen (12 1 , 2 , $ 4, &c.) nouns connected with the indefinite or par- titive article ; to replace them, when used in the objective case, they require an indefinite or partitive pronoun ; in English, some, or any of it, of them , in French, en, meaning, of the thing or things, person or persons spoken of. As, in French, the article is never left out, neither is the pronoun en ever omitted. PLACE OF THE OBJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. The direct and indirect of a single word, or monosyllable. $ 51. RULE 1st. When the verb has but one regime direct, or indirect $47,) or else one double regime, ($57,) that -egime goes before the verb except in one mood, ($$54, 64.) When it has several objectives, ($ 56.) I give. I give you. I see my friend. I see him. I have given an apple away. I have given an apple to her. He is devoted to her. Je donne. Jc vous donno. Je vois mon ami. Je le vois. J'ai donne une pom me. Je lui ai donne une pomme. II lui est devoud. $ 51 1. The objective noun is always placed after the verb, as in Eng- lish ; but not the prono in. And the preposition which governs the noun ii never understood in French, although it is frequently left out in English. As : Give John an apple ; for, Give an apple to John. Donnezune pommo a Jean. Follow this last construction. (Dir. 4.) $ 52. When the verb to have, or to be, is used as auxiliary, the objec- tive pronoun is always placed before it; never after: that is, not imme- diately before the past participle. Ex. : translate / have seen you, by : Je vous at vu (1 you have seen), placing vous before ai, and not by fai vous vu, vous being wrongly placed after ai, and immediately before the past par I ru. I have had it ; Je I'ai eu ; not J'ai Veu. He spoke to them, (he to them spoke.) He has spoken to them, (he to them II leur parla. II leur a parle, (not il a leur parl6.) baa.) i 53. -HiNT. He spoke to them (English imperfect tense), may be trane 174 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS luted by il leui parla, the Fiencn preterit, ($ 153,) or else by il leuraparle French parfait ( 145,) corresponding to the perfect tense of the English con jugation. The latter is the tense generally used in colloquial intercourse by the French. Vous le preta-t-il ? ou mieux, Vous Z'a-t-il prete ? II me le preta; ou il me 1'a pr6to. Did he lend i' to you ? (you it did he? &c.) He lent it to me, (lie to me, &c.) ( will not speak to them, (I not to them, &c.) If you want the book, I must not keep it any longer. He was afraid I would not lend it to him, (I not it to him, &c.) He amuses himself. It is impossible for me to go, (it to me.) Je ne leur parlera' pas. Si vous voulez le livre, il ne faut pas que je le garde plus long-temps. II avait peur que je ne le lui prt> tasse pas. il se divertit. II m'est impossible d'y aller. $ 54. 2d. The objective pronouns are placed after the imperathe mood, commanding or used affirmatively, except in the 3d person sing, and plur fix. Give me. Give it to me. I Ex.: Donnez-moi. Donnez-7e-not. Let me speak. Let me see. I Let us send them one. Dress thyself. Boast of it. But, in the 3d person, place it be/ore Let him give it to me. Let them speak to them. Laissez-mot parler. Laissez mot voir. iZnvoyons-leur-en un. Habille-Joi. Vante-i'en Qu'il me le donne. Qu'ils leur parlent. Exception. When two imperatives are joined by the conjunction ana, the objective pronoun connected with the second verb is frequently placed before it, although the mood is affirmative ; as : Cherchez macanne, et me Z'apportez, instead of: et apportez-la-moi. Look for my cane, and bring it to me. Both ways are correct, ($ 150 12.) $ 55. But when the imperative mood forbids or is used negatively, the} are placed before, according to Rule 1st. Do not give me. Do not give it to me. Let us not se-.id them awav. Let me not speak. Do not dress thyself. DC not ooast of it. Do not take them. Do not (thou) distmb me Send her but two. Bend them nothing. Do not trust to it. Do not boast of it. Do not deceive yourself Ne me donnez pas. Ne me le don nez pas. Ne les envoyons pas. Ne me laissez pas parler. Ne t'habille pas. Ne t'en vante -*aa Ne les prenez pas. Ne me derange pas. Ne lui en envoyez que deux Ne leur envoyez rien Ne vous y fiez pas. Ne vous en vantez pas Ne vous trompez point. I v GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 4-75 And in the 3d person, also before. Let him not give it to me. Let them not speak to her. Qu'il ne me le doune pas. Qu'ils ne lui par lent pas. $ 56. 3d. When the French objective pronoun is attended with a preposi- tion expressed, they both (that is, the preposition and the pronoun) go after the verb, and the preposition must be repeated before every pronoun. Ex. : Come with me. f cannot go without you. He speaks of him, you, and them. We epeak of her and her sister. Does he not speak of them too ? Yes, he speaks of him, her, them, you, and of me also. Do you think of me x or him ? Do not appl) to her nor to him, but to me. ($642.) I will apply neither to hts, nor to him, but to you. Venez (or viens) avec moi. Je ne peux y aller sans vous. II parle de lui, de vous, et d'eus. Nous parlons d'elle et de sa JOBUT. Ne parle-t-il pas d'eux aussi ? Si fait, il parle de lui, d'elle, d'cux, de vous, et de moi aussi. Pensez-vous d moi ou d lui ? Ne vous adressez ni d die, ni c ZM, mais d moi. Je ne m'adresserai ni a elle, ni a lui, mais a vous. DOUBLE OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS Doubles Regimes. Regimes directs et indirect s. i 57. MONOSYLLABLES. AVANT LE VERBE. $ 58. APUES L'!MPERATIF ii to me, me it, then to me. It to thee, thee it, them to thee. It to him, ft to her, It tO US; them to him. them to her. them to us. It to you,yoiu it,them to you. It to them, thenr to them. f Me le, me la, me 1', me lea. fTe le, to la, te 1', te les. Le (ui, la lui, les lui. Le lui, la lui, les lui. fNous le, nous la, 1', nous les. fVous le, vous la, 1', vous les. Le leur, la leur, les leur. -le-moi, -la-moi, -ies-ii -te-le, -te-la, -te-les. le-Iui, -la-lui, -les-lui. -Je-lui, -la-lui, -les-lui. le-nous, -la-nous, -lea- nous. -le-leur, -la-leur, -les-ieur APRES LE VERBtt Singulier y moi. 1'y. 1'y. 1'y. y Jean. Pluriel. 10118 '/. vous y. los y. y mes amis. N. B. When the pronouns are both of the 3d person, as : It to him, them (o him, it to them, them to them, they have the same order in French, viz: le lui, les lui, le leur, les leur ; but when the pronouns are of different persons, 1st and 3d, or 2d and 3d, reverse the English order, and instead of H to mt, it to you, &c., say: to me it, to you it, &c., me lc, vous le, &c. BEFORE THE VERB. AVANT LE VBKBE. AFTER THE VERB. Singular. Singulier. Singular. Me t > it, there, m'y Me to it, there, Thee to it, there, t'y- Him to it, there, 1'y. Him to it. there, Her to it, there, 1'y, Her to it. there, It to it, there, 1'y. It to it, there, Joan there, to it, y . . . . Jean John there, to it Plural. Pluriel. Plural. U to it, there, nous y. You to it, there, vous y. them to it, there, les y. My friends there, y . . . . mesamis. 476 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. $ 69. PERSONAL AND PARTITIVE. Personnels et Partilifs. BEFORE AND AFTER AVAN1 ET APRES THE VERB. LE VERBE. Singular. Singulier. Mo, some, or any, ($ 62,) \ Some to me, or any to > m'en me, ) Thee some, some to thee, t'en. Some to him, him some, lui en. Some to her, her some, lui en. John some, some to John, en (the verb) a Plural. & me to us, us some. Jean. Pluriel. uous-en. You some, some to you, vous-ea. Them some, some to them, leur-en. $ 60. AVANT $ 61. LE VERBE. Sing. Sing. Me some there, ) , ' > my en, some to me, ) Thee some there Him seme there, Her some there, Some to J . there, t'y en. lui y en, lui y en, y en y-cr-ir,ri y en at . yen lui. a Jeau. Plural. Pluriel. Us some tLere, > nous-y-en, y-en- some to us, ) uou' You some there, vous-y-en. Them come there, leur-y-en, y-on-Jf t. -. $ 62. Some, in English, is used for the affirmation, and any for th interrogation and negation ; and consequently en corresponds both to som* and any. I have some, (of a thing referred to.) Have you any ? He has not given me any. Ex.: Ten ai. En avez-vous ? pas donne. II ne m'e a $ 63. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS; With a preposition always placed after the verb, as in English Singular. To me. from me, of me, near me. To then, from or of thee, far from thee To him, of him, from him, without him To her, of, from her, for her. To one's self, of one's self, towards one. Singulier. A moi,($61i.)de moi,($64i,)pr6s Jemo;. A toi, de toi, loin de toi. A lui, de lui, sans lui. A elle, d'elle, pour e le. A soi, de soi, envers soi To it, of it, from it, with it, are not translated after the verb. To us, To you, To them, To them, Plural. from or of us, Pluriel. A nous, de nous, avec nous. A vous, de vous, avant vous. A eux,(^ 64*,) d'eux, apres eux. A elles,($ 642,)d'elles, au milieu d'el'es with us. of, from you, before you. from, of them, after them, from, of them, in the midst of them. A eux, a elles, &c., apply to persons, not to things. ^ 64. 1. Moi, toi, lui, elle, &c., connected with the two oreposition? and de, are only used after some verbs, such as : Presenter a, To introduce to. Penser a, (74 2 ,) \ccourir a, (64 3 ,, Se fier a, (62 2 ,) *te souvenir de, (5 e thinks of me. She hastened to us. Do you irust them ? He remembers yoa. Quand me presenterei vous a lui ? i I pense a moi. Elle accourut a nous. Vous fiez-vous a eux f II He souvien t de voua. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 477 of me, of them, &c., mist be franc S'en temr a .... S'en rapporter a . , . Se mefier de . . . Se defier de S'adressir a .... Se plaindre de . . . In other instances, to me, to him, &c. ar cd as directed ($ 54). Renoncer a .... Compter sur. Se souvenir de . . . . Se ressouvenir de . . . . Penser a .... Accourir a .... Se fier a .... 2. When there are two or more objective case? connected with the same rerb. Do you speak to me? J\le parlez-vous f Me is placed before, because there is but one objective case ; but, as in the following answer, there are more than one object, say r I speak to you, to him, and his brother ; je parle a vous, d lui, et a son fre\ ^. The three objective cases coming after the verb, the preposition a must be used and repeated before each, '$56.) $ 65. But when the preposition is expressed in French, whether it be i, de, sans, avec, &c., both the preposition and pronoun come after the verb, ($56.) $66. REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. ;43'.) Fully to explain this subject, we will give it a new form. The French Reflective Verbs, Verbes Reflechis, may be/divided into three classes. $ 67. 1st CLASS. Those that admit of one direct, but of no indirect objective. Ex. : I dress myself. $ 68. 2d CLASS. Those which, beside the direct, admit also of an indi- rect objective, governed by the preposition d. Ex.: I apply myself tc study. $ 69. 3d CLASS. Those in which the indirect objective is governed by the preposition de. Ex. : I blame myself for that action. $ 70. Observe that when the indirect objective is a noun, it goes after the verb, as in English ; but, when the indirect objective is the pronoun it or them, that pronoun is incorporated with the French preposition a 01 de, and both are expressed by a single word, placed as directed ($50, $54, end following.) Hence there are three classes of $ 71. REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. Pronoms Rtfltchis. 1st CLASS. No indirect objective. To dress mys., m'habillor To dress thys., t'habi ler To dress hims., e'habiller To dress hersf. B'habi.jer. To dress ours., nous ha bu ler. To dress yours., vcus habil ler. To dress thems..s'habilier. To dress one's, s'liabiller. Myself, me, m>. Thyself, te, t'. Himself, ee, s'. Herself, se, a'. hniel<6B ; nous. To cure myself, me guerir. To cufe thyself, te guerir. To cure himself, se guerir, To cure herself, se guerir. To cure ourselves, nous guerir. f'n:e3.'V3E, vous. To cure yourselves, vous guerir. Themselves, se, s'. One'k Mlf, se, s'. To cure themselves, se guferir, To cure one's gelf, se gutfnr, 478 GRAMM Alic'AL SYNOPSIS. $ 7# 2d CLASS. With the preposition a. When the object! d pronoun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be trans* lated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition o, translate oe follows : Mfsolf to it, m'y. (Thyself) into _t, w'y. J Himself) to itjthera, s'y with them, it, to them, to it, to it, 5 them. I s'v } y ' nousy vousy nousy s'y- I apply myself to it. Thou glidest into it. He opposes it, them. She understands it. She is acquainted wi'h them. We expect it. Go to them. Let us submit to it. They retired to it. They withdrew in then. Je m'y applique. Tu t'y glisses. II s'y oppose. Elle s'y connait. Nous nous y attentions Rendez-vous-y. Soumettons-nous-y. Us s'y retirereiit. $ 73. 3d CLASS. With the preposition de. When the objective pro. noun it, or them, alone, or governed by any English preposition, is to be translated by a French reflective verb, requiring the preposition de, trans- late as follows : Myself of it, at it, at it, > with them, J m'en. t'en. I assured myself of it. Thou wilt wonder at it. He takes offence at it. He is displeased with them. She remembers it, them. We can seize upon it. Je m'en assurai. Tu t'en etonneras. II s'en offense. it, them, s'en. She remembers it, them. Elle s'en souvient. upon it, nous en. We can seize upon it. Nous pouvons nous on saisir. at it, vous en. Do you laugh at it? Vous en moquez-vous? about it, s'en. They do not care about it. Ils ne s'en soucient pas. to it, s'en. They attend to it. Elles s'en occupent. $ 74. It is evident, from the examples above, that the use of -he Frenc> pronouns m'y, t'y, &c., m'en, t'en, &c., does not depend on the English pre- position used, but on the French one, which is incorporated with the pronoun. When the French verb requires d, you must use, m'y, t'y, &c. When it requires de, use m'en, t'en, &c. But no such incorporation takes place, if the French preposition is avec, pour, sans, &c., instead of de or d. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Pronoms Eelalifs. $ 75. NOMINATIVES. Wb.3, that, which, whoever. The man who speaks. The lady that smiles. The hat which becomes you. Whoever (who) studies, improves. NOMINATIF. Qui. L'homme qui parlc. La dame 51*1 sourit. Le chapeau qui vous convient. Qui etudic, fait des progreg. $ 76. The nominative relative pronoun is never understood in English or in French. } T7. OBJECTIVE, Without o pre- position. Whom, that, which ($31.* I Que, qtr REGIME. Sans proposition. QrtAMMATICAL, SYNOPSIS. 479 $ 78. The objective relative pronoun is frequently left out in English, Oui never in French. The gentleman (whom) you call. The girl (that) he admires. The history (which) you relate. * 70. OBJECTIVE. With sition. a prepo- Le monsieur que vous appelez, La fille qu'il admire. L'histoire que vous i-acon vous choisirez. v Je sais celles que ) Speaking of a house : Can you guess which will suit me ? you will choose. C?n you guess which I have taken ? Pouvez-vous devinei celle qui me conviendra ? Pouvez-vous deviner celle que j'ai prise ? 2. The one, or those, followed by a preposition or present participle, generally means, that which is, (sing.,) those which are, (plur.) The one on the table Here, the one evidently means that which is, and must be translated by: celui qui est. I The one coming, celui qui vient. Those in the vessel, ceux qui sont . . I Those speaking, ceux qui parlent. 3. When a nominative case is immediately followed by a preposition or pai ticiple, as the relative pronoun and verb are then understood in English, they must be supplied in French. ($ 39, N. B.) The broom on the floor. The man sweeping. 1 he boy caught is innocent (who has been.) 4. What ig, (that which is,) as relative, when followed by a preposition, is translated by, ce qu'il y a, (47 a , Obs. 108,) or any other tense of the same Le balai qui est sur le plancher. L'homme qui balaie. Le garden qui a ete pris est innocent. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 4Sl I know what is in that trunk. Where is what was in my desk ? Je sais ce qu'il y a dans cctte malle. Oil est ce qu'il y avail dans mon pupitre ? $ 88. DONT. French relative, indirect object, is followed by a nomina- tive case in French, whether it is so in English or not. The country whose government Le pays dont le gouvernement vous pleases you. The country whose government you admire. I know her (the one) he spaaks of. 1 do not trust the man whose horse you have borrowed. plait. Le pays dont vous admirez le gou- vernement. Je connais celle dont il oarle. Je ne me fie pas a I'homme dont von* avez emprunte Is cheval. And not, dont le cheval vous avez emprunte. The construction would be the same, if, in English, of whom was used instead of whose. As : The man of whom you have borrowed the horse. $89. The compound rebtive pronoun WHAT, without a preposition. What is called a compound relative pronoun when it means that which, and is translated by, ce qui, when nominative, and ce que, when objec- tive. Ex. : I know what will suit, I Je sais ce qui conviendra. I know wlud you say. I Je sais ce que vous dites. $90. Which has sometimes a clause of a sentence for its antecedent ; in such a case the French consider it as equivalent to the compound relative what, and translate it as above, by ce qui or ce que. Ex. : He went away, which grieved us. I II s'en alia, ce qui nous chagrtna. The law is such, which you know. I La loi est telle, ce que vous savez. $ 91. All that, or the single word all, meaning all that which, is often used as a relative pronoun, and translated all that by tout ce qui, (nom. y ) and generally all by tout ce que, (obj.) You know all that which it wanted. I know all that will suit. I know aL you say. Vous savez tout cequi est necessaire. Je sais tout ce qui conviendra. Je sais tout ce que vous dites. After all, the word which, or that which, may be omitted in English, as shown above, but ce qui or ce que must always be expressed in French. $92. WHAT, governed by a preposition, when that preposition can bo transposed. For what or what frr. Pour quoi . . . ce pour quoi. Of what or what (is he speaking) ot. De quoi ce dont. ($ 93.) To what or what to. A quoi ce a quoi. From what or what from. De quoi ce dont. ( 93.; In what or what in. Dans quoi . . . ce dans quoi. W.th what or what . . . , with. Avec quoi . . . ce avec quoi. 1 93. When the preposition of, governing what is rendered in French ly rfr ce dont is more generally used Uiin de quoi. 41 482 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. know what he speaks of. He knows what I have need of. Tell me what you are thinking of. Does he know why I do not go there ? I will tell you what I am going to do it with. Je sais de quoi, ,mieux) C6 dont parle. II sait ce dont j'ai besoin. Dites-moi ce d quoi vous penscx Sait-\\ pourquoi je n'y vais pas? Je vais vous dire ce avec quoi je ^ le faire. $ 94. In the third example, the preposition of, connected with the parti ciple thinking, is not translated by tne French picposition de, but by a. , because the verb penser requires d and not de, (and, as we have already noticed, (50,) it is the French preposition that must be attended to, and ncj the English.) Accordingly, ce dont cannot be used, but ce d quoi, as in tha example. It will easily be noticed that when what is governed by any other prep:> eition than de, that preposition is placed between ce and quoi. Ex. : This is what he applies to. | C'est ce d quoi il s'applique. We know what he is running after. \ Nous savons ce apris quoi il court. 95. English grammarians say that the preposition ought not to be sepa- rated from the pronoun it governs, and that in, I know what he speaks of, the preposition of onght to be placed before what, instead of being placed at the end of the sentence, and that the correct expression is, I know of what he speaks. Yet general custom disregards that rule, and the preposition usually enda the sentence as exemplified here. In French, however, the preposition cannot be transposed : it must always precede the pronoun, as shown in the above examples. 96. WHAT, connected with the preposition of or to, changes its meaning according to the place of the preposition. $ 97. Of what, meaning of that which, dv ce qui, (nominatif,) de ce jue, (reg.) (The English preposition cannot be transposed.) He speaks of what was found. \ II parle de ce qui fut trouve*. It would not be correct to say, what was found of. He speaks of what I know. | II parle de ce que je sais. $98. To what, meaning, to that which, d ce qui. (nom.,) d ce que, (reg. No transposition in English. You appiy to what is useful. | Vous vous appliquez dee g^i est utile. Attend to what I tell you. j Faites attention d ce queje vous Uia. 99. What ...of, meaning that of which, ce dont ... ce d e quoi. What you speak of is not just. Vou do not know what I informed him of. Ce dont vous parlez n'cst pas juste, (ce de quoi.) Vous ne savez pas ce dont je 1' in- formal. $ 100. }Vhat ...to, meaning that to which, ce d quoi, d qnoi. I see what he pretends to. Who knows what he applies himself to. Je vois ce d quoi il pretend, (~a, ti quoi.) Qui sait d quoi fou ce a qtoi) il 'ap plique. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPS1I. 483 $101.. -What of it? is an irregular expression, translated by Qu'cw esulte-t-il? What of his opinion ! | Qu'importe son opinion ! tlOS PERSONAL PRONOUNS CONNECTED WITH TUB RELATIVES, governed by prepositions. I to whom, I whose. Thou of whom, thou whose. He of whom, he whose. She from whom. He or the one without whom. She or the one without whom. The personof whom, (from whom.) The thing of which. The object for which. Julius after whom. Clara after whom. We to whom. You of whom, or whose. They from whom, (m.) They from whom. (/.) They for whom, (m.) They near whom. (/.) Those in the midst of which, (TO.) Those, far from which. (/.) Moi a qui, moi auquel, moi a laquelle. Toi de qui, toi dont, toi duquel, toi do laquelle. Lui de qui, lui dont, lui duquel. Elle de qui, elle doer, elle de laquelle. Celui sans qui, celui sans lequel. Celle sans qui, celle sans laquelle. La personne de qui, dont, de laquelle. La chose de laquelle. L'objet pour lequel. Jules apres qui, apres lequel. Clara apres qui, apres laquelle. Nous a qui, nous auxquelg, auxquelles. Vous de qui, vous dont, desquels, &c, Eux de qui, eux dont, eux desquels. Elles de qui, elles dont, elles desquellea, Ceux pour qui, ceux pour lesquels. Celles pres de qui, pres desquelles. Ceux au milieu de qui, desquels. Celles loin de qui, loin desquelles. $103. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. They are generally divided into two classes : 1st. Those which are always connected with nouns, viz : my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their. As these never take the place of nouns, they will be found under the head of Posses- sive Articles. (30, 31, 32.) $ 104. 2d. Those wrich, taking the place of nouns, are properly called pronouns. Whose thimble is this ? It Mine, Thine, His, Hers, its, Ours, Yours, Theirs, le mien, le tien, le sien, le sien, le sien, le notre, le votre, le leur, The priest's, celui dupretre, The friend's, celui de 1'ami, Mr. Petit's, celui de M. P., To mine, au mier., is mine. A la mienne, la tienne, la sienne, la sienne, la sienne, la notre, la votre, la leur, celle dupretre, celle de 1'ami, celle deM. P., qui est ce de ? les miens, les tiens, les siens, le? siens, les siens, les notres, les votres, les leurs, ceuxdupreire, ceux de 1'ami, ceux de M. P., mienne, aux miens, C'est le mien, les micnnes. les tiennes. les siennes. lessiennes. les siennea. les notres. Jes votres. les leurs. celles du p. celles de 1'arni celles de M. P aux miennes. 484 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Of, from mine, du mien, de la mienne, des miens, des miennes. With mine, avec le mien, avec la mienne, avecles miens, avec lee miennea Near mine, pres du mien, pres de la m., pres dea miens, pres des m. As to mine, quant au mien, quant a la m., aux miens, aux miennes. $ 105. The above pronouns are used as objectives and nominatives with every verb, and even after the verb efc, to be, when the personal pronoun ce is nominative before. Give me mine. Vours looks well. Where is his, theirs, ours ? Ours are here, and his also. It is theirs, (ce being nom. before.) It was not mine, but thine. Is it hers, yours, mine, or theirs? Are they yours or ours ? ($ 39.) Donnez-moi le mien. Le votre a bonne .nine. Ou est le sien, le leur, le notre ? j Le notre est ici, et le sien aussi. C'est le leur. (39.) Ce n'etait pas le mien, mais le tien. Est-ce le sien, le votre, le mien, le leur? Sont-ce les votres ou les i.otres ? $ 106. But when ttre, to be^ has for its nominative either a noun or the pronoun il, elle, Us, elles, the French do not use the above pronouns, but the following : Singular. Mine, a moi. Thine, a toi. His, a lui. Hers, a elle. John's, a Jean. Whose, a qui. Whose book is this ? It is mine. Whose pen is that ? It is thine. Whose gloves are these ? They are hers. Whose boots are those ? They are his. Are they Mr. Lebon's ? No, they are not his. Whose are they ? I do not know who^e they are. Is this yours ? That is mine. Plural Ours, a nous. Yours, a vous. Theirs, a eux. (m.) Theirs, a elles. (J. My brothers'. A mes freres I A qui est ce livre ? I II est a moi. A qui est cette plume-la ? Elle est a toi. A qui sont ces gants? Us sont a elle. A qui sont ces bottes-la ? Elles sont a lui. Sont-elles a M. Lebon ? Elles ne sont pas a lui. A qui sont-elles ? Je ne sais pas a qui elles sont. Ceci est-il a vous ? Est-ce a vous 1 Cela est a moi. C'est a moi. $ 107. The expression a book of mine, a friend of hers, &c., is frequently naed in English. The French do not use this phraseology, but say, One of my books. Un de mcs livres. A book of mine. Un de mes livres. A book of thine. Un de tes livres. A book of his, hers*. Un de ses livres. A friend of John's, is expressed by $108, One of her friends. Une de ses amiei A pen of ours. Une de nosplumea A ... of vours. Une de vos .... A . . of theirs. Une de leurs .... Un des amis de Jean, or Une des amies de Jean. When, instead of a book of mi*e, the English use, ikit, that GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. these, or those, saying, this book of mine, those gloves of hers, &c., no regular French can be given of them, except using the possessive article. ($ 31.} _ . , , . . ., j f Mon livre est gate. This book of mine is spoiled. . , ... . . . *.., ( Ce livre, qui m apparttent, est gate. f Ces pilules, de son invention, gueris* Those pills of Ais cure the headache. < sent le mal do tete. \ Ses pilules guerifesent le mal de tete. <) 109. WHOSE, possessive pronoun, requires a particular explanation. It is used in English in two different ways. 1st. When it means to translate by d qui. 1. I, whose horse this is, means, i, to Moi, d qui whom this horse belongs. tient. Whose book is this ? or, to whom does this book belong ? 2. I, whose horse you have. Here, whose means not I, to whom, but I, of whom you have the horse. Whose opinion do you adopt ? $ 110. 2d. WHOSE, governed by a Of whose title, or the title of whom. To whose name, to the name of whom. From whose race, from the race of whom. In whose states. For whose daughter. Through whose hands. Under whose protection. theval est ou apptr- A qui est ce livre ? ou A qui ce liVTO. appartient-il ? Moi, dont vous avez le cheval. Moi, de qui vous avcz le cheval De qui adoptez-vous 1'opinion f preposition. Du titre de qui, duquel, de In quelle, c. Au nom de qui, duquel, desqueU &c. De la race de qui, duquel, de? quelles. Danslesetatsdequi,delaquelle,&c Pour la fille de qui, &c. Par la main de qui. Sous la protection duquel, de la quelle, &c. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. $ 111. TFAo ? (nom.) \Vhom ? (obj.) I Qui ? (nom.) Qui ? (regime.) (21 1 .) Who is good ? Whom do you see ? I Qui est bon ? Qui voyez-vous ? Qui never loses its t, say then, qui y va? not Qu'y va ? Who goes there f Qui airnez-vous ? Whom do you like ? and not Qu'aimez-vous, which means Wha. do you like ? $112. WHAT or WHICH? 1st. When connected with a noun ex- pressed, is translated by the interrogative articles or adjectives, ($ 1,) qud, quels, quelle, quelles. What government do you prefer ? What is the authority of the mayor ? What or which articles has he sent? What or which plants do you prefer ? Quel gouvernement prdferez-vous Quelle est 1'autorite du maire? Quels articles a-t-il envoyes ? Quelles plantes prefe'rez-vous? WHAT, interrogative, meaning what thing when not con 186 GBAMMATICAL SXNOP3IS. nected with a noun, but with a verb, (2i,) is translated by que, qu\ at chose. ($ 114.) It is then objective to the verb, and placed before it. ($ U5. What (what thing) do you prefer ? What does the mayor ? What (what things) has he sent ? Que preferez-vous ? Que fait le maire ? Qu' a-t-il envoye? $ 114. Or else by qu'est-ce que ? (28 1 .) What do you prefer ? j Qu'est-ce que vous preferez ? What does the mayor ? ' Qu'est-ce que le maire lait ? What has he sent ? Qu'est-ce qu'il a envoye ? Then the verb retains the affirmative form, because the interrogation ia found in QiCest-ce que . . . ? 115. When placed after the verb, it is translated, not by que, but by quoi, (21 1 ,) and the verb retains, as in English, the affirmative form. What does the mayor ? The mayor does what ? What does he say ? He says what ? What has he sent ? He has sent what ? Que fait le maire ? Le maire fait quoi ? Que dit-il ? II dit quoi ? Qw'a-t-il envoye ? II a envoy quoi ? 116. 3d. WHAT, when nominative to a verb, is translated by. Qu'est-ce qui ? [Vliat pleases you ? What is agreeable ? "What makes you laugh ? What grieves that child ? Qu'est-ce qui vous plait ? Qu'est-ce qjri est agreable ? Qu'est-ce qui vous fait rire ? Qu'est-ce qui chagrine cet enfant ? $ 117 .4th. WJtat, unconnected with a noun, and governed by aprepo Bition, is expressed by QUOI. (R. 6.) That is: Wlat is he speaking of? Of what is he speaking ? (21 1.) IVl-it is she going to draw with ? What does the child cry for ? (for what ?) What is she thinking of? (of what?; To what does he apply ? He applies to reading, writing, and arithmetic. There is in it something pleasing. I have enough (wherewith} to live upon, It is sufficient (enough) to frighten him. De quoi parle-t-il ? Avec quoi va-t-elle dessiner ? Pourquoi 1'enfant crie-t-il ? A quoi pense-t-elle ? A quoi s'applique-t-il ? II s'applique d la lecture, d 1' ecriture et au calcul II y a unje ne sais quoi qui plait. J'ai de quoi vivre. 11 y a de juoi reffrayer. v> 118. 5th. WHAT, in the collocations, (4T 2 ,) what is, what was, whf.t uill be, &c., followed by in, on, or any other preposition, is expressed by : Qu'y a-t-il dans. . . .? Qc y avail- il dans ....? Qu'y aura-t-il dans. . . ( What is on the table ? | Qu'y a-t-il sur la table ? What may be (may there be;/or me- ? j Qvepeut-il y avoir pour moi ? What was under it ? i Qu'y avait-il dessous ? GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 487 11. WHAT, expressing admiration ; as : What can be more agreeable can there be more agreeable ! or, What more agreeable ! is trans ated by que, with the verb; as: Que peut-il y avoir de plus agreaM* oy quoi de ! without the verb ; as : Quoi de plus agriable ! Wliat can be (there be) sweeter ! (64 l .) I Que peut-il y avoir dc plus doux ! What sweeter ! | Quoi de plus doux ! $ L20. 6th. WHAT, when a compound relative pronoun, is translated ? ce qui, (nom.,) ce que, (obj.) v 121. WHAT, interjection, is: Quoi! Comment! What ! he is not here ! | Quoi ! (Comment !) il n'est pa& ici . $ 122. WHICH, in the same manner as what, when connected with a noun, is used as an adjective, or an article, and translated by quel, quttllc, quels, quelles. Which, dictionary "\ I Quel dictionnaire "\ Which grammar . Quelle grammaire I Which dictionaries Y do ^ P refer ? Quels dictionnaires Y Which grammars J ) Quelles grammairesj And likewise when it is governed by a preposition. (R. 6.) A quel dictionnaire donnez-vous ii preference t Four quelle grammaire avez-vous donne un dollar ? Avec quel crayon avez-vous ecrit f De quelles montagnes venez-vous t Pres de quelle rue demenrez-vous f Pour quel candidat voterez-vous ? $ 123. When which becomes a pronoun, and takes the place of the noun, )r, in other words, when which means which one, which of them, it must be translated not by quel, &c., alone, but by lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- quelles, the article le, la, leg, being used, in French, before the pronoun, tc translate the word one, or of them, placed after, in English, or understood. So, in French, the expression is, the which, instead of which one, which of them. To which dictionary do you give the preference ? For which grammar did you give a dollar ? Which pencil did you write with ? Which mountains do you come from ? Near which street do you live ? Which candidate will you vote for ? Thet : arc several candidates ; *VHICH (or which one, or which of them,) do you prefer . Which of these ladies is your cousin ? i mong these young men, which learn French ? (which ones ?) A mong these young ladies, which learn French? (which ones?) II y a plusieurs candidats ; LF.QUEI (not quel un) preTerez-vous ? Laquelle de ces dames est votre cou- sine ? Parnii ces jeunes gens, lesqueh ap- pronnent le Francois? Parmi ces demoiselles, letquelles ap- prennent le Franc.ais ? $ 12-1. N. B. Although me, or of them, may not be expressed afte wkv.h.. at- is uilly the case, translate as above, whenever it is implied. 1-88 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Lequcl eat pren ter ? (6'J Whtch is the Erst ? (that is, which one ?) Witch is the las'. ? Which are the best ? (speaking of boys.) IP/i/cA arc tha best ? 'speaking of girls.) $ 125.- To which, meaning to which one, to which of them, is expressed ti ao D'luch ; aussi, as ; si, so, &c. : NE is never used after que, (as.) T have as much bread as I can eat. Ho docs not study so much as I do. Louis writes as well as he speaks. They do not behave so well as you think. J'ai autant de pain que je peux CB manger. II n'etudic pas tant qve j'etudie. Louis ecrit atissi bien qu'il parlo. Us ne se component* pas si bien yu vous croyez. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 4:93 . PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVES. 1. The following are placed before the noun. Note that when the posi live goes before, so do the comparative and superlative. Premier, firat second, second ; and other adjectives of number. Beau, bel, m. ) h'ne. Belle,/. ) handsome. Bon, bonne, good. Grand, reat, tall. Gros, grosit , big, bulky. Jeuno, young. Joli, pretty. AJauvais, bad. Mechant, wicked. Meilleur, better. Meme, same. Moindre, less. Petit, little, small. PlusieurS; several. Saint, holy. Tout, all. Vieux, vieil, m '\ II 1 Vieille,/. 5 Un jo!i petit chien. A pretty little dog. 2. But if any of these adjectives is connects^ with another that cannot be placed before the noun, both go after, joined by a conjunction. A handfome, amiable woman. 2 A good, complaisant husband. A young, rich, and virtuous woman. Une femme aimable et belle. Un mari ban et complaisant. Une demoiselle, jeune, richc, et vt'- tueuse. 3. Adjectives of nations, color, and shape, follow the noun. (2C 2 , Obs. 61.} NOUNS. $ 140. 1. NOUNS in French not being, as in English, used as an adjectiva to another noun, as, a cloth coat, a preposition is used to show the relation between the two nouns, the second of which in English becomes the first in French. Be is used between the name of the thing and that of the substance of which it is made : Un habit de drop ; un chandelier d 'argent. If several ncuns are ised as adjectives, the French construction is the same; the last in English becomes first in French. Silver, gold, and steel jewels ; det bijoux d'argent, d'or, et d'acier. 2. De shows also the possession marked in English by 's. John's book. The French construction remains the same : Le livre de Jean. The boy has a stick : is it the gene- i Le garden a un baton: est-ce celuidit raV s, the lawyer's, or the doctor's ? \ general, de Vavocat, ou du docteur ? 1 The adjective eher, dear, also stands before the noun, except when it denotes tht price of a thing. Ex. Man cher ami, my dear friend ; ma chere sceur, my dear ein- tsr ; but un fusil eher, a dear gun ; une table chere, a dear table. 2 In tho following examples, the peculiarity with respect to the place of the adjec uve should be observed : Un grand homme means a great man, and un homme grand * tail man; une grouse femme, a fat woman, and une femme grosse, a woman wiU child ; une sage -femme, a midwife, and une femme sage, a wise or modent wont.an t* foto*f komme, a ian of honor, and un homme galant, a courtier. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. The child's and the baker's dog. The grocer" 1 s butter, biscuits, and cof- fee. The grocer's butter, his biscuits and coffee. Le chien du gar$on et du boulanger. L( beurre, les biscuits, et le cafe y changing f hese 5nals into e mute. Kneas. Pythagoras. I Enee. Pythagore. Ulysses, Socrates. | Ulysse. Socratc. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 497 3. Ptoper names ending in o change it in French into on. Cicero. Dido. | Ciceron. Didon 4. Most proper names ending in us are the same in both languages when they have but two syllables ; but when they are composed of three or more syllables, they become French by changing it into e mute. Cyrus. Venus. I Cyrus. Venus. Camillus. Orpheus. I Camille. Orphee. 5. Most of those ending in al or is are the same in both languages. Javsnal. Sesostris. | Juvenal. Sesostris. 6. Those ending in English in ander change it in French i.ito andre. \lexander. Lysander. | Alexandre. Lysandre. REMARK. The proper names of kingdoms, provinces, and towns, ending in English in a, become French by changing the ending a into e mute, and those of towns ending in burg, change it into bourg. 1 Arabia. Asia. I L'Arabie. L'Asie. Friburg. Hamburg. | Fribourg. Hambourg. $141. CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. tfOTAirtl Cardinal*. Cardinal Numbers. Aomirw Ordinaux. H Premier, m prenvere, f. ......- Miral umber* Int. Deux (2) 2 2d. Trois Uuatre 3. 4 Troisieme . ~- .-. Jd. 1th Cina 5. 5th. Bte 6 6th Sent 7. 7th 8th Neuf 9 'Jlh Dix . . 10. Dixi^me ..-..- ,.,.r-^ .. . ... 10th ... 11 llth 12 12th ... 1". Treizieme 13th 14. Htli 15 15th I Such proper names as deviate from this rule are either separately noted, or art Che same in both languages. 8 From 2 to 10 there is an irregularity in the pronunciation of the numbers, wMctt it id well to notice. At the end of a sentence. Deux ii pronounced deu, x silent. troi, s silent, cinq, '/ sounded, sis, x like x. Kf)t, t sounded, nuit, ( sounded, neuf,/ soundod. Trois Cinq Six Sept Hull Neuf Dix clis, x like s. Hefore a consonant deu troi. cin. si. se. hut. lieu di. Pefore a vowel, deu-z amis, troi-z amig. cin-q amis, ei-z amis. sc-t amis. nui-t anna. lieu- v amis ci-z aiu,6 A ad in the same manner wherever they occur, 498 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. Norn fire* Cardinal Gafstinaux, Numbers Sciza * - 16. Dix-sept 17. Dix-huit ., ~ , :S. Dix-neuf - ... ~ 19. Vingt(i) 20. Vingt et un 21. Vingt-deux 22. Vingt-trois 23. Vingt-quatre - - 24. Vingt-cinq -. 25. Vingt-six 26. Vingt-sept .- 27. Vingt-huit 28. Vingt-neuf - - 29. Trente. 30. Trente et un ~ ~ . 31. Trente-deux ~. 32. Treute-trois ~ 33. Quaranto 40. QuE.rante et un ~ 41. Quarante-deux 42. Quarante-trois 43. Cinquante.-. .~ . 60. Cinquante et uu -. .- 51. Cinquante-dcux - - 52. Soixante - ~ 00. Soixante et un . .- . 61. Soixante-deux ..- 62. Soixante et dix 70. Soixante-onze 71. Soixante-douze 72. Soixante-treize 73. Soixante-quatorze 74. Soixante-quinze 75. Soixante- -seize ~ 76. Soixante-dix-sept 77. Soixante-dLx-huit 78. Soixante-dix-neuf 79. Quatre-vingts( 2 ) - . 80. Quatre-vingt-un 81 . Quatre-vingt-deux .. 82. Quatre-vingt-dix ~ 90. Quatre-vingt-onze 91. Quatre-vingt-douze 92. Quatre-vingt-treize 93. Quatre-vingt-quatorze 94. Quatre-vingt-quinze 95. Quatre-vingt-seize 96. Quatro vingt-dix-sept 97. Quatro vingt-dijf-huit 98. vingt-dix-neuf 99. Nomlrei . QrdiKil Ordinaux. Nuinberfc Seizieme , . _. ., . . 10th Dix-septierae *^. 17th Dix-huitieme 13th Dix-neuvieme ~ 19th Vingtieme 20th Vingt et unidme 21s*. Vingt-deuxieme . . 23d. Vingt-troisieme . . . . ~ ,,... 23d. Vingt-quatrieme 24 tU. Vingt-cinquieme . -~ 25th Vingt-sixieme ^ ^-.^ 26th Vingt-septieme ^ 27th Vingt-huitieme ...^ ..^. 28th Vingt-neuvieme 29th Trentieme . 30th Trente et unieme , ... 31st Trente-deuxieme . ~ 32d. Trente-troisieme 33d. Quarantieme .- ~ . ......... 40th Quaran'.e et unieme _~ 41st. Quarai.te-deuxieme ^ ... . . . 42d. Quararite-troisieme -. ^ 43d. Cinquantieme ~ . ........ 50th Cinquante et unieme _ . 51st Cinquante-deuxieme _. . 1>-. 52d. &j ixantieme ^- . ~ . . 6()th. Soixante et unieme.. 61st Soixante-deuxieme . ^.^. .- 62d. Soixante et dixieme . . ~ . 70th Soixante-onzieme .^ 71st. Soixante-douzieme ., 72d. Soixante-treizieme 73d. Soixante-quatorzieme 74th Soixante-quinzieme 75th Soixante-seizieme 76th Soixante-dix-septieme. _ 77th Soixante-dix-huitieme 78th Soixante-dix-neuvieme 79th Quatre-vingtieme 80th Quatre-vingt-unieme 81 st. Quatre-vingt-deuxieme 82d. Quatre-vingt-dixieme ^ . . 90th Quatre-vingt-onzieme ^. .-.^ 91st. Quatre-vingt-douzieme 92d Quatre-vingt-treizieme 93d. Quatre-vingt-quatorzieme !Mth Quatre vingt-quinzieme 35th Quatre-vingt-seizieme 96th Quatre- vingt-dix-septieme ~ D7th Quatre-vingt-dix-huitieme ~ 08th Quatre-vingt-dix-neuvieme ^ . . 99tfi ' In vingt the t is silent, but sounded in viugt et un, vingt-deux ; Ito 9 Tn quatro-vingta the * ^s never sounded. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS 499 ffombru Cardinal CiirrftruzllX. Numbers. Cnt ~ ~ ~ . 100. Cent un (not tent et un) 101. Cent deux 102. Centtrois. 103. Ceutdix 110. Cent onze 111. Cent vingt - 120. Cent vingt et un 121. Deux cents 200. Deux cent un .-. 201. Mille (not dix cents) 1000. Mille un 1001. Mille deux,&c 1002. Mille cent (onze cents) 1 100. Mille neul cents (dix-neuf cents) 1900. Nomlres Orjinl Ordinaux, Numbri Centieme ........ , ......... - 100th Cent-uniiime ......... ....... ... 101st. Cent-deuxieme . ~ ................ lOCd. Cent- troisieme ................. . 103d. Cent-dixie me . --------- ........ HOth Cent-onzif>me . ............. ... . lllth. Cent-vingtieme ........... __ 12Uui. Cent vingt et uaieme .......... ~- 121st. Deux centiemo . . . ............... 200th. Deux cent-unieme .............. - 201st. Millieme .......... ............... 1000th Mille-unieme. . . ........ ......... .. 1001st Mille-deuxieme, &c _____ ........ . 1002d. Mille-centieme, (onze-centieme 1100th Mille-neuf-ceatieme, (dix-neuf- centieme -- ... ----- ..... 1900th. After which the French do not count any more by hundreds, as the English do. They do not say : Vingt, vingt et un, vingt-doux, &c., cents ; twenty, /wenty-one, twenty-two, &c., hundred, but : Deux mille ~ ^ . . . . 2000. Deux mille cinq cents .^ .^ .- .^ . . .^ 2500. Un million 1,000,000. Deux millieme ................ . 2000th Deux mille cinq-centieme -------- 2500th Millionieme ----- ....... . ... millionth In dates, Mille is spelt Mil. Mil sept cent soixante-seize, 1776. Mil huit cent quarante-neuf, ou Dix-huit cent quarante-neuf, 1849. Phe whole. A part. The half. The third, I. The two-thirds, f. The three-thirds. The fourth part, the . The f. The fifth part, the 1-5. The 4-5. The sixth part, the 1-5, and so forth, by adding ieme to the cardinal. What is the half of 4 ? It is 2. What is that of 5 ? It is 2 and a naif. What is the f of 6? It is 5 and i, 5*. Which is the fourth of 11? It is 2*. The * are 8*. fc 142. The seasons of the year are : The spring. The summer. The autumn, or fall. The winter. &143., Names of the months of the year. The first month is January. IB not the second month February ? The third is March. Le tout, 1' unite. Une partie. La moitie, la demie. Le tiers, i. Lesdeux-tieis, |. Lestrois- tiers. Le quart, le . Les trois quarts, f. Le cinquieme, b 1-5. Les 4 cm- q'jiemes. Le sixieme, le 1-6, et ainsi de suite, en ajoutant ieme au cardinal. Quelle est la moitid de 4 ? C'est 2. Quelle est celle de 5 ? C'est 2 et demi. Quels sont les |de8? C'est 5 el un tiers, 5 1. Quel est le quart de 11 ? C'est 2 o *. Les * sont 8*. Les saisons de 1'annec, sont : Le printemps, (382.) L'dte, L'automr.e. L'hiver Noms des mo!? de 1'annee. Le premier mois est Janvier. Le second n'est-il pas Fevricr? Le troisieme est Mars. 600 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. A.j.ril May. June. Zub . August. September. October. November. December. Next January. Last January. The coming f ebruary. Last March. In April. On the first of May. On the 4th of July, 1776. New Year's day. On New Year. I wish you a happy New Year. Christmas day. On Christrias. te not June the 6th month ? Fes, it is ; and September is the 9th. How many days are there in July ? There are 31. How many are there in August ? Are there as many in October ? There are just as many, lias September as many f No, it has but 30, the same as April, June, and November. The shortest month is February, which, in common years, has but 28 days, and 29 in leap (bissextile) years. Avril. Mai. Juin Juillet. Aout. Septrmt/rd Octobre. Novembre. Oeccmoic. Janvier prochain. Janvier quently too difficult for beginners. * The second person singular always ends in s.* In tne first conjugation, tLa third person singular ends in e, and is the same as the first person ; in ihe second and third conjugations, it ends in t; first and second have s. In th fourth conjugation, it adds nothing to the root.f * Except in the imperative of the first conjugation, and of some verbs of fas second, where the s is dropped. Ex. : Parle, speak, (thou.) When the imperative* however, is followed by one of the pronouns, en, y, the letter s is not dropped; as. tonnes-en a ton frere> give some to thy brother; portes-y tes livres, take thy books thither. f By root we understand flat part of the verb which precedes the terminationn tr .. oir. re, of the infinitive: for example, in the verb finir, to finish, fin in the root GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 501 FIRS! CON.CGATION. Infinitive. Present participle. fjfpeak. Speaking. Present tense. We speak, you speak, the) speok. c speak, ihou speakest, he speaks. SECOND CONJUGATION. Tofnish. Finishing. V7s finish, you finish, they finish. C foish, thou finishest, he finishes. THIRD CONJUGATION. To receive. Receiving. We receive, you receive, they receive. [ receive, thou receivest, he receives. FOURTH CONJUGAl ION. To sell. Selling. We sell, you sell, they sell f sell, thou sellcst, he sells. PREMIERE CONJUGAISCff. Iiijinitif. Participe pretend Parler. Parlant. Present. Nousparlons, vous. purlez, ils parlent. Je parle, tu paries, il parle. SECONDE CONJUGAISON. Finir. Finissar.t. Nous finissons, vous finissez, ils ft- Je finis, tu finis, il finit. [nissent CONJUGAISON. Hecevoir. P.eceva\t. Nous recevons, vous recevez, ile re- Te regois, tu rec,ois, il rec.oit. [coivent. QUATRI^ME CONJUGAISON. Vendre. Vendant. Nous vendons, vous vendez, ila ven Je vends, tu vends, il vend. [ dent. HINT. From the third person plural, the scholar can easily learn the singular. For the first conjugation, change the pronouns, but pronounce the verb just like the third person plural : Ils parlent, je parle, tu parle, il parle. For the second, third, and fourth conjugations, drop the last mute sylla- ble of the third person plural; then the remainder will be the sound of the singular. Us finis sent, jefini, tujini, il fni. Us re^oivcnt, je regoi, tu re$oi, il refoi. Us veridcnt, jeven, . tu ven, il ven. The scholar has only the sounds here ; the correct spelling is to bo learned by the written directions in ($ 144, N. 2), and by translating the exercises. This answers for the regular conjugations, and many of the irre- gular ones. Exceptions to the general rule it ($ 144.) To be, being. We are, you are, they are. To have, having. We have, you have, they have. To know, knowing. We know, you know, they know. To do, make, doing. You do, they do. Ty say, tell, saying, telling. You say, tell. Eire,* etant. Nous sommes, vous etes, ils sont. Avoir,* ayant. Nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. Savoir,* sachant. Nous savons, vous savcz ils savent Faire,* faisant. Ire reg. vous faites, ils font. Dire,* digint. \re rig. vous ditcs. 3me reg 1 Tlie third person plural of the third conjugation oflerg, as mav be neon, nn cxoep tfou j as the present participle is changed to ie$oivent. 002 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. In ($114, N. 1,) it was observed, (hat the third person plural of the 3*1 conjugation was irregularly formed ; so it is with the following conjugations ; 1st. Aller, to go; allant : Us vont, they go. 2d. Venir, to come ; venant : Us viennent, they come. Tenir, to keep, hold tenant : Us tiennent, they hold. Acquerir to acquire ; acqucrant : Us acquicrent, they acquire. Mourir, to die (lose life) j mourant : Us meurcnt, they die. 8d, Recevoir. to receive ; recevant ; ttS recoivent, they receive. Devoir, to owe ; devant : Us doive::t, they owe. Mouvoir, to move ; mouvant : Us meuvent, hey move. Pcuvoir, to be able ; pouvant : Us peuvent, they can. Vouloir, to be willing ; voulant : Us veulent, they will. 4th Boire, to drink ; buvant : Us boivent, they drink. Prendre, to take ; prenant : Us prennent, they take. 1. In recevoir, or any other verb in which the c is soft in the infinitive, tin c must remain so throughout, hence, it takes a cedilla (c), when followed by a, o, u. Ex. Je repots, I receive ; regu, received ; forcer, to force ; forcant, forcing, &c. (24 1 .) 2. In verbs ending in ger, the letter e, for the softening of the sound, is retained in all those persons where g is followed by a or o. (24 2 .) 3. In verbs ending in ayer, oyer, uycr, the letter y is changed into t, in all persons where it is followed by e mute. (24*.) 4. In verbs having e (mute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, the letter e has the grave accent (e) in all persons, where the consonant immediately after it, is followed by e mute, as in mener, to guide, to take ; promener, to walk ; achever, to finish, &c. As : I buy, thou buyest, he buys. I lead, thou leadest, he leads. Do you take him to the play ? I do take him thither. J'achete, tu achetes, il achete. Je mene, tu menes, il mene. Le menez-vous au spectacle ? Je 1'y mene. (25 1 .) N. B. Except with the terminations eler, eter, in which the consonant is doubled. (333.) 5. In verbs having e (acute) in the last syllable but one of the infinitive, that c becomes e (grave) \shen followed by a mute syllable. As, seeker, to dry; je seche, I dry; Us sechent, they dry. Ceder, to yield; U cede, he yields, &c. (28*.) 6. The English present tense, expressed (240 in three ways, Hove, I do love, I am loving, is translated by only one French expression : faiine, Hence, je Us, corresponds to, I read, I do read, I am reading. The French have, however, another way much used by them, although unnoticed in grammars. The true, the real present in English is 1 am reading ; the corresponding French is je suis d lire. It consists of two parts. The 1st ea in English is the verb to be. (etre,) in all its persons ; the 2d is, not the F re 1 Aixl aL in evmr aa zpertevoir, to perceive; soncevoir, to conceive, 4 a- GRAMMATICAL SVwoPSlS. 503 Bent participle, (reading,) but the preposition d, followed, of course, by the infinitive, (lire ;) for recollect RULE 1st. Every preposition, except en, governs the infinitive. Then je suts d lire corresponds exactly to / cm reading, although, if translated literally, it would mean, I am to read, which signifies a very different thing. But never mind the literal sense, take only the common acceptation attached to the expression, (76 1 ,) viz : I am reading. I read. I Je suis a lire. Je lis. We are reading. We read. | Nous sommes a lire. N. lisone. The component parts of this expression are quite familiar to the student, and bnt little practice will enable him to use them with ease. This mode f forming the present applies to every other tense. Were ysu reading ? I was. Was he writing ? He was. When they will be eating. Call us, even if we were taking tea, (even should we be, &c.) Will they not be playing ? Yes, they will. 3^A ia travelling, is she not ? The? me not travelling, are they ? art listening, art thou not ? Etiez-vous a lire ? J'et&.s a lire, Etait-il a ecrire ? II etait a eciiie. Quand Us seront a manger. Appelez-nous quand memo noui serions a prendre le the. Ne seront-ils pas a jouer ? Si fait, ils seront a jouer. Elle est a voyager, n'est-ce pas ? Est-ce qu'ils sont a voyager ? (64 2 , N. 2.) Tu es a ecouter, n'est-ce pas ? PARFAIT 1 ou PRESENT COMPOSE. Study carefully the article, and the example at (33 1 , 53.) $ 145. The English Perfect invariably conveys an allusion to the present , the Parfait not only conveys an allusion to the present, bat also refers tc actions past at a time wholly expired, or to actions expressed by the English imperfect. Hence, it corresponds to the English perfect and imperfect tenses. The French use it to express the daily occurrences of life. 1. How long is it since you tasted coffee ? It is three months since I tasted any. Since I wrote to him, France has become a republic. ( 49 2 .) In these sentences, and all similarly formed, although no negative is used, ont is evidently implied, or, at least, a negative turn may be given to them, for the first means, You have NOT tasted coffee for how long a time ? The second means, / Have NOT tasted any these three months. And tho third, 1 have NOT written to him for some time, during which France has become a republic It is evident that the same negative turn cannot be given to, How long if it since your cousin set out ? since you dined ? you cannot say, has not get out, you did not dine. Consequently, as no negative is implied, say, without die NE, Combien y a-t-il que votre cousin est parti ? que vous avez dine ? In translating the sentences in which a negative is implied, but not eg Frequently called Preterit Indefini. But as the word is foreign to the Kuplieb nonjugati'-n, it has no definite sense for the American pupil, while the word Par/ait to nis ovn Perfect, offers at once n clenr idea. 504 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS pressed, the French use NE, but suppress PAS (that is, they suppress on y t part of (he negative, instead of suppressing it altogether as the English do. Hence, the first is translated by Combieny a-l-il que vous N'avez goute de cafe ? The second, by // y a trois mois queje x'en at goiili. The third, by Depuis que je NE lui ai ecrit, la France est devenue republiqj.e. This con- struction takes place only after il y a and depuis que, followed by a definite period of time, and when the French verb is in the parfait, (English perfect tense.) In the present tense, PAS is used : as, II y a troio rnoia que je nu gouts PAS de cafe, It is three months since I taste no coffee, or, I have tasted no co!fce these three months. Depuis que je ne hit ecris PAS, la France esi, &c. Since I do not write to him, France has, &c. (49 2 , Obs. 114.) 2. The English perfect, formed from the present of the auxiliary and the past participle, as, I have spoken; We have written letters; He has exa- mined your cloth ; is the only one usually given in grammars; but there is another, formed by the verbs to have and to be, prefixed to the present par ticiple ; as, / have been speaking ; we have been writing letters ; he has been examining your cloth ; which, although not commonly found in grammars and not quite synonymous with the other perfect, is, nevertheless, constantly used in conversation. Some grammarians have introduced it, and call it the compound form of the perfect. As the French have no tense similarly constructed, they use the parfait, and say: faiparle ; nous avons ecrit dea lettres ; il a examine votre drop. 3. The English say, 1 come from my store, to express that the action ot coming has just taken place. But, when any other verb is used, such as, to speak, to write, &c., instead of saying, I come from speaking, from writing, &-c., they change it to, I have just spoken, written, &c. The French say: Je viens de mon magasin, to signify that the action of coming has just been performed, and they apply the same mode of expression for any other action. Hence, they say: Je viens deparler, d'ecrire, &c. (49 2 , Obs. 115.) It is hoped that this brief explanation will remove a difficulty, which, in 'his case, the great difference of construction presents to many pupils. FIRST FUTURE. Futur. $ 146. 1. The Future Tense, in all French verbs, ends as follows: rci., ras, ra, rons, rez, ront. Therefore, as soon as we know one person, we also know the others. (46 1 .) 2. The first person singular is formed from the infinitive by changing the final r of the first and second conjugations; the oir, of the third, and tho re of the fourth, into rat. Ex. : Infinitive. To love, Fo finish, To receive, To restore, Future. I shall or will love. I shall or will finish. I shall or will receive. I shall CT will restore. Infinitif. Futur. 1st Conj. Aimer, j'aimerai. 2d " Finir, je finirai. 3d " Recevoir, je recevral 4th " Rendre, je rendrai. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 505 Tliou shall or will love, ihou shah or will finish. He shall or will love, he shall or will finish. We shall or \\ ill love, we shall or will finisii. Vou shall cr will love, you shall or will finish. They shall cr will love, ihey shall or Tu aimeras. II aimera Futurs. Tu finira?. Nous aimerons. Vous aimerez. Us aimercmt. II finira. Nous finiww. Vous finirez. Us finiro.vf. Tu rendra*. II rendra, NCOS rend/o*. Vous rendrez, I!s recevronf. (46 1 .) Us rend/wif. Tu recevras II recevro. Nous recevrorcs. Vous recevrez. will finish. TIiou shah or wilt receive, thou shall or will restore. He shall or will receive, he shall or will restore. We shall or will receive, we shall or will restore. You shall or will receive, you shall or will restore. They shall or will receive, they shall or will restore. The fulure tense is somelimes connected with if; sometimes with when. 3. In English, you may say: I will go, if he lends me his horse; or, If ht will lend me his horse. In the firsl : if he lends me, &c., lends is in the present. In the second: If he will lend me, &c., will lend, appears to be in the firsl future lense, although it i& actually in the present ; lor, will lend, in that case, does not mean shall lend, but is willing to lend, or agrees to lend. Scholars are very apt, in similar sentences, to take the word will as a sign of the future, and to use that tense in French, while they should use the present. / will go if he lends me his horse, is readily and correctly translated by: J'trat a't'Z me prtte son cheval. But, 1 will go if he will tend me his horse, is as readily but incorrectly translated by : J'iroi s't'Z mt prttera son cheval. It ought to be : J'irai s'il veut me preter son cheval ; using the present tense of vouloir. Si, in all similar phrases, must be fol- lowed in French by the present tense, never by the future. (46 2 , 06s. 105 and N.) N. B. Translate if he, if (hey, by s'iZ and Vt'Zs. In no other case is \l<* i of si cut off by an apostrophe. 4. On the contrary, the verb following quand, when, must be in the future tense, although the English present is then used ; as, I will go when you do, (or when you go.) J'irai quand vous irez, (not vous allez.) fie will writ* it if you do. Ho will write it when you do. I will tell you of it, if you are here. I will tei. you of it, when you are II 1'ecrira si vous V ecrivez. II 1'ecrira quand vous Mcrirez. Je vous le dirai, si vous vies ici. Je vous le dirai, quand vous tc r ?i here. ici. (46 2 . 06s. 106.) 5. If, instead of iftirn, quand, the word? what, ce qui, ce quo, an t used to finish. > Je parlais, parlais, parlait. j parlions, parliez, parlaient. I Je nnissais, finissais, finissait. ) finissions, h'nissiez, finissaient, wus receivin ? I Je recevais, recevais, recevait. used to receive. ) recevions, receviez, recevaieufc. was sellin g> I Je vendaia, vendais, vendait. used to sell. $ vendions, vendiez, vendaient 3 The only exception to this rule is : We are. I was, or ) J'etais, etuis, etait. Nous sommes. useJ to be. ) etio?is, etiez, etaient. sell 3 recevons vendona l The orthography of the first and second persons singular, and of the third per SOL ,rgular and plural, of the imperfect, was formerly je parlois, tu parlois, il parloit, ils parloient. Some authors still persist in this way of spelling, but they ought not .( be imitated. The orthography v" *bllow was first proposed in 1675, by a lawyei ji tho name of Berain, and has since oeen adopted by the generality of French au thors. According to the ancient orthography, the conditionals, and other words, a& j'aimerais, paraitre, dispara'itre, faible, monnaie, Anglais, Francais, Hollandais, tflandais, &c., were written: j'aimerois, paroltre, disparoitre, foible, monnoic t Angtois, Frattfois, Hollandois, Irlandois, &c. 8 Fainais, fesais, whether spelt fai or fe, the first syllable in the plural of th present, in all the imp,rftct future, and conditionnel, is pronounced fe, the e be-4 Mtt GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. SO 1 } 4. The imperlcct expresses an action begun, but not ended at the pzw time spoken of or else as yet going on. 1 was writing at noon, means, i kad begun to write, but I had not finished at noon. I used to ride when 1 weu in the country, mear.s, I continued to ride, &c. The English given above, corresponds to the French imperfect, and if it were always employed, there would be no difficulty in the use of the French tense ; but the other form of the English imperfect, viz : 1 spoke, I finished, I received, 1 sold, is frc- q'ien:ly used ; and thence the difficulty arises ; for, 1 spoke, I finished, &c. f aiiis. be translated by the French imperfect, only when they mean I was ij eating, or used to speak ; was finishing, or used to finish, &c. (59 1 , &c.) 5. Whon the first person plural of the present indicative ends in ions, as .i3ua oublions, we forget ; nous rions, we laugh ; nous prions, we pray ; the fast and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, havt double t. (60 1 .) Ex. Nous oubliions, nous riions, &c. 6. When the same person plural ends in yons, put an i after :he y. As, Nous croyons, we think ; nous croyions, we were thinking ; nous employons, use; nous employions, were using. And likewise, nous nous asseyionf nous envoywns, essayions, andfuyions, voyions, &.c. (60 1 .) * 118. POTENTIAL, IMPERFECT. Conditional 1. In every French verb it ends in : role, rais, rait, rions, riez, raier.v. 2. Its first person singular is formed by adding * to the first person singulai of the French futur. (See 46 1 , 2 , &c. $ 146.) Futur, rai ; conditionnei, rais. J aurai, j'aurais. Consequently the conditionnei is irregular when the future is. ($ 14G.) I should have, thou wouldst have, he or she would have. We should have, you would have, they would have. I should be, thou wo ;ldst be, he or she would be, We should be, you would be, they would be. I should speak, thou wouldst speak, he or she would speak. V\ 7 e should speak, you would speak, they would speak. J'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurait. Nous aurions, vous aariez, ils on elles auraient. Je serais, tu serais, il cu elle serait. Nous serions, vous sn /., ils ou ellea seraient. Je parlerais, tu parlernis, il ou el!c parlerait. Nous parlerions, vouu parlerie.?, ila ou elles paiieraient. 3. As its name implies, the conditionnei is always connected with a con- dition either expressed or understood. When si (if) accompanies it, that ti must be followed by the French imperfect, 1 regardless of the English 'cnse. i \\ e have already seen (402, Qbs. 105) that si, (if, meaning gr.'nt->ng, that^ &:.., aor/cecta the futur and present. Now, we add, that si connects tLo ccndHicnntl end i&nparfait. When si, however, means whether, it is follow iJ by the condi- lionnel. J do not know if (whether) I would go, even if (supposing thaO I Vf-n taritod. Je ne iais pas si j'irais (cond.) mcme si j'etuis (imparf.) invite. 508 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. If I had money I would have a new coat. r f thou couldst do thb thou wouldst do that. If he could he would. If he would he could. Si j'avais de 1'aigeni j'auraie un habit neut. Si tu savais faire ceci tu voui?aLi faire cela. S'il pouvait il voudrait. S'il voulait il pourrait. 4. COULD and WOULD, connected with the potential, always allude to % future action, and are then translated by the ionditionnel or by the imper feet after si. But COULD and WOULD, alluding to a past, instead of a future lotion, are not to be rendered by the conditionnel, but by a past tense. 1 couLt, by fai puje pouvais, &c. I WOULD, by j'ai vouluje vou- laifj &c. ( w^uld go if I could. Did John and his sister go to the party last night ? No ; John could not go, consequently she would not go. (62 2 , N. at page 326.) J'irais, (cond.) si je pouvais. (in pa.) Jean et sa sceur sont-ils alles a la partie hier soir ? Non ; Jean ne pouvait pas y aller, consequem- ment elle n'a pas voulu y aller. 5. When I wish is followed by the English imperfect, it usually means. I should like to, and must be translated by je voudrais, (622, N. 2.) I wish I knew it I had it. Je voudrais le savoir 1'avoir. (R. 3.) (282, 06s. 65.) I wish he knew it. ( 15112.) Je voudrais qu'il le sut. $149. POTENTIAL MOOD, PERFECT TENSE. Condition, Compose. 1. This is formed from the present of the conditional of the auxiliary, and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. (60 2 .) I should, thou wouldst, he or she would have spoken. We should, you would, they would have spoken. I should, thou wouldst, \ he or she would > departed. have 3 We should, you) would, they would > departed. have ) If I had received my money, I would have bought new shoes. JJ you had risen early, you would not have caught a cold. if she had come, gone? fad he been seen been taken. would you have ho would have J 'aurais, tu aurais, il ou elle aurah parle. Nous aurions, vous auriez, ils ou elles auraient parle. Je serais, tu serais, | parti ; il ou elle serait ) fern, partie. Nous serions, voosj pi. mas. partis; seriez, ils ou elles > pi. fan. par- seraient ) ties. Si j'avais rec,u mon argent, j' aurais achete des souliers neufs. Si vous vous dtiez leve de bonne heure, vous ne vous seriez pas en- rhume. Si el.e etait venue, seriez-vous parti / S'il ivait ete vu, ii ourait Ste* pria GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 509 9. With the conditionnel compose, si, (if,) is generally foUovred by tht oiupcrfect, as seen ebove. 3. Although grammarians usually give the imperfect of the potential with its four signs, would, could, should, might, as a translation of the con- ditionr.el, students must not infer that the single French expression corre- sponds accurately to the four English ones. Would usually stands for the conditionnel, and so does should, when it does not mean ought to; but could and might ought always to be expressed by the French verb pouvoir. I would or should go, if I could. I should or ought to go, if I could. I could go, if I would. I might go, if I would. 1 ought to write, if I could. ( 146.) J'irais si je pouvais. Je devrais y alter si jc pouvais. Je pourrais y aller si je voulais. Je pourrais peut-etre y aller, &c. Je devrais ecrire si je pouvais. Let these be models of those different acceptations, and for the compost : I would or should have gone, if 1 had been able. I should (ought to) have gone, had I been able. I cculd have gone, if I had wished. I might have gone, if I had wished. J'y serais alle sifavais pu. J'aurais du y aller sifavais pu. Yaurait pu y aller si j'avais voulu. raurais peut-elrt pu y aller si j'a\ aii voulu. 4. When 7 wish is followed by the English pluperfect, It means I should have liked, and must be translated by faurais voulu.. . I wish I had been able to go. 1 wish I had known it. (28 2 , Obs. 65.) We wish she had been able to go. Yoi M sb we had known it sooner. J'aurais voulu pouvoir y aller. J'aurais voulu le savoir. (R. 3.) Nous aurions voulu qu'elle peut y aller. Vous auriez voulu que nous le ' sussions plus tot (que nous Vent- sions su.) $150. OF THE IMPERATIVE. Z>e V Imperatif. \. In English, by omitting the nominative you of the second person of the indicative mood, present tense, you obtain the second person plural of the Imperative. As: Indicative present, you come, imperative, come ; you go, go; you write, write, &,c. It is the same in French. Hence, from vous vcnez, by omitting the nominative, vous, you obtain venez for tha imperative, second person plural. From vous allez, allez ; from voia crivei, ecrivez, &.C. How do you obtain the 2d person plu- Comment obtenez-vous la 2de par- ral of the imperative ? sonne plur. de 1'imperatif ? By omitting, as in English, the nomi- En omettant, comme en Anglais, native, you, of the present indi- le nominatif vous de 1'indicatif cative. present. Are tliere any excapticns to this i ulc f Y a-t-il des exceptions a cetfo re>Ie I 51Ct GRAMMATICAL S 1 N P S 1 S. Yes there are four in French, viz: Oui, il y en a quatre on Franjaia savoir : INDICATIF. IMPERATIF. Vcus avez, you hare. Ayez, have. V n us savez, you know. Sachez, know. INDICATIF. IMVERATIV Vous etes, you are. Soyez, be. Vous voulez, you will. Veuillez, bv willing. N, B. In reflective verbs there are two pronouns, vous, of the same per- son, a nominative and objective one ; Vous vous habillez, you dress your* self. When, to form the imperative, yot omit the nominative vous, ycu^ the objective vous, yourself, remains with the verb, viz: habillez-toMff, dress yourself ; amusez-wws, enjoy yourself. (43 1 .) HINT. We have in this article put a few questions and answers in French, to show the teacher and student how easily it can be done, and to induce them to attempt it. 2. The first person plural is in French obtained by dropping the nomi- native nous, we. Hence, nous venons, we come, becomes venons, let us come ; nous allons, we go : allons, let us go ; nous ecrivons, we write ; ecrivons, let us write, &c. Comment obtenez-vous la Ire per- j En omettant le nominatif nous du sonne pluriel de /imperatif ? [ present de 1'indicatif. 3. Ayons, let us have ; soyons, let us be ; sachons, let us know ; veuillons, "et us be willing, are the four exceptions to this rule. 4. Let me, laissez-moi, followed both in English and French by an infini- ti"e, as, Let me see, laissez-moi voir ; let me go, laissez-moi aller ; let me be, laissez-moi etre ; let me have, laissez-moi avoir ; let me read, laissez~ mai lire, &c., may be considered as the first person singular of the impera- tive. This is an innovation, I know', therefore I merely suggest its adoption. If introduced in the imperative of every verb, the expression, let me, laissez- moi, so frequently used in both languages, will soon become perfectly familiar. But if not placed there, as it has no other appropriate situation, it is usually overlooked and not learned. What can be considered as the first person singular of the imperative ? Let me, followed by the infinitive of the verb to be conjugated. Let me do it tell it to them. Que peut-on conaiderer comme la Ire pers. sing, de 1'imperatif ? Laissez-moi, suivi par 1'infinitif du verbe qu'on conjugue. Laissez-moi le faire le leur dire. 5. The second person singular is obtained, in all French verbs, from the first person singular of the indicative, by omitting the pronoun je, I Present. Imperative. I Present Imperat. 2d pers. siig . I speak, speak thou. I Je parle, parle. 1 i \Vnen the second person singular of the imperative ends in , it takes s after it, .isfore tho relative pronouns en, y. Ex. Offres en a ta saur, offer some to thy sister. fortes-y tes livres, carry thy books thither. But when en is a preposition, the imp rative takes no s. Ex. Donn-i, en cctte occasion, des preuves de ton xdli ; Givi Ol tii IB o? ^asion, proofs of thy zeal. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 511 Impfrat. td pe r s. sing. viens. aperc.018. prends. Present Imperative. Present. I come, come thou. Je viens, I perceive perceive thou. J'ajercois, I take, talce thou. Je prends, The five following verbs must be excepted from this rule : /at, I have , imperat. aie, have thou ; je suis, I am ; sois, be thou ; je vais, I go va, go thou ; je sais, I know ; sache, know thou ; je veux, I am willing ; veuitte, be thou willing. The imperative va takes s, when it is followed by the relative pronoun y. Sx. Vas-y, go thou thither ; but when there is another verb after the pio- noun y, va must be written without an s. Ex. Va y donner Vordre, go thither to give the order ; va y faire un tour, go thither to take a turn. In the expression va-Cen. go away, an apostrophe must be placed after tho letter t, and not a hyphen, as it is not here the euphonic t, but te, an apos trophe supplying the place of e before a vowel. 6. The third persons singular and plural are like the same persons of the subjunctive present, ($ 151 1,) omitting the antecedent which governs that mood, but retaining the que, and the pronouns il, Us, elle, dies, on. The other persons admit of no pronouns before them. Let him go, qu'il aille; Ifet them come, qu'ils viennent ; let anyone speak, qu'on parle ; come, tiens ; let us see, voyons ; know, sachez. 7. Imperative of the five irregular verbs : I^et me have, have (thou), let him have. Let us hava, have (ye), let them h. Let me he, be (thou), let him he. Let us be, be (ye), let them be. Let me go, go (thou), let her go. Let us go, go (ye), let them go. Lot me kno w(thou) , let one know, know, Let us k., know (ye), let all know. Let me be be willing, let him will, willing, Let us be w.,be willing, let them will. Laissez-mniavoiiyiie, qu'il ait. Ayons, ayez, qu'ils aient. Laissez-moi etre, sois, qu'il soi^. Soyons, eoyez, qu'ils coient. Laissez-moi allcr, va, qu'elle aille. Allons, allez, qu'elles aillent. L.-moi savoir, sache, qu'on sache. Sachons, tinchez, quetoussnchent Laissez-moi veuille, qu'il veuillo. vouloir, Veuillons, veuillez, qu'ils veuilleat 8. Examples for the regular verbs : Present Imperative. You voua Le* me thou Let us you epeak, parlez, , Laissez-ir i parler, parle, parions, parlez. finis!), finissez, finir, finis, finissons, finissez. receive, recevez ; recevoir, recoie, recevona, rece-t ez lose, perdez, perdre, perds, perdons, perdez NEGATIVELY. Let nr.ft n 't Ne rne laissez pas Do (thou) not broak, casser, ne casse pas, eaild, batir, ne batis pas, frvre, devoir, ne dois pas, toetdio, ronrlre, ne rends pas, NKGATIVEMENl. Let us not Do (you) no* ne cassons pns, ne casse t paa nebatissons pas, ne batisacz pa* r.e devons pas, ne devez pas. ne rendor.s pas. ne rendez pa 512 GRAMMATICAL SYNOFSIi Affirmatively, the objective pronouns are placed alter : (V> 54, 55, &e- Let mo Laissez-moi Do (thou) .... Letus- .. Do.-., ir/ok for it, le chercher, cherche-le, clierchons-le, cherchez-l'y. punish them, les punir, punis-moi, punissons-les, punissez-nous, perceive some, en apercevorr, apercois-en, apercevons-en, apercevez-en-na gel. 1 ;t to yon, vous la vencre, vends-le lui, vendons-la-leur, vendez-nou * go there, to it, y allsr, vas-y, (Oft.atS .) allons-y, allez-y. take him Ihere, 1'y menerj menes-y-moi, menons-y-en, mcnez-nous-r Negatively, the objective pronouns are placed before. Let me not Ne me laissez pas jrisg it, 1'apporter, gc there, to it, lend him any, c>we them, to them, Let me dress myself, cure myself, sit down, put myself, go away, y aller, lui en preter, Do not Let us not Do not.... ne les apporte ne leur appor- n'en apportes pas, tons rien, plus. n'y va pas, n'y allons pas, n'y allezplus. ne m'en prete ne le lui pretons ne a leur prettf pas, plus, pas. les leur devoir, ne tui doisrien, ne leur en de- ne la lui dvea VOBS pu pa*. Imperatif des Vcrbes Rejlechis. Laissez-moi thyself, ourselves, haimie-toi, babillons-noHS, gueris-toi, assieds-toi, m'habiller, me guerir, m'asseoir, me mettre, m'en aller, yourself- vt *. lialiillex-vous. guerissons-nous, guerissez-voua. asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous. mets-toi, mettons-nous, va-t'en,(N. B. at I.) allons- nous-en, mettez-vous. allez-vous-en NEGATIVEMENT. Let me not Ne me Inisse-z pas Do not Let us not Do not....,, go to be 9. Let him have, quil ait, Let us have, ayons, having always been used ia English- French grammars, is it not strange, that let me have, should nov have been introduced? 10. Let me may also be translated by the second person sirsj/ular, viz : laissc-moi aller, let (thou) me go ; laisse-moi prendre, let (thou) me lake, &c. 11. Let him have it, may be translated in two ways: first, by qu'il l'att > as it is generally in grammars, or, secondly, by laissez-le Vavoir. Let us write them ; may be rendered, first, by icrivons-les, or laissez-vous les icrire- These expressions, however, are not synonymous. The first, meaning. we must set about writing them, the second, requesting leave to do it. 12. Come and see me, do. Take your pencil and write, are expressions frequently used in English. The French sometimes translate them literally. !*nJ say : prenez votre crayon et ecrivez ; but they more frequently put th* second verb in the infinitive mood instead of the imperative, as : Prenei rotre crayon pour ecrire ; vemz me voir,je vous en pric, &c. (54, Except. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 51S * 161. SUBJUNCT 1VE MOOD. Mode Subjomtit. PRESENT TENSE. Present. I In all French verbs, it ends in e, es, e, ions, iez, ent. To form it, attend to this Rule : 1. 1st part. The THIKD person plural is exactly like that of the PRESENT INDICATIVE; from which, by dropping the nt, you obtain the first and third persons singular. An * added to either, gives the second. 2d part. The first and second persons plural are exactly like those of the The following are regularly formed : They ils quoiqu'ils je tu come, drink, viennent, viennent, boivent, boivent, vienne, boive, viennes, boives, il nenne, ">oive, AOUB VOUB \enione, venicz. ouvions, uviez. Exceptions, eight in all: 1. It is time for them to go ; me to go, 77 eft trmjis qu'ils aillent; j'aille, 2. Although they can; I can, Quoiqu'ils puissent; puisse, 3. In case they are worth ; En cas qu'ils vnillent ;' 4. He wishes them to have ; II v< vt qu'ils aient; 5. Om condition they will ; A condition qu'ils veuillent ; . Not that they know of; Pas qu'ils saehent; 7. Without their bring so ; Sans qu'ils le soient ; 8. T\eyhad better do it; theetogo, him to go, us to go, you to go tu ailles, il allies, n.allions, v. alliez. thou cnnst, lie, we, you c' 1. I deserve that people should laugh at me. 2. I hope that people will (not should) laugh at me. The word will gives to the second sentence a decisive, a precise meaning, which is not conveyed by the word should in the first. Hence the second Is translated in French by the future of the indicative, the first by the sub* junctive present. 1. Je merite qu'on se moque de moi. (sub.)) Do the two verbs, / detervt 2. J'e'spere qu'on se moquerade moi. (ind.)5 and 1 hope, express afTectiona of the soul or not ? How inadequate are those wholesale rules ! And hew perplexed must the student be when he has no other guide ! As a first corollary to Rule 2, we say that, after a French verb, fcilcved by que or qui, if the fourth or fifth English form above is to be translated it must be by the French subjunctive. He wishes me to laugh, il veal que. j Tie. He is pleased at our speaking, il est content que nous parlions. As a second corollary, that, after a French verb followed by que or ?ui, the infinitive of a passive verb, that can be changed to should, must be trana lated by the French subjunctive, with the indefinite pronoun on as a nomi latlve, as in the example, 7 deserve to be laughed at. (77 1 , Note.) GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 513 3. When the antecedent is a superlative, or a word having a snpeilativ* (training; such as le seul, Vunique, the only one ; le premier, the first, le dernier, the last, and any ordinal number, deuxieme, &c., the subjunctive follows. The gospel is the finest present that God has made to man. is the first, the last, the only VD ume that we have. L'fivangile est le plus beau present que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. C'est le premier, le dernier, le seui. volume que nous ayons. When the antecedent is a unipersonal verb, or used uniperscnally :- II faut qu'il vienne. II convient qu'il le fasse. 11 est juste qu'il le sache. risulte, it results; i7 arrive, there lie must come. U is suitable he should do it. f.t is right for him to know it Except: R iensuit, it follows; il happens, and il est, accompanied by an adjective denoting evidence, certaintr, probability; such as; clair, clear ; certain, certain ; evident, evident ; vrai, true; probable, pr>bable, &c., which govern the indicative, when affirma- tively used, bit follow, when interrogative, negative, or conditional. It follows from it that you are my II s'enfuit, il risulte, que vous ctea friend. mon ami. It often happens that one is deceived. II arrive souvent qu'on est trompe. 5. When the antecedent is interrogative, negative, or conditional. (The words peu, little ; d peine, hardly, having a negative meaning, come under thi rule.) I believe we have some. Do you believe we have any f 1 do not think that we have any. We have but few men who can doit. He has hardly a scholar who can translate it. Je crois que nous en avons. Croyez-vous que nous en ayons t Je ne crois pas que nous en ayons. Nous avons peu d'hommesqui puis- sent le faire. II a a peine un e'colier qui puisse le traduire. is: S'il est vrai que vous Vayez ; while is : S'il est vrai que vous 1'avez ; the in- If it be true that you havr it, If it is true that you have it, dicative is used because there is no supposition, no condition implied, the meaning being positive, Sines you have it, and not conditional, as in the first sentence, which means : Should you have it. It is not certain, true, sure, that you be my friend. Ore is not frequently deceived by one's friends. II n'est pas certain, vrai, stir que vous soyez mon ami. II n'arrive pas souvent qu'on soit irompe' par ses amis. 6. Any verb expressing fear, such as craindre, to fear ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; when used affirmatively, governs the subjunctive with ne before it. But ne is not used if the phrase is interrogative, negative, or condi- tional. (78.) 7. When the verbs mentioned at 6 are used negatively, they govern th nbjunctire without nc. (78 4 .) 516 GRAMMATICAL SYKOP3IS, 8. The \erbs douter, to doubt, and nier. to deny, when negative, ne before the subjunctive. (78 4 .) 9. The conjunction que employed in the second member of a eentencr to avoid the repetition of a conjunction used in the first, governs the same mood as the word it stands for. (78 3 .) 10. Tho word que, used to avoid the repetition of si and of ether con- junctions such as afin que, soil que, sans que, avant que, &c., govem& thi sub'jnctive. (78 3 .) 1... Quelque, whatever, whatsoever however, is connected Li three ways *nct aivvays governs the subjunctive. 1st WAY. Quelque (before an adjective, used .vithout a noun) is indecli oaMe. (80 1 .) 2d WAY. Quelque before a noun (accompanied or not by an adjective Egrees with that noun. (80 1 .) 3d WAY. Immediately before a verb, whatever, whatsoever, is rendered, is French, by two words, quel and que. And then, qncl, alone, agrees wit! the subject of the verb que is invariable. (80 1 .) 12. As the antecedent belongs to the indicative mood, it is necessary tr give rales for the correspondence of the tenses of the indicative and sub junctive. 1. If the antecedent is present or future, it governs the present or perfta of the subjunctive. You must come. You will have to come, (be necessary for you.) You must have come when I was out. Jlfaut que vous veniez. llfaudra que vous veniez. 11 faut (ilfaudra.) que vous soyez venu quandf etais dehors. It a condition is annexed, then use the imperfect and pluperfect. I do not think you would do it if you were not compelled. I do not think you would have done it had you not been compelled. Je ne crois pas que vous le fissiet si Von ne vous y contraignait. Je ne crois pas que vous 1'eussiea fait si Ton ne vous y cut contraint. 2. The imperfect, the past tenses,) , r i j 7 / i , > The imperfect and pluperfect. 79*.) . id tne condilionnels require i * J i r J and I was not certain you would come. I was not sure you would have come. I wish you had more fortitude. (62 2 , N. 2.) Je n^etais pas stir que vous mnssiez. Je n'ilais pas sur que vous fussier venu. Je v&udrais que vous eussiez plus da fermete. 13. Whatever or whatsoever (meaning all thitigs soever] is generally ex- pressed by quelque chose que ou quoi que, quoi que ce soil que, when at th beginning of a sentence, and only by quoi que ce soil ou Jia, after a verb. Tho subjunctive follows that French antecedent. (80 1 .) Whoever, whomsoever, qui que ce soil, qui que ce fut. also governs Ult Hioiunct've. (.SO 1 .) GRAMMATICAL SfNOPSlS. SH 14. li' the verb which follows uui, que, dent, de ce, ou. expresses doubt Wicerlainty, &c., use the subjunctive. If not, the indicative. (80 2 .) J5. The subjunctive is employed at the beginning of a sentence, tc express surprise, a desire, or an imprecation ; and also instead of qmiwi memc, though, or at, if, suppressed. iSO 2 .) IMPERFECT. Imparfait. (79'.) $152. The Imperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the prcttnl. (S3 1 , $ 153,) by changing the final ai into asse, for the verbs of the first con- jugation, and by adding se to those of the other three conjugations. Aa ihe preterit has four sets of terminations; Jst, ai; 2d, is; 3d, us; 4th, ins ; this imperfect has also four. The nrsi set, as with the preterit, belongs exclusively to the first conjugation. Those sets are : let set, asse, asses, at, assions, assiez, acscnt 3d " isse, isses, it, issions, issiez, issent. 3d " usse, usses, fit, ussuns, ussiez, usseut. Ith " insse, insses, int, inssions, inssiez. insseut Connecting them with verbs, we will have lat. A though I spoke, quoique je i>arlaste, (from parlai ) Cu parlances, il parldt, nous parlassions, vous parlassiez, Us parlassent. 2d. I had to say, to tell, il fallait quo je disse, (from dis.) Tu dieses, il dit, nous dissions, vous dissiez, Us dissent. 3d. Whether I had, soil que j'es, (from y *.?.) Tu cusses, il eut, nous eusssions, vous eussiez, Us eussent. 4th. Provided I held, 1 kept, pourvu que je tinsse, (from titis.) Tu tinsses, il tint, nous tinssions, vous tin.\siez, Us tinssent. No exception. Attend to your list of antecedents. This imperfect is used after the indicative imperfect, all past tenses, and the conditionnels. ($ 1512.) Perfect, (page 418.) I Parfait. Pluperfect, 'p. 419.) j Plusqueparfait. * 153. INDICATIVE, SECOND IMPERFECT. 1 Preterit* The Preterit of the indicative mood has, for regular verbs, three sets of 1 Lindley Murray defines it thus: " The imperfect tense represents the action 01 yvcnt, either as past and finished, or as remaining unfinished at a certain timo past* 48, '' I loved her for her modesty and virtue," " They were travelling post when he aiet them. ' The French Preterit corresponds only to t!e first clause, viz: to tfi action of event past and finished, or to R. C. Smith's definition, which is: The im- perfect tense expresses what took place in timo pst, Lowever distant : as, "John vied." ? I merely use the word PrlMrftiarithftttt i!\e adjective dtfini (usually added) ho- ;auae the pupil will more easily distinguish the two tenses; one being the Pretirit, uiiother the Prtttrit anttrieur, (68 3 ). If those terms, definite and indefinite, wero -|p5ii<.'d to (he F.nglish tenses, it would be advisable, perhaps necessary to retaiD :hem in French, but as they are new to the American student, they are moie per- [i Enduire,* to lay over, enduit. J'enduisis, " i i " " It uire,* to induce, .'mluit. J'induisis, " * i " Instruire,* to instruct, instruit. J'instruisis, " ' " K Introduiro," to introduce, introduit. Rrduire,* Siduire,* to reduce, to seduce, ruduit. seduit. Je seduisis, " < c 20 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS niere, I SAW HIM last year ; le mois dernier, last month ; il y a quime J0t ; 11 faut lui aider. It is necessary to help him. i' Imaging ; Je m'imagine y litre. I fancy myself to be there. Laisser ; Laissez-le dire etfaire. Let him say and da. Nier; 11 me Vavoir. He denies having it. Oser; 11 n'ose Vucouer. He dares not confess it. Farattre ; 11 parait V entendre. He seems to understand it. Penser; 11 a pense tomber. He had like to have fallen. Pretendre; Pretend-il \efaire? Does he pretend to do it ? Pouvoir ; 11 n'a pas pu me le dire. He could not tell it me. Reconnaitre ; Je reconnais Vavoir dit. I acknowledge to have said It Regarder ; Je vous regards /atre. I am looking at you doing it. Retourner ; Elle retourna la voir. She returned to see him. Savoir ; II salt oil la trouver. He knows where tojind her. Sembler; Elle semble avoir pear. She seems to be afraid. Souhailer ; Je souhaite la voir .2 I wish to fee tier. ' Aimer mieux, valff'.r mieux followed by another verb in the infinitive, require ,'< jafore tha second infinitive ; as, I would rather stay than go. I J'aimerais mieux tester quo d'y aller. It is hotter to go than stay alone. I // vaut mieux y aller quo de rester teul. t {*ovhaitor may aso be used with de ; as, Je souhaite de voir, cr Je le voir, ;-. ; *eo him. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 523 Sontenir; II soutient V avoir vu. Valoir m/cus ft vaut mieux Jui ccrireA Vcnir ; Viendrez-vous me voir .'2 Voir; Je vois venir votre soeur. Vculoir y Elle ne veut pas tester. 5. FRENCH VERBS and ADJECTIVES that govern the following infinitive &y moans of the preposition a. N. B. This usually takes place after nouns, used in a partitive senne ; as i He maintains he las seen it. It is better to wr.te to hor. Will you come to see me! I see your sister coming. She will not stay. be has pleasure in seeing her. 11 a du plaisir a la wir. (21 2 , 25 s *.) is there vanity in thinking so f Y a-t-il de la vanite a le penser ' 'Abaisser a, Stoop to. Dftsagreable d, de ,2 'Jiaagre table, to Accoutumer to. Donner d, G/fe to. A mer d, Lite to. s'Echauffer d, If eat to. Ai.se a, .Easy to. s'Effbrcer d, Sjiend one's self t in Amuser d. Amuse to, with. Effroyable djde,3 Frightful to. Aiiimer d, Animate to. Employer d, Employ to, l/ to n'Appliquer d, Apply to. Encourager d, Encourage to. Apprendre d, Learn to. Enclin d, Inclined to. A Appreter d, Get ready to. Engager d, Induce to. Aspirer d, Aspirt to. Enhardir d, Embolden to. Assidu d, Assiduous to. Enseignor d, TeacA to. B'Attacher d, Sttc& to. s'Etudier d, Study to. Autoriser d, Authorise to. Eire d, .Be to. Avoir d, //awe to. Exact d, zac< to. Boau d, de,3 F/ne to. Exercer d, Exercise to. Bon d, de,3 Good to. Exciter d, .Erct'Je to. Charmant d, Charming to. Exposer d, Expose to. Chercher d, See/c to. Facile, d, d,3 .Easy to. Condamner d, Condemn to. se Fatiguer d, Get ttred with. Condescendre d, Condescend to, Forcer d, de,* Force to. Consister d, Consist to, in. Gagner d, Gam to. Contraindre d, de,< Compel to, Habile d, C/erer to. CV;ntribuer d,< Contribute to Habituer d, Accustom to. Demander d, jisfc to. Hesiter d, Hesitate to. Depenser d, Spend to, in. Horrible d, de,3 siorrid to. Dernier d, Las* to. Inciter d, Incite to. 1 See Note 2, page 522. 2 Fenir used (or to &e /st, to /tave /us*, requires de before the following inf uiiivt mid in the sense of to happen, it requires d; as: I have just seen her. I Je vt'ens DE Ja roir. If she should happen to know it. 1 Si elle venait a le savcir. * These adjectives require d, when the verb which precedes them has a persinal nominative; they require de, when the nominative is impersonal.' Ex. Cela est agreable, 6on, beau, a voir, a dire, kfaire. Tht is agreeable, fine to e3 ; a c II est agrgalle, ban, beau, de voir, de dire, defaire. It is agreeab'e, fine to eta, & c < 7? or d, as it sounds best, in the active sense ; always de in the passive ; :is, t 9n m'o oft/r'ffl de or a lefaire. \ They have obliged me to do it /'ai ^t/ oblige de fe /aire. ' I huve beeo .bliged to do it. 524 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, Ingeuieux a, Ingenious to. Preparer d, Prepare to. Inviter d, Invite to. Pret d, /Jeady to Laid d, Ugly to. Prompt d, Quick to. Lent d, Slow to. Propre d, Fit to. Mnnqiier a, Omit to. Recommencer c, Begin again to oMettre a, Set about to Renoncer a, Renounce to. Montrer d, Show to. Resoudre d, Resolve to. Obliger a, de,i Oblige to. Res:er d, 5/ay to. s'Obs; ner a, Obstinate to. Reussir d, Succeed to, in Occupe a, jJttsy to. Servir d, Serve to. s'Opiniatrer d, Obstinate to. Soigneui < Avertir de, Warn to. Dire de, Te/i to. s'Aviser de, Bethink to. Discontinuer de, Discontinue to Blamer de, Blame to. Disconvenir de, Disown to. Capable de, Capable of, to. Dispenser (7e, Dispense with. Cesser de, Cease to. Dissuader c/c, Dissuade from. Charjr?r de, Charge to. Doux de, Pleasant to. Charmede, Ravi de, Delighted with EC r ire de, IFri/e to. Commander de, Command to. s'Eflbrcer de, Endeavor to Comrnencer de, d,3 Begin to. Enjoindre de^ Enjoin to. Oonjurerde, Entreat to. Empecher de, Prevent to. Conseiller de, Advise to. tj'Empresser de, Eager to. Consoler de, Console for. Knnuye de, Tired of. Content de, Content tD. Enrage de, Enraged at. Continuer de, d,3 Continue to Entreprendre de, Undertake to Convainerede, Convince of. Essayer de, d, 3 Try to. Convenir de, Agrre to Etonnfe de, Astonished at Craindre de, Pea* to. Eviter ./e, ,4rpirft. Curieux de, Curious tc. Excuser ie, Exwst. to l See Ncte 4, page 523. 3 Aa it Bounds best, i. e., / to a 1 jcond of several d< ^ See Note 3, page 5-3. .id the sound of several d, aud A to Rvoid Out GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 525 Kxempter de, Erempt from. Plaindre de, Pity to, for. Ezhorter de, i,i Exhort to. Possible de, Possible to. Fache df, Sorry to. Prescrire de, Prescribe to. Feicdre de, Feign to. Presser de, Press t(f. Ficir de. Finish to. Prier de, Request to. te Flatter dt, Flatter to. Promet.tre de, Promise to. to Carder de,' Take rare to. Proposer de, Propose to. Gronder de. Scold for. Recoinmandei 7e, RfcoiniHfnii to. e Hater de, Haste to. Refuser de, Refuse to. Heureux de., Happy to. Regretter de, Regret to. linpossibl* de Impossible to. se Rejouir de, Rejoice to Incapable de, Incapable of. Remercier de, Tliank for. Inspirer d;, Inspire to. se Repentir de. Repent of, to. Jp.ger a propos de, TliioJc proper to. Reprocher de, Reproach for. wurer de, Swear to. Resoudre de, Resolve to. Jusib Je, Just to. Risquer de, Uj'sfc to. Lassi d-;, T/red of, with. Rougir de, Llush to. Libre de, At liberty to. Satisfait de, Satisfied to, witto Marnier de, Send word to Sollicker de, Solicit to. Manquer de, Faj7 to. Sommer de, Summon tf . Menacer de, Threaten to. seSoucier de, Care to. Meriter d, Deserve to. Souliaiter de, ir/s/i to. Necessaire de, Necessary to. Soupconner de, Suspect to. Negliger d, Neglect to. se Souvenir de, Remember to. Oilrir de, O/7er to. Si i tlii e de, Sufficient to. Omettre d< , 0>/m to. Suggi rer de, Suggest to. Ordonner de, Order to. Sup|>lierde, Entreat to. Oul)lier de, Forget to. Sur de, Sre to. Pardonner de, Forgive for. Surpris de, Surprised to. Permettro de, Permit to. Tacher de, Endeavor to. Persuader de, Persuade to. Tarder de, Long- to. soPiquer de, Pretznd to. se Vanter de, Bvortof. 7. The French infinitive preceded by d, is used to translate the English present participle after the verb n'importe quoi, il faut qu'elle vienne. II faut qu'elle soit d pratiquer. $ 157 .PAST PARTICIPLE. Participe Passe. 1. At '31') we saw that the Past Participle, (Participe Passe,) was usual!) placed a/for the auxiliaries AVOIR, to have, ETRE, to be, to form the pas' ar compound tenses. [Young pupils, attend carefully to this direction. 1 I haw seen. Hadst thou given ? j J'at tw. As-tu donnd ? Mo shall have written. (58 1 .) II aura dcrit. i SOB Nuts 3, page 524. 626 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS She ma/ have left. We would have gone out. (60 2 .) They would have arrived sooner. Would you have dressed yourselves ? Elle pen.t avoir l&isse*, Nous serions sortis. Us seraient arrives plus to Vous seriez-vous habilliB f $ 1602.) Ces demoiselles se seraienl pliquees a la musique. Quoiqu'elle se soit trompee. II faut que tu aies eu peur. (792.) II ne croyait pas que vous euss:e2 parle si bien et si long-temps. up Je suis connu. Je suis connue. Nous sommes louts. Nous sommes louies Those young ladies would have ap- plied themselves to music. Although she made a mistake. Thou must have been afraid. He did not think you would have spoken so well and so long. 2. Since the past participle is connected sometimes with etre, sometimes with avoir, we must give rules on the subject. When connected with etre, the jarticipe passe is considered as an adjec live, and agrees with the nominative or subject of the verb etre, to be. Thai takes place in passive verbs, (42 1 ,) and in the neuter verbs that take etre foi an auxiliary, (34 1 .) In passive verbs, A gentleman must translate 1 am known, by A lady must translate I am known, by Boys must translate We are praised, by Girls must translate We are praised, by With neuter verbs having etre for auxiliary, say : He was born. She was born. II est ne. Elle est ne'e. They were born, (m.) These ladies Us sont nes. Ces dames sontnees were born. John, wilt thou have returned by 9 o'clock ? She would not have died so soon. Elle ne serait pas morte si tot. 3. Connected with avoir, the participe passe agrees, not with the norm native or subject, but with the direct object (regime direct, $43) of the par~ ticipe, when that regime precedes the participe, but not when it comes after. The regime indirect ($ 44) has no influence on the parlictpe. Have you received my letters ? [ Avez-vous regu mes lettres ? The regjme, mes lettres, coming after re$u, the participe does not change. But, in: The letters which you have received, the regime, which, preceding the participe, the latter must agree with the former, and be feminine plural. Hence the French phrase : s : Les lettres que vous avcz revues. Jean, seras-tu revenu a 9 heures? Nous avons corrige les themes quo vous avez ecrits et envoyes. Combien de coups avez- vous t ires P We have corrected the exercises that you have written and sent. Flow many shots did you fire? Combien de coups, the regime, being before, the participe is declinable. If have fired six. | J'en ai tire six. Here the regime is six ; and as it comes after the particiye, the lattei is indeclinable. (3 1 1 .) 4 The objective pronoun en may be regime direct ($43} or indiroct, GRAMMA'lICAL SYNOPSIS. 527 $44,) but the parttcipe is never declinable after it ; because en has neithoi gender nor number, and consequently, when regime direct, it cannot change the participe. As regime indirect, it has no in'luence on it. Have you gathered any flowers? 1 have gathered some. He has not answered the two letters he has received from them. Avez-vous cueilli des fleurs ? Ven ai cueilli. ($43.) II n'a pas repondu aux deux leltrefi qu j \\ en a regues. ($ 44.) Here the participe is regues, fern, plur., not on account cf en, regime iiidi- rict, but of que, its regime direct, which precedes, and with which it musi agree, independently of en. 5. The rule given at 3 is easily observed in plain and ordinary cases in which the regime direct is easily distinguished ; but there are sentences, in which even grammarians can hardly decide. Without prasenting those knotty points to the student, I will give him the principle by which he is to be guided, and leave the rest to his judgment. Sometimes after the participle, preceded by an object, thei is a verb in the infinitive ; then it is necessary to consider whether the object is governed by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows it. If the object is governed by the participle, the participle must bo of the same gender and number as that object. Ex. : The letter I have given him to copy. ] La lettre que je lui ai donnee & copier. If the object is governed by the infinitive which follows the participle, the participle has no agreement with the object. As : The letter I have told him to copy. | La lettre que je lui ai dit de copier. 1 The participles plu , pleased ; dit, owed, onght ; pu, been able, and voutu, been willing ; do not agree with the object that precedes them, because tho infinitive of the foregoing verb is understood after them. Ex. : I have done him all the services that 1 Je lui ai rendu tous les services que I have been able, (to do understood.) ' que j'ai pu, (lui rendre understood.) * 1571.-PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Participe Present. The Present Participle in English is used after every preposition except the preposition to, and it enters in the formation of every tense of almost every verb, as : I am speaking, I was, have been, had been, shall be, shall havs been, &c. &c., speaking ; while in French, it is excluded from thoao tenses, and is much used only in connexion with the preposition en, the i If you are uncertain whether the object is governed by the partic'ple, 01 by th laSuiti/e which follows it, transpose the words, and see after which the object me? y.ora properly be placed. if the object can be placed after the participle, as in the first instance, The lett^ 1 iatw given him to copy, which may be turned, I have given him the letter to scpy, ha participle given governs the object letter, and it must agree with it. If the object comes more properly after the infinitive, as in tho second instanen The letter I havt told him to copy, which might be turned, I have told him to cop> tfn letter, (not, the letter to copy,) the object letter is governed bj the infinitiva f aorv, and tke r>a*ticlple has no agreement with it. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. only one which in that language governs the present participle. In conee quence of that radical difference, it was thought inexpedient to direct the attention of the pupil to that part of the verb, for fear that its knowledge should lead him into constant errors, whilst a want of it could not be felt, since the French construction does not require it. But now that he has gone through the various portions of the verb, and that the same danger is not to be apprehended, we proceed to its introduction. As the present participle always ends in ant, and is invariable, it is attended with no difficulty. 1. It is formed from the first person plural of the present indicative, by changing its termination ons into ant. Ire Conj. We speak, Nous parlons. Speaking, Parlarit. 2dc Conj. We finish, Nous finissons. Finishing, Finissant. 3me Conj. We receive, Nous recevons. Receiving, Recevant. ime Conj. We sell, Nous vendons. Selling, Vendant. 2. The five following verbs form exceptions to this rule : ayant. etaht. dcheant. sachant. scant. 3. It is used when an agent performs two actions at the same time, as ill the following examples : L'homme mange en courant. Je corrige en lisant. Je questionne en parlant. Vous parlez en me repondant. Je m'instruis en lisant. To have, having. Avoir, To be, being. Etre, To become due, 1 becoming due. Echoir, To know, knowing. Savoir, To become, becoming. Seoir, The man eats while running. 1 correct while reading. I question while speaking. You speak while answering me. I improve by reading. Take exercise by walking, (walk for exercise.) Let us go leisurely to the storo. When must he do it ? In going, (as he goes.) Call there as you come. Do they sing while dancing ? People ruin themselves by gambling. Prends de 1'exercice en marchant Allons au magasin en promenant. Quand faut-il qu'il le fasse ? En s'en allant. Passez-y en venant. Chantent-ils en dansant ? On se ruine en jouant. 4. En being the only French preposition which governs the present par ticiple, as we have said, (R. 1,) it follows that, whatever may be the Eng lish preposition connected with the present participle, it can be translated only by EN, if the French participle is used. While digging the foundation, they found a skeleton. The house being built, we occupied it. Waving studied, I recited well. En creusant les fondements, >n trouva un squelette. (67 1 , N. 1.) La maison etant bade, nous 1'occu- panics. Ayant e'tudie', je recitai bien. In speaking of a lensa. or a giveu portion of timo. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 529 5. The present participle qualifying a noun, is considered as an adjective, .Knglish, participial adjective; French, adjectif verbal,) and agrees with the ftoun in gender and number. A. charming man. A charming woman. Charming men. Charming women. Un homme charmant. Une femme charmante. Des homines charmants. Des iemmes charmantcs. 6. The English present participle, showing the action of a nominative case, is translated in French by the present participle, which is of ccursc invariable. This actor, dancing gracefully, is much admired. Those actresses, dancing gracefully, are much admired. Get acteur, dansant avec graces, est tres-admire. Ces actrices, dansant avec graces, sont tres-admirees. 7. The English present participle, relating to an objective case, may be translated by the French present participle, but the indicative is preferable. I found her coming here. See those children playing in the ehade. Je la trouvai qui venait ici. Vois ces enfants ge jouant (ou qui jouent) sous 1'ombrage. 8. The English present participle, governed by a we* 5 or a preposition, (en excepted,) is translated by a French injinitive. I see her reading, and I am tired of I Je la vois lire, et je suis fatigue de waiting for her. I I'attendre. 9 The English present participle, used as a nominative in a general sense, is never translated by the French present participle, but by an injinitive, or a noun, if there is one synonymous to the verb. Playing is tin delight of children. I Jouer est le delice des enfants ; or, j Le jeu est le delice des enfants. 10. If not taken in a general sense, use a noun; or, if no synonymous noun can be found, give the sentence another turn. He gives all his time to studying. Their ringing was much admired. [s that the cause of his being poor ? What is the reason of your coming so late? II donne tout son temps a V etude. Leur chant fut fort admire. Est-ce la cause de sa pauvrete ? Pourquoi venez-vou* si tard ? 11. The present partiwle, after to be, is translated by the infinitive. (Sco I 15G- -7.) $ 158. NEUTER VERBS. Verbes Neutres. 1. In neuter verbs the action is intransitive, that is, it remains in tho agent. They are conjugated like the active. The latter, however, always form their past tenses with the auxiliary avoir* to have ; on the contrary, cme neuter verbs take etre* to be, and others avoir,* for their auxiliary, others again take sometimes avoir* and sometimes etre* according ae action or state is more particularly meant. 45 530 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS, 2. When conjugated with et re, their past participles agree with the nonrt native of that verb. But, when conjugated with avoir, their past participle! are invariable, for they have no regime direct with which they can agree. 3. Verbs which without being reflective, take it re, to be, as auxiii ary. (34 1 .) To arrive, happen, attain, be born, become, come, come baci, come in, decay, die, arnver. parvenir. naltre. devenir. venir. revenir. entrer. dechoir. mourir. To die, disagree, fall, go. go out, happen, come to pass, sur venir. intervene, interveuir. set out, partir. deceder. discon venir. tomber. aller. sortir. $159. PASSIVE VERBS. Verbes Passifs. 1. Those verbs, although extensively used in English, are not so in French. In both languages they are formed, as taught (42 1 ), by meant ot the auxiliary verb to be, etre, joined to the past participle of any active ve,J>. 2. The past participle being then used as an adjective, agrees with thn nominative or subject of the verb to be. The boy is praised by his friends. The girl is praised by them. The boys are all blamed. Are not these girls admired ? Le gargon est lone par ses amis. Lafille est louee par eux. Les gargons sont tons blames. Cesfilles ne sont-elles pas admirees t 3. The French, instead of the passive voice, use the active form with on for nominative, or else the reflective verb. The student should then be able to change any one form to another with ease. Active voice. / shut the door. Passive voice. The door is shut by Jeferme la porte. La port e est fermee par moi. The preposition by and the pronoun it governs are frequently left out ; foi example, the passive voice of, people say, is, it is said, without adding by the people. People know, it is known. They believe, it is believed. It is advisable to exercise the scholar on these alterations, principally from the English passive to the French active form with the pronoun on ; as : Is it expected ? Is it believed ? We are told. On nous dit. And to the reflective form. As The church will be opened soon. Their house was sold yesterday. Water is carried everywhere. Le croit-on ? It will be seen. On verra. L'dglise s'ouvrira bientoi. Leur maison se vendit hier. L'eau se conduit partout. 4. The infinitive of a passive verb coming after another verb, is rendered oy on, as nominative indefinite of the following verb, which must be put in its proper tense. (77 1 , N. B.) I fear to be laughed at. (Subj.) I Je crains qu'on ne se moque de moi. He ia certain to be laughed at. (Ind.) I II est certain qu'on se mo$u,era de lui GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 5S) S 100.- REFLECTED VERBS. Verbes Reflechis, 1. Wnen the action falls upon the agent, and the objective case refers to the same person as the nominative, the verb is called Reflective. The French use nearly all their active verbs under a reflective form. They arc as fond of that kind of verbs as the English are of the passive form, ($ 159,) and frequently translate the latter by .t. 2. In reflective verbs, the pronoun of the object is of the same person an that of the subject. Each person is therefore conjugated with a double personal pronoun. One is nominative ; the other objective, or reflective. (* 71, &c.) [ . . . myself, Je me . Thou . . . thysulf, Tu te . , He... himself, II She ... herself, Elle It ... itself, II, elle One . . . one's self, On We . . . ourselves. Nous nous. You . . . yourselves. Vous vous. They . . . themselves. Us se . . . They . . . themselves. Elles sc. [se. The men . . themselves. Leshommea The girls- . themselves. Les filles se. N. B. The third person reflective is always sefor both genders and numbers. 3. In the imperative there is but one pronoun, the reflective or objective one. ($ 150, N. B.) Habillez-wou*, dress yourself. Ne te trompe pas, do not make a mistake. Allons-Jtotts-en, let us go away. (En, there, means from here, from there.) 4. In French, all reflective verbs form their compound tenses with the auxiliary verb etre, while, in English, they take to have. As, in this case, the verb to be is used in place of to have, the past participle of a reflective verb does not, as in neuter verbs, (34 ', $ 158,) and passive verbs, (42 1 , $ 159,) agree with the subject, but with the direct object, when that object is before, in the same manner as when to have (avoir) is the auxiliary. (32 1 , Obs. 75.) Hence the French write, Nous nous sommes coupes ; the past participle taking an *, because nous, its direct object, is before ; but in Nous nous 8omir.es coupe les doigts, the participle coup6 has no s, because its object (les doigts) comes after. 5. Most passive verbs having an inanimate object for their nominatives are reflected in French ; as, Les mauvaises nouvelles se rcpandent plus promptement que les bonnes, Bad news is sooner spread than good. On t'ttonne de 1'accroissement rapide des Etats-Unis, People are astonished at the rapid increase of the United States. ($ 1593.; ADVERBS. $ 161. 1. ADVERBS qualifying verbs, are on that account placed as near tha rerb as possible. The French say : 3'aime mieux le bceuf que le mouton ; not I'aime le nccuf mieux, because the adverb mieux qualifies the verb j'aimt, *nd not the noun, bceuf. (51 3 .) 2. Adverbs, expressed in a single word, are usually placed after the verb, in a simple tense, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in a com one ; as: 532 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. He writes well. He has written well He has written badly. II ecrit lien. II a bien ecrit. 11 a nuil ecrit. 3. If the adverb is expressed in two or more words, il goee afiar the verb, whether the tense is simple or compound. He writes properly. He will write tolerably well, She sang well, as usual. II dcrit comme ilfaut. II ecrira passablement bien. Elle a bien chante, comme d Vordi 4. Combien, how much, many f ne . . . quo only, but ; trop, too much, &c. ; beaucoup, much, many-; assez, enough ; ne . . . guere, 6ut little, are called by the French adverbs of quantity. (Dir. 7 13 1 .) In English, to form adverbs from adjectives, ,he final ly is added ; as, wise, wisely. In French, that final is ment. 5. Adjectives which end in a vowel, become adverbs by adding ment to it; as, sage, poli, ingenu, adjectives; sagement, poliment, ingenumcnt, adverbs. 6. Adjectives ending in nt, change that final to mment ; as, constant, pru- dent, patient, adjectives; constamment, prudemment, patiemment, adverbs. 7. Adjectives which end neither in a vowel, nor in nt, become abverbs by adding ment to their feminine termination ; as, grand, doux, heureux, adjectives masculine ; grande, douce, heureuse, adjectives feminine ; grande- ment, greatly ; doucemer.t, softly, slowly, sweetly; heureusement, happily luckily, adverbs. NEGATIONS. $ 162. LA connaissance que nous avons deja de la negation nous met a meme de deduire les neuf articles suivants : ART. 1. La negation est gendralement en deux mots, dont Tun est inva- riablement neou 7t', et 1'autre un complement, qui change selon les circon- stances. 1 2. Ne se place toujours avant le verbe, et avant les pronoms objectifs, s'il y en a. 3. Dans les temps simples, ne est avant, et le complement apres le verbe. 4. Dans les temps composes, le complement se place quelque fois avant le participe passe" : Je ne 1'ai pas vu. 5. Quelque fois apres. Je 7i'ai vu personne. 6. Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dans lei temps simples et avant 1'auxiliaire dans les composes, quand la ndgatioa forme le nominatif. Mien ne le d6courage, nothing discourages him. i The word complement means here completing the sense. GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. 533 7. Avant I'infiitiiif ne et son complement sont joints, et se placent ge"nd raicment avant : Ne nen avoir. 8. Quand le verbe est omis, le complement seul exprime la ne'gatian : Pat ITU, not he. 9. Neither, non plus. ART. 3. Ne, avant, le complement apres. Liste alphabdtique de sSga- lions avec les temps simples : But, only. (13.) Ne .... que . . . But little, only a little. (13'.) Ne .... guere, pas beaucoup, qu un peu. Neither ... nor .. (before nouns. (5 1 .) Ne .... ni .... ni. Neither ... nor .. (before verbs, sim- Ne . . . . ni ne ni ne. ple tenses.) Je n'ecris, ne lis, ni ne tratluia PAllemand. Never. (3K) Ne .... jamais. Never any more. Ne.... jamais plus, cr plus jamais Never anything. Ne .... jamais rien. ' Ne .... pas de, point de. 1 1 pfo not any. (2 1 .) < Ne .... pas un, pas une. Ne .... aucun, aucune. 1 w Ne . . . . nul, nulle. Nobody, no one, no person, not any- Ne .... personne. (7*.) body. No longer, no more, not any longer, Ne . . . . plus. (36 2 .) more. No longer, anything, nothing more, Ne .... plus rien. &c. None, not any. N'en . . pas, point aucun, no. In no manner, no wise, by no means. Ne .... d' aucune maniere. No sooner. (682, $ 155.) Ne pasplutot. Not. Ne .... pas ou point. 1 Not anything, nothing. (3 1 .) Ne .... rien. Not anywhere, nowhere. (46 2 .) Ne . ... nulle part. Not at all, not in the least. Ne .... pas du tout, point du tou Not in the least. Ne .... pas le moins du monde. Not much more, not many more, only Ne .... guere plus plus guere. a little more. Nothing but. Ne .... que rien que. Only a little, not much. (13 1 .) Ne .... qu'un peu, guere, pas beaa coup. Only a little more, a fev Jkore. Ne .... guere, pas beaucoup, qu'ua peu, plus. 1 Puncts find out some difference between pax and point. There is some, but it If only one well acquainted with the language that could find use for the distinction UfcO at pleasure, the one or the other, merely conrulting euphony. (412 ) 634 GRAMMATICAL SYNOPSIS. NEGATIONS AVEC LES TEMPS COMPOSES. 4. Liste des "egations, dont le complement est place avant le p irticipa passe": f Je n'en ai guere vu. (3 1 1 .) But a little, only a little. < Je w'en ai pas beaucoup vu. ( Je w'en aipas vu beaucoup. Neitner Never. Never.. nor . . nor . . (before verbs.) more or any more. Never . . . anything. No. No longer, no more, not any longer, &c. No longer, anything, &c. None, not any. No sooner. Not. Nothing, not . . . anything. Not much more. None at all, not . . . the least bit. Je ne 1'ai ni vu, ni entendu. Je ne 1'ai jamais vu. Je ne 1' ai jamais plus (ouplus vu. Je ne lui ai jamais rien Jit. Je ne lui ai pas donne d' argent. Je ne lui en ai plus donne". Je ne lui ai plus rien donne. Ne lui en ai-je pas donne" ? II ne 1'eut pas plutot dit qu'il . . . Ne le lui avez-vous pas donne ? Ne leur avez-vous rien dit ? Je ne lui en ai guere plus donne. Je ne lui en ai pas donne beaucoup plus. Je ne lui en ai pas du tout donne. Je ne lui en ai point donne du tout. 5. Liste des negations dont le complement est place* apres le participe. But, only. But a little, only a little. Neither . . . nor . . . nor . . . No, not any. Nobody, no one, not . . any one, &c. In no manner, nowise, by no means. Nowhere, not ... anywhere. Nothing Vut. Only a little more. Not ... in the least ... not ... a bit. Je n'ai vu JV'en a-t-il pris qu'un peu ? ./V a-t-il vu ni 1'un ni 1'autre ? .ZVen avez-vous appris aucun ? Qui n'a vu personne ? Je ne 1'ai fait d'aucune maniere. Ne 1'avons-nous laisse nulle part f II n'a fait que chanter, (rien que.} Je w'en ai apportd ^rt'un peu plus. II ne 1'a point change le moins du monde. 6. Negations employees comme nominatifs ou sujets. Le complement se met avant ne et tous deux avant le verbe dane lei temps simples et avant 1'auxiiiaire dans les composes. Neither : Neither suit him. Neither could suit her. (past.) Nol>ody : No one will do it. Nobody did it. None, not one: None will go. Not one went. Ni 1'un ni 1'autre ne lui conviennent, Ni 1'un ni 1'autre n'ont pu lui con- vcnir. Personne ne le fera. Personne ne 1'a fait. Aucun n'ira. Nulle n'ira. Nul 'y a (Ste. Aucune n'y et altfo WRAMMATICAL 8TNOPUIS. 53* Nothing : Nothing ever Nothing displeases him. Nothing disturbed her. Nothing ever pleases him. Nothing ever pleased her. Nobody ever pleased her. Eien ne lui deplaTt. Rien ne 1'a derangee. Jamais rien ne lui platt. Rien jamais ne lui a piu. Jamais personne ne lui a plu. 7, Avec 1'infinitif. Ne et son complement son joints et places avant. He likes to do nothing. I II aime a ne rien faire. (43 s .) He fears he shall have none. I II craint de ne pas en avoir. II y a quelques exceptions, que nous allons presenter. He has a mind to take but one. He is afraid to have none. Tell him to invite nobody. He has a mind to go nowhere. II a envie de n'en prendre qu'ux. II a peur de n'en avoir aucun. Dites-lui de n'inviter personne. II a envie de n'aller nullepart. Les autres suivent la 7me regie generate. II est essentiel cependan d'ajouter que tres-souvent 1'infinitif peut se mettre entre ne et ie comple- ment. He fears he can never get it. \ " cra ! nt ea&. Us ont parle, tAey Aae spoken IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Je parlai*, I was speaking. J'avais pnrle, / had spoken. Tu parlais, *Acit wast speaking. Tu avais parle, thou hndxt spoken 11 parlait, he was speak nig. 11 avail parle, he had spoken. Nous piirlions, toe were speaking. Vousi parliez, you were speaking. Us parlaient, they were speaking. Nous avions parle, ice had spoken, Vous aviez parle, you had spoken, Ila avaient purle, Uiey had spoken. PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. Je parlai, / spoke. J'eus parle, 1 had spoken. Tu parlas, thou spokest. Tu eus parle, thou hudst spokmu 11 parla, he spoke. 11 eut parle, he had spoken. Nous parlames, we spoke. Vous parlates, you spoke. Nous euraes parle, we had spoken. Vous elites parle, you had spoken. Us parle rent, they spoke. Us eureut parle, they had spoken. FUTURE. PAST FUTURE. Je parlerai, / *Aa// speak. Tu parleras, tAou s/to^ speak. iPaurai parle, / shall have spoken. Tu auras parle, thou shall have spoken. 11 parlera, Ae *Aotf speak. 11 aura parle, Ae shall have spoken. Nous parlerons, toe s/ta// speak. Nous aurons par!6, we shall have spoken. Vous parlerez, y g Que j'eusse parle, that I might ~\ ^ Que tu eusses parle, that thou mightst 4 Qu'il eut parlti, that he might \ 5 Que nous eusslons parle, that we might ( Jj Que vous eussiez parle, that you might 1 t Qu'ils eussent parle, that they might ] -3 642 SECOND CONJUGATION 1R. SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR. INFINITIVE MOOD. Finir, to finish. I Avoir fini, PARTICIPLES. Fini, Jeflnls, Tu finis, II finit, Nous finissons, Vous finissez, [Is finisscut, finishing. finished. INDICATIVE MOOD. Ayant fini. having finished. IMPERFECT. Ifinish. thoufinishest. he finishes. we finish. Vou finish. Jiey finish. I was finishing. Tu finissais, thou wast finishing. H finissait, he was finishing. Nous (missions, we were finishing. Vous finissiez, you were finishing. Ils finissaient, they were finishing. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I finished. thou finishedst. he finished. Je finis, Tu finis, H finit, Nous finimes, Vous finites, Ila finirent, Je finirai, Tu finiras, II finira, Nous finirons, Vous finirez, Us nniront, CONDITIONAL Je finirais, Tu finirais, II finirait, Nous finirions, Vous finiriez, Ha finiraien'. we finished, you finished, they finished. RE. Ishallfinish. thou shalt finish. he shall finish. we shall finish. you shall finish. they shall finish. PRESENT. / should finish. thou shouldst finish. he should finish. we should finish. you should finish. they should finish. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. J'ai fini, / have finished. Tu as fini, thou hast finished. II a fini, he has finished. Nous avons fini, we have finished. Vous avez fini, you have finished. Ils ont fini, they have finished. PLUPERFECT. J'avais fini, I had finished. Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished. II avait fini, he had fini shed. Nous avions fini, we had finished. Vous aviez fini, you had finished. Ils avaient fini, they hadfinit.'ied. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. J'eus fini, I had finished Tu ens fini, thou hadst finished, II cut fini, he had finished. Nous eumes fini, we had finished. Vous eutes fini, you had finished. Ils eurent fini, they had finished. PAST FUTURE. J'aurai fini, 7 shall have finished, Tu auras fini, thou shalt have finished II aura fini, he shall have finished, Nous aurons fini, we shall have finished. Vous aurez fini, you shall have finished, Ds auront fini, they shall have finished. CONDITIONAL PAST. J'aurais fini, I should}'* PRESENT. Que je finisse, that I may finish. Hue tu finisses, that thou mayst finish. Qu'il finisse, that he may finish. Que nous finissions, that we may finish. Que vous finissiez, that you may finish. Qu'ils finisseat, that they may finish. IMPERFECT Quo je finisse ; that I might finish. Que tu finisses, that thou mightst finish. Qu'il flnit, that he might finish. Que nous finissons, that we might finish. Que vous finisaksz, that you might finish. iu'ite flnisaent, that they might finish. Tu aurais fiiii, thou shouldst -| II aurait fini, he should ! 'g Nous aurions fini, we should ( Vous auriez flni, you should I g ns auraient fini, they should ) IMPERATIVE MOOD. Finis, finish (thou.) Finissons, let us finish. Finissez, finish (you.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRETERIT Que j'aie fini, Que tu aies fini, Qu'il ait fini, Que nous ayons fini, Que vous ayez flni, Qu'ils aient flni, that I may ~\ t that thou mayst * that he may I j that we may f * that you may I j- that they may J PLUPERFECT. Quej'eusse fini, that f might] - Que tu cusses fini, that thou mightst Qu'il eut fini, that he might 1 -S Que nous eussions fini, that we might [S Que vous eussiez fini, that you mvrht J g Qu'ils eussent fini, that tiiey might I jj THIRD CONJUGATION OIR. B43 Reoevoh Recevaut, Recu, THIRD CONJUGATION IN OIR. INFINITIVE MOOD. 1ENT. PA! to receive. \ Avoir recu, PARTICIPLES. receiving: received. INDICATIVE MOOD. Ayant recu, to have reafived, having received PRESENT. fa reeois, / receive. Tu recoiSj thou receivest. II re9oit, he receives. Nous recevons, we receive. Vous recevez, you receive. (is recoivent, they receive. IMPERFECT. Je recevais, / was receiving. Tu recevais, thou wast receiving. II recevait, he was receiving. Nous recevions, we were receiving. Vous receviez, you were receiving. Ils recevaient, they were receiving. PRETERIT DEFINITE. Je recus, / received. Tu reeus, II recut, Nous recumes, Vous refutes, Qs refurent, Je recevrai, Tu recevras, II recevra, Nous recevrons, Vous recevrez, Us recevront, thou receiveditt. he received, we received, you received, they received. B. I shall receive. thou ghalt receive. he shall receive. we shall receive. you shall receive. they shall receive. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. Je recevrais, Tu recevrais, li recevrait, Nous recevrions, Vous recevriez, Ite recevraient, / should receive, thou shouldst receive, he should recr*ve. IP* should receive, you should receive, they should receive. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. J*ai recu, / have received Tu as regu, thou hast received, II a recu, he has received. Nous avons recu, we have received, Vous avez recu, you have received, Ils out recu, they have received. PLUPERFECT. J'avais recu, Tu avais recu, II avait recu, Nous avioiis rer,u, Vous aviez recu, Ils avaieut rec'u, / had received, thou hadst received, he had received, we had received, you had received, they had received. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. J'eus regu, / had received, Tu eus recu, thou hadst received II cut recu, he had received Nous euraes regu, we had received Vous eutes refu, you had received Da eurent rc-cii, they had received PAST FUTURE. J'aurai recu, / shall have received Tu auras recu, thou shalt have received II aura refo, he shall have received Nous aurons recu, wt shall have received Vous aurez recu, you shall have received Ils auront recu, they shall have received CONDITIONAL PAST. J'aurais re9U, / should have received, Tu aurais re9U, thou shouldst have received II aurait recu, he should have received Nous aurions recu, we should have received, Vous auriez regu, you should have received. Us auraient re^u, they should have received, PRESENT. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Recois, receive (thou.) Recevons, let us receive. Recevez, receive (you.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRETERIT. Quo je reoive, that I may receive. Que tu re^oivea, that thou mayst receive. Qu'il receive, that he may receive. Uue nous recevions, that we may receive. Que vous receviez, that you may receive. (iu'ils recoivent, that they may receive. IMPERFECT. Ouejerefusse, that!} g Que tu recusses, tlat thou '55 au'il recut, that h* ( g Uue nous rccussions, that we ( * ftue vous recussiez, that you ? Qu'ila recussent, that tliey] '^ Que j'aie recu, that I may Que tu aies recu, that thou mayst Qu'il ait recu, that he may Que nous ayons recu, that we may Que vous ayez re^u, that you may Qu'ils aient re$u, that they may PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse recu, that I might Que tu eusses recu, that thou mightst Qu'il eut recu, that he might Que nous eussions reU, that we might Que vous eussiez re^u, that you might Qu'ils eussent recu, that they might 544 FOUR'IH CONJUGATION RE. Vondre, I OURTH CONJUGATION IN RE INFINITIVE MOOD. SENT. I PA! to sell. I Avoir vendu, PARTICIPLES. to hive sold Vendant, selling. PAST. PAST. Ayant vendu, having told. Veiidu, sold. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. Je vends, / sell. J'ai vendu, 7 have sold. Tu vends, thou aellest. Tu as vendu, thou hast sold. 11 vend, he sells. 11 a vendu, he has sold. Nous vendons, we sell. Nous avons vendu, we have sold. Vous vendez, you sell. Vous avez vendu, you have sold. Us vendent, they sell. Us ont vendu, they have sold. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Je vendais, 7 was selling. J'avais vendu, I had said. Tu vendais, thou wast selling. Tu avais vendu, thou hadst sold. U vendait, . he was selling. 11 avail vendu, he had sold. Nous vendions, we were selling. Nous avions vendu, we had sold. Vous vendiez, you were selling. Vous aviez vendu, you had sold. Us vendaient, they were selling. Us avaient vendu, they had sold. PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. Je vendis, Isold. Peus vendu, I had sold. Tu vendis, thou soldcst. Tu eus vendu, *Jiou hadst sold. fl vendit, he sold. U eut vendu, he had sold. Nous vcndimes, we sold. Nous eumes vendu, we had sold. Vous vendites, you sold. Vous eutes vendu, you had sold. Us vendirent, they sold. Us eurent vendu, they had sold. FUTURE. PAST FUTURE. Je vendrai, I shall sell. J'aurai vendu, 7 shall have sold. Tu vendras, thou shalt sell. Tu auras vendu, thou shalt have sold. H vendra, he shall sell. 11 aura vendu, he shall have sold. Nous vendrons, we shall sell. Nous aurons vendu, we shall have sold. Vous vendrez, you shall sell. Vous aurez veudu, you shall have sold. Us vendront, they shall sell. Us aurent vendu, they shall have sold. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. CONDITIONAL PAST. Je vendrais, 7 should sell. J'aurais vendu, 7 should have sold. Tu vendrais, . thou shouldst sell. Tu aurais vendu, thou shouldst have sold. U vendrait, he should sell. 11 aurait vendu, he should have sold. Nous vendriong. we should sell. Nous aurions vendu, we should have sold. Vous vendriez, you should sell. Us vendraient, they should sell. Vous auriez vendu, you should have sold, Us auraient vendu, they should have sold. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Vends, sell (thou.) Vendons, let us sell. Vendez, sell (you.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Hue je vende, that I may sell. Que tu-vendes, that thou mayst sell. Qu'il vcnde, that he may sell. Que nous vendions, that we may sell. Quo vous vendiez, that you may sell. Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell. IMPKRFKCT. Quo je vendisse, that I might sell. Que tu vendisses, that thou mightst sell. Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. Que nous vendissions, that we might sell. Que vous vendissiez, that you might sell. Ou'ils vendissent, that Uicy might sell. PRETERIT. Que j'aie vendu, that I may ~| Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst Qu'il ait vendu, that he may I Que nous ayons vendu, that we -aiav [ Que vous ayez vendu, that you may [ Qu'ils aient veudu, that tliey may , PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse vendu, that I might ' Quetu eusses vendu, that thou mighttt Qu'il eut vendu, that he might Que nouseussions vendu, that we might Que vous eussiez veudu, that you mipht Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might. I REFLECTED VERB. 545 CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTED VERB. INFINITIVE MOOD. So lover, Be levant, Love, to rise. I S'etre leve, PARTICIPLES. rising. to have rises, PAST. / rise. tkou riseat. he rises. we rise. j-Ti ris6 they rise. PRESENT, Je me levo, Tu te leves, n se leve, Noiis nous levons, Vous vous levez, lib se levent, IMPERFECT. Je me levais, / was rising. Tu te levais, tkou wast rising. II se levait, he was rising. Nous nous levions, we were rising. Vous vous leviez, you were rising. lid se levaient, they were rising: PRETERIT DEFINITE. S'etant love, having rtfen. risen. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. Je me levai, Tu te levas, 11 se leva, Nous nous levftmcs, Vous vous levates, Ila se leverent, FUTURE. Je me leverai, Tu te leveras, II se levera, Nous nous levcrons, Vous vous leverez, Ils se leveront, I rose. thou rosest. he rose. we rose. you rose. they ruse. I shall rise. thou skalt rise. he shall rise. we shall rise. you shall rise. they shall rise. CONDITIONAl PRESENT. Je me leverais, Tu te leverais, n se leverai t, Nous nous leverions, Vous voua leveriez, Ils se leveraient, / should rise. thou shouldst rise. he should rise. we should rise. you should rise. tiiey should rise. Je me suis kn e, Tu t'es leve, II s'est leve, Nous nous sommes leves, Vous vous etes leves, Ils se sont leves, PRESENT. Que je me leve, that I may rise. Que lu te leves, that thou mayst rise. Qu'il se leve, that he may rise. Que nous nous levions, that we may rise. Qtie vous vous leviez, that you may rise. Qu'ils ee levent, that they ma$ rise. IMPERFECT. Quo je me levasse, that f~\ Que tu te levasses, tnat thou Qu'il se levat, that he { 'Z Quo nous nous levassions, that we (^ Quo vous vous levassics, Un'iis se lovusacnt, I have rteen thou hast risen, he has risen, we have risen, you have risen, they have risen. PLUPERFECT. Je m'etais leve, / had risen, Tu t'etais leve, thou hadst risen. II s'etait Iev6, he had risen. Nous nous etions levds, we had risen, Vous vous etiez leves, you had risen. Ils s'e talent leves, i/u-y had risen. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. Je me fus leve, / had risen. Tu te fus leve, thou hadst risen. II se fut leve, he had risen. Nous nous filmes leves, we had risen. Vous vous futes leves, you had risen, Us se furent leves, they had risen. PAST FUTURE. Je me serai leve, / shall have risen. Tu te seras leve, thou shall have risen. II se sera leve, he shall have risen. Nous nous serons leves, we shall have risen, Vous vous serez leves, you shall have risen, Ils se seront leves, they shall have risen. CONDITIONAL PAST. Je me serais leve, / should ' Tu te serais leve, II se serait leve, Nous nous serions leves, Vous vous seriez leves, Ils se seraient leves, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Leve-toi, rise (thou.) Levons-nous, let us rise. Levez-vous, rise (you.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRETERIT. Que je me sois leve, that /) Que tu te sois leve, that, thou \ Qu'il se soit leve, that he(^ Que nous nous soyons leves, that we I > Que vous vous soyez leves, that you | Qu'ils se soient leves, that they) PLUPERFECT. Que je me fusse leve, that I Que tit te fusses leve, that thou Qu'il se fut love, that he Qne nous nous fussions levee, that we Qu vous vous fussie/. leves, that you Qu'ils se fussent leves, that they thou shouldst \ he should [ we should ( you should they should) ' Viat Jiat 546 IRREGULAR VERBS. IRREGULAF PRIMITIVE TENSES. FRBSKNT OF THK PARTICIPLE PARTICIPLE am ran PRETERIT INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST DKFINI1K. FIR3T /Uler, tj ffO. Allaut. Alle. Je vais. rallai. Earoyer^ to send. Envoyant. Envoye. J'envoio. PenvoyaL SECOND A.cqu6rir, to acquire. Acquerant. Acquis. J'acquiers J'acquis. Bouillir, Courir, Cueillir, Dormir, Faillir, Fuir, Mentir, to boil, to run. to gather, to sleep, to fail, to flee, to lie. Bouillant. Courant. Cueillant. Dormant. Faillant. Fuyant. Mentant. Bouilli. Couru. Cueilli. Dormi. Failli. Fui. Menti. Je bous. Je cours. Je cueille. Je dors. Je faux. Je fuis. Je mens. Je bouillia. Je courus. Je cueillis. Je donnis. Je faill is. Je fuis. Je mentis. Mourir, to die. Muurunt. Mort . T e meurs. Je mourus. Offrir, Ouvrir, Partir, Sentir, Sortir, to offer, to open, to set out. to feel, to go out. Offrant. Ouvrant. Partant. SentanU Sortant. Ofiert. Ouvert. Parti. Senti. Sorti. Poflre. J'ouvre. Jo para. Je oena. Je aora. J'ofiFria. J'ouvris. Je partis. Je geutis. Jo 8ortis. Tenir, to hold. Tenant. Tenu. Je tiens. Jo tins. TressaiUir, to start. TreseaiLlant. TressaiUi < e tressaiUo. fe tressaillid. Venir to come. Venant. Venu. Je viens. Je vins. Veti* to doV.it Vetant. Vfetu. Je vets. Je vetiA, TIIIRC Falloir, to bs necessary Falu. U faut. 11 fallut. Mouvoir, to move. Mouvant. Mu. Je Meus. Je nius. Pleuvoir, Pourvoii 1 , to rain, to provide. Pleuvant. Pourvoyant. Plu. Pourvu, n pleut. Je pourvois. 11 plut. Je pourris Pouvoir, Prtvaloir, to be able, to prevail. Pouvant. Pre volant. Pu. Prevalu. Je peux or je puis. Je prdvaux. Jepua. tfnabooir, to sit down. S'asseyant. Assis. Je ro'aasie/ls. Jom'aeeiB. Bavoir, to know. Bachant Su. Jesais TRBEGULAB VERBS. 647 FERBS. DERIVED TENSES. NOTE. Persons regularly formed are in Italia CONJUGATION. ( Pres. indicative. Je vais, tu yas, fl va, nous aliens, vous allez, Us vont. Fut. J'iuii, ,lore, KcrI;tJ, to hatch, to write. Ecrivant. Eclos. Ecrit. 11 eclot, J'ecris. Pecrivis. Exclure. to exclude. Excluant. Exclu. J'exclus. J'cxclua. Faire, to n-ike, to do. Faisant. Fait. Je fais. Jefis. Joindre, Lire, to join, to read. Joignant. Lisant. Joint, Lu. Je joins. Je Us. SiSf* Luire, to shinK. Luisant. Lui. Je luis. Mettre, to put. Mettant. Mis. Je mets. Je mis. Moudre, to grind. Moulant. Moulu. Je mouds. Je moulua. Naitre, Nuire, to be born, to harm. Naissant. Nuisant. Ne. Nui. Je nais. Je nuis. Je naquis. Je nuisis. lrendre, to take. Prenant. Pris. Je prends. Je pris. Repondre, Resoudre, to answer to resolve. Repondant, Resolvant. Repondu. Resous, resolu. Je reponds. Je re sous. Je repondi* Je resolus. Rire, to laugh. Riant. Ri. Je ris. Je ris. Romprc, Suffire, to break, to suffice. Rompant. Suffisaut. Rompu. Suffl. Je romps. Je suflis. Je rompis, Je suffis. Suivre, to follow. Suiv.int. Suivi. Je suis. Je suivis. Be taire, to be silent, Se taisant. Tu. Je me tais. Je me tua. Traire, to milk. Trayant. Trait. Je trais. Vaincre, to vanquish, to live. Vivant. Vaincu Vecu. Je vaincs. Jevifi. Je vainqnib Jo vecua. IRREGULAR VERBS. 549 FERES. DERIVED TENSES. NOTE. Persons regularly formed are in italics. ( Prea. ind, Je TO.UX, tu vaux, il vaut, nous valons, vous valcz-, Us Talent. Fut. Je < raudrai, tu vaudras, etc. Cond. Je vaudrais, tu vaudrais, etc. No imper. Pres. suhj ( Que jc vaille, que tu vaiUes, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous caliei, qu'ils vaillent. Put. Jo verrai tu verras. etc. Cond. je verrais, tu verrais, etc. ' Pres. tnd. Je veux, tu veux, il vent, .. voulons, vous voider* ils veulent. Fut. Ja i Tcudnii, tu voud^as, etc. Cond. Je voudrais, tu voudrais, etc. No inipe-,: Pres. snbj. \ (^.ueje veuille, que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que nous voulions, que vous vo'uliez, qu'il.* Ivt'uillent. CONJUGATION. ( Pres. ind. Je bois, tu bois^ il boit, nous buvons, vous buvez, ils boivcnt. Prts. subj. < Que je boive, que tu boivecs qu'il boive, que nous buvions, que vous buvitz, qu'ile ( boiveut. Pres. tnd. Je dis, tudis, il dit^ nous disons, vous dites, Us diaent. DMire, eontrc- dire, interdirc, medire, predire, make vous dedisez, vous contredisezj vous mcdisei, v, el de lui r,:dre tous les services possibles. Vous luifournirez sur ses doubles re$us tout 1'argent dont il pourra avoir besom jusqu'a la concur- rence de dix mille francs, dont vous pourrez vous rembourser sur moi, en me faisant passer un de ces regus. J'ai 1'honneur d'etre, avec la plus par faite estime, Monsieur, votre, &c. Confirmation de la precedent*. Mi P , a Paris. A BOSTON, Ic 10 Avril, 1819. MONSIEUR: Ce qui precede est la copie d'une lettre de credit qui VCTLS sera remise par Monsieur T. Nelton, Americain. Comme je desire obligcr. 6i famiiie avec qui je suis en liaison ; et pour qui j'ai accepte", avec plaisir, 1'occasion de lui etre utile, en lui fournissant quelques lettres dc credit et Je recommandation sur differentes places, je vous supplie tres-instam- ment d' avoir egarda celle que je lui ai donnee sur vous, et de lui procurer tous les amusements qui pourront lui rendre le sejour de Paris agre"able. Vous lui fournirez, s'il vous plait, pour ses besoins, jusqu'a dix mille francs ; et vous en prendrez une double quittance, dont vous m'en enverrez une, el prendrez sur moi votre rembours des avanccs que vous lui aurez faites. Ji joins ici sa signature, afin quo vous puissiez la reconnaitre dans l'occasion ; et vous guider en consequence. ! Je me flatte que vous me saurez gr i l'ex/,cption de Josephine, qui aattrape un petit rhume. Mercredi. Mille compliments de Mme. de Segur a Mile, le Compte : elle la prie de vi accorder le plaisir de sa societe* a diner Dimanche prochain. On e mettra a table a cinq heures. I Nom du principal thfeatre do Pans. 558 IxiCCEIL EPISTOLAIRE. Keponse. Mille compliments de Mile, le C.; elle ne manquera pas de se rendro 9 I'invitation do Mme. de S. Lundi, 4 Novembre, 1849 Devant donner une lecture, Jeudi procknin a 8 heures du soir, dans man grand salon d'etude, sur la litterature Franaise, je prends la liberte de vouf envoyer un billet d'admission pour vous et votre aimable famille. Je tache- rai de nc pas etre ennuyeux. Mardi matin, 5 Nov., !Si9. rJous acceptons avec reconnaissance I'invitation a votre lecture sur la lit- ferature P'ranc.aise. C'est un sujet pour nous si attrayant que je vons dcfia u'etre ennuyeux. J'y menerai un ou deux amis. LETTRES DE CHANGE. Bon pour 1000 francs. A. LONDRES, le 4 Decembre, 1849. MONSTEUR : A vue il vous plaira payer, par cette premiere de change, a Monsieuv R , la somme de mille francs, pour valeur regue de lui, et pas- eerez en compte, comme par avis de Votre tres-humble serviteur, C . Monsieur D , Negociant a Bordeaux. Pour en donner Avis. A LONDRES, ce 4 De'cembre, 1849. MONSIEUR : Je vous ai tire ce jourd'hui mille francs, payables a vue a Monsieur R , pour valeur rec.ue de lui. Je vous prie d'y faire honneur, et de m'en donner debit, dans mon compte ; ce qu'esperant de votre ponc- tualite, je suis, Monsieur, votre, &c. A BOSTON, ce 18 Nov.. 1849. MONSIEUR: A huit jours de vue, il vous plaira payer, par cette smi'ic lettre de change, a Monsieur N , ou a son ordre, la somme de dem cents piastres, pour valeur rec.ue de lui en marchandises, cue vous passerej en compte. comme pa avis de Votre tres-humble serviteur, D . Bon pour 200 pias*-es. A Monsieur E , Negociant, a Charleston. BORDEREAU. i/". FrMtric Vouillc, Doit d Jean Marct, 1849. 5 Sept. Pour une paire de bottes, cuir fin, . . f36. /'our acquit, JEAN MA ROT. INDEX. A, $12, 1635. to, at, ,n, 163, U; used before the name of a city, % '3'.}8,) with, A COTE i E, $ 16310, by, by the side of. A LA, A L', AU, AUX, $ 8, to the. A LAQUELLE, $ 79, to whom, which. A LE, I LES, $ 12; what they mean. N. 2, (p. 463.) A LA MIENNE, $ 104, to mine. (Sec An MIEN.) A MOINS QUE . . . NE, $ 164 2, un- less. A MOI. ; A TOI, LUI, ELLE, &C., $63, to me, thee, him, her, &c. ; possessive, $ 106, mine, thine, &c. A QUI, $ 79, to whom ; for persons tmly. A, AN, $1,3, un, une. (See Ar- ticles, p. 462.) Never used before cent, a hundred ; long-temps, a long time ; mille, a thousand ; beaucoup, a great many. A FEW, SOME, $3, des, quelques ; never omitted in French. A GREAT MAry, $6, beaucoup. A HUNDRED, $6, cent. A LONG TIMC, $ 6, long-temps. A THOUSAND, $6, mille. ABIDE, (to ) by, $64, s'en tenir a. AT>L~, (to be,) pouvoir, 92, 175; f -, en 6tct, etre a mtme de, 378. ABOUT, 189, environ. A DOVE, UP STAIRS, en haut. ACCENTS: e (mute) changed to e } in certain verbs, $ 144- -4. ACCENTS : 4 [ac^e] .<; gra> e In others, $ 144 5. ACCORDING TO, selon ; according to circumstances, selon les circon- stances ; that is, according to circum- stances, it depends, c'est scion, 317. ACCOURIR, $64, to run to, up. ACCUSTOM, (to,) accoutumer. To be accustomed to a thing, etre cccou- tume d quelque chose, 370. ACHE, (the,) lemal; the earache, le mal d'oreille; the heartache, U mal de cceur, &c., 291. ACQUAINTED (to be) with, connal- ire; been acquainted with, connu ; to become acquainted with some- body, to make some one's acquaint- ance, faire connaissance de, (avec,) quelqu'un ; 1 have become acquaint- ed with him or her, fat fait sa con naissance, 329 ; to be thoroughly ac- quainted with a thing, ttre au fait d'une chose ; to make one's self thoroughly acquainted with a thing, se mettre aufait d'une chose, 342. ADIEU, adieu, farewell, God be with you, good-by. Au plaisir de vous revoir, (au retoir,) till I see yo again, I hope to see you again soon, 384. ADJECTIVES : agree with their noun in number, 107; in gender, 466, 284. Feminine adjectives, 284; their for- mation from masculine adjectives 286, 287. Adjectives that have no plural for the masculine gender, 491. Comparison of adjectives, 490, 491. Adjectives that are irregu/ar in the formation ->f their comparatives and 560 INDEX. superlatives, 144. Adjectives sub- itantively used, 402. Place of the adjective with regard to the substan- tive, 132. The adjective which in English follows /tcu>,stands i French after ihe verb, 335. 2d partitive ar- ticle b;f. when they require a masc. plur. 6 ; 8 ; when a fern. 7 ; such a man, 9; 10; formation of femin. and plur. of irreg. adj., (p. 490, 491 ;) their place, $ 129123. ADRESSER (s') a, $64, to apply to. ADVERBS, $ 161. Adverbes; of place, 88, 193, 200; quality and manner, 26, 140, 180; of number, 165, 363; ftf time, 90, 107, 108, 110, 189; comparative, 66, 77, 78, 137; com- parison of, 145 ; irregularly formed, 147. Their places, $161, 2, 3, 4 ; how much, too much, &c. ; adverb in French, adjective in English, 4. How formed from adjectives, 5, 6, 7. AFFORD (to), avoir les may ens, 327. AFTER, (Rule 1, N. 1,) 460, apres ; after them ($ 63,) apres eux. VFTEK'WARDS, ensuite, 88. AGREE, (to), to a thing, convenirde yudque chose, 276 ; consentir a, 354. AGAIN, (anew), de nouveau, 344. AIMER a, to like to, &c., 114; aimer mieux, to like better, to prefer, 263. .AiNsi, thus or so, 152 ; ainsi que, us, as well as, 331. AISE, Men aise dc, glad, 317; etre d so;i aise, to be comfortable, well off, at one's ease ; etre mal a son vise, tire gene, to be uncomfortable, 895. ALIGHT, (to,) from jne's horse, to dismount, descendre de cheval, 270 ; iz voiture, 303. ALL, every, tout, tous, teute, toutes, 110; all at once, all of a sudden, &-c. ; tout d coup, tout d la foh, sotidoine inent, 287 ; all that which, all which, all, $ 91. Never omitted in French, tout ce qui, ce que. ALLER, to go, 84 ; alle, gone, 165; present tense, 88 to 96; ete, pas! participle of ftre, with the auxiliary avoir ujxjd for alle, past participle of aller, which is always connected with etre as auxiliary, 160; allzi en voiture a ehevalj a pied, 214 ; alter, to travel to a place, 213 ; aller bien, to fit, to go right, 239. Aller and venir, followed by infinitive, 374. S'en aller, to go away, 219, 242, 243 ALMOST, presque, 180. ALONE, by one's self, seul, e, 367. ALONG, le long du, de la, &c., 378, ALOUD, haut, d haute voix, 264. ALREADY, dejd, 152. ALWAYS, toujours, 142. AMUSE, (to,) one's self, (lo enjoy to divert, ^amuser d, 217. AN, ANNEE, year, their difference, 289, N. 3. ANECDOTES : Witty answer of * young prince, 411. The French lan- guage, 412. A shopkeeper's answer. 411. The Emperor Charles V., 442, The entrance of a king into a town, 442. The last request of an old man, 443. The three questions, 444. An- swer of a lazy young man, 445 Hearing counsel, 445. Noble answei of a lady, 445. Cornelia, 447. Po- liteness, 450. Mildness, 447. Th ontestofart, 451. Zeuxis, 451. The corporal of Frederick the Great, 451. Marshal de Turenne, 451. An affect- ng narrative, 451. Interesting nar- rative, 453. ANGRY (to be) with somebody, tt n fachi contre quelqu 1 un ; about snnie- hing, de quclque chose, 319. ANY, some, (before a noun,) du de la, des, 55, 281 ; before an adjec- ive, de, 57, 281. See SOME. $ 62. en ANYBODY, somebody, any au*^ some one, quelqiSun, 39. 561 ANYTHING, something, quelque those, 28 ; good, de bon, 28. APPEAR, (to,) to look like, avoir t'atr, la mine; she looks angry, ap- pears to be angry, die a fair fdcne, '332 APPLY, (to,) $ 64, s'adresser d. APRES, $63, after; always fol- lowed by the infinitives avoir or etre. ARE YOU HUNGRY, 28 ; thirsty, 28 ; g'eepy, 29. ARTICLES, 461. Their distinction ; general obs., 463 ; difference in the use oi the article in French and English, $ 2, 5 ; INDEFINITE, from $ 3 to 7 ; when the definite le, la, les, is used for the English indefinite, $ 7. DEFINITE, $8; their functions, $ 14 ; placed before every noun, &c., $ 15 ; jelore proper names of countries, $ 16 ; not of individuals, $ 17 ; when two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, do not repeat the article, $ 18 ; IST PARTITIVE, before nouns, $ 19 to 25 ; 2o PARTITIVE, before an adjective or after a negation, $ 26 to 28; POSSESSIVE, my, thy, &c., $29, 31 ; DEMONSTRATIVE, this, that, these, those, Ce, cet, cette, ces. As FAR A.s,jusqu'd, d la, d V , qu'au, aux, $ 13. AS MUCH ... AS MANY ... AS, $ 138 1, autant de . . . que de . . . As ... AS, $ 138 1 ; aussi . . . que. ASSEZ de, $ 1372, enough ; $ 161 4. AT, to, in, $ 163 5, d, 7 ; chez ; a, before a city, 13 ; en, before a country. Au, $8 ; aux, a la, &c., to the. Au MIEN, d la mienne, aux miens, uc rrdennes, $ 104 ; to minfl. Au MILIEU D'EUX, $63, in tne midst vf them. AUCUN, aucune, none, not any, 5 '.62. AUFARAVANT, $ 163 9 ; before. AUTANTDE. .., &c. See As MUCH. AUQUEL, $79; to whom, which, , auxqnelles, $ 125. AUTRE, d'autrea, $ '28. AUXILIARY. Verbs which in Eng lish generally take to have lor theii auxiliary, while in French they taka etre, $ 1583. A VANT, before, takes de before thfl infinitive, 142; pas avant, not until, 310. AVEC, with, $ 63. AVOIR, to have ; eu, had, 160, 162, Obs. 75. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. When speaking of dimension we use in French avoir when the English use to be, 338. IL Y A, there is, there are, 180, 238, 246, 247, 248, 338. 11 y a cannot be rendered into English by there is there are, when it is used in reply to the question, How long is it since I 246 ; nor when it is used in reply to the question, How far ? Quelle di*' tance ? 252. AVOIR MAL, to ache, to feel a pain 284. AWAKE, (to,) reveiller, se reveiller, 269. B. BE, (to,) etre ; been, ete, N. 2, 3 157 (06s. 74), 160; to be at home. etre d la maison, 84; to be in thfc country, etre d la campagne, 289. To BE, is rendered by devoir, whei, it expresses obligation, 185. To BE, translated by avoir. Arc you hungry ? Avez-vous faim ? I am thirsty, fai soif, 28 : avez-vout sommeil ? sleepy, 29 ; chaud, froid peur, warm, cold, afraid, 31. What is the matter? Qu 1 avez-vous ? 34 Am I afraid, ashamed? Ai-jepeur'i honte ? 45. Am I right, wrong ? Ai- je raison ? tort ? 36. How old area you? Queldgeavez-vous ? 180. How high is his house ? Combien sa maison a-t-elle de haut ou de hauteur ? It its nearly fifty feet high , elle a environ cinquante pieds de haut, 338. To BE under obligations to some 562 IMDEX >ne, av< -r des obltgatiops a quel- \uun, 336. My feet are cold,fai froid aux pieds ; her hands are cold, tile afroid aux mains, 110. To BE in want of, avoir lesoin de, V.2. T: HE, translated by se porter, 273. To BE, translated by FAIKE. Is it *indy? Fait-il du vent? It is itormy, ilfait de Vorage. Is it foggy ? Fait-il du brouillard? 208, 215, 301. '.See WEATHER, WARM, COLD, DARK, &c.) Is it good travelling ? Fait-il \on voyager? 213, 227, 228. BE, (to,) followed by a present par- .iciple, is translated by etre with d ind an infinitive ; I am reading, je tM d lire, $ 1567. BEAU, bel, fine, handsome; how .hese two words must be employed, 192, 287. Avoir beau, in vain, 397. BEAUCOUP de, much, many, a good deal of, very much, 65, 147, 376. Dir. 7459, $ 1372. Never Bay un beaucoup, a great many. BECAUSE, parce que, N. 1, 80, 187. BECOME, (to,) devenir* What has become of him ? Qu'est-il devenu? 225. \Vhat will become of him? Quedeviendra-t-il? 242. What has become of your aunt? Qu'est deve- nue votre lante? 316. To become ridiculous, tomber dans le ridicule, 388. BEFORE, avant de. Do you speak before you listen ? Parlez-vous avant d'ecoutcr? 142. Before, devant,0bs. 65, 250. The day before, la veille ; the day before Sunday, Za veille de dimanche, 340. Avant, devant, au- paravant, their difference, $ 163 9. BEG, (to,) prier de, 304. To beg some one's pardon, demander pa'.-don ii quelqu'un, 383. BEHAVE, (to,) se comport er, 270, 393. BSMEVE, (to 1 croire* 149 175. See CROIRE *) BELOW, or down r dates and sovereigns, $ 141. Note on 2, 3, &c., to 10; 20, 80, 100, &c. CARRY, (to,) to take, porter, me- n^r, their distinction, 303. CASH, (for,) comptant ; to buy for cash, acheter comptant, 239. CAST (to) down, baisser ; to cast down one's eyes, baisser les yeux, 352. CE, 30; cet, 41; ces, 44; cette, 283; this, that, these, those. Ceci, cela, celui-ci, celui-ld, $35. When they must not be used, (N. 6, p. 469 ;) celui-ci, celui-ld, ceux-ci, ceux- ld, $36, 41, 50, 286 ; -', -Id, when omitted, 468. Celle-ci, celle-ld t cel- Itt-ci, &.C. Henrietta's, Celle de H. ; celui de, celui que, &c., $ 36. Ce que. what, or the thing which, 124. C' est-d-dire, (savoir,) that is to eay (i. e.) 348. C 1 est pourquoi, therefore, 375. CE, $38, he, she, it; when useil instead of il, elle, Us, elles. CECI, this; cela, that, $38, N.5: use ceci, cela, to translate the latter, the former, when they apply not to nouns, but to actions. Celui-ci, eel- le-ci, this one ; celui-ld, celle-ld, that one. Cet autre, that one : celui qui, ctile que, he, she, the cne who, whom, &c. ; him, her, &c. Ceux- ci, celles-ci, these ; ceux-ld, celles-ld, those; ceuxqui, &c., they who, that, 30, 48, 286, 207, $86. Celui, C(*k, &.C., have complements; lui, elle, have none, 470, N. 1, 2. CEDILLA, (cedille,) its use, p. 509 CELA, that, (meaning that thing,) 119, 168. When the English pro- noun it relates to a preceding cir- cumstance, it is rendered by cela , when to a following, by il, 293. CELUI DU, de la, de V, des ; celh du, &c., $ 104, that of, or the pos- sessive case 's. CENT, a hundred, takes an s when plural and not followed by another numeral, 184. Never preceded by un except when followed by de ; as, uncent d'huitres, 100 oysters, $6, p. 462. CEPENDANT, however, 134. CE QU'IL Y A, $874, relat., not inter., what is. CE QUE, ce qui, $89, what; $90, which. Ce pourquoi, $ 92, what for, for what ; ce d quoi, dans quoi, ova quoi, &c., $93, 94. Ce que, ce qut, $120, what, that which. CEUX. (See CEI.~I, &c.) CHACON, e, each one, 217, 470. CHANGE, (to,) meaning to put on other things, changer. Do you change your hat ? Changez-vous de chapeau \ 272. 564 INDEX, CHAQT;E, each; cha9. DIR. 9. Formation of the parfait. 460. DISTRUST, (to,) se defter de, $64. Do, (to,) to make, faire ; done, made, fait, 168. To do one's best, fairs de son mieux, 249 ; one's duty, son devoir, 348 ; good to somebody, du bien a quelqu'un, 223, 372. Shall you soon have done writing ? Aurez-vous bienldt Jini d'e crire ? He has just done writing il vient d'ecrirf, 229, 232, 249. To do without, se passer de, 346. To do, translated by se porter, 275. DONT, of which, of whom, whose ,' ce dont, that of which, 228. The past participle preceded by dont doea not agree with it, 229. Always fol- lowed by the nominative of the nex( verb. DORMIR, to sleep, 121. DRESS, (to,) habiller, to undress ; dctiabiller, 269, 338, 400. .DRINK, (to,) boire, 86, 121, 172 332 ; coffee, prendre le (du) cafe, 132. DRIVE, (to,) to ride. See ALLER, 214. DRY, sec ; il fait sec, 208. Du, some, any, $3; wnen used. 43, DUQUEL, &c., of whom, &c., $79, 86, 87, 19*. 366 INDEX. DUTY, aevoir, 348. DY, (to,) to color, ieindre, 'en noir,) 195. E. E (mute) changed to e (grave) $ 144 4 ; e (acute) to grave, 144 5. EACH, chaque, each one ; cliacun, 817, 38, EACH OTHER, runVautre,&,c., 331. EA.RLY, de bonne heure, earlier, de meilleure heure, plus tot, 150. ECRIRE, to write, ccrit, written, ccrivez, write, 89, 111, 121, 172. ELLE, she, 38. When ce must replace die, N. 2; elle-mime, her- self, 4H, &c., d'elle, of, from her, *u, $ 47, 48 63. .EZZe requires no complement. Possessive, d elle, &c., 106. Ei-S3 (what), quoi encore, otherwise, autrement, 113. EN, some, any of it, of them, 59, 61,63, 62. Yen, 87, 88. Its place with personal pronouns, 96 ; of him, &c., en, 113. Past participle does not agree with en, 162, 06s. 76 ; from it, them, &c., 185, 47, 48; 50. EN, in, at, to, 375, 407, before the name of a country. ( 163 11 to 13.) ENCORE, still, yet, &c., some, any more, 73. ENCRIER, inkstand, 41 ; ecritoire, (fern in.) ENDEAVOR, (to,) tdcher, 342. S'ef- forcer, 404. ENFTIR (s'), to fly, run away, 253, 262. ENLIST, (to,) sefaire soldat, s'e?i- rbler^ 226. ENNUYER (s'), to want amusement, 376. EWSUITE, afterwards, 88. ENTRER, (to,) dans, to go in, come in, &.c., 302. ENTRETENIR, to Keep, s'entretenir yaec, to converse with, 429. SPICIER, grocer, 36. Er, and. 35 ; 372, 374. ETEINDRE, to extinguish, 175. ETRE, to be ; etc, been, 84, 157, 160. O en et ions -nous ? whe/e did we stop ? 383. Verbs that take etrt as auxiliary, 530 ; past part, agrees with nomin,, 530. C'est, ce sont, it is, &c., 241, 327, 338, 348; ft re followed by the preposition d and an infinitive, corresponds to the verb tr be followed by a present participlf 1567. (3ee Is IT NOT ?) EVENTAIL, fan, eventaih) 45. EVER, jamais, 157. EVERY, all, tout, toute, &,o. 110, 289, 219, 356. Eux, 38, they ; more than t\cy, 73. EUX-MEMES, themselves, 4H; 6 eux, to them, 63, d'eux,deux, theirr 106. F. FAiRE, to make, to do ; faisant, fait, 83, 131, 168; you had better. 240 ; it is all over with me, 332 ; the soup will be warmed, 348 ; I cannot help it, 381 ; it grows dark, 352; to think much of one, 354 ; to do one's best, 249. FAIT, (si,) yes, 51, 06s. 26. FALL, (to,) tomber, 270. Baisser. The day, stocks fall, lejour baisse, If change baisse, 352. FALLOIR, to be necessary, must. All verbs expressing necessity, obli- gation, or want, are in French trans- lated by PALLOIR, 197. FAR, loin. How far ? Quelle dia tance ? 252 ; far off, de loin, 317 ; from thee, detoi, 63. FARMER, fermier, 38. FAULT, la faute. Whose fault it it ? A qui est la faute ? 381 ; to find fault with . . . trouver d redire d... 400. FAVOR, (a,) un plaisir. Faire un . . 110. FEAR, (to,) craindre, 220, 260. Foj fear of, de crainte (peur) d?, 356 ; d* crainte (pev ) que . . ne, 417 164 1 INDEX. 567 FfiL, (to,) scntir, 278. 1 . feel a pain, scttffrir dc, 334 ; sleepy, avoir mote de dormir, 220. FEW, (a,) books, quelques livres ; a fcw (of them,) en . . quelques uns i 69, FIER (se) d, to trust to, $ 64. FIFTH, 1-5, cinquiime, 141. Flu,, (to.) remplir, 302. FIRE, (to,) tirer ; a gun, a pistol, uri coup de fusil, de pistolet ; to some One, * naitredes difficultes, des querelles, d*.* soup$ons, 406 ; up, renoncer a, ^ 64. Go, (to,) alter, 84, 165; there, y aller, 102, 165 ; round the house, autour de la maison, faire le tour, &c., 367 ; down, alight, descendre, 303 ; on foot, aller d pied, 214 ; on a journey, faire un voyage, 295 ; to bed, aZZer se couclier, se mettre au lit, 222 ; to the country, a la campagne, 289 ; to some one's house, chez quel- qu'un, 84; to see some one, voit quelqu'un, 332 ; a walking, seprome- ner, 222; to go away, s'cn aller; vous enallez-vous ? 219, 242, 243 ; to go for, aZZer chcrcher, 105 ; go out, sortir, 110, 121, 150, 175; to be going to, aZZer, (see it.) Are you coming ? Allez-vous venir? 90, N. 1. Je vais, used instead of je veux, 88, N. 1. GROCER, Spider, 36. GROW, (to,) croitre, 354. It grows dark, late, t'Z sefait nuit, tard 352. H. HABILLER, to dress, 269. HAD it not been, 164, sa*is. HAIL, (to,)greler, 229. HAIR, to hate, 213. - HALF drmi, demie. (See $141.) 568 INDEX. HAI^EW, (to,) arriver, takes ttre, 254. HARDLY, a peine, 180. HAUT, (en,) abcve, up stairs ; en has, below, down stairs, 193. HAVE, (to,; avoir, had, eu, 160 ; a cold, un rhume, 293 ; sore linger, ma I an doigt, aux yeux, d V ceil, d la main, aux dents, d la Ute, 126, 234 ; I la gorge, au cote, 295, 284. To have just, venir de, 249, 145 3. HEALTH, sante, 332. HEAR, (to ... of,) entendre parler de, 246 ; apprendre, 253. HE, il, ce, lui; who, qui, that, que, $38. HER, son, sa, ses, 38, 44, 282,$ 31 ; la; to her, lui, 47, 48; herself, elle-meme, 4H 5 it, (them,) to her, le, la, les lui ; -le-lui, -la-lui, -les- lui, 58; her there, Z'y, 57, 58; her some, any, lui en, 59 ; her any there, lui y en, 60. To her, d elle, }f, from her, d'elle, &c., 63; her- self, (reflective,) se, s'y, 71; hers, le sien, la sienne, &c., 104 ; d elle, 106. HERE, id, (y,) 110. Here and there, 396. Here is, voici, 312. HEURE. (See HOUR.) HIM, lui, being the masculine of her, see the same paragraphs. HOME, (at,) d Za niaison, 84. HORS de, out ; out of the city ; de- hors, out of doors, 301, 307. HOUR, (the,) Vheure, at what o'clock, at one o'clock, at half past one, d une heure et demie, 90. At 9 in the morning, in the evening, d neuf heures du matin, du soir, 185. Early, earlier, sooner, 150. To ask the hour, 110. How, how much, many, before an exclamation, que. How good you are ! que vous stes bon ! &c., 335. How far, jusqu'ou, 193, 252. How long, combien de temps, 246 ; since what time, depuis quand ? 248 ; jitaqu'a quand, 189 How much" many, combien de, 65. How times, how often ? combien de fois \ Once, une fois, deux fois, plusieurt fois, 165, 137, 2 ; 1614. HOWEVER, ccpendant, 134; qucl- que . . .qKe, qiiel que ..., quels que . . . , que, &c., 422, 516. HUNDRED, cent, 184. (See CENT.; HURT, (to,) somebody,/ai>e du mai aquelqu'un, 223, 224; one's feel- ings, faire de la peine d quelqu'un, 333. I. I je, f t 25, 469. I who, that, mot qui, que, 470. Ici, (y,) here, 110. IDIOMS, after INDEX. IF, si, 107; when it loses the i, 372, 1463; when followed by the present tense, 233, Obs. 105 ; by the imperfect, 507, N.I; when it governs two verbs, 538, 164 3. IL, Us, he, it, they, 38; when replaced by ce, 469, N. 2. IMMEDIATELY, tout de suite, sur U champ, 237. IMPART, (to,) faire part de quelqut chose d quelqu'un, 397. IMPERATIVE, imperatif, 509, 150; its formation, 1 to 6 of 150. Five irregular ones, 7; regular ones, with objectives and negation, 8. How to translate, Come and see me, &c., 12. IMPERFECT (the) of the Indicative, 506, 147. Translated by French parfait and preterit. Its terminations, 1; how formed, 2; regular verbs, exceptions, 3; when used, i\ when it ends in iions, 5 ; in yions, 6 ; used after si, 507, 1484 ; of the POTENTIAL, Conditionnel, Us ter- minations ; its formation, 507. Could, would, how to translate them, 508 4. I wish, when it is, je voudrais, 5. SECOND IMPERFECT, Preterit, its terminations, 517, 518, 153 ; re gular and irregular verbs, list of the INDEX 569 alter : asc of the preterit, 519, 520 : 3! the subjunctive, its formation ; its Terminations, 416, 517. Impersonal verbs govern the subjunctive, 515, & 1514. IMPROVE, (to,) to profit, faire des prcgres, 313. IN, dans, 63, 105; in, dans, en, their difference, 375. IN, translated by a, 242, 367, 289 ; by de, 338 ; by ,ie, after a superlative ; c'est le plus beau pays de I' Europe, 446. In this manner, de cette maniere, 180. In a short time, dans peu de temps, 375. In, at, to, by d, 535, 163 5 ; not translated, 53714. In the midst of . . ., uu milieu de . . . , 476, $ 63. INDEFINITE, (article,) never omitted in the plural ; when not used in the singular; when replaced by the defi- nite, 462. INDICATIVE, Indicatif. Present, 500, $144; Imperfect, 507, $147; Second Imperfect, Preterit, 517, $153; Pluperfect, 520, $154; Se- cond Pluperfect, Preterit antcrieiir, $ 155 ; conjunctions after which it is used, 521, (see those tenses;) Fu- ture, 504; Second Future, 299. INDIFFERENTLY, tant bien quemal, 396. INDIRECT (regime) objective of a preposition, $43. INFINITIVE, 79 ; words which re- quire it, with the preposition de, 80. INFINITIVE, with its 4 terminations, 79, 80 ; words requiring it with the preposition de, 80 ; governed by every preposition except en, 521, $ 156 1 ; remark on apres, after, Infinitive governed by another verb, 2; im- portant remark on it ; different prepo- sition in English and French ; verbs that govern it without a preposition, 4 ; adj. and verbs that take d, 5 ; diose that take de, 6. After a, the French infinitive translates the present participle coming after the x-er> 2 SAIT., (a,) une voile. To set sail, mftire A la voile, 350, N. 1 To set sail for,fatre voile pour ; undc; ftil' sail, marcher dpleines voiles, 3e0. SALT, (to,) saler, 92. SALIK, to soil, dir'y, 220. SALUTATIONS, (daily,) salutation! journalieres. At pp. 26, 29, 32, 33, 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 63, (N. B. On composing an exercise on daily salutations, 70, 71, 73,) 104, 107, 112, 114, 119, 121, 123, 130, 134, 136, 139, 142. SAME ; the same thing, la memt chose; the same man, le mime homme ; it is all one, (the same, c'est egal, c'est la mime chose, 168 307. SANS, without, 215; sans doute, without doubt, to be sure, 108. SANTK, (la,) the health, 332. SAVOIR, to know ; sachant, su, so* chez, takes no preposition after it, 135, 175. SATISFIED (to be) with some one or something, itre content de quelqu'u'i ju de quelque chose, 210. SCARCELY, d pei?ie, 521. SEASONS, (the,) les saisons, 499. SECOND, second, e, 70. Secondly secondement, 363, 532 7. SEE, (to,) voir, voyant, vu, 172. SEEM, (to,) paraltre, sembler, 429. SELF, selves, meme, mimes; my self, moi-meme ; themselves, eux- mimes, elles-mtmes ; one's self, sot' mime, 154, 471. SELON, according to ; selon lei cirronstances ; c'est selon, it depends, sr. SENTIR, to feel ; sentant, sentt. 278 ; to smell, 353. SERVIR, to serve, wait upon, ser- vant, servi, 254 ; se servir de, to make use of, to use, 266 ; servir la soupe, le dessert, to serve up the soup, the dessert, 348. To be of use. d quoi cela vous sert-il 1 of what use is that to you ? Servir de, to stard instead, to be as ; mon fusil n* INDEX. 581 ecvt de baton, I use my gun as a tick; servir de, to avail; a quoi vous serl-il de pleurer? what avails you to cry ? cela ne me serf d rien, it vails me nothing, 386. On a servi, the meal is on the table, (is served up ;) vous servirai-je de la soupe ? shall I help you to some soup ? do you choose any soup ? SET (to) out, to depart, leave, par- lir, 142, 175. SEUL, e, alone, by one's self, 137, 159, 367; seulement, non settlement, not only, 324. SHAWL, (a,) un chdle, 34. SHORTLY, (coon,) bientdt, 108, 185. SHOULD or Ought. (See OUGHT.) SHOW, faire voir, montrer, 134. To show a disposition to, faire mine de, 331 ; the show, (splendor, bright- ness,) V eclat ; to make a great show, faire del' eclat, 432. Si, if; the t is cut off before il, Us, but nowhere else ; after si, the pro- noun on takes l\ 372. Si usually attends the conditionnel, and is fol- lowed by the imparfait, 310, 507. Que, used to avoid the repetition of t, governs the subjunctive, 516 10. Si, meaning granting, connects the future with the present, 233, Obs. 105. Si, so ; si bien, so well, 165. SIEN, (le,) la sienne, &c., his or hers, 39, 49, 291, 483 ; d lui, d elle, 484. SIDE, cote , by the side of, a cdie de, 266; this side, de ce c6te-ci ; on that side, de ce cote-Id, 193. SILENT, (to be,) to stop speaking, $e taire, 392. SINCE or FROM, depuis ; from that time, depuis ce moment ; my child- dood, majeunesse ; from here there, depuis id jusque Id. Since, (consi- dering,) puisque, 342. SIT (to) down, s'asseoir, 262; to DC seated, etre assis, assise, 302. SLEEP, (to,) dormir, 121; 215. Are you sleepy ? avez-vous sommeil ? 29 To feel sleepy, avoir envie de dor mir, 220. SLOW, slowly, lentement, 264. SNOW, (to,) neiger, 227 ; it snowa ilfait de la neige, 301. So, (it,) le, 171, Obs. 77; so, thus, ainsi; so, so, comme cela; so that, de sorte que, 230 ; so much, tant de ; so much as, tant que, 77, 210, 260. SOIR, soiree, evening, their differ- ence, 289, N. 2. SOME or ANY, (before a noun,) du t de la, des ; 'before an adjective or after a negation,, de, 55, 284. Some of it, of them, en, before the verb, 59; some or any more, encore, used affir- matively ; encore du vin, encore dc* boutons, 75. N. B. (Encore is placed immediately after the verb.) Some- thing, quelque chose ; anything good, quelque chose de ban, 29, 191 ; some- times, quelque fois, 153 ; some, any- where, quelque part ; nowhere, not anywhere, ne . . . nullepart, 89. So much, many, tant, 77, 210, 260. SON, sa, ses, his or hers, 38, 44, 282, 466, $ 32. SOON, very soon, bientot, 108, 185. Aussitot que, as soon as, aussitdt que t 215. No sooner, pas plus tot, with priterit anterieur, 521. SORB, mal ; a sore foot, mal an pied, 110. SORTIR, to go out, sorlant, sorti, 110, 121, 150, 175. SOUDAINEMBNT, suddenly, all of a sudden, 290. SOUFFRIR, to suffer, sou/rant, sou/ert, 334. Sous, under; dessous, under it 177. SOUVENIR (se) de, se ressouvenif de, to remember, to recollect, 262. SOUVENT, often ; auisi saiivatf que, as often as ; plus sowssut que, oftener than ; moins souvent que, not so often as, 137. 682 I K D A SPEAK (to) French. (See PARLER.) SPEECH, (a,) un discours. To make speech, faire un discours, 295. SPEND (to) time at Something, pas- ter le temps a quelque chose, 250. SPITE, (in ... of,) en depit de, 346. STEEL, acier, 55. STEP, (a,) unpas. To walk a step, faire unpas; to take a step, (mea- sures,) /aire une demarche, 295. STORE, store-house, magasin, 63. STRIKE, (to,) /rapper, 323. To be struck with a thought, venir en pensce, d Videe, a V esprit. A thought strikes me, iZ me vient une pensce, 366. SUBJECT. (See NOMINATIVE.) SUBJUNCTIVE, subjonctif. (See PRESENT, IMPERFECT, &c., 408.) Present ; how it ends, 513, $ 1511 ; how it is formed, 2 ; eight excep- tions. Its use, 2; important ob- servationon it. When the antecedent is a superlative, 3 ; when imper- sonal, 4; interrogative, negative, or conditional, 5 ; it expresses/ear, &c., takes ne, 6, 7 ; douter, nier, take ne, 8 ; what, que, governs, 9, 10; whatever, however, 11, quelque que, &c. ; its connexion with indicative, 12; whatever, whatso- ever, 13 ; quelque chose que, quoi que, quoique ce soil ; whomsoever, quique ce soit ; when it must follow qui, que, dont, &c., 14 ; when it must begin the sentence, 15. Im- perfect, 517 ; its formation. Per- fect, (p. 418,) parfait. Pluperfect, (p. 419,) plusque parfait. SUBSTANTIVES, substan tfs, noms, formation of plural, 44. Exceptions, 16, N. 1, 2, 3, 281. Feminine, 281. Genders, 194 ; 402, 06s. 163 ; 187, 06s. 85; 297, 06s. 140; 314; 239, N. 1 ; 284 ; 356. Compound sub- stantives, 47, N. 1, or 4J4 7 ; 183, Olt. 82 ; 440, 06s. 171. De is put between the name of the thing and that of the substance of which it is made, 27, 403, 493; d. when the k* ter expresses the use of the former 404, 494; dZa, au,aux, todetermin* it more precisely, 406, 494. Sub- stantives having a distinct form for the feminine, 495 ; used for botb sexes, 298. SUCCEED, (to,) panenir a. Have you succeeded in learning it ? ctet- vous parvenu d Vapprendre? 237. reu&sir d ; avez-vous reussi d Vap- prendie? 237, 342. SUCH, un tel, une telle, paretJ, pareille, 307, 4909, 10 ; un si bon livre. SUFFER, (to,) sou/rir, 334 ; to suffer one's self to be beaten, se laiste? battre ; to let one's self fall, se laisser tomber ; to suffer one's self to be in suited, se laisser insulter, 432. SUFFIRE o, to suffice, be suffi cient, suffisant, sujfi, 349. SUIT, (to,) convenir d, 237. SUITE, (tout de,) immediately, 237. SUIVRE, to follow; suivant, fuivi, 334. Suivre un conseil, to follow advice, 384. SUN, (the,) Ze soleil. We have cow much sun, ilfait trap de soleil, 208. SUPERLATIVE, superlatif, a new explanation on its formation, 144 j followed by que or qui, requires th subjunctive, 515 3. SUR, on, upon, 175 ; dcssus, upon it, 177. SURFAIRE, to overcharge, ask too much, 344. SURPRENDRE, to surprise, 374. SURPRISE, (to,) etonner. To be surprised at, s'itoanerde, 374. SWEET, doux, douce, 491. SWEETEN, (to,) sucrer, adoucir, 88. T. TA, ton, tes, thy, 282, 108, 466. TAIRE. 'e,) to hold one's tongue be silent, taisant ; tu ; taiset-ixn* be silent, 392. TAKE (to) place, uveir lieu, 165 1 N 1 t X .. 583 tare of something, prendre (avoir) tom de quelque chose, 256 ; of some one, to be ware of one, prendre garde d quelqu'un, 366 ; an airing in a car- riage, se promoter en carrosse, 222. TANT, so much; par an, a year; partite, a head, 210, 293; tant que, o long as, 401 ; tant soi pen, just a little, ever so little, 427; tant bien ytts mal, indifferently, 396; tant que tttu* voudrez, so, as long as you plr aue, 401, 492. T.IXDER, to delay. (See the latter.) TASTE, (to,) gouter, 129, 208; the taste, le gout ; each man has his taste, chaque homme a son gout, 217. TE, thee, to thee, te le, leg, 108, 472. T'tn, thee some ; Cy en t thee some there. Te, C en, t'y, (reflective,) 478, $71, 72, 73. TEACH, (to,) enseigner ; to teach some one something, enseigner quel- que chose d quelqu'un ; some one to do something, apprendre d quelqu 1 un Kfaire quelque chose, 266. TEAR, (a,) une larme ; to shed tears, verser des larmes ; with tears in his, her, our, &c., eyes, les larmet aux yer.r, 323. TEINDJE, to dye, color; teignant, Leint; en ioir, en rouge, to dye black, red, 195. TEL, telle, lels, telles, such ; un tel homme, une telle femme, such a man, woman ; de tels hommes, de telles femmes, such men, women, 307. Tel is not used with another adjec- tive. Such a kind friend, un si bon ami, 4909, 10. TELL, (to,) to say, dire ; told, dit, 16S. TENTH, to hold ; tenant, tenu ; te- n. Tenez, the imperative, is used aa an exclamation, 203, 06s. 94. Se tenir pret, to keep one's self ready, 874 Tenir pension, keep a boarding- houfle, school, 385. Lieu de, to take (he pluce of, be instead of, 404. (See KEEP.) S'en tenir d, to abide by, 477. TENSES, (the,) les temps. Present, 114, 500 to 503, including true pre- sent, je suis d lire, 502. Perfect, 167, 503, 504. First future, 231, 504 to 506 ; second future, 299. Im- perfect, ?05, 506. Imperfect of the potential, conditioned, 310, 507, 508. Perfect of the potential, 311, 508, 509. Imperative, 369, 509 to 513. Subjunctive present, 408, 513 ; subjunctive imperfect, 4 16, 517. Per- fect, 418. Pluperfect, 419. Prete- rit or second imperfect of the indica- tive, 368, 517 to 520. Pluperfect ot indicative is formed like the English tense, by the imperfect of the auxi- liary and past participle of the verb to be conjugated, 520. Example! after the 59th lesson, p. 305. Second pluperfect, preterit anterii r, 362, 520, 521. Infinitive, four jrmina- tions of it, 80; explanations, 521 to 525. Past participle, 156, 525 to 527. Present participle, 114, 448, 500. THAN, que de, (before nouns,) 78. Than, before a number, is rendered by de, and not by que ; more than nine, plus de neuf, 246. THAT or Which, que, (relative,) 43, 478. That, (meaning that thing,) cela, 168, 467, 469, N. 4. That, (the one,) celui, plural, ceux, celle, celles, 30, 48, 286, 467. That which, the one which, those which, celui que, ceux que, &c., 43, 48, 286, 467, 463. That which, (the thing which,) e que, (objective,) ce qui, (nominp tive,) 124, 481. That book of mine, 485. THE, le, la, les, 25, 44, 281 ; it! connexion with prepositions, 463. THEIR, leur, leurs, 44, 282 ; when it must be translated by en . . . lea 4G6, N. 2. THEIRS, le (fa) leur, let leurs. 49 B84 INDEX. B91, 483 ; after il, elle, &c., a eux,d tiles 484. THEM, to them, leur. (See it.) THEMSELVES, eux-memes, elles- ntmes, 471 ; (reflective, )se,s'g, s'en, 477, 478. THEN, alors ; until then jusqu 1 - ll)rs, 189. THERE, to it, at it, in it, 87, 101. To go, to be, there, y aller, y etre, 87. Thrre, Id, y, 110. There is, il y a, 180, 238, 246, 7, 8, 338. There is, (behold,) voild ; there it is, le wild, la voild ; they are, Us voild, (here is, void,) 310, 312. THINE, le lien, la tienne, &c., 108, 291, 483; afier il, elle, &c., d toi, 484. THINK (to) of, penser d, 476. THIRD, troisieme, 70; tiers, 499. Thirdly, troisiemement, 363 7. THIS, THAT, these, those, ce, cet, cette, ces. This one, that one, these, those, celui-ci, celui-ld, &c., 30, 41, 44, 50, 286. THOU, tu, 107. THOUGH, guoigue, (see it,) 41 7. THOUSAND, (a,) mille, does not take un, 462. THROW, (to,) jeter, 173, 502, N. B. THUNDER, le tonnerre. It thun- ders very much, il fait beaucoup de tonnerre, 215. THUS, So, aii.si, 179. THY, ton, in, tes, 108, 282, 466. THYSELF, toi-meme, 471 j (reflec- tive,) te, t'y, t'en, 477, 478. TIEN, (le,) la tienne, les tiens, les ttennes, thine, 108, 291, 483; d toi, 484. TILL, until, jusque ; till noon, jusqu'd midi, 189 ; not until, pas want de, 310. TIRED, (to be,) ctre las, lasse, 429 ; to get tired, s'ennuyer, 376. TIRER, to pull, draw, shoot, fire, 844. To, d, 101, 102; to the, au, d la, &c., 463; in order to, pour, 92. 1 31, thou ; toi qui, que, 408, 4"t) d td, to thee, 476 ; d loi, thine, 484 TON, ta, tes, thy, 108, 282, 466, Too, trap, 150 ; too much, many trap, 66, 67; too late, trap tard ; soon, early, trop tdt ; large, great, trop grand; little, trop pen; toe small, trop petit, 150. Tcuk A TOUR, alternately, by turns, 404. TOUT, tons, all. Tout le tin ; tous les livres, 110. To.it autant, quite (just) as much, 76. Tout d* suite, immediately, 108 ; pas du tout, not at all, 115. Tout d coup, all at once, 290. TOWARDS, envers, vers, 270, 393. TRAVEL, (to,) voyager, 194, 213; through Europe, faire le tour d* V Europe, 400. TREAT, (to ) use somebody well, (ill,) en user bien, (mal,) avec quel- qu'un, 394. TRICK, (to play a,) jouer un tour, 400. TROMPER, to deceive, cheat; e tromper, to make a mistake, 219. TROP, too, too much, many, 65, 150. ^ TRUST (to) one, sefier c quelqu'un; to distrust one, se dejier de quel- qu'un, 325. TRUTH, (the,) la verite ; in truth, indeed, en verite ! 47, 105. Tu, thou, 107, N. 1. TURN, (to,) a soldier, se faire sol- dot, 225 ; to account, (make the best of,) faire valoir, 427 ; one into ridi- cule, tourner quelqu'un en ridicule, 388. Turn, (the,) le tour. To take a turn, (a walk,) faire un tour, 242, 400. T'r, thee to it there, 475 ; t'y en ( thee some there, 476 ; t'y, (reflec- tive,) thyself, 478. U. UN, une, a, en, one, 63, 68, 7(\ 285, 129 ; not used before cciti, &c KNDEX 585 i64. Pas un qui. que, not one that, governs the subjunctive, 515 5. L'un VautTt, l\,ie I'autre, each other ; etes vous contents Vun de I'autre? are you pleased with each other? Nous le sommes, we are, 331. The one, (when not in apposition to the other,) not Vun, but celui, 43. UNDER, sous; under it, dessous, 177. UNDERSTAND, (to,) comprendre, compris, 182; to make one's self Understood, sefaire comprendre, 370. UNIPERSONAL VERBS govern the subjunctive, 515 4. UNLESS, d mains que . . . ne . . . , govern the subjunctive, 537. UNTIL, jusqu'd ce que, governs the subjunctive, 537; jusqu'alors, 189. UP, to get up, (to rise,) se lever, 222. To go up, monter, 304, N. 1 ; to stand up, ctre debout ; to remain up, rester debout, 373. Up stairs, en haut, 193. Up to the lop,jusqu'en kaut, 428. UPON, sur ; upon it, dessus, 175. Us, nous, a nous. See Nous. USER, to wear out, 180. En user bten (mal) avec quelqu'un. To tr - at one well, (ill,) 394. V. VALOIR, to be worth ; volant, valu, valoir mieux, to be better, 199 ; la peine, to be worth while. Cela en vnut-il In peine ? Is it worth while ? 270. Faire valoir, to turn to account, 427. VEILLE, (Za,) the day before, 340. VEMR, to come, venant, venu, 88, 121, 175. Venir de, to have just, 248, 5043. Venir en pensce, (d Videe, d I 1 esprit,) to have a thought, 366. Venir and aller, are in French followed by an infinitive, and the conjunction and is not rendered, 374, 51212. VERBS, verges. The four conjuga- tions, 80. Compound and derivative verbs are conjugated like vheii primi- tives, 179. Auxiliaries, See AVOIR, ETRE. Verbs requiring etre, to be, as auxiliary, 175,530. Active verbs, 167. Neuter, 175, 530. Passive, 212, 530. Reflective, 217, 531. Always conju- gated with the auxiliary tire, 4 They always have two pronouns oi the same person, 2. Impersonal, 227. They usually govern the sub- junctive, 5154. Do, am, &c., when used to interrogate, may be rendered by est-ce que ? With some verba est-ce que must be used, 139. When ne is used without pas, 322; tin connected by d with an infinitive expresses the present tense, as Jt suis d lire, I am reading, 399, 502 6. Most passive verbs" may be made reflected, 5315. VERS, envers, towards, 270; the former is used physically, the latter morally, 393. VIS-A-VIS de, opposite to, 387. VIVRE, to live, vivant, vecu, 214; Fait-il bon vivre d Paris ? Is thto living good in Paris ? 315. VOILA, there is ; void, here is voild pourquoi, that is the reasoi* why; voild pourquoi je le dis, there fore I say so, 312. VOILE, (un,) a veil, is masculine ; une voile, a sail, feminine, 350, N. 1 A pleines voiles, (d toutes voiles,) un der full sail, 350. VOIR, to see, voyant, vu, voyez> 92, 121, 172. VOTRE, plural vos, your, 25, 44, 282, 466. VOTRE, (le, la.) les vdtres, yours, 30, 291, 483. VOULOIR, to be willing, to wish, voulant, voulu, 83, 175. Vous, you, 25, 409. Vous qui, you who, vous-meme, s, yourself, 471. Objective vous, you, to you, 472; vous y, you there, 475 ; vous en, you some, vous y en, you some there ; d voitt, to you. 476 ; vous (reflect. > lai 586 IND EX clas?, 477, vous y ; 2d class, vous en ; 3d dass, yourselves, 478 ; d vous, yours, 484, $ 106. VOYAGER, (to travel,) 194, vuya- geant, 5022. VV. WAKE, (to,) eveiller, rcveiller, 369. WALK, (to,) marcher, 295 ; to take S walk, se promener; to go walking ; oiler se promener, 222. To walk or travel a mile./atre un mille, 295. WANT, (to,) to be in want of, *o have need of, avoir besoin de, 112; falloir, ilfaut, 197, 06s. 89; vouloir, 83, 175. WARM, chaud. Are you warm 1 dvez-vous chaud ? 31. Is it warm ? fait-il chaud ? 53. WAY, chemin, 105 ; on the way, en chemin, 121 ; in this way, de cette maniere, 180; about asking the way, 378. WE, notes, 67, 409; we, nous au- ires, 471. WEATFER, (the,) le temps. How is the weather ? what weather is it ? quel temps fait-il ? 53,208. WELCOME, (to be,) etre le bien venu, 376. WELL, bien, 26, 147, ?19. To be well, etre bien portant, e, etre en bonne sants ; she is well, elle est bien por- tante, elle se porte bien, elle est en bonne santc, 330. WET, damp, humide. Is the wea- ther damp ? Fait-il humide ? 208. WHAT? quel (before a verb,) 29; alter verbs and prepositions, quoi? 100; que, quoi, qu'est-ce que ? what, nominative, qu'est-ce qui? what is, Wf.s, &c., (interrogative,) followed by a preposition, qu'y a-t-il...? qu'y avait-il? 486. What, (or the thing which,) ce qui, ce que, 124, 481 $ 89 ; what is, (relative,) followed by a pre- position, ce qu'il y a. 480 4. What? ju'est-ce que c* est ? qu'est-ce queerest que cela ? 129, 171. What ! que quoi! 487. WHATEVER, whatsoever, quelguct quel que, quelleque,&LC;, quelquechoat que, quoique, quoi que ce soit, 422, 423, 516. WHEN, quand, lorsque, 88, 242; used with the preterit anterieur, 521. When connects two future tenses. 235, Obs. 106. WHERE ? ou ? 86. Where fium 1 whence? d'ou ? 200, 252. Where did we stop ? oit en et ions-nous I Somewhere, anywhere, quelquepdrt ; nowhere, not anywhere, nulle part, 89. WHICH or WHAT? quel? quelst &c., 25, 27, 45, 386, 485, 486. Of which, dont, 228, 481. Which one ? Lequel, laquelle? &c., 36, 45, 386. Which, having a part of a sentence for antecedent, is translated by cs qui, ce que, 481, $ 90. (See THATJ WHO ? qui ? whose ? d qui ? dont, de qui, 100, 147; d qui, aux quels ? 230. Whom? qui? 478; whom, (relative,) que, 479. WHOEVER, qui que ce soit, 422- 516. WHY? pourquoi? 81, 184. WIPE, essuyer, 184, 5023. WISH, (to,) souhaiter, vouloir, dc sirer, 83, 131. I wish I had it, j* voudrais V avoir, 508. I wish I hau been able to go, faurais voulu pcu voir y aller, 509. WITH, avec, 88. With, rendered by de, 224, 254, 210, 303 ; by d, 33S Vhomme d Vhabit bleu. WITHDRAW, (to,) go away from s'ulotgner de. I go from the nre %i t m'cloigne dufeu, 260. WITHOUT, sans ; without tpetk ing, sans parler, 215, WORD, (the,) le mot, 50, 171 Words used with the preposition dt before an infinitive, 80. When a word is composed of a noun and an ID10MATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 587 jdjecuve, both take the mark of the plural, 183. Compound words, 494. WORTH, (to be,) valoir, 199. To be worth while, valoir la peine, 270. WOULD TO GOD, plut d Dieu, au ncl, 424. How would must be trans- luted, 503. WHITE, (to,) ecrirc 7 ecrit, 89, 121, 172. WRONG, tort, 36. (See To BE.) Y. Y, to it, in it, 87. , there, (stands before the verb.) Y oiler, to go there ; y etre, to be there. Its place with the personal pronouns, and en, 87, Obe 102, 110. F, (ta,)here; y, (Id,} there, 110. Yregarder depres, to be particular, 399. Y a-t-il ? ia there? 180. (See THERE is.) V translates the English objective pro-, noun it ; when by itself, or governed ) by a preposition, (in, with, &c.,) it is connected with a verb requiring the preposition d, 473, $ 50. YES, out, 25. Si FAIT, 51, Obs. 26. YESTERDAY, hier ; the day before yesterday; avant-Jiier, 107. You, vous, 25, 409. (See Vous.) YOUR, votre, vos, 25, 44, 282, 466. YOURS, le, (la) vdlre, les votres, 30, 291, 483 ; d vous, 484. YOURSELF, yourselves, vo'us-memf. vous-memes, 471 ; (reflected,) vous % vous y, vous en, 477, 478. IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. She does everything gracefully. These are very beautiful pictures. The German interest was contrary to the Russian. Cheer up, soldiers; the day is ours. To sleep very late. To be on the brink of rum. To cast a mist before one's eyes. To fret and fume. To share the profit. To put somebody to the sword. To meet with one's match. What day of the month is it ? Ah blessings come from God. la that your opinion ? Do not ques- tion it. Are those your servants ? Yes, they are. Madam, are you the mother of that child ? Yes, I am. Ladies, are you the strangers that Elle a de la grdce dans tout cc qu'elle fait. Voila des tableaux d j une grandt beaut 6. L'interet de V Alhmagne dtait op pose a celui de la Russie. Courage, soldats ; la victoire eet H nous. Dormir la grasse matinee. Etre d deux doigts de sa perte. Jeter de la poudre aux yeux. Jeter feu et flamme. Partager le gateau. Passer quelqu'un aujil de Tepee. Trouver son maitre. Quel quanticme du mois avons-nous 9 Tous les biens nous viennent de Dicu Est-ce la votre opinion ? Ne doutoi point que ce ne la soit. Sont-ce la vos domcstiques ? Oui, ce les sont. Madame, Gtes-vous la mere de eel enfant ? Oui, je la suis. Mesdames, etes-vous lex elrange~ct 588 IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. have been announced to me ? Yes, we are. Ladies, are you pleased with that music ? Yes, we are. Madam, are you a mother ? Yes, am. Madam, are you ill ? Yes, I am. Madam, how long have you been married ? A year. ig it long since you arrived ? A fort- night. \lthough that woman .shows more resolution than the others, she is nevertheless not the least afflicted. That woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she is least afflicted. That woman proposed herself as a model for her children. He (or she) has not succeeded in that stratagem. To be free and open. To be full of business. To take fire presently. The dry weather we had in the spring has destroyed all the fruit. To put to the vote. Life is at stake. My honor is concerned in it. That is understood. To act deliberately. To go fuL speed. Shall you go to the opera ih'e even- ing ? Yes, I shall. Would you cheerfully go t: Rome ? Yes, I would. qu'on m'a annonce'es t Oui, noui let sommes. Mesdames, etes-vous contentcs dt cette musique? Om, nous It sommes. Madame, etes-vous mire f Oui, je le suis. Madame, etes-vous malade? Oui, je le suis. Madame, depuis quel iemps e"to^ vous mariee ? Je le suis depuis un an. Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes arrivie ? Je le suis depuis quinzc jours. Quoique cette femme montre plus dp fermete que les autres, elle n'es; pas pour cela la moins affligee. Cette femme a 1'art de repandre dea larmes dans le temps meme qu'ella est le moms affligce. Cette femme s'est proposed poui modele d ses enfants. Cette ruse ne lui a pas reussi. Avoir le cceur sur les levres. Avoir des affaires par-dessus lea yeux. Avoir la tete pres du bonnet. La secheresse qu'il y a eu au priu- temps a fait penr tous leg fruits. Aller aux voix. II y va de la vie. II y va de mon honneur. Cela va sans dire. Aller pas a pas. - Aller a bride abattue. Irez-vous ce ?c'r a 1'opera * Oui, firai. Iriez-vous avrc phiei/ d Rome 9~ Oui, firait THE END. STANDARD FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. Mastery Series French. In this Method the Study of Grammar is wholly excluded, as being antagonistic to the Natural Process. By THOMAS PRENDERQAST. 12mo. Meadows' S French-English and English-French Dictionary. Revised and enlarged edition. 12mo. Monsanto, H. M. Manual of Commercial Correspondence in French. Motteau, Achille. Petits Causeries ; or, Elementary English and French Conversations, for Young Students and Home-Teaching, to which are added Models of Juvenile Correspondence, in French and English. Illustrated. 12mo. Noel & Chapsal's Exercices Fran9ais. Paris edition. 16mo. Corrige des Exercices Frangais. Paris edition. 16mo. Nouveail Testament. Par J. F. OSTERYALD. 32mo. Oehlschlaeger. See AHN. Ollendorff's New Method of Learning French. Edited by J. L. JEWETT. 12mo. Method of Learning French. By V. VALUE. 12mo. Key to each volume. First Lessons in French. By G. W. GREENE. 18 mo! Companion in French Grammar. By G. W. GREENE. 12mo. Picciola. By X.-B. SAINTINE. An entirely new edition, from new- stereotype plates. 12mo. Prendergast, See MASTERY SERIES. Racine Theatre complet. Large 12mo. Roemer's First French Reader. 12mo. ' Second French Reader. 12mo. Polyglot Reader (in French). 12mo. Key to the same (in English). Rowan's Modern French Reader. 12mo. Sardoil, Alfred. French Language Self-Taught. Simonn6's Treatise on French Verbs. 12rao. YB 01239 STANDARD FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. I I Spiers & Surenne's Complete French-and-Euglish and English and- French Dictionary. With Pronunciation, etc. One large 8vo vol., of 1,490 pages. Standard Pronouncing Dictionary of the French and English Lan- guages. (School edition.) Containing 973 pages. 12mo. New and large type. Souvestre. Un Philosophe sous les Toits. 12mo. Surenne's French-and-English Dictionary. 16mo. 568 pages. French Manual and Traveler's Companion. 16mo. Voltaire'a Hiat*i^ de Charles XII. Par SURENNE. 18mo. Winl Man Prac The 884191 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY fur ouiiuuis, aim lor Tourists, containing: j. Une hundred and eighteen Conversations, progressively arranged, embracing and elucidating the whole Mechanism of the Language ; 2. Rules and Models for the correct Use of all French Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections; 3. All Idioms used in Polite Society, embodied in Sentences, with English Version ; 4. Models of Notes, Bills of Exchange, etc. According to the last edition (1877) of the Dictionary of the French Academy. By ALFRED SARDOU. One vol., 12mo, 469 pages. D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, New York, Boston, Chicago, and San Francisco.